Hp 3Par F200 9 6Tb 16 600Gb 15K Hdd Field Starter Kit Command Reference Guide Line Interface

Hp-3Par-T400-Configuration-Base-Command-Reference-Guide-156365 hp-3par-t400-configuration-base-command-reference-guide-156365

Hp-3Par-Storeserv-7450-2-Node-Base-Command-Reference-Guide-156343 hp-3par-storeserv-7450-2-node-base-command-reference-guide-156343

Hp-3Par-Storeserv-7200-2-Node-Storage-Base-Command-Reference-Guide-156325 hp-3par-storeserv-7200-2-node-storage-base-command-reference-guide-156325

Hp-3Par-Storeserv-7200-16Gb-Virtualization-Base-System-San-Kit-Command-Reference-Guide-156323 hp-3par-storeserv-7200-16gb-virtualization-base-system-san-kit-command-reference-guide-156323

Hp-3Par-Storeserv-10400-16Gb-Control-32Gb-Data-Cache-Iec-Rack-Config-Base-Command-Reference-Guide-156293 hp-3par-storeserv-10400-16gb-control-32gb-data-cache-iec-rack-config-base-command-reference-guide-156293

2015-01-05

: Hp Hp-3Par-F200-9-6Tb-16-600Gb-15K-Hdd-Field-Starter-Kit-Command-Reference-Guide-156262 hp-3par-f200-9-6tb-16-600gb-15k-hdd-field-starter-kit-command-reference-guide-156262 hp pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 676 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

HP 3PAR Command Line Interface Reference
HP 3PAR OS 3.1.2
Abstract
This reference describes the HP 3PAR Command Line Interface (CLI) commands that are used to administer and maintain the
HP 3PAR storage system.
HP Part Number: QL226-97016
Published: June 2013
© Copyright 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
Confidential computer software. Valid license from HP required for possession, use or copying. Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, Commercial
Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S. Government under
vendor's standard commercial license.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Acknowledgments
Microsoft® and Windows ® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe® and Acrobat® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are owned by their respective owners.
Contents
1 CLI Command Syntax and Conventions.......................................................11
Syntax and Conventions..........................................................................................................11
Syntax Rules...........................................................................................................................11
Glob-Style Pattern...................................................................................................................12
Numbering Formats................................................................................................................13
Object Sets............................................................................................................................13
Regular Expressions Patterns.....................................................................................................13
Provisioning...........................................................................................................................14
VV Name Patterns..................................................................................................................15
Filename Conventions for Windows®........................................................................................16
Typical Command Layout in this Book........................................................................................16
Global Options and Environment Variables................................................................................17
Exit Status..............................................................................................................................17
2 Commands Quick Reference......................................................................18
Adaptive Optimization (AO) Commands....................................................................................18
Control Commands.................................................................................................................18
Disk Enclosure Management Commands...................................................................................19
Drive Cage Management....................................................................................................19
Physical Disk Management..................................................................................................19
Domain Management Commands............................................................................................19
Health and Alert Management Commands................................................................................20
Alerts...............................................................................................................................20
Alert Severity Levels.......................................................................................................20
Events..............................................................................................................................21
System Health...................................................................................................................21
Help and Utility Commands.....................................................................................................21
Task Management Commands.................................................................................................21
LDAP Management Commands................................................................................................22
Licensing Management Commands...........................................................................................22
Node Subsystem Management Commands................................................................................22
Firmware Versions..............................................................................................................22
Node Date Information.......................................................................................................23
Controller Node Properties..................................................................................................23
Controller Node EEPROM Log.............................................................................................23
Array and Controller Node Information.................................................................................23
Network Interface Configuration..........................................................................................24
Port Information.................................................................................................................24
Battery Management..........................................................................................................25
System Manager................................................................................................................25
Node Rescue.....................................................................................................................25
Performance Management Commands......................................................................................25
Chunklet Statistics..............................................................................................................25
Data Cache Memory Statistics.............................................................................................26
Node CPU Statistics...........................................................................................................26
Logical Disk Statistics..........................................................................................................26
Link Statistics.....................................................................................................................26
Physical Disk Statistics........................................................................................................26
Port Statistics.....................................................................................................................26
System Tuner.....................................................................................................................27
Dynamic Optimization........................................................................................................27
Virtual LUN (Export) Statistics...............................................................................................27
Contents 3
Virtual Volume Statistics......................................................................................................27
Remote Copy Volume Statistics.............................................................................................28
Preserved Data Commands......................................................................................................28
Replication Commands............................................................................................................28
Physical Copy...................................................................................................................28
Remote Copy....................................................................................................................28
Virtual Copy......................................................................................................................30
Service Commands.................................................................................................................30
Disk Enclosure...................................................................................................................30
Node...............................................................................................................................31
General System Maintenance..............................................................................................31
QoS Commands................................................................................................................31
System Upgrade................................................................................................................32
SNMP Agent Commands.........................................................................................................32
System Reporter Commands.....................................................................................................33
CIM Server Commands...........................................................................................................34
Sparing Commands................................................................................................................34
SSH Access Commands...........................................................................................................35
Task Schedule Commands.......................................................................................................35
User Management Commands.................................................................................................36
Volume Management Commands.............................................................................................37
Common Provisioning Group Management...........................................................................37
Host Management.............................................................................................................37
Logical Disk Management...................................................................................................38
Space and Storage Management.........................................................................................38
Template Management.......................................................................................................39
Virtual Volume Management...............................................................................................39
Virtual LUN (Export) Management........................................................................................41
Web Services API (WSAPI) Commands......................................................................................41
3 Add Command........................................................................................42
addsnmpmgr.........................................................................................................................42
4 Admit Commands.....................................................................................44
admithw................................................................................................................................44
admitpd................................................................................................................................46
admitrcopylink.......................................................................................................................48
admitrcopytarget....................................................................................................................50
admitrcopyvv.........................................................................................................................51
admitvv.................................................................................................................................54
5 Cancel Command....................................................................................55
canceltask.............................................................................................................................55
6 Change Command...................................................................................56
changedomain.......................................................................................................................56
7 Check Commands....................................................................................57
checkhealth...........................................................................................................................57
checkld.................................................................................................................................59
checkpassword.......................................................................................................................61
checkpd................................................................................................................................63
checkport..............................................................................................................................65
checkrclink ............................................................................................................................67
checksnmp.............................................................................................................................70
checkvv.................................................................................................................................71
4 Contents
8 CLI Command..........................................................................................72
cli.........................................................................................................................................72
9 Compact Commands................................................................................75
compactcpg...........................................................................................................................75
compactld.............................................................................................................................77
10 Control Commands.................................................................................79
controlencryption....................................................................................................................79
controliscsiport.......................................................................................................................81
controlmag............................................................................................................................83
controlpd...............................................................................................................................85
controlport.............................................................................................................................87
11 Create Commands..................................................................................95
createald...............................................................................................................................95
createaldvv............................................................................................................................99
createaocfg.........................................................................................................................105
createavv............................................................................................................................107
createcpg............................................................................................................................110
createdomain.......................................................................................................................115
createdomainset...................................................................................................................116
creategroupsv......................................................................................................................117
creategroupvvcopy...............................................................................................................119
createhost............................................................................................................................121
createhostset........................................................................................................................123
createld...............................................................................................................................125
creatercopygroup.................................................................................................................127
creatercopytarget..................................................................................................................129
createsched.........................................................................................................................131
createsnmpuser....................................................................................................................134
createspare..........................................................................................................................135
createsv...............................................................................................................................137
createtemplate.....................................................................................................................139
createtpvv............................................................................................................................145
createuser............................................................................................................................149
createvlun............................................................................................................................151
createvv..............................................................................................................................154
createvvcopy........................................................................................................................158
createvvset...........................................................................................................................162
12 Dismiss Commands...............................................................................164
dismisspd............................................................................................................................164
dismissrcopylink...................................................................................................................165
dismissrcopytarget................................................................................................................167
dismissrcopyvv.....................................................................................................................168
13 Free Command.....................................................................................170
freespace............................................................................................................................170
14 Grow Commands.................................................................................171
growaldvv...........................................................................................................................171
growavv..............................................................................................................................176
growtpvv.............................................................................................................................178
growvv................................................................................................................................179
15 Hist Commands....................................................................................180
histch..................................................................................................................................180
Contents 5
histld...................................................................................................................................183
histpd.................................................................................................................................186
histport................................................................................................................................191
histrcvv................................................................................................................................194
histvlun...............................................................................................................................197
histvv..................................................................................................................................201
16 Import Command..................................................................................204
importvv..............................................................................................................................204
17 Locate Commands................................................................................206
locatecage..........................................................................................................................206
locatenode..........................................................................................................................208
locatesys.............................................................................................................................209
18 Move Commands.................................................................................210
movech...............................................................................................................................210
movechtospare.....................................................................................................................213
movepd...............................................................................................................................215
movepdtospare....................................................................................................................217
moverelocpd........................................................................................................................219
movetodomain.....................................................................................................................223
19 Promote Commands..............................................................................225
promotesv............................................................................................................................225
promotevvcopy.....................................................................................................................227
20 Remove Commands..............................................................................228
removealert..........................................................................................................................228
removeaocfg........................................................................................................................230
removecpg..........................................................................................................................231
removedomain.....................................................................................................................233
removedomainset.................................................................................................................234
removehost..........................................................................................................................235
removehostset.......................................................................................................................237
removeld.............................................................................................................................238
removercopygroup................................................................................................................240
removercopytarget................................................................................................................242
removesched........................................................................................................................243
removesnmpmgr...................................................................................................................244
removesnmppw....................................................................................................................246
removesnmpuser...................................................................................................................247
removespare........................................................................................................................248
removesshkey.......................................................................................................................250
removetask..........................................................................................................................251
removetemplate....................................................................................................................253
removeuser..........................................................................................................................254
removeuserconn...................................................................................................................255
removevlun..........................................................................................................................256
removevv.............................................................................................................................258
removevvset.........................................................................................................................260
21 Service Commands...............................................................................261
servicecage.........................................................................................................................261
servicehost...........................................................................................................................263
servicemag..........................................................................................................................265
servicenode.........................................................................................................................269
6 Contents
22 Set Commands.....................................................................................271
setalert................................................................................................................................271
setaocfg..............................................................................................................................272
setauthparam.......................................................................................................................274
setbattery............................................................................................................................278
setcage...............................................................................................................................280
setcim.................................................................................................................................282
setclienv..............................................................................................................................284
setcpg.................................................................................................................................286
setdate................................................................................................................................291
setdomain...........................................................................................................................293
setdomainset........................................................................................................................295
sethost.................................................................................................................................296
sethostset.............................................................................................................................299
setlicense.............................................................................................................................300
setnet..................................................................................................................................302
setnode...............................................................................................................................306
setntp..................................................................................................................................308
setpassword.........................................................................................................................309
setpd..................................................................................................................................311
setqos.................................................................................................................................312
setrcopygroup......................................................................................................................314
setrcopytarget......................................................................................................................319
setsched..............................................................................................................................322
setsnmpmgr.........................................................................................................................324
setsnmppw..........................................................................................................................326
setsnmpuser.........................................................................................................................328
setsshkey.............................................................................................................................329
setstatch..............................................................................................................................331
setstatpdch..........................................................................................................................332
setsys..................................................................................................................................333
setsysmgr.............................................................................................................................336
settask.................................................................................................................................338
settemplate..........................................................................................................................339
setuser................................................................................................................................341
setuseracl............................................................................................................................342
setvv...................................................................................................................................344
setvvset...............................................................................................................................348
setwsapi..............................................................................................................................349
23 Show Commands.................................................................................350
showalert............................................................................................................................350
showaocfg...........................................................................................................................352
showauthparam....................................................................................................................353
showbattery.........................................................................................................................354
showblock...........................................................................................................................358
showcage............................................................................................................................361
showcim..............................................................................................................................365
showclienv...........................................................................................................................367
showcpg.............................................................................................................................368
showdate............................................................................................................................373
showdomain........................................................................................................................374
showdomainset....................................................................................................................376
showeeprom........................................................................................................................378
showeventlog.......................................................................................................................381
Contents 7
showfirmwaredb...................................................................................................................384
showhost.............................................................................................................................386
showhostset.........................................................................................................................389
showinventory......................................................................................................................391
showiscsisession...................................................................................................................392
showld................................................................................................................................394
showldch.............................................................................................................................400
showldmap..........................................................................................................................404
showlicense.........................................................................................................................405
shownet..............................................................................................................................407
shownode............................................................................................................................409
shownodeenv.......................................................................................................................417
showpatch...........................................................................................................................419
showpd...............................................................................................................................420
showpdata..........................................................................................................................431
showpdch............................................................................................................................432
showpdvv............................................................................................................................437
showport.............................................................................................................................440
showportarp........................................................................................................................449
showportdev........................................................................................................................450
showportisns........................................................................................................................453
showportlesb.......................................................................................................................454
showqos..............................................................................................................................458
showrcopy...........................................................................................................................460
showrctransport....................................................................................................................464
showrole.............................................................................................................................467
showrsv...............................................................................................................................469
showsched...........................................................................................................................471
showsnmpmgr......................................................................................................................473
showsnmppw.......................................................................................................................474
showsnmpuser......................................................................................................................475
showspace..........................................................................................................................476
showspare...........................................................................................................................479
showsshkey..........................................................................................................................481
showsys...............................................................................................................................482
showsysmgr.........................................................................................................................486
showtarget...........................................................................................................................488
showtask.............................................................................................................................490
showtemplate.......................................................................................................................494
showtoc..............................................................................................................................495
showtocgen.........................................................................................................................496
showuser.............................................................................................................................497
showuseracl.........................................................................................................................499
showuserconn......................................................................................................................500
showversion.........................................................................................................................502
showvlun.............................................................................................................................503
showvv................................................................................................................................506
showvvcpg..........................................................................................................................519
showvvmap.........................................................................................................................521
showvvpd............................................................................................................................523
showvvset............................................................................................................................527
showwsapi..........................................................................................................................529
24 Shutdown Commands...........................................................................530
shutdownnode......................................................................................................................530
8 Contents
shutdownsys.........................................................................................................................533
25 System Reporter (SR) commands ............................................................535
sraomoves...........................................................................................................................535
srcpgspace..........................................................................................................................537
srhistld................................................................................................................................539
srhistpd...............................................................................................................................542
srhistport.............................................................................................................................545
srhistvlun.............................................................................................................................548
srldspace.............................................................................................................................551
srpdspace...........................................................................................................................554
srrgiodensity........................................................................................................................556
srstatcmp.............................................................................................................................558
srstatcpu..............................................................................................................................560
srstatld................................................................................................................................562
srstalink...............................................................................................................................564
srstatpd...............................................................................................................................566
srstatport.............................................................................................................................568
srstatqos..............................................................................................................................570
srstatvlun.............................................................................................................................572
srvvspace............................................................................................................................574
26 Start Commands...................................................................................577
startao................................................................................................................................577
startcim...............................................................................................................................579
startld.................................................................................................................................580
startnoderescue....................................................................................................................581
startrcopy............................................................................................................................582
startrcopygroup....................................................................................................................583
starttask..............................................................................................................................585
startvv.................................................................................................................................586
startwsapi............................................................................................................................587
27 Stat Commands....................................................................................588
statch..................................................................................................................................588
statcmp...............................................................................................................................592
statcpu................................................................................................................................594
statfcoe ..............................................................................................................................596
statiscsi...............................................................................................................................598
statiscsisession......................................................................................................................600
statld..................................................................................................................................602
statlink................................................................................................................................606
statpd.................................................................................................................................607
statport...............................................................................................................................612
statqos................................................................................................................................616
statrcopy.............................................................................................................................619
statrcvv................................................................................................................................621
statvlun...............................................................................................................................625
statvv..................................................................................................................................629
28 Stop Commands...................................................................................633
stopcim...............................................................................................................................633
stoprcopy............................................................................................................................634
stoprcopygroup....................................................................................................................636
stopwsapi............................................................................................................................638
Contents 9
29 Sync Command....................................................................................639
syncrcopy............................................................................................................................640
30 Tune Commands..................................................................................642
tunealdvv............................................................................................................................642
tunepd................................................................................................................................647
tunesys................................................................................................................................651
tunetpvv..............................................................................................................................654
tunevv.................................................................................................................................656
31 Update Commands...............................................................................658
updatesnapspace.................................................................................................................658
updatevv.............................................................................................................................660
32 Upgrade Commands.............................................................................662
upgradecage.......................................................................................................................662
upgradepd..........................................................................................................................664
33 Wait Command...................................................................................665
waittask..............................................................................................................................665
34 Support and Other Resources.................................................................666
Contacting HP......................................................................................................................666
HP 3PAR documentation........................................................................................................666
Typographic conventions.......................................................................................................669
HP 3PAR branding information...............................................................................................669
35 Documentation feedback.......................................................................670
Index.......................................................................................................671
10 Contents
1 CLI Command Syntax and Conventions
This chapter describes the command syntax for the HP 3PAR OS CLI commands listed in this
reference. General control commands that do not follow the syntax rules are also listed as well
as glob-style patterns.
Syntax and Conventions
Most CLI commands use the following syntax.
[cmd [subcmd] [options [arg]]... [<spec>...] [<pattern>...]
Table 1 (page 11) Lists all syntax elements and provides their meanings:
Table 1 CLI Command Syntax
MeaningElement
Specifies an operation to be executed, such as create,
move, or show .
cmd
Specifies a subcommand. Subcommands specify actions
for commands to be executed.
subcmd
Indicates an optional command line element such as histch
–rw .
options
Indicates a specific variable of an option or subcommand.
The argument is often used to identify a specific node,
volume, or disk.
arg
Indicates a specifier used with a required command line
element such as the command or option.
spec
Specifies that only one of the command specifiers or options
separated by this character can be specified at a time.
|
Indicates grouped elements. Do not type the braces; type
only the information inside the braces.
{}
Indicates optional elements. Do not type the brackets; type
only the information inside the brackets.
[ ]
Indicates user-supplied input.< >
Indicates that a specifier or an option can be used more
than once in a command.
...
Syntax Rules
The command syntax in the table above obeys the following rules:
•All command line elements are in lowercase letters, except where indicated in this reference.
•Subcommands immediately follow the commands they modify.
•Options, as indicated in this guide, are indicated by one or more letters, are preceded by a
hyphen, and are enclosed in brackets (for example: removealert [–a]).
•Options follow subcommands on the command line and precede any specifier.
Syntax and Conventions 11
•An argument must directly follow the option or subcommand it is modifying and is required
on the command line, unless otherwise specified (for example: removealert –i
<alert_ID>).
•Multiple options and arguments on a command line are separated with a space.
•Specifiers follow options.
•User supplied input is identified by angled brackets (< >).
•Unless noted otherwise, valid character formats include alphanumeric characters, periods,
dashes, and underscores. In general, the following length limits are enforced by the HP 3PAR
OS CLI:
◦virtual volume name ≤ 31 characters
◦Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volume (TPVV) name ≤ 31 characters
◦virtual copy names ≤ 31 characters
◦logical disk name ≤ 31 characters
◦host name ≤ 31 characters
◦Common Provisioning Group (CPG) name ≤ 31 characters
◦template name ≤ 31 characters
◦domain name ≤ 31 characters
◦snapshot name ≤ 31 characters
◦user name ≤ 31 characters
◦system name ≤ 31 characters
Glob-Style Pattern
Several of the commands in this reference allow a pattern to be specified to refine the output of
the commands. The patterns are used to match against a string. Strings are typically names such
as host or virtual volume names. For example, in the showhost host_name|pattern...
command, a pattern can be specified to refine the command output for a string of host names
matching the specified pattern.
The pattern specifier, as used in the CLI commands, is specified in the form of a glob-style pattern.
Glob-style matching in the CLI is implemented by Tcl. A glob-style pattern consists of the symbols
in the following table.
Explanation of ActionSymbol
Matches any sequence of characters in a string, including
a null string.
*
Matches any single character in a string.?
Matches any character in the set given by chars. A range
of chars can be specified using a dash (–). For example,
[a–z] represents all the ASCII characters from a through z.
[chars]
Matches the single character x.\x
12 CLI Command Syntax and Conventions
The following actions are practical examples of the glob-style pattern in use:
Explanation of ActionExample
Shows all names.*
Matches all names beginning with the letter a.[a]*
Matches any character a-z in the first character position
and "x" in the second position, followed by any character
"*".
[a–z]x*
NOTE: Brackets ([ ]) are significant in Tcl and must be escaped using a backslash (\) or enclosed
in braces ({ }). Other characters such as star (*) are significant in most shells and must be escaped
or quoted if running CLI commands from the shell.
Numbering Formats
# clihelp sub,number
sub,number - explain the use of number format in commands.
Integer values may be specified in following formats in CLI commands:
•decimal - decimal is base-10 number system and uses the digits 0 to 9.
•octal - octal is base-8 number system. It uses the digits 0 to 7. The first character of the operand
is 0 (For example: 010).
•hexadecimal - hexadecimal is base-16 number system. It uses 0-9 to represent values zero to
nine, and a, A, b, B, c, C, d, D, e, E, f, F to represent values ten to fifteen. The first two
characters of the operand are Ox or OX (For example: Ox100).
Object Sets
# clihelp sub,objectsets
sub,objectsets - Using object sets with commands
Object sets provide a convenient method of grouping logically connected objects together. For
example all host members of an ESX cluster could be grouped together into an esxhosts host set,
while the common VVs exported to them might be in a esxexports VV set.
Sets are referred to in commands with the set: prefix. For example, to export the esxexports VV
set to the esxhosts host set you could do: createvlun set:esxexports 1
set:esxhostswhich would export the VVs sequentially from LUN 1 onward to the hosts in the
esxhosts set. Any hosts that were later added to the host set would also automatically be able to
see these VVs.
As well as support for host and VV sets the system currently supports domain sets. Only a host is
able to be a member of a domain set, which allows it to have VVs from all domains that are a
member of the domain set exported to it. This allows VVs under separate administrative control to
all be centrally backed up, for example.
Set members are ordered according to when they were added. This affects vv set exports and
when they are used for createvvcopy.
Not all commands support object sets in their parameters; those that do indicate that they will take
a set parameter in the command description. Examples of commands with set support are:
createhost, createvlun, createsv, createvvcopy, movetodomain, removevlun.
Regular Expressions Patterns
Patterns are specified as regular expressions. The clihelp -sub regexpat command describes
regular expressions in further detail:
Numbering Formats 13
sub,regexpat - Using regular expression (regex) pattern matching
Regular expression patterns are used to match against strings. In the CLI the strings are usually
descriptive text such as help text or event message strings. See the Tcl re_syntax documentation
for detailed help; this help text is only a summary.
Regular expressions are one or more branches separated by |, matching any string that matches
any of the branches.
A branch is zero or more quantified atoms concatenated, and it matches a match for the first
quantified atom, followed by a match of the second quantified atom and so on. An empty branch
matches an empty string.
A quantified atom is an atom followed by an optional quantifier.
Quantifiers are:
* 0 or more matches of the atom
+ 1 or more matches of the atom
? exactly one match of the atom
{m} exactly m matches of the atom
{m,} m or more matches of the atom
{m,n} m through n (inclusive) matches of the atom
*? +? ?? {m}? {m,}? {m,n}?
Match the same possibilities as above but prefer the smallest number instead of the largest
number of matches.
m and n are unsigned decimal integers from 0 through 255 inclusive.
Atoms are:
(re) Where re is any regexp, matches a match for re
() Matches an empty string
[chars] A bracket expression, usually matches a single character
in the list, or if the list begins with ^ matches a single
character not in the list. The chars may be a range specified,
for example, as a-z, or 0-9.
See detailed Tcl re_syntax help on bracket expressions.
. Matches any single character.
\k Matches the non-alphanumeric character k.
\c If c is alphanumeric, matches an escape (see Tcl re_syntax help)
{ When followed by a character other than a digit, matches {,
otherwise it is a quantifier as described above.
x Without any other significance, matches the character x.
Note that [ and ] are significant in Tcl and must be escaped using \ or enclosed in {}. Other
characters, such as *, are significant in most shells and must be escaped or quoted if running CLI
commands from another shell.
Provisioning
# clihelp sub,provisioning
sub,provisioning - explain how the virtual volume is provisioned
Each virtual volume has the user space and snapshot space. The user space of the volume can be
provisioned from a CPG. The snapshot space of the volume can also be allocated from a CPG.
For a virtual volume with user space that is provisioned from a CPG, "createvv", "growvv", and
"tunevv" commands should be used to create, grow, and tune the volume.
14 CLI Command Syntax and Conventions
For a virtual volume with user space that is not provisioned from a CPG, "createaldvv", "growaldvv",
and "tunealdvv" commands should be used instead.
To determine whether or not the user space of the virtual volume is provisioned from a CPG, use
the "showvv -cpgalloc" command.
The following table displays the type of the virtual volume (It is the "Type" column of "showvv"
output) and its corresponding CLI commands for creating, growing, and tuning:
From a CPGNot from a CPGNoSnapshot Space
User Space
Base, cpvv
— createaldvvUser
Space
Base
— createaldvvUser
Space
Base
— createaldvv
- growaldvv
Full Provisioned,
not from a CPG
- growaldvv- growaldvv
- tunealdvv
- tunealdvv- tunealdvv
Base, cpvv
— creatvv
Base
— creatvv
Base
— creatvv
Full Provisioned,
from a CPG
- growvv- growvv- growvv
- tunevv- tunevv- tunevv
Base, tpvv
— creatpvv, creatvv
N/AN/AThin Provision
- growpvv, growvv
- tunepvv, tunevv
VV Name Patterns
# clihelp sub,vvnamepat
sub,vvnamepat - patterns supported for VV names
Some commands allow the use of VV name patterns to indicate the destination virtual volume
name(s) for the command. These patterns are expanded based upon information such as the source
virtual volume, allowing a single pattern string to represent a group of different VVs. The following
patterns are supported:
•@count@ - The current count of VVs created.
•@vvname@ - The name of the current volume being snapshot.
In addition the following date/time related patterns are supported where it makes sense (not when
the destination should already exist, but when we are creating a new volume):
•@a@ - Abbreviated weekday name (Mon, Tue, etc.).
•@A@ - Full weekday name (Monday, Tuesday, etc.).
•@b@ - Abbreviated month name (Jan, Feb, etc.).
•@B@ - Full month name.
•@C@ - First two digits of the four-digit year (19 or 20).
•@d@ - Day of month (01 - 31).
•@e@ - Day of month (1 - 31), no leading zeros.
•@g@ - The ISO8601 year number corresponding to the ISO8601 week (%V), expressed as a
two-digit year-of-the-century, with leading zero if necessary.
VV Name Patterns 15
•@G@ - The ISO8601 year number corresponding to the ISO8601 week (%V), expressed as
a four-digit number.
•@h@ - Abbreviated month name.
•@H@ - Hour in 24-hour format (00 - 23).
•@I@ - Hour in 12-hour format (01 - 12).
•@j@ - Day of year (001 - 366).
•@k@ - Hour in 24-hour format, without leading zeros (0 - 23)..
•@l@ - Hour in 12-hour format, without leading zeros (1 - 12).
•@m@ - Month number (01 - 12).
•@M@ - Minute (00 - 59).
•@p@ - AM/PM indicator.
•@s@ - Count of seconds since the epoch, expressed as a decimal integer.
•@S@ - Seconds (00 - 59).
•@u@ - Weekday number (Monday = 1, Sunday = 7).
•@U@ - Week of year (00 - 52), Sunday is the first day of the week.
•@V@ - Week of year according to ISO-8601 rules. Week 1 of a given year is the week
containing 4 January.
•@w@ - Weekday number (Sunday = 0, Saturday = 6).
•@W@ - Week of year (00 - 52), Monday is the first day of the week.
•@y@ - Year without century (00 - 99)
•@Y@ - Year with century (e.g. 1990)
•@Z@ - Time zone name.
Filename Conventions for Windows®
If a filename with an absolute or relative path is typed on the command line, there are no problems
with backslashes: cli -pwf C:\password\system1 ...
If a filename is entered for a command using the CLI shell, a Tcl application, then each backslash
must be doubled:
cli% setpassword -saveonly -file C:\\password\\system1\\browse_user1
If using the Windows® shell prompt, use:
C:\Users\w_user> setpassword -saveonly -file
C:\password\system1\browse_user1
Typical Command Layout in this Book
Typical CLI reference pages are formatted similarly as the examples that follow:
COMMAND NAME
The section heading includes the name of the CLI command.
DESCRIPTION
This section describes the use or purpose of the command.
16 CLI Command Syntax and Conventions
AUTHORITY
This section defines the user access required within the HP 3PAR Storage System to use the
command.
SUBCOMMANDS
This section indicates any necessary subcommands required to complete the use of the command.
SYNTAX
See Section (page 11).
OPTIONS
This section lists the available options you can use in conjunction with the command for varied
results. Some options and their specifiers are required, as indicated in the syntax, whereas some
are provided to increase the level and functionality of your output.
SPECIFIERS
Specifies a suggested input required by the user.
RESTRICTIONS
This section includes any restrictions that must be followed in order to achieve maximum results.
EXAMPLES
This section lists sample output with results similar to what you should expect when running the
command and it’s available options.
NOTES
Any pertinent information about the command that might help increase understanding and reliability
is often provided in the Notes section.
Global Options and Environment Variables
Several options and environment variables are available at the global level. For complete information
about these, refer to the HP 3PAR OS CLI Administrator’s Manual.
Exit Status
Except where noted, the following codes are returned indicating success or failure for each individual
command:
•0indicates that the command was successful.
•1indicates that the command failed.
Note that these exit status codes only indicate the execution status of the command itself. The results
of individual CLI commands should be determined from the command output. For example, if you
issue the addsnmpmgr command with an invalid IP address, the command output returns Invalid
IP address and an SNMP manager is not added; however, the exit status is 0(successful)
because the command itself was successfully executed, even though the intended result of the
command (adding an SNMP manager) was not achieved.
Global Options and Environment Variables 17
2 Commands Quick Reference
The HP 3PAR Command Line Interface provides a host of commands allowing you to administer
your HP 3PAR storage system. To facilitate your navigation through this manual, this section provides
an overview of the commands grouped by functionality.
Adaptive Optimization (AO) Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“createaocfg” (page 105)Super, EditCreates an AO
configuration.
createaocfg
“removeaocfg” (page 230)Super, EditRemoves specified AO
configurations from the
system.
removeaocfg
“setaocfg” (page 272)Super, EditUpdates an AO
configuration.
setaocfg
“showaocfg” (page 352)Any role in the system.Shows AO configurations in
the system.
showaocfg
Control Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“controlencryption”
(page 79)
Super
Any role granted to the
encryption_control
right
Controls data encryption.controlencryption
Super, Service (for status
subcommand only)
Any role granted to the
encryption_status right
18 Commands Quick Reference
Disk Enclosure Management Commands
Drive Cage Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“locatecage” (page 206)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
cage_locate right.
Locates a particular drive
cage.
locatecage
“setcage” (page 280)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
cage_set right.
Sets parameters for a drive
cage.
setcage
“showcage” (page 361)Any role in the system.Displays drive cage
information.
showcage
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Physical Disk Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“admitpd” (page 46)Super, Service 1
Admits one or all physical
disks to enable their use.
admitpd
Any role granted the
pd_admit right.
“checkpd” (page 63)Super, Service1
Executes surface scans on
physical disks.
checkpd
Any role granted the
pd_check right.
“controlpd” (page 85)Super, Service 1
Any role granted the
pd_control right.
Spins physical disks up or
down.
controlpd
“dismisspd” (page 164)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
pd_dismiss right.
Dismisses one or more
physical disks from use.
dismisspd
“setpd” (page 311)Super, Service1
Marks physical disks as
allocatable for logical disks.
setpd
“showpd” (page 420)Any role in the system.Displays physical disks in the
system.
showpd
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Domain Management Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“changedomain” (page 56)Any role in the system.Changes the currentdomain
CLI environment parameter.
changedomain
“createdomain” (page 115)Super1
Shows a list of domains on
the system.
createdomain
Any role granted the
domain_create right.
Disk Enclosure Management Commands 19
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“createdomainset”
(page 116)
Super
Any role granted the
domainset_create right.
Defines a new set of
domains and provides the
option of assigning one or
more domains to that set.
createdomainset
“movetodomain” (page 223)Super, Edit1
Any role granted the
domain_moveto right.
Moves objects from one
domain to another.
movetodomain
“removedomain” (page 233)Super, Edit1
Removes an existing domain
from the system.
removedomain
“removedomainset”
(page 234)
Super, Edit
Any role granted the
domainset_remove right.
Removes a domain set or
removes domains from an
existing set.
removedomainset
“setdomain” (page 293)Super1
Any role granted the
domain_set right.
Sets the parameters and
modifies the properties of a
domain.
setdomain
“setdomainset” (page 295)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
domainset_set right.
Sets the parameters and
modifies the properties of a
domain set.
setdomainset
“showdomain” (page 374)Any role in the system.Displays the list of domains
on a system.
showdomain
“showdomainset” (page 376)Any role in the system.Displays the domain sets
defined on the HP 3PAR
showdomainset
Storage System and their
members.
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Health and Alert Management Commands
Alerts
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“removealert” (page 228)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
alert_remove right.
Removes one or more alerts.removealert
“setalert” (page 271)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
alert_set right.
Sets the status of system
alerts.
setalert
“showalert” (page 350)Any role in the system.Displays system alerts.showalert
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Alert Severity Levels
Table 2 Alert Severity Levels
DescriptionSeverity
A fatal event has occurred. It is no longer possible to take remedial action.Fatal
The event is critical and requires immediate action.Critical
The event requires immediate action.Major
20 Commands Quick Reference
Table 2 Alert Severity Levels (continued)
DescriptionSeverity
An event has occurred that requires action, but the situation is not yet serious.Minor
An aspect of performance or availability may have become degraded. You must decide if action
is necessary.
Degraded
The event is informational. No action is required other than acknowledging or removing the alert.Informational
Events
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“showeventlog” (page 381)Any role in the system.Displays event logs.showeventlog
System Health
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“checkhealth” (page 57)Super, Service
Any role granted the
health_check right.
Displays the status of the
system hardware and
software components.
checkhealth
Help and Utility Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“CLI Command” (page 72)Super, Edit, Browse, ServiceProvides a means to set up
your CLI session or to enter
directly into a CLI shell.
cli
Super, Edit, Browse, ServiceLists all commands or details
for a specified command.
clihelp
Super, Edit, Browse, ServicePages the output of
commands.
cmore
Super, Edit, Browse, ServiceLists all commands or details
for a specified command.
help
“setclienv” (page 284)Super, Service, Edit, Browse
Any role granted the
clienv_set right.
Sets the CLI environment
parameters.
setclienv
“showclienv” (page 367)Any role in the system.Displays the CLI environment
parameters.
showclienv
Task Management Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“canceltask” (page 55)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
task_cancel right.
Cancels one or more tasks.canceltask
“removetask” (page 251)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
task_remove right.
Removes information about
one or more tasks and their
details.
removetask
Help and Utility Commands 21
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“settask” (page 338)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
task_set right.
Sets the priority on a
specified task.
settask
“showtask” (page 490)Any role in the system.Displays information about
tasks.
showtask
“starttask” (page 585)Super, Service
Edit Any role granted the
task_start right.
Executes commands with
long running times.
starttask
“waittask” (page 665)Super, Service, Edit, Browse
Any role granted the
task_wait right.
Asks the CLI to wait for a
task to complete before
proceeding.
waittask
LDAP Management Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setauthparam” (page 274)Super
Any role granted the
authparam_set right.
Sets the authentication
parameters.
setauthparam
“showauthparam” (page 353)Any role in the system.Shows authentication
parameters and integrates
showauthparam
the authentication and
authorization features using
LDAP.
“checkpassword” (page 61)Super, Edit, Browse, Service
Any role granted the
password_checkany right
Supports authentication and
authorization using LDAP.
checkpassword
can check the password of
any user. Any role granted
the password_checkown
right can only check their
own password.
Licensing Management Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setlicense” (page 300)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
license_set right.
Sets the license key.setlicense
“showlicense” (page 405)Any role in the system.Displays the installed license
info or key.
showlicense
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Node Subsystem Management Commands
Firmware Versions
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“showfirmwaredb”
(page 384)
Any role in the system.Displays a current database
of firmware levels.
showfirmwaredb
22 Commands Quick Reference
Node Date Information
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setdate” (page 291)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
date_set right.
Sets the system time and
date on all nodes.
setdate
“showdate” (page 373)Any role in the system.Displays the date and time
on all system nodes.
showdate
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Controller Node Properties
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setnode” (page 306)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
node_set right.
Sets the properties of the
node components such as
the serial number of the
power supply.
setnode
“shownode” (page 409)Any role in the system.Displays an overview of the
node specific properties.
shownode
“shownodeenv” (page 417)Any role in the system.Displays the node’s
environmental status.
shownodeenv
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Controller Node EEPROM Log
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“showeeprom” (page 378)Any role in the system.Displays node EEPROM
information.
showeeprom
Array and Controller Node Information
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“locatenode” (page 208)Super, Service1
Locates a particular node
component by blinking LEDs
on the node.
locatenode
Any role granted the
node_locate right.
“locatesys” (page 209)Super, Service1
Locates a system by blinking
its LEDs.
locatesys
Any role granted the
sys_locate right.
“setsys” (page 333)Super, Service1
Enables you to set
system-wide parameters such
as the raw space alert.
setsys
Any role granted the
sys_set right.
“showsys” (page 482)Any role in the system.Displays the HP 3PAR
Storage System properties,
showsys
including system name,
model, serial number, and
system capacity.
Node Subsystem Management Commands 23
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Network Interface Configuration
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setnet” (page 302)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
net_set right.
Sets the administration
network interface
configuration.
setnet
“setntp” (page 308)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
ntp_set right.
Sets the NTP server to which
the HP 3PAR Storage System
synchronizes.
setntp
“shownet” (page 407)Any role in the system.Displays the network
configuration and status.
shownet
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Port Information
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“checkport” (page 65)Super, Service1
Performs a loopback test on
Fibre Channel ports.
checkport
Any role granted the
port_check right.
“controlport” (page 87)Super, Service1
Controls Fibre Channel or
Remote Copy ports.
controlport
Any role granted the
port_control right.
port_control
“controliscsiport” (page 81)Super, Edit1
Used to set up the
parameters and
controliscsiport
Any role granted the
port_control right.
characteristics of an iSCSI
port.
“showiscsisession”
(page 392)
Any role in the system.Shows the iSCSI active
sessions per port.
showiscsisession
“showport” (page 440)Any role in the system.Displays system port
information.
showport
“showportarp” (page 449)Any role in the system.Shows the ARP table for
iSCSI ports in the system.
showportarp
“showportdev” (page 450)Any role in the system.Displays detailed
information about devices
on a Fibre Channel port.
showportdev
“showportisns” (page 453)Any role in the system.Show iSNS host information
for iSCSI ports in the system.
showportisns
“showportlesb” (page 454)Any role in the system.Displays Link Error Status
Block information about
showportlesb
devices on a Fibre Channel
port.
“showtarget” (page 488)Any role in the system.Displays unrecognized
targets.
showtarget
“statfcoe ” (page 596)Any role in the system.Shows Fibre Channel over
Ethernet information.
statfcoe
24 Commands Quick Reference
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“statiscsi” (page 598)Any role in the system.Displays the iSCSI statistics.statiscsi
“statiscsisession” (page 600)Any role in the system.Displays the iSCSI session
statistics.
statiscsisession
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Battery Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setbattery” (page 278)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
battery_set right.
Sets battery properties.setbattery
“showbattery” (page 354)Any role in the system.Displays battery status
information.
showbattery
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
System Manager
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setsysmgr” (page 336)Super1
Sets the system manager
startup state.
setsysmgr
Any role granted the
sysmgr_set right.
“showsysmgr” (page 486)Any role in the system.Displays the system manager
startup state.
showsysmgr
“showtoc” (page 495)Any role in the system.Displays the system table of
contents summary.
showtoc
“showtocgen” (page 496)Any role in the system.Displays the system table of
contents generation number.
showtocgen
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Node Rescue
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“startnoderescue” (page 581)Super, ServiceInitiates a node rescue,
which initializes the internal
startnoderescue
node disk of the specified
node to match the contents
of the other node disks.
Performance Management Commands
Chunklet Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“histch” (page 180)Any role in the system.Displays histogram data for
individual chunklets.
histch
“setstatch” (page 331)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
statch_set right.
Sets statistics collection
mode on chunklets.
setstatch
Performance Management Commands 25
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setstatpdch” (page 332)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
statpdch_set right.
Sets statistics collection
mode on physical disk
chunklets.
setstatpdch
“statch” (page 588)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for
individual chunklets.
statch
Data Cache Memory Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“statcmp” (page 592)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for cache
memory pages.
statcmp
Node CPU Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“statcpu” (page 594)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for CPU
use.
statcpu
Logical Disk Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“histld” (page 183)Any role in the system.Displays histogram data for
logical disks.
histld
“statld” (page 602)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for logical
disks.
statld
Link Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“statlink” (page 606)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for links.statlink
Physical Disk Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“histpd” (page 186)Any role in the system.Displays histogram data for
physical disks.
histpd
“statpd” (page 607)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for
physical disks.
statpd
Port Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“histport” (page 191)Any role in the system.Displays histogram data for
Fibre Channel ports.
histport
“statport” (page 612)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for Fibre
Channel ports.
statport
26 Commands Quick Reference
System Tuner
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“tunepd” (page 647)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
pd_tune right.
Displays physical disks with
high service times and
optionally performs load
balancing.
tunepd
“tunesys” (page 651)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
sys_tune right.
Analyzes disk usage and
adjusts resources.
tunesys
Dynamic Optimization
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“tunealdvv” (page 642)Super, Edit1
Any role granted the
vv_tune right.
Allows the RAID and
Availability characteristics
of an existing Thin
Provisioned Virtual Volume
to be dynamically modified.
See the HP 3PAR Command
Line Interface Administrator’s
Manual for a complete
discussion of HP 3PAR
System Tuner Software and
the use of the tunealdvv
command.
tunealdvv
“tunetpvv” (page 654)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
vv_tune right.
Changes the layout of a
Thinly Provisioned Virtual
Volume (TPVV).
tunetpvv
“tunevv” (page 656)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
vv_tune right.
Changes the layout of a
virtual volume.
tunevv
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Virtual LUN (Export) Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“histvlun” (page 197)Any role in the system.Displays histogram data for
VLUNs.
histvlun
“statvlun” (page 625)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for VLUNs.statvlun
Virtual Volume Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“histvv” (page 201)Any role in the system.Displays histogram data for
virtual volumes.
histvv
“statvv” (page 629)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for virtual
volumes.
statvv
Performance Management Commands 27
Remote Copy Volume Statistics
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“histrcvv” (page 194)Any role in the system.Displays histogram data for
Remote Copy volumes.
histrcvv
“statrcvv” (page 621)Any role in the system.Displays statistics for Remote
Copy volumes.
statrcvv
Preserved Data Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“showpdata” (page 431)Any role in the system.Displays preserved data
status.
showpdata
Replication Commands
Physical Copy
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“creategroupvvcopy”
(page 119)
Super, Edit
Any role granted the
groupvvcopy_create
right.
Creates consistent group
physical copies of a list of
virtual volumes.
creategroupvvcopy
“createvvcopy” (page 158)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
vvcopy_create right.
Copies a virtual volume.createvvcopy
“promotevvcopy” (page 227)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
vvcopy_promote right.
Promotes a physical copy
back to a base volume.
promotevvcopy
Remote Copy
NOTE: Functionality of HP 3PAR Remote Copy requires an HP 3PAR Remote Copy license. See
the HP 3PAR StoreServ Storage Concepts Guide for additional information.
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“admitrcopylink” (page 48)Super, EditAdmits a network link for
Remote Copy use.
admitrcopylink
Any role granted the
rcopylink_admit right.
“admitrcopytarget”
(page 50)
Super, Edit
Any role granted the
rcopytarget_admit
right.
Adds a target to a Remote
Copy volume group
admitrcopytarget
“admitrcopyvv” (page 51)Super, EditAdmits a virtual volume to a
Remote Copy volume group.
admitrcopyvv
Any role granted the
rcopyvv_admit right.
“checkrclink ” (page 67)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
rclink_check right.
Performs a latency and
throughput test between two
connected HP 3PAR Storage
Systems.
checkrclink
28 Commands Quick Reference
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“creatercopygroup”
(page 127)
Super, Edit
Any role granted the
rcopygroup_create
right.
Creates a group for Remote
Copy.
creatercopygroup
“creatercopytarget”
(page 129)
Super, Edit1
Any role granted the
rcopytarget_create
right.
Creates a target for Remote
Copy.
creatercopytarget
“dismissrcopylink” (page 165)Super, Edit1Any role
granted the
Dismisses a network link
from Remote Copy use.
dismissrcopylink
rcopylink_dismiss
right.
“dismissrcopytarget”
(page 167)
Super, Edit
Any role granted the
rcopytarget_dismiss
right.
Dismisses a Remote Copy
target from a Remote Copy
volume group.
dismissrcopytarget
“dismissrcopyvv” (page 168)Super, EditDismisses a virtual volume
from a Remote Copy volume
group.
dismissrcopyvv
Any role granted the
rcopyvv_dismiss right.
“removercopygroup”
(page 240)
Super, Edit Any role granted
the rcopygroup_remove
right.
Removes a group used for
Remote Copy.
removercopygroup
“removercopytarget”
(page 242)
Super, Edit1
Any role granted the
rcopytarget_remove
right.
Removes a target used for
Remote Copy.
removercopytarget
“setrcopygroup” (page 314)Super, EditSets the volume group’s
policy for dealing with I/O
setrcopygroup
Any role granted the
rcopygroup_set right.
failure and error handling,
or switches the direction of
a volume group.
“setrcopytarget” (page 319)Super, Edit1
Sets the Remote Copy target
state.
setrcopytarget
Any role granted the
rcopytarget_set right.
“showrcopy” (page 460)Any role in the system.Displays the details of a
Remote Copy configuration.
showrcopy
“showrctransport” (page 464)Any role in the system.Shows status and
information about end-to-end
showrctransport
transport for Remote Copy
in the system.
“startrcopy” (page 582)Super, Edit1
Starts a Remote Copy
subsystem.
startrcopy
Any role granted the
rcopy_start right.
“startrcopygroup” (page 583)Super, EditStarts a Remote Copy
volume group.
startrcopygroup
Any role granted the
rcopygroup_start right.
“statrcopy” (page 619)Any role in the system.Displays Remote Copy
statistics.
statrcopy
Replication Commands 29
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“stoprcopy” (page 634)Super, Edit1
Stops a Remote Copy
subsystem.
stoprcopy
Any role granted the
rcopy_stop right.
“stoprcopygroup” (page 636)Super, EditStops a Remote Copy
volume group.
stoprcopygroup
Any role granted the
rcopygroup_stop right.
“syncrcopy” (page 640)Super, EditSynchronizes Remote Copy
volume groups.
syncrcopy
Any role granted the
rcopy_sync right.
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Virtual Copy
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“createsv” (page 137)Super, EditCreates snapshot volumes.createsv
Any role granted the
sv_create right.
“creategroupsv” (page 117)Super, EditCreates consistent group
snapshots of a list of virtual
volumes.
creategroupsv
Any role granted the
groupsv_create right.
“promotesv” (page 225)Super, EditCopies the differences of a
virtual copy back to its base
volume.
promotesv
Any role granted the
sv_promote right.
“updatevv” (page 660)Super, EditUpdates a snapshot virtual
volume with a new snapshot.
updatevv
Any role granted the
vv_update right.
Service Commands
Disk Enclosure
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“admithw” (page 44)Super, Service1
Admits new hardware into
the system.
admithw
“controlmag” (page 83)Super, Service1
Takes drives or magazines
on or off loop.
controlmag
Any role granted the
mag_control right.
“servicecage” (page 261)Super, Service1
Prepares a drive cage for
service.
servicecage
Any role granted the
cage_service right.
“servicehost” (page 263)Super, Service1Any role
granted the host_service
right.
Prepares a port for host
attachment.
servicehost
“servicemag” (page 265)Super, Service1
Prepares a drive magazine
for service.
servicemag
30 Commands Quick Reference
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
Any role granted the
mag_service right.
“upgradecage” (page 662)Super, Service1
Upgrades drive cage
firmware.
upgradecage
Any role granted the
cage_upgrade right.
“upgradepd” (page 664)Super, Service1
Upgrades disk firmware.upgradepd
Any role granted the
pd_upgrade right.
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Node
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“servicenode” (page 269)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
node_service right.
Prepares a node for service.servicenode
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
General System Maintenance
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“shutdownnode” (page 530)Super, Service1Any role
granted the
node_shutdown right.
Shuts down an individual
system node.
shutdownnode
“shutdownsys” (page 533)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
sys_shutdown right.
Shuts down the entire
system.
shutdownsys
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
QoS Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setqos” (page 312)Super, EditCreates and updates QoS
rules in a system.
setqos
Any role granted the
qos_set right can set QoS
configurations.
“showqos” (page 458)Any role in the system.Lists the QoS rules
configured in a system.
showqos
“statqos” (page 616)Any role in the system.Displays historical
performance data reports for
QoS rules
statqos
Service Commands 31
System Upgrade
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“showpatch” (page 419)Any role in the system.Displays patches applied to
a system.
showpatch
“showversion” (page 502)Any role in the system.Displays software versions.showversion
SNMP Agent Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“addsnmpmgr” (page 42)Super1
Adds an SNMP manager to
receive trap notifications.
addsnmpmgr
Any role granted the
snmpmgr_ad right.
“checksnmp” (page 70)Super, Service
Any role granted the
snmp_check right
Allows a user to send an
SNMPv2 test trap to the list
of managers
checksnmp
“removesnmpmgr”
(page 244)
Super1
Any role granted the
snmpmgr_remove right.
Removes an SNMP trap
manager.
removesnmpmgr
“removesnmppw” (page 246)Super1
Any role granted the
snmppw_remove right.
Removes an SNMP
password.
removesnmppw
“removesnmpuser”
(page 247)
Super, Service, Edit, Browse
Any role granted the
snmpuser_remove right.
Removes an SNMP user.removesnmpuser
“setsnmppw” (page 326)Super1
Any role granted the
snmppw_set right.
Allows users to update
SNMP passwords.
setsnmppw
“setsnmpmgr” (page 324)Super1
Any role granted the
snmpmgr_set right.
Changes an SNMP
manager's properties.
setsnmpmgr
“setsnmpuser” (page 328)Super, Service, Edit, Browse
Any role granted the
snmpuser_set right.
Sets the SNMPv3 user secret
key used for generating
authentication and privacy
keys.
setsnmpuser
“showsnmpmgr” (page 473)Any role in the system.Displays SNMP trap
managers.
showsnmpmgr
“showsnmppw” (page 474)Any role in the system.Displays SNMP access
passwords.
showsnmppw
“showsnmpuser” (page 475)Any role in the system.Displays information about
SNMP users.
showsnmpuser
32 Commands Quick Reference
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
System Reporter Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“sraomoves” (page 535)Any role in the system.Shows the space that
Adaptive Optimization (AO)
has moved between tiers.
sraomoves
“srcpgspace” (page 537)Any role in the system.Displays historical space
data reports for common
provisioning groups (CPGs).
srcpgspace
“srhistld” (page 539)Any role in the system.Displays historical histogram
performance data reports for
logical disks.
srhistld
“srhistpd” (page 542)Any role in the system.Displays historical histogram
data reports for physical
disks.
srhistpd
“srhistport” (page 545)Any role in the system.Displays historical histogram
performance data reports for
ports.
srhistport
“srhistvlun” (page 548)Any role in the system.Displays historical histogram
performance data reports for
VLUNs.
srhistvlun
“srldspace” (page 551)Any role in the system.Displays historical space
data reports for logical disks
(LDs).
srldspace
“srpdspace” (page 554)Any role in the system.Displays historical space
data reports for physical
disks (PDs).
srpdspace
“srrgiodensity” (page 556)Any role in the system.Shows the distribution of
IOP/s intensity for Logical
srrgiodensity
Disk (LD) regions for a
common provisioning group
(CPG) or Adaptive
Optimization (AO)
configuration.
“srstatcmp” (page 558)Any role in the system.Displays historical
performance data reports for
cache memory.
srstatcmp
“srstatcpu” (page 560)Any role in the system.Displays historical
performance data reports for
CPUs.
srstatcpu
“srstatld” (page 562)Any role in the system.Displays historical
performance data reports for
logical disks.
srstatld
“srstalink” (page 564)Any role in the system.Displays historical
performance data reports for
srstatlink
links (internode, PCI and
cache memory).
“srstatpd” (page 566)Any role in the system.Displays historical
performance data reports for
physical disks.
srstatpd
System Reporter Commands 33
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“srstatport” (page 568)Any role in the system.Displays historical
performance data reports for
ports.
srstatport
“srstatqos” (page 570)Any role in the system.Displays historical
performance data reports for
QoS rules.
srstatqos
“srstatvlun” (page 572)Any role in the system.Displays historical
performance data reports for
VLUNs.
srstatvlun
“srvvspace” (page 574)Any role in the system.Displays historical space
data reports for virtual
volumes (VVs).
srvvspace
CIM Server Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setcim” (page 282)Super, Service1
Sets the properties of the
CIM server, including
setcim
Any role granted the
cim_set right.
options to enable or disable
the SLP, HTTP and HTTPS
ports for the CIM server.
“showcim” (page 365)Any role in the system.Displays the CIM server
setting information and
status.
showcim
“startcim” (page 579)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
cim_start right.
Starts the CIM server to
service CIM requests.
startcim
“stopcim” (page 633)Super, Service1
Any role granted the
cim_stop right.
Stops the CIM server from
servicing CIM requests.
stopcim
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Sparing Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“createspare” (page 135)Super, Service1
Creates spare chunklets.createspare
Any role granted the
spare_create right.
“movech” (page 210)Super, Service, Edit1
Moves specified chunklets.movech
Any role granted the
ch_move right.
“movechtospare” (page 213)Super, Service, Edit1
Moves specified chunklets to
spare.
movechtospare
Any role granted the
ch_movetospare right.
“movepd” (page 215)Super, Service, EditMoves data from specified
Physical Disks (PDs) to a
movepd
Any role granted the
pd_move right.
temporary location selected
by the system.
34 Commands Quick Reference
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“movepdtospare” (page 217)Super, Service, Edit1
Moves specified physical
disks to spare.
movepdtospare
Any role granted the
pd_movetospare right.
“moverelocpd” (page 219)Super, Service1
Moves chunklets relocated
from a physical disk to
another physical disk.
moverelocpd
Any role granted the
pd_movereloc right.
“removespare” (page 248)Edit, Service1
Removes spare chunklets.removespare
Any role granted the
spare_remove right.
“showspare” (page 479)Any role in the system.Displays information about
spare and relocated
chunklets.
showspare
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SSH Access Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setsshkey” (page 329)Super, Service, Edit, Browse
Any role granted the
sshkey_set right.
Sets the SSH public key for
users enabling login without
a password.
setsshkey
“showsshkey” (page 481)Any role in the system.Displays all SSH public keys
that have been set with
setshhkey.
showsshkey
“removesshkey” (page 250)Super, Service, Edit, Browse
Any role granted the
sshkey_remove right.
Removes a user’s SSH public
key.
removesshkey
Task Schedule Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“createsched” (page 131)Super, Service
Any role granted the
sched_createright.
Allows users to schedule
tasks that are periodically
run by the scheduler.
createsched
“removesched” (page 243)Super, Service
Any role granted the
sched_remove right.
Removes a scheduled task
from the system.
removesched
“setsched” (page 322)Super, Service
Any role granted the
sched_set right.
Allows users to suspend,
pause, change the schedule,
change the parameters, and
change the name of
currently scheduled tasks.
setsched
“showsched” (page 471)Super, Service
Any extended role in the
system.
Displays the state of tasks
currently scheduled on the
system.
showsched
SSH Access Commands 35
User Management Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“createuser” (page 149)Super1
Creates user accounts.createuser
Any role granted the
user_create right.
“removeuser” (page 254)Super1
Removes user accounts.removeuser
Any role granted the
user_remove right.
“removeuserconn” (page 255)Super1
Removes user connections.removeuserconn
Any role granted the
userconn_remove right.
“setpassword” (page 309)Super, Edit, Service,
Browse2
Changes your password.setpassword
Any role granted the
password_setany right
can set any user password.
Any role granted the
password_setown right
can only set their own
password.
“setuser” (page 341)Super, Edit, Browse
Any role granted the
user_setany right can
Sets your user properties.setuser
add, remove, and set default
domains for any user.
Any role granted the
user_setown right can
only set their own default
domain.
“setuseracl” (page 342)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
useracl_set right.
Sets your Access Control List
(ACL).
setuseracl
“showuser” (page 497)Any role in the system.Displays user accounts.showuser
“showuseracl” (page 499)Any role in the system.Displays your access control
list (ACL).
showuseracl
“showuserconn” (page 500)Any role in the system.Displays user connections.showuserconn
“showrole” (page 467)Any role in the system.Displays information about
rights assigned to roles in
the system.
showrole
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
2Only the Super User can edit other user’s passwords.
36 Commands Quick Reference
Volume Management Commands
Common Provisioning Group Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“compactcpg” (page 75)Super, EditConsolidates logical disk
space in a CPG into as few
compactcpg
Any role granted the
cpg_compact right.
logical disks as possible,
allowing unused logical
disks to be removed.
“createcpg” (page 110)Super, Edit1
Creates a Common
Provisioning Group (CPG).
createcpg
Any role granted the
cpg_create right.
“removecpg” (page 231)Super, Edit1
Removes CPGs.removecpg
Any role granted the
cpg_remove right.
“setcpg” (page 286)Super, Edit1
Changes the properties
CPGs.
setcpg
Any role granted the
cpg_set right.
“showcpg” (page 368)Any role in the system.Displays CPGs.showcpg
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Host Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“createhost” (page 121)Super, Edit1
Creates host and host path
definitions.
createhost
Any role granted the
host_create right.
“createhostset” (page 123)Super, EditCreates a new set of hosts
and provides the option of
createhostset
Any role granted the
hostset_create right.
assigning one or more
existing hosts to that set.
“removehost” (page 235)Super, Edit1
Removes host definitions
from the system.
removehost
Any role granted the
host_remove right.
“removehostset” (page 237)Super, EditRemoves a host set or
removes hosts from an
existing set.
removehostset
Any role granted the
hostset_remove right.
“showhost” (page 386)Any role in the system.Displays defined hosts in the
system.
showhost
“showhostset” (page 389)Any role in the system.Displays the host sets
defined on the HP 3PAR
showhostset
Storage System and their
members.
Volume Management Commands 37
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“sethost” (page 296)Super, Edit1
Sets properties on existing
system hosts, including
sethost
Any role granted the
host_set right.
options to annotate a host
with descriptor information
such as physical location, IP
address, operating system,
model, and so on.
“sethostset” (page 299)Super, EditSets the parameters and
modifies the properties of a
host set.
sethostset
Any role granted the
hostset_set right.
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Logical Disk Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“checkld” (page 59)Super, Service1
Performs validity checks of
data on logical disks.
checkld
Any role granted the
ld_check right.
“compactld” (page 77)Super, EditConsolidates space on the
logical disks.
compactld
Any role granted the
ld_compact right.
“createald” (page 95)Super, Edit1
Automatically creates logical
disks.
createald
Any role granted the
ld_create right.
“createld” (page 125)Super, Edit1
Creates logical disks.createld
Any role granted the
ld_create right.
“removeld” (page 238)Super, Service, EditRemoves logical disks.removeld
Any role granted the
ld_remove right.
“showld” (page 394)Any role in the system.Displays logical disks.showld
“startld” (page 580)Super, Service1
Starts logical disks.startld
Any role granted the
ld_start right.
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Space and Storage Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“showblock” (page 358)Any role in the system.Displays block mapping
information for virtual
showblock
volumes, logical disks, and
physical disks.
“showldch” (page 400)Any role in the system.Displays logical disk to
physical disk chunklet
mapping.
showldch
“showldmap” (page 404)Any role in the system.Displays logical disk to
virtual volume mapping.
showldmap
38 Commands Quick Reference
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“showpdch” (page 432)Any role in the system.Displays the status of
selected chunklets of
physical disks.
showpdch
“showpdvv” (page 437)Any role in the system.Displays physical disk to
virtual volume mapping.
showpdvv
“showspace” (page 476)Any role in the system.Displays estimated free
space.
showspace
“showvvmap” (page 521)Any role in the system.Displays virtual volume to
logical disk mapping.
showvvmap
“showvvpd” (page 523)Any role in the system.Displays virtual volume
distribution across physical
disks.
showvvpd
Template Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“createtemplate” (page 139)Super1
Creates templates for the
creation of logical disks,
createtemplate
Any role granted the
template_create right.
virtual volumes, thinly
provisioned virtual volumes,
and common provisioning
groups.
“removetemplate” (page 253)Super1
Removes one or more
templates.
removetemplate
Any role granted the
template_remove right.
“settemplate” (page 339)Super1
Modifies template
properties.
settemplate
Any role granted the
template_set right.
“showtemplate” (page 494)Any role in the system.Displays existing templates.showtemplate
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Virtual Volume Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“admitvv” (page 54)Super Any role granted the
vv_admit right.
Creates and admits remotely
exported virtual volume
definitions to enable the
migration of these volumes.
admitvv
“checkvv” (page 71)Super, Service, Edit1
Performs validity checks of
virtual volume administrative
information.
checkvv
Any role granted the
vv_check right.
“createaldvv” (page 99)Super, Edit1
Automatically creates virtual
volumes and their underlying
logical disks.
createaldvv
Any role granted the
vv_create right.
“createavv” (page 107)Super, Edit1
Automatically creates virtual
volumes.
createavv
Any role granted the
vv_create right.
“createtpvv” (page 145)Super, EditCreates a TPVV.createtpvv
Volume Management Commands 39
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
Any role granted the
vv_create right.
“createvv” (page 154)Super, Edit1
Creates a virtual volume
from logical disks.
createvv
Any role granted the
vv_create right.
“createvvset” (page 162)Super, EditDefines a new set of virtual
volumes provides the option
createvvset
Any role granted the
vvset_create right.
of assigning one or more
existing virtual volumes to
that set.
“freespace” (page 170)Super, EditFrees SA and SD spaces
from a virtual volume if they
are not in use.
freespace
Any role granted the
space_free right.
“growaldvv” (page 171)Super, Edit1
Automatically increases the
size of a virtual volume and
its underlying logical disks.
growaldvv
Any role granted the
vv_grow right.
“growavv” (page 176)Super, Edit1
Automatically increases the
size of a virtual volume.
growavv
Any role granted the
vv_grow right.
“growtpvv” (page 178)Super, EditEnlarges a thin provisioning
virtual volume.
growtpvv
Any role granted the
vv_grow right.
“growvv” (page 179)Super, Edit1
Increases the size of a virtual
volume by adding logical
disks.
growvv
Any role granted the
vv_grow right.
“importvv” (page 204)Super, Service, EditMigrates data from a remote
LUN to the local HP 3PAR
Storage System.
importvv
Any role granted the
vv_import right.
“removevv” (page 258)Super, EditRemoves virtual volumes or
logical disks from common
provisioning groups.
removevv
Any role granted the
basevv_remove right can
remove base volumes.
Any role granted the
vvcopy_remove right can
remove physical volumes.
Any role granted the
sv_remove right can
remove virtual copies.
“removevvset” (page 260)Super, EditRemoves a virtual volume set
or virtual volumes from an
existing set.
removevvset
Any role granted the
vvset_remove right.
“setvv” (page 344)Super, EditModifies properties
associated with a virtual
volume.
setvv
Any role granted the
vv_set right.
“setvvset” (page 348)Super, EditSets the parameters and
modifies the properties of a
virtual volume set.
setvvset
Any role granted the
vvset_set right.
40 Commands Quick Reference
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“showrsv” (page 469)Any role in the system.Displays information about
reservation and registration
showrsv
of VLUNs connected on a
Fibre Channel port.
“showvv” (page 506)Any role in the system.Displays virtual volumes in
the system.
showvv
“showvvcpg” (page 519)Any role in the system.Displays the virtual volume
sets defined on the HP 3PAR
showvvcpg
Storage System and their
associated members.
“showvvset” (page 527)Any role in the system.Displays the virtual volume
sets defined on the HP 3PAR
showvvset
Storage System and their
members.
“startvv” (page 586)Super, Service1
Starts virtual volumes.startvv
Any role granted the
vv_start right.
“updatesnapspace”
(page 658)
Super, Edit
Any role granted the
snapspace_update right.
Starts a task to update the
actual snapshot space used
by a virtual volume.
updatesnapspace
1You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Virtual LUN (Export) Management
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“createvlun” (page 151)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
vlun_create right.
Creates a virtual volume as
a SCSI LUN.
createvlun
“removevlun” (page 256)Super, Edit
Any role granted the
vlun_remove right.
Removes VLUNs.removevlun
“showvlun” (page 503)Any role in the system.Displays VLUNs in the
system.
showvlun
Web Services API (WSAPI) Commands
For Details SeeAuthorityDescriptionCommand
“setwsapi” (page 349)Super, Service
Any role granted the
wsapi_set right.
Sets properties of the Web
Services API server.
setwsapi
“showwsapi” (page 529)Any role in the system.Displays the WSAPI server
service configuration state.
showwsapi
“startwsapi” (page 587)Super, Service
Any role granted the
wsapi_start right.
Starts the WSAPI server.startwsapi
“stopwsapi” (page 638)Super, Service
Any role granted the
wsapi_stop right.
Stops the WSAPI server.stopwsapi
Web Services API (WSAPI) Commands 41
3 Add Command
addsnmpmgr
DESCRIPTION
The addsnmpmgr command adds an SNMP manager to receive alert (traps) notifications.
WARNING! SNMP cannot be used in Common Criteria mode. It might compromise the security
of the storage system.
SYNTAX
addsnmpmgr [options <arg>] <manager_IP>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the snmpmgr_add right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–p <port_number>
Specifies the port number where the SNMP manager receives traps. This option is used if the port
number differs from the default of 162.
–pw <password>
Specifies the SNMP manager’s access community string (password), using up to 32 alphanumeric
characters. If unspecified, the agents send traps without an access password.
–r <retry>
Specifies the number of times to send a trap (<retry>) using an integer from 1through 15 if the
SNMP manager is not available. If not specified, the number of times a trap is sent defaults to 2.
-snmpuser <username>
Specifies the SNMPv3 user name using up to 31 characters. The user name must be enabled for
SNMPv3 with the createsnmpuser command.
–t <timeout>
Specifies the number of seconds to wait before sending a trap (timeout) using an integer from
1through 300. If not specified, the time defaults to 200 seconds.
-version
Integer value that specifies the SNMP version supported by the manager. Use "2" for SNMPv2 or
"3" for SNMPv3. The default is "2".
SPECIFIERS
<manager_IP>
Specifies the IP address of the host where the manager runs. It must be a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address.
The IPv6 address is in hexadecimal, is case insensitive, and is separated by colons. For example:
5de:2008:0:0abcd:0:0:161a
In addition, a double colon (::) can be used once in an address to replace multiple fields of zeros.
For example:
42 Add Command
5de:2008:0:0abcd::161a.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the addition of SNMP manager IPv4 address 123.45.67.89
with the assigned password of alpha1:
cli% addsnmpmgr –pw alpha1 123.45.67.89
The following example displays the addition of SNMP manager IPv6 address
5def:2008:abcd::161a with port number 9162:
cli% addsnmpmgr -p 9162 5def:2008:abcd::161a
NOTES
•The HP 3PAR storage system does not support any form of name resolution. You must specify
these IP addresses directly.
•Issue the showsnmpmgr command to display the list of registered SNMP managers.
•Issue the setsnmppw command to change the SNMP passwords.
•Issue the removesnmppw command to remove SNMP passwords.
•Issue the removesnmpmgr command to remove SNMP managers. See “removesnmpmgr”
(page 244) for additional information.
addsnmpmgr 43
4 Admit Commands
admithw
DESCRIPTION
The admithw command admits new hardware into the system.
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
admithw [options]
OPTIONS
–checkonly
Only performs passive checks; does not make any changes.
–f
If errors are encountered, the admithw command ignores them and continues. The messages remain
displayed.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a passive check of the system:
cli% admithw -checkonly
Checking nodes...
Checking volumes...
Checking system LDs...
Checking ports...
Checking state of disks...
Checking cabling...
Check complete.
NOTES
•The admithw command handles any nodes, disks, or cages that have been added into the
system.
•In addition to verifying that all expected hardware is present, the admithw command handles
all checks, including valid states, cabling, and firmware revisions.
44 Admit Commands
•The admithw command also handles creating system logical disks while adding and
rebalancing spare chunklets.
•Spares are allocated according to the algorithm specified by the Sparing Algorithm system
parameter.
admithw 45
admitpd
DESCRIPTION
The admitpd command creates and admits physical disk definitions to enable the use of those
disks.
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the pd_admit right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
admitpd [option] [<WWN>...]
OPTIONS
–nold
Do not use the physical disk (as identified by the WWN specifier) for logical disk allocation. See
“NOTES” for more information about the –nold option.
-f
Do not prompt for confirmation when attempting to admit disks from other systems.
SPECIFIERS
[<WWN>...]
Indicates the World-Wide Name (WWN) of the physical disk to be admitted. If WWNs are
specified, only the specified physical disk(s) are admitted. Otherwise, all available physical disks
are admitted.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•If multiple WWNs are specified and not all can be admitted, the admitpd command fails.
EXAMPLES
The following example admits physical disks in a 20-disk system:
cli% admitpd
20 disks admitted
NOTES
•Physical disks cannot be used by the HP 3PAR operating system for storage until they are
admitted into the system.
•Specify the –nold option when adding a physical disk to replace a failed disk, whose chunklets
were moved to spare space. Specifying –nold prevents the allocation of the newly added
physical disk and allows chunklets to be moved back to the new disk. After chunklets have
been moved back to the new disk, the administrator can allow logical disks to be allocated
again by issuing the setpd command.
46 Admit Commands
•Verify the admittance of physical disk definitions by issuing the showpd command. See
“showpd” (page 420).
•If no WWN is specified or if all the specified WWNs are admitted, the command succeeds.
If all the specified WWNs could not be admitted, the command fails.
admitpd 47
admitrcopylink
DESCRIPTION
The admitrcopylink command adds one or more links (connections) to a Remote Copy target
system.
SYNTAX
•For Remote Copy over IP (RCIP), the syntax for the admitrcopylink command is as follows:
admitrcopylink <target_name> <N:S:P:IP_address>...
•For Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC), the syntax for the admitrcopylink command
is as follows:
admitrcopylink <target_name> <N:S:P:WWN>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopylink_admit right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<target_name>
The target name, as specified with the creatercopytarget command.
<node:slot:port:IP_address>...
Specifies the node, slot, and port of the Ethernet port on the primary system and an IP address on
the target system.
<node:slot:port:WWN>...
Specifies the node, slot, and port of the Fibre Channel adaptor port on the primary system and a
World Wide Name (WWN) address on the target system.
RESTRICTIONS
Functionality of this command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your
local service provider for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example adds a link on System2 (<target_name>), using the node, slot, and
port information of node 1, slot 1, port 1of the Ethernet port on the primary system. The IP address
193.1.2.11 specifies the address on the target system:
cli% admitrcopylink System2 1:2:1:193.1.2.11
The following WWN creates an RCFC link to target System2, which connects to the local 5:3:2
(N:S:P) in the target system:
cli% admitrcopylink System2 FC 5:3:2:20010002AC000060
48 Admit Commands
NOTES
•The transport layer (RCIP or RCFC) is set using the creatercopytarget command.
•This command concludes by returning a list of one or more links to be admitted.
•For IP targets this list is made up of pairs composed of the node containing the Ethernet port
on the local system and an IP address of the peer port on the target system.
•For FC targets this list is made up of sets with the node, slot, and port of the FC port on the
local system and WWN of the peer port on the target system.
•The specifier <node:IP_address> has been deprecated.
admitrcopylink 49
admitrcopytarget
DESCRIPTION
The admitrcopytarget command adds a target to a Remote Copy volume group.
SYNTAX
admitrcopytarget <target_name> <mode> <group_name>
[<pri_VV_name>:<sec_VV_name>]...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopytarget_admit right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<target_name>
Specifies the name of the target that was previously created with the creatercopytarget
command.
<mode>
Specifies the mode of the target as either synchronous (sync) or asynchronous periodic (periodic).
<group_name>
Specifies the name of the existing Remote Copy volume group created with the creatercopygroup
command to which the target will be added.
[<pri_VV_name>:<sec_VV_name>]...
Specifies the mapping between the names of a volume in the primary group and the corresponding
volume on the added target. This specifier must be included for every volume in the primary volume
group. This specifier is not required only if the group contains no volumes.
RESTRICTIONS
Functionality of this command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy license. Contact your local
service provider for further information.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, the admitrcopytarget command adds the target target1 in
synchronous mode to volume group Group1.
cli% admitrcopytarget target1 sync Group1
NOTES
None.
50 Admit Commands
admitrcopyvv
DESCRIPTION
The admitrcopyvv command adds an existing virtual volume to an existing Remote Copy volume
group.
SYNTAX
admitrcopyvv [options] <VV_name>[:<snapname>] <group_name>
<target_name>:<sec_VV_name>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopyvv_admit right.
OPTIONS
-pat
Specifies that the <VV_name> is treated as a glob-style pattern and that all Remote Copy volumes
matching the specified pattern are admitted to the Remote Copy group. When this option is used,
the <sec_VV_name> and <snapname> (if specified) are also treated as patterns. It is required
that the secondary volume names and snapshot names can be derived from the local volume name
by adding a prefix, suffix, or both. <snapname> and <sec_VV_name> should take the form
prefix@vvname@suffix, where @vvname@ resolves to the name of each volume that matches the
<VV_name> pattern.
-createvv
Specifies that the secondary volumes should be created automatically.
-nosync
Specifies that the volume should skip the initial sync. This is for the admission of volumes that have
been pre-synced with the target volume. This specifier cannot be used when starting snapshots
(<VV_name>:<snapname>) are specified.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
Specifies the name of the existing virtual volume to be admitted to an existing Remote Copy volume
group that was created with the creatercopygroup command.
<snapname>
An optional read-only snapshot <snapname> can be specified along with the virtual volume name
<VV_name>. This snapshot is a starting snapshot. When the group is started, a full sync is not
performed. Instead, for synchronous groups, the volume will synchronize deltas between
<snapname> and the base volume. For asynchronous periodic groups, the volume will synchronize
deltas between <snapname> and a snapshot of the base.
<group_name>
Specifies the name of the existing Remote Copy volume group created with the creatercopygroup
command, to which the volume will be added.
<sec_vv_pattern>
Specifies the pattern that is used to create the secondary virtual volume on the target system.
<target_name>:<sec_VV_name>
admitrcopyvv 51
The target name associated with this group, as set with the creatercopygroup command. The
target is created with the creatercopytarget command. <sec_VV_name> specifies the name
of the secondary volume on the target system. One <target_name>:<sec_VV_name> must be
specified for each target of the group.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. If this specifier is not used, the <VV_name> specifier must be used.
For more information, issue: clihelp sub,globpat
RESTRICTIONS
Functionality of this command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy license. Contact your local
service provider for more information.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, the admitrcopyvv command adds the volume vv1 to the primary
volume group Group1. At the same time, it adds the secondary volume vv1_remote on the target
system System2 to the corresponding secondary volume group (Group1.r<sys_ID>), which
was previously created when the creatercopygroup command was issued
cli% admitrcopyvv vv1 Group1 System2:vv1_remote
In the following example, the admitrcopyvv command adds all volumes beginning with tpvv
to the primary volume group Group1. At the same time, it adds the secondary volumes, which are
named the same as the primary virtual volumes (as specified by @vvname@), on the target system
System2 to the corresponding secondary volume group (Group1.r<sys_ID>).
cli% admitrcopyvv -pat tpvv* Group1 InServ2:@vvname@
In the following example, the admitrcopyvv command adds the volume vv1 to the primary
volume group Group1. At the same time, it creates and adds the volume vv1.r on the target
system InServ1 in to the corresponding secondary volume group that was previously created
when the creatercopygroup command was issued:
cli% admitrcopyvv -createvv vv1 group1 InServ1_in:vv1.r
In the following example, the admitrcopyvv command adds the volume vv1 to the primary
volume group Group1. At the same time, it adds the volume vv1.r on the target system
InServ1_in to the corresponding secondary volume group that was previously created when
the creatercopygroup command was issued. It also specifies that the volume should not undergo
an initial synchronization when the group is started:
cli% admitrcopyvv -nosync vv1 Group1 InServ1_in:vv1.r
In the following example, the admitrcopyvv command adds the volume vv1 to the primary
volume group Group1. At the same time, it adds the volume vv1.r on the target system
InServ1_in to the corresponding secondary volume group that was previously created when
the creatercopygroup command was issued. It also specifies that the volume should be synced
using rosv_vv1 as the starting snapshot:
cli% admitrcopyvv vv1:rosv_vv1 Group1 InServ1_in:vv1.r
52 Admit Commands
In the following example, the admitrcopyvv command adds all the volumes that start with the
name testvv to the primary volume group Group1. At the same time, it adds all the volume
testvv*.r on the target system InServ1_in to the corresponding secondary volume group
that was previously created when the creatercopygroup command was issued. It also specifies
that each volume should be synchronized using rosv_testvv* as the starting snapshot:
cli% admitrcopyvv -pat testvv*:rosv_@vvname@ Group1 InServ1_in:@vvname@.r
NOTES
•A secondary volume mapping must be provided for each target in the group.
•The virtual volume and the Remote Copy group must be in the same domain or both in no
domain.
•The -nosync option will skip the full synchronization of this volume after the Remote Copy
group is started. On the primary system, the showrcopy SyncStatus will appear as
New-PreSynced. On the secondary system, the SyncStatus will appear as New.
•When a starting snapshot is specified, any deltas between the specified snapshot and the
point when the group is started will be resynced. This is done instead of a full synchronization.
On the primary system the showrcopy SyncStatus will appear as New-SyncFromSnap.
On the secondary system the SyncStatus will appear as New.
•If the -nosync option is not used and a starting snapshot is not specified, the volume will
undergo a full synchronization when the group is started. The showrcopy SyncStatus
will appear as New on both primary and secondary systems.
•If a group’s target has the mirror_config policy set and the group is a primary group,
then this command is mirrored to that target and the volume is added to the secondary volume
group. If the policy is set and the group is a secondary, this command fails.
•For multiple target Remote Copy groups, in addition to adding the primary/secondary mapping
on the target systems, the relevant mapping between the target systems will be added to the
backup groups.
admitrcopyvv 53
admitvv
DESCRIPTION
The admitvv command creates and admits remotely exported virtual volume definitions to enable
the migration of these volumes. The newly created volume will have the WWN of the underlying
remote volume.
SYNTAX
admitvv [-domain <domain>] <vvname>:<WWN> [<vvname>:<WWN> ...]
admitvv [-domain <domain>] <vvname>:<WWN>:<New WWN> [<vvname:<WWN>:<New
WWN>] ...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vv_admit right.
OPTIONS
-domain <domain>
Creates the admitted volume in the specified domain. The default is to create it in the current domain
or no domain if the current domain is not set.
SPECIFIERS
<vvname>
Specifies the local name of the volume to be admitted (up to 31 characters in length).
<WWN>
Specifies the World Wide Name (WWN) of the remote volumes to be admitted.
<New WWN>
Specifies the World Wide Name (WWN) for the local copy of the remote volume. If the keyword
auto is specified, the system automatically generates a WWN for the virtual volume.
RESTRICTIONS
Functionality of this command requires the Peer Motion license. Contact your local service provider
for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example admits two remote VVs that have been exported to the HP 3PAR storage
system in preparation for migration:
cli% admitvv migvv.0:50002AC00037001A migvv.1:50002AC00047001A
2 VVs admitted
NOTES
•You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
•The volume admitted using this command can be exported to hosts but all data access to the
volume will be directed to the external LUN.
•The volume admitted using this command can be imported by the HP 3PAR Storage System
using the importvv command.
54 Admit Commands
5 Cancel Command
canceltask
DESCRIPTION
The canceltask command cancels one or more tasks.
SYNTAX
canceltask [option] {all|<task_ID>...}
AUTHORITY
•Service, Super, Edit
•Any role granted the task_cancel right.
OPTIONS
–f
Forces the command. The command completes the process without prompting for confirmation.
SPECIFIERS
all
Cancels all active tasks. If not specified, a task ID(s) must be specified.
<task_ID>...
Cancels only tasks identified by their task IDs. The <task_ID> must be an unsigned integer from
1 through 9999. If not specified, all tasks are cancelled.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to cancel a task using the task ID:
cli% canceltask 1
Are you sure you want to cancel task 1?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
NOTES
•See the HP 3PAR OS CLI Administrator’s Manual for additional information and examples
regarding task management and task management commands.
•The canceltask command can return before a cancellation is completed. As a result,
resources reserved for a task might not be immediately available. This can prevent actions
like restarting the canceled task. Use the waittask command to ensure orderly completion
of the cancellation before taking other actions. See “waittask” (page 665) for details.
•The tunevv restart command enables you to resume a canceled tunevv task. See
“tunevv” (page 656) for more information.
•A Service user is only allowed to cancel tasks started by that specific user.
canceltask 55
6 Change Command
changedomain
DESCRIPTION
The changedomain command changes the currentdomain CLI environment parameter.
SYNTAX
changedomain [<domain>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<domain>
Name of the domain to be set as the working domain for the current CLI session. If the <domain>
parameter is not present or is equal to -unset, then the working domain is set to no current
domain.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to change the current domain Win:
cli% changedomain Win
The following examples shows two methods to unset the current domain:
cli% changedomain -unset
cli% changedomain
NOTES
This command is equivalent to the setclienv currentdomain <domain> command.
56 Change Command
7 Check Commands
checkhealth
DESCRIPTION
The checkhealth command checks the status of system hardware and software components,
and reports any issues.
NOTE: For information about system alerts, go to http://www.hp.com/support/hpgt/3par and
select your server platform.
SYNTAX
checkhealth [<options> | <component>]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the health_check right.
OPTIONS
-lite
Will perform a minimal health check.
–list
Will list all components that will be checked.
–quiet
Will not display which component is currently being checked.
–detail
Will display detailed information regarding the status of the system.
SPECIFIERS
<component>
Indicates the component to check. Use -list option to get the list of components.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays as sample output of the checkhealth command:
cli% checkhealth
Checking alert
Checking cage
Checking date
Checking ld
Checking license
Checking network
Checking node
Checking pd
Checking pdch
Checking port
checkhealth 57
Checking rc
Checking snmp
Checking task
Checking vlun
Checking vv
Component ------------Description------------ Qty
Alert New alerts 6
Cage Cages not on current firmware 2
Date Date is not the same on all nodes 1
LD LDs not mapped to a volume 3
License Golden License. 1
PD PDs that are degraded or failed 2
pdch LDs with chunklets on a remote disk 5
vlun Hosts not connected to a port 3
vlun Paths not reported by host agent 2
NOTES
None.
58 Check Commands
checkld
DESCRIPTION
The checkld command executes consistency checks of data on logical disks in the event of an
uncontrolled system shutdown and optionally repairs inconsistent logical disks.
SYNTAX
checkld [options] <LD_name>...
Any role granted the ld_check right
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the ld_check right
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–y|–n
Specifies that if errors are found they are either modified so they are valid (-y) or left unmodified
(-n). If not specified, errors are left unmodified (–n).
-p
Poll sysmgr to get ldck results.
-recover <pdid:pdch>
Attempt to recover the chunklet specified by giving physical disk (<pdid>) and the chunklet's
position on that disk (<pdch>). If this option is specified, -y must be specified as well.
-rs <raidset_number>
Check only the specified RAID set.
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>...
Requests that the integrity of a specified logical disk is checked. This specifier can be repeated to
execute validity checks on multiple logical disks.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•The checkld command should not be issued for logical disks that have been started because
it can return incorrect mismatches.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a validity check of logical disk vv63.admn.0:
cli% checkld –n vv63.adm.0
Performing a consistency check only (no repairs)
Working on ld vv63.adm.0 (955)
compare:/dev/tpddev/pd/33 0x2180000 with:/dev/tpddev/pd/11 0x2180000 1 of 1
Logical disk vv63.adm.0 Check completed, logical disk consistent
checkld 59
The following example attempts to recover chunklet 1032:10 of logical disk vv.adm.0, and there
will be output about the progress:
cli% checkld -y -p -recover 1032:10 vv.adm.0
NOTES
•Repairing logical disks refers to making logical disks consistent.
•Consistency for RAID-1 means that all mirrors in the set have the same data.
•Consistency for RAID-5 or RAID-6 means that parity is consistent with the data in the set.
•The checkld –ncommand can be issued at any time as it reads only from the logical disk.
If this command is issued for a started logical disk, false negative errors can be reported
because of the contents of the physical disks changing during I/O and the difference in mirror
update time.
•The checkld –ycommand can only be issued when the logical disk is in the not started
state.
60 Check Commands
checkpassword
DESCRIPTION
The checkpassword command prompts for the <user>'s password and then displays the steps
the system uses to authenticate the user and determine the user's access to the system. The
information includes whether the user is local to the system or authenticated and authorized based
on the configuration parameters set with setauthparam command for use with LDAP.
SYNTAX
checkpassword [<user>]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit, Browse, Service
•Any role granted the password_checkany right can check the password of any user.
•Any role granted the password_checkown right can only check their own password.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIER
<user>
If the <user> parameter is not specified, then the current user is used. Only users with Super
privileges with access to all domains can specify <user> names other than their own.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the authentication and authorization of user User1:
cli% checkpassword User1
password:
+ attempting authentication and authorization using system-local data
user User1 is authenticated and authorized
•The output of the checkpassword command is a series of information statements, each
starting with a plus sign (+) that indicates the steps the system is using to authenticate the user
and determine the privilege level.
•The last line of output shows the summary of the steps with the user either being unauthenticated
or authenticated and authorized.
NOTES
•The output of the checkpassword command is based on current authentication and
authorization parameters and might differ from the user's actual authorization level if the
checkpassword 61
setauthparam command has been used to change parameters or data in the LDAP server
has changed since the user last logged in.
•The showuserconn command can be used to verify the authorization levels assigned at
login.
62 Check Commands
checkpd
DESCRIPTION
The checkpd command executes surface scans or diagnostics on physical disks.
SYNTAX
checkpd scrub|diag [options <arg>] <pd_ID>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the pd_check right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
The following options can only be used with the scrub specifier:
-ch <number>
To scan a specific chunklet rather than the entire disk.
-count <number>
To scan a number of chunklets starting from -ch.
The following options can only be used with the diag specifier:
-path <p>
Specifies a physical disk path as a, b, both, or system.
-test <type>
Specifies read, write, or verify test diagnostics. If no type is specified, the default is read.
-iosize <size>
Specifies I/O size, valid ranges are from 1s to 1m. If no size is specified, the default is 128k.
-threads <num>
Specifies of I/O threads, valid ranges are from 1to 4. If the number of threads is not specified,
the default is 1.
-time <secs>
Indicates the number of seconds to run, from 1to 36000.
-total <size>
Indicates total bytes to transfer per disk. If a size is not specified, the default size is 1g.
-retry <number>
Specifies the total number of retries on an I/O error. If the number of retries is not specified, the
default is 4.
-range <size>
Limits diagnostic regions to a specified size, from 2m to 2g.
SPECIFIERS
scrub
Scans one or more chunklets for media defects.
diag
checkpd 63
Performs read, write, or verifies test diagnostics.
<pd_ID>...
The ID of the physical disk to be checked. Only one pd_ID can be specified for the “scrub” test.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, chunklet 500 on physical disk 1 is scanned for media defects:
cli% checkpd scrub -ch 500 1
{Tue Jul 10 17:11:26 PDT 2007} {31391} Open system device...
{Tue Jul 10 17:11:26 PDT 2007} {31391} Attach to system manager...
{Tue Jul 10 17:11:26 PDT 2007} {31391} Waiting for system manager ready...
{Tue Jul 10 17:11:26 PDT 2007} {31391} PD Scrubber 1.5 started
{Tue Jul 10 17:11:26 PDT 2007} {31391} Thread 16386 started for port 0:0:1
{Tue Jul 10 17:11:26 PDT 2007} {31391} Starting scan of pd 1 on port 0:0:1
{Tue Jul 10 17:11:27 PDT 2007} {31393} Scanning pd 1 ch 500
{Tue Jul 10 17:11:39 PDT 2007} {31393} Scan pd 1 ch 500 finished with 0 errors
{Tue Jul 10 17:11:39 PDT 2007} {31391} No media errors detected
NOTES
•The <size> specifier can include a letter to indicate units:
•g= gigabytes (2^30)
•t= terabytes (2^40)
•p= petabytes (2^50)
•m= 1048576 byte
•k= 1024 bytes
•s= 512 bytes
•I/O errors will be reported even if the eventual I/O succeeds due to retries.
•Up to 40 physical disk IDs can be specified for the diag test type.
64 Check Commands
checkport
DESCRIPTION
The checkport command performs a loopback test on Fibre Channel ports.
SYNTAX
checkport [options <arg>] <N:S:P>
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
Any role granted the port_check right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–time <seconds_to_run>
Specifies the number of seconds the test is to run. Use an integer from 0to 300.
–iter <iterations_to_run>
Specifies the number of times the test is to run. Use an integer from 1to 1000000.
SPECIFIERS
<node:slot:port>
Specifies the port to be tested.
node
Specifies the node using a number from 0through 7.
slot
Specifies the PCI bus slot in the specified node using a number from 0 through 5 for platforms
other than the V-Class. For V-Class systems, the PCI slot number ranges from 0 through 9.
port
Specifies the Fibre Channel port number of the PCI card in the specified PCI bus slot using 1through
4.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, the loopback test is performed on port 0:0:1 a total of five times:
cli% checkport -iter 5 0:0:1
Starting loopback test on port 0:0:1
Port 0:0:1 completed 5 loopback frames in 0 seconds
Passed
checkport 65
NOTES
•When both the -time and -iter options are specified, the first limit reached terminates the
program. If neither are specified, the default is 1,000 iterations. The total run time is always
limited to 300 seconds even when not specified.
•The default loopback is an ELS-ECHO sent to the HBA itself.
66 Check Commands
checkrclink
DESCRIPTION
The checkrclink command performs a connectivity, latency, and throughput test between two
connected HP 3PAR storage systems.
SYNTAX
•checkrclink startclient <N:S:P> <dest_addr> <time> [<port>]
•checkrclink stopclient <N:S:P>
•checkrclink startserver <N:S:P> [<dest_addr>] [<port>]
•checkrclink stopserver <N:S:P>
•checkrclink portconn <N:S:P>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the rclink_check right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
startclient
Starts the link test.
stopclient
Stops the link test.
startserver
Starts the system.
stopserver
Stops the system.
portconn
Uses the Cisco Discovery Protocol Reporter to show display information about devices that are
connected to network ports. Requires CDP to be enabled on the router.
The checkrclink test must be performed in two stages. For more information, see NOTES.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<N:S:P>
Specifies the interface from which to check the link, expressed as node:slot:port.
<dest_addr>
Specifies the address of the target system (for example, the IP address).
<time>
Specifies the test duration in seconds.
[<port>]
checkrclink 67
Specifies the port on which to run the test. If this specifier is not used, the test automatically runs
on port 3492.
RESTRICTIONS
The Remote Copy ports must be configured via the controlport command before this test can
be carried out; however, this test can be performed before links are admitted into the Remote Copy
target system.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a 60-second latency and throughput check of SystemA to SystemB:
SystemB# checkrclink startserver 0:6:1 10.100.33.63
SystemA# checkrclink startclient 2:5:1 10.100.10.10 60
.
.
.
============================================================
TEST SUMMARY from 0:0:1 -> 10.100.18.164
Test Started: Wed Aug 10 10:34:15 PST 2011
Test Finished: Wed Aug 10 10:34:26 PST 2011
============================================================
Latency: 0.104 ms
Lost pings: 0 %
Through-put: 522 Mbits/second
Max MTU: 1500
Tx TCP Segs: 486675
Rx TCP Segs: 199271
TCP retrans: 0 %
Errored Segs: 0 %
Link 2:5:1 is SUITABLE for Remote Copy Use
SystemB# checkrclink stopserver
NOTES
•Do not check the links if CPU usage is already close to 100%. The link check temporarily
increases CPU usage.
•This test must be performed in two stages. To run a test between SystemA and SystemB:
Start the system on SystemB, specifying the <N:S:P> for SystemB and the <dest_addr>
for SystemA.
a.
# checkrclink startserver <N:S:P> <dest_addr>
If you are running the checkrclink test on RCFC links, note the IP address displayed in the
output.
b. Start the client on the target system (SystemA), specifying the <N:S:P> for SystemA; the
<dest_addr> for SystemB (as an IP address for both RCIP and RCFC links); and the
duration of the test in seconds.
# checkrclink startclient <N:S:P> <dest_addr> <time>
68 Check Commands
c. (Optional) To end the test before it completes, on SystemA enter:
# checkrclink stopclient
d. After the test is complete, on SystemB enter:
# checkrclink stopserver
checkrclink 69
checksnmp
DESCRIPTION
The checksnmp command allows a user to send an SNMPv2 test trap to the list of managers as
specified in showsnmpmgr.
SYNTAX
checksnmp
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
Any role granted the snmp_check right
OPTIONS
None
SPECIFIERS
None
RESTRICTIONS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example shows the case when there are SNMP managers configured. The trap
destinations are displayed in the format <ip address>:<port>.
cli% checksnmp
Trap sent to the following managers:
192.168.17.10:162
192.168.17.111:1000
The following example shows the case when there are no SNMP managers configured.
cli% checksnmp
Cannot send test trap as no manager exists
70 Check Commands
checkvv
DESCRIPTION
The checkvv command executes validity checks of virtual volume administration information in
the event of an uncontrolled system shutdown and optionally repairs corrupted virtual volumes.
SYNTAX
checkvv [options] <VV_name>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role that is granted the vv_check right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–y|–n
Specifies that if errors are found they are either modified so they are valid (-y) or left unmodified
(-n). If not specified, errors are left unmodified (–n).
–offline
Specifies that virtual volumes specified by <VV_name> be offlined before validating the virtual
volume administration information. The entire VV tree will be offlined if this option is specified.
-f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>...
Requests that the integrity of the specified virtual volume is checked. This specifier can be repeated
to execute validity checks on multiple virtual volumes.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•The checkvv command cannot be issued for virtual volumes that have been started.
EXAMPLES
The following example offlines and fixes virtual volume test1:
cli% checkvv -y -offline test1
NOTES
None.
checkvv 71
8 CLI Command
cli
DESCRIPTION
The cli command provides a means to set up your CLI session or to enter directly into a CLI shell.
SYNTAX
cli [options] [<commands>]
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit, Browse, Service
OPTIONS
–v
Displays the CLI client version.
–b
Displays the CLI client build level.
–h
Displays help for the cli command.
–tpdportnum <portnum>
Specifies the TCP port of the CLI server to which the CLI client connects. The default SSL port number
is 5783; the default unsecured port number is 5782.
–sockssl
Use SSL for a socket connection. SSL can be used when either this option is used or the TPDSOCKSSL
environment variable has been set.
–sys <sysname>
Connect to system named <sysname>. When this option is not used, the CLI uses the value of
the TPDSYSNAME environment variable. When the TPDSYSNAME environment variable is not set,
the CLI prompts you for the system name.
–pwf <passwdfile>
Specifies the password file that contains the user name and encrypted password. If this option is
not used, check the TPDPWFILE environment variable for the password filename. If the environment
variable is not set, the CLI prompts you for the user name and password.
–user <user_name>
Specifies a user name to access the CLI. If used, this option must be issued with the –password
option and overrides the –pwf option.
–password <encrpw>
Specifies an encrypted password to access the CLI. If used, this option must be issued with the
–user option and overrides the –pwf option.
–cmdloop
Specifies that after commands are issued on the command line, an interactive command loop is
entered.
–hafter <nlines>
Prints a header after <nlines> of data.
72 CLI Command
–nohdtot
Does not print header and totals.
–csvtable
Prints table data as Comma Separated Values (CSV).
–listdom <domain_name>
Indicates the domain associated with the storage server.
–clientname <client_name>
Sets name of the client application.
–clientver <client_version>
Sets version of the client application.
–clienthost <client_host>
Sets name of the host the client application runs on.
–-conntimeout <seconds>
The maximum time in seconds to establish the connection to the CLI server. It defaults to 36 seconds
if not set.
SPECIFIERS
[<command>]
Any CLI command. This specifier is not required when issuing the cli command. If commands
are specified, the CLI exits after executing the commands unless the -cmdloop option is specified.
If no commands are specified in the command line, CLI enters the command loop.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the CLI client version:
$ cli –v
CLI client version: 3.1.2
The following example accesses the system1 storage system:
$ cli –sys system1
The following example authenticates with user1 and password pw2:
$ cli –user user1 –password pw2
The following example places the CLI in an interactive command loop:
$ cli –cmdloop
cli 73
NOTES
•If the cli command is issued without any arguments, you are placed in a CLI shell. After
commands are issued, the CLI exits unless the –cmdloop option was specified.
•Multiple commands can be entered by quoting a semicolon separator: cli showdate ";"
showversion
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
TPDSOCKSSL
If set, use an SSL socket TPDNOSOCKSSL If set, do not use an SSL socket
TPDNOSOCKSSL
If set, do not use an SSL socket
TPDSYSNAME
System to connect to. Overridden by -sys option
TPDPWFILE
Password file containing username and password Overridden by -pwf option
TPDCACHEDIR
Directory in which to cache the client bytecode
TPDSTARTFILE
File containing code that is executed before any command line commands are executed or the
interactive command loop is entered. This file normally contains customization scripts
TPDHAFTER
Number of lines after which the header is printed again. Overridden by the -hafter option
TPDNOHDTOT
If set, do not print headers and totals T
PDCSVTABLE
If set, print table data as comma separated values (CSV)
TPDLISTDOM
If set, include domain column where relevant
TPDCLIENTNAME
Client application name. Overridden by -clientname option
TPDCLIENTVER
Client application version. Overridden by -clientver option.
TPDCLIENTHOST
The host the client application runs on. Overridden by -clienthost option.
TPDCONNTIMEOUT
The maximum time in seconds to establish the connection to the CLI server. Overridden by
-conntimeout option. It defaults to 36 seconds if not set.
TPDFORCE
If set, do not ask for confirmation
74 CLI Command
9 Compact Commands
compactcpg
DESCRIPTION
The compactcpg command consolidates logical disk space in Common Provisioning Groups
(CPGs) into as few logical disks as possible, allowing unused logical disks to be removed and
their space reclaimed.
SYNTAX
compactcpg [options] <CPG_name>...
compactcpg -pat [options] <pattern>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the cpg_compact right.
OPTIONS
-pat
Compacts CPGs that match any of the specified patterns.
-waittask
Waits for any created tasks to complete.
-trimonly
Removes unused logical disks after consolidating the space. This option will not perform any region
moves.
-dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run, and the tasks will not actually be performed.
-f
Does not ask for confirmation before compacting the logical disks. Unless the -f option is specified,
the command asks for confirmation before compacting each CPG.
SPECIFIERS
<pattern>...
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to compact multiple CPGs. If this
specifier is not used, the <CPG_name> specifier must be used. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern”
(page 12) for further information.
<CPG_name>...
Specifies the name of the CPG. Multiple CPGs can be specified.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
compactcpg 75
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to compact a single CPG named testcpg and remove any
unused logical disks after consolidating the space:
cli% compactcpg -trimonly testcpg
Are you sure you want to compact CPG 'testcpg' ?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Task 612 started
NOTES
•Logical disks that are consolidated must have the same owner and backup nodes.
•If one logical disk exists with a different owner and backup node, that logical disk will be
compacted individually.
76 Compact Commands
compactld
DESCRIPTION
The compactld command consolidates space on the logical disks.
SYNTAX
compactld [options <arg>] <LD_name>...|<pattern>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the ld_compact right.
OPTIONS
-pat
Compacts the logical disks that match any of the specified patterns.
-cons
This option consolidates regions onto the fewest possible logical disks. When this option is not
specified, the regions of each logical disk will be compacted within the same logical disk.
-waittask
Waits for any created tasks to complete.
-taskname <taskname>
Specifies a name for the task. When not specified, a default name is chosen.
-dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run, and the tasks will not actually be performed.
-f
Does not ask for confirmation before compacting the logical disks. Unless the -f option is specified,
the command asks for confirmation before compacting each logical disk.
-trimonly
Only unused logical disk space is removed. Regions are not moved.
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>...
Specifies the name of the logical disk to be compacted. Multiple logical disks can be specified.
<pattern>...
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to compact multiple logical disks. If
this specifier is not used, the <LD_name> specifier must be used. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern”
(page 12) for further information.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
compactld 77
EXAMPLES
In the following example, logical disk pdsld0.0 is compacted:
cli% compactld -f pdsld0.0
Compacting LDs:
pdsld0.0
NOTES
None.
78 Compact Commands
10 Control Commands
controlencryption
DESCRIPTION
The controlencryption provides various commands to control data encryption.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the controlencryption command can be one of the following examples:
•controlencryption backup <filename>
•controlencryption restore <filename>
•controlencryption enable <filename>
•controlencryption rekey <filename>
•controlencryption status [options]
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted to the encryption_control right
•Super, Service (for status subcommand only)
•Any role granted to the encryption_status right
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
backup
Specifies to backup the keystore.
restore
Specifies to restore the keystore.
enable
Specifies to enable encryption.
rekey
Specifies to rekey the Self Encrypting Drives (SEDs).
status
Specifies to list the current encryption status.
OPTION
-d
Provides details on the encryption status.
SPECIFIERS
<filename>
Specifies the name of the file in which to place the backup or the source of the file to restore.
controlencryption 79
EXAMPLES
The following example backs up the keystore to file backup1:
cli% controlencryption backup backup1
The following example restores the keystore from file backup1:
cli% controlencryption restore backup1
NOTES
The keystore MUST be backed up to prevent total loss of data. A password must be supplied (twice)
on backup. The same password must be supplied on restore. For enable and rekey, there must be
no failed disks.
Because the backup needs to be stored off the nodes, all subcommands other than status need to
be executed using a version of the CLI running on a remote system.
The Data Encryption license is required to use the enable subcommand. Also all disks must be
SED.
The Data Encryption license is required to use the enable subcommand. Also all disks must be
SED. If the state shows recovery_needed, the enableor last rekey subcommand failed. Re-issue
the operation to fix this state.
80 Control Commands
controliscsiport
DESCRIPTION
The controliscsiport command is used to set properties of an iSCSI port.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the controliscsiport command can be one of the following examples:
•controliscsiport addr <IP_addess> <netmask> [-f] <node:slot:port>
•controliscsiport gw <gw_address> [-f] <node:slot:port>
•controliscsiport mtu <mtusz_bytes> [-f] <node:slot:port>
•controliscsiport dhcp on|off [-f] <node:slot:port>
•controliscsiport isns <isns_port> [-f] <node:slot:port>
•controliscsiport isnsport <isns_port> [-f] <node:slot:port>
•controliscsiport delete [-f] <node:slot:port>
•controliscsiport ping [<count>] <ipaddr> <node:slot:port>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the port_control right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
addr
Sets the IP address and netmask of the iSCSI port.
gw
Sets the gateway address of the iSCSI port.
mtu
Sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for the iSCSI port.
dhcp
Sets whether or not (on or off) the iSCSI target should use the DHCP to obtain its IP addresses.
isns
Sets the iSNS server IP address.
isnsport
Sets the TCP port number for the iSNS server. By default, the default iSNS port number is used.
delete
Deletes the iSCSI port configuration.
ping
Pings the specified IP address a specified number of times from the iSCSI port.
OPTION
-f
Do not ask for confirmation. The default is to ask for confirmation.
controliscsiport 81
SPECIFIERS
<IP_address>
Indicates the IP address of the iSCSI target.
<netmask>
Indicates the IP netmask of the iSCSI target.
<gw_address>
Indicates the IP address of the gateway.
<mtusz_bytes>
Indicates the MTU size in bytes.
<isns_primary>
Indicates the IP address of the primary iSNS server.
<isns_secondary>
Indicates the IP address of the secondary iSNS server.
<isns_port>
Returns the TCP port number of the iSNS server. The default port number is 3205.
<count>
Indicates the number of ping packets to send. If a value is specified, it should be an integer from
1 through 64. If a value is not specified, the default is one packet.
<node:slot:port>
The physical location of the iSCSI target port.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, iSCSI port configuration is deleted:
cli% controliscsiport delete -f 104.64.98.1
NOTES
None.
82 Control Commands
controlmag
DESCRIPTION
The controlmag command takes drive magazines, or disk drives within a magazine, either on
loop or off loop. Use this command when replacing a drive magazine or disk drive within a drive
magazine.
SYNTAX
controlmag offloop|onloop [options] <cage_name> <magazine>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the mag_control right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
offloop|onloop
Specifies that the specified drive magazine or disk drive is either taken off loop or brought back
on loop.
OPTIONS
–disk <disk_number>
Specifies that the operation is performed on the disk as determined by its position within the drive
magazine. If not specified, the operation is performed on the entire drive magazine.
–port a|b|both
Specifies that the operation is performed on port A, port B, or both A and B. If not specified, the
operation is performed on both ports A and B.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<cage_name>
Specifies the name of the drive cage. Drive cage information can be viewed by issuing the
showcage command.
<magazine>
Specifies the drive magazine number within the drive cage. Valid formats are
<drive_cage_number>.<drive_magazine> or <drive_magazine> (for example 1.3
or 3, respectively).
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
controlmag 83
EXAMPLES
The following example requests that drive magazine 1in drive cage cage0 be put on loop:
cli% controlmag onloop cage0 1
NOTES
Taking a drive magazine off-loop has the following consequences:
•Relocation of chunklets.
•Affected logical disks are put into write-through mode.
•Momentary dip in throughput, but no loss of connectivity.
84 Control Commands
controlpd
DESCRIPTION
The controlpd command spins a physical disk up or down. This command is used when replacing
a physical disk in a drive magazine.
CAUTION: Issuing the controlpd command puts the specified disk drive in a not ready state.
Furthermore, if this command is issued with the spindown subcommand, data on the specified
drive becomes inaccessible.
SYNTAX
controlpd spinup|spindown [options] <WWN>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the pd_control right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
spinup
Specifies that the physical disk is to spin up. If this subcommand is not used, then the spindown
subcommand must be used.
spindown
Specifies that the physical disk is to spin down. If this subcommand is not used, then the spinup
subcommand must be used.
OPTIONS
–ovrd
Specifies that the operation is forced, even if the physical disk is in use.
SPECIFIERS
<WWN>...
Specifies the World Wide Name (WWN) of the physical disk. This specifier can be repeated to
identify multiple physical disks.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•The spin down operation cannot be performed on a physical disk that is in use unless the
–ovrd option is used.
EXAMPLES
The following example instigates the spin-up of a physical disk identified by its WWN of
2000000087002078:
cli% controlpd spinup 2000000087002078
controlpd 85
NOTES
Issuing the controlpd command puts the specified disk drive in a not ready state. Furthermore,
if this command is issued with the spindown subcommand, data on the specified drive becomes
inaccessible.
86 Control Commands
controlport
DESCRIPTION
The controlport command controls all aspects of a Fibre Channel or Remote Copy port, including
the port’s connection type and data rate.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the controlport command can be one of the following:
•controlport config <connmode> [-ct <ctval>][-unique_nwwn
enable|disable] [-f]<node:slot:port>...
•controlport rst [–m <mode>|–l|-i] [–f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport offline <node:slot:port>
•controlport failover <node:slot:port>
•controlport failback <node:slot:port>
•controlport lip [–c <cagename>] [–f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport login <portwwn> [-f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport logout <portwwn> [-f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport ct <ctval> [–f] <node:slot:port>... (deprecated usage)
•controlport cl2 <cl2val> [–f] <node:slot:port>... (deprecated usage)
•controlport rate <rateval> [–f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport label <port_label> [-f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport vcn <vcnval> [–f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport nssync [–f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport intcoal <intcoalval> [–f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport rcip addr [–f] <IP_address> <netmask> <node:slot:port>...
•controlport rcip gw [–f] <gateway_address> <node:slot:port>...
•controlport rcip delete [–f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport rcip mtu <MTU_size> <node:slot:port>...
•controlport rcip state up|down [–f] <node:slot:port>...
•controlport rcip speed <value> half|full <node:slot:port>...
•controlport rcip speed auto <node:slot:port>...
•controlport rcip ping [–c <count>|–w <wait>|–s <size>|–pf]
<IP_address> <node:slot:port>...
•controlport rcfc init [–f] <node:slot:port>
•controlport rcfc delete [–f] <node:slot:port>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the port_control right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
controlport 87
SUBCOMMANDS
config
Sets the specified connection mode and type on FC ports. Also allows setting the unique node
WWN option for the port. When unique_nwwn is enabled, the port presents a unique node
name on the connection and this is needed by certain initiators such as ONTAP. This command is
also used to configure the mode of a CNA port.
rst
Resets a port. This subcommand is not applicable to RCIP ports.
offline
Holds the specified port offline indefinitely. Issue controlport rst to bring the port back online.
failover
Fails the specified port over to a failover partner port using the persistent ports mechanism, if a
valid partner port is present.
failback
Reverts an port failover using the persistent ports mechanism, if port failover is currently active. The
failed-over port should be specified with this command.
lip
Specifies that a Loop Initialization Primitive (LIP) command is issued from the port if there is a private
loop topology. If the –coption is specified, then the LIP command is issued through the specified
drive cage. If there is a point-to-point topology, then the link is reset. If there is a public loop or
fabric topology, then a Registered State Change Notification is issued to the fabric controller. If
the -portwwn option is specified, then a selective LIP or RSCN is issued to the specified attached
port.
login
Performs Fibre Channel login to an attached port, identified by port WWN.
logout
Performs Fibre Channel logout from an attached port, identified by port WWN.
ct
Sets the connection type. The specified port will be reset. See “SPECIFIERS” for parameters required
to issue this subcommand. This option has been deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent
release.
cl2
Specifies the Fibre Channel Class-2 parameter of the port. The specified port will be reset. See
“SPECIFIERS” for parameters required to issue this subcommand. This option is deprecated and
will be removed in a subsequent release.
rate
Specifies the data rate of the Fibre Channel port. The specified port will be reset. See “SPECIFIERS”
for parameters required to issue this subcommand.
label
Associates a human-readable label with the port. This subcommand is not supported with RCIP
ports.
vcn
Sets the VLUN Change Notification (VCN) generation support (enable or disable). When VCN
generation support is enabled with a public loop or fabric topology, a Registered State Change
Notification (RSCN) message is issued to the fabric controller whenever a VLUN is created or
removed. In addition, if enabled with a public loop topology, a Loop Initialization Primitive (LIP)
88 Control Commands
is issued from the port whenever a VLUN is created or removed. See “SPECIFIERS” for additional
information on parameters required to issue this subcommand.
nssync
Verifies current port database against the Name Server when a fabric is attached. Entries present
in the database but missing from the Name Server are removed. Using this command is not required
under normal circumstances.
rcip addr
Sets the Remote Copy interface to use the specified IP address and netmask. See “SPECIFIERS” for
parameters required to issue this subcommand.
rcip gw
Sets the gateway for one or more Remote Copy interfaces. Only for RCIP ports. See “SPECIFIERS”
for parameters required to issue this subcommand.
rcip delete
Deletes the configuration for one or more specified Remote Copy interfaces. See “SPECIFIERS” for
parameters required to issue this subcommand.
rcip mtu
Sets the Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU) size for the specified Remote Copy interface(s), overriding
the default of 1500. The largest supported value is 9000 and the smallest is 100. Only for RCIP
ports. See “SPECIFIERS” for parameters required to issue this subcommand.
rcip state up|down
Sets the specified Remote Copy interface(s) as either up or down. Only for RCIP ports. See
“SPECIFIERS” for parameters required to issue this subcommand.
rcip speed
Instructs the specified Remote Copy interface(s) to use the specified speed and duplex, or to auto
negotiate speed and duplex. The default is auto. Only for RCIP ports. See “SPECIFIERS” for
parameters required to issue this subcommand.
rcip ping
Performs a ping from the specified interface to the specified address. Only for RCIP ports. See
“SPECIFIERS” for parameters required to issue this subcommand. Use with the –pf option to prevent
fragmentation of packets (see “SPECIFIERS”). Permitted for Super, Service, Browse, and Edit users.
rcfc init
Sets the specified Remote Copy interface(s) on the local port. Only for RCFC ports.
rcfc delete
Deletes the configuration for the Remote Copy interface on the local port. This will bring the
interfaces down.
intcoal
Enables or disables interrupt coalescing. The specified port will be reset. See “SPECIFIERS” for
parameters required to issue this subcommand.
OPTIONS
–ct
Sets the connection type. The specified port will be reset.
-unique_nwwn enable|disable
Enable or disable the use of a unique node WWN on the specified port.
–m <mode>
controlport 89
This option can only be used with the rst subcommand. Resets the mode of the port. The port can
be reset into a target or initiator mode. If not specified, the port is reset to its current mode.
If the port’s mode change value is prohibited, this command fails when attempting to reset to a
different mode. Use showport –cto see whether mode change is allowed or prohibited for a
particular port. See notes at the bottom of this section for additional information regarding port
pair protection.
This option is deprecated and will soon be removed in a later release. Use controlport config to
set target (host) or initiator (disk) modes.
CAUTION: The cable(s) must be disconnected from the port before resetting the mode to target
or initiator.
CAUTION: Use caution when changing modes for ports in LSI Fibre Channel adapters. Changing
the mode of one port in a pair (for example, from initiator to target) causes the other port in the
pair to also undergo a mode change. In the case where one port in the pair is offline (and therefore
a mode change can be allowed), but the partner port is online, changing the mode of the offline
port causes the online partner port to undergo mode change as well. This results in loss of use of
the partner port because it is no longer online.
–l
Forces the port to reload firmware. This option can only be used with the rst subcommand and
cannot be used with the -i option.
CAUTION: Issuing the controlport rst –l command affects both ports of a port pair. Only use this
command when irreversible damage has been done to a port or port pair. For more information
about ports in your system, issue the showport –icommand (see “showport” (page 440)).
–c
When used with the Loop Initialization Primitive (LIP) subcommand:
–c <cage_name>
If using a private loop topology, a Loop Initialization Primitive (LIP) command is issued from the
port. If a cage is specified using the <cage_name> argument, the LIP is issued through the cage
controller.
•If using a point-to-point topology, the link is reset.
•If using a public loop or fabric topology, a Registered State Change Notification (RSCN)
message is issued to the fabric controller.
When used with the rcip ping subcommand:
–c <count>
Specifies the number of replies accepted by the system before terminating the command. The
default is 1; the maximum value is 25.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
–i
Forces a mode change for a port even if the port’s mode change value is prohibited. The partner
port’s mode is changed with this option as well. Use with the controlport rst or controlport
persona commands. This option cannot be used with the -l option.
–w <wait>
Specifies the maximum amount of time to wait for replies. The default is the number of requested
replies plus 5. The maximum value is 30. If a number is not specified, the option can only be used
with the rcip ping subcommand.
90 Control Commands
–s <size>
Specifies the packet size. If no size is specified, the option defaults to 64. This option and argument
can only be used with the rcip ping subcommand.
–pf
Prevents packet fragmentation when issuing the controlport rcip ping command. This option
can only be used with the rcip ping subcommand.
-portwwn <wwn>
Specifies the Fibre Channel worldwide port name of an attached device for which selective LIP
reset will be performed.
SPECIFIERS
<connmode>
Specifies whether the port is used for a disk, host, peer, Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (rcfc),
or iSCSI (iscsi), or Fibre Channel over Ethernet (fcoe) connection. This specifier must be used
when issuing the config subcommand.
<ctval>
Specifies the connection parameter of the port. Parameters can be loop or point. The loop
parameter sets the port to arbitrated loop mode, the point parameter sets the port to point-to-point
mode. This specifier must be provided when issuing the ct subcommand.
<cl2val>
Specifies the Fibre Channel Class-2 parameter of the port. Parameters can be one of ack0,ack1,
or disable. This specifier must be provided when issuing the cl2 subcommand.
<rateval>
Specifies the data rate of the Fibre Channel port. Rates can be one of 1,2,4, or auto.1sets the
data rate to 1 GBps, 2sets the data rate to 2 GBps, and 4sets the data rate to 4 GBps. The auto
parameter sets the port to autodetect the data rate. This specifier must be used when issuing the
rate subcommand.
<port_label>
Specifies the value of the port label. The port label value is a human-readable string used for easy
identification of the port.
<vcnval>
Specifies the value of the VCN. The VCN value can be set as enable or disable. This specifier
must be used when issuing the vcn subcommand.
<impval>
Specifies the IMP port attribute. The IMP value can be set as enable or disable. This specifier
must be used when issuing the imp subcommand.
<intcoalval>
Specifies if interrupt coalescing is enabled or disabled. The value can be set as enable or
disable. This specifier must be used with the intcoal subcommand.
<node:slot:port>
Specifies the port to be controlled.
node
Specifies the node using a number between 0and 7.
slot
Specifies the PCI bus slot in the specified node using a number between 0and 5.
controlport 91
port
Specifies the Fibre Channel port number of the PCI card in the specified PCI bus slot using 1through
4.
<IP_address>
Specifies the IP address for a Remote Copy interface.
<gateway_address>
Specifies the gateway address for a Remote Copy interface.
<netmask>
Specifies the netmask for a Remote Copy interface.
<MTU_size>
Specifies the MTU size for a Remote Copy interface using an integer from 100 to 9000. If no
integer is specified, the value defaults to 1500.
<speed> half|full
Use only with the rcipspeed subcommand. Specifies the speed setting (10,100, or 1000) and
duplex setting (half or full) for a Remote Copy interface. In addition to this specifier, you must
also specify an interface using <node:slot:port>. If no speed or duplex settings are specified, or
if you specify auto with the rcipspeed subcommand, the system auto-negotiates the speed and
duplex.
<portwwn>
Specifies the Fibre Channel worldwide port name of an attached port. This specifier is used with
the login and logout subcommands.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•The –m <mode> option for the rst subcommand cannot be specified if there are active
connections already using the port (that is the port online) except as noted in the following
section under port pair protection.
•Port pair protection:
•For dual-port LSI Fibre Channel adapters, both ports in the pair must use the same mode
(initiator or target).
•For quad-port LSI Fibre Channel adapters, each ports pair (ports 1 and 2, ports 3 and 4) must
use the same mode.
•Changing the mode of one port in a pair (for example, from initiator to target) causes the
other port in the pair to undergo a mode change as well.
CAUTION: Use caution when changing modes for ports in LSI Fibre Channel adapters. Changing
the mode of one port in a pair (for example, from initiator to target) causes the other port in the
pair to undergo a mode change. In the case where one port in the pair is offline (and therefore a
mode change can be allowed), but the partner port is online, changing the mode of the offline
port causes the online partner port to undergo a mode change as well. This results in loss of use
of the partner port because it is no longer online.
•If there are active hosts or physical disks when issuing the controlport rst or offline
commands, a warning is returned and you are prompted for confirmation to complete the
execution of the commands.
•When issuing the controlport ct,cl2,rate,persona, or rscn commands, if there
are active disks on the port, an error is returned. If there are active hosts on the port, the –f
92 Control Commands
option is overridden (if specified), a warning is returned, and you are prompted for confirmation
to complete the execution of the commands.
•The controlport rcip addr command is only allowed for node/slot/port combinations
where there is an interface installed.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to increase MTU to 9000 on Gigabit Ethernet port 1 in node
6, slot 3:
cli% controlport rcip mtu 9000 6:3:1
Remote Copy change successful.
The following example shows how to set Remote Copy interface 172.16.1.11 on a Gigabit
Ethernet port 1 in node 6, slot 3 using a netmask of 255.255.255.0:
cli% controlport rcip addr 172.16.1.11 255.255.255.0 6:3:1
Are you sure you want to change the address for 6:3:1?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Remote Copy interface change successful.
The following example shows how to set the gateway for Gigabit Ethernet port 1 in node 6, slot
3 using a gateway address of 172.16.1.1:
cli% controlport rcip gw 172.16.1.1 6:3:1
Are you sure you want to change the gateway for 6:3:1?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Remote Copy interface change successful.
The following examples show usage of controlport config:
controlport config host -ct point 1:3:1
ontrolport config host -unique_nwwn enable 1:2:3
controlport config rcfc 0:0:1
controlport config disk 2:2:2
controlport config iscsi 1:8:1
controlport config peer -ct point 1:5:1
NOTES
•The ct,cl2, or rate subcommands automatically resets the port for the changes to take
effect.
•Issue the showport command with either the –ior –par options to verify the success of the
controlport command. See “controlport” (page 87).
•Resetting a port causes a momentary dip in throughput, but no loss of connectivity.
•The -f option forces the operation. Without the flag, the command prompts for confirmation.
In some cases, unless the TPDFORCE_OVERRIDE environment variable is set, the command
asks for confirmation even when the -f option is specified because the operation might disrupt
the system operation.
•Use caution when changing modes for ports in LSI Fibre Channel adapters. Changing the
mode of one port in a pair (for example, from initiator to target) causes the other port in the
pair to also undergo a mode change. In the case where one port in the pair is offline (and
therefore a mode change can be allowed), but the partner port is online, changing the mode
controlport 93
of the offline port causes the online partner port to undergo mode change as well. This results
in loss of use of the partner port because it is no longer online.
•Issuing the controlport rst -l command affects both ports of a port pair. Only use this
command when irreversible damage has been done to a port or port pair.
•When issuing the controlport cl2 or vcn commands, if the port is configured as peer
connection mode, an error is returned.
•If specified, <ctval> will depend on the <connmode> value:
•If <connmode> is disk, then <ctval> can only be loop
•If <connmode> is rcfc, then <ctval> can only be point
•If <connmode> is host, then <ctval> can be either loop or point
•if <connmode> is peer, then <ctval> can only be point.
94 Control Commands
11 Create Commands
createald
DESCRIPTION
This command was deprecated in the 2.2.3 release and will be changed or removed in a future
release.
The createald command creates disks with automatic chunklet allocation for the disks.
SYNTAX
createald [options] <LD_name> <size>[g|G|t|T]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role that is granted the ld_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–templ <template_name>
Use the options defined in template <tname>. The template is created using the
createtemplate command. Options specified in the template are read-only or read/write. The
read/write options may be overridden with new options at the time of their creation, but read-only
options may not be overridden at creation time. Options not explicitly specified in the template
take their default values, and all of these options are either read-only or read/write ( using the
-nro or -nrw options of the createtemplate command).
–t <RAID_type>
Specifies the RAID type of the logical disk: r0 for RAID-0, r1 for RAID-1 or r5 for RAID-5, or r6
for RAID-6. If no RAID type is specified, the default is r1.
–ssz <size_number_chunklet>
Specifies the set size in terms of chunklets. The default depends on the RAID type specified: 2for
RAID-1, 4for RAID-5, and 8for RAID-6.
–rs <size>
Specifies the number of sets in a row using an integer from 1through 2147483647. If not specified,
no row limit is imposed. The default is no limit.
–ss <size_KB>
Specifies the step size from 32 KB to 512 KB. The step size should be a power of 2 and a multiple
of 32. The default value depends on raid type and device type used. If no value is entered and
FC or NL drives are used, the step size defaults to 256 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1, and 128 KB
for RAID-5. If SSD drives are used, the step size defaults to 32 KB for RAID-0, RAID-1 and RAID-5.
For RAID-6, the default is a function of the set size.
–ha port|cage|mag
Specifies that the layout must support the failure of one port pair, one cage, or one drive magazine
(mag). This option has no meaning for RAID-0.
–ch first|last
createald 95
Specifies the chunklet location preference characteristics, either first (attempt to use the lowest
numbered available chunklets) or last (attempt to use the highest numbered available chunklets).
If no argument is specified, the default characteristic is first.
–p <pattern>
Specifies a pattern for disks. Patterns are used to select disks that are used for creating logical
disks. If no pattern is specified, the option defaults to all Fibre Channel (FC) disks. If specified
multiple times, each instance of the specified pattern adds additional candidate disks matching
the pattern. The -devtype pattern cannot be used to mix Near Line (NL), FC, and Solid State
Drive (SSD) drives.
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node number(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot number(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–4).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port number(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–7). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen
(0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments, –tc_gt , –tc_lt , –fc_gt , –fc_lt , –devid , and –devtype are used
to limit the disks that are used to create LDs based on the characteristics of the disk drive.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that PDs with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
96 Create Commands
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that PDs with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that PDs with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that PDs with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that PDs identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <device_type>
Specifies that PDs must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for nearline, or
SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the showpd
command.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example -p -fc_gt 60
-fc_lt 230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free
chunklets and that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
–domain <domain>
Specifies the domain. The default is to create logical disk(s) in the current domain, or no domain
if the current domain is not set.
–wait <secs>
If the createald command fails due to the lack of clean space, the -wait option specifies the
number of seconds to wait for the system to clean the dirty space before returning. If -wait 0 is
issued, the command returns immediately. If this option is not used, the command will keep waiting
for dirty chunklets to be cleaned if enough space will be available with the dirty chunklets cleaned.
–dr
Specifies that the command is a dry run and that no logical disks or Virtual Volumes are created.
–verbose on|off
Specifies that verbose output is either enabled (on) or disabled (off). If not specified, verbose
output is disabled.
–cpsd <CPG_name>
Specifies that the logical disk created is added to the specified Common Provisioning Group’s
(CPG’s) snapshot data space.
–cpsa <CPG_name>
Specifies that the logical disk created is added to the specified CPG’s snapshot administration
space.
-cpusr <CPG_name>
Specifies that the logical disk being created is added to the specified CPG USR space.
-force
createald 97
Specifies that a new logical disk should be created, even if an existing LD could be grown (to be
used in conjunction with the -cpsa and -cpsd options).
-listlds
Specifies that the names of any newly created LDs should be displayed.
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>
Specifies the logical disk base name (up to 24 characters in length). The name is created by
concatenating the name with an integer value - starting at zero, incrementing it by one for each
logical disk generated, up to 999999. This field is required.
<size>
Specifies the minimum usable space in MB. Size should be an integer. An optional suffix (with no
whitespace before the suffix) will modify the units to GB (gor Gsuffix) or TB (tor Tsuffix). If the
size is to be taken from a template, this field should be (-).
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the creation of a 256 MB logical disk named testld.0:
cli% createald testld 256
NOTES
•Verify the creation of a logical disk by issuing the showld command. See “showld” (page 394)
for more information.
•For this command:
•MB = 1048576 bytes
•GB = 1024 MB
•TB = 1024 GB
98 Create Commands
createaldvv
DESCRIPTION
This command was deprecated in the 2.2.3 release and will be changed or removed in a future
release. Please use the createvv command in the future.
The createaldvv command creates a virtual volume and its underlying logical disks and allows
the system to automatically allocate resources to meet specified use requirements. The virtual volume
and its logical disks can be created using either the listed options or by using preconfigured
templates (created through the createtemplate command.
SYNTAX
createaldvv [options] <vvname> [.<index>] <size>[g|G|t|T]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the vv_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–templ <template_name>
Use the options defined in template <template_name>. The template is created using the
createtemplate command. Options specified in the template are read-only or read/write. The
read/write options may be overridden with new options at creation time but read-only options
may not be overridden at the time of creation.
Options not explicitly specified in the template take their default values, and all of these options
are either read-only or read/write (using the -nro or -nrw options of the createtemplate
command). If not included, the -size and -cpg options are automatically treated as read/write
even if the other not included properties are marked read-only.
–t <RAID_type>
Specifies the RAID type of the logical disk: r0 for RAID-0, r1 for RAID-1, r5 for RAID-5, or r6 for
RAID-6. If no RAID type is specified, the default is r1.
–ssz <size_number_chunklets>
Specifies the set size in terms of chunklets. The default depends on the RAID type specified: 2for
RAID-1, 4for RAID-5, and 8for RAID-6.
–rs <size>
Specifies the number of sets in a row using an integer from 1to 2147483647. If not specified,
no row limit is imposed.
–ss <size_KB>
Specifies the step size from 32 KB to 512 KB. The step size should be a power of 2 and a multiple
of 32. The default value depends on raid type and device type used. If no value is entered and
FC or NL drives are used, the step size defaults to 256 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1, and 128 KB
for RAID-5. If SSD drives are used, the step size defaults to 32 KB for RAID-0, RAID-1 and RAID-5.
For RAID-6, the default is a function of the set size.
–ha port|cage|mag
Specifies that the layout must support the failure of one port pair, one cage, or one drive magazine
(mag). This option has no meaning for RAID-0.
–ch first|last
createaldvv 99
Specifies the chunklet location preference characteristics: either first (attempt to use the lowest
numbered available chunklets) or last (attempt to use the highest numbered available chunklets).
If no argument is specified, the default characteristic is first.
–p <pattern>
Specifies a pattern for disks. Patterns are used to select disks that are used for creating LDs. If no
pattern is specified, the option defaults to Fibre Channel (FC) disks. If specified multiple times, each
instance of the specified pattern adds additional candidate disks that match the pattern. The
-devtype pattern cannot be used to mix Near Line (NL), FC, and Solid State Drive (SSD) drives.
The following arguments can be specified as patterns for this option:
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node number(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot number(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–5).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port number(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–7). Disks must reside
in the specified drive magazine(s).
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). Disks must reside in the specified
position(s).
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen
(0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments, –tc_gt , –tc_lt , –fc_gt , –fc_lt , –devid , and –devtype are used
to limit the disks that are used to create logical disks based on the characteristics of the disk drive.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that PDs with total chunklets greater than the number specified be selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that PDs with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
100 Create Commands
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel or NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command. If it is not specified, the default device type is FC.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example, -p -fc_gt 60-fc_lt
230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free chunklets and
that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
–domain <domain>
Specifies the domain. The default is to create it in the current domain, or no domain if the current
domain is not set.
-f
Does not ask for confirmation before creating a RAID-0 volume.
–wait <secs>
If the command would fail due to the lack of clean space, the -wait option specifies the number
of seconds to wait for the system to clean the dirty space before returning. If -wait 0 is issued,
the command returns immediately. If this option is not used, the command will keep waiting for
dirty chunklets to be cleaned if enough space will be available with the dirty chunklets cleaned.
–dr
Specifies that the command is a dry run and that no logical disks or virtual volumes are actually
created.
–verbose on|off
Specifies that verbose output is either enabled (on) or disabled (off). If not specified, verbose
output is disabled.
–i <ID>
Specifies the virtual volume ID. The default will be the next available virtual volume ID.
-cnt <count>
Specifies the number of identical virtual volumes to create. This must be an integer from 1 to 999.
If <id> is specified with -i option, it is used as the ID of the first virtual volume and incremented
by 1 for each subsequent volume.
-shared
createaldvv 101
Specifies that the system will try to share the logical disks among the virtual volumes. This option
can only be used with the -cnt option.
–szs <size>[g|G|t|T]
Specifies the size of the snapshot volume. Defaults to megabytes. Size can be optionally specified
in gigabytes (with gor Gsuffix) or terabytes (with tor Tsuffix). If not specified, snapshot space
is 0. This option cannot be used with the -pct option.
–pct <prc>
Specifies the size of the snapshot volume as a percentage of the user volume. If not specified, the
default value is 0. This option cannot be used with the -szs option. If used with the -cpg
<CPG_name> option, the percentage value is 0.
–cpg <CPG_name>
Provision the SD and SA space from the CPG <CPG_name>.
-exp <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the relative time from the current time that volume will expire. <time> is a positive integer
value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be optionally specified in days
or hours providing either dor D for day and hor Hfor hours following the entered time value.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any additional information up to 511 characters for the volume.
-f
Do not ask for confirmation before creating a volume with retention time (-retain).
-retain <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the amount of time, relative to the current time, that the volume will be retained. <time>
is a positive integer value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be
optionally specified in days or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following
the entered time value.
NOTE: If the volume is not in any domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the
system's VVRetentionTimeMax . The default value for the system's VVRetentionTimeMax is 14 days.
If the volume belongs to a domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the domain's
VVRetentionTimeMax , if set. The retention time cannot be removed or reduced once it is set. If the
volume has its retention time set, it cannot be removed within its retention time. If both expiration
time and retention time are specified, then the retention time cannot be longer than the expiration
time. This option requires the HP 3PAR Virtual Lock License. Contact your local HP 3PAR Authorized
Service Provider for more information.
–aw <percent>
This option was deprecated in the 2.3.1 release and will be changed or removed in a future
release.
Specifies the allocation warning threshold of the CPG. When the snapshot data space of the virtual
volume exceeds the specified percentage of the virtual volume size, an alert is generated.
–al <percent>
Specifies the allocation limit threshold of the CPG. The snapshot data space is prevented from
growing beyond the specified percentage of the virtual volume size.
-spt <sectors_per_track>
Defines the virtual volume geometry sectors per track value that is reported to the hosts through the
SCSI mode pages. The valid range is between 4 to 8192 and the default value is 304.
-hpc <heads_per_cylinder>
102 Create Commands
Defines the virtual volume geometry heads per cylinder value that is reported to the hosts though
the SCSI mode pages. The valid range is between 1 to 255 and the default value is 8.
–pol <pol>[,<pol>...]
Specifies VV policies.
stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are permitted. Failure to update snapshot data does not
affect the write to the base volume, but the snapshot is considered invalid.
no_stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are not permitted. Failure to update a snapshot is considered
a failure to write to the base volume.
one_host
This constrains the export of a volume to one host or one host cluster (when cluster names can be
used as a host name).
no_one_host
This policy should only be used when exporting a virtual volume to multiple hosts for use by a
cluster-aware application, or when “port presents” VLUNs are used. This is the default policy setting.
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name> [.<index>]
Specifies a VV name up to 31 characters in length. If the -cnt option is used, the optional decimal
number <index> specifies the name of the first virtual volume (<vvname>.<index>). The
<index> is incremented by 1 for each subsequent virtual volume. The <index> must be an integer
from 0 to 999999. All virtual volume names have the same length constraint.
<size>[g|G|t|T]
Size for the user volume in MB (maximum of 16 T). The volume size is rounded up to the next
multiple of 256 MB. The size should be an integer. An optional suffix (with no whitespace before
the suffix) will modify the units to GB (gor Gsuffix) or TB (tor Tsuffix). If the size is to be taken
from a template, this field should be "-".
RESTRICTIONS
When creating a logical disk, all physical disks must have the same device type.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates 3 virtual volumes vv1.2, vv1.3, vv1.4:
cli% createaldvv -cnt 3 vv1.2 1g
The following example creates a RAID-5 virtual volume using disks in cages 0 and 1:
cli% createaldvv -t r5 -p -cg 0,1 vva 1g
The following example creates 2 virtual volumes, vva.0 and vva.1 which may share logical
disks:
cli% createaldvv -cnt 2 -shared vva 1g
createaldvv 103
NOTES
For this command:
•MB = 1048576 bytes
•GB = 1024 MB
•TB = 1024 GB
104 Create Commands
createaocfg
DESCRIPTION
The createaocfg command creates an Adaptive Optimization (AO) configuration.
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
SYNTAX
createaocfg [options <arg>] <aocfg_name>
OPTIONS
-t0cpg <cpgname>
Specifies the Tier 0 CPG for this AO config.
-t1cpg <cpgname>
Specifies the Tier 1 CPG for this AO config.
-t2cpg <cpgname>
Specifies the Tier 2 CPG for this AO config.
-mode <mode>
Specifies the optimization bias for the AO configuration, which can be one of the following:
•Performance — Move more regions towards higher performance.
•Balanced — Balanced between higher performance and lower cost.
•Cost — Move more regions towards lower cost tier.
The default optimization bias mode is Balanced.
SPECIFIERS
<aocfg_name>
Specifies an AO configuration name up to 31 characters in length.
NOTES
•Two or more Tier CPGs must be defined.
•If domains are used, all CPGs must be in the same domain or not in any.
•A CPG can only belong to one AO configuration.
•Active use of Adaptive Optimization requires an Adaptive Optimization license. Contact your
HP representative for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates a new AO configuration called aocfg1. The optimization bias
(mode) is set to Cost. Tier 0 will use CPG R1SSDcpg, Tier 1 will use CPG R5FCcpg and Tier 2
will use CPG R6NLcpg.
cli% createaocfg -t0cpg R1SSDcpg -t1cpg R5FCcpg -t2cpg R6NLcpg -mode Cost aocfg1
createaocfg 105
The following example creates a new AO configuration called aocfg2. The optimization bias
defaults to Balanced, and no Tier 1 CPG is specified.
cli% createaocfg -t0cpg R1SSDcpg2 -t2cpg R6NLcpg2 aocfg2
106 Create Commands
createavv
DESCRIPTION
This command was deprecated in the 2.2.3 release and will be changed or removed in a future
release. Please use the createvv command in the future.
The createavv command creates a virtual volume where logical disk mapping is determined by
the system.
Syntax
The syntax for the createavv command can be one of the following:
•createavv [options <arg>] <VV_name> <user_LD_ID> <usersize>
<adminspace_LD_ID> <adminsize> <snapspace_LD_ID> <snapsize>
•createavv [options <arg>] <VV_name> <user_LD_ID> <usersize>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the vv_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–i <VV_ID>
Specifies the ID of the virtual volume. If not specified, the next available virtual volume ID is assigned
by the system.
–verbose on|off
Specifies that verbose output is either enabled (on) or disabled (off). The default is off.
–dr
Specifies that the command is a dry run and that no virtual volumes are actually created.
–cpg <CPG_name>
Specifies that the snapshot data space and snapshot administration space are provisioned from
the indicated CPG (<CPG_name>). If this option is used, the <adminspace_LD_ID>,
<adminsize>, <snapspace_LDs>, and <snapsize> specifiers cannot be used.
–aw <percent>
Specifies the percentage of used snapshot data space that when reached, results in a warning
alert. To disable the warning, enter 0.
–al <percent>
Specifies the Virtual Volume’s allocation limit. The snapshot data space of the Virtual Volume is
prevented from growing beyond the specified percentage of the Virtual Volume size. After reached,
new writes to the volume fail.
-spt <sectors_per_track>
Allows you to define the Virtual Volume geometry sectors per track value that is reported to the
hosts through the SCSI mode pages. The valid range is from 4 to 8192 and the default value is
304.
-hpc <heads_per_cylinder>
Allows you to define the Virtual Volume geometry heads per cylinder value that is reported to the
hosts though the SCSI mode pages. The valid range is from 1 to 255 and the default value is 8.
createavv 107
–pol no_stale_ss|stale_ss|one_host|no_one_host
Specifies the policy (rule) that the created virtual volume follows. If an argument is not specified,
the policy defaults to stale_ss.
stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are permitted. Failure to update snapshot data does not
affect the write to the base volume. However, the snapshot is considered invalid.
no_stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are not permitted. A failure to update a snapshot is
considered a failure to write to the base volume.
one_host
This constrains the export of a volume to one host or one host cluster (when cluster names can be
used as a host name).
no_one_host
This policy should only be used when exporting a Virtual Volume to multiple hosts for use by a
cluster-aware application, or when port presents VLUNs are used. This is the default policy setting.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
Specifies the virtual volume name, using up to 31 characters. This option and argument are required
on the command line.
<user_LD_ID>
Specifies the logical disks to be used as user space. The logical disks are identified by one or more
integers (item). Integers can be provided as single number (1), a comma separated list of numbers
(1,2,3), or a range of numbers separated with a dash (1–4).
<usersize>
Specifies the size of the user space in megabytes.
<adminspace_LD_ID>
Specifies the logical disks to be used as snapshot administrator space. The logical disks are
identified by one or more integers (item). Integers can be provided as single number (1), a comma
separated list of numbers (1,2,3), or a range of numbers separated with a dash (1–4).
<adminsize>
Specifies the size of the snapshot administrator space in megabytes.
<snapspace_LD_ID>
Specifies the logical disks to be used as snapshot data space. The logical disks are identified by
one or more integers (item). Integers can be provided as single number (1), a comma separated
list of numbers (1,2,3), or a range of numbers separated with a dash (1–4).
<snapsize>
Specifies the size of snapshot data space in megabytes.
<nb>
Specifies an integer.
<item>,<item>
Specifies the list of items.
<item>-<item>
Specifies a range of items.
108 Create Commands
RESTRICTIONS
•Logical disks must be available to run the createavv command. Issue the createald
command to create logical disks. See “createald” (page 95) for more information.
•The <adminspace_LD_ID>.<adminsize>,<snapspace_LD_ID>, and <snapsize>
specifiers cannot be used if the createavv -cpg command is issued.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the creation of Virtual Volume vv0 with its user space set to 256
MB and its administrator space set to 256 MB:
cli% createavv vv0 0 256 1 256 2 256
NOTES
•Verify the creation of virtual volumes by issuing the showvv command. See “showvv” (page 506)
for more information.
•A newly created logical disk is guaranteed to be clean. Chunklets of logical disks that are
removed are cleaned before they are reused. However, regions of a logical disk that were
previously used (for example, by another Virtual Volume) can contain data from its previous
use. If these regions of the logical disk are mapped to your user space in a Virtual Volume,
that data can be visible to the host that the Virtual Volume is exported.
If this is a concern, remove logical disks when the Virtual Volume is removed and use only
newly created logical disks for your user space. Previous data in logical disks used for snapshot
data space or snapshot admin space is not visible to you because these spaces are only visible
after being written with new data.
•For this command: MB = 1048576 bytes.
•This command was deprecated in the 2.2.3 release and will be changed or removed in a
future release.
createavv 109
createcpg
DESCRIPTION
The createcpg command creates a Common Provisioning Group (CPG).
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the cpg_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
createcpg [options <arg>] CPG_name
OPTIONS
–templ <template_name>
Use the options defined in the template <template_name>. The template is created using the
createtemplate command. Options specified in the template are read-only or read/write. The
read/write options may be overridden with new options at the time of their creation, but read-only
options may not be overridden at creation time.
Options not explicitly specified in the template take their default values, and all of these options
are either read-only or read/write (using the -nro or -nrw options of the createtemplate
command).
-f
Forces the command. The command completes the process without prompting for confirmation.
–aw <percent>
Specifies the percentage of used snapshot administration or snapshot data space that results in a
warning alert. A percent value of 0 disables the warning alert generation. The default is 0. This
option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
NOTE: The following options, –sdgs,–sdgl, and –sdgw, control the auto logical disk creation
for the common provisioning group’s snapshot data regions. Auto logical disk creation occurs
when the amount of free logical disk space falls below the specified grow (enlarge) size setting
options (–sdgs,–sdgl).
–sdgs <size> [g|G|t|T]
Specifies the growth increment, the amount of logical disk storage that is created on each auto-grow
operation. The default and minimum growth increments vary according to the number of controller
nodes in the system. If <size> is non-zero, it must be 8 G or bigger. The size can be specified in
MB (default) or GB (using g or G) or TB (using t or T). A size of 0 disables the auto-grow feature.
The following table displays the default and minimum growth increments per number of nodes:
MinimumDefaultNumber of Nodes
8 GB32 GB1-2
16 GB64 GB3-4
24 GB96 GB5-6
32 GB128 GB7-8
110 Create Commands
–sdgl <size> [g|G|t|T]
Specifies that the auto-grow operation is limited to the specified storage amount. The storage
amount can be specified in MB (default) or GB (using g or G) or TB (using t or T). A size of 0
(default) means no limit is enforced. To disable auto-grow, set the limit to 1.
–sdgw <size>[g|G|t|T]
Specifies that the threshold of used logical disk space, when exceeded, results in a warning alert.
The size can be specified in MB (default) or GB (using g or G) or TB (using t or T). A size of 0
(default) means no warning limit is enforced. To set the warning for any used space, set the limit
to 1.
-sa <LD_name>...
Specifies that existing logical disks are added to the CPG and are used for snapshot admin (SA)
space allocation. The <LD_name> argument can be repeated to specify multiple logical disks.
This option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
-sd <LD_name>...
Specifies that existing logical disks are added to the CPG and are used for snapshot data (SD)
space allocation. The <LD_name> argument can be repeated to specify multiple logical disks.
This option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
NOTE: The following options, –t , –szs , –rs , –ss , –ha , –ch , and –p are used to control auto
logical disk creation (if auto-grow is enabled).
-domain <domain>
Specifies the name of the domain with which the object will reside. The object must be created by
a member of a particular domain with Edit or Super roles. The default is created in the current
domain, or no domain if the current domain is not set.
-t <RAID_type>
Specifies the RAID type of the logical disk: r0 for RAID-0, r1 for RAID-1, or r5 for RAID-5 or r6
for RAID-6. If no RAID type is specified, the default is r1 for FC and SSD device types and r6 for
NL device types.
-ssz <size_number_chunklets>
Specifies the set size in the number of chunklets. The default depends on the RAID type specified:
2for RAID-1, 4for RAID-5, and 8for RAID-6.
-rs <size>
Specifies the number of sets in a row. The <size> is a positive integer. If not specified, no row
limit is imposed.
-ss <size_KB>
Specifies the step size from 32 KB to 512 KB. The step size should be a power of 2 and a multiple
of 32. The default value depends on raid type and device type used. If no value is entered and
FC or NL drives are used, the step size defaults to 256 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1, and 128 KB
for RAID-5. If SSD drives are used, the step size defaults to 32 KB for RAID-0, RAID-1 and RAID-5.
For RAID-6, the default is a function of the set size.
-ha port|cage|mag
Specifies that the layout must support the failure of one port pair, one cage, or one drive magazine
(mag). If no availability level is specified, the default is cage. This option has no meaning for
RAID-0.
–ch first|last
Specifies the chunklet location characteristics, either first (lowest numbered available chunklets)
or last (highest numbered available chunklets). If no argument is specified, the default characteristic
is first.
createcpg 111
–p <pattern>
Specifies a pattern for candidate disks. Patterns are used to select disks that are used for creating
logical disks. If no pattern is specified, the option defaults to all Fibre Channel (FC) disks. If specified
multiple times, each instance of the specified pattern adds additional candidate disks that match
the pattern. The -devtype pattern cannot be used to mix Near Line (NL), FC, and Solid State
Drive (SSD) drives.
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node number(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot number(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–4).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port number(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of
showpd output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines
are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a
single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–7). The specified
magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified portion(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen
(0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments, –tc_gt , –tc_lt , –fc_gt , –fc_lt , –devid and –devtype are used
to select the disks that are used to create common provisioning groups based on the characteristics
of the disk.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified be selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified be selected.
112 Create Commands
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified be selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified be selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that PDs identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command. If it is not specified, the default device type is FC.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example, -p -fc_gt 60
-fc_lt 230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free
chunklets and that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
SPECIFIERS
<CPG_name>
Specifies the name of the common provisioning group being created.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the creation of common provisioning group cpg1, whose logical
disk storage is set to autogrow at 16 GB, has a growth limit of 32 GB, and receives a growth
warning at 24 GB:
cli% createcpg -sdgs 16g -sdgl 32g -sdgw 24g cpg1
The following example displays disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics used. The
example specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free chunklets and that
are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
cli% createcpg –p –fc_gt 60 –fc_lt 230 –nd 2
The following example specifies that all disks in cages 1 and 2 or magazine 4 of each cage will
be used in the CPG.
cli% createcpg -p -cg 1-2 -p -mg 4 cpg3
createcpg 113
NOTES
•For this command:
KB = 1024 bytes◦
◦MB = 1048576 bytes
◦GB = 1073741824 bytes
•When using the createcpg command, the size of the logical disk space created is the first
integer multiple of the RAID set size that is large enough to accommodate the requested virtual
volume size. For example, with the default RAID-5 layout with a set size of 768 MB, a requested
virtual volume size of 8192 MB causes the creation of logical disks with a total size rounded
up to an integer multiple of 768 that is 8448 MB. The growth increment of CPGs is similarly
rounded up because the growth is done by creating logical disks that must be created in units
of the logical disk RAID set size. See the HP 3PAR StoreServ Storage Concepts Guide for
further details.
•By default, logical disk are created using only physical disks with the same device type. (By
default, the Fibre Channel device type is used). Use the –p devtype NL or -p -devtype
SSD option to override this default. Use the showpd command to see the device types of
physical disks in the system.
•The options -sdgs,-sdgl and -sdgw control the auto logical disk creation for the Common
Provisioning Group's (CPG) snapshot data regions. Auto logical disk creation occurs when
the amount of free logical disk space falls below the specified grow (enlarge) size setting
options (-sdgs,-sdgl).
•If no device type is specified using the –p –devtype option, Fibre Channel is assumed.
114 Create Commands
createdomain
DESCRIPTION
The createdomain command creates system domains.
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role that is granted the domain_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
createdomain [option <arg>] <domain_name>
OPTIONS
-comment <comment>
Specifies any comments or additional information for the domain. The comment can be up to 511
characters long. Unprintable characters are not allowed. The comment must be placed inside
quotation marks.
-vvretentiontimemax <time> [h|H|d|D]
Specifies the maximum value that can be set for the retention time of a volume in this domain.
<time> is a positive integer value in the range of 0 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be
optionally specified in days or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following
the entered time value.
To disable setting the volume retention time in the domain, enter 0 for <time>.
SPECIFIERS
<domain_name>
Specifies the name of the domain you are creating. The domain name can be no more than 31
characters. The name all is reserved.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•Use of this command requires a Domain license. Contact your local HP 3PAR representative
for information.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the creation of domain Engineering with an informational
comment:
cli% createdomain -comment “This is a test domain.” Engineering
NOTES
None.
createdomain 115
createdomainset
description
The createdomainset command defines a new set of domains and provides the option of
assigning one or more existing domains to that set. The command also allows the addition of
domains to an existing set by use of the -add option.
SYNTAX
createdomainset [options] <setname> [<domain | pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the domainset_create right.
OPTIONS
-add
Specifies that the domains listed should be added to an existing set. At least one domain must be
specified.
-comment <comment>
Specifies a comment relating to the set.
SPECIFIERS
<setname>
Specifies the name of the domain set to create or add to.
<domain | pattern>...
Optional list of domains or glob-style patterns matching domains that are to be included in the
domain set. If no <domain> is specified a domain set with no domains is created.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To create a domain set with 2 domains in it:
cli% createdomainset domset domain1 domain2
To create an empty domain set with a comment:
cli% createdomainset -comment "A placeholder set" emptyset
notes
None.
116 Create Commands
creategroupsv
DESCRIPTION
The creategroupsv command creates consistent group snapshots of a list of Virtual Volumes.
Consistent group snapshots are all created at the same point in time so that related structures on
different volumes in the group remain consistent.
SYNTAX
creategroupsv [option] <copy_of_VV>[:<snapshot_VV>[:<ID>]]...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the groupsv_create right.
OPTIONS
–ro
Specifies that read-only snapshots are created. The default is read/write snapshots. To create
read-only snapshots, all specified Virtual Volumes must be read/write. For read/write snapshots,
all specified Virtual Volumes must be read-only.
-exp <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the relative time from the current time that volume will expire. <time> is a positive integer
value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be optionally specified in days
or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following the entered time value.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any additional information up to 511 characters for the volume.
-f
Do not ask for confirmation before creating a volume with retention time (-retain).
-retain <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the amount of time, relative to the current time, that the volume will be retained. <time>
is a positive integer value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be
optionally specified in days or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following
the entered time value.
NOTE: If the volume is not in any domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the
system's VVRetentionTimeMax. The default value for the system's VVRetentionTimeMax is 14 days.
If the volume belongs to a domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the domain's
VVRetentionTimeMax , if set. The retention time cannot be removed or reduced once it is set. If the
volume has its retention time set, it cannot be removed within its retention time. If both expiration
time and retention time are specified, then the retention time cannot be longer than the expiration
time. This option requires the HP 3PAR Virtual Lock License. Contact your local HP 3PAR Authorized
Service Provider for more information.
-noblock
When a read-only snapshot is taken, the storage system blocks host I/O to the parent virtual volume
while the snapshot is being created. If the -noblock option is specified, the storage system will
not block host I/O to the parent virtual volume during snapshot creation. This option is only
applicable for read-only snapshots.
creategroupsv 117
SPECIFIERS
<copy_of_VV>
Specifies the name of the Virtual Volume being copied (the parent volume).
<snapshot_VV>
Optional name of the snapshot Virtual Volumes. If <snapshot_VV> is not specified, the system
tries to automatically generate the snapshot name of the form <copy_of_VV>.<type><number>
where <type> is either ro or rw and <number> is either empty or the lowest number starting
from 0 that does not conflict with an existing volume name. If the generated name is too long
(because the <copy_of_VV> name is too long) the command will fail, and the user is required
to specify <snapshot_VV> explicitly.
[<ID>]
Optional ID of the <snapshot_VV>. If the <ID> is not specified, an ID is chosen automatically.
RESTRICTIONS
Use of this command requires a HP 3PAR Virtual Copy license. Contact your local HP 3PAR
representative for information.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, Virtual Volumes VV1 and VV2, and their underlying logical disks are
created using the createaldvv command. A read-only snapshot of the volumes is then taken
and a list of the volumes is generated using the creategroupsv command:
cli% createaldvv –pct 10 VV1 4g
cli% createaldvv –pct 10 VV2 4g
cli% creategroupsv –ro VV1 VV2
CopyOfVV SnapshotVV
VV1 VV1.ro
VV2 VV2.ro
NOTES
•Consistent group snapshots are all created at the same point in time so that related structures
on different volumes in the group remain consistent.
•A maximum of 256 writable virtual copies per volume are allowed.
•A maximum of 2048 virtual copies per volume are allowed.
118 Create Commands
creategroupvvcopy
DESCRIPTION
The creategroupvvcopy command creates consistent group physical copies of a list of virtual
volumes.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the creategroupvvcopy command can be one of the following:
•creategroupvvcopy -p [options] <parent_VV>:<destination_VV>...
•creategroupvvcopy -r [options] <destination_VV>...
•creategroupvvcopy -halt <destination_VV>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the groupvvcopy_create right.
OPTIONS
–p
Starts a copy operation from the specified parent volume (as indicated using the <parent_VV>
specifier) to its destination volume (as indicated using the <destination_VV> specifier). First a
set of consistent group snapshots of all the <parent_VV> specifiers are taken and then each
snapshot is copied to the corresponding <destination_VV> specifier. After the copies are
complete, the snapshots are deleted unless the -s option is specified. Each <parent_VV> specifier
must be a base virtual volume or a read/write snapshot.
–r
Resynchronizes the set of destination volumes (as indicated using the <destination_VV> specifier)
with their respective parents using saved snapshots so that only the changes made since the last
copy or resynchronization are copied. The resynchronization operation can only be performed if
snapshots of the parents saved using the -s option in an earlier instance of the creategroupvvcopy
command are present. These old snapshots are replaced by a new set of consistent group snapshots
for the next resynchronization operation (such as the –soption need not be specified with the –r
option).
–halt
Cancels an ongoing physical copy. This causes the destination volume (as indicated using the
<destination_VV> specifier) to be marked with the 'cpf' status, which can be cleared up when
a new copy is started.
–s
Saves snapshots of the parent volume (as indicated with the <parent_VV> specifier) for quick
resynchronization and to retain the parent-copy relationships between each parent and destination
volume. The -s option is implied and need not be specified when the -r option is used. Each
<destination_VV> specifier remains marked as a physical copy of its <parent_VV> specifier
until it is promoted to a base virtual volume using the promotevvcopy command, which also
removes the saved snapshot of the <parent_VV> specifier. The saved snapshots should not be
removed manually. If the same <parent_VV> specifier is copied to different <destination_VV>
specifiers with the -s option, a different snapshot of the <parent_VV> specifier is saved for
each <destination_VV> specifier.
–b
creategroupvvcopy 119
Use this specifier to block until all the copies are complete. Without this option, the command
completes before the copy operations are completed (use the showvv command to check the status
of the copy operations).
-pri <high|med|low>
Specifies the priority of the copy operation when it is started. This option allows the user to control
the overall speed of a particular task. If this option is not specified, the creategroupvvcopy
operation is started with default priority of medium. High priority indicates that the operation will
complete faster. Low priority indicates that the operation will run slower than the default priority
task. This option cannot be used with -halt option.
SPECIFIERS
<destination_VV>
Indicates the destination virtual volume.
<parent_VV>
Indicates the parent virtual volume.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
NOTES
•The creategroupvvcopy command can be issued multiple times. However, the HP 3PAR
Storage System allows only two active physical copy tasks to run concurrently. Any additional
physical copy tasks are queued, pending the completion of the active physical copy tasks.
•Consistent group snapshots are all created at the same point in time so that related structures
on different volumes in the group remain consistent.
120 Create Commands
createhost
DESCRIPTION
The createhost command creates or adds paths to a new system host and provides the option
of assigning one or more paths to that host. Paths can be either Fibre Channel WWNs or iSCSI
names. The command also provides options to annotate the host with descriptor information such
as physical location, IP address, Operating System, Model, and so on.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the creathost command can be one of the following:
•createhost [options] <host_name> [<WWN>...]
•createhost -iscsi [options] <host_name> [<iSCSI_name>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit.
•Any role granted the host_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–add
Adds the specified WWN(s) or iscsi_name(s) to an existing host (at least one WWN or iscsi_name,
must be specified. See “NOTES” for additional information about this option.
-domain <domain | domain_set>
Creates the host in the specified domain or domain set. The default is to create it in the current
domain, or no domain if the current domain is not set. The domain set name must start with set:.
–f
Forces the tear down and removal of lower priority VLUN exports if necessary. See “NOTES” for
additional information about this option.
-persona <hostpersonaval>
Sets the host persona that specifies the personality for all ports which are part of the host set. This
selects certain variations in SCSI command behavior which certain operating systems expect. The
<hostpersonaval> is the host persona ID number with the desired capabilities. These can be
seen with showhost -listpersona.
-loc <location>
Specifies the host’s location.
-ip <IP_address>
Specifies the host’s IP address.
-os <OS>
Specifies the operating system running on the host.
-model <Model>
Sets the host’s model.
-contact <contact>
Sets the owner of the host and contact information.
-comment <comment>
createhost 121
Specifies any additional information for the host.
SPECIFIERS
<host_name>
Specifies the name of the host, using up to 31 characters.
<WWN>
Specifies the World Wide Name (WWN) to be assigned or added to an existing host. This specifier
can be repeated to specify multiple WWNs. This specifier is optional.
<iSCSI_name>
Host iSCSI name to be assigned or added to a host. This specifier is optional.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates system host test01:
cli% createhost test01 2000000087041F72
The following example creates an iSCSI host test02:
cli% createhost -iscsi test02 iqn.1991-06.com.microsoft:dt-391-xp.hq.3par.com
The following example creates host ibm520-13 with an 8/AIX-legacy host persona:
cli% createhost -persona 3 ibm520-13 10000000C97B142E
NOTES
•If the host is running the HP 3PAR Host Agent then createhost may be called with no paths
and the hostname reported by the agent to create the host with all reported paths. If no agent
is running then createhost with no paths creates a host without assigning a host path. The
-add option modifies an existing host by associating a host path with that host. If the -add
option is not used, the createhost command defines a new host.
•If assigning paths to a host you are creating, specify the -f option to remove any existing
VLUNs associated with those paths to avoid any conflicting VLUNs.
•Verify the creation of a host by issuing the showhost command.
•The options that allow for adding descriptive information are for annotation purposes only;
the storage server does not actively use the information provided here.
•Although it is optional to specify a host persona, a host must have one. If one is not specified,
it will default to 1 (Generic). This will not operate correctly with all types of hosts. The host
persona can be changed with sethost -persona.
•Host personas cannot be specified with the -add argument.
•A port's FC parameters should be set with controlport config.
122 Create Commands
createhostset
DESCRIPTION
The createhostset command defines a new set of hosts and provides the option of assigning
one or more existing hosts to that set. The command also allows the addition of hosts to an existing
set by use of the -add option.
SYNTAX
createhostset [options] <setname> [<host | pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the hostset_create right.
OPTIONS
-add
Specifies that the hosts listed should be added to an existing set. At least one host must be specified.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any comment or additional information for the set. The comment can be up to 255
characters long. Unprintable characters are not allowed.
-domain <domain>
Create the host set in the specified domain. For an empty set the default is to create it in the current
domain, or no domain if the current domain is not set. A host set must be in the same domain as
its members; if hosts are specified as part of the creation then the set will be created in their domain.
The -domain option should still be used to specify which domain to use for the set when the hosts
are members of domain sets. A domain cannot be specified when adding a host to an existing set
with the -add option.
SPECIFIERS
<setname>
Name of the host set to create/add to.
<host | pattern>...
Optional list of hosts or glob-style patterns matching hosts that are to be included in the host set.
If no <host> is specified a host set with no hosts is created.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To create an empty hostset:
cli% createhostset hostset
To add a host to the set:
cli% createhostset -add hostset hosta
createhostset 123
To create a host set with a comment and a host in it:
cli% createhostset -comment “A host set” oraset ora1
NOTES
None.
124 Create Commands
createld
DESCRIPTION
This command was deprecated in the 2.2.3 release and will be changed or removed in a future
release. Please use the createvv command in the future.
The createld command allows you to create a logical disk. Unlike the createald command,
issuing the createld command requires that you allocate chunklets for the logical disk created.
SYNTAX
createld [options] <LD_name> <RAID_type> <row_size> <PD:ch>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the ld_create role.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–o <owner>
Owner node for the logical disk.
–b <backupowner>
Backup owner node for the logical disk.
–md <mirrordepth>
Option <raid_type>=1 only, the number of mirror copies in the set.
–ps <parityset>
Option <raid_type>=5 or 6 only, the total number of chunklets in RAID set, including parity.
–ss <stepsize>
Step size is in KB and can take any value in the range of 32 KB to 512 KB. The step size should
be a power of 2 and a multiple of 32. The default value depends on raid type and device type
used. If FC or NL drives are used, the step size defaults to 256 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1, and
128 KB for RAID-5. If SSD drives are used, the step size defaults to 32 KB for RAID-0, RAID-1 and
RAID-5. For RAID-6, the default is a function of the set size.
–cpsd <CPG_name>
Adds this logical disk to the specified CPG SD space.
–cpsa <CPG_name>
Adds this logical disk to the specified CPG SA space. Only RAID-1 logical disks may be used for
the SA space.
–ha port|cage|mag
Defines the availability of the logical disk. The default is cage. The availability setting is used to
select the destination chunklets during relocation of failed chunklets.
-domain <domain>
Creates the logical disk in the specified domain. The default is to create it in the current domain,
or no domain if the current domain is not set.
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>
createld 125
Specifies the logical disk name, using up to 31 characters.
<RAID_type>
Specifies the RAID type: 0for RAID-0, 1for RAID -1, 5for RAID-5, or 6for RAID-6.
<row_size>
Specifies the number of sets in a row.
<PD:ch>
Lists PDs and chunklet pairs.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
None.
NOTES
•Verify the creation of a logical disk by issuing the showld command. See “showld” (page 394)
for more information.
•To create a RAID-1 volume the mirror depth (-mdflag) must be specified. For RAID-5 or
RAID-6 volume the parityset (-psflag) must be specified. The owner and backup_owner
option should be a number between 0 and 7 and should be the node ID of a valid node in
the system. The mirror depth can take any value between 2 and 4, inclusive.
126 Create Commands
creatercopygroup
DESCRIPTION
The creatercopygroup command creates a Remote Copy volume group.
SYNTAX
creatercopygroup [options] <group_name> [<target_name>:<mode> ...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the rcopygroup_create right.
OPTIONS
-domain <domain>
Creates the Remote Copy group in the specified domain. The volume group must be created by a
member of a particular domain with Super or Edit privileges.
-usr_cpg <cpg_name> <target_name>:<cpg_name>...
Specifies the local user CPG and target user CPG that will be used for volumes that are auto-created.
The local CPG will only be used after failover and recovery.
-snp_cpg <cpg_name> <target_name>:<cpg_name>...
Specifies the local snap CPG and target snap CPG that will be used for volumes that are
auto-created. The local CPG will only be used after failover and recovery.
SPECIFIERS
<group_name>
Specifies the name of the volume group, using up to 22 characters if the mirror_config policy
is set, or up to 31 characters otherwise. This name is assigned with this command.
[<target_name>:<mode>...]
In a Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy setup, this specifier is required for every target of
the group. This specifier can be repeated to specify multiple targets.
•<target_name> - Specifies the target name associated with this group. This name should
have already been assigned using the creatercopytarget command.
•<mode> - Specifies that the mode of the created group is either kept in synchronization at all
times (sync) or synchronized only periodically (periodic), either on command or by setting an
automatic resynchronization period through the setrcopygroup command.
RESTRICTIONS
This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates an asynchronous periodic mode volume group named Group1
whose target system is System2 (target name System2_out):
cli% creatercopygroup Group1 System2_out:periodic
creatercopygroup 127
If using domains, the syntax would appear as:
cli% creatercopygroup -domain domain2 Group1 System2_out:periodic
If using volume auto-create:
cli% creatercopygroup -usr_cpg Localcpg target:Targetcpg -snp_cpg Localsnp
target:Targetsnp groupname target:periodic
NOTES
•If the mirror_config policy is set for this group’s target system and the group is a primary
group, then this command will be mirrored to the target and the corresponding secondary
group will also be removed. If the policy is set and the group is a secondary group, then this
command will fail.
•The removercopygroup command removes all the associations configured in the specified
group and removes the group name and any Remote Copy synchronization snapshots affiliated
with volumes in the group.
128 Create Commands
creatercopytarget
DESCRIPTION
The creatercopytarget command creates a Remote Copy target definition.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the creatercopytarget command can be one of the following:
•Syntax for Remote Copy over IP (RCIP) is as follows:
creatercopytarget [options] <target_name> IP
[<node:slot:port:IP_address>]...
•Syntax for Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC) is as follows:
creatercopytarget [options] <target_name> FC <node_WWN>
[<node:slot:port:WWN>]...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the rcopytarget_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
-disabled
Create the target in disabled mode.
SPECIFIERS
<target_name>
The name of the target definition to be created, specified by using up to 23 characters.
<node_WWN>
The node's World Wide Name (WWN) on the target system (Fibre Channel target only).
[<node:slot:port:IP_address>]...
Specifies the node, slot, and port of the Ethernet port on the local system and an IP address of the
peer port on the target system. This specifier can be repeated.
[<node:slot:port:WWN>]...
Specifies the node, slot, port of the Fibre Channel adaptor port on the primary system and World
Wide Name (WWN) of the peer port on the target system. This specifier can be repeated.
RESTRICTIONS
Functionality of this command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy license. Contact your local
service provider for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates a target definition named System2 on the primary system, where
the node numbers of the primary system’s Ethernet ports are located at 0:3:1 and 1:3:1 and
the corresponding IP addresses on the backup system are 10.1.1.11 and 10.1.2.11:
# creatercopytarget System2 IP 0:3:1:10.1.1.11 1:3:1:10.1.2.11
creatercopytarget 129
The following example creates a primary target definition named System1 on the backup system,
where the node numbers of the backup system’s Ethernet ports are located at 2:3:1 and 3:3:1
and the corresponding IP addresses on the primary system are 10.1.1.96 and 10.1.2.96:
# creatercopytarget System1 IP 2:3:1:10.1.1.96 3:3:1:10.1.2.96
The following example creates a target definition named System2 on the local system where the
node WWN of the target system is 20010002AC000060:
# creatercopytarget System2 FC 20010002AC000060 0:4:1:22410002AC000060
1:4:1:23410002AC000060
NOTES
•IP targets are made up of pairs composed of the node, slot and port of the Ethernet port on
the local system and an IP address of the peer port on the target system.
•FC targets are made up of sets with the node, slot, and port of the FC port on the local system
and WWN of the peer port on the target system.
130 Create Commands
createsched
DESCRIPTION
The createsched command allows users to schedule tasks that are periodically run by the
scheduler.
SYNTAX
createsched [options] <cmd> <taskschedule> <schedname>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role that is granted the sched_create right.
OPTIONS
-run_once
The task will only run once at the specified time.
-no_alert
Tasks created with the no_alert option will not generate alerts if the task fails.
SPECIFIERS
<cmd>
Specifies that it is either a CLI command or script that has been distributed by HP 3PAR. Can be
up to 127 characters in length.
<taskschedule>
Specifies the use of a crontab-style schedule. Each field can be up to 127 characters in length.
<schedname>
Specifies the name given to the schedule. The name can be up to 31 characters in length.
RESTRICTIONS
•The use of All and Upgrade as schedule names are reserved.
•Only the following commands can be scheduled: updatesnapspace,createsv,removevv,
createvvcopy,creategroupsv,creategroupcopy,moverlocpd,checkhealth,
compactcpg,compactld, setvv, startao, syncrcopy, tunealdvv, tunepd,
tunetpvv, tunesys, tunevv, updatevv.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates a snapshot every hour that expires in 2 hours for volume vvname:
cli% createsched "createsv -ro -exp 2h @vvname@.@s@ vvname" @hourly snp_vv
The following example creates a snapshot every hour that expires in 2 hours for volumes in vvset:
cli% createsched "createsv -ro -exp 2h @vvname@.@s@ set:vvset" @hourly snp_vvset
The following example creates a scheduled task that will run every hour on the hour ("0 * * *
*") and will create a read-only (-ro) snapshot of sample_vv, that will expire in two hours (-exp
createsched 131
2h). The created snapshot will be named sample_vv_set.HH.MMM where HH and MM refer to
the hour and minute that the snapshot was created (@vvname@.@H@.@M@):
cli% createsched "createsv -ro -exp 2h @vvname@.@H@.@M@ vv" "0 * * * *" sv_task
The following example creates a scheduled task which will create a consistent group snapshot.
The read-only snapshots will be created from the volume set: dbora (see CLI Help -sub
objectsets) that will expire in two hours (-exp 2h) and the snapshots will be named using the
pattern @vvname@.@s@ (volume name specified in the set, with the epoch in seconds appended).
The task will be named snap_odbora_set and run every hour on the hour during the working
hours from 8am to 5pm ("0 8-17 * * *"):
cli% createsched "createsv -ro -exp 2h @vvname@.@s@ set:dbora" "0 8-17 * * *"
sv_dbora_task
The following example creates a scheduled task which will create a consistent group snapshot for
a single virtual volume:
createsched "createsv -ro -exp 2h @vvname@.@s@ vvname" "0 * * * *" snap_large_tpvv_a
Add a comment with spaces to createsv by surrounding the comment with escaped double
quotes:
createsched "createsv -ro -exp 2h -comment \"Comment with spaces\" @vvname@.@H@.@M@
vv" "0 * * * *" sv_task
NOTES
•The <taskschedule> string has five fixed fields: minute, hour, day-of-month, month,
day-of-week.
•Fields are separated by spaces. The allowed values for the fields are:
Allowed ValuesField
0-59Minute
* or 0-23Hour
* or 1-31Day-of-Month
* or 1-12Month
* or 0-6 (0 is Sunday)Day-of-Week
•Scheduling on February 29 is not supported.
•Lists are allowed. A list is a set of numbers (or ranges) separated by commas. Examples:
“1,2,5,9”, “0-4,8-12”.
132 Create Commands
•Ranges of numbers are allowed. Ranges are two numbers separated with a hyphen. The
specified range is inclusive. For example, 8-11 for an hour entry specifies execution at hours
8, 9, 10 and 11. Ranges must be specified from low to high.
•One of six special strings may also appear instead of the specification above:
MeaningString
Run every January 1st, "0 0 1 1 *"@yearly
Run the first day of every month, "0 0 1 * *"@monthly
Run every Sunday, "0 0 * * 0"@weekly
Run every midnight, "0 0 * * *"@daily
Run every hour, on the hour, "0 * * * *"@hourly
•If some form of daylight savings or summer/winter time is in effect, then jobs scheduled during
the switchover period could be executed once, twice, or not at all.
createsched 133
createsnmpuser
DESCRIPTION
The createsnmpuser command creates the SNMPv3 user secret key used for generating
authentication and privacy keys. Username must correspond to an existing local user. The user will
be prompted to provide a password, which will be converted to a 20 byte secret key.
SYNTAX
createsnmpuser [options <arg> <username>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the snmpuser_create right
OPTIONS
-p <password>
Specifies the user's password. The length of <password> must be 6 to 8 characters.
SPECIFIERS
<username>
Specifies the SNMPv3 user name. The user name must be an existing HP 3PAR local user.
NOTE: Issuing the createsnmpuser command results in the system prompting for a password.
Type in the password for the user and then press ENTER. The password will be used to generate
authentication and privacy keys using SHA1. The generated key is 20 bytes in length.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the setting of an SNMPv3 user:
cli% createsnmpuser <joe>
Please enter the password below. The password will be used to generate both
authentication and privacy secret keys for use in SNMPv3.
Password for user <joe>:
134 Create Commands
createspare
DESCRIPTION
The createspare command allocates chunklet resources as spares. Chunklets marked as spare
are not used for logical disk creation and are reserved explicitly for spares, thereby guaranteeing
a minimum amount of spare space.
SYNTAX
createspare [options <arg>] <chunklet_specifier>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the spare_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–f
Do not ask for confirmation. The default is to ask for confirmation.
–p
Specifies that partial completion of the command is acceptable. Additionally, specified chunklets
are marked as spare only if they are not spare already.
SPECIFIERS
<chunklet_specifier>...
The chunklet specifier is one of the following arguments:
<PD_ID:chunklet_number>
Specifies the identification of the physical disk and the chunklet number on the disk. This specifier
can be repeated.
<PD_ID:a>
Specifies the identification of the physical disk and all chunklets (a) on the disk. This specifier can
be repeated.
a:<chunklet_num>
Specifies a chunklet number on all physical disks. This specifier can be repeated.
–pos <cage:mag:disk:chunklet_num>
Specifies the position of a specific chunklet identified by its position in a drive cage, drive magazine,
physical disk, and chunklet number. This specifier can be repeated.
–pos <cage:mag:disk:a>
Specifies that all chunklets on a physical disk, identified by drive cage number, drive magazine
number, and physical disk number, are marked spare. This specifier can be repeated.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
createspare 135
EXAMPLES
•The following example marks chunklet 1as spare for physical disk 15:
cli% createspare 15:1
•The following example specifies the position in a drive cage, drive magazine, physical disk,
and chunklet number. –pos 1:0.2:3:121, where 1is the drive cage, 0.2 is the drive
magazine, 3is the physical disk, and 121 is the chunklet number.
cli% createspare –pos 1:0.2:3:121
NOTES
To verify the creation of a spare chunklet, issue the showspare command. See “showspare”
(page 479) for more information.
136 Create Commands
createsv
DESCRIPTION
The createsv command creates a point-in-time (snapshot) copy of a virtual volume. Create
snapshots to perform such tasks as backing up data on the base volume and allowing multiple
copies of a base volume to be modified without affecting the original base volume.
Syntax
createsv [options <arg>] <SV_name> <copy_of_VV | VV_set>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the sv_create right.
OPTIONS
–ro
Specifies that the copied volume is read-only. If not specified, the volume is read/write.
–i <VV_ID>
Specifies the ID of the copied VV. This option cannot be used when VV set is specified.
-exp <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the relative time from the current time that volume will expire. <time> is a positive integer
value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be optionally specified in days
or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following the entered time value.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any additional information up to 511 characters for the volume.
-f
Do not ask for confirmation before creating a volume with retention time (-retain).
-retain <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the amount of time, relative to the current time, that the volume will be retained. <time>
is a positive integer value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be
optionally specified in days or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following
the entered time value.
NOTE: If the volume is not in any domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the
system's VVRetentionTimeMax . The default value for the system's VVRetentionTimeMax is 14 days.
If the volume belongs to a domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the domain's
VVRetentionTimeMax , if set. The retention time cannot be removed or reduced once it is set. If the
volume has its retention time set, it cannot be removed within its retention time. If both expiration
time and retention time are specified, then the retention time cannot be longer than the expiration
time. This option requires the HP 3PAR Virtual Lock License. Contact your local HP 3PAR Authorized
Service Provider for more information.
-noblock
When a read-only snapshot is taken, the storage system blocks host I/O to the parent virtual volume
while the snapshot is being created. If the -noblock option is specified, the storage system will
not block host I/O to the parent virtual volume during snapshot creation. This option is only
applicable for read-only snapshots.
createsv 137
SPECIFIERS
<SV_name>
Specifies the snapshot name, using up to 31 characters in length.
<copy_of_VV | VV_set>
Specifies the parent volume name or volume set name, using up to 31 characters in length. The
VV_set name must start with set:. If copy_of_VV is a VV_set then svname can contain
various patterns that are used to form the snapshot volume name. See Help sub,vvnamepat for
details.
RESTRICTIONS
•Use of this command requires a HP 3PAR Virtual Copy license. Contact your local HP 3PAR
representative for information.
•A read-only snapshot of a read-only source volume is not allowed.
•A read/write snapshot of a read/write snapshot or base is not allowed.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates a read-only snapshot volume svro_vv0 from volume vv0:
cli% createsv –ro svr0_vv0 vv0
The following example creates snapshot volume svrw_vv0 from the snapshot svro_vv0:
cli% createsv svrw_vv0 svro_vv0
The following example creates a snapshot volume for each member of the VV set vvcopies.
Each snapshot will be named svro-<name of parent volume>:
cli% createsv -ro svro-@vvname@ set:vvcopies
If vvcopies contained VVs named vv.0,vv.1 and vv.2 this would result in snapshots named
svro-vv.0,svro-vv.1 and svro-vv.2.
NOTES
•A maximum of 256 writable virtual copies per volume are allowed.
•A maximum of 500 virtual copies per volume are allowed.
•For the VV_set option, the createsv command creates consistent group snapshots of the
VVs in the set. Consistent group snapshots are all created at the same point in time so that
related structures on different volumes in the set remain consistent.
138 Create Commands
createtemplate
DESCRIPTION
The createtemplate command creates Virtual Volume (VV), Logical Disk (LD), and Common
Provisioning Group (CPG) templates. Templates are sets of predetermined parameters that are
applied to the creation of VVs, LDs, and CPGs.
Use of this command with the vv specifier to create a VV is deprecated and will be removed in a
subsequent release. The command createvv should be used instead to create a VV.
SYNTAX
createtemplate vv|LD|CPG [options <arg>] <template_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role that is granted the template_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
•The following options are valid for VV, LD, and CPG templates:
–nro
Indicates that properties not specified in the template are set to read-only.
–nrw
Indicates that properties not specified in the template are set to read/write.
–desc <description>
Specifies a description for the created template. The description can be up to 255 characters long.
-rw
Specifies that the list of property values in the remainder of the command line or until the next -rw
or -ro option are read-write, which means that they can be modified when the template is used.
-ro
Specifies that the list of property values in the remainder of the command line or until the next -rw
or -ro option are read-only, which means that they cannot be modified when the template is used.
If neither -ro nor -rw is specified, the default is -ro.
–t <RAID_type>
Specifies the RAID type of the logical disk: r0 for RAID-0, r1 for RAID-1, r5 for RAID-5, or r6 for
RAID-6. If no RAID type is specified, the default is r1.
–ssz <size_number_chunklets>
Specifies the set size in terms of chunklets. The default depends on the RAID type specified: 2for
RAID-1, 4for RAID-5, and 8for RAID-6.
–rs <size>
Specifies the number of sets in a row using a positive integer. If not specified, no row limit is
imposed.
–ss <size_KB>
Specifies the step size from 32 KB to 512 KB. The step size should be a power of 2 and a multiple
of 32. If no value is entered, the step size defaults to 256 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1, and 128 KB
for RAID-5. For RAID-6, the default is a function of the set size.
createtemplate 139
–ha port|cage|mag
Specifies that the layout must support the failure of one port pair, one cage, or one drive magazine
(mag). This option has no meaning for RAID-0.
–ch first|last
Specifies the chunklet characteristics, either first (attempt to use the lowest numbered available
chunklets) or last (attempt to use the highest numbered available chunklets). If no argument is
specified, the default characteristic is first.
–p <pattern>
Specifies a pattern for candidate disks. Patterns are used to select disks that are used for creating
logical disks. If no pattern is specified, the option defaults to all Fibre Channel (FC) type disks. If
specified multiple times, each instance of the specified pattern adds additional candidate disks
that match the pattern. The -devtype pattern cannot be used to mix Near Line (NL) FC, and Solid
State Drive (SSD) drives.
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node number(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot number(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–4).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port number(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using the -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen
(0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
140 Create Commands
NOTE: The following arguments, –tc_gt , –tc_lt ,–fc_gt , –fc_lt ,–devid , and
–devtype are used to limit the disks that are used to create LDs based on the characteristics of
the disk drive.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command. If it is not specified, the default device type is FC.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example -p -fc_gt 60
-fc_lt 230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free
chunklets and that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
•The following options are used only for VV templates:
–type cpvv|tpvv|none
Specifies the type of VV for the template is being created. Valid arguments are cpvv,tpvv, or
none. Use cpvv if the –cpg <CPG_name> option is used. If creating a template for creating
TPVVs, use tpvv. If cpvv or tpvv are not specified, the default value is none meaning the created
template is applicable for the creation of any volume type. The -type cpvv option is deprecated
and will be removed in a subsequent release.
–cpg <CPG_name>
Specifies that the snapshot data space and snapshot administration space are provisioned from
the indicated CPG (<CPG_name>). The template with this option can only be used with
createaldvv command. This option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
–aw <percent>
Specifies the allocation warning threshold of the CPG. When the snapshot data space of the VV
exceeds the specified percentage of the virtual volume size, an alert is generated. The template
with this option can only be used with createaldvv command. This option is deprecated and
will be removed in a subsequent release.
–al <percent>
createtemplate 141
Specifies the allocation limit threshold of the CPG. The snapshot data space is prevented from
growing beyond the specified percentage of the virtual volume size. The template with this option
can only be used with createaldvv command. This option is deprecated and will be removed
in a subsequent release.
–size <size>[g|G|t|T]
Specifies the size of the virtual volume and logical disk in megabytes. Size can be specified in
megabytes (default) or in gigabytes by using the g|G parameter and terabytes by using the t|T
parameter. To specify the size in gigabytes, enter gor G, for terabytes, enter tor T, directly after
the specified size (no space).
–szs <size>[g|G|t|T]
By default, specifies the size of the snapshot volume in megabytes using an integer from 0through
2096128(2047 GB). Size can be specified in megabytes (default) or in gigabytes by using the
g|G parameter and terabytes by using the t|T parameter. To specify the size in gigabytes, enter
gor G, for terabytes, enter tor T, directly after the specified size (no space). If not specified,
snapshot space is 0. This option cannot be used with the –pct option. The template with this option
can only be used with the createaldvv command. This option is deprecated and will be removed
in a subsequent release.
–pct <prc>
Specifies the size of the snapshot volume as a percentage of the user volume. If not specified, the
default value is 0 percent of your user volume. This option cannot be used with the –szs option.
If used with the –cpg <CPG_name>option, the percentage value is 0. The template with this
option can only be used with the createaldvv command. This option is deprecated and will be
removed in a subsequent release.
-spt <sectors_per_track>
Defines the virtual volume geometry sectors per track value that is reported to the hosts through the
SCSI mode pages. The valid range is between 4 to 8192 and the default value is 304.
-hpc <heads_per_cylinder>
Allows you to define the virtual volume geometry heads per cylinder value that is reported to the
hosts though the SCSI mode pages. The valid range is between 1 to 255 and the default value is
8.
–pol <pol>[,<pol>...]
Specifies the policy that the created virtual volume follows. If an argument is not specified, the
option defaults to stale_ss.
stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are permitted. Failure to update snapshot data does not
affect the write to the base volume, but the snapshot is considered invalid.
no_stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are not permitted. Failure to update a snapshot is considered
a failure to write to the base volume.
one_host
This constrains the export of a volume to one host or one host cluster (when cluster names can be
used as a host name).
no_one_host
This policy should only be used when exporting a virtual volume to multiple hosts for use by a
cluster-aware application, or when “port presents” VLUNs are used. This is the default policy setting.
tp_bzero
142 Create Commands
Specifies that if a host write results in the allocation of a new data page that is only partially filled
by the host write, then a zero-fill is performed on the unwritten portion of the data page. This
ensures that the host cannot read data from deleted volumes or snapshot. The default allocation
page size is 16 KB.
no_tp_bzero
Specifies that the zero-fill operation is bypassed on the allocation of partially written data pages.
-usr_cpg <usr_cpg>
Specifies the name of the CPG from which the user space will be allocated.
-usr_aw <percent>
Indicates a user space allocation warning. Generates a warning alert when the user data space
of the TPVV exceeds the specified percentage of the virtual volume size.
-usr_al <percent>
Indicates the user space allocation limit. The user space of the TPVV is prevented from growing
beyond the indicated percentage of the virtual volume size. After this limit is reached, any new
writes to the virtual volume will fail.
-snp_cpg <snp_cpg>
The name of the CPG from which the snapshot space is allocated.
-snp_aw <percent>
Provides a snapshot space allocation warning. Generates a warning alert when the snapshot space
of the virtual volume exceeds the specified percentage of the virtual volume size.
-snp_al <percent>
Provides a snapshot space allocation limit. The snapshot space of the virtual volume is prevented
from growing beyond the indicated percentage of the virtual volume size.
•The following options are only used for CPG templates:
–aw <percent>
Specifies the percentage of used snapshot administration or snapshot data space that results in a
warning alert. A percent value of 0 disables the warning alert generation. The default is 0. This
option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
–sdgs <size>[g|G|t|T]
Specifies the growth increment, the amount of logical disk storage created on each auto-grow
operation. The default and minimum growth increments vary according to the number of controller
nodes in the system. If <size> is non-zero it must be 8 G or bigger. Size can be specified in
megabytes (default) or in gigabytes by using the g|G parameter or terabytes by using the t|T
parameter. To specify the size in gigabytes, enter gor G, for terabytes, enter tor T, directly after
the specified size (no space). A size of 0 disables the auto-grow feature. The following table
displays the default and minimum growth increments per number of nodes:
MinimumDefaultNumber of Nodes
8G32G1-2
16G64G3-4
24G96G5-6
32G128G7-8
–sdgl <size>[g|G|t|T]
Limits the auto-grow from exceeding this storage amount. A size of 0 means no limit is enforced.
Size can be specified in megabytes (default) or in gigabytes by using the g|G parameter or
createtemplate 143
terabytes by using the t|T parameter. To specify the size in gigabytes, enter gor G, for terabytes,
enter tor T, directly after the specified size (no space). The default is 0.
–sdgw <size>[g|G|t|T]
Issues a warning alert when the used logical disk space exceeds this amount. A size of 0 means
no warning limit is enforced. Size can be specified in megabytes (default) or in gigabytes by using
the g|G parameter or terabytes by using the t|T parameter. To specify the size in gigabytes,
enter gor G, for terabytes, enter tor T, directly after the specified size (no space). The default
is 0.
SPECIFIERS
VV|LD|CPG
Specifies that the template is for the creation of a Virtual Volume (VV), Logical Disk (LD), or Common
Provisioning Group (CPG).
<template_name>
Specifies the name of the template, up to 31 characters in length.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates a virtual volume template called vvr1. The –ha and –pol option
values are fixed. The RAID type can be changed when the virtual volume is created. Note that if
patterns are specified, it is not possible to mix read-only and read/write pattern specifications.
cli% createtemplate vv -ha mag -rw -t r1 -ro -pol stale_ss vvr1
The command rejects the pattern.
cli% createtemplate vv –ro –p –nd 0 –rw –p –mg 1,2 vpatt vvr1
NOTES
•By default, logical disk are created using only physical disks with the same device type. (By
default, the Fibre Channel device type is used). Use the –p devtype NL or -p -devtype
SSD option to override this default. Use the showpd command to see the device types of
physical disks in the system.
•The value for –ssz and –rs can be set to –. This can be used in conjunction with the (default)
read-only property for options to ensure that their value cannot be changed when a virtual
volume or logical disk or CPG is created and the system is used to set the default values for
these options.
•The options -sdgs,-sdgl and -sdgw control the auto logical disk creation for the CPG's
snapshot data regions. Auto logical disk creation occurs when the amount of free logical disk
space falls below the specified grow (enlarge) size setting options (-sdgs,-sdgl).
•For this command:
•KB = 1024 bytes
•MB = 1024 KB
•GB = 1024 MB
144 Create Commands
createtpvv
DESCRIPTION
This command is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release. Please use the createvv
-tpvv command in the future.
The createtpvv command creates a multi-space Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volume (TPVV). When
the -snp_cpg option is specified, both of the user space and snapshot space of the TPVV are
created.
When the -snp_cpg option is not specified, only the user space of the TPVV is created and the
snapshot space is not created. The user can't create the snapshots of the volume without creating
the snapshot space.
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the vv_create right.
SYNTAX
createtpvv [options] <usr_cpg> <vvname> [.<index>] <virtsize>[g|G|t|T]
OPTIONS
–i <ID>
Specifies the volume ID.
–cnt <count>
Specifies the number of identical Virtual Volumes (VVs) to create. This must be an integer from 1
to 999. If <id> is specified with -i option, it is used as the ID of the first VV and incremented by
1 for each subsequent volume.
•The following option specifies the name of the template used to create a TPVV.
–templ <template_name>
Use the options defined in template <template_name>. The template is created using the
createtemplate command. Options specified in the template are read-only or read-write. The
read-write options may be overridden with new options at the time of their creation, but read-only
options may not be overridden at the time of creation. Options not explicitly specified in the template
take their default values, and all of these options are either read-only or read-write (using the -nro
or -nrw options of the createtemplate command). If not included, the -size and -cpg options
are automatically treated as read-write even if the other not included properties are marked
read-only.
•The following option is used to create the snapshot space of the TPVV:
-snp_cpg <snp_cpg>
Specifies the name of the Commonly Provisioned Group (CPG) from which the snapshot space will
be allocated.
•The following options are used to set the allocation policies of the TPVV:
-usr_aw <percent>
This option enables user space allocation warning. It specifies that a warning alert is generated
when the user space of the TPVV exceeds the specified percentage of the VV size.
-usr_al <percent>
createtpvv 145
This option sets the user space allocation limit. The user space of the TPVV is prevented from
growing beyond the indicated percentage of the VV size. After this size is reached, any new writes
to the VV will fail.
-snp_aw <percent>
Enables a snapshot space allocation warning. A warning alert is generated when the snapshot
space of the VV exceeds the indicated percentage of the VV size.
-snp_al <percent>
Sets a snapshot space allocation limit. The snapshot space of the VV is prevented from growing
beyond the indicated percentage of the VV size.
-spt <sectors_per_track>
Defines the VV geometry sectors per track value that is reported to the hosts through the SCSI mode
pages. The valid range is between 4 to 8192 and the default value is 304.
-hpc <heads_per_cylinder>
Defines the VV geometry heads per cylinder value that is reported to the hosts though the SCSI
mode pages. The valid range is between 1 to 255 and the default value is 8.
-exp <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the relative time from the current time that volume will expire. <time> is a positive integer
value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be optionally specified in days
or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following the entered time value.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any additional information up to 511 characters for the volume.
-f
Do not ask for confirmation before creating a volume with retention time (-retain).
-retain <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the amount of time, relative to the current time, that the volume will be retained. <time>
is a positive integer value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be
optionally specified in days or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following
the entered time value.
NOTE: If the volume is not in any domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the
system's VVRetentionTimeMax . The default value for the system's VVRetentionTimeMax is 14 days.
If the volume belongs to a domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the domain's
VVRetentionTimeMax , if set. The retention time cannot be removed or reduced once it is set. If the
volume has its retention time set, it cannot be removed within its retention time. If both expiration
time and retention time are specified, then the retention time cannot be longer than the expiration
time. This option requires the HP 3PAR Virtual Lock License. Contact your local HP 3PAR Authorized
Service Provider for more information.
•The following defines the volume policy:
–pol <pol>[,<pol>...]
Specifies VV policies.
stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are permitted. Failure to update snapshot data does not
affect the write to the base volume, but the snapshot is considered invalid.
no_stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are not permitted. Failure to update a snapshot is considered
a failure to write to the base volume.
one_host
146 Create Commands
This constrains the export of a volume to one host or one host cluster (when cluster names can be
used as a host name).
no_one_host
This policy should only be used when exporting a VV to multiple hosts for use by a cluster-aware
application, or when “port presents” VLUNs are used. This is the default policy setting.
tp_bzero
Specifies that if a host write results in the allocation of a new data page that is only partially filled
by the host write, then a zero-fill is performed on the unwritten portion of the data page. This
ensures that the host cannot read data from deleted volumes or snapshot. The allocation page size
is 16 KB. This is the default policy setting.
no_tp_bzero
Specifies that the zero-fill operation is bypassed on the allocation of partially written data pages.
zero_detect
This policy enables the HP 3PAR Storage System to scan for zeros in the incoming write data. This
feature when used during physical copy to a TPVV will avoid allocating space for blocks containing
zero. This feature when used with a Thin Persistence license will reclaim allocated space when
zero blocks are written to the TPVV. This policy is only applicable for the base TPVV.
NOTE: Thin Persistence can have some performance implications during extremely busy system
conditions. HP recommends the zero_detect policy only be enabled during Thin Persistence and
Thin Conversion operations. The zero_detect policy should be disabled during normal operation.
no_zero_detect
This policy disables the HP 3PAR Storage System to scan for zeros in the incoming write data to
reclaim allocated space on the volume. This is the default policy setting.
SPECIFIERS
<usr_CPG>
Specifies the CPG name of the user space of the TPVV. If the CPG name is to be taken from a
template, this field should be (-).
<vvname>[.<index>]
Specifies the VV name up to 31 characters in length. If the -cnt option is used, the optional
decimal number <index> specifies the name of the first VV (<vvname>.<index>). The <index>
is incremented by 1 for each subsequent VV. The <index> must be an integer from 0 to 999999.
All VV names have the same length constraint.
<virtsize>[g|G|t|T]
Size for the VV in MB (maximum of 16 T, minimum of 256 MB). The volume size is rounded up
to the next multiple of 32 MB. The size should be an integer. An optional suffix (with no white
space before the suffix) will modify the units to GB (gor Gsuffix) or TB (tor Tsuffix). If the size is
to be taken from a template, this field should be (-).
RESTRICTIONS
Use of this command requires a Thin Provisioning license. Contact your local HP 3PAR representative
for information.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the creation of a TPVV named tpvv1:
cli% createtpvv -usr_aw 50 -usr_al 75 cpg1 tpvv1 1g
createtpvv 147
In the preceding example, a 1 GB TPVV named tpvv1 is allocated from a CPG named cpg1 and
its allocation warnings and limits are set at 50% and 75%, respectively.
The following example creates 3 VVs vv1.2, vv1.3, vv1.4:
cli% createtpvv -cnt 3 cpg1 vv1.2 1g
The following example creates a TPVV named tpvv1 with the template temp1:
cli% createtpvv -templ temp1 cpg3 tpvv1 2g
NOTES
For this command:
•MB = 1048576 bytes
•GB = 1024 MB
•TB = 1024 GB
148 Create Commands
createuser
DESCRIPTION
The createuser command creates a new user with the specified name and role in the specified
domain.
SYNTAX
createuser [option <arg>] <user_name> <domain_name> <role>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the user_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
Only one of the following options can be specified:
–c <clear–text_password>
Specifies the user's password in the clear-text format. The password must be six to eight characters
in length.
–e <encrypted_password>
Specifies the user's password in the encrypted format. The password must be less than or equal
to 31 characters in length.
SPECIFIERS
<user_name>
Specifies the name of the user, using up to 31 characters in length. Valid characters are
alphanumeric (letters and digits), a period ( . ), a dash ( - ), or an underscore ( _ ). The first character
must either be alphanumeric or an underscore for non-SSH users. To access the system via SSH,
the first character of the <user_name> must be alphanumeric.
<domain_name>
Specifies the name of the domain in which the created user will belong. The domain name can be
up to 31 characters in length.
<role>
The user role. Valid values for role are "browse", "edit", "service", "super" and any extended
role. Use showrole to list extended roles.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•Encrypted passwords are generated by the system. Therefore, you can only specify previously
generated encrypted passwords. All passwords must be at least six characters long.
createuser 149
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the successful creation of a new user user1 with the clear-text
password 123456, with access to all service pools, and with edit level authority:
cli% createuser –c 123456 user1 testdomain edit
User created
NOTES
•If no password is specified using the -c or -e options, then you will be prompted for a
clear-text password.
•Verify the creation of a new user by issuing the showuser command. See “showuser”
(page 497) for more information.
150 Create Commands
createvlun
DESCRIPTION
The createvlun command creates a Virtual Logical Unit Number (VLUN) template that enables
export of a Virtual Volume (VV) as a SCSI VLUN to one or more host(s). A SCSI VLUN is created
when the current system state matches the rule established by the VLUN template.
There are four types of VLUN templates:
•port presents - created when only the node:slot:port are specified. The VLUN is visible
to any initiator on the specified port.
•host set - created when a host set is specified. The VLUN is visible to the initiators of any host
that is a member of the set.
•host sees - created when the hostname is specified. The VLUN is visible to the initiators with
any of the host’s World Wide Names (WWNs).
•matched set - created when both hostname and node:slot:port are specified. The VLUN
is visible to initiators with the host’s WWNs only on the specified port.
Conflicts between overlapping VLUN templates are resolved using prioritization, with port presents
templates having the lowest priority and matched set templates having the highest.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the createvlun command can be one of the following:
Port presents:
•createvlun [options] <VV_name | VV_set> <LUN> <node:slot:port>
Host set:
•createvlun [options] <VV_name | VV_set> <LUN> <host_set>
Host sees:
•createvlun [options] <VV_name | VV_set> <LUN> <host_name>
Matched set:
•createvlun [options] <VV_name | VV_set> <LUN> <node:slot:port>
<host_name>
•createvlun [options] <VV_name | VV_set> <LUN> <host_name>
<node:slot:port>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the vlun_create right.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the operation is forced and that the VLUN is created even if the specified VV has
existing VLUNs. Unless the –f option is specified, the command asks for confirmation if a VV is
already exported in a VLUN template.
–cnt <number>
Specifies that a sequence of VLUNs, as specified by the number argument, are exported to the
same system port and host that is created. The number argument can be specified as any integer.
createvlun 151
For each VLUN created, the .int suffix of the VV_name specifier and LUN are incremented by
one.
–novcn
Specifies that a VLUN Change Notification (VCN) not be issued after export. For direct connect
or loop configurations, a VCN consists of a Fibre Channel Loop Initialization Primitive (LIP). For
fabric configurations, a VCN consists of a Registered State Change Notification (RSCN) that is
sent to the fabric controller.
–ovrd
Specifies that existing lower priority VLUNs will be overridden, if necessary. Can only be used
when exporting to a specific host.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name | VV_set>
Specifies the VV name or VV set name, using up to 31 characters in length. The volume name is
provided in the syntax of basename.int. The VV_set name must start with set:.
<LUN>
Specifies the LUN as an integer from 0through 16383. Alternatively <n>+ can be used to indicate
a LUN should be auto assigned, but be a minimum of n, or n-m to indicate that a LUN should be
chosen in the range nto m. In addition the keyword auto may be used and is treated as 0+.
<host_name>
Specifies the host where the LUN is exported, using up to 31 characters.
<host_set>
Specifies the host set where the LUN is exported, using up to 31 characters.
<node:slot:port>
Specifies the system port of the virtual LUN export.
node
Specifies the system port, where the node is a number between 0and 7.
slot
Specifies the PCI bus slot in the node, where the slot is a number between 0and 5.
port
Specifies the port number on the FC card, where the port number between 1and 4.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example exports VV test on LUN 2:
cli% createvlun test 2 testhost
NOTES
•If a volume is already exported as a VLUN, you will be prompted for confirmation if a new
export of the same volume is attempted.
•The host and port can both be supplied when issuing this command (matched set). This is the
most restrictive access as both the host name and port must match before access to the VLUN
is granted.
152 Create Commands
•Verify the creation of VLUNs by issuing the showvlun command. See “showvlun” (page 503)
for more information.
•Conflicts between overlapping VLUN templates are resolved by a priority order among
templates with matched set being the highest and port presents the lowest.
•Exports from a VV set must be contiguous and, if there is another export already present, the
set cannot be extended and generates the following error due to the conflict on the LUN ID:
Error message: Unable to extend vv set VVSETNAME
To add to an exported VV set in the future, leave a gap between the VV set export and any further
exports to allow for expansion. The createvlun vv 100+ host command can be used, which
will use the next free VLUN from 100 onwards; this allows you to take advantage of the auto lun
functionality but retains some separation between ranges.
createvlun 153
createvv
DESCRIPTION
The createvv command creates volumes that are provisioned from one or more Common
Provisioning Groups (CPGs). Volumes can be fully provisioned from a CPG or can be thinly
provisioned. You can optionally specify a CPG for snapshot space for fully provisioned volumes.
Syntax
createvv [options] <usr_CPG> <VV_name> [.<index>] <size>[g|G|t|T]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the vv_create right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command with logical disks specified.
OPTIONS
-templ <template_name>
Use the options defined in template <tname>. The template is created using the createtemplate
command. Options specified in the template are read-only or read/write. The read/write options
may be overridden with new options at creation time but read-only options may not be overridden
their default values, and all of these options are either read-only or read/write (using the -nro or
-nrw options of the createtemplate command). If not included, the -size and -usr_cpg
options are automatically treated as read-write even if the other not included properties are marked
read-only.
-i <ID>
Specifies the ID of the volume. The default is the next available ID.
–cnt <count>
Specifies the number of identical VVs to create. This must be an integer from 1 through 999. If
<id> is specified with -i option, it is used as the ID of the first VV and incremented by 1 for each
subsequent volume.
-shared
Specifies that the system will try to share the Logical Disks (LDs) among the VVs. This option can
only be used with the -cnt option. This option cannot be used with the -tpvv option.
-wait <secs>
If the command would fail due to the lack of clean space, the -wait option specifies the number
of seconds to wait for the system to clean the dirty space before returning. If -wait 0 is issued,
the command returns immediately. If this option is not used, the command will keep waiting for
dirty chunklets to be cleaned if enough space will be available with the dirty chunklets cleaned.
This option cannot be used with the -tpvv option.
-exp <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the relative time from the current time that volume will expire. <time> is a positive integer
value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be optionally specified in days
or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following the entered time value.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any additional information up to 511 characters in length for the volume.
-f
154 Create Commands
Do not ask for confirmation before creating a volume with retention time (-retain).
-retain <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the amount of time, relative to the current time, that the volume will be retained. <time>
is a positive integer value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be
optionally specified in days or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following
the entered time value.
NOTE: If the volume is not in any domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the
system's VVRetentionTimeMax . The default value for the system's VVRetentionTimeMax is 14 days.
If the volume belongs to a domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the domain's
VVRetentionTimeMax , if set. The retention time cannot be removed or reduced once it is set. If the
volume has its retention time set, it cannot be removed within its retention time. If both expiration
time and retention time are specified, then the retention time cannot be longer than the expiration
time. This option requires the HP 3PAR Virtual Lock License. Contact your local HP 3PAR Authorized
Service Provider for more information.
-spt <sectors_per_track>
Defines the VV geometry sectors_per_track value that is reported to the hosts through the
SCSI mode pages. The valid range is from 4 to 8192 and the default value is 304.
-hpc <heads_per_cylinder>
Defines the VV geometry heads_per_cylinder value that is reported to the hosts though
the SCSI mode pages. The valid range is from 1 to 1024 and the default value is 8.
–pol <pol>[,<pol>...]
Specifies the VV policies.
stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are permitted. Failure to update snapshot data does not
affect the write to the base volume, but the snapshot is considered invalid.
no_stale_ss
Specifies that invalid snapshot volumes are not permitted. Failure to update a snapshot is considered
a failure to write to the base volume.
one_host
This constrains the export of a volume to one host or one host cluster (when cluster names can be
used as a host name).
no_one_host
This policy should only be used when exporting a VV to multiple hosts for use by a cluster-aware
application, or when port presents VLUNs are used. This is the default policy setting.
tp_bzero
Specifies that if a host write results in the allocation of a new data page that is only partially filled
by the host write, then a zero-fill is performed on the unwritten portion of the data page. This
ensures that the host cannot read data from deleted volumes or snapshot. The allocation page size
is 16 KB. This is the default policy setting.
no_tp_bzero
Specifies that the zero-fill operation is bypassed on the allocation of partially written data pages.
zero_detect
This policy enables the HP 3PAR Storage System to scan for zeros in the incoming write data. This
feature when used during physical copy to a TPVV will avoid allocating space for blocks containing
zero. This feature when used with a Thin Persistence license will reclaim allocated space when
zero blocks are written to the TPVV. This policy is only applicable for the base TPVV.
createvv 155
NOTE: Thin Persistence can have some performance implications during extremely busy system
conditions. HP recommends the zero_detect policy only be enabled during Thin Persistence and
Thin Conversion operations. The zero_detect policy should be disabled during normal operation.
no_zero_detect
This policy disables the HP 3PAR Storage System to scan for zeros in the incoming write data to
reclaim allocated space on the volume. This is the default policy setting.
-snp_cpg <snp_CPG>
Specifies the name of the CPG from which the snapshot space is allocated.
-snp_aw <percent>
Enables a snapshot space allocation warning. A warning alert is generated when the reserved
snapshot space of the VV exceeds the indicated percentage of the VV size.
-snp_al <percent>
Sets a snapshot space allocation limit. The snapshot space of the VV is prevented from growing
beyond the indicated percentage of the VV size.
The following options can be used when creating Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volumes (TPVVs):
-tpvv
Specifies that the volume should be a TPVV.
-usr_aw <percent>
This option enables user space allocation warning. It specifies that a warning alert is generated
when the reserved user space of the TPVV exceeds the specified percentage of the VV size.
-usr_al <percent>
This option sets the user space allocation limit. The user space of the TPVV is prevented from
growing beyond the indicated percentage of the VV size. After this size is reached, any new writes
to the VV will fail.
SPECIFIERS
<usr_CPG>
Specifies the name of the CPG from which the volume user space will be allocated. If the -tpvv
option is specified, the volume is thinly provisioned. Otherwise, the volume is fully provisioned
from the specified CPG. If the name of the CPG is to be taken from a template, this field should
be (–).
<VV_name> [.<index>]
Specifies a VV name up to 31 characters in length. If the -cnt option is used, the optional decimal
number <index> specifies the name of the first VV (<vvname>.<index>). The <index> is
incremented by 1 for each subsequent VV. The <index> must be an integer from 0 through 999999.
All VVs have the same length constraint.
<size>[g|G|t|T]
Specifies the size for the volume in MB. The volume size is rounded up to the next multiple of 256
MB. The size should be an integer. An optional suffix (with no whitespace before the suffix) will
modify the units to GB (gor Gsuffix) or TB (tor Tsuffix). If the size is to be taken from a template,
this field should be (-).
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command with logical disks specified.
•Use of this command with the -tpvv option requires a Thin Provisioning license. Contact your
local HP 3PAR representative for information.
156 Create Commands
•The -templ option is not valid for volumes that are fully provisioned.
•The -shared and -wait option cannot be used when creating Thinly Provisioned Virtual
Volumes with the -tpvv option.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates a 10 G TPVV named tpvv1 whose user space is allocated from
the common provisioning group cpg1:
cli% createvv -tpvv -usr_aw 50 -usr_al 75 cpg1 tpvv1 10G
The following example creates 3 VVs vv1.2,vv1.3,vv1.4:
cli% createvv -cnt 3 cpg1 vv1.2 1g
The following example creates 2 VVs vva.0 and vva.1 which may share LDs:
cli% createvv -cnt 3 cpg1 vv1.2 1g
The following example creates a TPVV named tpvv1 with the template, temp2:
cli% createvv -tpvv -templ temp2 cpg2 tpvv1 2g
NOTES
•Using the -shared option can be more efficient when creating a large number of small
volumes since the system will attempt to share the underlying LDs. However, if volumes are
subsequently removed, this can lead to unused space in the LDs that cannot be reclaimed.
Using -cnt option without the -shared option avoids this problem, but can be inefficient
when creating small volumes due to the overhead of creating a larger number of unshared
LDs for the volumes.
•Verify the creation of VV by issuing the showvv command. See “showvv” (page 506) for more
information.
•The maximum VV size is 16 Terabytes.
•For this command:
•MB = 1048576 bytes
•GB = 1024 MB
•TB = 1024 GB
createvv 157
createvvcopy
DESCRIPTION
The createvvcopy command creates a full physical copy of a Virtual Volume (VV) or a read/write
virtual copy on another VV. This enables you to create copies of VV to perform tasks such as moving
data to a larger VV or creating a copy of data for testing.
Syntax
The syntax for the createvvcopy command can be one of the following:
•createvvcopy –p <parent_volume | parent_volumeset> [options]
<destination_volume | destination_volumeset>
•createvvcopy –p <parent_volume> -online [-snp_cpg <snap_cpg>] [-tpvv]
<destination cpg> <destination volume>
•createvvcopy –r [options] <destination_volume |
destination_volumeset>
•createvvcopy –halt <destination_volume | destination_volumeset>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the vvcopy_create right.
OPTIONS
–p <parent_volume | parent_volumeset>
Specifies that a snapshot of the specified parent volume or volume set is created and copied to a
specified destination volume or volume set (as indicated with the <destination_volume |
destination_volumeset> specifier). The set name must start with set:. The parent volume
must be a base volume or read/write snapshot. This option cannot be used with the –roption.
–r
Specifies that the destination volume be resynchronized with its parent volume using a saved
snapshot so that only the changes since the last copy or resynchronization need to be copied. A
snapshot of the parent saved using the –s option in an earlier createvvcopy instance is required
for the resynchronization operation. This old snapshot is replaced by a new snapshot for the next
resynchronization operation (the –s option is implied, and need not be specified). This option
cannot be used with the –poption.
–halt
Specifies that an ongoing physical copy to be stopped. This will cause the destination volume to
be marked with the 'cpf' status, which will be cleared up when a new copy is started.
–s
Saves the snapshot of the source volume after the copy of the volume is completed. This enables
a fast copy for the next resynchronization. If not specified, the snapshot is deleted and the
association of the destination volume as a copy of the source volume is removed. The –soption
is implied when the –roption is used and need not be explicitly specified.
–b
Specifies that this command blocks until the operation is completed. If not specified, the
createvvcopy command operation is started as a background task.
-pri <high|med|low>
158 Create Commands
Specifies the priority of the copy operation when it is started. This option allows the user to control
the overall speed of a particular task. If this option is not specified, the createvvcopy operation
is started with default priority of medium. High priority indicates that the operation will complete
faster. Low priority indicates that the operation will run slower than the default priority task. This
option cannot be used with -halt option.
-online
Specifies that the copy is to be performed online. The destination can be immediately exported
and is automatically created by this command, meaning that it cannot exist prior to executing this
command. This option requires the specification of a CPG for the destination volume and allows
for the -snp_cpg and -tpvv options. The -online option requires the -p option and cannot
be used with the -r,-halt,-s,-b, and -pri options.
SPECIFIERS
<destination_cpg>
Specifies the destination CPG to use for the destination volume if the -online option is specified.
<destination_volume | destination_volumeset>
Specifies the destination volume name or volume set name for the copy operation using up to 31
characters in length. The volume set name must start with set:. The destination volume (or each
member of the destination volume set) must be a writable base volume (not a snapshot) of equal
or greater size than a parent volume (if specified) and it must not be exported as a VLUN.
RESTRICTIONS
•The source and destination volumes must be writable.
•The destination volume cannot be exported as a VLUN before or during the createvvcopy
command process.
•The destination volume must be greater than or equal in size to the source volume.
•If both the destination and source are volume sets then they must contain the same number of
members.
•If the source is a volume set then the destination name can contain various patterns that are
used to form the copy volume name. See Help sub, vvnamepat for details. Note that the
time/date related patterns are not supported in this command.
•If the –soption is specified to save a snapshot for fast resynchronization and the snapshot
goes stale, the copy fails.
•A physical copy of a VV fails in any situation that a snapshot copy fails or when there is
insufficient snapshot space or I/O errors.
•A Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volume cannot be reverse-copied to a Commonly Provisioned
Virtual Volume. That is, you cannot create a reversed copy from a TPVV to a CPVV after
creating a copy from a CPVV to a TPVV using the same volumes.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the creation of a copy of the VV vv1:
cli% createvvcopy –p vv1 vv2
Started copy. child=vv2 parent=vv1
createvvcopy 159
Create a set of copies for the volumes in set vvcopyset, keeping snapshots around for quick
resynchronization:
cli% createvvcopy -s -p set:vvcopyset set:copys
Child Parent Status TaskID
s1 foo started 14
s2 bar started 15
s3 baz queued 16
Resynchronize the volumes in the volume set copies:
createvvcopy -r set:copies
Child Parent Status TaskID
s1 started 17
s2 started 18
s3 queued 19
Create a set of copies for the volumes in set vvcopyset, mapping the parent volumes to destination
volumes with a pattern:
cli% createvvcopy -p set:vvcopyset @vvname@-copy
Child Parent Status TaskID
foo-copy foo started 20
bar-copy bar started 21
baz-copy baz queued 22
Create an online copy of vv1 that is named vv2 which is fully-provisioned, using cpg1 as its user
space and cpg2 as its snapshot space:
cli% createvvcopy -p vv1 -online -snp_cpg cpg2 cpg1 vv2
NOTES
•The createvvcopy command can be issued multiple times. However, the HP 3PAR Storage
System allows only two active physical copy tasks to run concurrently. Any additional physical
copy tasks are queued, pending the completion of the active physical copy tasks.
•Multiple physical copy operations can occur simultaneously. Host-initiated I/O operations and
those operations initiated by issuing the createvvcopy command are executed at the same
priority level. As a result, noticeable performance degradation from a host perspective can
be observed.
•Issuing the createvvcopy command results in the creation of a temporary snapshot and, in
the case of –r, a resynchronization (resync) snapshot.
•The temporary and resynchronization snapshots cannot be deleted while the copy is in progress.
•Upon completion of the copy, the temporary snapshot is automatically deleted if the –soption
is not specified.
•If the resynchronization snapshot is saved, it can later be manually deleted. If the
resynchronization snapshot is deleted, later resynchronization is not possible.
•If the –soption is not specified, the relationship between the destination volume and source
volume is not retained.
•Issue the showvv command to verify that a virtual volume copy has been made.
•Issue the showvv –dcommand to display the number of blocks remaining to be copied.
160 Create Commands
•If the source or destination are volume sets then the createvvcopy command creates
consistent group snapshots at the same point in time so that related structures on different
volumes in the group remain consistent.
•On systems that support zero_detect, if destination volume is a TPVV, zero_detect policy is
enabled at start of physical copy. After physical copy completes, the policy is changed to
no_zero_detect, even when the destination TPVV had zero_detect policy enabled before the
start of physical copy operation.
•When Thin Persistence license is present, createvvcopy command will reclaim allocated
space when zero blocks are written to the destination TPVV.
•If the -pri option is not specified, the physical copy will start at the default priority. If the tunes
and host I/O are running, then it is recommended to start vvcopy with the default priority.
•The -online option for an online copy automatically creates a destination volume, so unlike
other physical copies, the destination volume should not exist. The destination volume requires
a CPG to be specified, and optionally it can be either a TPVV or have a snapshot CPG
associated with it. The destination volume can be immediately exported. The —online option
cannot be used with the -r,-halt,-s,-b, and -pri options.
createvvcopy 161
createvvset
DESCRIPTION
The createvvset command defines a new set of Virtual Volumes (VV) and provides the option
of assigning one or more existing VVs to that set. The command also allows the addition of VVs
to an existing set by use of the -add option.
SYNTAX
createvvset [options] <setname> [<VV | pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vvset_create right.
OPTIONS
-add
Specifies that the VVs listed should be added to an existing set. At least one VV must be specified.
-cnt <num>
Add a sequence of <num> VVs starting with vvname. The vvname should be of the format
<basename>.<int>. For each VV in the sequence, the .<int> suffix of the vvname is
incremented by 1.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any comment or additional information for the set. The comment can be up to 255
characters in length. Unprintable characters are not allowed.
-domain <domain>
Create the VV set in the specified domain. For an empty set the default is to create it in the current
domain, or no domain if the current domain is not set. A VV set must be in the same domain as
its members; if VVs are specified as part of the creation then the set will be created in their domain.
A domain cannot be specified when adding a VV to an existing set with the -add option.
SPECIFIERS
<setname>
Specifies the name of the VV set to create or add to. The name can be up to 27 characters in
length.
<VV | pattern>...
Optional lists of VVs or glob-style pattern matching VVs which are to be included in the VV set. If
no <VV> or <pattern> is specified a VV set with no VVs is created. If the -cnt option is used
then a VV must be specified.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To create an empty vvset:
cli% createvvset
162 Create Commands
To add a VV to the set:
cli% createvvset -add vvset vv1
To create a VV set with a comment and a collection of VVs in it:
cli% createvvset -comment “Our Oracle VVs” -cnt 10 oravv oravv.0
NOTES
None.
createvvset 163
12 Dismiss Commands
dismisspd
DESCRIPTION
The dismisspd command removes Physical Disk (PD) definitions from system use.
SYNTAX
dismisspd <PD_ID>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role that is granted the pd_dismiss right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
None
SPECIFIERS
<PD_ID>...
Specifies the PD(s), identified by integers, to be removed from system use.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•A PD that is in use cannot be removed.
EXAMPLES
The following example removes a physical disk with ID 1:
cli% dismisspd 1
NOTES
Verify the removal of a physical disk by issuing the showpd command. See “showpd” (page 420)
for more information.
164 Dismiss Commands
dismissrcopylink
DESCRIPTION
The dismissrcopylink command removes one or more links (connections) created with the
admitrcopylink command to a target system.
SYNTAX
•Syntax for Remote Copy over IP (RCIP):
dismissrcopylink <target_name> <node:slot:port:IP_address>...
•Syntax for Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC):
dismissrcopylink <target_name> <node:slot:port:WWN>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the rccopylink_dismiss right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<target_name>
The target name, as specified with the creatercopytarget command.
<node:slot:port:IP_address>...
Specifies the node, slot, and port of the Ethernet port on the local system and an IP address of the
peer port on the target system. This specifier can be repeated.
<node:slot:port:WWN>...
Specifies the node, slot, and port of the Fibre Channel port on the local system and a World Wide
Name (WWN) of the peer port on the target system. This specifier can be repeated.
RESTRICTIONS
•This command requires an HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for further information.
•This command should only be used to remove sending links.
•This command cannot be used to remove the last link of a target system with started groups.
EXAMPLES
The following example removes the link from the Ethernet port located at 2:2:2 of System 2:
# dismissrcopylink System2 2:2:2:193.1.2.11
dismissrcopylink 165
NOTES
•This command is finished with a list of one or more links to be dismissed.
•For IP targets, this list is made up of pairs composed of the node containing the Ethernet port
on the primary system and an IP address on the backup system.
•For Fibre Channel targets, this list is made up of sets with the node, slot, and port of the Fibre
Channel adaptor port on the primary system and a WWN address on the backup system.
166 Dismiss Commands
dismissrcopytarget
DESCRIPTION
The dismissrcopytarget command removes a Remote Copy target from a Remote Copy
volume group.
SYNTAX
dismissrcopytarget [options] <target_name> <group_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the rcopytarget_dismiss right.
OPTIONS
-f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<target_name>
The name of the target to be removed.
<group_name>
The name of the group that currently includes the target.
RESTRICTIONS
•This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for further information.
•The dismissrcopytarget command will not allow the removal of a group's last target.
EXAMPLES
The following example removes target Target1 from Group1:
cli% dismissrcopytarget Target1 Group1
NOTES
None.
dismissrcopytarget 167
dismissrcopyvv
DESCRIPTION
The dismissrcopyvv command removes a virtual volume from a Remote Copy volume group.
SYNTAX
dismissrcopyvv [option] [<pattern>] <VV_name> <group_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopyvv_dismiss right.
NOTE: You need access to the domain of the specified group (<group_name>) in order to run
this command.
OPTIONS
-f
Does not ask for confirmation for the dismissrcopyvv command.
-pat
Specifies that specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and that all Remote Copy volumes
matching the specified pattern will be dismissed from the Remote Copy group. This option must
be used if the <pattern> specifier is used.
-keepsnap
Specifies that the local volume's resync snapshot should be retained. The retained snapshot will
reflect the state of the secondary volume and may be used as the starting snapshot should the
volume be readmitted to a Remote Copy group. The snapshot name will begin with “sv.rcpy”.
-removevv
Remove remote sides' volumes.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
The name of the volume to be removed. Volumes are added to a group with the admitrcopyvv
command.
<group_name>
The name of the group that currently includes the virtual volume.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to dismiss multiple Remote Copy
volumes. If this specifier is not used, the <VV_name> specifier must be used.
RESTRICTIONS
•This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy license. Contact your local service provider
for more information.
•A volume cannot be removed from a group that is not currently stopped.
168 Dismiss Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example dismisses virtual volume vv1 from Group1:
cli% dismissrcopyvv vv1 Group1
The following example dismisses all virtual volumes that start with the name testvv from Group1:
cli% dismissrcopyvv -pat testvv* Group1
The following example dismisses volume vv1 from Group1 and removes the corresponding volumes
of vv1 on all the target systems of Group1.
cli% dismissrcopyvv -removevv vv1 Group1
The following example dismisses volume vv2 from Group2 and retains the resync snapshot
associated with vv2 for this group.
cli% dismissrcopyvv -keepsnap vv2 Group2
NOTES
•The dismissrcopyvv command removes any Remote Copy synchronization snapshots
affiliated with the removed volume.
•If a group’s target has the mirror_config policy set and the group is a primary group,
then this command is mirrored to that target and the volume is removed from the corresponding
secondary group. If the policy is set and the group is a secondary, then this command will
fail.
dismissrcopyvv 169
13 Free Command
freespace
DESCRIPTION
The freespace command frees snapshot administration and snapshot data spaces from a Virtual
Volume (VV) if they are not in use.
SYNTAX
freespace [options] <VV_name>...|<pattern>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the space_free right.
OPTIONS
–pat
Remove the snapshot administration and snapshot data spaces from all the VV that match any of
the specified glob-style patterns.
–f
Suppresses the prompt for confirmation that appears before removing the snapshot administration
and snapshot data space of each volume.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>...
Specifies the VV name, using up to 31 characters.
<pattern>...
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to compact multiple volumes. If this
specifier is not used, the VV_name specifier must be used. See “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for
more information.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example demonstrates how to remove SA and SD space from virtual volume testd:
cli% freespace testd
NOTES
This command fails if the virtual volume is an old-style thin provisioned VV (created on a 2.2.4
release or earlier) or it has snapshots.
170 Free Command
14 Grow Commands
growaldvv
DESCRIPTION
This command was deprecated in the 2.2.4 release and will be changed or removed in a future
release. Please use the growvv command in the future. If virtual volumes were created with
deprecated commands then only deprecated commands can be used to modify virtual volumes.
The growaldvv command automatically enlarges (grows) the size of a virtual volume by adding
underlying logical disks.
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vv_grow right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the growaldvv command can be any of the following:
•growaldvv -szu <size> [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•growaldvv -szs <size> [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•growaldvv -sza <size> [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•growaldvv -szu <size> -szs <size> [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•growaldvv -szu <size> -sza <size> [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•growaldvv -szu <size> -szs <size> -sza <size> [options <arg>]
<VV_name>
OPTIONS
–szu <size>[g|G|t|T]
Specifies the size of the user volume in megabytes using an integer from 0through 16777216
(16384 GB). Size can optionally be set in gigabytes or terabytes by providing either the gor G
options (for gigabytes) and tor Toptions (for terabytes) following (no whitespace between) the
entered size value.
–szs <size>[g|G|t|T]
Specifies the size of the snapshot volume in megabytes using an integer between 0and 67108864
(65536 GB). Size can optionally be specified in gigabytes or terabytes by providing either the
gor Goptions (for gigabytes) and tor Toptions (for terabytes) following (no whitespace between)
the entered size value. This option cannot be used with the -pct option. This option is deprecated
and will be removed in a subsequent release.
–sza <size>[g|G]
Specifies the size of the administration volume in megabytes using an integer between 0and
524288 (512 GB). Size can optionally be specified in gigabytes by providing either the g or
G options following (no whitespace between) the entered size value. This option cannot be used
with the -pct option. This option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
–f
growaldvv 171
Suppresses the requested confirmation before growing a virtual volume with a different RAID type
than the last region of the existing virtual volume, or when the virtual volume size grows from under
2 T to over 2 T.
–t <RAID_type>
Specifies the RAID type with r0,r1,r5 or r6. If not specified, the default RAID type is the same
as the last region of the existing virtual volume. Specifying a different RAID type than the existing
virtual volume results in a warning message and a prompt for confirmation unless the –foption
is specified.
–ssz <size_number_chunklet>
Specifies the set size in terms of chunklets. The default depends on the RAID type specified. If the
RAID type is not specified or if the same RAID type as the last region of the existing virtual volume
is specified, the default is the same set size as the last region of the existing VV. Otherwise, the
default is 2for RAID-1, 4for RAID-5, and 8for RAID-6.
–rs <size>
Specifies the number of sets in a row for each logical disk using an integer between 1and
2147483647. If not specified, no row limit is imposed.
–ss <size_KB>
Specifies the step size in kilobytes using 32,64,128,256, or 512. The default depends on whether
the RAID type is specified. If the RAID type is not specified or is the same RAID type as the last
region of the existing virtual volume, the default is the same step size as the last region of the virtual
volume. Otherwise, the step size defaults to 256 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1, and 128 KB for RAID-5.
For RAID-6 the step size is a function of the set size.
–ha <port>|<cage>|<mag>
Specifies that the RAID layout must support a failure of one port pair, one cage, or one mag. The
default depends on whether the RAID type is specified. If the RAID type is not specified or if the
same RAID type as the last region of the existing virtual volume is specified, the default is the same
as the last region of the existing virtual volumes. Otherwise the default is cage. This option has no
meaning for RAID-0. Note that snap admin space is always created with cage availability.
–ch first|last
Specifies the chunklet location preference characteristics, either first (the lowest numbered chunklets)
or last (the highest numbered chunklets). If no argument is specified, the default characteristic is
first.
–pct <prc>
Specifies the required growth size of the snapshot volume as a percentage of the required growth
size of your volume (as specified with the -szu option). This option must be used with the -szu
option, and cannot be used with the -szs option. If not specified, the default value is zero percent
of your user volume.
–wait <secs>
If the growaldvv command fails due to the lack of clean space, the -wait option specifies the
number of seconds to wait for the system to clean the dirty space before returning. If -wait 0 is
issued, the command returns immediately. If this option is not used, the command will keep waiting
for dirty chunklets to be cleaned if enough space will be available with the dirty chunklets cleaned.
–dr
Specifies that the command is a dry run and that no logical disks or virtual volumes are created.
–verbose on|off
Specifies that verbose output is either enabled (on) or disabled (off). If not specified, verbose
output is disabled.
–p <pattern>
172 Grow Commands
Specifies a pattern for disks. Patterns are used to select disks that are used for creating logical
disks. If no pattern is specified, the option defaults to all disks of device type specified at creation
time. If specified multiple times, each instance of the specified pattern adds additional candidate
disks that match the pattern. The following arguments can be specified as patterns for this option:
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7). The
primary path of the disks must be on the specified node(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are each separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen
(0–7). The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are each separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen
(0–4). The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are each separated with a comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen(0-7). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are each separated with a single comma (1,2,3).
A range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are each separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a
hyphen (0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments are used to limit the disks that are used to create logical disks
depending on the characteristics of the disk drive.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
growaldvv 173
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <ID>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their device IDs be selected for logical disk creation.
Device IDs can be specified in a comma-separated list. Device IDs can be displayed by issuing
the showpd –icommand.
–devtype <model>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the showpd
command.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
NOTE: Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example -p -fc_gt
60 -fc_lt 230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free
chunklets and that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
Specifies the name of the virtual volume, using up to 31 characters, that you are enlarging.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•Option –pct can only be used if option –szu is used.
•Options –pct and –szs cannot be used in the same instance of issuing the growaldvv
command.
•One or more of the –szu,–sza, and –szs options must be specified.
•If enlarging either the administration or snapshot space on the VV and both administration
and snapshot space are zero MB, the administration and snapshot space must be enlarged
together. Both, the –sza and –szs options must be specified on the command line. Specifying
–sza or –szs alone is invalid.
•If the volume being enlarged has snapshot data space and snapshot administration space
with sizes of 0 bytes, the –sza and –szs options must be specified together.
•This command cannot be used to grow a volume in such a way that a volume that currently
only has logical disks of a particular device type (Fibre Channel, nearline, or solid state drive)
will have logical disks of multiple device types after the grow operation. If a virtual volume
currently has logical disks of multiple device types, it is possible to grow the volume using
logical disks of any device type. Use showpd to see the device types of physical disks in the
system.
174 Grow Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the enlarging of a RAID-5 virtual volume with 3+1 parity ratio
named vv01 by 10 GB:
cli% growaldvv –szu 10g –t r5 –ssz 4 vv01
NOTES
•A volume can be enlarged while I/O is occurring.
•When issuing the growaldvv command, the specified options only apply to the newly
enlarged sections of the volume. This can result in a VV that has different characteristics in its
base and grown sections.
•If options were used in the creation of the original virtual volume (createaldvv) that were
not the default option values, and not specified in the same manner when issuing the
growaldvv command, growaldvv uses the createaldvv default option values. This can
result in a virtual volume that has different characteristics in its base and grown sections.
•By default, LDs are created using only physical disks with the same device type (by default,
the Fibre Channel device type is used). Use the –p devtype NL option or -p -devtype
SSD to override this default. Use the showpd command to see the device types of PDs in the
system.
•If no device type is specified using the –p –devtype option, Fibre Channel is assumed.
•This command is only used for a non-provisioned VV. The command growvv should be used
instead for a virtual volume that has its user space provisioned from a CPG.
•For this command:
•KB = 1024 bytes
•MB = 1024 KB
•GB = 1024 MB
growaldvv 175
growavv
DESCRIPTION
This command was deprecated in the 2.2.4 release and will be changed or removed in a future
release. Please use the growvv command in the future. If virtual volumes were created with
deprecated commands then only deprecated commands can be used to modify virtual volumes.
The growavv command enlarges a Virtual Volume (VV) with automatic mapping to the Logical
Disks (LDs).
SYNTAX
growavv [options] <VV_name> <user_LD_ID> <LD_size> <sa_LD_ID>
<admin_size> <sd_LD_ID> <snap_size>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the vv_grow right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–verbose on|off
Specifies that verbose output is either enabled (on) or disabled (off). If not specified, verbose
output is disabled.
–dr
Specifies that the command is a dry run and that no logical disks or virtual volumes are actually
created.
-f
Suppresses the requested confirmation before growing a virtual volume size from under 2 T to over
2 T.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
Specifies the virtual volume name, using up to 31 characters.
<user_LD_ID>
Specifies the LDs to be used as user space. The LDs are identified by one or more integers (item).
Integers can be provided as a single number (1), a comma separated list of numbers (1,2,3), or
a range of numbers separated with a dash (1–4).
<LD_size>
Specifies the size of your area in megabytes.
<sa_LD_ID>
Specifies the LDs to be used as snapshot administrator space. The LDs are identified by one or
more integers (item). Integers can be provided as a single number (1), a comma separated list
of numbers (1,2,3), or a range of numbers separated with a dash (1–4).
<admin_size>
Specifies the size of the administrator space in megabytes.
<sd_LD_ID>
176 Grow Commands
Specifies the LDs to be used as snapshot data space. The LDs are identified by one or more integers
(item). Integers can be provided as a single number (1), a comma separated list of numbers
(1,2,3), or a range of numbers separated with a dash (1–4).
<snap_size>
Specifies the size of the snapshot space in megabytes.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
None.
NOTES
•For this command:
•MB = 1048576 bytes
growavv 177
growtpvv
DESCRIPTION
This command was deprecated in the 2.2.3 release and will be changed or removed in a future
release. Please use the growvv command in the future. If virtual volumes were created with
deprecated commands then only deprecated commands can be used to modify virtual volumes.
The growtpvv command enlarges a Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volume (TPVV).
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vv_grow right.
SYNTAX
growtpvv <size_increment>[g|G|t|T]<TPVV_name>
OPTIONS
-f
Suppresses the requested confirmation before growing a virtual volume size from under 2 T to over
2 T.
SPECIFIERS
<size_increment>[g|G|t|T]
Specifies the size in MB to be added to the TPVV user size. Should be in the range 1 T to 16 T.
The volume size is rounded up to the next multiple of 32 MB. Size can be specified in megabytes
(default) or in gigabytes by using the g|G parameter and terabytes by using the t|T parameter.
To specify the size in gigabytes, enter gor G, for terabytes, enter tor T, directly after the specified
size (no space).
<TPVV_name>
Specifies the TPVV’s name, using up to 31 characters.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
None.
NOTES
For this command:
•MB = 1048576 bytes
•GB = 1024 MB
•TB = 1024 GB
178 Grow Commands
growvv
DESCRIPTION
The growvv command increases the size of a virtual volume.
SYNTAX
growvv <VV_name> <size>[g|G|t|T]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vv_grow right.
NOTE: You need access to the domain of the specified group (<group_name>) in order to run
this command.
OPTIONS
-f
Suppresses the requested confirmation before growing a virtual volume size from under 2 T to over
2 T.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
The name of the volume to be grown.
<size>[g|G|t|T]
The size to be added to the volume’s user space. The size is specified in multiples of 256 MB. You
can optionally specify the grow size in gigabytes (gor G) or in terabytes (tor T).
RESTRICTIONS
•In order to grow a virtual volume in a Remote Copy group, that group must first be stopped.
•You must grow the corresponding virtual volume on the secondary system by the same amount
or the Remote Copy group will not restart.
EXAMPLES
The following example increases the size of virtual volume vv1 by two terabytes:
# growvv vv1 2t
NOTES
Ensure that there is sufficient space to mirror the grow of the volume on the secondary system before
growing the volume on the primary system.
The grow operations of Remote Copy volumes are coordinated between the primary and secondary
targets. A coordinated grow can be started from either the primary or secondary target. Volumes
on remote targets are grown to the intended size of the local volume. If a target cannot be contacted
or Remote Copy is not started, only the local volume will be grown. A check is first made to see if
the local and remote volumes can be grown by the requested amount. If this succeeds, all the
volumes are grown; however, if other volumes are grown during this process, it is possible that
remote volumes are grown and the local volume is not. If this occurs, remote volumes must be
grown manually before the group can be started.
growvv 179
15 Hist Commands
histch
DESCRIPTION
The histch command displays a histogram of service times in a timed loop for individual chunklets.
SYNTAX
histch [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–ld <LD_name>
Specifies the Logical Disk (LD), identified by name, from which chunklet statistics are sampled.
–ch <chunklet_num>
Specifies that statistics are limited to only the specified chunklet, identified by number.
–metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both - (Default) Displays both I/O time and I/O size histograms.
•time - Displays only the I/O time histogram.
•size - Displays only the I/O size histogram.
–timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, show the columns from the first column <fcol> through last column
<lcol>. The available columns range from 0 through 31.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 6).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 31 (default value of 15).
•The first column includes all data accumulated for columns less than the first column and the
last column includes accumulated data for all columns greater than the last column.
–sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O size histogram, show the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). Available columns range from 0 through 15.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 3).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 15 (default value of 11).
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage.
NOTE: For the following options, by default the histogram shows data from the start of the
command.
–prev|–begin
180 Hist Commands
Specifies that the histogram displays data either from a previous sample (–prev) or from when
the system was last started (–begin). If no option is specified, the histogram shows data from the
beginning of the command’s execution.
–rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval in seconds that statistics are sampled from using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no count is specified, the command defaults to 2 seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, you can specify the direction
of sorting (<dir>) as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple can specify multiple columns on the command line by using a colon (:). Rows having the
same column(s) are sorted by the values in the latter specified columns.
–filt <fspec>
Specifies that histograms below the threshold specified by the <fspec> argument are not displayed.
The <fspec> argument is specified in the syntax of <op>,<val_ms>,<count>.
•<op>
The <op> argument can be specified as one of the following:
◦r- Specifies read statistics.
◦w- Specifies write statistics.
◦t- Specifies total statistics.
◦rw - Specifies total read and write statistics.
•<val_ms>
Specifies the threshold service time in milliseconds.
•<count>
Specifies the minimum number of access above the threshold service time. When filtering is
done, the <count> is compared with the sum of all columns starting with the one which
corresponds to the threshold service time. For example,-t,8,100 specifies that only the rows
where the 8ms column and all columns to the right adds up to more than 100 are to be
displayed.
–ni
Specifies that histograms for only nonidle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt t,0,0.
histch 181
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of a histogram of service times for system chunklets:
cli% histch –iter 1
12:42:57 10/20/04 ------------Time (millisec)------------
Ldid Ldname LdCh Pdid PdCh 0.26 0.53 1.05 2.1 4.2 8.4 17 34 67 135
2 tp–0–sa–0.0 1 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 tp–0–sa–0.0 0 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 tp–0–sa–0.1 1 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 tp–0–sa–0.1 0 42 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 admin.usr.0 1 22 3 0 0 0 1 0 3 2 0 0 0
0 admin.usr.0 0 44 3 0 0 0 0 1 3 2 0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
total 0 0 0 1 1 8 4 0 0 0
For the previous example, before the histch command was issued, the setstatch start
command was issued for chunklets 0 and 1 on logical disks admin.usr.0, tp–0–sa–0.1,and
tp–0–sa–0.0.
NOTES
•The setstatch command must be issued to enable statistics collection on chunklets before
issuing the histch command. See “setstatch” (page 331) for additional information.
•Each service time histogram column shows the number of accesses with service times between
the point in time shown in the column's heading to the point in time shown in the heading of
the column to its right (or infinity for the last column). Unless all columns are shown, the first
column shows the number of accesses with service times less than the heading of the second
column.
•Each I/O size histogram column shows the number of accesses with I/O size between the
size shown in the column's heading to the size shown in the heading of the column to its right
(or infinity for the last column).
182 Hist Commands
histld
DESCRIPTION
The histld command displays a histogram of service times for Logical Disks (LDs) in a timed
loop.
SYNTAX
histld [options <arg>] [<LD_name_or_pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-vv <VV_name>...|<pattern>...
Show only LDs that are mapped to Virtual Volumes (VVs) with names that match any of the names
or patterns specified. Multiple volumes or patterns can be repeated using a comma separated list.
-domain <domain_name>...|<pattern>...
Shows only LDs that are in domains with names that match any of the names or patterns specified.
Multiple volumes or patterns can be repeated using a comma separated list.
–metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both - (Default) Displays both I/O time and I/O size histograms.
•time - Displays only the I/O time histogram.
•size - Displays only the I/O size histogram.
–timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, shows the columns from the first column <fcol> through last column
<lcol>. The available columns range from 0 through 31.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 6).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 31 (default value of 15).
•The first column includes all data accumulated for columns less than the first column and the
last column includes accumulated data for all columns greater than the last column.
–sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O size histogram, show the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). Available columns range from 0 through 15.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 3).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 15 (default value of 11).
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage. If this option is not specified, the histogram
shows the access counts.
NOTE: For the following options, by default the histogram shows data from the start of the
command.
–prev|–begin
histld 183
Histogram displays data either from a previous sample (–prev) or from when the system was last
started (–begin). If no option is specified, the histogram shows data from the beginning of the
command’s execution.
–rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval in seconds that statistics are sampled from using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no count is specified, the command defaults to 2 seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. You must specify a column number. In addition, you can specify the direction
of sorting <dir> as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
–filt <fspec>
Specifies that histograms below the threshold specified by the <fspec> argument are not displayed.
The <fspec> argument is specified in the syntax of <op>,<val_ms>,<count>.
•<op>
The <op> argument can be specified as one of the following:
◦r- Specifies read statistics.
◦w- Specifies write statistics.
◦t- Specifies total statistics.
◦rw - Specifies total read and write statistics.
•<val_ms>
Specifies the threshold service time in milliseconds.
•<count>
Specifies the minimum number of access above the threshold service time. When filtering is
done, the <count> is compared with the sum of all columns starting with the one which
corresponds to the threshold service time. For example,-t,8,100 specifies that only the rows
where the 8ms column and all columns to the right adds up to more than 100 are to be
displayed.
–ni
Specifies that histograms for only nonidle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt t,0,0.
SPECIFIERS
[<LD_name_or_pattern>]...
184 Hist Commands
Specifies the LD(s) or pattern(s) for which the histogram data is collected.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of a histogram of service times for all LDs:
cli% histld –iter 1
12:38:49 10/20/04 ------------Time (millisec)------------
Ldame 0.26 0.53 1.05 2.1 4.2 8.4 17 34 67 135
tp–0–sa–0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
tp–0–sd–0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
tp–0–sd–0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
admin.usr.0 0 0 0 0 1 6 6 1 0 0
tp–0–sa–0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
tp–0–sd–0.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
tp–0–sd–0.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
---------------------------------------------------------
total 0 0 0 0 1 6 6 1 0 0
NOTES
•Each service time histogram column shows the number of accesses with service times between
the time shown in the column's heading to the time shown in the heading of the column to its
right (or infinity for the last column). Unless all columns are shown, the first column shows the
number of accesses with service times less than the heading of the second column.
•Each I/O size histogram column shows the number of accesses with I/O size between the
size shown in the column's heading to the size shown in the heading of the column to its right
(or infinity for the last column).
•If the <LD_name_or_pattern> specifier is used, then logical disks with names that match
any of the patterns are listed, otherwise all LDs are listed. These patterns are glob-style patterns
(see help on sub,globpat).
•Patterns are specified as regular expressions. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further
information. Issuing histld –n LD_name.* displays histogram data for all LDs whose
name begins with LD_name.
histld 185
histpd
DESCRIPTION
The histpd command displays a histogram of service times for Physical Disks (PDs).
SYNTAX
histpd [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–w <WWN>
Specifies the World Wide Name (WWN) of the physical disk for which service times are displayed.
–nodes <node_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified nodes and physical disks connected to those nodes.
The node list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list can also
consist of a single integer (1). If the node list is not specified, all disks on all nodes are displayed.
–slots <slot_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified PCI slots and physical disks connected to those PCI
slots. The slot list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list can
also consist of a single integer (1). If the slot list is not specified, all disks on all slots are displayed.
–ports <port_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified port slots and physical disks connected to those
port slots. The port list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list
can also consist of a single integer (1). If the port list is not specified, all disks on all ports are
displayed.
–devinfo
Indicates the device disk type and speed.
–metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both - (Default) Displays both I/O time and I/O size histograms.
•time - Displays only the I/O time histogram.
•size - Displays only the I/O size histogram.
–timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, shows the columns from the first column <fcol> through last column
<lcol>. The available columns range from 0 through 31.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>). The default value of <fcol> is 6.
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 31. The default value of <lcol> is
15.
•The first column includes all data accumulated for columns less than the first column and the
last column includes accumulated data for all columns greater than the last column.
–sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
186 Hist Commands
For the I/O size histogram, show the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). Available columns range from 0 through 15.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>). The default value of <fcol> is 3.
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 15. The default value of <lcol> is
15.
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage. If this option is not specified, the histogram
shows the access counts.
NOTE: For the following options, by default the histogram shows data from the start of the
command.
–prev|–begin
Histogram displays data either from a previous sample (–prev) or from when the system was last
started (–begin). If no option is specified, the histogram shows data from the beginning of the
command’s execution.
–rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval in seconds that statistics are sampled from using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no count is specified, the command defaults to 2 seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. You must specify a column number. In addition, you can specify the direction
of sorting <dir> as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
–filt <fspec>
Specifies that histograms below the threshold specified by the <fspec> argument are not displayed.
The <fspec> argument is specified in the syntax of <op>,<val_ms>,<count>.
•<op>
The <op> argument can be specified as one of the following:
◦r- Specifies read statistics.
◦w- Specifies write statistics.
histpd 187
◦t- Specifies total statistics.
◦rw - Specifies total read and write statistics.
•<val_ms>
Specifies the threshold service time in milliseconds.
•<count>
Specifies the minimum number of access above the threshold service time. When filtering is
done, the <count> is compared with the sum of all columns starting with the one which
corresponds to the threshold service time. For example,-t,8,100 specifies that only the rows
where the 8ms column and all columns to the right adds up to more than 100 are to be
displayed.
–ni
Specifies that histograms for only nonidle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt t,0,0.
–p <pattern>
Specifies the pattern of PDs displayed in the histogram. Patterns are used to filter and select the
disks displayed in the histogram. If specified multiple times, each instance of the specified pattern
adds additional candidate disks that match the pattern:
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node number(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (<item>). Multiple
slots are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen
(0–7). The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot number(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (<item>). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–5).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port number(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (<item>).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (<item>). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (<item>). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3).
188 Hist Commands
A range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (<item>).
Multiple disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a
hyphen (0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments are used to limit the disks that are used to create logical disks
based on the characteristics of the disk drive.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
-i command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning
media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive
and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a
performance measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as
relative performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the
access time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example, -p -fc_gt 60 -fc_lt 230
-nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free chunklets and that
are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
histpd 189
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a histogram of service times for all physical disks and shows the
columns from 8ms to 8192 ms. Only pds with more than 500 accesses with service time equal or
greater than 16ms are displayed:
cli% histpd -begin -metric time -timecols 10 20 -filt t,16,500
23:01:12 08/09/10 ------------------Time (millisec)------------------
ID Port 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192
0 0:0:1 3647 550 29 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1:0:1 2742 969 111 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 1:0:1 4181 2786 292 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 1:0:1 3397 1818 228 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 1:0:1 2793 1281 77 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 0:0:1 1449 801 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 1:0:1 2425 2779 287 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 1:0:1 3526 860 157 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 0:0:1 6049 2171 58 3 0 0 13 6 0 0 0
13 1:0:1 4444 2942 261 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
16 0:0:2 3630 555 35 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17 1:0:2 2769 958 105 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19 1:0:2 4227 2773 263 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
21 1:0:2 2757 2353 339 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
23 1:0:2 2735 1321 94 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
24 0:0:2 1360 577 15 2 0 2 3 0 0 0 0
25 1:0:2 2484 2420 286 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
27 1:0:2 4504 633 122 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
28 0:0:2 6059 2177 65 3 0 1 1 2 0 0 0
29 1:0:2 4245 3113 300 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
---------------------------------------------------------------------
total 69423 33837 3147 40 2 3 17 8 0 0 0
Press the enter key to stop...
NOTES
•Each service time histogram column shows the number of accesses with service times between
the point in time shown in the column's heading to the point in time shown in the heading of
the column to its right (or infinity for the last column). Unless all columns are shown, the first
column shows the number of accesses with service times less than the heading of the second
column.
•Each I/O size histogram column shows the number of accesses with I/O size between the
size shown in the column's heading to the size shown in the heading of the column to its right
(or infinity for the last column).
•Previous options –n <node_list>,–s <slot_list>, and –p <port_list> have
been replaced with –nodes <node_list>,–slots <slot_list>, and –ports
<port_list>.
190 Hist Commands
histport
DESCRIPTION
The histport command displays a histogram of service times for ports within the system.
SYNTAX
histport [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–both|–ctl|–data
Specifies that both control and data transfers are displayed (–both), only control transfers are
displayed (–ctl), or only data transfers are displayed (–data). If this option is not specified, only
data transfers are displayed.
–nodes <node_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified nodes and Physical Disks (PDs) connected to those
nodes. The node list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list
can also consist of a single integer (1). If the node list is not specified, all disks on all nodes are
displayed.
–slots <slot_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified PCI slots and PDs connected to those PCI slots. The
slot list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list can also consist
of a single integer (1). If the slot list is not specified, all disks on all nodes are displayed.
–ports <port_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified ports and PDs connected to those ports. The port
list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list can also consist of
a single integer (1). If the port list is not specified, all disks on all nodes are displayed.
–host|disk|-rcfc|-peer
Displays only host ports (target ports), disk ports (initiator ports), Fibre Channel Remote Copy
configured ports, or Fibre Channel ports for Data Migration. If no option is specified, all ports are
displayed.
–metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both - (Default) Displays both I/O time and I/O size histograms.
•time - Displays only the I/O time histogram.
•size - Displays only the I/O size histogram.
–timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, show the columns from the first column <fcol> through last column
<lcol>. The available columns range from 0 through 31.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 6).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 31 (default value of 15).
•The first column includes all data accumulated for columns less than the first column and the
last column includes accumulated data for all columns greater than the last column.
histport 191
–sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O size histogram, show the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). Available columns range from 0 through 15.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 3).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 15 (default value of 11).
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage.
NOTE: For the following options, by default the histogram shows data from the start of the
command.
–prev|–begin
Histogram displays data either from a previous sample (–prev) or from when the system was last
started (–begin). If no option is specified, the histogram shows data from the beginning of the
command’s execution.
–rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval in seconds that statistics are sampled from using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no count is specified, the command defaults to 2 seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. You must specify a column number. In addition, you can specify the direction
of sorting <dir> as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same
information in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
–filt <fspec>
Specifies that histograms below the threshold specified by the <fspec> argument are not displayed.
The <fspec> argument is specified in the syntax of <op>,<val_ms>,<count>.
•<op>
The <op> argument can be specified as one of the following:
◦r- Specifies read statistics.
◦w- Specifies write statistics.
192 Hist Commands
◦t- Specifies total statistics.
◦rw - Specifies total read and write statistics.
•<val_ms>
Specifies the threshold service time in milliseconds.
•<count>
Specifies the minimum number of access above the threshold service time. When filtering is
done, the <count> is compared with the sum of all columns starting with the one which
corresponds to the threshold service time. For example,-t,8,100 specifies that only the rows
where the 8ms column and all columns to the right adds up to more than 100 are to be
displayed.
–ni
Specifies that histograms for only nonidle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt t,0,0.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a histogram of service times for reads and writes to ports:
li% histport
12:35:24 10/20/04 ------------Time (millisec)-------------
Port D/C 0.26 0.53 1.05 2.1 4.2 8.4 17 34 67 135
0:0:1 data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0:0:2 data 315 778 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0:1:1 data 0 0 0 5 24 51 25 4 0 0
0:1:2 data 0 0 0 5 27 53 23 1 0 0
1:5:1 data 0 0 0 2 19 38 28 11 0 0
1:5:2 data 0 0 0 5 20 36 29 7 0 0
----------------------------------------------------------
total data 315 778 2 17 90 178 105 23 0 0
Press the enter key to stop...
NOTES
•Each service time histogram column shows the number of accesses with service times between
the point in time shown in the column's heading to the point in time shown in the heading of
the column to its right (or infinity for the last column). Unless all columns are shown, the first
column shows the number of accesses with service times less than the heading of the second
column.
•Each I/O size histogram column shows the number of accesses with I/O size between the
size shown in the column's heading to the size shown in the heading of the column to its right
(or infinity for the last column).
•Previous options –n <node_list>,–s <slot_list>, and –p <port_list> have been
replaced with –nodes <node_list>,–slots <slot_list>, and –ports
<port_list>.
histport 193
histrcvv
DESCRIPTION
The histrcvv command shows a histogram of total Remote Copy service times and backup
system Remote Copy service times in a timed loop.
SYNTAX
histrcvv [options <arg>][<VV_name>|<pattern>]...
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-d <secs>
Specifies the interval in seconds that statistics are sampled from using an integer from 1 through
2147483. If no count is specified, the command uses a 2-second default interval.
-iter <number>
Specifies that the statistics are to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1 through 2147483647.
-t <target_name>...|<pattern>...
Shows only volumes whose group is copied to the specified target name or pattern. Multiple target
names or patterns may be specified using a comma-separated list.
-port <port_NSP>...|<pattern>...
Show only volumes that are copied over the specified port, expressed as <N:S:P>, or pattern of
ports. Multiple ports or patterns may be specified using a comma-separated list.
-g <group_name>...|<pattern>...
Shows only volumes whose volume group matches the specified group name or pattern of names.
Multiple group names or patterns may be specified using a comma-separated list.
-sync
Show only volumes that are being copied in synchronous mode.
-periodic
Show only volumes which are being copied in asynchronous periodic mode.
-primary
Show only virtual volumes in the primary role.
-secondary
Show only virtual volumes in the secondary role.
-targetsum
Displays the sums for all volumes of a target.
-portsum
Displays the sums for all volumes on a port.
-groupsum
Displays the sums for all volumes of a volume group.
-vvsum
Displays the sums for all targets and links of a virtual volume.
-domainsum
194 Hist Commands
Displays the sums for all volumes of a domain.
-domain <domainname>...|<pattern>...
Shows only the virtual volumes that are in domains with names that match the specified domain
name(s) or pattern(s).
-timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, shows the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last column
(<lcol>). The available columns range from 0 through 31.
•<fcol> must be equal to or greater than 0. The default value of <fcol> is 6.
•<lcol> must be:
greater than <fcol>◦
◦less than or equal to 31
The default value of <lcol> is 15.
-pct
Shows the number of times the service time appears in each bucket as a percentage. If this option
is not specified, the histogram shows the service times.
-prev
Specifies that the histogram displays data from a previous sample.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. You must specify a column number.
In addition, you can specify the direction of sorting (<dir>):
•inc - Sort in increasing order (the default).
•dec - Sort in decreasing order.
–filt <fspec>
Specifies that histograms below the threshold specified by the <fspec> argument are not displayed.
To specify the <fspec> argument, use the syntax: <op>,<val_ms>,<count>.
•<op> - The<op> argument can be:
•<val_ms> - Specifies the threshold service time in milliseconds.
•<count> - Specifies the minimum number of times the service time is above the threshold
service time. When filtering is done, the <count> is compared with the sum of all columns,
starting with the one that corresponds to the threshold service time.
For example, -filt t,8,100 specifies that the display should include only the rows where the
8ms column and each subsequent column to the right adds up to more than 100.
-ni
Displays histograms for all non-idle devices. This option is shorthand for the option -filt t,0,0.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name|pattern>...
Displays statistics only for the specified virtual volume or volume name pattern. Multiple volumes
or patterns can be repeated (for example, <VV_name> <VV_name>...). If not specified, all
virtual volumes that are configured for Remote Copy are listed.
histrcvv 195
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows histograms sums for all synchronous Remote Copy volumes:
cli% histrcvv -vvsum -sync
09:50:40 03/30/10 ----------Svt (millisec)---------- -------Rmt Svt
(millisec)--------
VVname RCGroup Target Mode 0.50 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 0.50 1 2 4 8 16
32 64 128 256
testvv.2 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0 0 0 163 61 16 3 0 0 0 0 224 19 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
testvv.3 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0 0 0 138 62 37 4 2 0 0 0 224 19 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
testvv.8 sync.2 amp3 Sync 0 0 0 0 0 4 13 11 5 4 0 0 0 0 4 12
12 7 1 1
testvv.4 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0 0 0 54 132 52 17 2 0 0 0 252 5 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
testvv.0 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0 0 0 59 138 57 17 2 0 0 0 258 15 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
testvv.9 sync.2 amp3 Sync 0 0 0 0 1 0 14 8 6 3 0 0 0 0 2 7
14 4 4 1
testvv.1 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0 0 0 130 71 40 3 0 0 0 0 225 19 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
total 0 0 0 544 465 206 71 25 11 7 0 1183 77 0 6 19
26 11 5 2
Press the enter key to stop...
NOTES
None.
196 Hist Commands
histvlun
DESCRIPTION
The histvlun command displays Virtual Volume Logical Unit Number (VLUN) service time
histograms.
SYNTAX
histvlun [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-domain <domain_name>...|<pattern>...
Shows only VLUNs whose Virtual Volumes (VVs) are in domains with names that match one or
more of the specified domain names or patterns. Multiple domain names or patterns can be
repeated using a comma-separated list.
–host <hostname>...|<pattern>...
Shows only VLUNs exported to the specified host(s) or pattern(s). Multiple host names or patterns
can be repeated using a comma-separated list.
–v <VV_name>...|<pattern>...
Requests that only LDs mapped to VVs that match and of the specified names or patterns be
displayed. Multiple volume names or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated list.
–l <LUN>...|<pattern>...
Specifies that VLUNs with LUNs matching the specified LUN(s) or pattern(s) are displayed. Multiple
LUNs or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated list.
–nodes <node_list>
Specifies that only exports from the specified nodes are to be displayed. The node list is specified
as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list can also consist of a single integer
(1). If the node list is not specified, all disks on all nodes are displayed.
–slots <slot_list>
Specifies that only exports from the specified slots are to be displayed. The slot list is specified as
a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list can also consist of a single integer (1).
If the slot list is not specified, all disks on all slots are displayed.
–ports <port_list>
Specifies that only exports to the specified ports are to be displayed. The port list is specified as
a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list can also consist of a single integer (1).
If the port list is not specified, all disks on all ports are displayed.
–lw
Lists the host’s World Wide Name (WWN) or iSCSI name. This is especially useful when multiple
WWNs or iSCSI names belonging to the same host are visible on the same port.
-domainsum
Specifies that sums for VLUNs are grouped by domain in the display. All VLUNs to unnamed hosts
are added and displayed as a single set of data with a - host name.
–vvsum
Specifies that sums for VLUNs of the same VV are displayed.
histvlun 197
–hostsum
Specifies that sums for VLUNs are grouped by host in the display. All VLUNs to unnamed hosts
are added and displayed as a single set of data with a nameless host.
–metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both - (Default) Displays both I/O time and I/O size histograms.
•time - Displays only the I/O time histogram.
•size - Displays only the I/O size histogram.
–timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, show the columns from the first column <fcol> through last column
<lcol>. The available columns range from 0 through 31.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 6).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 31 (default value of 15).
•The first column includes all data accumulated for columns less than the first column and the
last column includes accumulated data for all columns greater than the last column.
–sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O size histogram, show the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). Available columns range from 0 through 15.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 3).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 15 (default value of 11).
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage.
NOTE: For the following options, by default the histogram shows data from the start of the
command.
–prev|–begin
Histogram displays data either from a previous sample (–prev) or from when the system was last
started (–begin). If no option is specified, the histogram shows data from the beginning of the
command’s execution.
–rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval in seconds that statistics are sampled from using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no count is specified.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, you can specify the direction
of sorting <dir> as follows:
inc
198 Hist Commands
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
–filt <fspec>
Specifies that histograms below the threshold specified by the <fspec> argument are not displayed.
The <fspec> argument is specified in the syntax of <op>,<val_ms>,<count>.
•<op>
The <op> argument can be specified as one of the following:
◦r- Specifies read statistics.
◦w- Specifies write statistics.
◦t- Specifies total statistics.
◦rw - Specifies total read and write statistics.
•<val_ms>
Specifies the threshold service time in milliseconds.
•<count>
Specifies the minimum number of access above the threshold service time. When filtering is
done, the <count> is compared with the sum of all columns starting with the one which
corresponds to the threshold service time. For example,-t,8,100 specifies that only the rows
where the 8ms column and all columns to the right adds up to more than 100 are to be
displayed.
–ni
Specifies that histograms for only nonidle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt t,0,0.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays two iterations of a histogram of service times for all VLUNs:
cli% histvlun –iter 2
12:48:50 10/20/04 ------------Time (millisec)------------
Lun VVname Host Port 0.26 0.53 1.05 2.1 4.2 8.4 17 34 67 135
0 tpvv queasy09 0:0:2 0 1 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------
total 0 1 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12:48:52 10/20/04 ------------Time (millisec)------------
Lun VVname Host Port 0.26 0.53 1.05 2.1 4.2 8.4 17 34 67 135
0 tpvv queasy09 0:0:2 0 1 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------
total 0 1 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
histvlun 199
NOTES
•Each service time histogram column shows the number of accesses with service times between
the point in time shown in the column's heading to the point in time shown in the heading of
the column to its right (or infinity for the last column).
•Each I/O size histogram column shows the number of accesses with I/O size between the
size shown in the column's heading to the size shown in the heading of the column to its right
(or infinity for the last column). Unless all columns are shown, the first column shows the number
of accesses with service times less than the heading of the second column.
•Previous options –n <node_list>,–s <slot_list>, and –p <port_list> have been
replaced with –nodes <node_list>,–slots <slot_list>, and –ports
<port_list>.
200 Hist Commands
histvv
DESCRIPTION
The histvv command displays Virtual Volume (VV) service time histograms in a timed loop.
SYNTAX
histvv [options <arg>] [<VV_name>|<pattern>]...
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-domain <domainname>...|<pattern>...
Shows only the VVs that are in domains with names that match the specified domain name(s) or
pattern(s).
–metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both - (Default) Displays both I/O time and I/O size histograms.
•time - Displays only the I/O time histogram.
•size - Displays only the I/O size histogram.
–timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, show the columns from the first column <fcol> through last column
<lcol>. The available columns range from 0 through 31.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 6).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 31 (default value of 15).
•The first column includes all data accumulated for columns less than the first column and the
last column includes accumulated data for all columns greater than the last column.
–sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O size histogram, show the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). Available columns range from 0 through 15.
•The first column (<fcol>) must be a value greater than or equal to 0, but less than the value
of the last column (<lcol>) (default value of 3).
•The last column (<lcol>) must be less than or equal to 15 (default value of 11).
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage.
NOTE: For the following options, by default the histogram shows data from the start of the
command.
–prev
Histogram displays data from a previous sample.
–rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
–d <secs>
histvv 201
Specifies the interval in seconds that statistics are sampled from using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no count is specified, the command defaults to 2 seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. You must specify a column number. In addition, you can specify the direction
of sorting <dir> as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
–filt <fspec>
Specifies that histograms below the threshold specified by the <fspec> argument are not displayed.
The <fspec> argument is specified in the syntax of <op>,<val_ms>,<count>.
•<op>
The <op> argument can be specified as one of the following:
◦r- Specifies read statistics.
◦w- Specifies write statistics.
◦t- Specifies total statistics.
◦rw - Specifies total read and write statistics.
•<val_ms>
Specifies the threshold service time in milliseconds.
•<count>
Specifies the minimum number of access above the threshold service time. When filtering is
done, the <count> is compared with the sum of all columns starting with the one which
corresponds to the threshold service time. For example,-t,8,100 specifies that only the rows
where the 8ms column and all columns to the right adds up to more than 100 are to be
displayed.
–ni
Specifies that histograms for only nonidle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt t,0,0.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
202 Hist Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example displays two iterations of a histogram of service times for all VVs:
%cli histvv –iter 2
12:53:03 10/20/04 ------------Time (millisec)------------
VVname 0.26 0.53 1.05 2.1 4.2 8.4 17 34 67 135
admin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
tpvv 29 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
---------------------------------------------------------
total 29 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12:53:05 10/20/04 ------------Time (millisec)------------
VVname 0.26 0.53 1.05 2.1 4.2 8.4 17 34 67 135
admin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
tpvv 105 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
---------------------------------------------------------
total 105 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NOTES
•Each service time histogram column shows the number of accesses with service times between
the point in time shown in the column's heading to the point in time shown in the heading of
the column to its right (or infinity for the last column).
•Each I/O size histogram column shows the number of accesses with I/O size between the
size shown in the column's heading to the size shown in the heading of the column to its right
(or infinity for the last column). Unless all columns are shown, the first column shows the number
of accesses with service times less than the heading of the second column.
•If a <VV_name> or <pattern> are specified, then VVs with names that match any of the
patterns are listed, otherwise all VVs are listed. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for
further information.
•Virtual volumes may be accessed externally by hosts and internally by the prefetcher. Virtual
volume data measured by this command include accesses by the prefetcher.
•In addition to external accesses by hosts, VVs can be read internally by the system read-ahead
prefetcher. The histvv data includes read-ahead accesses from the prefetcher that can cause
the read data to appear more than seen by the hosts. Use the histvlun -vvsumcommand
to see data for only accesses from the host.
histvv 203
16 Import Command
importvv
DESCRIPTION
The importvv command initiates the migration of data from a remote LUN to the local HP 3PAR
Storage System. The remote LUN must be prepared for migration by using the admitvv command
before using the importvv command.
SYNTAX
importvv [options] <usrcpg> <VV_name|pattern|VV_set> ...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role granted the vv_import right.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
-snap <snapname>
Creates a snapshot of the volume at the end of the import phase. While the data is being imported,
the local volume and the remote volume are kept in sync (i.e., all the data that is written while data
is getting imported is mirrored to the remote array.) Once the volume import is complete, data is
only written to the volume on the array that was importing the data and the volume on the old
array will no longer be updated. The -snap parameter will create a snapshot at the last phase
of the import and the content of the created snapshot will be identical to the state of the volume
on the old array when the import task is completed.
If multiple VVs are being imported in a single command, <snapname> should be a VV pattern.
See help sub,vvnamepat for details.
-snp_cpg <snp_cpg>
Specifies the name of the CPG from which the snapshot space will be allocated. This option needs
to be specified if the -snap option is used.
The following options can be used when creating thinly provisioned volumes:
-tpvv
Imports the volume into a thinly provisioned space in the CPG specified in the command line. The
import will enable zero detect for the duration of import so that the data blocks containing zero
do not occupy space on the new array.
SPECIFIERS
<usrcpg>
Specifies the name of the CPG from which the volume user space will be allocated. If the -tpvv
option is specified, the volume is thinly provisioned. Otherwise, the volume is fully provisioned.
<VV_name|set:vvset|pattern>...
Specifies the VVs with the specified name (up to 31 characters in length), matching the glob-style
pattern or that are members of the supplied VV set is imported onto local storage. The VV set name
must start with set:. This specifier can be repeated to import multiple VVs at the same time.
204 Import Command
RESTRICTIONS
Functionality of this command requires the Peer Motion license. Contact your local service provider
for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example imports vv1 previously admitted using the admitvv command:
cli% importvv cpg1 vv1
The following example imports vv1 as a thin provisioned volume:
cli% importvv -tpvv cpg1 vv1
The following example imports multiple volumes as thin provisioned volumes and creates read only
snapshots:
cli% importvv -tpvv -snap @vvname@.ro -snp_cpg cpg2 cpg1 vv*
NOTES
A volume is imported online but the volume can only be accessed using the HP 3PAR storage
system that is importing the volume.
For all the <name_or_pattern> fields, the patterns are glob-style (shell-style) patterns. Refer to
“Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further information.
importvv 205
17 Locate Commands
locatecage
DESCRIPTION
The locatecage command allows system administrators to locate a drive cage, drive magazine,
or port in the system using the devices’ blinking LEDs.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the locatecage command can be one of the following:
•To locate an entire drive cage:
locatecage [option <arg>] <cage_name>
•To locate a drive magazine:
locatecage [option <arg>] <cage_name> <mag>
•To locate a port:
locatecage [option <arg>] <cage_name> <port_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the cage_locate right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–t <sec>
Specifies the number of seconds, from 0through 255 seconds, to blink the LED. If the argument is
not specified, the option defaults to 60 seconds.
SPECIFIERS
<cage_name>
Specifies the drive cage name as shown in the Name column of showcage command output.
<port_name>
Indicates the port specifiers. Accepted values are A0|B0|A1|B1|A2|B2|A3|B3. If a port is
specified, the port LED will oscillate between green and off. The <port_name> specifier is not
supported for DC3 drive cages.
<mag>
Indicates the drive magazine by number.
•For DC1 drive cages, accepted values are 0 through 4.
•For DC2 and DC4 drive cages, accepted values are 0through 9.
•For DC3 drive cages, accepted values are 0through 15.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•The <port_name> specifier is not supported for DC3 drive cages.
206 Locate Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example causes the Fibre Channel LEDs on the drive cage cage0 to blink for 20
seconds:
cli% locatecage –t 20 cage0
NOTES
•Issue the showcage command for a list of cage names.
•If no port or magazine is specified, all LEDs in the cage are set as amber or oscillate (depending
on the cage type).
•If the port is specified, it turns green (not available in all cage types).
locatecage 207
locatenode
DESCRIPTION
The locatenode command helps locate a particular node or its components by blinking LEDs on
the node. By default all LEDs on the node will blink.
SYNTAX
locatenode [options] <nodeid>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the node_locate right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
-t <sec>
Specifies the number of seconds, from 0 through 255, to blink the LEDs. If not specified, the option
defaults to 60 seconds.
-ps <psid>
Blinks the hotplug LED for the specified power supply.
-pci <slot>
Blinks the hotplug LED corresponding to the PCI card in the specified slot.
-fan <fanid>
Blinks the hotplug LED on the specified node fan module.
-drive
Blinks the hotplug LED corresponding to the node's internal drive.
-bat
Blinks the hotplug LED on the battery backup unit.
SPECIFIERS
<nodeid>
Indicates which node the locatenode operation will act on. Accepted values are 0 through 7.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, power supply 1 on node 3 is identified by blinking its hotplug LED for
90 seconds
cli% locatenode -t 90 -ps 1 3
NOTES
None.
208 Locate Commands
locatesys
DESCRIPTION
The locatesys command helps locate a storage system by blinking the node status LEDs on all
nodes of a storage system alternating between amber and green. By default, the LEDs in all
connected cages are also set as amber or oscillating (depending on the cage).
SYNTAX
locatesys [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the sys_locate right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–t <seconds>
Specifies the number of seconds to blink the LEDs. The default is 60 seconds; the maximum is 255
seconds.
-nodes <node_list>
Specifies a comma-separated list of nodes on which to blink LEDs. The default is all nodes.
-nocage
Specifies that LEDs on the drive cages should not blink. The default is to blink LEDs for all cages
in the system.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, an HP 3PAR Storage System is identified by blinking the LEDs on all
drive cages in the system for 90 seconds.
cli% locatesys -t 90
NOTES
None.
locatesys 209
18 Move Commands
movech
DESCRIPTION
The movech command moves a list of chunklets from one physical disk to another.
SYNTAX
movech [options] <fd:fp–td:tp>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role granted the ch_move right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–nowait
Specifies that the command returns before the operation is completed.
-dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run. No chunklets are actually moved.
–devtype
Permits the moves to happen to different device types.
–perm
Specifies that chunklets are permanently moved and the chunklets’ original locations are not
remembered. If the –perm option is not specified, the chunklets’ original locations are retained,
thereby allowing the chunklets to be returned to their original locations through the moverelocpd
and servicemag resume commands.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
-ovrd
Permits the moves to happen to a destination even when there will be a loss of quality because of
the move. This option is only necessary when the target of the move is not specified and the -perm
flag is used.
SPECIFIERS
<fd:fp>[<–td:tp>]...
Specifies that the chunklet located at the specified PD (<fd>) and the chunklet’s position on that
disk (<fp>) be moved to either the specified destination disk (<td>) and chunklet position (<tp>),
or a location determined by the system if a destination (<-td:tp>) is not specified. This specifier
must be used at least once on the command line. Repeated use of this specifier allows multiple
chunklets to be moved.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
210 Move Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example moves the chunklet in position 0on disk 24, to position 50 on disk 64
and chunklet in position 0on disk 25, to position 1on disk 27:
cli% movech 24:0-64:50 25:0-27:1
Are you sure you want to move the chunklets?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Move -State- --Detailed_State---
24:0-64:50 normal normal
25:0-27:1 degraded disks_reused_in_row
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Status. The overall status of the move.
•normal. Indicates the chunklet has successfully moved with no loss of quality.
•degraded. Indicates the chunklet has successfully moved with loss of quality.
•failed. Indicates the chunklet was not moved.
•Detailed_State. Provides additional details of the move with General Information, Error
Information, or Degraded Information.
General Information:
•dest_unknown. Destination is unknown.
•dest_unknown. Destination is known.
•valid_move. Source and Destination are valid.
•ch_moved. Chunklet was moved.
•ch_move_pending. Chunklet move is pending due to -nowait option.
•move_error. Error moving chunklet.
Error Information:
•error_type_unknown. An unknown error occurred.
•spares_not_found. No suitable spares available.
•duplicate_src. Duplicate source input.
•duplicate_dest. Duplicate destination in chunklet list.
•src_relocating. Source is relocating.
•ch_synching. Chunklet is synchronizing.
•src_no_ld. Source not associated with an LD.
•src_ld_invalid. Source associated with invalid LD.
•src_set_invalid. Source is in invalid set.
•src_not_found. Source chunklet does not exist.
•invalid_dest. Destination is invalid.
•move_failed. Chunklet move failed.
•disk_relocating. Disk is relocating.
Degraded Information:
•disks_reused_in_row. Disks reused in row.
•connection_degraded. Connection is degraded.
movech 211
•remote_pds_used. Remote PDs used.
•ldpattern_not_obeyed. LD pattern was not obeyed.
•raid_availability_reduced. RAID availability reduced.
NOTES
•Chunklets moved through the movech command are only moved temporarily. Issuing either
the moverelocpd or servicemag resume command can move the chunklet back to its
original position.
•Specifying the –dr option can be used to see if the specified moves succeed and what the
results (quality) of the moves are.
212 Move Commands
movechtospare
DESCRIPTION
The movechtospare command moves data from specified Physical Disks (PDs) to a temporary
location selected by the system.
SYNTAX
movechtospare [options] <fd:fp>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role granted the ch_movetospare right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–nowait
Specifies that the command returns before the operation is completed.
-dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run. No chunklets are actually moved.
–devtype
Permits the moves to happen to different device types.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<fd:fp>
Indicates that the move takes place from the specified PD (<fd>) and chunklet position (<fp>).
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, chunklet 0from physical disk 66 is moved to spare:
cli% movechtospare 66:0
Are you sure you want to move the chunklet to spare?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Move -Status- -Detailed_State--
66:0-54:49 normal ch_moved,normal
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Status. The overall status of the move.
•normal. Indicates the chunklet has successfully moved with no loss of quality.
•degraded. Indicates the chunklet has successfully moved with loss of quality.
movechtospare 213
•failed. Indicates the chunklet was not moved.
•Detailed_State. Provides additional details of the move with General Information, Error
Information, or Degraded Information.
General Information:
•dest_unknown. Destination is unknown.
•dest_unknown. Destination is known.
•valid_move. Source and Destination are valid.
•ch_moved. Chunklet was moved.
•ch_move_pending. Chunklet move is pending due to -nowait option.
•move_error. Error moving chunklet.
Error Information:
•error_type_unknown. An unknown error occurred.
•spares_not_found. No suitable spares available.
•duplicate_src. Duplicate source input.
•duplicate_dest. Duplicate destination in chunklet list.
•src_relocating. Source is relocating.
•ch_synching. Chunklet is synchronizing.
•src_no_ld. Source not associated with an LD.
•src_ld_invalid. Source associated with invalid LD.
•src_set_invalid. Source is in invalid set.
•src_not_found. Source chunklet does not exist.
•invalid_dest. Destination is invalid.
•move_failed. Chunklet move failed.
•disk_relocating. Disk is relocating.
Degraded Information:
•disks_reused_in_row. Disks reused in row.
•connection_degraded. Disks reused in row.
•remote_pds_used. Connection Degraded.
•ldpattern_not_obeyed. LD pattern was not obeyed.
•raid_availability_reduced. RAID availability reduced.
NOTES
None.
214 Move Commands
movepd
DESCRIPTION
The movepd command moves data from specified Physical Disks (PDs) to a temporary location
selected by the system.
SYNTAX
movepd [options] <PD_ID>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role granted the pd_move right.
OPTIONS
-nowait
Specifies that the command returns before the operation is completed.
-dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run, and no physical disks are actually moved.
-devtype
Permits the moves to happen to different device types.
-perm
Makes the moves permanent, removes source tags after relocation.
-f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<PD_ID>...
Specifies the physical disk ID. This specifier can be repeated to move multiple physical disks.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a dry run of moving the data on physical disk 0 to free or spare
space:
cli% movepd -dr 0
Are you sure you want to move the pd to spare?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Move -State- -Detailed_State-
0:0-66:50 normal normal
0:1-62:51 normal normal
0:2-92:51 normal normal
0:3-88:52 normal normal
0:4-50:53 normal normal
0:5-86:54 normal normal
0:6-82:55 normal normal
movepd 215
NOTES
•The destination physical disks do not need to be specified; the system automatically determines
the spare locations.
•Specifying the -dr option can be used to see if the specified moves succeed and the results
(quality) of the moves.
216 Move Commands
movepdtospare
DESCRIPTION
The movepdtospare command moves data from specified Physical Disks (PDs) to a temporary
location selected by the system.
SYNTAX
movepdtospare [options] <PD_ID>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role granted the pd_movetospare right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–nowait
Specifies that the command returns before the operation is completed.
-dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run. No PDs are actually moved.
–devtype
Permits the moves to happen to different device types.
-vacate
Makes the moves permanent, removes source tags after relocation.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<PD_ID>...
Specifies the PD ID. This specifier can be repeated to move multiple PDs.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a dry run of moving the data on PD 0to free or spare space:
cli% movepdtospare -dr 0
Are you sure you want to move the pd to spare?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Move -Status- -Detailed_State--
0:0-92:49 normal valid_move,normal
0:1-62:50 normal valid_move,normal
0:2-42:51 normal valid_move,normal
0:3-88:52 normal valid_move,normal
0:4-62:53 normal valid_move,normal
0:5-90:55 normal valid_move,normal
0:6-88:55 normal valid_move,normal
movepdtospare 217
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Status. The overall status of the move.
•normal. Indicates the chunklet has successfully moved with no loss of quality.
•degraded. Indicates the chunklet has successfully moved with loss of quality.
•failed. Indicates the chunklet was not moved.
•Detailed_State. Provides additional details of the move with General Information, Error
Information, or Degraded Information.
General Information:
•dest_unknown. Destination is unknown.
•dest_unknown. Destination is known.
•valid_move. Source and Destination are valid.
•ch_moved. Chunklet was moved.
•ch_move_pending. Chunklet move is pending due to -nowait option.
•move_error. Error moving chunklet.
Error Information:
•error_type_unknown. An unknown error occurred.
•spares_not_found. No suitable spares available.
•duplicate_src. Duplicate source input.
•duplicate_dest. Duplicate destination in chunklet list.
•src_relocating. Source is relocating.
•ch_synching. Chunklet is synchronizing.
•src_no_ld. Source not associated with an LD.
•src_ld_invalid. Source associated with invalid LD.
•src_set_invalid. Source is in invalid set.
•src_not_found. Source chunklet does not exist.
•invalid_dest. Destination is invalid.
•move_failed. Chunklet move failed.
•disk_relocating. Disk is relocating.
Degraded Information:
•disks_reused_in_row. Disks reused in row.
•connection_degraded. Disks reused in row.
•remote_pds_used. Connection Degraded.
•ldpattern_not_obeyed. LD pattern was not obeyed.
•raid_availability_reduced. RAID availability reduced.
NOTES
•The destination PDs do not need to be specified as the system automatically determines the
spare locations.
•Specifying the –dr option can be used to see if the specified moves succeeds and the results
(quality) of the moves.
218 Move Commands
moverelocpd
DESCRIPTION
The moverelocpd command moves chunklets that were on a physical disk to the target of
relocation.
SYNTAX
moverelocpd [options] [<fd>[–<td>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the pd_movereloc right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–nowait
Specifies that the command returns before the operation is completed.
-dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run. No physical disks are actually moved.
–partial
Move as many chunklets as possible. If this option is not specified, the command fails if not all
specified chunklets can be moved.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
-p <pattern>
Specifies a pattern to select <fd> disks. The <td> specifier cannot be used with this -p option.
If no <fd> are specified, then all disks that match the pattern are selected as the <fd> disks. If
<fd> disks are specified along with -p then only disks that match the pattern are selected as <fd>
disk. The following arguments can be specified as patterns for this option:
-nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (e.g. 1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen
(e.g. 0-7). The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node(s).
-st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (e.g. 1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen
(e.g. 0-7). The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot(s).
-pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (e.g. 1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen
(e.g. 0-4). The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port(s).
-cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (e.g. 1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (e.g. 0-3). Disks must reside in the specified drive cage(s).
moverelocpd 219
-mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (e.g. 1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (e.g. 0-7). Disks
must reside in the specified drive magazine(s).
-pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (e.g. 1,2,3).
A range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (e.g. 0-3). Disks must reside in the specified
position(s).
-dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are separated with a single comma (e.g. 1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen
(e.g. 0-3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
-tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
-tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
-fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
-fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
-devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
-devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example -p -fc_gt 60 -fc_lt
230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free chunklets and
that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
SPECIFIERS
<fd>[–<td>]...
Specifies that the chunklets that were relocated from specified disk (<fd>), are moved to the
specified destination disk (<td>). If destination disk (<td>) is not specified then the chunklets are
moved back to original disk (<fd>). The <fd> specifier is not needed if -p option is used, otherwise
220 Move Commands
it must be used at least once on the command line. If this specifier is repeated then the operation
is performed on multiple disks.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example moves chunklets that were on PD 8that were relocated to another position,
back to PD 8:
cli% moverelocpd 8
Are you sure you want to move the chunklets ?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Move -Status- -Detailed_State-
42:51-8:2 normal normal
62:50-8:1 normal normal
62:53-8:4 normal normal
62:57-8:7 normal normal
64:49-8:0 normal normal
88:52-8:3 normal normal
88:55-8:6 normal normal
90:55-8:5 normal normal
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Status. The overall status of the move.
•normal. Indicates the chunklet has successfully moved with no loss of quality.
•degraded. Indicates the chunklet has successfully moved with loss of quality.
•failed. Indicates the chunklet was not moved.
•Detailed_State. Provides additional details of the move with General Information, Error
Information, or Degraded Information.
General Information:
•dest_unknown. Destination is unknown.
•dest_unknown. Destination is known.
•valid_move. Source and Destination are valid.
•ch_moved. Chunklet was moved.
•ch_move_pending. Chunklet move is pending due to -nowait option.
•move_error. Error moving chunklet.
Error Information:
•error_type_unknown. An unknown error occurred.
•spares_not_found. No suitable spares available.
•duplicate_src. Duplicate source input.
•duplicate_dest. Duplicate destination in chunklet list.
•src_relocating. Source is relocating.
•ch_synching. Chunklet is synchronizing.
•src_no_ld. Source not associated with an LD.
•src_ld_invalid. Source associated with invalid LD.
moverelocpd 221
•src_set_invalid. Source is in invalid set.
•src_not_found. Source chunklet does not exist.
•invalid_dest. Destination is invalid.
•move_failed. Chunklet move failed.
•disk_relocating. Disk is relocating.
Degraded Information:
•disks_reused_in_row. Disks reused in row.
•connection_degraded. Disks reused in row.
•remote_pds_used. Connection Degraded.
•ldpattern_not_obeyed. LD pattern was not obeyed.
•raid_availability_reduced. RAID availability reduced.
NOTES
•Chunklets moved from physical disks fd are treated as if they originated on disk td. Disk
td can be the same as disk fd.
•Specifying the –dr option can be used to see if the specified moves succeeds and what the
results (quality) of the moves are.
•If the –partial option is used, the command relocates as many chunklets as possible and
prints messages for the chunklets it could not move.
222 Move Commands
movetodomain
DESCRIPTION
The movetodomain command moves objects from one domain to another.
SYNTAX
movetodomain [options] <object_name> <domain_name | domain_set>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the domain_moveto right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–vv
Specifies that the object is a virtual volume.
-cpg
Specifies that the object is a CPG.
–host
Specifies that the object is a host.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<object_name>
Specifies the name of the object to be moved.
<domain_name | domain_set>
Specifies the domain or domain set to which the specified object is moved. The domain set name
must start with set:. To remove the domain from an object from any domain, specify the string
-unset for the <domain_name> or <domain_set> specifier.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the movement of VV vv1 to domain SampleDomain:
cli% movetodomain -vv vv1 SampleDomain
The following volumes will have their domain modified:
vv1
The following hosts will have their domain modified:
thehost
The following CPGs will have their domain modified:
SampleCPG
14 associated LDs will also have their domain changed.
Do you want to proceed with moving the above to domain SampleDomain?
select y=yes n=no: y
movetodomain 223
The following example displays the removal of the host testhost from any domain:
cli% movetodomain -host testhost -unset
The following hosts will have their domain modified:
Id Name Persona -WWN/iSCSI_Name- Port
2 testhost Generic
Do you want to proceed with removing the domain of the above?
select y=yes n=no: y
NOTES
•The movetodomain command moves all objects that are directly or indirectly related to the
specified object into the specified domain. Possible relationships include, but are not limited
to, Virtual Volume Logical Unit Numbers (VLUNs) between hosts and VVs, VVs using a CPG
for snapshot space, and two VVs sharing the same logical disk. If the -f option is not used,
a list of all objects that will be modified is shown before the confirmation prompt.
•Only hosts are permitted to be members of domain sets.
•When moving a host to a domain set, all objects directly or indirectly related to that host must
be members of a domain contained in that domain set otherwise the command will fail.
•If the -cpg option is selected and the selected CPG is part of an Adaptive Optimization (AO)
configuration, all CPGs in that AO configuration will be moved to the specified domain.
224 Move Commands
19 Promote Commands
promotesv
DESCRIPTION
The promotesv command copies the differences of a snapshot back to its base volume, allowing
you to revert the base volume to an earlier point in time.
SYNTAX
promotesv [options] <virtual_copy_name | VV_set>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the sv_promote right.
OPTIONS
-target
Copy the differences of the virtual copy to the specified RW parent in the same VV family tree.
The default is to copy the differences to the base volume. This option cannot be used with the
-halt option.
–rcp
Allows the promote operation to proceed even if the RW parent volume is currently in a Remote
Copy volume group, if that group has not been started. If the Remote Copy group has been started,
this command fails. This option cannot be used in conjunction with the –halt option.
–halt
Cancels an ongoing snapshot promotion. Marks the RW parent volume with the cpf status, which
can be cleaned up using the promotevvcopy (see “promotevvcopy” (page 227)) command or by
issuing a new instance of the promotesv command. This option cannot be used in conjunction
with any other option.
-pri <high|med|low>
Specifies the priority of the copy operation when it is started. This option allows the user to control
the overall speed of a particular task. If this option is not specified, the promotesv operation is
started with a default priority of medium. High priority indicates that the operation will complete
faster. Low priority indicates that the operation will run slower than the default priority task. This
option can not be used with -halt option.
SPECIFIERS
<virtual_copy_name | VV_set>
Specifies the name of the virtual copy volume or set of virtual copy volumes to be promoted, using
up to 31 characters in length. The virtual volume set name must start with set:.
RESTRICTIONS
•The virtual copy and its base volume must not be exported.
•Only one promote operation is allowed at a time within a VV family tree.
promotesv 225
EXAMPLES
The following example illustrates how virtual volume vv1 can be promoted with the differences
from its base volume:
cli% promotesv vv1
NOTES
•Issue the showvv command to verify that differences in the snapshot volume are promoted
to its target volume.
•Issue the showvv –d command to display the number of remaining blocks to be copied.
•The RW virtual copy and the target of the promote must not be exported.
•Only one promote operation is allowed at a time within a virtual volume family tree.
226 Promote Commands
promotevvcopy
DESCRIPTION
The promotevvcopy command promotes a physical copy back to a regular base volume.
SYNTAX
promotevvcopy <physical_copy_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vvcopy_promote right.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<physical_copy_name>
Specifies the name of the physical copy to be promoted, using up to 31 characters.
RESTRICTIONS
The physical copy must have completed the copy from the base volume.
EXAMPLES
The following example promotes virtual volume 85 to a base volume:
cli% promotevvcopy 85
NOTES
•The saved snapshot of the parent of <physical_copy_name> is also removed.
•The promotevvcopy command can also be used to clean up a failed physical copy.
•Issue the showvv command to verify that promoted volume is a base volume.
•After a physical copy has been promoted, the association between it and its parent volume
is broken; the physical copy and base volume can no longer resync. The saved snapshot of
the parent of physical copy is also removed.
promotevvcopy 227
20 Remove Commands
removealert
DESCRIPTION
The removealert command removes one or more alerts from the system.
CAUTION: Use care when removing alerts. Alerts that have not been fixed or acknowledged
should not be removed.
SYNTAX
removealert [option] –a|<alert_ID>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the alert_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–a
Specifies all alerts from the system and prompts removal for each alert. If this option is not used,
then the <alert_ID> specifier must be used.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used and there are alerts in the new state,
the command requires confirmation before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<alert_ID>...
Indicates a specific alert be removed from the system. This specifier can be repeated to remove
multiple alerts. If this specifier is not used, the –aoption must be used.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays all alerts from the system with the option to remove individual
alerts:
cli% removealert –a
Id 120 – New
Occurred 4 times, last at Tue May 03 22:45:47 PDT 2005
Message code: 196609
Tue May 03 22:23:17 PDT 2005
Node: 0 Severity: Minor
Firmware coredump event
Firmware COREDUMP: recovered file /var/core/hba/fwcore.n00.s02.p01.20050503.224547
Alert 120 is marked as "New".
228 Remove Commands
Are you sure you want to remove it?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Id 131 – New
Message code: 1114115
Thu May 05 00:11:25 PDT 2005
Node: 0 Severity: Minor
Too many events are being logged
Too many events are being generated. 2 event files were rolled over in less
than 1800 seconds. Current event files could not be archived because too many
have been archived already.
Alert 131 is marked as "New".
Are you sure you want to remove it?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Id 133 – New
Message code: 1966081
Thu May 05 00:25:27 PDT 2005
Node: 0 Severity: Degraded
Cage log event
cage2–A, loop 1:0:2, cage time Thu May 5 00:25:29 2005. Fan at position 1 is
running at high speed. Internal parameters: 0x0003 0x0109 01 01 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00.
Alert 133 is marked as "New".
Are you sure you want to remove it?
select q=quit y=yes n=no:
NOTES
Use care when removing alerts. Alerts that have not been fixed or acknowledged should NOT be
removed.
removealert 229
removeaocfg
DESCRIPTION
The removeaocfg command removes specified Adaptive Optimization configurations from the
system.
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
SYNTAX
removeaocfg [options] {<aocfg_name>|<pattern>}...
OPTIONS
-pat <pattern>
Indicates that specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and that all AO configurations
matching the specified pattern are removed. By default, confirmation is required to proceed with
the command unless the -f option is specified. This option must be used if the pattern specifier
is used.
-f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<aocfg_name>
Specifies the name of the AO configuration to be removed.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to remove multiple AO configurations.
If this specifier is not used, the <aocfg_name> specifier must be used. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern”
(page 12) for further information.
NOTES
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example removes AO configurations that start with test.
cli% removeaocfg -f -pat test*
230 Remove Commands
removecpg
DESCRIPTION
The removecpg command removes Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs) from the system or
removes specific Logical Disks (LDs) from CPGs.
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the cpg_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
removecpg [options <arg>] {<CPG_name>|<pattern>}...
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
–ld
Specifies that after the CPG is removed, all LDs that were part of the CPG are also removed. This
is the default behavior.
–sa <LD_name>
Specifies that the LD, as identified with the <LD_name> argument, used for snapshot administration
space allocation is removed. The <LD_name> argument can be repeated to specify multiple LDs.
This option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
–sd <LD_name>
Specifies that the LD, as identified with the <LD_name> argument, used for snapshot data space
allocation is removed. The <LD_name> argument can be repeated to specify multiple LDs. This
option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
–pat
The specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and that all common provisioning groups
matching the specified pattern are removed. By default, confirmation is required to proceed with
the command unless the –f option is specified. This option must be used if the pattern specifier
is used.
SPECIFIERS
<CPG_name>
Specifies the name of the CPG that is either being removed or losing LDs.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to remove multiple common provisioning
groups. If this specifier is not used, the <CPG_name> specifier must be used. See “Glob-Style
Pattern” (page 12) for more information.
removecpg 231
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•The removecpg command fails if any of the LDs, or the entire CPG, is in use by a Thinly
Provisioned Virtual Volume (TPVV).
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the removal of CPG cpg1:
cli% removecpg cpg1
NOTES
•By default, this command deletes any unused LDs. This is equivalent to using the –ld option.
The –ld option still exists for backward compatibility.
•If neither the –sa or –sd options are specified, the entire CPG is removed, including all LDs.
•The operation fails if any of the LDs are in use.
232 Remove Commands
removedomain
DESCRIPTION
The removedomain command removes an existing domain from the system.
SYNTAX
removedomain [option] <domain_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the domain_remove right.
Super
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–f
When using this option, the command does not ask for confirmation before removing the domain.
SPECIFIERS
<domain_name>
Specifies the domain that is removed.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example removes the domain named sample_domain from the system:
cli% removedomain –f sample_domain
NOTES
None.
removedomain 233
removedomainset
DESCRIPTION
The removedomainset command removes a domain set or removes domains from an existing
set.
SYNTAX
removedomainset [options] <setname> [<domain>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the domainset_remove right.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<setname>
Specifies the name of the domain set.
<domain>...
Optional list of domain names that are members of the set. If no <domain> is specified, the domain
set is removed, otherwise the specified <domain> is removed from the domain set.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To remove a domain set:
cli% removedomainset domainset
To remove a single domain from a set:
cli% removedomainset domainset domain1
NOTES
None.
234 Remove Commands
removehost
DESCRIPTION
The removehost command removes a system host or paths to a host. If one or more paths are
specified, the command removes only those paths, otherwise the entire host definition is removed.
SYNTAX
removehost [options] <hostname> [<WWN>...|<ISCSI_name>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the host_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–rvl
Remove World Wide Name(s) (WWN(s)) or iSCSI names even if there are Virtual Volume Logical
Unit Numbers (VLUNs) exported to the host. This option cannot be used if the entire host definition
is being removed.
-iscsi
Specifies that the paths are iSCSI names. If this option is not specified, the paths are WWNs.
SPECIFIERS
<hostname>
Specifies the host name, using up to 31 characters.
<WWN>
Only the specified WWN(s) path to the specified host is removed. This specifier is not required
on the command line. If a WWN is not specified, the entire host definition is removed.
<ISCSI_name>
Specifies the host iSCSI name to be removed from the specified host. If no ISCSI name is specified,
the entire host definition is removed.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•A host that has one or more VLUNs exported on it cannot be removed.
EXAMPLES
The following example removes host test01:
cli% removehost test01
removehost 235
NOTES
•Removing an entire host definition by issuing the removehost <hostname> command is
not equivalent to removing all of the paths associated with a host. The latter leaves a host
definition with no paths associated to it, whereas the former removes the entire host definition.
•Verify the removal of hosts by issuing the showhost command.
236 Remove Commands
removehostset
DESCRIPTION
The removehostset command removes a host set or removes hosts from an existing set.
SYNTAX
removehostset [options] <setname> [<host>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the hostset_set right can remove a host set or hosts from a host set.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<setname>
Name of the host set to remove.
<host>...
Optional list of host names that are members of the set. If no <host> is specified, the host set is
removed, otherwise the specified <host> is removed from the host set.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To remove a host set:
cli% removehostset hostset
To remove a single host from a set:
cli% removehostset hostset host1
NOTES
None.
removehostset 237
removeld
DESCRIPTION
The removeld command removes a specified Logical Disk (LD) from the system service group.
SYNTAX
removeld [options] {<LD_name>|<pattern>}...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role granted the ld_remove right.
OPTIONS
–pat
Specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and all LDs matching the specified pattern are
removed. By default, confirmation is required to proceed with the command unless the –f option
is specified. This option must be used if the pattern specifier is used.
–dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run and no LDs are removed.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
–rmsys
Specifies that system resource LDs such as logging LDs and preserved data LDs are removed. See
the HP 3PAR StoreServ Storage Concepts Guide for information on logging logical disks and
preserved data logical disks.
CAUTION: System resource logical disks are required for correct operation of the HP 3PAR
storage system. Removal of system resource logical disks should be performed by qualified service
personnel. Incorrect use of the –rmsys option can result in data loss.
-unused
Specifies the command to remove non-system logical disks. This option cannot be used with the
-rmsys option.
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>
Specifies the LD name, using up to 31 characters. Multiple LDs can be specified.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. Multiple LDs can be specified. If this specifier is not used, the
<LD_name> specifier must be used. See “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for more information.
RESTRICTIONS
•System resource LDs are required for correct operation of the HP 3PAR Storage System.
Removal of system resource LDs should be performed by qualified service personnel. Incorrect
use of the -rmsys option can result in data loss.
•If the LD is mapped to a virtual volume, the LD is not removed and the command stops at that
logical disk.
238 Remove Commands
•Issuing the removeld command with the –pat option specified returns a request for
confirmation to remove LDs, unless the –foption is specified.
•Do not issue the removeld command while a movech,movech2spare,movepd2spare,
or moverelocpd operation is being executed. Issue the showldch command to view
operations currently running on the system. See “showldch” (page 400) for additional
information.
EXAMPLES
The following example removes logical disk nf_vv_1.0.usr.1:
cli% removeld -f nf_vv_1.0.usr.1
NOTES
Verify the removal of LDs by issuing the showld command. See “showld” (page 394) for additional
information.
removeld 239
removercopygroup
DESCRIPTION
The removercopygroup command removes a Remote Copy volume group or multiple Remote
Copy groups that match a given pattern.
SYNTAX
removercopygroup [options] <group_name> | <pattern>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopygroup_remove right.
OPTIONS
-f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation. If the Remote Copy group is not empty, a confirmation is
requested even if -f is used.
-removevv
Remove remote sides' volumes.
-keepsnap
Specifies that the local volume's resync snapshot should be retained. The retained snapshot will
reflect the state of the secondary volume and may be used as the starting snapshot should the
volume be readmitted to a Remote Copy group. The snapshot will begin with “sv.rcpy”.
-pat
Specifies that specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and that all Remote Copy groups
matching the specified pattern will be removed. By default, confirmation is required to proceed
with the command unless the -f option is specified. This option must be used if the <pattern>
specifier is used.
SPECIFIERS
<group_name>
The name of the group to be removed.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to remove multiple groups. If the
<pattern> specifier is not used, the <group_name> specifier must be used.
CAUTION: Ensure that the correct group to be removed has been selected before executing this
command.
RESTRICTIONS
•This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact local service
provider for further information.
•This is not allowed if Remote Copy is in progress; the system will generate an error. The group
must be stopped using the stoprcopygroup command.
•You need access to the domain of the specified group (<group_name>) in order to run this
command.
240 Remove Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example removes Group1 from a Remote Copy system:
# removercopygroup Group1
The following example removes Remote Copy groups that start with the name testgroup:
# removercopygroup -pat testgroup*
The following example removes the Remote Copy group group1 and retains the resync snapshots
associated with each volume.
# removercopygroup -keepsnap group1
The following example removes Group1 and associated volumes from the local system and removes
the corresponding volumes on all the target systems of Group1.
# removercopygroup -removevv Group1
NOTES
•If the mirror_config policy is set for this group’s target system and the group is a primary
group, then this command will be mirrored to the target and the corresponding secondary
group will also be removed. If the policy is set and the group is a secondary group, then this
command will fail.
•The removercopygroup command removes all the associations configured in the specified
group and removes the group name and any Remote Copy synchronization snapshots affiliated
with volumes in the group.
•The -keepsnap and -removevv options are mutually exclusive.
removercopygroup 241
removercopytarget
DESCRIPTION
The removercopytarget command removes target designation from a Remote Copy system
and removes all links affiliated with that target definition.
SYNTAX
removercopytarget [options] <target_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopytarget_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
-cleargroups
Remove all groups that have no other targets or dismiss this target from groups with additional
targets. All groups that contain this target must be stopped before this can be issued.
-f
Do not ask for confirmation when -cleargroups is specified.
SPECIFIERS
<target_name>
The target name for the target definition to be removed.
RESTRICTIONS
•This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for more information.
•A target definition cannot be deleted if it is being used by any group.
EXAMPLES
The following example removes targets System1 and System2 from the primary and backup
systems in a Remote Copy pair:
# removercopytarget System1
# removercopytarget System2
NOTES
None.
242 Remove Commands
removesched
DESCRIPTION
The removesched command removes a scheduled task from the system.
SYNTAX
removesched [options] <schedname|pattern>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role granted the sched_remove right.
OPTIONS
-pat
Specifies that certain patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and that all scheduled tasks matching
the specified pattern are removed. By default, confirmation is required to proceed with the command
unless the -f option is specified. This option must be used if the pattern specifier is used.
-f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<schedname>
Specifies the schedule that is removed. Can be at most 31 characters in length.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to remove multiple scheduled tasks.
If this specifier is not used, the <schedname> specifier must be used. The <schedname> can be
up to 31 characters in length.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
None.
NOTES
None.
removesched 243
removesnmpmgr
DESCRIPTION
The removesnmpmgr command removes preregistered SNMP managers from receiving alerts
(traps).
WARNING! SNMP cannot be used in Common Criteria mode. It might compromise the security
of the storage system.
SYNTAX
removesnmpmgr [option <arg>] <manager_IP>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the snmpmgr_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–p <port_number>
Specifies the port number where the manager receives traps. If not specified, the port number
defaults to 162.
SPECIFIERS
<manager_IP>
Specifies the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the host where the manager runs. IPv6 address is in
hexadecimal, case insensitive, and is separated by colons. An example would be:
5def:2008:0:0:abcd:0:0:161a
In addition, a double colon (::) can be used once in an address to replace multiple fields of zeros.
For example:
5def:2008:0:0:abcd::161a
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the removal of a manager with the IPv4 address 123.45.67.89
from the list of registered managers:
cli% removesnmpmgr 123.45.67.89
The following example displays the removal of a manager with the IPv6 address
5def:2008:abcd::161a from the list of registered managers:
cli% removesnmpmgr 5def:2008:abcd::161a
244 Remove Commands
EXIT STATUS
The following codes are returned indicating success or failure:
•0indicates that the trap manager host was removed and the command was successful.
•1indicates that the command failed.
•2indicates that the host is not on the list of registered hosts.
NOTES
•SNMP managers are registered by issuing the addsnmpmgr command. See “addsnmpmgr”
(page 42) for additional information.
•Verify the removal of SNMP managers by issuing the showsnmpmgr command. See
“showsnmpmgr” (page 473) for more information.
removesnmpmgr 245
removesnmppw
DESCRIPTION
The removesnmppw command allows a user to remove SNMP access community string passwords.
WARNING! SNMP cannot be used in Common Criteria mode. It might compromise the security
of the storage system.
SYNTAX
removesnmppw [options]
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the snmppw_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–rw|–r|–w
Removes the read/write (–rw), read-only (–r), or write-only (–w) password. If not specified, the
read/write community string password is removed.
–f
Forces the operation so that the command does not require confirmation before proceeding.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the removal of the read/write SNMP access password:
cli% removesnmppw -f
EXIT STATUS
The following codes are returned indicating success or failure:
•0indicates that the password was removed and the command was successful.
•1indicates that the command failed.
•2indicates that a password does not exist.
NOTES
•After a password has been removed, the system manager can no longer use that password
to send requests to the SNMP agent.
•Verify the removal of SNMP passwords by issuing the showsnmppw command. See
“showsnmppw” (page 474) for additional information.
246 Remove Commands
removesnmpuser
DESCRIPTION
The removesnmpuser command allows a user to remove an SNMPv3 user.
WARNING! SNMP cannot be used in Common Criteria mode. It might compromise the security
of the storage system.
SYNTAX
removesnmpuser [options] <username>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit, Browse
•Any role granted the snmpuser_remove right.
OPTIONS
–f
Forces the operation so that the command does not require confirmation before proceeding.
SPECIFIERS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the removal of the an SNMP user:
cli% removesnmpuser -f joe
EXIT STATUS
The following codes are returned indicating success or failure:
•0indicates that the password was removed and the command was successful.
•1indicates that the command failed.
•2indicates that a password does not exist.
NOTES
After a user has been removed, an SNMPv3 manager can no longer use that username to send
requests to the SNMP agent. An SNMP user will also be removed if the removeuser command
has been issued on that user.
Verify the removal of SNMP users by issuing the showsnmpuser command.
removesnmpuser 247
removespare
DESCRIPTION
The removespare command removes chunklets from the spare chunklet list.
SYNTAX
removespare [options] <chunklet_specifier>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the spare_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the operation is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
–p
Specifies that partial completion of the command is acceptable. Chunklets specified that are not
on the current service group spare list are ignored.
SPECIFIERS
<chunklet_specifier>...
The chunklet specifier can be issued in the following formats:
<PD_ID:chunklet_num>...
Specifies the identification of the physical disk (PD_ID) and the position number of the chunklet
on the disk (chunklet_num). This specifier can be repeated.
<PD_ID>:a...
Specifies the identification of the physical disk (PD_ID) and all (a) chunklets on the disk. This
specifier can be repeated.
a:<chunklet_num>...
Specifies the chunklet number on all physical disks. This specifier can be repeated.
a:a
Removes all spare chunklets that are not currently used.
–pos <cage:mag:disk:chunklet_num>
Specifies the position of a specific chunklet identified by its position in a drive cage, drive magazine,
physical disk, and chunklet number. For example –pos 1:0.2:3:121, where 1is the drive cage,
0.2 is the drive magazine, 3is the physical disk, and 121 is the chunklet number.
–pos <cage:mag:disk:a>
Specifies that all chunklets on a physical disk, identified by drive cage number, drive magazine
number, and disk number, are marked to be removed.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
248 Remove Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example removes a spare chunklet from position 3on physical disk 1:
cli% removespare 1:3
NOTES
•Verify the removal of spare chunklets by issuing the showspare command. See “showspare”
(page 479) for more information.
•If a wildcard (a) is used or the -p flag is specified, prints the number of spares removed.
Otherwise, if all the explicitly specified spares could not be removed, prints an error message.
removespare 249
removesshkey
DESCRIPTION
The removesshkey command removes your Secure Shell (SSH) public key to disable key
authentication.
SYNTAX
removesshkey [<user_name>... ]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit, Browse
•Any role granted the sshkey_remove right.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<user_name>...
Specifies the name of the user whose SSH key is removed. If not specified, the SSH key for the
current user is removed.
RESTRICTIONS
Only Super level users are allowed to remove other users’ keys.
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the removal of your SSH public key:
cli% removesshkey
NOTES
•After removing the user's SSH public key on the HP 3PAR Storage System, the user cannot
use the SSH key authentication to log in. The user must use name and password to log in.
•The showuser -k command can be used to display users that have SSH keys.
250 Remove Commands
removetask
DESCRIPTION
The removetask command removes information about one or more completed tasks and their
details.
SYNTAX
The syntax of the removetask command can be one of the following:
•removetask [options <arg>] –a
•removetask [options <arg>] –t <hours>
•removetask [options <arg>] <task_ID>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the task_remove right.
OPTIONS
–a
Removes all tasks including details.
–d
Remove task details only.
–f
Specifies that the command is to be forced. You are not prompted for confirmation before the task
is removed.
–t <hours>
Removes tasks that have not been active within the past <hours>, where <hours> is an integer
from 1 through 240.
SPECIFIERS
<task_ID>...
Allows you to specify tasks to be removed using their task IDs.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to remove a task based on the task ID.
cli% removetask 2
Remove the following tasks?
2
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
removetask 251
The following example shows how to remove all tasks, including details.
cli% removetask –a
Remove all tasks?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
NOTES
•See the HP 3PAR StoreServ Storage Concepts Guide and HP 3PAR Command Line Interface
Administrator’s Manual for additional information and examples regarding task management
and task management commands.
•With this command, the specified task ID and any information associated with it are removed
from the system. However, task IDs are not recycled, so the next task started on the system
uses the next whole integer that has not already been used. Task IDs roll over at 9999. The
system stores information for the most recent 1000 tasks.
252 Remove Commands
removetemplate
DESCRIPTION
The removetemplate command removes one or more Virtual Volume (VV), Logical Disk (LD),
and Common Provisioning Group (CPG) templates.
SYNTAX
removetemplate [options]{<template_name>|<pattern>}...
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the template_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
–pat
The specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and that all templates matching the specified
pattern are removed. By default, confirmation is required to proceed with the command unless the
–f option is specified. This option must be used if the pattern specifier is used.
SPECIFIERS
<template_name>
Specifies the name of the template to be deleted, using up to 31 characters. This specifier can be
repeated to remove multiple templates.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to remove multiple templates. If this
specifier is not used, the <template_name> specifier must be used. See “Glob-Style Pattern”
(page 12) for more information
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the forced removal of template vv1:
cli% removetemplate -f vv1
NOTES
None.
removetemplate 253
removeuser
DESCRIPTION
The removeuser command removes a user account from the system.
SYNTAX
removeuser [option] <username>...
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the user_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<username>...
Specifies a login name using any combination of letters and numbers. This argument can be
repeated to specify multiple user names.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to use this command.
•Do not remove users 3parsvc and 3paradm.
•A user cannot remove oneself. The last user on the system cannot be removed.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the forced removal of user1 from the system:
cli% removeuser –f user1
User removed.
NOTES
•Verify the removal of users by issuing the showuser command. See “showuser” (page 497)
for additional information.
•The removeuser command does not affect currently connected users. If an attempt is made
to remove a user that is currently connected, an error message will be returned.
254 Remove Commands
removeuserconn
DESCRIPTION
The removeuserconn command removes user connections to the current system.
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the userconn_remove right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
removeuserconn [options] <user_ID> <user_name> <IP_address>
OPTIONS
–pat
Specifies that the <user_ID>,<user_name>, and <IP_address> specifiers are treated as
glob-style (shell-style) patterns and all user connections matching those patterns are removed. By
default, confirmation is required to proceed with removing each connection unless the –f option
is specified.
–dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run and no connections are removed.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<user_ID>
Specifies the ID of the user to be removed.
<user_name>
Specifies the name of the user to be removed.
<IP_address>
Specifies the IP address of the user to be removed.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the forced removal of user user1 at IP address 127.0.0.1:
cli% removeuserconn –f 2315 user1 127.0.0.1
Removing user connection Id:2315 Name:user1 Addr:127.0.0.1
NOTES
Because user connections can disappear from the time they are listed and the time they are removed,
the removeuserconn command continues past errors while removing individual connections if
the –pat option is specified.
removeuserconn 255
removevlun
DESCRIPTION
The removevlun command removes a Virtual Volume’s (VVs) SCSI Logical Unit Number (LUN)
export definition from the system.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the removevlun command can be one of the following:
•removevlun [options] <VV|VVSet> <LUN> <n:s:p>
•removevlun [options] <VV|VVset> <LUN> <host|hostset>
•removevlun [options] <VV|VVset> <LUN> <host|hostset> <n:s:p>
•removevlun [options] <VV|VVset> <LUN> <n:s:p> <host|hostset>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vlun_remove right.
OPTIONS
–novcn
Specifies that a VLUN Change Notification (VCN) not be issued after removal of the VLUN.
•For direct connect or loop configurations, a VCN consists of a Fibre Channel Loop Inititalization
Primitive (LIP).
•For fabric configurations, a VCN consists of a Registered State Change Notification (RSCN)
that is sent to the fabric controller.
–pat
Specifies that the <VV_name>, <LUN>,< N:S:P>, and <host_name> specifiers are treated as
glob-style patterns and that all VLUNs matching the specified pattern are removed. By default,
confirmation is required to proceed with the command unless the –f option is specified.
–dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run and no VLUNs are removed.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name | VV_set>
Specifies the volume or volume set name, using up to 31 characters in length. The volume set name
must start with set:.
<LUN>
Specifies the LUN ID to remove.
<N:S:P>
Specifies that exports to the specified port are removed. If this specifier is not used, the host_name
specifier must be used.
node
Specifies the system port where node is a number from 0through 7.
256 Remove Commands
slot
Specifies the PCI bus slot in the node where slot is a number from 0through 5.
port
Specifies the FCS port number of the card in PCI bus slot using 1through 4.
<host_name | host_set>
Specifier requests that exports to the specified host or host set, named using up to 31 characters
in length, be removed. The host set name must start with set:. If this specifier is not used, the
N:S:P specifier must be used.
RESTRICTIONS
•To remove a specific VLUN, you must supply the same specifiers and options that you used
when that VLUN was created. Use the showvlun–tcommand to view all created VLUN
specifiers and options.
•Issuing the removevlun command with the –pat option specified returns a request for
confirmation to remove VLUNs, unless the –foption is specified.
EXAMPLES
The following example deletes VLUNs for volume vv0, LUN 0, host host1:
cli% removevlun –f vv0 0 host1
NOTES
•If the VLUN to be removed is a matched set, use the port and host_name specifiers.
•Verify the removal of VLUNs by issuing the showvlun command. See “showvlun” (page 503)
for more information.
removevlun 257
removevv
DESCRIPTION
The removevv command removes Virtual Volumes (VVs) from the system.
SYNTAX
The syntax of the removevv command can be as follows:
•removevv [options] <VV_name>|<pattern>...
•removevv -expired [options] [VV_name>|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vv_remove right can remove base volumes.
•Any role granted the vvcopy_remove right can remove physical volumes.
•Any role granted the sv_remove right can remove virtual copies.
OPTIONS
–pat
Specifies that specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and that all VVs matching the
specified pattern are removed. By default, confirmation is required to proceed with the command
unless the –f option is specified. This option must be used if the pattern specifier is used.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
–dr
Specifies that the operation is a dry run and no VVs are removed.
–stale
Specifies that all stale VVs can be removed.
–expired
Remove specified expired volumes. This option cannot be used with the -stale option.
–snaponly
Remove the snapshot copies only.
–cascade
Remove all the descendent volumes as long as none has an active VLUN. It will remove any VLUN
templates as long as there were no active VLUNs. It will remove the volumes from all the volume
sets. If the -expired option is specified, all expired volumes and their descendent volumes will
be removed regardless if they are expired or not. If the -stale option is specified, all stale volumes
and their descendent volumes will be removed regardless if they are stale or not.
–nowait
Prevents command blocking that is normally in effect until the vv is removed. Removal of the vv is
performed in the background. Only snapshots can be removed with this option. An attempt to
remove a base vv results in an error.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
258 Remove Commands
Specifies the VV name, using up to 31 characters in length. This specifier can be repeated to
remove multiple VVs. If this specifier is not used, the pattern specifier must be used.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to remove multiple VVs. If this specifier
is not used, the <VV_name> specifier must be used. See “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for more
information.
RESTRICTIONS
•Issuing the removevv command with invalid VV names causes the command to exit without
removing any VVs.
•Any VVs exported as Virtual Volume Logical Unit Numbers (VLUNs) are not removed and the
command stops at that VV.
•Any VV that contains snapshots cannot be removed.
EXAMPLES
The following example removes virtual volume vv0:
cli% removevv –f vv0
The following example removes all the expired volumes:
cli% removevv –f expired
The following example removes the volumes that start with test and are snapshot:
cli% removevv -f -snaponly -pat test*
The following example removes vv1_snap if it is a snapshot and all its descendents:
cli% removevv –f snaponly -cascade vv1_snap
NOTES
•By default, this command deletes any unused LDs that are not also part of a CPG. This is
equivalent to using the –ld option. The –ld option still exists for backward compatibility.
•A newly created LD is guaranteed to be clean. Chunklets of LDs that are removed are cleaned
before they are reused. However regions of an LD that were previously used (for example by
another VV) can contain data from its previous use. If these regions of the LD are mapped to
your user space of a VV, that data can be visible to the host to which the VV is exported.
If this is a concern, remove LDs when the VV is removed and use only newly created LDs for your
user space. Previous data in LDs used for snapshot data space or snapshot admin space is not
visible to you because these spaces are only visible after being written with new data.
•Verify the removal of VVs by issuing the showvv command. See “showvv” (page 506) for
additional information.
removevv 259
removevvset
DESCRIPTION
The removevvset command removes a VV set or removes VVs from an existing set.
SYNTAX
removevvset [options] <setname> [<vv>...]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vvset_remove right can remove a volume set or volumes from a volume
set.
OPTIONS
-f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<setname>
Specifies the name of the VV set to remove.
<VV>...
Optional list of VV names that are members of the set. If no <VV> is specified, the VV set is removed,
otherwise the specified <VV> is removed from the VV set.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To remove a VV set:
cli% removevvset vvset
To remove a single VV from a set:
cli% removevvset vvset vv1
NOTES
None.
260 Remove Commands
21 Service Commands
servicecage
DESCRIPTION
The servicecage command is necessary when executing removal and replacement actions for
a drive cage FC-AL module. The startfc or unstartfc subcommands are used to initiate
service on a cage, and the endfc subcommand is used to indicate that service is completed.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the servicecage command can be one of the following:
•servicecage remove [-f] <cagename>
•servicecage startfc|unstartfc|endfc|resetfc|hresetfc|clearlog [-f]
[-ovrd] [a|b]|[0|1] <cage_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the cage_service right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Can vary for each subcommand as noted in the following section.
SUBCOMMANDS
startfc
Prepare an FC-AL module for removal.
unstartfc
Stop the startfc subcommand. See “NOTES” for additional information about the unstartfc
subcommand.
endfc
Indicates that service on the drive cage is completed and allows the system to resume use of the
FC-AL module. Both startfc and unstartfc need this action to complete the service operation.
See “NOTES” for additional information about the endfc subcommand. Permitted for Edit user
in addition to Super and Service users.
resetfc
•For DC1 and DC3 drive cages, soft resets the FC-AL module.
•For DC2 and DC4 drive cages, resets the cage. FC-AL specifier is ignored.
hresetfc
•For DC1 and DC3 drive cages, hard reset the FC-AL module.
•For DC2 and DC4 drive cages, hard reset the cage. FC-AL specifier is ignored.
remove
Removes the indicated drive cage (indicated with the <cage_name> specifier) from the system. If
this subcommand is used, the a|b or 0|1 port specifier is not required. This command fails when
the cage has active ports or is in use. Only permitted for a Super user.
servicecage 261
clearlog
•For DC2 and DC4 drive cages, clear the log in the cage. FC-AL specifier is ignored.
•For DC3 drive cages, clearlog is not supported.
OPTIONS
–f
Forces the operation. When this option is not used, the command requires confirmation before
proceeding.
–ovrd
Forces the specified physical disk path offline even if it is the last remaining path.
SPECIFIERS
a|b
Specifies the side of the specified DC1 or DC3 drive cage to be serviced.
0|1
Specifies the side of the specified DC2 or DC4 drive cage to be serviced.
<cage_name>
Specifies the name of the drive cage to be serviced.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the commencement of Fibre Channel hot-plugging for drive cage
cage0:
cli% servicecage startfc –f -ovrd cage0
NOTES
•Issuing the servicecage command results in chunklet relocation, causing a dip in throughput.
•The unstartfc subcommand is provided if a mistake was made when issuing the
servicecage command. The unstartfc subcommand stops the original command.
•After issuing the startfc or unstartfc subcommands, the endfc subcommand must be
issued to indicate that service is completed and to restore the drive cage to its normal state.
262 Service Commands
servicehost
DESCRIPTION
The servicehost command executes removal and replacement actions for a host connecting to
an HP 3PAR Storage System port.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the servicehost command can be one of the following:
•servicehost list
•servicehost remove [-f] [<N:S:P> [<WWN_or_iSCSI_name>...]]
•servicehost copy [-f] <src_N:S:P> <WWN_or_iSCSI_name_pattern>
<dest_N:S:P>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the host_service right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
Can vary for each subcommand as noted in the following section.
SUBCOMMANDS
list
Displays a list of all inactive hosts. Permitted for all users.
remove
Removes an inactive host, as specified with the <WWN_or_iSCSI_name> specifier, from the
indicated port (<N:S:P>) and its associated VLUNs. If the <WWN_or_iSCSI_name> specifier is
not issued with the remove subcommand, all inactive hosts on the specified port and their LUNs
are removed. If the <N:S:P> specifier is not used with the remove subcommand, all inactive
hosts in the system and their LUNs are removed. See “RESTRICTIONS” for additional information
about the remove subcommand.
copy
Copies all active VLUNs from the specified source port (as specified with <src_N:S:P>) from
host WWNs or iSCSI names matching the specified pattern (<WWN_or_iSCSI_name_pattern>)
to the destination port (as specified with <dest_N:S:P>). If necessary, the port is reset to target
mode.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<N:S:P>
Specifies the host to be removed which is visible to the specified port. This specifier can only be
used with the remove subcommand.
<WWN_or_iSCSI_name>
servicehost 263
Specifies a host’s World Wide Name (WWN). This specifier can only be used with the remove
and copy subcommands. When used with the remove subcommand, this specifier can be
repeated.
<WWN_or_iSCSI_name_pattern>
Specifies that the indicated WWN or iSCSI name is treated as a glob-style pattern. See “Glob-Style
Pattern” (page 12) for more information.
<src_N:S:P>
Specifies the source port when exporting VLUNs. This specifier can only be used with the copy
subcommand.
<dest_N:S:P>
Specifies the destination port when exporting VLUNs. This specifier can only be used with the copy
subcommand.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•If the <WWN_or_iSCSI_name> specifier is not issued with the remove subcommand, all
inactive hosts on the specified port and their LUNs are removed.
•If the <N:S:P> specifier is not used with the remove subcommand, all inactive hosts in the
system and their LUNs are removed.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the creation of a host on port 0:2:1 for the export of VLUNs from
port 2:1:1:
cli% servicehost copy 2:1:1 20000200000CF790 0:2:1
Are you sure you want to run servicehost?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
The following example displays the removal of an inactive host from port 2:1:1:
cli% servicehost remove 2:1:1 20000200000CF790
Removing inactive host 20000200000CF790 on port 2:1:1
Are you sure?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
NOTES
None.
264 Service Commands
servicemag
DESCRIPTION
The servicemag command executes service on a drive magazine or disk.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the servicemag command can be one of the following:
•servicemag start [options] <cage_ID> <magazine>
•servicemag start [options] -pdid <PD_ID_0>...<PD_ID_3>
•servicemag resume|unmark [options] <cage_ID> <magazine>
•servicemag status [options] [<cage_ID> <magazine>]
•servicemag clearstatus <cage_ID> <magazine>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the mag_service right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
start
Specifies that the servicemag command informs the system manager to log or relocate disks on
a drive magazine so that the drive magazine can be removed for service.
resume
Specifies that the servicemag command informs the system manager that a drive magazine is
replaced and that data services can be resumed.
unmark
Specifies that the servicemag operation is stopped and its internal state is reset. Since the servicemag
operation is a multistep process, specifying unmark stops the servicemag operation at the completion
of the current step.
Relocation of chunklets is considered one step and can take from several minutes to several hours
(depending on number of chunklets) to complete. If servicemag unmark is issued during the
relocation phase, the spin-down phase will indicate that the servicemag start operation
Failed. This can be confirmed by issuing servicemag status -d. If the intent was to prevent
servicemag from completing, issue servicemag resume to move the data back onto the drive(s)
in this magazine once the servicemag start operation reports a failure. The unmark option
should not be used without consulting with HP 3PAR engineering.
status
Specifies that the status of the servicemag command operations on a drive magazine are
displayed. This subcommand is permitted for Super, Service, Edit and Browse users. Summary
status is provided by default, and the -d option can be used to get detailed status.
clearstatus
Clears the log shown by the servicemag command status for the given cage and magazine.
OPTIONS
–f
servicemag 265
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
–wait
Specifies that the servicemag command must be completed before exiting. If not specified, the
servicemag command automatically exits before service begins and the remainder of the process
proceeds in the background. This option is only valid for the start or resume operations.
–log
Specifies that write operations to chunklets of valid disks are written to a logging area when the
magazine is out of service (or removed). When the disks return and the servicemag resume
option is issued, the data is written from the logging Logical Disks (LDs) to those disks. Chunklets
are relocated to free or spare space if their failures would result in a RAID set becoming invalid
(for example, if two disks would be missing from a RAID 5 LD). All other used chunklets are placed
in the logging mode. This option is only valid for the start operation.
-nodisks
Specifies that the serviced drive magazine’s disk drives are valid and do not need to be replaced.
This option can only be used with the start subcommand and -log option.
–partial
This option can only be used with the resume subcommand. Specifies that as many chunklets as
possible are relocated. Error messages are printed for those chunklets that could not be relocated.
-pdid <PD_ID_0>...<PD_ID_3>
Specifies one to four physical disks (by physical disk ID) that need to be serviced or replaced. If
the -log option is also specified, logging will only apply to the remaining disks on the magazine
and not the ones specified in this option. The disks specified in this option will be vacated out to
be replaced and will not be logged. This option can only be used with the start subcommand,
and cannot be used with the <cage_ID> or <magazine> specifiers.
–d
Displays detailed status of a servicemag operation. If the -d option is excluded, a summary of
the status is displayed. This option is only valid for the status subcommand.
-dryrun
Estimates the length of time a servicemag start or servicemag resume command will
complete. If the -dryrun option is started before an actual servicemag start or resume
command, the estimation will be based on empirical data with no I/O on the system. For a more
accurate estimate, which will do runtime calculations based on the system load, use the
servicemag status <cage_ID> <magazine> command after servicemag start or
servicemag resume command has been initiated. This option is only valid for the start and
resume operations.
SPECIFIERS
<cage_ID>
Specifies the ID of the cage. Use the showcage command to determine the system’s drive cage
IDs.
<magazine>
266 Service Commands
Specifies the drive magazine within the specified drive cage to be serviced based on the side of
the drive magazine and drive magazine slot number.
•For drive chassis with a single drive cage (type DC2, DC4, and DC3), the valid syntax is
<position> (the numeric position of the drive magazine). Position values for DC2 drive
cages can be from 0to 9. Position values for DC3 drive cages can be from 0to 15.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•Users with Browse level authority can only issue the servicemag status command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the suspension and resumption of data services on drive magazine
0in drive cage 2:
cli% servicemag start –log –wait 2 0.0
Begin servicemag start –log 2 0.0...
... disks in mag : 2 0.0
... valid disks: wwn [2000000087043098] id [20] diskpos [0]
.................... wwn [2000000087008150] id [21] diskpos [1]
.................... wwn [20000000870042F6] id [22] diskpos [2]
.................... wwn [2000000087007E6D] id [23] diskpos [3]
... not valid disks:
... mark disk wwn [2000000087043098] id [20] as non usable for ld allocation
... mark disk wwn [2000000087008150] id [21] as non usable for ld allocation
... mark disk wwn [20000000870042F6] id [22] as non usable for ld allocation
... mark disk wwn [2000000087007E6D] id [23] as non usable for ld allocation
... relocating chunklets to spare space
... relocating chunklets of fail sets after logging to spare space
... logging chunklets from pd wwn [2000000087043098] id [20]
... logging chunklets from pd wwn [2000000087008150] id [21]
... logging chunklets from pd wwn [20000000870042F6] id [22]
... logging chunklets from pd wwn [2000000087007E6D] id [23]
... spinning down disk wwn [2000000087043098] id [20]
... spinning down disk wwn [2000000087008150] id [21]
... spinning down disk wwn [20000000870042F6] id [22]
... spinning down disk wwn [2000000087007E6D] id [23]
... bypassing mag 2 0.0
... bypassed mag 2 0.0
servicemag start 2 0.0 –– Succeeded
cli%
cli% sevicemag resume 2 0.0
Begin servicemag resume 2 0.0...
... onlooping mag 2 0.0
... checking for valid disks...
... disks in mag : 2 0.0
... valid disks: wwn [2000000087043098] id [20] diskpos [0]
.................... wwn [2000000087008150] id [21] diskpos [1]
.................... wwn [20000000870042F6] id [22] diskpos [2]
.................... wwn [2000000087007E6D] id [23] diskpos [3]
... not valid disks:
... playback chunklets from pd wwn [2000000087043098] id [20]
... playback chunklets from pd wwn [2000000087008150] id [21]
... playback chunklets from pd wwn [20000000870042F6] id [22]
... playback chunklets from pd wwn [2000000087007E6D] id [23]
... 74 chunklets still waiting to be played back or relocating...
.... 18 chunklets still waiting to be played back or relocating..
... All chunklets played back / relocated.
... no chunklets to move
... marking pd wwn [2000000087043098] id [20] as usable for ld allocation
... marking pd wwn [2000000087008150] id [21] as usable for ld allocation
servicemag 267
... marking pd wwn [20000000870042F6] id [22] as usable for ld allocation
... marking pd wwn [2000000087007E6D] id [23] as usable for ld allocation
servicemag resume 2 0.0 –– Succeeded
NOTES
•Issuing the servicemag command results in chunklet relocation that causes a dip in throughput.
•When a servicemag command is issued with the –log option, all chunklets on the disks in
the drive magazine being serviced are marked as normal,smag. This state indicates an
active servicemag operation on the disks.
•Any I/O on the chunklets marked normal,smag, changes the states to logging and I/O
is written to the logging logical disks.
•Issuing the servicemag resume command causes playback of the log. Any chunklets in
the logging state enter playback state as their data is played back. After all the data is
played back, the chunklets return to the normal state. Any chunklets in the normal,smag
state return directly to the normal state.
•Chunklet states can be checked by issuing either the showldch or showpdch commands
(see “Show Commands” (page 350)).
•By default, the servicemag command relocates all chunklets in the magazine to destinations
starting first with local (such as on the owning node for the logical disk) spares, then local
free space, then remote spare and finally remote free space.
•In the case when a drive needs to be replaced, the -log option should always be used in
conjunction with the-pdid option.
•Replacing disks that have not had data completely relocated can lead to data loss. If the drives
need to be replaced, the -log option should be used in conjunction with the -pdid option.
•For the servicemag start command only, instead of using the <cage_ID> <magazine>
specifiers, the disk(s) to be serviced can also be specified using the -pdid option. The
advantage is that the servicemag resume command will dismiss the old PDID when it
successfully completes.
268 Service Commands
servicenode
DESCRIPTION
The servicenode command informs the system that a certain component is to be replaced, and
causes the system to indicate the physical location of that component.
SYNTAX
servicenode <subcommand> [options] <nodeid>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the node_service right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
start
Specifies the start of service on a node.
status
Displays the state of any active servicenode operations.
end
Specifies the end of service on a node.
OPTIONS
-ps <psid>
Specifies which power supply will be placed into service.
-pci <slot>
Specifies which PCI card will be placed into service.
-fan <fanid>
Specifies which node fan will be placed into service.
-drive
Specifies that the node's internal drive will be placed into service.
-bat
Specifies that the node's battery backup unit will be placed into service.
SPECIFIERS
<nodeid>
Indicates which node the servicenode operation will act on. Accepted values are 0 through 7.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
servicenode 269
EXAMPLES
In the following example, fan 1 on node 3 is put into servicing-mode:
cli% servicenode -fan 1 3
NOTES
None.
270 Service Commands
22 Set Commands
setalert
DESCRIPTION
The setalert command sets the status of system alerts.
SYNTAX
setalert new|ack|fixed {<alert_ID>...|–a}
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the alert_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–a
Specifies that the status of all alerts be set to new, acknowledged (ack), or fixed. If not specified,
the <alert_ID> specifier must be specified on the command line.
SPECIFIERS
<alert_ID>...
Specifies that the status of a specific alert be set. This specifier can be repeated to indicate multiple
specific alerts. Up to 99 alerts can be specified in one command. If not specified, the -a option
must be specified on the command line.
new|ack|fixed
Specifies that the alert(s), as indicated with the <alert_ID> specifier or with option –a, be set
as new, acknowledged (ack), or fixed.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example sets the status of all system alerts as new:
cli% setalert new -a
NOTES
Verify the status of alerts by issuing the showalert command. See “showalert” (page 350) for
additional information.
setalert 271
setaocfg
DESCRIPTION
The setaocfg command updates an Adaptive Optimization (AO) configuration.
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
SYNTAX
setaocfg [options <arg>] <aocfg_name>
OPTIONS
-t0cpg <cpgname>
Specifies the Tier 0 CPG for this AO config.
-t1cpg <cpgname>
Specifies the Tier 1 CPG for this AO config.
-t2cpg <cpgname>
Specifies the Tier 2 CPG for this AO config.
-mode <mode>
Specifies the optimization bias for the AO configuration, which can be one of the following:
•Performance — Move more regions toward higher performance.
•Balanced — Balanced between higher performance and lower cost.
•Cost — Move more regions toward lower cost tier.
-name <newname>
Specifies a new name for the AO configuration of up to 31 characters in length.
SPECIFIERS
None.
NOTES
•Two or more Tier CPGs must be defined.
•If domains are used, all CPGs must be in the same domain or not in any domain.
•A CPG can only belong to one AO configuration.
•A CPG can be removed from a tier by specifying a null string "". At least two tiers must
remain.
•A CPG can be moved and swapped between tiers within the same AO configuration.
•A CPG cannot be moved between AO configurations; it must first be removed from one and
then added to the second.
•Active use of Adaptive Optimization requires an Adaptive Optimization license. Contact your
HP representative for more information.
272 Set Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example changes the optimization bias (mode) of an AO configuration called aocfg1
to Performance.
cli% setaocfg -mode Performance aocfg1
The following example sets the tier1 CPG for AO configuration aocfg2 to R5FCcpg.R5FCcpg
must not already be used in an AO configuration, and the tier 1 CPG for aocfg2 must not already
be set.
cli% setaocfg -t1cpg R5FCcpg aocfg2
The following example swaps a CPG between tiers.
cli% setaocfg -t0cpg R1SSDcpg -t2cpg R6NLcpg aocfg3
The following example removes a CPG from a tier. This assumes that aocfg1 has 3 tiers initially.
cli% setaocfg -t0cpg "" aocfg1
setaocfg 273
setauthparam
DESCRIPTION
The setauthparam command is used to set the authentication and authorization parameters.
SYNTAX
The syntax of the setauthparam command can be one of the following:
setauthparam [-f] <param> <value>
setauthparam [-f] <map-param> <map-value>...
setauthparam [-f] -clear <param>...
setauthparam [-f] -clearall
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the authparam_set right.
OPTIONS
-f
Does not ask for a confirmation before performing the operation.
-clearall
Clears all the authentication parameters.
-clear
Clears only the specified authentication parameters.
SPECIFIERS
Specifiers for the setauthparam command can be issued as the following:
•<param> <value> - See “Values for setauthparam Specifiers” (page 274).
•<map_param> <map_value> - See “Examples of Domain Name Prefix Effects” (page 276)
•<param> - See “Values for Specifiers <map-param> and <map-value>” (page 276).
Table 3 Values for setauthparam Specifiers
<value><param>
Numeric IP address of the LDAP server.ldap-server
Indicates the host name of the LDAP server. This value must
be set when the ldap-reqcert option is set or the
ldap-server-hn
sasl-mechanism option is set to GSSAPI. The value is
the name of the LDAP server in its certificate or the value
of the LDAP principal stored in the Kerberos database, and
will usually be a fully-qualified domain name.
Indicates the port of the LDAP server (default: 389 for
non-SSL, 636 for SSL).
ldap-port
To use SSL when communicating with the LDAP server, set
the value to 1. (The default value is 0).
ldap-ssl
Indicates whether a valid server certificate should be
required in order to proceed (The default value is 0).
ldap-reqcert
274 Set Commands
Table 3 Values for setauthparam Specifiers (continued)
<value><param>
Indicates the path name of the file containing the certificate
of the Certificate Authority that has issued the LDAP server's
ldap-ssl-cacert
certificate, or a “– “ to prompt you to enter the certificate
text.
Set this parameter to one of the following:ldap-StartTLS
•no – to not request the server use StartTLS . Default.
•try – to request the server use StartTLS but does not
require it to proceed.
•require – requests that the server uses StartTLS and
continues only when it succeeds.
The LDAP binding type must be one of the following:binding
•simple – use simple binding with the server.
•SASL - use a SASL mechanism that is expected by the
server, with the mechanism set by the sasl-mechanism
variable.
When using simple binding, the authentication process
attempts to bind the user to an entry in the server's Directory
user-dn-base
Information Tree (DIT). The Distinguished Name (DN) of
the entry is a concatenation of the value of user-attr, " = ",
the username, " , ", and the value of user-dn-base . If
group-obj is set to posixGroup, the value of
user-dn-base is also used as the base for searching for
the user's posixAccount entry, regardless of binding type.
Indicates the attribute used to form a DN for simple binding.
When the attribute ends with a back slash, the DN is the
user-attr
concatenation of the value of the user-attr variable
and the username . When the attribute does not end with
a back slash, it is as described for the user-dn-base
variable.
When the binding is SASL, the SASL mechanism must be
one supported by the LDAP server. The system allows the
mechanisms of PLAIN,DIGEST-MD5, and GSSAPI.
sasl-mechanism
Indicates the numeric IP address of the Kerberos server if
different from the LDAP server.
kerberos-server
The Kerberos realm.kerberos-realm
Set this value to 1to allow LDAP users to set a public SSH
key with the setsshkey command (default 0). Clearing
allow-ssh-key
or setting the variable to 0 disables the setting of new keys
for LDAP users but any existing keys remain until they are
removed with the removesshkey variable. This parameter
only affects LDAP users, not local users.
Indicates the base of the subtree in the DIT in which to
search for objects that hold group information. It is mutually
exclusively with the accounts-dn variable.
groups-dn
Indicates the objectClass attribute of a group object.group-obj
The attribute in the group object that holds the group's
name.
group-name-attr
The attribute that holds the names of users in the group.member-attr
Indicates the base of the subtree in the DIT in which to
search for objects that hold account information. It is
mutually exclusively with the groups-dn variable.
accounts-dn
setauthparam 275
Table 3 Values for setauthparam Specifiers (continued)
<value><param>
The objectClass attribute of an account object.account-obj
The attribute of an account object that holds the user's
username .
account-name-attr
The attribute that holds the name of a group of which the
user is a member.
memberof-attr
When set, the mapping of groups to domains is enabled.
For a user that is a member of a group that maps to a role
domain-name-attr
level, the value of domain-name-attr is used to look
up an attribute in the group that holds the name of the
domain. If the domain is too long or contains characters
that are not allowed in a domain name, the name is
truncated to the maximum length of a domain name and
invalid characters are replaced with an underscore ( _ ).
When domain-name-prefix is set, the value of the
attribute specified by domain-name-attr is a candidate
domain-name-prefix
domain name. The value of domain-name-prefix is
a character string used to extract the domain name from
the candidate. The value is an optional exclamation point
( ! ) followed by a character string called the prefix. The
exclamation point is a flag that means the presence of the
prefix is required and is described more in the paragraphs
that follow. The candidate domain name is searched for
the presence of the prefix and if found, the domain name
starts after the first occurrence of the prefix and stops before
the first space or tab following it or at the end of the
candidate domain name. If the prefix is not found, the
behavior depends on the flag. If the exclamation point was
not used (there is no flag), the candidate domain name
becomes the domain name. If the flag is present, the
candidate domain name is rejected and there is no domain
name. As a last step, and as described for
domain-name-attr , domain names can be truncated
and have invalid characters replaced.
Some examples of the effects of domain-name-prefix are shown in Table 4 (page 276):
Table 4 Examples of Domain Name Prefix Effects
resultdomain-name-prefixcandidate
dom1ISDom=dom1
dom2ISDom=ISDom=dom2
dom3!ISDom=ISDom=dom3
!ISDom=dom4
In the last case there is no resulting domain name because ISDom= does not appear in the
candidate.
Table 5 Values for Specifiers <map-param> and <map-value>
<map-value><map-param>
A group name that grants the user the Super role level if
the user is a member of that group. Multiple group names
super-map
can be specified using multiple <map-value> arguments.
A value of “ * ” matches any group name.
Same as super-map, but for the Service level.service-map
276 Set Commands
Table 5 Values for Specifiers <map-param> and <map-value> (continued)
<map-value><map-param>
Same as super-map, but for the Edit level.edit-map
Same as super-map, but for the Browse level.browse-map
Same as super-map, but for the Create level.create-map
Same as super-map, but for the Basic_edit level.basic_edit-map
Same as super-map, but for the 3PAR_AO level.3PAR_AO-map
Same as super-map, but for the 3PAR_RM level.3PAR_RM-map
NOTE: The IMC refers to <map-param> specifiers as Authorization Groups.
EXAMPLES
For a comprehensive example of the setauthparam command used during LDAP setup, see the
LDAP chapter of the HP 3PAR Command Line Interface Administrator’s Manual.
NOTES
•Users who have been provided with a password that allows successful binding with the LDAP
server will nevertheless be denied access if they are not members of any of the groups specified
by the map parameters.
•The matching of a user's groups with the mapping rules is done in the order of the mapping
parameters provided previously. When there are multiple matches, the first match determines
the user's role level.
•Domain names found with the use of domain-name-attr and domain-name-prefix are
only potential domains and a user will only have roles in those if they are actually existing
domains. The showdomain command will list existing domains.
•The showauthparam command displays authentication parameter settings and the
checkpassword command can be used to see how the parameters are used to bind with an
LDAP server and search for data to determine the user's role level.
•When HP 3PAR Domains are enabled, you can only have Super or Service roles for the
domain all. Any other domain names are ignored for Super or Service level users. You can
only have the Service role when no other domains match for levels other than Super or Service.
If other such domains match, the Service level match is ignored.
setauthparam 277
setbattery
DESCRIPTION
The setbattery command sets battery information such as the battery’s expiration date, its
recharging time, and its serial number. This information gives the system administrator a record
or log of the battery age and battery charge status.
SYNTAX
setbattery [options <arg>] <node_ID> <powersupply_ID> <battery_ID>
setbattery [options <arg>] <node_ID>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the battery_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–s <serial_number>
Specifies the serial number of the battery using a limit of eight alphanumeric characters.
–x <exp_date>
Specifies the expiration date of the battery (mm/dd/yyyy). The expiration date cannot extend
beyond 2037.
–l
Specifies that the battery test log is reset and all previous test log entries are cleared.
–r
Specifies that the battery recharge time is reset and that 10 hours of charging time are required
for the battery to be fully charged.
SPECIFIERS
<node_ID>
Specifies the node number where the battery is installed.
<powersupply_ID>
Specifies the power supply number on the node using either 0 (left side from the rear of the node)
or 1(right side from the rear of the node).
<battery_ID>
Specifies the battery number on the power supply where 0is the first battery.
NOTE: The <powersupply_ID> and <battery_ID> specifiers can be obtained from the output of
the showbattery command.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
278 Set Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example resets the battery test log and the recharging time for a newly installed
battery on node 2, power supply 1, and battery 0, with an expiration date of July 4, 2010:
cli% setbattery -x 07/04/2010 2 1 0
NOTES
To view battery status information, issue the showbattery command. See “showbattery” (page 354)
for information about the showbattery command.
setbattery 279
setcage
DESCRIPTION
The setcage command enables service personnel to set or modify parameters for a drive cage.
SYNTAX
setcage [subcommand <arg>]... <cage_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the cage_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
position <position>
Sets a description for the position of the cage in the cabinet, where <position> is a description
to be assigned by service personnel (for example, left-top)
ps <model>
Sets the model of a cage power supply, where <model> is a model name to be assigned to the
power supply by service personnel. This model name appears in the Model column of the showcage
-d command output.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<cage_name>
Indicates the name of the drive cage that is the object of the setcage operation.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example demonstrates how to assign cage1 a position description of Side Left:
cli% setcage position Cabinet 0 Bay 5 Side Left cage1
The following example demonstrates how to assign model names to the power supplies in cage1.
In this example, cage1 has two power supplies (0and 1). Both power supplies are assigned model
name Magnetek.
cli% setcage ps 0 Magnetek ps 1 Magnetek cage1
280 Set Commands
NOTES
•The parameters specified by the setcage command appear in the showcage –doutput
(see “showcage” (page 361)).
•The power supply model cannot be modified if the information is automatically retrieved from
the system.
setcage 281
setcim
DESCRIPTION
The setcim command sets the properties of the CIM server, including options to enable or disable
the HTTP and HTTPS ports for the CIM server. The command also provides the ability to configure
the port numbers associated with these two protocols. In addition, it allows users to enable or
disable the SLP port.
SYNTAX
setcim [options]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the cim_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
-f
Forces the operation of the setcim command, bypassing the typical confirmation message.
NOTE: At least one of the following options are required when issuing the setcim command.
-slp enable|disable
Enables or disables the SLP port.
-http enable|disable
Enables or disables the HTTP port.
-httpport <int>
Sets the HTTP port (49152 - 65535). The default value is 5988.
-https enable|disable
Enables or disables the HTTPS port.
-httpsport <int>
Sets the HTTPS port (49152 - 65535). The default value is 5989.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•You cannot disable both of the HTTP and HTTPS ports.
•You cannot set the same port number for both of the HTTP and HTTPS ports.
282 Set Commands
EXAMPLES
To disable the HTTPS ports:
cli% setcim -https disable
Warning: The CIM server is active and will restart.
Are you sure you want to continue (Y/N)? Y
To enable the HTTPS port and set the HTTPS port number to 49153:
cli% setcim -https enable -httpsport 49153
Warning: The CIM server is active and will restart.
Are you sure you want to continue (Y/N)? Y
NOTES
When the CIM server is active, a warning message appears to inform you of the current status of
the CIM server and asks you for confirmation to continue or not. The -f option forces the action
without a warning message.
setcim 283
setclienv
DESCRIPTION
The setclienv command sets the CLI environment parameters.
SYNTAX
setclienv <parameter> <value>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit, Browse
•Any role granted the clienv_set right.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
The specifiers include the parameters and values to which the parameters should be set. Valid
parameters and their values are as follows:
<value><parameter>
Enter one of the following:currentdomain
•The name of the domain that you wish to set as the working domain for the current CLI session.
•-unset to set no current domain.
Enter one of the following:listdom
•0- (Default) Do not include the domain column in the output.
•1- Include domain column where relevant.
Enter one of the following:csvtable
•0- (Default) Normal table printing format.
•1- Comma Separated Values (CSV) format.
Enter one of the following:nohdtot
•0- (Default) Show header and total lines.
•1- Does not show the header and total lines.
<nlines> - Specifies the number of lines of data to display before an output header is displayed.
If <nlines> is 10 or more, print the header after every <nlines> of data. If <nlines> is less than
10, print only the header at the beginning.
hafter
<nlines> - For the hist and stat commands, specifies the number of lines of data to display
as soon as the data is available. Default is 5000 if histstatnum is not set or set to 0. The data
sorting will be within the <histstatnum> rows.
histstatnum
NOTE: This parameter is only supported when connected via SSH. Specifies the command line
editing mode. Enter one of the following:
editor
•emacs - (Default) Use emacs-style line editing.
•vi - Use vi-style line editing.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
284 Set Commands
EXAMPLES
In the following example, the CLI environment is set to display domains information:
cli% setclienv listdom 1
NOTES
This command is only available when you are using a CLI shell or SSH.
setclienv 285
setcpg
DESCRIPTION
The setcpg command modifies existing Common Provisioning Groups (CPG).
SYNTAX
setcpg [options <arg>] <CPG_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit, Service
•Any role granted the cpg_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–sa <LD_name>...
Specifies additional Logical Disks (LDs) that have already been created to be used for snapshot
administration space allocation. The <LD_name> argument can be repeated to specify multiple
logical disks. This option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
–sd <LD_name>...
Specifies additional logical disks that have already been created to be used for snapshot data
space allocation. The <LD_name> argument can be repeated to specify multiple logical disks.
This option is deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
–aw <percent>
Specifies the percentage of used snapshot data space or snapshot administration space that, when
reached, results in a warning alert. To disable the warning, enter 0. This option is deprecated and
will be removed in a subsequent release.
-f
Forces the command. The command completes the process without prompting for confirmation.
NOTE: The following options control the auto logical disk creation for the common provisioning
group’s snapshot data regions. Auto logical disk creation occurs when the amount of free logical
disk space falls below the specified grow (enlarge) size setting options (–sdgs ,–sdgl).
–sdgs <size> [g|G|t|T]
Specifies the growth increment, the amount of logical disk storage created, on each autogrow
operation. The default and minimum growth increments vary according to the number of controller
nodes in the system. If <size> is non-zero it must be 8G or bigger. A size of 0 disables the
auto-grow feature. Size can be specified in megabytes (default) or in gigabytes by using the g|G
parameter and terabytes by using the t|T parameter. To specify the size in gigabytes, enter gor
G, for terabytes, enter tor T, directly after the specified size (no space). The following table
displays the default and minimum growth increments per number of nodes:
Table 6 Growth Increment Per Number of Nodes
MinimumDefaultNumber of Nodes
8 GB32 GB1-2
16 GB64 GB3-4
286 Set Commands
Table 6 Growth Increment Per Number of Nodes (continued)
MinimumDefaultNumber of Nodes
24 GB96 GB5-6
32 GB128 GB7-8
–sdgl <size> [g|G|t|T]
Specifies that the auto-grow operation is limited to the specified storage amount. The storage
amount can be specified in MB (default) or GB (using g or G) or TB (using t or T). A size of 0
(default) means no limit is enforced. To disable auto-grow, set the limit to 1.
–sdgw <size> [g|G|t|T]
Specifies that the threshold of used logical disk space, when exceeded, results in a warning alert.
The size can be specified in MB (default) or GB (using g or G) or TB (using t or T). A size of 0
(default) means no warning limit is enforced. To set the warning for any used space, set the limit
to 1.
NOTE: The following options are used to control auto logical disk creation.
–t <RAID_type>
Specifies the RAID type of the logical disk: r0 for RAID-0, r1 for RAID-1, r5 for RAID-5, or r6 for
RAID-6. If no RAID type is specified, the default is r1.
–ssz <size_number_chunklet>
Specifies the set size in terms of chunklets. The default depends on the RAID type specified: 2for
RAID-1, 4for RAID-5, and 8for RAID-6.
–rs <size>
Specifies the number of sets in a row using an integer from 1through 2147483647. If not specified,
no row limit is imposed.
–ss <size_KB>
Specifies the step size from 32 KB to 512 KB. The step size should be a power of 2 and a multiple
of 32. The default value depends on raid type and device type used. If no value is entered and
FC or NL drives are used, the step size defaults to 256 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1, and 128 KB
for RAID-5. If SSD drives are used, the step size defaults to 32 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1, and 64
KB for RAID-5. For RAID-6, the default is a function of the set size.
–ha port|cage|mag
Specifies that the layout must support the failure of one port pair, one cage, or one drive magazine
(mag). If no availability level is specified, the default is cage. This option has no meaning for
RAID-0.
–ch first|last
Specifies the characteristics of the chunklets, either first (attempt to use the lowest numbered
available chunklets) or last (attempt to use the lowest numbered available chunklets). If no
argument is specified, the default characteristic is first.
–p <pattern>
Specifies a pattern for disks. Patterns are used to select disks that are used for creating logical
disks. If no pattern is specified, the option defaults to all disks of the default device type specified
at creation time. If specified multiple times, each instance of the specified pattern adds additional
candidate disks that match the pattern. The following arguments can be specified as patterns for
this option:
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
setcpg 287
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–4).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen
(0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following options are used to select the disks that are used to create common
provisioning groups based on the characteristics of the disk.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
288 Set Commands
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command. If it is not specified, the default device type is FC.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example -p -fc_gt 60 -fc_lt
230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free chunklets
and connected to node 2 through their primary path.
–sax <LD_name>[,<LD_name>...]
Specifies that the logical disk, as identified with the <LD_name> argument, used for snapshot
administration space allocation be removed. The <LD_name> argument can be repeated to specify
multiple logical disks.
–sdx <LD_name>[,<LD_name>...]
Specifies that the logical disk, as identified with the <LD_name> argument, used for snapshot data
space allocation be removed. The <LD_name> argument can be repeated to specify multiple LDs.
–name <newname>
Specifies the name of the Common Provisioning Group (CPG) to be modified to. <newname> can
be up to 31 characters in length.
SPECIFIERS
<CPG_name>
Specifies the name of the CPG being modified.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•This command sets the parameters that will be used for future grows. Unless the the only growth
parameters (-sdgs,-sdgw or -sdgl) are being changed, this command will OVERWRITE
all previously-set parameters.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the modification of the auto-growth parameters for CPG cpg1:
cli% setcpg –sdgs 16g –sdgl 48g –sdgw 36g cpg1
The following example removes the -cpg pattern:
cli% setcpg -ha cage -t r5 -p -cg "" -devtype FC cpg1
NOTES
•With this command, you can change the device type of a CPG from logical disks of one
device type to logical disks of another device type (device types are Fibre Channel (FC),
setcpg 289
nearline (NL), or solid state drive (SSD)). This implies that, within a CPG, one can have logical
disks of type FC, type NL, and type SSD. However, this is only permitted so that, if a user
wants to change the type of a CPG from FC to NL or SSD, they can first change the new
logical disk creation characteristics using setcpg and then use region moves to change the
device types of existing logical disks. For this same reason, users are permitted to add logical
disks of a different device type to a CPG.
•The options -sdgs,-sdgl and -sdgw control the auto LD creation for the CPG’s snapshot
data regions. Auto LD creation occurs when the amount of free LD space falls below the
specified grow (enlarge) size setting options (-sdgs, -sdgl).
•If auto-grow is enabled, new LDs will be created automatically in addition to any LDs specified
with -sa or -sd options.
•Enter "" after the <pattern> option to remove the pattern.
•Use movetodomain command to move a CPG from one domain to another.
290 Set Commands
setdate
DESCRIPTION
The setdate command allows you to set the system time and date on all nodes.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the setdate command can be one of the following:
•setdate <MMDDhhmm>[[<CC>]<YY>][<.ss>]
•setdate –tzlist [group]
•setdate –tz <tzname>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the date_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–tzlist [group]
Displays a timezone within a group, if a group is specified. If a group is not specified, displays a
list of valid groups.
–tz <tzname>
Sets the timezone on all nodes. The option must have a valid tzname from the list provided with
the –tzlist command.
SPECIFIERS
<MMDD>
Specifies the month (MM) and day (DD).
<hhmm>
Specifies the hour (hh) and minute (mm) on a 24-hour clock.
<CC>
Specifies the century (CC) and cannot be used unless a year is specified (YY). This specifier is not
required.
<YY>
Specifies a year (YY). This specifier is not required.
<.ss>
Specifies seconds (ss). This specifier is not required.
Specifiers can only be used in combinations as listed in RESTRICTIONS in the section that follows.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•Specifiers must be provided in one of the combinations listed as follows when issuing the
setdate command:
•MMDDhhmm
setdate 291
•MMDDhhmmYY
•MMDDhhmmCCYY
•MMDDhhmm.ss
•MMDDhhmmYY.ss
•MMDDhhmmCCYY.ss
EXAMPLES
The following example shows the timezone being set:
Timezone set successfully.
The following example verifies the timezone is set to the required setting:
7 Mon Oct 10 23:14:52 GMT 2005
NOTES
•Specifies must be provided in one of the combinations listed as follows when issuing the
setdate command:
•MMDDhhmm
•MMDDhhmmYY
•MMDDhhmmCCYY
•MMDDhhmm.ss
•MMDDhhmmYY.ss
•MMDDhhmmCCYY.ss
•Check node dates by issuing the showdate command. See “showdate” (page 373) for
additional information.
292 Set Commands
setdomain
DESCRIPTION
The setdomain command sets the parameters and modifies the properties of a domain.
SYNTAX
setdomain [options <arg>] <domain_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the domain_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
-name <name>
Changes the name of the domain.
-comment <comment>
Specifies comments or additional information for the domain. The comment can be up to 511
characters long and must be enclosed in quotation marks. Unprintable characters are not allowed
within the <comment> specifier.
-vvretentiontimemax <value>[h|H|d|D]
Specifies the maximum value that can be set for the retention time of a volume in this domain.
<time> is a positive integer value and in the range of 0 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can
be optionally specified in days or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours
following the entered time value.
To remove the maximum volume retention time for the domain, enter -vvretentiontimemax
" ". As the result, the maximum volume retention time for the system is used instead.
To disable setting the volume retention time in the domain, enter 0 for <time>.
SPECIFIERS
<domain_name>
Indicates the name of the domain.
RESTRICTIONS
You need access to all domains to run this command.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, the name of a domain named Domain1 is changed to DomainX:
cli% setdomain -name DomainX Domain1
The following example displays the addition of a comment to the domain Engineering:
cli% setdomain -comment “This is a comment for engineering.” Engineering
setdomain 293
NOTES
For moving objects into a domain, use the movetodomain command.
294 Set Commands
setdomainset
DESCRIPTION
The setdomainset command sets the parameters and modifies the properties of a domain set.
SYNTAX
setdomainset [options <arg>] <setname>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the domainset_annotate right can only annotate the comment of a
domain set.
•Any role granted the domainset_set right can set any domain set property.
OPTIONS
-comment <comment>
Specifies any comment or additional information for the set. The comment can be up to 255
characters in length. Unprintable characters are not allowed.
-name <newname>
Specifies a new name for the domain set. The name can be up to 27 characters in length.
SPECIFIERS
<setname>
Specifies the name of the domain set to modify.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
Example
To rename a set from foo to bar:
cli% setdomainset -name bar foo
To change the comment on set bar:
cli% setdomainset -comment "This used to be set foo" bar
NOTES
None.
setdomainset 295
sethost
DESCRIPTION
The sethost command sets properties on existing system hosts, including options to annotate a
host with descriptor information such as physical location, IP address, operating system, model,
and so on. The command also provides the ability to configure or remove iSCSI CHAP authentication
information and to reset a host, aborting all its pending I/O.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the sethost command can be one of the following:
•sethost [options <arg>] <host_name>
•sethost initchap [-f] [options <arg>] <secret>
{<host_name>|<pattern>}...
•sethost targetchap [-f] [options <arg>] <secret>
{<host_name>|<pattern>}...
•sethost removechap [-target] [-f] {<host_name>|<pattern>}...
•sethost clearagent <WWN|iscsi_name>
•sethost rst <hostname>
•sethost rst -wwn <WWN> <node:slot:port>
•sethost rst -iscsi_name <iscsi_name> <node:slot:port>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the host_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
initchap
Sets the initiator CHAP authentication information on one or more hosts.
targetchap
Sets the target CHAP authentication information on one or more hosts.
removechap
Removes CHAP authentication information on one or more hosts. By default, this removes all CHAP
information for all specified hosts. Using this subcommand with the –target option removes only
target CHAP information.
clearagent
Clears any host agent data associated with the host.
rst
Reset a host or host initiator, aborting all pending commands from the host initiator(s) and releasing
any SCSI-2 reservations held by the initiator(s).
OPTIONS
-loc <location>
Specifies the location of the host.
296 Set Commands
-ip <IP_address>
Specifies the IP address of the host.
-os <OS>
Specifies the operating system running on the host.
-model <model>
Specifies the model of the host.
-contact <contact>
Specifies the contact information for the host.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any additional information for the host.
-name <hostname>
Specifies the new name of the host up to 31 characters in length.
-persona <hostpersonaval>
Sets the host persona that specifies the personality for all ports which are part of the host set. This
selects certain variations in SCSI command behavior which certain operating systems expect. The
<hostpersonaval> is the host persona ID number with the desired capabilities. These can be
seen with showhost -listpersona.
The following options are for use with the initchap and targetchap subcommands:
-f
Do not ask for confirmation before performing the operation.
-chapname <chapname>
Used to specify the initiator or target CHAP name. If this option is not specified, then the initiator
CHAP name defaults to the host name and the target CHAP name defaults to the HP 3PAR system
name.
-hex
The CHAP secret is treated as a hex number.
The following options are for use with the removechap subcommand:
-target
Removes only the target CHAP authentication.
SPECIFIERS
<host_name>
Name of the host with a maximum of 31 characters in length.
<pattern>
Specifies that the properties are set for all hosts matching the specified pattern.
<secret>
The CHAP secret for the host or the target. If -hex is specified, it is treated as a hex number.
Otherwise it should be a printable ASCII string 12 to 16 characters in length with no spaces, or
16 bytes in HEX.
NOTE: The CHAP configuration operations are applied to all hosts whose names match one or
more of the specified <hostname> or <pattern>. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further
information.
<WWN|iSCSI_name>
sethost 297
The World Wide Name (WWN) or iSCSI name of the host which should be reset or for which
host agent data should be cleared.
<node:slot:port>
node — Specifies the node using a number from 0 through 7.
slot
Specifies the PCI slot in the specified node. Valid ranges are:
•0 – 9 for the StoreServ 10000 storage system platform
•0 — 5 for the S and T-Class storage system platforms
•0 — 3 for the E200 storage system platform
•0 — 2 for the F-Class storage system platform
port
Specifies the port using a number from 1 through 4.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required for the clearagent subcommand.
EXAMPLES
The following example change the settings of a host:
cli% sethost -contact "Joe Smith" -model "Sun Ultra 60" queasy10
cli% sethost initchap "MyChapSecret" queasy10
cli% sethost targetchap -hex "30313233343536373839303132333435" queasy10
cli% sethost removechap -target queasy10
cli% sethost clearagent 210100E08B32A58A
cli% sethost -persona 1 queasy10
cli% sethost rst -wwn 210100E08B32A58A 0:2:3
NOTES
•The CHAP configurations are applied to all hosts whose names match one or more of the
specified <host_name> or <pattern> specifiers. The patterns are treated as glob-style
(shell-style) patterns. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further information.
•The options that allow for adding descriptive information are for annotation purposes only;
the storage server does not actively use the information provided here.
•Remove descriptors by passing an empty string to the command.
•Verify modification of host properties by issuing the showhost command.
298 Set Commands
sethostset
DESCRIPTION
The sethostset command sets the parameters and modifies the properties of a host set.
SYNTAX
sethostset [options <arg>] <setname>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the hostset_annotate right can only annotate the comment of a host
set.
•Any role granted the hostset_set right can set any host set property.
OPTIONS
-comment <comment>
Specifies a comment relating to the set.
-name <newname>
Specifies a new name for the host set.
SPECIFIERS
<setname>
Specifies the name of the host set to modify.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To rename a set from foo to bar:
cli% sethostset -name bar foo
To change the comment on a set:
cli% sethostset -comment "This used to be set foo" bar
NOTES
None.
sethostset 299
setlicense
DESCRIPTION
The setlicense command sets the license key information.
SYNTAX
setlicense [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the license_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–f <filename>
Specifies the file from which the license key is read.
–noconfirm
Specifies that the system does not prompt for confirmation for the new license key.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•The entered license key is accepted only if it is recognized as a valid key. A valid license key
includes an appropriate serial number and is associated with the number of nodes in the
system for which the license key is being entered.
•HP 3PAR’s license terms and conditions must be accepted before proceeding with this
command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the setting of a license key:
cli% setlicense
If this software is being provided to you for a limited evaluation period, then your
license shall be governed by the current HP Software License Terms (or as otherwise
agreed between us) with the exception that the term of the license shall expire upon
the earlier of the evaluation period notified to you or 120 days. Upon expiration of
the license, you must cease using the software and HP reserves the right to disable
the software without notice. By using or activating the software you are agreeing to
these terms.
Do you agree to these terms and conditions? y=yes n=no: yes
Please enter the new license key below. When finished, press enter twice. If the key
is entered by hand, note that characters other than letters and numbers are ignored,
and the key is not case-sensitive.
60R3–0C1G...
300 Set Commands
NOTES
•This command prompts for a new license key. To finish entering the license key, press enter
on a blank line.
•When the license key is being interpreted, all characters other than letters (without
case-sensitivity) and numbers are ignored, and the letters are not case-sensitive.
•After the new license key has been entered, the changes between the existing license key and
the new license key are displayed. There is a prompt to confirm the changes unless the
–noconfirm option is given, in which case the information is not displayed, and the new
license key is entered immediately.
setlicense 301
setnet
DESCRIPTION
The setnet command sets the administration network interface configuration.
AUTHORITY
•Service, Super
•Any role granted the net_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the setnet command can be one of the following:
•setnet startaddr <old_IP> <new_IP> <new_netmask>
•setnet startgateway <new_gateway>
•setnet finish [-f]
•setnet abort
•setnet cleargateway [-f]
•setnet speed <IP_addr> auto|<mbps> <duplex>
•setnet failoverping <IP_addr> <ping_addr>|none
•setnet ntp none|<server_addr>
•setnet changenode [<node_ID>]
•setnet addaddr <old_IP> <new_IP> <new_netmask>|<prefix_len>
•setnet removeaddr <old_IP>
•setnet dns none|<server_addr>
SUBCOMMANDS
startaddr
Specifies that the system start switching the old IP address (<old_IP> specifier) to the new IP
address (<new_IP> specifier) with the specified netmask (<new_netmask> specifier).
startgateway
Specifies that the gateway be immediately set to the specified IP address if no gateway is currently
defined, or switched to the specified IP address if currently defined, in both cases indicated with
the (<new_gateway> specifier).
finish
Specifies that outstanding changes from the startaddr and startgateway subcommands be
completed.
abort
Specifies that any attempt to configure a new IP address or gateway fails. The system returns to
its previous state.
cleargateway
Specifies that the existing system gateway is removed.
speed
302 Set Commands
Specifies that the network interface is set to the specified speed and duplex as indicated with the
<mbps> and <duplex> specifiers.
failoverping
Specifies that on IP failover, a ping is sent to the specified IP address as indicated with the
<ping_addr> specifier.
ntp none|ntp <serveraddr>
Specifies the NTP server the system should use to synchronize its clocks. The server must be specified
as an IP address.
changenode
Forces the system to change which node has an active Ethernet interface. If a node ID is specified,
it switches to that node. Otherwise, any node with a connected Ethernet interface is chosen.
WARNING! If successful, this command causes any HP 3PAR management application clients
currently connected to lose their connection.
addaddr
Specifies that the new IP (<new_IP> specifier) is added to the interface that is currently assigned
the old_IP (<old_IP> specifier). The old IP and new IP should be of different IP versions (IPv4 or
IPv6).
removeaddr
Specifies that the old IP (<old_IP> specifier) be de-configured. The old IP can only be an IPv6
address.
dns none|dns <serveraddr>
Specifies the DNS server the system should use to resolve host names. The server must be specified
as an IP address.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the operation is forced even if verification has not occurred. This option can only be
used with the finish and cleargateway subcommands.
SPECIFIERS
<old_IP>
Specifies an existing IP address that is to be changed. This specifier is used in conjunction with
the <new_IP> and <new_netmask> specifiers and can only be used with the startaddr
subcommand.
<new_IP>
Specifies a new IP address to which the system is configured. This specifier is used in conjunction
with the <old_IP> and <new_netmask> specifiers and can only be used with the startaddr
subcommand.
<new_netmask>
Specifies a new netmask to which the system is configured. This specifier is used in conjunction
with the <old_IP> and <new_IP> specifiers and can only be used with the startaddr
subcommand.
<prefix_len>
Specifies a new prefix_len to which the system is configured. This specifier is used in conjunction
with the <old_IP> and <new_IP> specifiers. This specifier can only be used when <new_IP>
is of IPv6 type and can only be used with the startaddr and addaddr subcommands.
setnet 303
<new_gateway>
Specifies the IP address of the new gateway for the system. This specifier can only be used with
the startgateway subcommand.
auto|<mbps> <duplex>
Specifies that the speed of the network interface is either auto negotiated (auto), or specified
manually using the <duplex> and <mbps> specifiers.
<mbps>
Specifies the speed of the network interface. Valid values are either 10 or 100. This specifier can
only be used with the <duplex> specifier and with the speed subcommand.
<duplex>
Specifies the duplex of the network interface. Valid values are either half or full. This specifier
can only be used with the <mbps> specifier and with the speed subcommand.
<IP_addr>
Specifies the IP address of the node. This specifier can only be used with the failoverping
subcommand.
<ping_addr>|none
Specifies that during an IP failover, a ping either be sent to the specified IP address (<ping_addr>)
or not sent at all (none). This specifier can only be used with the failoverping subcommand.
[<node_ID>]
Specifies the node, by ID, that has an active Ethernet interface. This specifier can only be issued
with the changenode subcommand. This specifier is not required.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the switching of the old IP address with a new IP address and
netmask:
cli% setnet startaddr 10.0.23.42 192.168.5.218 255.255.252.0
Change of IP address successfully started.
The following example displays the gateway being cleared:
cli% setnet cleargateway
If the machine that the HP 3PAR CLI is running on is not on the same subnet as the HP
3PAR storage system it is connected to, clearing the gateway will render the storage
system unreachable from that machine, and any future connections will need to be made
from a system which is on the same subnet as the system.
Are you sure you want to clear the gateway (y/n)?
y
Gateway modified successfully.
304 Set Commands
NOTES
•If successful, this command causes any CLI or GUI clients currently connected to lose their
connection.
•To make it possible to change the network configuration without running the risk of losing
contact with the system because of misconfiguration, the setnet command uses a two step
process. When a new IP address is specified with the setnetstartaddr command, the
system is configured to listen as both the old and new IP addresses. When a new gateway is
specified with the setnet gateway command, the system switches between the old and
new gateways when it sees packets addressed to it being routed through those gateways.
After a connection has been made with the new configuration, the setnet finish command
can be used to remove the old configuration. While in the middle of this process, additional
work must be done by the system. It is preferable to run the setnet finish command after
the new configuration has been verified.
•When changing gateways, starting a CLI connection takes longer than usual, as the first reply
packet is typically routed through the previously used gateway address.
setnet 305
setnode
DESCRIPTION
The setnode command sets the properties of the node components such as the serial number of
the power supply.
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the node_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
setnode ps <PS_ID> [options] <node_ID>
SUBCOMMAND
ps
Sets the power supply properties.
OPTIONS
-s <serial_number>
Specifies the serial number up to eight characters in length.
SPECIFIERS
<PS_ID>
Specifies the power supply ID.
<node_ID>
Specifies the node ID.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•At least one option must be specified.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the node power supply:
cli% shownode -ps
Node PS -Serial- -PSState-- FanState ACState DCState -BatState- ChrgLvl(%)
0 0 -- NotPresent -- -- -- NotPresent 0
0 1 FFFFFFFF OK OK OK OK OK 0
1 0 FFFFFFFF OK OK OK OK OK 0
1 1 -- NotPresent -- -- -- NotPresent 0
cli%
cli% setnode ps 1 -s 12345678 0
cli% shownode -ps
Node PS -Serial- -PSState-- FanState ACState DCState -BatState- ChrgLvl(%)
0 0 -- NotPresent -- -- -- NotPresent 0
0 1 12345678 OK OK OK OK OK 0
1 0 FFFFFFFF OK OK OK OK OK 0
1 1 -- NotPresent -- -- -- NotPresent 0
306 Set Commands
cli%
cli% setnode ps 0 -s aabbccdd 1
cli% shownode -ps
Node PS -Serial- -PSState-- FanState ACState DCState -BatState- ChrgLvl(%)
0 0 -- NotPresent -- -- -- NotPresent 0
0 1 12345678 OK OK OK OK OK 100
1 0 AABBCCDD OK OK OK OK OK 100
1 1 -- NotPresent -- -- -- NotPresent 0
cli%
cli% setnode ps 0 -s aabbccddee 1
Error: The serial number aabbccddee is too long, should be less than 9 characters.
NOTES
None.
setnode 307
setntp
DESCRIPTION
The setntp command sets the system Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. This command is
deprecated and will be removed in a subsequent release.
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the ntp_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SYNTAX
setntp <server_IP_adress>|none
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<server_IP_address>
Specifies the IP address of the NTP server to which the HP 3PAR storage system synchronizes its
internal clocks.
none
Specifies that the HP 3PAR storage system should not synchronize its internal clocks with an external
NTP server. Instead, the system synchronizes its clocks internally.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the setting of the system NTP server:
cli% setntp 192.168.1.1
NTP server successfully updated.
NOTES
None.
308 Set Commands
setpassword
DESCRIPTION
The setpassword command allows a user with Super level role to change the password for any
user and create a password file on a client. Edit-, browse-, or service-level users can use the
setpassword command to change their own passwords or save their password files on a client.
SYNTAX
setpassword [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit, Browse, Service
•Any role granted the password_setany right can set any user password.
•Any role granted the password_setown right can only set their own password.
OPTIONS
–save|–saveonly
This option cannot be used independently of the –file option.
–save
Specifies that the password, as specified with the –file option, is saved on both the storage
system and on a client of the system.
–saveonly
Specifies that the password, as specified with the –file option, is only saved on the client.
–file <pwfile>
Specifies the password file to be saved. The <pwfile> option can be any valid file name in the
client system. This option cannot be used independently of the –save or –saveonly options.
–u <username>
Specifies the login name of the user whose password is being changed. If a login name is not
specified, the command defaults to the current user.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
•Only a user with Super level role can set another user’s password.
•Passwords can be no longer than eight non-null characters, and must be at least six non-null
characters long.
•Using the -saveonly option with the -file option leaves a copy of the encrypted password
in the -file argument. This file, if compromised, could allow the user to be impersonated.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to set a user’s (user1) password on an storage system and on
a client:
cli% setpassword –save –file <insertfile> user1
setpassword 309
The following example displays the prompts encountered when changing a user’s (user1) password:
cli% setpassword –u user1
password:
Old password:
NOTES
•The format of the entry in the file is <username> <encrypted_password>. This file may
be referenced by the TPDPWFILE environment variable or -pwf command line option for
subsequent commands.
•The -save or -saveonly option requires the -file option.
•Without any options, the command will prompt to change the invoking user's password on
the system.
•Changing a user's password has no effect on SSH access if the user has set a valid key with
the setsshkey command. Until the SSH key is removed the user will not have to provide the
new password.
•For additional information about password files, see the HP 3PAR StoreServ Storage Concepts
Guide and the HP 3PAR Command Line Interface Administrator’s Manual.
310 Set Commands
setpd
DESCRIPTION
The setpd command marks a Physical Disk (PD) as allocatable or non allocatable for Logical
Disks (LDs).
SYNTAX
setpd ldalloc on|off <PD_ID>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the pd_set right
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
ldalloc on|off
Specifies that the PD, as indicated with the PD_ID specifier, is either allocatable (on) or
nonallocatable for LDs (off).
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<PD_ID>...
Specifies the PD identification using an integer.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays PD 0marked as non allocatable for LDs.
cli% setpd ldalloc off 0
NOTES
•This command can be used when the system has disks that are not to be used until a later
time.
•Verify the status of PDs by issuing the showpd -s command. See “showpd” (page 420).
setpd 311
setqos
DESCRIPTION
The setqos command creates and updates QoS rules in a system.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the setqos command can be one of the following examples:
•setqos [options] [{vvset:{<name>|<pattern>}|sys:all_others}]...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the qos_set right can set QoS configurations.
OPTIONS
-io {<limit>|none}
Set the QoS I/O issue count rate limit to <limit>. If "none" is specified, there is no limit on I/O
issue count.
-bw {<limit>[k|K|m|M|g|G]|none}
Set the QoS I/O issue bandwidth rate limit to <limit>. If "none" is specified, there is no limit on
I/O issue bandwidth rate.
{-on|-off}
Enable / disable QoS scheduling for the target object. By default QoS scheduling is "on".
-clear
Stop QoS scheduling of the rule and clear its setting.
-vv {<vv_name>|<pattern>}[,{<vv_name>|<pattern>]...
Applies only to QoS rules whose targets include virtual volumes with names matching any of the
names or patterns specified.
SPECIFIERS
{vvset:{<name>|<pattern>}|sys:all_others}
The target objects of QoS setting. <name> and <pattern> refer to the target object name, as listed
in showvvset commands. If "sys:all_others" is specified, the QoS rule will be applied to the
group of all virtual volumes, which don't have any specific QoS rule applied.
EXAMPLES
The following example sets the IOPs limit of vvset vsa to 300:
cli% setqos -io 300 vvset:vsa
The following example turns off the QoS scheduling for vvset vsa:
cli% setqos -off vvset:vsa
The following example removes all QoS settings of all vvsets:
cli% setqos -clear vvset:*
312 Set Commands
NOTES
For all the <pattern> fields, the patterns are glob-style (shell-style) patterns (see help on sub,globpat)
When -vv option is present, the setting is only applied to target objects with existing QoS
configuration. To limit the new settings to target objects with existing QoS configuration, it is useful
to specify -vv * in the command line.
QoS rules only manage host I/O. Use of this command to create new QoS rules requires a Quality
of Service license. Contact your local HP representative for information.
setqos 313
setrcopygroup
DESCRIPTION
The setrcopygroup command performs the following actions:
•Sets the policy of the Remote Copy volume group for dealing with I/O failure and error
handling.
•Switches the direction of transfer between volume groups.
•Sets a resynchronization period for volume groups in asynchronous periodic mode.
•Sets the group’s mode.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the setrcopygroup command can be one of the following:
•setrcopygroup pol [option] [<pattern>] <policy> [<group_name>]
•setrcopygroup period [option] [<pattern>] <period_value>
<target_name>
•setrcopygroup mode [option] [<pattern>] <mode_value> <target_name>
[<group_name>]
•setrcopygroup <dr_operation> [options][<pattern>]
[<target_name|group_name>...]
•setrcopygroup cpg -usr_cpg_unset -snp_cpg_unset <group_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopygroup_set right.
SUBCOMMANDS
pol
Sets the policy of the Remote Copy volume group for dealing with I/O failure and error handling.
period
Specifies that groups that are in asynchronous periodic mode should be periodically synchronized
in accordance with the specified <period_value>.
mode
Specifies the mode to which the volume group is set.
cpg
Specifies the local and target cpg.
<dr_operation>
314 Set Commands
Specifies the operation of the group(s). Valid operations are:
•reverse - Changes the natural and current direction of all specified groups. The operation
is mirrored resulting in a direction change on both systems. This option is very flexible
depending on the options that are provided.
CAUTION: Do NOT use the reverse specifier as part of the disaster recovery process.
Misuse of this specifier can result in lost data on the system configured as the primary system
under normal operating conditions.
•failover - Changes secondary volume groups to primary volume groups on the primary
system in the event of a system failure. If the group has multiple targets it will also attempt to
pull more recent data from other targets and start Remote Copy to those targets when complete.
•switchover — Migrates the remote copy group from primary to secondary without impacting
the host I/O. This command requires that associated hosts are connected to both the primary
and secondary arrays. The WWNs of primary and secondary volumes are consistent and the
host persona of the host must support Asymmetric Logical Unit Access (ALUA).
•recover - Used for groups on which the failover operation has already been run. Changes
matching primary volume groups on the backup system to secondary volume groups and then
starts and synchronizes all groups.
•restore - Used on groups on which the recover operation has already been run. Returns
all groups to their natural direction and starts them.
•override — This command overrides the failsafe state which is applied to Remote Copy
group allowing the associated volumes to be exported to attached hosts.
OPTIONS
–t <tname>
When used with <dr_operation> subcommands, specifies the target that the <dr_operation>
command applies to. This is optional for single target groups, but required for multi-target groups.
If no groups are specified, it applies to all relevant groups. When used with the pol subcommand,
specified for a group with multiple targets, the command only applies to that target; otherwise, it
is applied to all targets.
-f
Does not ask for confirmation for disaster recovery commands.
–nostart
Specifies that groups are not started after role reversal is completed. This option can be used for
failover,recover, and restore subcommands.
–nosync
Specifies that groups are not synced after the role reversal is completed through the recover,
restore, and failover specifiers.
-discard
Specifies not to check a group's other targets to see if newer data should be pushed from them if
the group has multiple targets. The use of this option can result in the loss of the most recent changes
to the group's volumes and should be used carefully. This option is only valid for the failover
specifier.
–nopromote
This option is only valid for the failover and reverse specifiers. When used with the reverse
specifier, specifies that the synchronized snapshots of groups that are switched from primary to
secondary not be promoted to the base volume. When used with the failover specifier, it
indicates that snapshots of groups that are switched from secondary to primary should not to be
setrcopygroup 315
promoted to the base volume in the case where all volumes of the group were not synced to the
same time point.
The incorrect use of this option can lead to the primary and secondary volumes not being consistent.
–nosnap
Specifies that snapshots are not taken of groups that are switched from secondary to primary.
Additionally, existing snapshots are deleted if groups are switched from primary to secondary.
The use of this option may result in a full synchronization of the secondary volumes. This option
can be used for the failover,restore, and reverse subcommands.
–stopgroups
Specifies that groups are stopped before running the reverse subcommand.
–local
When issuing the command with the reverse specifier, only the group's direction is changed on
the system where the command is issued.
–natural
When issuing the -natural option with the reverse specifier, only the natural direction of data
flow between the specified volume group and its target group is reversed. The roles of the volume
groups do not change.
–current
When issuing the setrcopygroup command with the reverse subcommand, only the current
direction of the groups is reversed.
–waittask
Wait for all tasks created by this command to complete before returning. This option applies to
the failover,recover,restore, and reverse subcommands.
-pat
Specifies that the patterns specified are treated as glob-style patterns and all Remote Copy groups
matching the specified patterns will be set. The -pat option can specify a list of patterns. This option
must be used if the <pattern> specifier is used.
-usr_cpg <cpg name> <target_name>:<cpg_name>
Specifies the local user CPG and target user CPG that will be used for volumes that are auto-created.
Local CPG will only be used after failover and recovery.
-snp_cpg <cpg name> <target_name>:<cpg_name>
Specifies the local snap CPG and target snap CPG that will be used for volumes that are
auto-created. Local CPG will only be used after failover and recovery.
-usr_cpg_unset
Unset all user CPGs that are associated with this group.
-snp_cpg_unset
Unset all snap CPGs that are associated with this group.
SPECIFIERS
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. If this specifier is not used, the <group_name> or <target_name>
specifier must be used.
<policy>
Specifies the policy to assign to the group. Valid policies are:
auto_recover
316 Set Commands
Specifies that if the Remote Copy is stopped as a result of the Remote Copy links going down, the
group is restarted automatically after the links come back up. If this policy is enabled for a group
while the group is stopped after link failures it will only be started when the links come up for the
failed target. If the links are already up at the time the policy is set then the group will not be
restarted at that time.
If the virtual volumes in the Remote Copy group were created using the admitrcopyvv
-createvv command, in the event of Remote Copy stopping due to link failures, the Remote
Copy group goes into failsafe mode. Failsafe mode requires that the Remote Copy group be started
manually using the startrcopygroup command.
no_auto_recover
Specifies that if the Remote Copy is stopped as a result of the Remote Copy links going down, the
group must be restarted manually after the links come back up (default).
over_per_alert
If a synchronization of a periodic Remote Copy group takes longer to complete than its
synchronization period then an alert will be generated. This is the default behavior.
no_over_per_alert
If a synchronization of a periodic Remote Copy group takes longer to complete than its
synchronization period then an alert will not be generated.
<group_name>
Specifies the name of the volume group whose policy is set, or whose target direction is switched.
<target_name>
Specifies the target name for the target definition created with the creatercopytarget command.
<mode_value>
Specifies the mode, sync or periodic, to which the group is set. This specifier can only be
used with the mode subcommand.
<period_value>s|m|h|d
Specifies the time period in units of seconds (s), minutes (m), hours (h), or days (d), for automatic
resynchronization (e.g. 14h for 14 hours). The time must be longer than or equal to five minutes
and not more than one year in duration, or set to zero to indicate that no period should be used.
This specifier can only be used with the period subcommand.
RESTRICTIONS
•This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for further information.
•When issuing the setrcopygroup <dr_operation> command, either the <group_name>
specifier, the <target_name> specifier, or the <pattern> specifier must be specified.
•Reversing the direction of primary volumes will result in the loss of any data changed after
the group was stopped.
•The period can be set only for groups whose mode is asynchronous periodic (see
creatercopygroup).
•Do NOT use the reverse value of the <dr_operation> as part of the normal disaster
recovery process.
EXAMPLES
The following example sets the group policy for Group1:
# setrcopygroup pol auto_recover Group1
setrcopygroup 317
The following example reverses the current direction of secondary group Group1 on System2 (the
secondary system) so that I/O might be applied to the group after disaster recovery:
# setrcopygroup failover Group1.r121
The following example sets Group1 to be automatically synchronized every 30 minutes to System2:
# setrcopygroup period 30m System2 Group1
The following example reverses the current direction of all secondary groups that start with the
name testgroup so that I/O can be applied to the groups during disaster recovery:
# setrcopygroup failover -pat testgroup*
The following example sets volume groups that start with the name testgroup to synchronize to
its asynchronous periodic mode target System2 every 30 minutes:
# setrcopygroup period -pat testgroup* 30m System2
NOTES
•An earlier version of this command provided fail_wrt_on_err and no_fail_wrt_on_err
policies. These policies were deprecated in HP 3PAR OS release 3.1.1.
•An earlier version of this command provided a target subcommand. This subcommand was
deprecated in HP 3PAR OS release 2.2.3.
•Reversing the direction of primary volumes will result in the loss of any data changed after
the group was stopped.
•There is no default resynchronization period. For groups whose mode is asynchronous periodic,
you must specify a resynchronization period using setrcopygroup period <value> or
resynchronizations will not automatically take place.
•The minimum interval for periodic resynchronizations is five minutes.
•If the mirror_config policy is set for this group's target and the group is a primary group,
then the setrcopygroup command will be mirrored to the target when the period and
pol subcommands are used.
•Use the -nosnap option when the primary system has failed or where the disks are ruined
or in an unknown state. For example, an uncontrolled shutdown can result in loss of data. If
you suspect that the primary volumes are not in a known good state, you should use this option
to force a FULL RESYNC when the primary system is restored.
•The -nosnap option can be used when making a secondary group take over as the primary
after a disaster takes down the primary (setrcopygroup failover -nosnap...). This
option indicates that no incremental resynchronization of the primary group is possible while
the primary system is coming back online. Without this option, a snapshot is taken when the
secondary system takes over as the primary. That snapshot is used to do an INCREMENTAL
synchronization of the primary after it is restored. This assumes that there was no loss of data
in the primary volumes when the primary system went down.
•The switchover command is only supported for synchronous remote copy groups that are
started and synced. The command must be issued on the primary array and upon completion
of the command the remote copy group will be restarted in the reverse direction.
318 Set Commands
setrcopytarget
DESCRIPTION
The setrcopytarget command sets the name, policies, or throughput definition for the target’s
links.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the setrcopytarget command can be one of the following:
•setrcopytarget pol <policy> <target_name>
•setrcopytarget name <new_name> <target_name>
•setrcopytarget tput <tput_value> <target_name>
•setrcopytarget tunelinks <bandwidth> <latency> <target_name>
•setrcopytarget enable|disable <target_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopytarget_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
pol
Sets the policy for the specified target.
name
Changes the name of the indicated target.
tput
Sets the maximum throughput value for each of the target’s links using the <tput_value> specifier.
This subcommand only applies to Remote Copy over IP (RCIP) configurations.
tunelinks
Adjust performance values for the target's links using the <bandwidth> and <latency> specifiers.
enable|disable
Enables or disables the target.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<target_name>
Specifies the target name for the target definition previously created with the creatercopytarget
command.
<policy>
This specifier can only be used with the pol subcommand. The policy can be one of the following:
mirror_config|no_mirror_config
Specifies that all configuration commands (creatercopygroup,removercopygroup,
admitrcopyvv,dismissrcopyvv,setrcopygroup pol/period,startrcopygroup,
setrcopytarget 319
and stoprcopygroup) involving the specified target are duplicated (mirror_config) or not
duplicated (no_mirror_config). If not specified, all configuration commands are duplicated.
NOTE: The no_mirror_config specifier should only be used to allow recovery from an unusual
error condition and only used after consulting your HP representative.
<new_name>
The new name for the indicated target. This specifier can only be used with the name subcommand.
<tput_value>
Specifies the maximum throughput for the indicated target's links, and is used to limit the total
throughput of the links. The throughput value can take a [g|G] suffix (gigabytes), [m|M] suffix
(megabytes) or [k|K] suffix (kilobytes) to indicate size (with no space between the specified value
and size type). The default is kilobytes. Specifying a value of 0removes the throughput. This
specifier can only be used with the tput subcommand, which only applies to Remote Copy over
IP (RCIP) configurations.
<bandwidth>
The measured bandwidth of the connection to the target, specified in Kilobytes (KB) per second.
This specifier can only be used with the tunelinks subcommand.
<latency>
The measured round-trip latency of the connection to the target, specified in milliseconds (ms). This
specifier can only be used with the tunelinks subcommand.
RESTRICTIONS
•This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for further information.
•If the mirror_config policy is set and the setrcopytarget command is issued with the
pol subcommand, the duplicated configuration commands cannot be issued on the secondary.
Doing so results in an error.
•The name and tput subcommands cannot be used on a target with started groups.
•There must be an active connection between the systems in the Remote Copy pair in order to
issue commands on the primary system to be mirrored to the backup system. If there is no
connection, the commands will return an error.
EXAMPLES
The following example will set the throughput of each link of target serverB to 5 megabytes per
second:
cli% setrcopytarget tput 5M serverB
320 Set Commands
NOTES
•The setrcopytarget command requires the groups associated with it be stopped prior to
using the following options:
◦setrcopytarget name <new_name> <target_name>
◦setrcopytarget tput <throughput> <target_name>
•The setrcopytarget command with the following arguments can be run without bringing
down its Remote Copy groups:
◦setrcopytarget pol <policy> <target_name>
◦setrcopytarget tunelinks <bandwidth> <latency> <target_name>
•Under normal operating conditions the mirror_config policy should never be changed to
no_mirror_config. This policy option is included only as a method to correct several
unusual error conditions that might occur in the course of operation which result in a mismatch
in configuration between the two sides of a Remote Copy pair. For instance, it is possible for
a group to be created, or a volume to be added to a group, only on one side of the pair if
the operation is interrupted by a network failure. In such cases it might be necessary to
temporarily change the policy to no_mirror_config in order to bring the configurations
into alignment. After being corrected the mirror_config policy should be immediately
restored. Such operations should generally only be undertaken on the advice of a HP
representative.
setrcopytarget 321
setsched
DESCRIPTION
The setsched command allows users to suspend, pause, change the schedule, change the
parameters, and change the name of currently scheduled tasks.
SYNTAX
setsched [options <arg>] <schedname>
setsched [-suspend | -resume] <schedname>
setsched [-suspend_all | -resume_all]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role granted the sched_setany right can set any user scheduled task properties.
•Any role granted the sched_setown right can only set their own scheduled task properties.
OPTIONS
-suspend <schedname>
Suspends execution of a specified task. This option will not halt execution of a task that is already
running. This option cannot be used with other options.
-suspend_all
Suspends execution of all scheduled tasks. This option will not halt execution of a task that is already
running. This option cannot be used with other options.
-resume
Resumes scheduling of a specified task. This option cannot be used with other options.
-resume_all
Resume scheduling of all specified tasks. This option cannot be used with other options.
-s <newschedule>
Sets a new schedule for a given task. The newschedule is a cron-style schedule for the task to be
run on. Each field can be up to 127 characters in length.
-name <newname>
Sets a new name for a given task. The name can be up to 31 characters in length.
-no_alert
Failures of tasks will no longer generate an alert.
-alert
Failures of tasks will generate an alert. This is set by default.
SPECIFIERS
<schedname>
Specifies the name of the scheduled task to modify.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
322 Set Commands
EXAMPLES
None.
NOTES
None.
setsched 323
setsnmpmgr
DESCRIPTION
The setsnmpmgr command changes an SNMP manager's properties.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the setsnmpmgr command can be one of the following examples:
•setsnmpmgr [options <arg>] <manager_IP>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted to the snmpmgr_set right
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
-p <port_number>
Specifies the port number where the SNMP manager receives traps. The port number and IP address
are used together to uniquely identify the SNMP manager. Use this option if the port number differs
from the default of "162".
-pw <password>
Specifies the SNMP manager's access community string (password), using up to 32 alphanumeric
characters. If not specified, the default is "public".
-snmpuser <username>
Specifies the SNMPv3 user name using up to 31 characters. The user name must be enabled for
SNMPv3 with the createsnmpuser command.
-version <version>
Integer value that specifies the SNMP version supported by the manager. Use "2" for SNMPv2
and "3" for SNMPv3. The default is "2".
SPECIFIERS
<manager_IP>
Specifies the IP address of the host where the manager runs. It must be valid IPv4 or IPv6 address.
IPv6 address is in hexadecimal, is case insensitive, and is separated by colons. An example would
be: 5def:2008:0:0:abcd:0:0:161a.
In addition, a double colon (::) can be used once in an address to replace multiple fields of zeros.
For example: 5def:2008:0:0:abcd::161a.
EXAMPLES
The following example modifies the SNMP manager IPv4 address 123.45.67.89 with the assigned
password of alpha1:
cli% setsnmpmgr -pw alpha1 123.45.67.89
324 Set Commands
The following example modifies the user and version properties of the SNMP manager identified
by the IPv4 address 123.45.67.89:
cli% setsnmpmgr -snmpuser john -version 3 123.45.67.89
NOTES
The storage system does not support any form of name resolution. You must specify these IP
addresses directly.
Issue the addsnmpmgr command to add an SNMP manager.
Issue the showsnmpmgr command to display the list of registered SNMP managers.
Issue the setsnmppw command to change the SNMP passwords.
Issue the removesnmppw command to remove SNMP passwords.
Issue the removesnmpmgr to remove SNMP managers.
setsnmpmgr 325
setsnmppw
DESCRIPTION
The setsnmppw command allows a user to update SNMP access community strings passwords.
The SNMP password is required for the system manager to send requests to the SNMP agent.
WARNING! SNMP cannot be used in Common Criteria mode. It might compromise the security
of the storage system.
SYNTAX
setsnmppw [options] <password>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the snmppw_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–rw|–r|–w
Specifies that the read-write (–rw), read-only (–r), or write-only (–w) community password is
changed. If not specified, the read/write password is changed.
SPECIFIERS
<password>
Specifies the new user-defined password using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example changes the read/write SNMP community string password to
newpassword1:
cli% setsnmppw newpassword1
The following example changes the read-only SNMP password to newpassword2 by specifying
the –roption on the command line:
cli% setsnmppw –r newpassword2
The following example changes the write-only SNMP password to newpassword3 by specifying
the –woption on the command line:
cli% setsnmppw –w newpassword3
326 Set Commands
NOTES
•The default initial read/write password is public.
•If the read-only or write-only passwords do not exist, they are created.
•Verify SNMP passwords by issuing the showsnmppw command. See “showsnmppw” (page 474)
for more information.
setsnmppw 327
setsnmpuser
DESCRIPTION
The setsnmpuser command sets the SNMPv3 user secret key used for generating authentication
and privacy keys. The username must correspond to an existing local user.
WARNING! SNMP cannot be used in Common Criteria mode. It might compromise the security
of the storage system.
SYNTAX
setsnmpuser <username>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit, Browse
•Any role granted the snmpuser_set right.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows the setting of a specified SNMP user:
cli% setsnmpuser <joe>
NOTES
Issuing the setsnmpuser command results in the system prompting for a password. Type in the
password for the user and then press ENTER. The password will be used to generate an
authentication and privacy key using SHA1. The generated key is 160-bit in length. Only
HMAC-SHA-96 is supported for authentication protocol and only CFB128-AES-128 for privacy
protocol. If a key previously exists for the user, then the newly generated key will replace the
previous one.
328 Set Commands
setsshkey
DESCRIPTION
The setsshkey command sets the SSH public key for a user.
The user will be prompted to provide the SSH public key. To finish entering the public key, press
enter on a blank line. The key must have been generated using the ssh-keygen utility. The public
key is contained in the user-defined file named with .pub extension. The user can open this file
with an ASCII editor to copy the key and paste it. After setting the SSH public key on the HP 3PAR
storage system, the user can use the corresponding private key to log on without a password. This
new key replaces the existing key if any.
SYNTAX
setsshkey [options]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit, Browse, Service
•Any role granted the sshkey_set right.
OPTIONS
–add
Specifies that the given key should be added to the list of authorized keys instead of replacing
existing ones.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the setting of a user’s SSH public key:
cli% setsshkey
Please enter the SSH public key below. When finished, press enter twice.
The key is usually long. It's better to copy it from inside an editor
and paste it here. (Please make sure there are no extra blanks.)
The maximum number of characters used to represent the SSH key
(including the "from" option, key type, and additional comments) is 4095.
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAQEAp+4Z3zT8Sq6t3s08q/MMd2ZnMpRc/3tyHMk63dH
R8b/VgV6ewXNfYhhfTGWRdZ1dtyLFXnuEPuf+z8EtinFStinTzA3FiJ0agK7rLoNtn/F0jBaGWm
SWukqzAQA2VJvq/keaLVMT3+J3nvXEUcjS4fApeeLwFgKczOX511oaHDtn2ys2C5l+mLw1VDUJL
wIKJljOWqr68ToeRgTDmoppOI3cG14ryF0re4xKANHFQLnSCt5ANjqD2jpnyEABuOvBX7G6vI5g
zQFfcAda/a2bq563/AHr8Ehhi5EVy+GSCqjj8cr0/zHSZyX6llQUfe0YxmayPEKlods6bDi5oxG
COw== user1@server1”
setsshkey 329
NOTES
•Issuing the setsshkey command results in the system prompting for your SSH public key.
Copy and paste the key using the aforementioned ASCII editor on the command line and then
press ENTER.
•After setting the SSH public key on the system, use the corresponding private key to log on
without a password. A single ssh key may be used for multiple hosts with a single use of
setsshkey, or different keys may be used for different hosts. To restrict the usage of a key
to a particular host, a -from option can be added to the beginning of a key. For example:
from="192.168.1.1" ssh-rsa AAAAB3Nza...
•The maximum number of characters used to represent the SSH key (including the -from
option, key type, and additional comments) is 4095.
•LDAP users are only allowed to set an SSH key if the setauthparam command has been
used to set the allow-ssh-key parameter to 1. When an LDAP user runs the setsshkey
command, the user's role level is recorded and is assigned when the user logs in using the
key. Changes in the group-to-role mappings set with the setauthparam command or changes
in the user's data in the LDAP server have no effect as long as the user has an SSH key.
•Removing the user’s SSH key forces a new role to be determined at the user’s next login.
•Only one key may be entered at a time; to enter multiple keys, run the setsshkey command
again with the -add option.
330 Set Commands
setstatch
DESCRIPTION
The setstatch command starts and stops the statistics collection mode for chunklets.
SYNTAX
setstatch start|stop <LD_name> <chunklet_num>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the statch_set right.
SUBCOMMANDS
start|stop
Specifies that the collection of statistics is either started or stopped for the specified Logical Disk
(LD) and chunklet.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>
Specifies the name of the LD in which the chunklet to be configured resides.
<chunklet_num>
Specifies the chunklet that is configured using the setstatch command.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the start of statistics collection on chunklet 0of LD test:
cli% setstatch start test 0
NOTES
After the statistic collection mode for the chunklet is set, you can then use either the histch
command (Section (page 180)) or the statch command (Section (page 588)) to view the chunklet’s
statistics.
setstatch 331
setstatpdch
DESCRIPTION
The setstatpdch command sets the statistics collection mode for all in-use chunklets on a Physical
Disk (PD).
SYNTAX
setstatpdch start|stop <PD_ID>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the statpdch_set right.
SUBCOMMANDS
start|stop
Specifies that the collection of statistics is either started or stopped for chunklets on the specified
PD used by Logical Disks (LDs).
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<PD_ID>
Specifies the PD ID.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the start of statistics collection on all PD chunklets of PD 0:
cli% setstatpdch start 0
NOTES
After the statistic collection mode for the chunklet is set, you can then use either the histch
command (Section (page 180)) or the statch command (Section (page 588)) to view the chunklet’s
statistics.
332 Set Commands
setsys
DESCRIPTION
The setsys command sets the properties of the system, and includes options to annotate a system
with descriptor information such as physical location, owner, contact information, and so on. The
command also enables you to set system-wide parameters such as the raw space alert.
SYNTAX
setsys [options]
setsys <parameter>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the sys_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
The following option is designed for changing the name of the system:
-name <systemname>
Specifies the new name of the system up to 31 characters in length.
The following options allow the annotation of the system with descriptor information:
-loc <location>
Specifies the location of the system.
-owner <owner>
Specifies the owner of the system.
-contact <contact>
Specifies the contact information for the system.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any additional information for the system.
SPECIFIERS
The following parameters can be configured on the system and are issued for the <parameter>
specifier:
RawSpaceAlertFC <value>
Sets the user configurable space alert threshold (10 to 100000 GB) for Fibre Channel type drives.
When the total space on the available chunklets (both clean and unclean) for the specified drive
type falls below the specified value, the alert is posted. A value of 0 will disable the alert.
RawSpaceAlertNL <value>
Performs the same function as RawSpaceAlertFC, but should be used for nearline type drives.
RawSpaceAlertSSD <value>
Performs the same function as RawSpaceAlertFC, but should be used for solid state drive type
drives.
RawSpaceAlertSAS <value>
setsys 333
Performs the same function as RawSpaceAlertFC, but should be used for Serial Attached SCSI
type drives
RemoteSyslog <value>
Enables or disables sending events as syslog messages to a remote system. A value of 0 disables
the message, and a value of 1 enables the message. syslog messages are sent with a facility
user and with event severities mapped to syslog levels such as:
Table 7 Event severity
syslog LevelEvent Severity
alertfatal
alertcritical
critmajor
errminor
warningdegraded
infoinfo
RemoteSyslogHost <value>
Sets the IP address of the system to which events will be sent as syslog messages. The value must
be a valid IP address.
SparingAlgorithm <value>
Sets the sparing algorithm used by the admithw command. Valid values are Default,Minimal,
Maximal, and Custom.
MgmtOldPorts <value>
Enables or disables listening on the old management ports 2540 and 2550 (for SSL). The server
now listens on ports 5782 and 5783 (for SSL). By default, the server also listens on the old ports
unless they are disabled using this parameter. The value must be either enable or disable.
Default ports 2540 and 2550 were deprecated in the 2.2.4 release and support for them will be
removed in a future release.
NOTE: The server must be restarted for changes made with the MgmtOldPorts parameter to
take effect.
RemoteCopyOldPort <value>
Enables or disables listening on the old TCP port 3491. The value must be either enable or
disable. By default, Remote Copy links listen on both IANA registered port 5785 AND port
3491.
WARNING! Changing this parameter will reset all Remote Copy links. This may cause Remote
Copy targets to lose their connections temporarily.
VVRetentionTimeMax <value>[h|H|d|D]
Specifies the maximum value that can be set for the retention time of a volume. <time> is a positive
integer value and in the range of 0 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be optionally specified
in days or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following the entered time
value. The default value for <time> is 14 days.
To disable setting the volume retention time in the system, enter 0 for <time>.
UpgradeNote <value>
Sets a note that will be displayed when checkupgrade is run. To include spaces, enclose the
value inside double quotes. To erase an existing note, specify "". Maximum length is 127 characters.
334 Set Commands
PortFailoverEnabled <value>
Enables or disables the automatic failover of target ports to their designated partner ports. If
enabled, automatic failover is triggered when a node goes down. <value> can be 'yes' or 'no'.
The default is 'yes'.
AutoExportAfterReboot <value>
Enables or disables automatically exporting vluns after a reboot. If disabled, vluns and host ports
will not become active after a reboot until 'setsysmgr export_vluns' is issued. <value> can be 'yes'
or 'no'. The default is 'yes'.
AllowR5onNLDrives <value>
Enables or disables support for RAID-5 on NL drives. If disabled, new RAID-5 CPGs cannot be
created on NL drives. HP strongly recommends RAID-6 for high-capacity NL drives. <value> can
be 'yes' or 'no'. The default is 'no'.
AllowR0 <value>
Enables or disables support for RAID-0. If disabled, new RAID-0 CPGs cannot be created on this
system. RAID-0 virtual volumes do not offer data protection. <value> can be 'yes' or 'no'. The
default is 'no'.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays setting a raw space alert of 800 gigabytes:
cli% setsys RawSpaceAlertFC 800
cli% showsys -param
System parameters from configured settings
----Parameter----- ---Value----
RawSpaceAlertFC : 800
RawSpaceAlertNL : 0
RemoteSyslog : 1
RemoteSyslogHost : 192.168.6.15
SparingAlgorithm : Minimal
CopySpaceReclaim : 0
EventLogSize : 3M
VVRetentionTimeMax : 336 Hours
NOTES
Use the showsys –param command to see the current raw space alert setting (see Section
(page 482)).
setsys 335
setsysmgr
DESCRIPTION
The setsysmgr command sets the system manager startup state.
CAUTION: Issuing the setsysmgr command can potentially remove the entire state of the system
causing data loss.
SYNTAX
The syntax of the setsysmgr command can be one of the following:
•setsysmgr wipe [-f] [<system_ID>] <system_name>
•setsysmgr tocgen [-f] [<toc_gen_number> [<disk_quorum>]]
•setsysmgr force_iderecovery [-f]
•setsysmgr force_idewipe [-f]
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the sysmgr_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
wipe
Requests that the specified system be started in the new system state. If this subcommand is not
used, then the tocgen subcommand must be used.
tocgen
Specifies that the system is to be started with the specified table of contents generation number. If
this subcommand is not used, then the wipe subcommand must be used.
force_iderecovery
Specifies that the system starts the recovery process from the IDE disk even if all Virtual Volumes
(VV) have not been started.
CAUTION: Issuing the setsysmgr force_idewipe command can result in data loss.
force_idewipe
Specifies that the system wipes the IDE powerfail partition. The system is shutdown and restarted,
during which time all logical disks and VVs are checked.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<system_name>
Specifies the name of the system to be started, using up to 31 characters in length.
<system_ID>
336 Set Commands
Specifies the ID of the system to be started.
<toc_gen_number>
Specifies the table of contents generation number for the system to start with.
<disk_quorum>
Specifies the disk quorum for the system to start with.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•Use this command only when the system cannot start up normally.
EXAMPLES
The following example starts system mysystem in the new system state:
cli% setsysmgr wipe mysystem systemid
The following example starts the system with the table of contents generation number of 42956,
where 91 is the highest disk quorum displayed:
cli% setsysmgr tocgen 42956 91
The following example displays the start of a system’s recovery process from its IDE disk:
cli% setsysmgr force_iderecovery
NOTES
•If the wipe subcommand is specified, all system data and configuration information, including
customer data and VV layout, are destroyed.
•If the force_iderecovery subcommand is specified, the system can delete data for some
of the unstarted VVs. The system can run the checkvv and checkld commands to make the
VVs and logical disks consistent, thereby resulting in a possible data loss.
setsysmgr 337
settask
DESCRIPTION
The settask command sets the priority on specified task.
SYNTAX
settask [-f] -pri <high|med|low> <task_ID>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role that is granted the task_set right.
OPTIONS
-f
Forces the command. The command completes the process without prompting for confirmation.
-pri <high|med|low>
Specifies the priority of the task.
SPECIFIERS
<task_ID>
Sets the priority on a task specified by the task ID. The <task_ID> must be an unsigned integer
from 1 to 9999.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to set a priority on a task using the task ID:
cli% settask -pri high 497
Are you sure you want to set priority on task 497?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
high priortiy is set on task id: 497
NOTES
•Physical copy or promotesv tasks are supported. Setting priority on other types of tasks will
result in an error.
•Task priorities can only be set one at a time.
•If the specified task is not active or valid, it will result in an error.
338 Set Commands
settemplate
DESCRIPTION
The settemplate command modifies the properties of existing templates.
SYNTAX
settemplate <option_value>... [option <arg>] <template_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super
•Any role granted the template_set right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
-remove <option>...
Indicates that the option(s) that follow -remove are removed from the existing template. When
specifying an option for removal, do not specify the option’s value. For valid options, refer to
“createtemplate” (page 139).
SPECIFIERS
<option_value>...
Indicates the specified options and their values (if any) are added to an existing template. The
specified option replaces the existing option in the template. For valid options, refer to
“createtemplate” (page 139).
<template_name>
Specifies the name of the template to be modified, using up to 31 characters.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•The -desc option cannot be removed from a template (it can be changed to an empty
string).
•The -nrw and -nro options cannot be removed from a template. These options can only
be replaced by specifying either -nrw or -nro before the -remove option.
EXAMPLES
•The following example displays template vvtemp1 modified to support the availability of
data should a drive magazine fail (mag) using the stale_ss policy:
cli% settemplate –ha mag –pol stale_ss vvetemp1
•In the following example, the -nrw and -ha mag options are added to the template
template1, and the -t option is removed:
cli% settemplate -nrw -ha mag -remove -t template1
settemplate 339
NOTES
•All options available for the createald,createaldvv,createcpg, and createtpvv
commands can be used with the settemplate command to modify an existing template.
•Options preceded with –remove are removed from an existing template.
•When adding options to a template, specify the option flag and its value (if any).
•When removing options from a template, specify the option flag only.
340 Set Commands
setuser
DESCRIPTION
The setuser command sets your user properties.
SYNTAX
setuser [options <arg>] <user>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit, Browse
•Any role granted the user_setany right can add, remove, and set default domains for any
user.
•Any role granted the user_setown right can only set their own default domain.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. No confirmation is requested before executing the command.
-adddomain <domain>:<privilege>[,<domain>:<privilege>...]
Adds a specified user (<user>) to the specified domain (<domain>) at the specified role level
(<privilege>). Permitted values for <priv> are Super, Edit, Browse and Service.
-rmdomain <domain_name_or_pattern>[,<domain_name_or_pattern>...]
Remove the user from each domain with a name that matches one or more of the
<domain_name_or_pattern> options.
-defaultdomain <domain>
Changes the default domain of the user to a specified domain. You must already have permission
set in the domain. Specify the –unset option to specify no default domain. The Browse and Edit
authorities for this command and option can be used by any user with their own user name.
SPECIFIERS
<user>
Specifies the name of the user.
RESTRICTIONS
The -adddomain and -rmdomain options cannot be used on a user that is currently logged in.
Existing sessions can be terminated with the removeuserconn command.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, user 3paruser is permitted the edit level role in the domain
Engineering:
cli% setuser -adddomain Engineering:edit 3paruser
NOTES
None.
setuser 341
setuseracl
DESCRIPTION
The setuseracl command sets the Access Control List (ACL).
SYNTAX
setuseracl [options] <user_name> <operation> [<name_or_pattern>]...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the useracl_set right.
OPTIONS
-add
Adds names or patterns of objects at the end of an existing ACL.
-remove
Removes names or patterns of objects from an ACL.
SPECIFIERS
<user_name>
Specifies the name of the user whose ACL is being set.
<operation>
Specifies the operation for which the ACL is being defined. The only value currently accepted is
the updatevv command, which updates a snapshot with a new snapshot. Refer to “updatevv”
(page 660) for details.
[<name_or_pattern>]...
Specifies a list of names or patterns of objects on which the operation (as specified by the
<operation> argument) is performed. The object type is dependent on the specified operation.
For example, the objects or names specified for the updatevv operation are Virtual Volume (VV)
names. If an empty string is specified without any option, then any existing ACL for the
<user_name>, <operation> is removed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example sets the ACL for user testuser1 and allows testuser1 to update the
snapshot VVs of VVs vv1 and vv2.
cli% setuseracl testuser1 updatevv vv1 vv2
The following example shows how to add vv3 and vv4 to the ACL for user testuser1:
cli% setuseracl -add testuser1 updatevv vv3 vv4
342 Set Commands
The following example shows how to remove vv3 from the ACL for user testuser1:
cli% setuseracl -remove testuser1 updatevv vv3
The following example shows how to clear the ACL for user testuser1:
cli% setuseracl testuser1 updatevv ""
NOTES
•The -add and -remove options are mutually exclusive.
•If the names or pattern of objects to add already exist, the request is ignored.
•If the names or pattern of objects to remove do not exist, the request is also ignored.
setuseracl 343
setvv
DESCRIPTION
The setvv command changes the properties associated with a virtual volume. Use the setvv
command to modify volume names, volume policies, allocation warning and limit levels, and the
volume’s controlling common provisioning group (CPG).
SYNTAX
setvv [options <arg>] <VV_name|pattern>...
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vv_set right can edit the properties of base volumes.
•Any role granted the vvcopy_set right can edit the properties of physical copies of volumes.
•Any role granted the sv_set right can edit the properties of virtual copies of volumes.
OPTIONS
At least one of the following options must be specified:
-clrrsv
Specifies that all reservation keys (i.e., registrations) and all persistent reservations on the virtual
volume are cleared.
-exp <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the relative time from the current time that volume will expire. <time> is a positive integer
value and in the range of 0 to 43800 hours (1825 days). Time can be specified in days or hours
providing either the dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following the entered time value.
-comment <comment>
Specifies any additional information up to 511 characters for the volume. Use -comment ““ to
remove the comments.
-retain <time>[d|D|h|H]
Specifies the amount of time, relative to the current time, that the volume will be retained. <time>
is a positive integer value and in the range of 1to 43800 hours (1825 days). Time can be specified
in days or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following the entered time
value.
NOTE: The -retain option requires the HP 3PAR Virtual Lock license. Contact your local service
provider for more information.
NOTE: If the volume is not in any domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of the
system's maximum VV retention time. The default value for the system's maximum VV retention time
is 14 days. If the volume belongs to a domain, then its retention time cannot exceed the value of
the domain's maximum VV retention time, if set. The retention time cannot be removed or reduced
once it is set. If the volume has its retention time set, it cannot be removed within its retention time.
If both expiration time and retention time are specified, then the retention time cannot be longer
than the expiration time.
–name <new_name>
Specifies that the name of the virtual volume be changed to a new name (as indicated by the
<new_name> argument) that uses up to 31 characters.
-snp_cpg <snp_cpg>
344 Set Commands
Specifies that the volume snapshot space is to be provisioned from the specified CPG. This option
moves all the logical disks currently contained in the snapshot space for these volumes into the
CPG. This is permitted only when none of the logical disks are shared with other volumes that are
not specified in this option. If the <snp_CPG> specifier is specified as "", the volume snapshot
space is longer provisioned from a CPG and the existing snapshot space logical disks are removed
from the CPG. This is permitted only when the existing snapshot logical disks are exclusively used
by the volumes specified in this option.
-snp_aw <percent>
NOTE: The operation of setting a snapshot space CPG for a tpsd volume (a TPVV created with
HP 3PAR OS 2.2.4 or earlier) is not permitted if the volume has existing snapshots. All existing
snapshots must first be removed before using this option.
Indicates a snapshot space allocation warning. Through this option you can generate a warning
alert when the reserved snapshot space of the virtual volume exceeds the indicated percentage
of the virtual volume size.
-snp_al <percent>
Indicates a snapshot space allocation limit. The snapshot space of the virtual volume is prevented
from growing beyond the indicated percentage of the virtual volume size.
–pol <policy>[,<pol>...]
Specifies the policy is implemented by a virtual volume. Valid policies are as follows:
•stale_ss - Specifies that invalid (stale) snapshot volumes are permitted. Failures to update
snapshot data occur when there is not sufficient administration or snapshot space. Failures to
update snapshot data does not affect the write to the base volume. However, the snapshot is
considered invalid.
•no_stale_ss - Specifies that stale snapshot volumes are not permitted. A failure to update
a snapshot is considered a failure to write to the base volume. Existing stale snapshots remain
stale.
•one_host - Constrains the export of a volume to one host or one host cluster (when cluster
names may be used as a host name).
•no_one_host - This policy should only be used when exporting a virtual volume to multiple
hosts for use by a cluster-aware application, or when “port presents” VLUNs are used. This is
the default policy setting.
•tp_bzero - Specifies that if a host write results in the allocation of a new data page that is
only partially filled by the host write, then a zero-fill is performed on the unwritten portion of
the data page to ensure that the host cannot read data from deleted volumes or snapshot. The
default allocation page size is 16 KB.
•no_tp_bzero - Specifies that the zero-fill operation is bypassed on the allocation of partially
written data pages.
•zero_detect - Enables the HP 3PAR storage system to scan for zeros in the incoming write
data. When used during a physical copy to a Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volume (TPVV) avoids
allocating space for blocks containing zero. When used with a Thin Persistence license,
reclaims allocated space when zero blocks are written to a TPVV. This policy is applicable
for base TPVVs.
•no_zero_detect - Disables the HP 3PAR storage system to scan for zeros in the incoming
write data to reclaim allocated space on the volume.
Multiple policies can be specified and are separated with commas. If a policy is not specified, the
policy defaults to stale_ss.
The following options can only be used on Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volumes (TPVVs):
-usr_aw <percent>
setvv 345
This option returns a user space allocation warning. It generates a warning alert when the reserved
user space of the TPVV exceeds the specified percentage of the virtual volume size.
-usr_al <percent>
This option returns the user space allocation limit. The user space of the TPVV is prevented from
growing beyond the indicated percentage of the virtual volume size. After this size is reached,
any new writes to the virtual volume will fail.
-spt <sectors_per_track>
Defines the virtual volume geometry sectors per track value that is reported to the hosts through the
SCSI mode pages. The valid range is from 4to 8192. The default value is 304.
-hpc <heads_per_cylinder>
Defines the virtual volume geometry heads per cylinder value that is reported to the hosts though
the SCSI mode pages. The valid range is from 1to 1024. The default value is 8.
The following option can only be used on fully provisioned volumes:
-usr_cpg <usr_cpg>
Specifies that the volume user space that is to be provisioned from the specified CPG. This option
moves all the logical disks currently contained in the user space for these volumes into the CPG.
This is permitted only when none of the logical disks are shared with other volumes that are not
specified with this option. If the <usr_CPG> specifier is specified as "", the volume user space is
no longer provisioned from a CPG and the existing user space logical disks will be removed from
the CPG. This is permitted only when the existing user’s logical disks are exclusively being used
by the volumes specified with this option.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name|pattern>...
Specifies the virtual volume name or all virtual volumes that match the pattern specified, using up
to 31 characters. The patterns are glob-style patterns. Valid characters include alphanumeric
characters, periods, dashes, and underscores.
RESTRICTIONS
At least one option must be specified.
EXAMPLES
The following example sets the policy of virtual volume vv1 to no_stale_ss.
# setvv –pol no_stale_ss vv1
The following example changes the name from test to newtest.
cli% setvv -name newtest test
The following example modifies the WWN of virtual volume vv1.
cli% setvv -wwn 50002AC0001A0024 vv1
346 Set Commands
NOTES
•Use the setvv command to associate a standard virtual volume with a common provisioning
group (CPG) for use with Remote Copy.
•To view policies assigned to the system's virtual volumes, issue the showvv -pol command.
•Changing the CPG for a TPVV is not allowed.
•See the HP 3PAR Management Console Help or the HP 3PAR Command Line Interface
Administrator’s Manual for instructions on creating CPGs and volumes.
setvv 347
setvvset
DESCRIPTION
The setvvset command sets the parameters and modifies the properties of a Virtual Volume (VV)
set.
SYNTAX
setvvset [options <arg>] <setname>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the vvset_annotate right can only annotate the comment of a volume
set.
•Any role granted the vvset_set right can set any volume set property.
OPTIONS
-comment <comment>
Specifies any comment or additional information for the set. The comment can be up to 255
characters in length. Unprintable characters are not allowed.
-name <newname>
Specifies a new name for the VV set.
SPECIFIERS
<setname>
Specifies the name of the VV set to modify.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To rename a set from foo to bar:
cli% setvvset -name bar foo
To change the comment on a set bar:
cli% setvvset -comment "This used to be set foo" bar
NOTES
None.
348 Set Commands
setwsapi
DESCRIPTION
The setwsapi command sets properties of the Web Services API server, including options to
enable or disable the HTTP and HTTPS ports.
SYNTAX
setwsapi [options]
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
Any role granted the wsapi_set right
OPTIONS
-f
Forces the operation of the setwsapi command, bypassing the typical confirmation message.
At least one of the following options are required:
-http enable|disable
Enables or disables the HTTP port.
-https enable|disable
Enables or disables the HTTPS port.
SPECIFIERS
None.
EXAMPLES
To disable the HTTPS port:
cli% setwsapi -https disable
WARNING: The Web Services API server is active and will restart.
Are you sure you want to continue (y/n)? y
NOTES
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
You cannot disable both of the HTTP and HTTPS ports.
When the Web Services API server is active, a warning message showing the current status of the
Web Services API server is displayed and you will be prompted for confirmation before continuing.
The -f option forces the action without a warning message and prompt.
setwsapi 349
23 Show Commands
showalert
system
DESCRIPTION
The showalert command displays the status of system alerts. When issued without options, all
new customer alerts are displayed.
SYNTAX
showalert [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
The selection of alerts to be displayed is controlled by selecting one of the following options:
–n
Specifies that only new customer alerts are displayed.
–a
Specifies that only acknowledged alerts are displayed.
–f
Specifies that only fixed alerts are displayed.
–all
Specifies that all customer alerts are displayed.
The format of the alert display is controlled by the following options:
–d
Specifies that detailed information is displayed. Cannot be specified with the -online option.
-oneline
Specifies that summary information is displayed in a tabular form with one line per alert. For
customer alerts, the message text will be truncated if it is too long unless the -wide option is also
specified.
–svc
Specifies that only service alerts are displayed. This option can only be used with the -d or
-oneline formatting options.
-wide
Do not truncate the message text. Only valid for customer alerts and if the -oneline option is
also specified.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
Without any options, the showalert command displays all customer alerts in the New state.
350 Show Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example displays new customer alerts on a system:
cli% showalert -n
Id : 1
State : New
Message Code: 0x2200de
Time : 2008-07-17 20:14:29 PDT
Severity : Degraded
Type : Component state change
Message : Node 0, Power Supply 1, Battery 0 Degraded (Unknown)
Id : 2
State : New
Message Code: 0xe000c
Time : 2008-07-17 20:15:31 PDT
Severity : Informational
Type : Cluster shutdown after system recovery completion
Message : System recovery completed for node 0 (reason Power Loss)
2 alerts
NOTES
•Set the status of alerts by issuing the setalert command. See “setalert” (page 271) for more
information.
•Alerts can be removed by issuing the removealert command. See “removealert” (page 228)
for more information.
showalert 351
showaocfg
DESCRIPTION
The showaocfg command shows Adaptive Optimization (AO) configurations in the system.
SYNTAX
showaocfg [options <arg> [<aocfg_name>...|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-domain <domain_name_or_pattern,...>
Shows only AO configurations that are in domains with names matching one or more of the
<domain_name_or_pattern> argument. This option does not allow listing objects within a domain
of which the user is not a member. Patterns are glob-style (shell-style) patterns. Refer to “Glob-Style
Pattern” (page 12) for further information.
SPECIFIERS
[aocfg_name...|<pattern>...]
Specifies that AO configurations matching either the specified AO configuration name or those
AO configurations matching the specified pattern are displayed. This specifier can be repeated
to display information for multiple AO configurations. If not specified, all AO configurations in the
system are displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
None.
NOTES
None.
352 Show Commands
showauthparam
DESCRIPTION
The showauthparam command shows authentication parameters.
SYNTAX
showauthparam
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following is example output from the showauthparam command:
cli% showauthparam
Param -----------------Value-----------------
ldap-server xxx.xxx.xx.xx
ldap-server-hn domaincontroller.work.com
binding sasl
sasl-mechanism GSSAPI
kerberos-realm NTDOM1.work.COM
accounts-dn OU=Users,DC=work,DC=com
account-obj user
account-name-attr sAMAccountName
memberof-attr memberOf
edit-map CN=Software,CN=Users,DC=work,DC=com
browse-map CN=Eng,CN=Users,DC=work,DC=com
domain-name-attr description
group-obj group
domain-name-prefix !InServDomain=
NOTES
None.
showauthparam 353
showbattery
DESCRIPTION
The showbattery command displays battery status information including serial number, expiration
date, battery life, and so on, which could be helpful when determining battery maintenance
schedules.
SYNTAX
showbattery [options] [<node_ID> ...]
showbattery -listcols
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-listcols
Lists the columns available to be shown with the -showcols option described below (see clihelp
-col showbattery for help on each column).
-showcols <column>[,<column>...]
Explicitly selects the columns to be shown using a comma-separated list of column names. For this
option, the full column names are shown in the header. Run showbattery -listcols to list
the available columns. Run clihelp -col showbattery for a description of each column.
–d
Specifies that detailed battery information, including battery test information, serial numbers, and
expiration dates, is displayed.
–log
Specifies the battery test log information. This option is not supported on HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000
Storage systems.
-i
Specifies the battery inventory information.
-state
Displays detailed battery state information. This is the same as -s.
-s
Displays detailed battery state information.
This option is deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
-svc
Displays inventory information with HP serial number, spare part number, and so on. This option
must be used with the -i option and it is supported only on HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000 Storage
systems.
SPECIFIERS
<node_ID>...
Displays the battery information for the specified node ID(s). Node_ID is an integer from 0 through
7. This specifier is not required.
354 Show Commands
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays battery status information:
cli% showbattery
Node PS Bat Serial --State--- ChrgLvl(%) -ExpDate-- Expired Testing
0 0 0 FFFFFFFF OK 100 05/15/2007 No No
0 1 0 FFFFFFFF OK 100 05/15/2007 No No
1 0 0 -- NotPresent -- -- No No
1 1 0 -- NotPresent -- -- No No
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Node. The controller node number.
•PS. The power supply number.
•Bat. The battery ID.
•Serial. The battery serial number.
•State. The current status of the battery. Battery states can be as follows:
--. Cannot determine the battery state.◦
◦NotPresent. Battery is missing.
◦OK. Battery is operating normally.
◦Failed. Battery is operating abnormally.
◦MaxLifeLow. Maximum battery life is low (less than 12 minutes).
•ChgLvl. Percentage of battery charge status for the node.
•ExpDate. The expiration date of the battery.
•Expired. Indicates whether expired batteries are connected to the power supply.
•Testing. Indicates whether a battery test is in progress. When a battery test is in progress,
the batteries cannot be counted so the number of batteries shown is a cached value.
The following example displays detailed battery information:
cli% showbattery -d
--------------Node 0 PS 0 Battery 0---------------
Node ID : 0
Power Supply ID : 0
Battery ID : 0
Manufacturer : MAG
Model : 0800-0016-50.0B
Serial Number : 70315366
State : OK
Charge State : FullyCharged
Charge Level(%) : 100
Max Battery Life(mins) : 25
Expired : No
Test in Progress : No
Expiration Date : 2010-07-17 13:00:00 PD
...
showbattery 355
The following example displays the inventory information for the battery using the showbattery
–icommand:
cli% showbattery -i
Node PS Bat -Manufacturer- -Model- -Serial-
0 0 0 -- -- FFFFFFFF
0 1 0 -- -- FFFFFFFF
1 0 0 -- -- --
1 1 0 -- -- --
•Node. The controller node number.
•PS. The power supply number.
•Manufacturer. The manufacturer of the battery.
•Model. The battery model.
•Serial. Indicates the serial number of the battery.
The following example displays the battery test log information using the showbattery –log
command:
cli% showbattery -log
Node PS Bat Test Result Dur(mins) ------------Time------------
0 0 0 0 Passed 1 Fri Jan 19 13:16:51 PST 2007
0 0 0 1 Passed 1 Fri Feb 02 13:18:51 PST 2007
0 0 0 2 Passed 1 Tue Feb 20 12:41:06 PST 2007
0 0 0 3 Passed 1 Tue Mar 06 12:42:07 PST 2007
0 0 0 4 Passed 1 Tue Mar 20 13:43:58 PDT 2007
0 0 0 5 Passed 1 Tue Apr 03 13:45:35 PDT 2007
0 0 0 6 Passed 1 Tue Apr 17 13:47:07 PDT 2007
0 0 0 7 Passed 1 Tue May 01 13:49:05 PDT 2007
0 0 0 8 Passed 1 Tue May 15 13:50:10 PDT 2007
0 0 0 9 Passed 1 Tue May 29 13:51:36 PDT 2007
1 1 0 0 Passed 1 Fri Jan 19 14:17:44 PST 2007
1 1 0 1 Passed 1 Fri Feb 02 14:19:45 PST 2007
1 1 0 2 Passed 1 Tue Feb 20 13:42:02 PST 2007
1 1 0 3 Passed 1 Tue Mar 06 13:44:02 PST 2007
1 1 0 4 Passed 1 Tue Mar 20 14:45:53 PDT 2007
1 1 0 5 Passed 1 Tue Apr 03 14:47:24 PDT 2007
1 1 0 6 Passed 1 Tue Apr 17 14:48:56 PDT 2007
1 1 0 7 Passed 1 Tue May 01 14:50:54 PDT 2007
1 1 0 8 Passed 1 Tue May 15 14:51:59 PDT 2007
1 1 0 9 Passed 1 Tue May 29 14:53:25 PDT 2007
•Node. The controller node number.
•PS. The power supply number.
•Bat. The battery ID.
•Test. The current status of the battery.
•Result. The battery status, shows as passed or failed.
•Dur(mins). Indicates the length of time for the results to return.
•Time. Indicates the time of the last battery test.
356 Show Commands
The following example displays the detailed status of the battery using the showbattery –s
command:
cli% showbattery -state
Node PS Bat -State- -Detailed_State-
0 0 0 OK Normal
0 1 0 OK Normal
1 0 0 OK Normal
1 1 0 OK Normal
•Node. The controller node number.
•PS. The power supply number.
•Bat. The battery ID.
•State. The current status of the battery and can be one of the following:
OK. The battery is operating normally.◦
◦Failed. The battery is operating abnormally.
◦Degraded. The battery is in degraded state.
◦Not Present. The battery is missing.
•Detailed_State. The detailed state of the battery and can be one of the following:
Not Present. The battery is missing.◦
◦Expired. The battery is already expired.
◦Failed. The battery is operating abnormally.
◦InvalidFirmware. The battery has invalid firmware.
◦Unknown. The battery state is unknown.
◦Undefined. The battery state cannot be determined.
NOTES
•Battery information is set by issuing the setbattery command. See “setbattery” (page 278)
for more information.
•For the E-Class and F-Class Storage Servers, the Power Supply 0's primary node is 0 and its
secondary node is 1. The Power Supply 1's primary node is 1 and its secondary node is 0.
The primary node can read and modify the power supply's properties. The secondary node
can only read the power supply's properties. Therefore, for the E-Class and F-Class, with the
-old option, the battery information for Node 0 Power Supply 0 is the same as the battery
information for Node 1 Power Supply 0. The battery information for Node 1 Power Supply
1 is the same as the battery information for Node 0 Power Supply 1.
showbattery 357
showblock
DESCRIPTION
The showblock command displays block mapping information for Virtual Volumes (VVs), Logical
Disks (LDs), and Physical Disks (PDs).
SYNTAX
showblock [options <arg>] <dev> <block> [<eblock>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–d
Specifies that detailed information is displayed for the specified device and block.
SPECIFIERS
<dev>
The <dev> specifier is specified as one of the following arguments:
vv <VV_name> usr|snp|adm
Specifies the VV name and the area (usr,snp, or adm) of that volume for the block mapping
information to be displayed.
ld <LD_name>
Specifies the LD name.
pd <PD_ID>
Specifies the ID of the PD.
<block>
Specifies the 512 byte block number on the specified device.
[<eblock>]
Specifies an end range when used with the <block> specifier. Additional mapping for blocks
at the start of each device mapping boundary for the range indicated by <block> and <eblock>
is displayed. This specifier is optional.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays block mapping information for block 0in the user space of VV
admin:
cli% showblock vv admin usr 0
VVname Spc VVBlock LDname LDBlock PDid Chnk PDblock
admin usr 0x00000000 admin.usr.0 0x00000000 88 0 0x00080000
= = = = 0x00000000 58 0 0x00080000
358 Show Commands
The following example displays detailed block mapping information for block 0in the user space
of VV admin:
cli% showblock –d vv admin usr 0
VV/LD Name Block Region
VV usr: admin 0x00000000 0x00000000–0x0007FFFF (0–256MB)
LD : admin.usr.0 0x00000000 0x00000000–0x0007FFFF (0–256MB)
PD Chnk PDStep Block LDStep
88 0 0x00080000–0x000801FF 0x00080000 0x00000000–0x000001FF
58 0 0x00080000–0x000801FF 0x00080000 0x00000000–0x000001FF
The following example displays block mapping information from blocks 0x100 through 0x400
in the user space of VV admin:
cli% showblock vv admin usr 0x100 0x400
VVname Spc VVBlock LDname LDBlock PDid Chnk PDblock
admin usr 0x00000100 admin.usr.0 0x00000100 88 0 0x00080100
= = = = 0x00000100 58 0 0x00080100
admin usr 0x00000200 admin.usr.0 0x00000200 87 0 0x00080000
= = = = 0x00000200 56 0 0x00080000
admin usr 0x00000400 admin.usr.0 0x00000400 70 1 0x00100000
= = = = 0x00000400 54 0 0x00080000
The following example displays detailed block mapping information from blocks 0x100 through
0x400 in the user space of VV admin:
cli% showblock –d vv admin usr 0x100 0x400
VV/LD Name Block Region
VV usr: admin 0x00000100 0x00000000–0x0007FFFF (0–256MB)
LD : admin.usr.0 0x00000100 0x00000000–0x0007FFFF (0–256MB)
PD Chnk PDStep Block LDStep
88 0 0x00080000–0x000801FF 0x00080100 0x00000000–0x000001FF
58 0 0x00080000–0x000801FF 0x00080100 0x00000000–0x000001FF
----------------------------------------------------------------
VV/LD Name Block Region
VV usr: admin 0x00000200 0x00000000–0x0007FFFF (0–256MB)
LD : admin.usr.0 0x00000200 0x00000000–0x0007FFFF (0–256MB)
PD Chnk PDStep Block LDStep
87 0 0x00080000–0x000801FF 0x00080000 0x00000200–0x000003FF
56 0 0x00080000–0x000801FF 0x00080000 0x00000200–0x000003FF
----------------------------------------------------------------
VV/LD Name Block Region
VV usr: admin 0x00000400 0x00000000–0x0007FFFF (0–256MB)
LD : admin.usr.0 0x00000400 0x00000000–0x0007FFFF (0–256MB)
PD Chnk PDStep Block LDStep
70 1 0x00100000–0x001001FF 0x00100000 0x00000400–0x000005FF
54 0 0x00080000–0x000801FF 0x00080000 0x00000400–0x000005FF
cli% showblock –d ld admin.usr.1 0x100
VV/LD Name Block Region
VV usr: admin 0x00080100 0x00080000–0x000FFFFF (256–512MB)
LD : admin.usr.1 0x00000100 0x00000000–0x0007FFFF (0–256MB)
PD Chnk PDStep Block LDStep
65 1 0x00100000–0x001001FF 0x00100100 0x00000000–0x000001FF
59 0 0x00080000–0x000801FF 0x00080100 0x00000000–0x000001FF
showblock 359
NOTES
None.
360 Show Commands
showcage
DESCRIPTION
The showcage command displays information about drive cages.
SYNTAX
The syntax of the showcage command can be one of the following:
•showcage [options] [-d] [<cagename>...]
•showcage [-sfp [-d|-ddm]] [<cagename>...]
•showcage -i [<cagename>...]
•showcage -svc -i [<cagename>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–d
Specifies that more detailed information about the drive cage is displayed. If this option is not
used, then only summary information about the drive cages is displayed.
–e
Displays error information.
–c
Specifies to use cached information. This option displays information faster because the cage does
not need to be probed, however, some information might not be up-to-date without that probe.
–sfp
Specifies information about the SFP(s) attached to a cage. Currently, additional SFP information
can only be displayed for DC2 and DC4 cages.
–ddm
Specifies the SFP DDM information. This option can only be used with the -sfp option and cannot
be used with the -d option.
–i
Specifies that inventory information about the drive cage is displayed. If this option is not used,
then only summary information about the drive cages is displayed.
-svc
Displays inventory information with HP serial number, spare part number, and so on. This option
must be used with the -i option and it is supported only on HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000 Storage
systems.
SPECIFIERS
<cagename>...
Specifies a drive cage name for which information is displayed. This specifier can be repeated to
display information for multiple cages. If no specifiers are used, the command defaults to displaying
information about all cages in the system.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
showcage 361
EXAMPLES
The following examples display information for a single system’s drive cages:
cli% showcage
Id Name LoopA Pos.A LoopB Pos.B Drives Temp RevA RevB Model Side
0 cage0 0:1:1 0 1:1:1 0 40 24-33 2.05 2.05 DC4 n/a
1 cage1 0:1:2 0 1:1:2 0 24 26-32 2.05 2.05 DC2 0
1 cage1 0:1:3 0 1:1:3 0 16 28-32 2.05 2.05 DC2 1
2 cage2 0:1:4 0 1:1:4 0 16 33-36 04 04 DC3 n/a
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The cage number.
•Name. The name of the cage.
•LoopA. The position of the controller node port to which the cage’s A port (the top port) is
connected.
•Pos.A. Indicates how closely connected the cage’s A port is to the controller node port. The
value is 0if the A port is non daisy chained to the node or 1if daisy chained.
•LoopB. The position of the controller node port that is connected to the cage’s B port.
•Pos.B. Indicates how closely connected the cage’s B port is to the controller node port. The
value is 0if the B port is non daisy chained to the node or 1if daisy chained.
•Drives. The number of physical disks in the drive cage.
•Temp. The range of current temperatures for the drives in the drive cage, in Celsius.
•RevA. The cage firmware version for side A of the drive cage.
•RevB. The cage firmware version for side B of the drive cage.
•Model. The model can be DC1, DC2, DC3, or DC4.
•Side. Specifies the right (1) or left (0) side of the drive cage.
Specifying the –doption provides more detailed information about the drive cages. See the
following E200 Storage Server example for cage0:
cli% showcage -d
Id Name LoopA Pos.A LoopB Pos.B Drives Temp RevA RevB Model Side
0 cage0 0:0:1 0 1:0:1 0 8 29-32 03 03 DC3 n/a
-----------Cage detail info for cage0 ---------
Position: ---
-----------Midplane Info------------
VendorId,ProductId 3PARdata,DC3
Serial_Num OPS45811C010719
Node_WWN 20000050CC010719
TempSensor_State OK
TempSensor_Value 35
OpsPanel_State OK
Audible_Alarm_State Muted
ID_Switch 4
Cage_State OK
362 Show Commands
Interface Board Info LoopA LoopB
Firmware_status Current Current
Product_Rev 03 03
IFC_State OK OK
ESH_State OK OK
Master_CPU Yes No
Loop_Map valid valid
Link_Speed 2Gbps 2Gbps
Port0_State OK OK
Port1_State No_SFP No_SFP
Port2_State No_SFP No_SFP
Port3_State No_SFP No_SFP
Power Supply Info State Fan State AC Model
ps0 OK MedSpeed OK --
ps1 OK MedSpeed OK --
-------------Drive Info------------- ----LoopA----- ----LoopB-----
Drive NodeWWN State Temp(C) ALPA LoopState ALPA LoopState
0:0 20000011c60b0379 OK 32 0x88 OK 0x88 OK
3:0 20000011c60b18b4 OK 29 0x81 OK 0x81 OK
4:0 2000000c50c3560d OK 31 0x80 OK 0x80 OK
7:0 2000000c501fd935 OK 30 0x79 OK 0x79 OK
8:0 2000000c501fd804 OK 32 0x76 OK 0x76 OK
11:0 20000011c60b0aeb OK 29 0x73 OK 0x73 OK
12:0 2000000c501fd7ad OK 32 0x72 OK 0x72 OK
15:0 2000000c501fcbe9 OK 31 0x6d OK 0x6d OK
Specifying the –doption provides more detailed information about the drive cages. See the
following DC4 example from a T-Class Storage Server example for cage0:
cli% showcage -d cage0
Id Name LoopA Pos.A LoopB Pos.B Drives Temp RevA RevB Model Side
0 cage0 0:1:1 0 1:1:1 0 40 24-33 2.05 2.05 DC4 n/a
-----------Cage detail info for cage0 ---------
Position: ---
Fibre Channel Info PortA0 PortB0 PortA1 PortB1
Link_Speed 4Gbps 0Gbps 0Gbps 4Gbps
----------------------------------SFP Info-----------------------------------
FCAL SFP -State- --Manufacturer-- MaxSpeed(Gbps) TXDisable TXFault RXLoss DDM
0 0 OK FINISAR CORP. 4.20 No No No Yes
0 1 OK FINISAR CORP. 4.20 No No Yes Yes
1 0 OK FINISAR CORP. 4.20 No No Yes Yes
1 1 OK FINISAR CORP. 4.20 No No No Yes
Interface Board Info FCAL0 FCAL1
Link A RXLEDs Green Off
Link A TXLEDs Green Green
Link B RXLEDs Off Green
Link B TXLEDs Green Green
LED(Loop_Split) Off Off
LEDS(system,hotplug) Green,Off Green,Off
-----------Midplane Info-----------
Firmware_status Current
Product_Rev 2.05
showcage 363
State Normal Op
Loop_Split 0
VendorId,ProductId 3PARdata,DC4
Unique_ID 1062010000001C00
Power Supply Info State Fan State AC Model
ps0 OK OK OK POI
ps1 OK OK OK POI
ps2 OK OK OK POI
ps3 OK OK OK POI
-----Magazine Info----- ---State---
Mag SysLED HplLED Disks LoopA LoopB
0 Green Off 4 Ready Ready
1 Green Off 4 Ready Ready
2 Green Off 4 Ready Ready
...
9 Green Off 4 Ready Ready
-------------Drive Info------------- ----LoopA----- ----LoopB-----
Drive NodeWWN LED Temp(C) ALPA LoopState ALPA LoopState
0:0 2000001862c4e410 Green 31 0xe1 OK 0xe1 OK
0:1 2000001862c4e3f6 Green 31 0xe0 OK 0xe0 OK
0:2 2000001862c4e3bc Green 28 0xdc OK 0xdc OK
...
9:1 2000001862b9affb Green 30 0xa6 OK 0xa6 OK
9:2 2000001862b9b035 Green 27 0xa5 OK 0xa5 OK
9:3 2000001862b9b7b5 Green 25 0xa3 OK 0xa3 OK
When the power supply is switched off, it will be reported as Off through the showcage -d
command as well as a degraded alert being posted. The following is a sample of the output:
cli% showcage -d cage3 | egrep -i 'Power|\<ps'
Power Supply Info State Fan State AC Model
ps0 OK OK OK MAG
ps1 Off OK OK MAG
ps2 Failed OK Failed MAG
ps3 OK OK OK MAG
cli% showalert | grep Cage\ 3
Message : Cage 3, Power Supply 1 Degraded (Power Supply Off)
Message : Cage 3, Power Supply 2 Failed (Power Supply Failed, Power Supply AC
Failed)
NOTES
The power supply model, as shown in the Model column of the showcage –doutput, is set by
service personnel using the setcage command, as described in “setcage” (page 280).
364 Show Commands
showcim
DESCRIPTION
The showcim command displays the CIM server current status, either active or inactive. It also
displays the current status of the HTTP and HTTPS ports and their port numbers. In addition, it shows
the current status of the SLP port, that is either enabled or disabled.
SYNTAX
showcim
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLE
The following example shows the current CIM status:
cli% showcim
-Service- -State- --SLP-- SLPPort -HTTP-- HTTPPort -HTTPS- HTTPSPort PGVer CIMVer
Enabled Active Enabled 427 Enabled 5988 Enabled 5989 2.5.1 2.3.1
Where the columns are defined as:
•Service. Indicates the CIM server status.
--. Cannot determine the CIM server status.◦
◦Enabled. The CIM server is running.
◦Disabled. The CIM server is not running.
•State. Indicates if the CIM server is Active or Inactive.
•SLP. Indicates the SLP port state.
--. Cannot determine the SLP port state.◦
◦Enabled. The SLP port state is enabled.
◦Disabled. The SLP port state is disabled.
•SLPPort. The SLP port. Default is 427.
showcim 365
•HTTP. Indicates the HTTP port state.
--. Cannot determine the HTTP port state.◦
◦Enabled. HTTP port is enabled.
◦Disabled. HTTP port is disabled.
•HTTPPort. HTTP port (1024 - 65635). The default value is 5988.
•HTTPS. The HTTPS port state.
--. Cannot determine the HTTPS port state.◦
◦Enabled. HTTPS port is enabled.
◦Disabled. HTTPS port is disabled.
•HTTPSPort. The HTTPS port (1024 - 65535). The default value is 5989.
•PGVer. The Pegasus version.
•CIMVer. Indicates the CIM version running.
NOTES
None.
366 Show Commands
showclienv
DESCRIPTION
The showclienv command displays the CLI environment parameters.
SYNTAX
showclienv
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the currently set CLI environment variables for sample system
TestSystem:
cli% showclienv
Parameter Value
csvtable 0
nohdtot 0
hafter -1
listdom 0
editor emacs
NOTES
See the setclienv command for a complete description of the environment parameters.
showclienv 367
showcpg
DESCRIPTION
The showcpg command displays Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs) in the system.
SYNTAX
showcpg [options <arg>] [<CPG_name>...|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
The following options cannot be used together with other options except -hist and -domain:
-d
Show the detail information of CPGs.
–r
Specifies that raw space used by the CPGs is displayed.
–alert
Indicates whether alerts are posted.
–alerttime
Show times when alerts were posted (when applicable).
–sag
Specifies that the snapshot administration space autogrowth parameters are displayed.
–sdg
Specifies that the snapshot data space autogrowth parameters are displayed.
The following options can be used together with other options:
–hist
Specifies that current data from the CPG, as well as the CPG’s history data is displayed.
-domain <domain_name_or_pattern,...>
Shows only CPGs that are in domains with names matching one or more of the
<domain_name_or_pattern> argument. This option does not allow listing objects within a
domain of which the user is not a member. Patterns are glob-style (shell-style) patterns. Refer to
“Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further information.
SPECIFIERS
[<CPG_name>...|<pattern>...]
Specifies that CPGs matching either the specified CPG name or those CPGs matching the specified
pattern are displayed. This specifier can be repeated to display information for multiple CPGs. If
not specified, all CPGs in the system are displayed. See “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for more
information.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
368 Show Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a system’s CPGs:
cli% showcpg
---------------(MB)---------------
-Volumes- -Usage- --- Usr --- --- Snp --- -- Adm ---
Id Name Warn% VVs TPVVs Usr Snp Total Used Total Used Total Used
0 cpg1 - 2 0 2 1 15360 15360 32768 0 8192 0
1 cpg2 - 2 2 0 2 0 0 32768 1024 8192 256
2 cpg3 - 1 1 0 1 0 0 32768 512 8192 128
-------------------------------------------------------------------
3 total 2 4 15360 15360 98304 1536 24576 384
The columns for the previous example output are identified as follows:
•Id. The CPG ID.
•Name. The CPG name.
•Warn%. The CPG’s allocation warning threshold.
•Volumes. Virtual Volumes (VVs) and Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volumes (TPVVs).
•VVs. The Number of VVs (including TPVVs) using the CPG.
•TPVVs. The number of TPVVs using the CPG.
•Usage. Virtual Volumes using the CPG.
•Usr. The number of VVs whose User Space is using the CPG.
•Snp. The number of VVs whose Snapshot Space is using the CPG.
•Usr. User space.
•Total. The total logical disk space in MBs in the Usr space.
•Used. The total logical disk space in MBs used in Usr space.
•Snp. Snap space.
•Total. The total logical disk space in MBs in the Snp space.
•Used. The total logical disk space in MBs used in Snp space.
•Adm. Administration space.
•Total. The total logical disk space in MBs in the Adm space.
•Used. The total logical disk space in MBs used in Adm space.
The following example displays the detailed information of common provisioning groups.
cli% showcpg –d
---------------(MB)---------------
-Volumes- -Usage- --- Usr --- --- Snp --- -- Adm --- --- LD ----
Id Name Warn% VVs TPVVs Usr Snp Total Used Total Used Total Used Usr Snp Adm
0 cpg1 - 2 0 2 1 15360 15360 32768 0 8192 0 4 4 2
1 cpg2 - 2 2 0 2 0 0 32768 1024 8192 256 0 4 3
2 cpg3 - 1 1 0 1 0 0 32768 512 8192 128 0 4 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 total 2 4 15360 15360 98304 1536 24576 384 8 12 7
The columns in the previous example are defined as follows:
•Id. The CPG ID.
•Name. The CPG name.
showcpg 369
•Warn%. The CPG’s allocation warning threshold.
•Volumes. Virtual Volumes (VVs) and Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volumes (TPVVs).
•VVs. The Number of VVs (including TPVVs) using the CPG.
•TPVVs. The number of TPVVs using the CPG.
•Usage. Virtual Volumes using the CPG.
•Usr. The number of VVs whose User Space is using the CPG.
•Snp. The number of VVs whose Snapshot Space is using the CPG.
•Usr. User space.
•Total. The total logical disk space in MBs in the Usr space.
•Used. The total logical disk space in MBs used in Usr space.
•Snp. Snap space.
•Total. The total logical disk space in MBs in the Snp space.
•Used. The total logical disk space in MBs used in Snp space.
•Adm. Administration space.
•Total. The total logical disk space in MBs in the Adm space.
•Used. The total logical disk space in MBs used in Adm space.
•LD. The number of logical disks in Usr, Snp, and Adm space.
•Usr. The total number or logical disks in the Usr space.
•Snp. The total number of logical disks in the Snp space.
•Adm. The total number of logical disks in the Adm space.
The following example displays the common provisioning group’s snapshot data space’s autogrowth
parameters:
cli% showcpg –sdg
------(MB)------
Id Name Warn Limit Grow Args
0 cpg1 70 85 32768 -p -devtype FC
1 cpg2 - - 32768 -p -devtype FC
2 cpg3 - - 32768 -p -devtype FC
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The CPG ID.
•Name. The CPG name.
•Warn. The CPG’s snapshot data space allocation warning threshold in MBs.
•Limit. The CPG’s snapshot data allocation limit threshold, or growth limit in MBs.
•Grow. The CPG’s snapshot data space allocation limit threshold.
•Args. The options used in the creation of the CPG.
The following example displays the raw space used by the system’s common provisioning groups:
cli% showcpg –alert
------------ Data ------------ --- Adm ----
- Setting(MB) - Alerts Alerts
Id Name Warn% Total Warn Limit W% W L F Total W% F
0 cpg1 - 32768 70 85 - - Y - 8192 - -
370 Show Commands
1 cpg2 - 32768 - - - - - - 8192 - -
2 cpg3 - 32768 - - - - - - 8192 - -
3 cpg4 - 32768 - - - - - - 8192 - -
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The physical disk ID.
•Name. The name of the common provisioning group.
•Warn%. The allocation warning percentage (see –aw option of the createcpg or setcpg
command).
•Total. The total logical disk MB space in a CPG.
•Warn. The size in MB of the space at which a warning alert is generated.
•Limit. The limit size in MB beyond which the space (Data or Adm) will not grow.
•Alerts. There are columns for the 4 types of alerts listed below. For the -alert option
indicates Yif an alert is posted or "-" if no alert has been posted. The -alerttime option
indicates the time that the alert was posted.
•W%. An alert corresponding to Warn%.
•W. An alert corresponding to Warn.
•L. An alert corresponding to Limit.
•F. An alert corresponding to a growth failure.
The following example displays the raw space used by common provisioning groups:
cli% showcpg -r
----------------------------------(MB)-----------------------------------
-Volumes- -Usage- --------- Usr ---------- --------- Snp ----------
--------- Adm ---------
Id Name Warn% VVs TPVVs Usr Snp Total RTotal Used RUsed Total RTotal Used RUsed
Total RTotal Used RUsed
0 cpg1 - 2 0 2 1 15360 30720 15360 30720 32768 65536 0 8192
24576 0 0 0
1 cpg2 - 2 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 32768 65536 1024 2048
8192 24576 256 768
2 cpg3 - 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 32768 65536 512 1024
8192 24576 128 384
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 total 2 4 15360 30720 15360 30720 98304 196608 1536 11264
40960 131072 384 1152
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The CPG ID.
•Name. The CPG name.
•Warn%. The CPG’s allocation warning threshold.
•Volumes. Virtual Volumes (VVs) and Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volumes (TPVVs).
•VVs. The Number of VVs (including TPVVs) using the CPG.
•TPVVs. The number of TPVVs using the CPG.
•Usage. Virtual Volumes using the CPG.
showcpg 371
•Usr. The number of VVs whose User Space is using the CPG.
•Snp. The number of VVs whose Snapshot Space is using the CPG.
•Usr. User space.
•Total. The total logical disk space in MBs in the Usr space.
•RTotal. The total raw MBs of (raw) space in the Usr space.
•Used. The total logical disk space in MBs used in Usr space.
•RUsed. The total MBs of (raw) space used in the Usr space.
•Snp. Snap space.
•Total. The total logical disk space in MBs in the Snp space.
•RTotal. The total raw MBs of (raw) space in the Snp space.
•Used. The total logical disk space in MBs used in Snp space.
•RUsed. The total MBs of (raw) space used in the Snp space.
•Adm. Administration space.
•Total. The total logical disk space in MBs in the Adm space.
•RTotal. The total raw MBs of (raw) space in the Adm space.
•Used. The total logical disk space in MBs used in Adm space.
•RUsed. The total MBs of (raw) space used in the Adm space.
NOTES
•When using the createaldvv command, the size of the Logical Disk (LD) space created is
the first integer multiple of the RAID set size that is large enough to accommodate the requested
virtual volume size.
For example, with the default RAID-5 layout with a set size of 768 MB, a requested virtual volume
size of 8192 MB causes the creation of LDs with a total size rounded up to an integer multiple of
768 that is 8448 MB. The growth increment of CPGs is similarly rounded up because the growth
is done by creating LDs that must be created in units of the LD RAID set size. See the HP 3PAR
Command Line Interface Administrator’s Guide for further details.
•For this command: 1 MB = 1048576 bytes.
•ADomain column can be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to
1. The listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option or if
the CLI was started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h and
setclienv -h for details of the environment variables.
372 Show Commands
showdate
DESCRIPTION
The showdate command displays the date and time for each system node.
SYNTAX
showdate
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the date and time for the system node:
cli% showdate
Node Date
0 Mon Apr 17 17:07:44 PDT 2007 (US/Pacific)
1 Mon Apr 17 17:07:44 PDT 2007 (US/Pacific)
NOTES
Set date and time information on nodes by issuing the setdate command. The output of the
showdate command include an abbreviated time zone which may be non-unique. A unique and
parenthesized long format time zone name is appended at the end of each row. The long format
time zone name is the official time zone string set via setdate. See “setdate” (page 291) for
additional information.
showdate 373
showdomain
DESCRIPTION
The showdomain command displays a list of domains in a system.
SYNTAX
showdomain [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–d
Specifies that detailed information is displayed.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same
information in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays detailed information about a system’s domains:
cli% showdomain -d
ID Domain -----CreationTime------ --Comments--- -VVRetentionTimeMax-
1 TestDomain1 2009-08-22 14:23:30 PDT Beef Test 0 Hours
2 TestDomain2 2009-08-22 14:23:30 PDT Chicken Test 0 Hours
3 TestDomain3 2009-08-22 14:23:30 PDT Pork Test 0 Hours
In the example above:
•ID. The domain ID.
•Domain. The domain name.
•CreationTime. The date and time the domain was created.
•Comments. Information about the domain.
•VVRetentionTimeMax. Maximum retention time that may be set for volumes in this domain;
if --, the system VVRetentionTimeMax value is used instead.
374 Show Commands
NOTES
If the VVRetentionTimeMax is--, then the minimum volume retention time for the system is used
instead. If the VVRetentionTimeMax is 0, then the volume retention time in the domain is disabled.
showdomain 375
showdomainset
DESCRIPTION
The showdomainset command lists the host sets defined on the HP 3PAR storage system and
their members.
SYNTAX
showdomainset [options] [<setname_or_pattern>...]
showdomainset -domain [options] [<domainname_or_pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-d
Show a more detailed listing of each set.
-domain
Show domain sets that contain the supplied domains or patterns
SPECIFIERS
<setname_or_pattern>...
An optional list of <setnames> or <patterns>. If no <setname> or <pattern> is specified all
sets are displayed, otherwise only sets with names matching one or more of the setnames or patterns
are displayed. The patterns are glob-style patterns. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for
further information.
<domainname_or_pattern>...
Specifies that the domain sets containing domains with the specified names or matching the
glob-style patterns should be displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To show all domain sets defined to the system:
cli% showdomainset
Id Name Members
7 domainset domainset.1
domainset.2
23 newset testdomain
Show details of a specific set:
cli% showdomainset -d newset
Id Name Members Comment
23 newset testdomain this set has been renamed and now has a comment
376 Show Commands
Show domain sets containing domains matching the pattern domainset.*:
cli% showdomainset -domain domainset.*
Id Name Members
7 domainset domainset.1
domainset.2
NOTES
None.
showdomainset 377
showeeprom
DESCRIPTION
The showeeprom command displays node EEPROM log information.
SYNTAX
showeeprom [options] [<node_ID>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–dead
Specifies that an EEPROM log for a node that has not started or successfully joined the cluster be
displayed. If this option is used, it must be followed by a list of nodes.
SPECIFIERS
<node_ID>...
Specifies the node ID for which EEPROM log information is retrieved. Multiple node IDs are
separated with a single space (0 1 2). If no specifiers are used, the EEPROM log for all nodes is
displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the EEPROM log for all nodes:
cli% showeeprom
Node: 0
--------
Board revision: 0920-1053-03.01
Assembly: FLH 2007/50 Serial 0039
System serial: 1000183
BIOS version: 2.1.3
OS version: 2.2.4.32
Reset reason: Unknown
Last boot: 2008-02-28 14:58:25 PST
Last cluster join: 2008-02-28 14:58:37 PST
Last panic: Never
Last panic request: Never
Error ignore code: 00
SMI context: 00
Last HBA mode: 2a000000
BIOS state: ff 23 26 27 28 29 2b 80
TPD state: 34 40 ff 2a 2c 2e 30 32
Code 128 (BIOS update) - Subcode 0x2020103 (2020102) Thu Feb 28 14:54:13 2008
Code 25 (PROM Failure) - Subcode 0x1 (0) Fri Feb 15 07:58:48 2008
[Repeat] Fri Feb 15 07:59:20 2008
Code 128 (BIOS update) - Subcode 0x2020102 (2020009) Fri Feb 15 07:58:39 2008
Code 25 (PROM Failure) - Subcode 0x1 (0) Fri Feb 15 07:56:33 2008
Code 20 (AP Init Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Thu Feb 14 23:30:05 2008
[Repeat] Fri Feb 15 08:36:13 2008
Code 25 (PROM Failure) - Subcode 0x1 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:31:35 2008
[Repeat] Tue Jan 29 13:32:07 2008
378 Show Commands
Code 20 (AP Init Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:30:56 2008
Code 25 (PROM Failure) - Subcode 0x1 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:17:57 2008
Code 20 (AP Init Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:17:28 2008
Code 25 (PROM Failure) - Subcode 0x1 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:14:49 2008
Code 20 (AP Init Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:04:57 2008
Code 10 (PCI Failure) - Subcode 0xd (30) Mon Jan 14 18:17:12 2008
Node: 1
--------
Board revision: 0920-1053-03.01
Assembly: FLH 2007/50 Serial 0042
System serial: 1000183
BIOS version: 2.1.3
OS version: 2.2.4.32
Reset reason: COLD_POWERON
Last boot: 2008-02-28 14:59:14 PST
Last cluster join: 2008-02-28 14:59:32 PST
Last panic: Never
Last panic request: Never
Error ignore code: 00
SMI context: 00
Last HBA mode: 2a000000
BIOS state: ff 23 26 27 28 29 2b 80
TPD state: 34 40 ff 2a 2c 2e 30 32
Code 128 (BIOS update) - Subcode 0x2020103 (2020102) Thu Feb 28 14:54:18 2008
Code 128 (BIOS update) - Subcode 0x2020102 (2020009) Fri Feb 15 08:10:03 2008
Code 20 (AP Init Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Thu Feb 14 23:34:54 2008
[Repeat] Fri Feb 15 08:41:02 2008
Code 20 (AP Init Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:58:56 2008
Code 15 (PCI_Fibre_Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:50:54 2008
[Repeat] Tue Jan 29 13:51:02 2008
Code 15 (PCI_Fibre_Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (5) Tue Jan 29 13:50:38 2008
Code 25 (PROM Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:49:11 2008
Code 20 (AP Init Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Tue Jan 29 13:05:32 2008
Code 25 (PROM Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Wed Jan 23 15:03:20 2008
Code 25 (PROM Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Mon Jan 21 00:14:45 2008
Code 25 (PROM Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (0) Fri Jan 18 11:38:31 2008
Code 15 (PCI_Fibre_Failure) - Subcode 0x0 (5) Tue Jan 15 18:49:06 2008
In the example above:
•Board revision indicates the HP 3PAR part number for the node board, including any
minor revision codes.
•Assembly indicates the code of the assembly, the year or week the node was produced,
and the node serial number.
•System serial is the cluster serial number.
•BIOS version displays the currently installed BIOS version.
•OS version displays the currently installed OS version.
•Reset reason displays why the board was previously reset. Values can be:
•COLD_POWERON. The node was powered off and back on.
•EXTERNAL_RESET. Another node in the cluster forced the reset.
•WATCHDOG_RESET. A watchdog timer forced the reset.
•PCI_RESET. The node restarted.
•Last boot displays the time the node last started the OS.
•Last cluster join displays the time the node last joined the cluster.
showeeprom 379
•Last panic displays the last time another node in the cluster requested this node to take
a panic.
•Error ignore code is for engineering use only.
•SMI context is for engineering use only.
•Last HBA mode contains PCI Fibre port settings forcing certain ports to start up in initiator
mode and certain ports to start up in target mode.
•BIOS state is for engineering use only.
•TPD state is for engineering use only.
NOTES
None.
380 Show Commands
showeventlog
DESCRIPTION
The showeventlog command displays the current system event log.
SYNTAX
showeventlog [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–min <number>
Specifies that only events occurring after the specified number of minutes are shown. The <number>
is an integer from 1 through 2147483647.
–more
Specifies that you can page through several events at a time.
–oneline
Specifies that each event is formatted on one line.
–d
Specifies that detailed information is displayed.
–startt <time>
Specifies that only events after a specified time are to be shown. The time argument can be
specified as either <timespec>,<datespec>, or both.
NOTE: If you would like to specify both a <timespec> and <datespec>, you must place
quotation marks around them; for example, -startt "2012-10-29 00:00".
<timespec>
Specified as the hour (hh), as interpreted on a 24 hour clock, where minutes (mm) and seconds
(ss) can be optionally specified. Acceptable formats are hh:mm:ss or hhmm.
<datespec>
Specified as the month (mm or month_name) and day (dd), where the year (yy) can be optionally
specified. Acceptable formats are mm/dd/yy,month_name dd,dd month_name yy, or
yy–mm–dd. If the syntax yy–mm–dd is used, the year must be specified.
–endt <time>
Specifies that only events before a specified time are to be shown. The time argument can be
specified as either <timespec>,<datespec>, or both.
NOTE: If you would like to specify both a <timespec> and <datespec>, you must place
quotation marks around them; for example, -startt "2012-10-29 00:00".
<timespec>
Specified as the hour (hh), as interpreted on a 24 hour clock, where minutes (mm) and seconds
(ss) can be optionally specified. Acceptable formats are hh:mm:ss or hhmm.
<datespec>
showeventlog 381
Specified as the month (mm or month_name) and day (dd), where the year (yy) can be optionally
specified. Acceptable formats are mm/dd/yy,month_name dd,dd month_name yy, or
yy–mm–dd. If the syntax yy–mm–dd is used, the year must be specified.
NOTE: The pattern argument in the following options is a regular expression pattern that is used
to match against the events each option produces. For each option, the pattern argument can be
specified multiple times. For example: showeventlog –type Disk.* –type <Tpdtcl client> –sev Major
displays all events of severity Major and with a type that matches either the regular expression
Disk.* or <Tpdtcl client> .
–sev <pattern>
Specifies that only events with severities that match the specified pattern(s) are displayed.
–nsev <pattern>
Specifies that only events with severities that do not match the specified pattern(s) are displayed.
–class <pattern>
Specifies that only events with classes that match the specified pattern(s) are displayed.
–nclass <pattern>
Specifies that only events with classes that do not match the specified pattern(s) are displayed.
–node <pattern>
Specifies that only events from nodes that match the specified pattern(s) are displayed.
–nnode <pattern>
Specifies that only events from nodes that do not match the specified pattern(s) are displayed.
–type <pattern>
Specifies that only events with types that match the specified pattern(s) are displayed.
–ntype <pattern>
Specifies that only events with types that do not match the specified pattern(s) are displayed.
–msg <pattern>
Specifies that only events, whose messages match the specified patttern(s), are displayed.
–nmsg <pattern>
Specifies that only events, whose messages do not match the specified pattern(s), are displayed.
–comp <pattern>
Specifies that only events, whose components match the specified pattern(s), are displayed.
–ncomp <pattern>
Specifies that only events, whose components do not match the specified pattern(s), are displayed.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
The HP 3PAR OS stores 30 MB of event logs in segments of 3 MB each. When one 3 MB segment
is filled, events are written to the next segment. When all ten segments are filled, they are overwritten
beginning with the oldest segment.
382 Show Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the system events occurred during the last 20 minutes:
cli% showeventlog -min 20
Mon Sep 29 09:48:07 2003 PST
Node: 0, Seq: 51, Class: Status change, Severity: Informational, Type: Node booted
Node 0 has booted
Mon Sep 29 09:48:13 2003 PST
Node: 1, Seq: 50, Class: Status change, Severity: Informational, Type: Node booted
Node 1 has booted
Mon Sep 29 09:48:53 2003 PST
Node: 0, Seq: 334, Class: Status change, Severity: Informational, Type: Cage loop
status
Cage 0 is connected to the system on both ports. Autofixing previous alerts.
Mon Sep 29 09:48:53 2003 PST
Node: 0, Seq: 337, Class: Status change, Severity: Informational, Type: Cage loop
status
Cage 1 is connected to the system on both ports. Autofixing previous alerts.
Mon Sep 29 09:48:54 2003 PST
Node: 0, Seq: 419, Class: Status change, Severity: Informational, Type: Notification
VV 0 has started
Mon Sep 29 09:48:54 2003 PST
Node: 0, Seq: 421, Class: Status change, Severity: Informational, Type: Notification
VV 1 has started
The following example displays the system eventlog using the –oneline option:
cli% showeventlog -min 20 –oneline
Time TZn Node Seq Class Severity Type
Message
Fri Sep 5 19:42:04 2003 PST 0 1154 Status change Minor Process has
died Process /opt/tpd/bin/tpdtcl /opt/tpd/bin/tpdtcl.tcl has died on node 0
Fri Sep 5 19:42:04 2003 PST 0 1155 Status change Informational Change in alert
state Alert 122 changed from state Resolved by System to New
Fri Sep 5 19:42:09 2003 PST 0 1157 Status change Informational Change in alert
state Alert 122 changed from state New to Resolved by System
Fri Sep 5 19:52:19 2003 PST 0 1192 Status change Minor Process has
died Process /opt/tpd/bin/tpdtcl /opt/tpd/bin/tpdtcl.tcl has died on node 0
Fri Sep 5 19:52:19 2003 PST 0 1193 Status change Informational Change in alert
state Alert 122 changed from state Resolved by System to New
The following example displays CRC errors in the last 10 minutes using the –msg option:
cli% showeventlog -debug -min 10 –msg CRC
The following example displays Remote Copy messages in the last 5 minutes using the –comp
option:
cli% showeventlog -debug -min 5 –comp rmm
NOTES
The HP 3PAR OS stores 30 MB of event logs in segments of 3 MB each. When one 3 MB segment
is filled, events are written to the next segment. When all ten segments are filled, they are overwritten
beginning with the oldest segment.
showeventlog 383
showfirmwaredb
DESCRIPTION
The showfirmwaredb command displays the current database of firmware levels for possible
upgrade. If issued without any options, the firmware for all vendors is displayed.
SYNTAX
showfirmwaredb [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–n <vendor_name>
Specifies that the firmware vendor from the SCSI database file is displayed.
–l
Reloads the SCSI database file into the system.
–all
Specifies current and past firmware entries are displayed. If not specified, only current entries are
displayed.
–sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting <dir>
can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same
information in them as earlier columns are sorted by values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the current database of firmware levels and prints firmware data:
cli% showfirmwaredb
Vendor Prod_rev Dev_Id Fw_status Cage_type
Firmware_File
HITACHI [C1C1] DK..DJ-18FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MDJFC1C1.BIN
HITACHI [C1C1] DK..DJ-72FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MDJFC1C1.BIN
HITACHI [JLAK] DK..CJ-18FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MCJF_LAK.BIN
384 Show Commands
HITACHI [JLAK] DK..CJ-36FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MCJF_LAK.BIN
HITACHI [JLAK] DK..CJ-72FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MCJF_LAK.BIN
HITACHI [GLAK] DK..CJ-18FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MCJF_LAK.BIN
HITACHI [GLAK] DK..CJ-36FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MCJF_LAK.BIN
HITACHI [GLAK] DK..CJ-72FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MCJF_LAK.BIN
HITACHI [C0C0] DK..EJ-36FC Current DC4.DC2
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MEJFC0C0.BIN
HITACHI [C0C0] DK..EJ-72FC Current DC4.DC2
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MEJFC0C0.BIN
HITACHI [C0C0] DK..EJ-14FC Current DC4.DC2
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MEJFC0C0.BIN
HITACHI [A6A6] HUS157336ELF200 Current ALL
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MEKFA6A6.BIN
HITACHI [A6A6] HUS157373ELF200 Current ALL
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MEKFA6A6.BIN
HITACHI [FA16] HUS103014FLF210 Current ALL
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MFJFFA16.BIN
HITACHI [FA16] HUS103030FLF210 Current ALL
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/MFJFFA16.BIN
HITACHI [F7A7] DK..BJ-xxFC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/3BJF_7A7.BIN
SEAGATE [0004] ST39103FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/0004.lod
SEAGATE [0004] ST318203FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/0004.lod
SEAGATE [0005] ST318304FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/0005.lod
SEAGATE [0005] ST336704FC Current DC4
/opt/tpd/fw/drive/0005.lod
...
Source file: /var/opt/tpd/scsi_db.cfg
NOTES
The firmware information displayed by the showfirmwaredb command is used when issuing the
upgradecage and upgradepd commands. See “upgradecage” (page 662) and “upgradepd”
(page 664) for more information.
showfirmwaredb 385
showhost
DESCRIPTION
The showhost command displays information about defined hosts and host paths in the system.
SYNTAX
showhost [options <arg>] [<host_name>...|<pattern>...|<host_set>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–d
Shows a detailed listing of the host and path information. This option can only be used with -agent
and -domain options.
-verbose
Shows a verbose listing of all host information.
-chap
Shows the CHAP authentication information.
-desc
Shows the host descriptor information.
-agent
Shows information provided by host agent.
-pathsum
Shows summary information about hosts and paths. This option cannot be used with the -d option.
-persona
Shows the host persona settings in effect. This option cannot be used with the -d option.
-listpersona
Lists the defined host personas. This option cannot be used with the -d option. Different host
personas support different host operating systems and have different capabilities. Host personas
may have the following additional capabilities:
•UARepLun. Sends a unit attention when the LUN list changes due to adding or removing
VLUNs.
•ALUA. Enables the Asymmetric Logical Unit Access (ALUA) command and asymmetric state
change unit attention when path counts change due to adding or removing ports in the host's
definition.
•VolSetAddr. Enables HPUX Volume Set Addressing (VSA).
•SoftInq. Enables inquiry data formats for hosts such as Egenera and NetApp.
•NACA. Enables Normal Auto Contingent Allegiance (NACA) bit for AIX.
•SESLun. Enables SCSI Enclosure Services (SES) LUN for host agent support.
-noname
Shows only host paths (WWNs and iSCSI names) that are not assigned to any host. This option
cannot be used with the -d option.
-domain <domainname_or_pattern,...>|<domain_set>
386 Show Commands
Shows only hosts that are in domains or domain sets that match one or more of the specifier
<domain_name_or_pattern> or set:<domain_set> arguments. The set name
<domain_set> must start with set:. This option does not allow listing objects within a domain
of which the user is not a member.
SPECIFIERS
<host_name>...
Name of the host up to 31 characters in length. This specifier can be repeated to set properties
for multiple hosts.
<pattern>...
Specifies that information is shown for all hosts matching the specified glob-style pattern. This
specifier can be repeated to set properties for multiple hosts using different patterns.
set:<host_set>...
Specifies that information about all the hosts that are members of set <host_set> should be
displayed. The set name <host_set> must start with set:. Acts as if all members were individually
specified as parameters to the comment. May be repeated to specify multiple host sets.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
NOTE: For the following two examples, the Domain column appears only if the -listdom global
option or TPDLISTDOM environment variable was set prior to starting the CLI.
The following example displays detailed host and path information:
cli% showhost -d
Id Name Persona -----WWN/iSCSI_Name----- Port IP_addr
0 pe750-07-iscsi Generic 210000E08B023F71 1:3:1 0.0.0.0
1 adt Generic 210000E08B056C21 0:2:1 0.0.0.0
1 adt Generic 210100E08B256C21 1:2:1 0.0.0.0
-- -- Generic 210000E08B023C71 1:5:1 0.0.0.0
-- -- Generic 210000E08B023F77 0:2:2 0.0.0.0
The following example displays host descriptor properties:
cli% showhost –desc
---------- Host queasy10 ----------
Name : queasy10
Domain : -
Id : 0
Location : Rack 35, Position 8
IP Address : --
OS : --
Model : --
Contact : --
Comment : --
The following example displays host CHAP properties:
cli% showhost –chap
Id Name -Initiator_CHAP_Name- -Target_CHAP_Name-
showhost 387
0 queasy10 queasy10 s019
1 foo -- --
The following example displays all host information:
cli% showhost –verbose
Id Name Persona -----WWN/iSCSI_Name----- Port IP_addr
0 queasy10 Generic 210000E08B027B60 0:0:1 n/a
1 foo Generic myiscsipath.3pardata.com --- 0.0.0.0
Id Name -Initiator_CHAP_Name- -Target_CHAP_Name-
0 queasy10 queasy10 s019
1 foo -- --
---------- Host queasy10 ----------
Name : queasy10
Domain : --
Id : 0
Location : Rack 35, Position 8
IP Address : --
OS : --
Model : --
Contact : --
Comment : --
Id Name Persona_Id Persona_Name Persona_Caps
0 queasy10 0 Generic SESLun
1 foo 0 Generic SESLun
NOTES
•If host names or patterns are specified, then hosts with names that match any of the patterns
are listed. Otherwise all hosts are listed. Patterns are glob-style (shell-style) patterns. Refer to
“Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further information.
•Host descriptor information is available only for hosts that have been assigned a name through
the createhost command.
•ADomain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to
1. The listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option or if
the CLI was started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h and
setclienv -h for details of the environment variables command.
388 Show Commands
showhostset
DESCRIPTION
The showhostset command lists the host sets defined on the HP 3PAR storage system and their
members.
SYNTAX
showhostset [options] [<setname_or_pattern>...]
showhostset -host [options] [<hostname_or_pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-d
Show a more detailed listing of each set.
-host
Show host sets that contain the supplied hostnames or patterns.
SPECIFIERS
<setname_or_pattern>...
An optional list of setnames or patterns. If no <setname> or <pattern> is specified all sets are
displayed, otherwise only sets with names matching one or more of the setnames or patterns are
displayed. The patterns are glob-style patterns. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further
information.
<hostname_or_pattern>...
Specifies that the sets containing hosts with the specified names or matching the glob-style patterns
should be displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
Show all host sets defined to the system:
cli% showhostset
Id Name Members
22 myset -
18 seta -
3 sunv40z-09 sunv40z-09-0
sunv40z-09-1
sunv40z-09-2
sunv40z-09-3
Show the details of myset only:
cli% showhostset -d myset
Id Name Members Comment
22 myset - This is an empty set
showhostset 389
Show the host sets containing host sun40z-09-0:
cli% showhostset -host sun40z-09-0
Id Name Members
3 sunv40z-09 sunv40z-09-0
sunv40z-09-1
sunv40z-09-2
sunv40z-09-3
NOTES
A Domain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to 1. The
listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option, or if the CLI was
started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Run cli -h and setclienv -h for
details of the environment variables.
390 Show Commands
showinventory
DESCRIPTION
Shows information about all the hardware components in the system.
SYNTAX
showinventory [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-svc
Displays inventory information with HP serial number, spare part number, and so on. This option
must be used with the -i option and it is supported only on HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000 Storage
systems.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
None.
NOTES
The inventory is divided into sections and inventory for each of these sections can be shown
separately with the following commands:
CommandSection
shownode -iNode
showbattery -iBattery
showport -iPort
showcage -iCage
showpd -iDisk
showinventory 391
showiscsisession
DESCRIPTION
The showiscsisession command shows the iSCSI sessions.
SYNTAX
showiscsisession [option <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting <dir>
can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:), and rows that have the same earlier
columns will be sorted by the values in the later columns.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the iSCSI session information:
cli% showiscsisession
N:S:P ---IPAddr---- TPGT TSIH Conns ------------iSCSI_Name------------
---------StartTime----------
1:3:1 192.168.2.181 131 13 1 iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:pe750-07 Tue Nov 29
12:43:25 PST 2005
In the example above:
•N:S:P. The port location in Node:Slot:Port format, where Slot is the PCI slot number in the
node and Port is the port number in the PCI card.
•IPAddr. The IP address of the Ethernet port.
•TPGT. The Target Portal Group Tag.
•TSIH. The Target Session Identifying Handle.
•Conns. The number of connections for the session.
392 Show Commands
•iSCSI_Name. The iSCSI name of the host.
•StartTime. The time the session was started.
NOTES
None.
showiscsisession 393
showld
DESCRIPTION
The showld command displays configuration information about the system’s Logical Disks (LDs).
SYNTAX
showld [options <arg>] [<LD_name>|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–cpg <CPG_name|pattern>...
Requests that only logical disks in Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs) that match the specified
CPG names or patterns be displayed. Multiple CPG names or patterns can be repeated using a
comma-separated list (for example -cpg <CPG_name>,<CPG_name>...).
–vv <VV_name|pattern>...
Requests that only logical disks mapped to virtual volumes that match any of the specified names
or patterns be displayed. Multiple volume names or patterns can be repeated using a
comma-separated list (for example -vv <VV_name>,<VV_name>...).
-domain <domainname|pattern>...
Only shows logical disks that are in domains with names that match any of the names or specified
patterns. Multiple domain names or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated list (for
example -vv <domainname_name>,<domainname_name>...).
NOTE: When working with domains, you can use the -listdom option to view the Domain column
in the command output or for a more global solution, set the TPDLISTDOM environment variable.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. You must specify a column number. In addition, you can specify the
direction of sorting <dir> as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same
information in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
–d
Requests that more detailed layout information is displayed.
–p
Requests that policy information about the logical disk is displayed.
-state
Requests that the detailed information is displayed. This is the same as the -s option.
-s
Requests that the detailed state information is displayed.
This option is deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
394 Show Commands
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>...
Requests that information for a specified logical disk is displayed. This specifier can be repeated
to display configuration information about multiple logical disks. If not specified, configuration
information for all logical disks in the system is displayed.
<pattern>...
Specifies that the logical disk matching the specified glob-style pattern is displayed. This specifier
can be repeated to display configuration information about multiple logical disks. If not specified,
configuration information for all logical disks in the system is displayed. See “Glob-Style Pattern”
(page 12) for more information.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information for all LDs in a two node system:
cli% showld
Id Name RAID -Detailed_State- Own SizeMB UsedMB Use Lgct LgId
WThru MapV
0 log0.0 1 normal 0/- 20480 0 log 0 ---
Y N
1 log1.0 1 normal 1/- 20480 0 log 0 ---
Y N
2 pdsld0.0 1 normal 0/1 8192 0 P,F 0 ---
Y N
3 admin.usr.0 1 normal 0/1 5120 5120 V 0 ---
N Y
4 admin.usr.1 1 normal 1/0 5120 5120 V 0 ---
N Y
5 VV111.usr.0 0 normal 0/1 256 256 V 0 ---
N Y
6 VV111.usr.1 0 normal 1/0 256 256 V 0 ---
N Y
The following example displays information for all LDs in a four node system:
cli% showld
Id Name RAID State Own SizeMB UsedMB Use Lgct LgId WThru MapV
0 log0.0 1 normal 0/-/-/- 20480 0 log 0 --- Y N
1 log1.0 1 normal 1/-/-/- 20480 0 log 0 --- Y N
2 pdsld0.0 1 normal 0/1/2/3 4096 0 P,F 0 --- Y N
3 admin.usr.0 1 normal 0/1/3/2 3584 3584 V 0 --- N Y
4 admin.usr.1 1 normal 0/1/2/3 1536 1536 V 0 --- N Y
5 admin.usr.2 1 normal 1/0/3/2 5120 5120 V 0 --- N Y
6 100_tune.usr.0 1 normal 0/1/2/3 512 512 V 0 --- N Y
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The ID of the logical disk.
•Name. The name of the logical disk.
•(Not shown) Domain. The domain to which the logical disks belongs. If the domain does not
exist, -is displayed.
showld 395
•RAID. The RAID type (0is for RAID-0, 1is for RAID-1, 5is for RAID-5, and 6is for RAID-6).
•State. The current status of the logical disk.
normal. The logical disk has started and is available for use.◦
◦orphan. Both the primary owner and backup owner nodes are down, and the logical
disk’s data is not available.
◦preserved. Some disks used by the logical disk are missing. Data belonging to the
logical disk is saved on the preserved logical disk.
◦stopped. The logical disk is stopped, and its data is not available.
◦stopping. The logical disk is being stopped; normally flushes any in-flight data to disk.
◦removing. The logical disk is being deleted.
The following State values indicate that an uncontrolled shutdown has occurred and the
logical disk was not properly closed before the shutdown.
◦auto_check. The logical disk is checked for validity.
◦checking. The logical disk is checked for validity.
◦need_check. The logical disk has been checked, and an inconsistency has been found.
◦need_pd. One of the physical disks containing chunklets that make up the logical disk
is not yet in the valid state.
•Own. The first number is the logical disk owner node, and the second number is the logical
disk backup node.
•SizeMB. The total size of the logical disk, in MB.
•UsedMB. The portion of the logical disk that is being used by virtual volumes, in MB.
•Use. The function of the logical disk.
V. The logical disk is used for a virtual volume.◦
◦P,F. The first logical disk is used for preserved data.
◦P. The logical disk is used for preserved data.
◦C,SA. The logical disk is used for the snapshot administration space for a common
provisioning group (CPG)
◦C,SD. The logical disk is used for the snapshot data space for a CPG.
◦log. The logical disk is used as a logging logical disk.
•Lgct. The number of chunklets that are in logging mode in the logical disk.
•LgId. The ID of the logging disk that is being used for logging by the logical disk.
•WThru. Indicates whether the logical disk is in write-through mode.
•MapV. Indicates if the logical disk is mapped to a virtual volume. Valid values are Y(yes) and
N(no).
The following example displays detailed information about the system LDs:
cli% showld -d
Id Name CPG RAID Own SizeMB RSizeMB RowSz StepKB SetSz Refcnt Avail CAvail
-----CreationTime------ -CreationPattern-
396 Show Commands
0 log0.0 --- 1 0/- 20480 40960 1 256 2 0 mag mag
2007-11-29 18:44:02 PST -p -devtype FC
1 log1.0 --- 1 1/- 20480 40960 1 256 2 0 mag mag
2007-11-29 18:44:02 PST -p -devtype FC
2 pdsld0.0 --- 1 0/1 4096 8192 2 256 2 0 mag mag
2007-11-29 18:44:03 PST -p -devtype FC
3 admin.usr.0 --- 1 0/1 5120 10240 2 256 2 0 mag mag
2007-11-29 18:44:12 PST -p -devtype FC
4 admin.usr.1 --- 1 1/0 5120 10240 2 256 2 0 mag mag
2007-11-29 18:44:12 PST -p -devtype FC
5 Collie.usr.0 --- 0 1/0 256 256 1 256 1 0 ch ch
2008-01-15 16:51:23 PST -p -devtype FC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 55552 110848
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The ID of the logical disk.
•Name. The name of the logical disk.
•Domain. The domain to which the logical disks belongs. If the domain does not exist, -is
displayed.
•CPG. Lists the CPG to which the logical disk belongs. If the logical disk does not belong, ---
is displayed.
•RAID. The RAID type (0is for RAID-0, 1is for RAID-1, 5is for RAID-5, and 6is for RAID-6).
•Own. The first number is the logical disk owner node, and the second number is the logical
disk backup node.
•SizeMB. The total size of the logical disk, in MB.
•RSizeMB. The logical disk’s raw size, in MB.
•RowSz. The row size for the logical disk.
•StepKB. The step size for the logical disk, in KB (1024 bytes). The number of contiguous
bytes that the system accesses before moving to the next chunklet.
•SetSz. The set size for the logical disk.
•Refcnt. Indicates how many active relocation operations are occurring for the logical disk
(reference count).
•Avail. Indicates availability characteristics associated with a created LD. Availability
determines from where space chunklets can be allocated when one of the LD's chunklets fails.
Availability characteristics are as follows:
◦disk. Chunklets in the same RAID set may reside on the same disk.
◦mag. Chunklets from another disk within the same drive magazine can be used as a
replacement.
◦cage. Chunklets in the same RAID set belong to disks on different cages.
◦port. Chunklets in the same RAID set belong to disks on different port pairs.
◦ch. No redundancy is provided for the logical disk when a chunklet fails. This is only
valid for RAID-0 LDs.
•CAvail. Indicates the current, or actual, availability: disk,mag,port, or cage.
•Creation Time. Indicates when the logical disk was created.
showld 397
The following example displays policy information about all system LDs:
cli% showld -p
Id Name Keep_Preserved Growth_Blocked Dev_Type RPM
0 log0.0 0 0 FC 10
1 log1.0 0 0 FC 10
2 pdsld0.0 0 0 FC 10
3 pdsld0.1 0 0 FC 10
4 pdsld0.2 0 0 FC 10
5 admin.usr.0 1 0 FC 10
6 admin.usr.1 1 0 FC 10
7 admin.usr.2 1 0 FC 10
8 admin.usr.3 1 0 FC 10
9 tp-0-sa-0.0 1 0 FC 10
10 tp-0-sa-0.1 1 0 FC 10
11 tp-0-sa-0.2 1 0 FC 10
14 tp-0-sa-0.4 1 0 FC 10
15 v1.0.usr.0 1 0 FC 10
16 v1.1.usr.0 1 0 FC 10
17 tp-0-sd-0.1 1 1 FC 10
18 tp-0-sd-0.0 1 0 FC 10
---------------------------------------------------------
17
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The logical disk ID.
•Name. The logical disk name.
•Keep_Preserved. Indicates if preserved data is saved for the logical disk. Valid values are
1(saved) and 0(not saved).
•Growth_Blocked. Indicates that the LD is blocked from growing. This is used when tuning
TPVV and snap space to the same CPG to stop the LD increasing in size during the tune.
•Dev_Type.Device type for the physical disk (FC for Fibre Channel or NL for nearline or SSD
for solid state drive). If no device type is specified, the default is Fibre Channel drives. If a
system has only nearline drives, -p -devtype NL must be specified when creating the
volumes.
•RPM. Drive relative performance metric. The number does not represent a rotational speed for
the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD
drives, the number is to be treated as a relative performance benchmark that takes into account
I/O's per second, bandwidth and access time.
The following example displays detailed states of each LD:
cli% showld -state
Id Name -State- -Detailed_State-
0 log0.0 normal normal
1 pdsld0.0 normal normal
2 pdsld0.1 normal normal
3 pdsld0.2 normal normal
4 admin.usr.0 normal normal
5 vvfromcpg2.usr.0 normal normal
6 vvfromcpg2.usr.1 normal normal
7 Temple.usr.0 normal normal
...
398 Show Commands
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The logical disk ID.
•Name. The logical disk name.
•State. The current state of the LD that is one of the following:
normal. The LD is operating normally.◦
◦failed. The LD is operating abnormally.
◦degraded. The LD is in degraded state.
•Detailed_State. The detailed state of the LD that is one of the following:
nodes_unavail. The nodes are down.◦
◦not_stated. The LD has stopped and needs to be manually started (see startld
command).
◦unavail. The LD state not available.
◦preserved. One or more sets of the LD are not recoverable because some chunklets
are missing. The remaining data from the LD has been preserved.
◦need_check. Consistency checking needs to be manually started (see checkld
command).
◦check_failed. The LD check has failed.
◦need_pd. The LD needs a PD before it can be started.
◦check_ongoing. The LD is currently being checked for consistency.
◦degraded_avail. The availability of the LD is degraded.
◦degraded_perf. The performance of the LD is degraded.
◦unknown. The LD state is unknown.
NOTES
•For this command: KB = 1024 bytes and MB = 1048576 bytes.
•ADomain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to
1. The listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option or if
the CLI was started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h and
setclienv -h for details of the environment variables.
showld 399
showldch
DESCRIPTION
The showldch command displays configuration information about the chunklet mapping for one
Logical Disk (LD).
SYNTAX
showldch [options <arg>] <LD_name>
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-degraded
Show only the chunklets in sets that cause the LD availability to be degraded. For example, if the
LD normally has cage level availability, but one set has two chunklets in the same cage, then the
chunklets in that set are shown. This option cannot be specified with option -lformat or -linfo.
-lformat <form>
Shows the LD’s row and set layout on the Physical Disk (PD), where the line format <form> is one
of:
row
One line per LD row.
set
One line per LD set.
-linfo <info>[,<info>...]
Specifies the information shown for each LD chunklet, where <info> can be one of:
•pdpos - Shows the PD position (default).
•pdid - Shows the PD ID.
•pdch - Shows the PD chunklet.
If multiple <info> fields are specified, each corresponding field will be shown separated by a
dash (-).
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>
Specifies the LD name.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about chunklets for LD r1.usr.0:
cli% showldch r1.usr.0
Ldch Row Set PdPos Pdid Pdch State Usage Media Sp From To
0 0 0 1:3:2 30 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
1 0 0 1:3:3 31 3 normal ld valid N 10:0 ---
2 0 1 2:3:1 45 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
400 Show Commands
3 0 1 1:3:0 28 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
4 0 2 0:1:2 6 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
5 0 2 2:1:3 39 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
6 0 3 0:2:0 8 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
7 0 3 1:2:2 26 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
8 0 4 2:3:3 47 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
9 0 4 1:1:2 22 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
10 0 5 2:2:3 43 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
11 0 5 0:3:0 12 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
12 0 6 0:0:0 0 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
13 0 6 1:0:2 18 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
14 0 7 2:0:1 33 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
15 0 7 2:0:2 34 5 normal ld valid N 16:1 ---
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Ldch. The chunklet on the logical disk.
•Row. The row that contains the chunklet.
•Set. The set that contains the chunklet.
•PdPos. The position of the disk in the drive magazine.
•Pdid. The ID of the physical disk that contains the chunklet.
•Pdch. The physical disk ID for the chunklet.
•State. The current status of the chunklet.
normal. The chunklet is available for use.◦
◦normal,smag. A servicemag operation is being performed on the disks.
◦stale. The chunklet is not available for use because of a medium failure or a connectivity
failure.
◦logging. Writes to the chunklet are being logged to a separate logging logical disk.
◦playback. Data is played back from the logging logical disks.
◦passthru. The chunklet does not process physical disk errors.
◦preserved. Any I/O to the chunklet is written to the preserved logical disks.
◦preserved playback. Data is played back from the preserved logical disks.
•Usage. The current use of the chunklet.
available. The chunklet is not in use.◦
◦ld. The chunklet is in use by a logical disk.
◦relsrc. The chunklet is the source of a logical disk relocation operation.
◦reltgt. The chunklet is the target of a logical disk relocation operation.
◦sync. The chunklet is both the source and the target of a logical disk relocation operation
(synchronizing the chunklet).
◦cmprel. The system is completing the logical disk relocation operation.
◦abtrel. The system is canceling the logical disk relocation operation.
showldch 401
•Media. The current status of the physical disk medium for the chunklet.
valid. The chunklet is available for use.◦
◦failed. The medium has encountered errors and is not available for use.
•Sp. The spare status of the chunklet; Yindicates the chunklet is used for spare, Nindicates the
chunklet is not used as spare.
•From. The initial location of the chunklet before relocation.
•To. The destination location of the chunklet during relocation
The following example displays information about degraded chunklets for LD r1.usr.0.
cli% showldch -degraded r1.usr.0
Ldch Row Set PdPos Pdid Pdch State Usage Media Sp From To
0 0 0 1:3:2 30 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
1 0 0 1:3:3 31 3 normal ld valid N 10:0 ---
14 0 7 2:0:1 33 0 normal ld valid N --- ---
15 0 7 2:0:2 34 5 normal ld valid N 16:1 ---
cli% showldch -degraded r1.usr.1
No degraded sets in LD r1.usr.1
The following example displays row and set layout for chunklets for LD test.usr.0.
cli% showldch -lformat row test.usr.0
---------Set0---------- ---------Set1----------
row Ch0 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch0 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3
0 2:3:1 1:2:2 0:3:2 1:3:0 0:0:0 2:0:1 1:2:0 0:1:0
1 2:3:3 1:0:2 0:0:2 2:0:3 0:2:2 1:1:0 2:1:1 1:3:0
2 0:3:0 2:2:1 1:2:2 2:1:3 0:1:2 1:3:2 2:3:1 0:2:2
3 0:2:0 1:2:0 2:1:3 1:0:0 2:2:3 0:0:0 1:1:2 0:1:0
4 2:3:3 1:0:2 0:3:2 2:0:1 0:0:2 1:3:0 2:1:1 1:1:2
The following example displays row and set layout including pdid and pdch for chunklets for LD
test.usr.0.
cli% showldch -lformat row -linfo pdid,pdch test.usr.0
-------Set0-------- -------Set1--------
row Ch0 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch0 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3
0 45-7 26-6 14-7 28-6 0-7 33-7 24-6 4-6
1 47-7 18-7 2-6 35-6 10-7 20-7 37-6 28-8
2 12-6 41-6 26-8 39-7 6-8 30-8 45-9 10-9
3 8-7 24-8 39-9 16-8 43-8 0-9 22-7 4-8
4 47-9 18-9 14-9 33-9 2-8 28-9 37-8 22-9
The following example displays row and set layout including pdid and pdpos for chunklets for LD
test.usr.0.
cli% showldch -lformat set -linfo pdid,pdpos test.usr.0
row set Ch0 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3
0 0 45-2:3:1 26-1:2:2 14-0:3:2 28-1:3:0
0 1 0-0:0:0 33-2:0:1 24-1:2:0 4-0:1:0
1 0 47-2:3:3 18-1:0:2 2-0:0:2 35-2:0:3
1 1 10-0:2:2 20-1:1:0 37-2:1:1 28-1:3:0
2 0 12-0:3:0 41-2:2:1 26-1:2:2 39-2:1:3
2 1 6-0:1:2 30-1:3:2 45-2:3:1 10-0:2:2
3 0 8-0:2:0 24-1:2:0 39-2:1:3 16-1:0:0
3 1 43-2:2:3 0-0:0:0 22-1:1:2 4-0:1:0
402 Show Commands
4 0 47-2:3:3 18-1:0:2 14-0:3:2 33-2:0:1
4 1 2-0:0:2 28-1:3:0 37-2:1:1 22-1:1:2
NOTES
None.
showldch 403
showldmap
DESCRIPTION
The showldmap command displays the mapping from a Logical Disk (LD) to Virtual Volumes (VVs).
SYNTAX
showldmap <LD_name>
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>
Specifies the LD name.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the region of LD v0.usr.0 that is used for a VV:
cli% showldmap v0.usr.0
Area Start(MB) Length(MB) VVId VVName VVSp VVOff(MB)
0 0 512 0 v0 usr 0
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Area. The ID of the region.
•Start(MB). The offset from the beginning of the logical disk, in MB.
•Length(MB). The length, or size, of the region, in MB.
•VVId. The ID of the virtual volume that contains the region.
•VVName. The name of the virtual volume that contains the region.
•VVSp. The type of the space-user (usr), snapshot data (snp), or snapshot administration
(adm)-for which the region is being used.
•VVOff(MB). The offset from the beginning of the space that contains the region.
NOTES
None.
404 Show Commands
showlicense
DESCRIPTION
The showlicense command displays the currently installed license key and current license
information.
SYNTAX
showlicense
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–raw
Specifies that the license key originally entered (the raw license) be displayed. The license key is
displayed in a manner that is acceptable input for the setlicense command.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the currently installed license information:
cli% showlicense
License key was generated on Mon Sep 14 18:30:24 2009
License features currently enabled:
Dynamic Optimization
InForm Suite
Recovery Manager for Exchange
Recovery Manager for Oracle
System Reporter
Remote Copy
System Tuner
Thin Provisioning (1024G)
VSS Provider for Microsoft Windows
License features enabled on a trial basis:
Virtual Copy Expires on September 14, 2012
The following example displays the original license key entered on the system:
cli% showlicense –raw
60R3–0C1G–60R3–2C1G–60R3–0C9G–70R3–0C1G
60RK–0C0A–FSXZ–8YZ4–Z884–84DW–7CD6–JLKB
7GZA–RRZH–L01W–00AW–FFLR–T848–VWQA–K3F1
GXCJ–G8MG–0XW7–3VGL–EF28–MBDM–03V4–LG2D
YWQ5–KW9G–99GB–3FRL–4FJN–3AH2–T287–SNGD
XN9F–EVGV–25Z9–D2VK–5EXD–KXJ4–JMQE–6JSL
1XA0–9ZTA–H5KR–VG8Y–JBV8–BR72–A1E1–3GS3
ZSG4–32VZ–C2EQ–C69H–B0FR–0XG3–4NAF–G3VA
showlicense 405
SV47–NH2R–BL1L–TJKR–31F2–V9QX–0WM0–AWTH
LRB7–8XQD–BLHD–LF68–A4BW–K4QG–ZS7B–Q41X
35Y1–6CZC–KBJ5–6VQE–EC2G–Q6EG–SJV0–KMHC
SAWG–YJ4V–WRE5–3GZA–DGW0–ZYVE–5SVT–8TJX
QR9W–R92D–SSTY–RVWY–1Y2B–YH8D–KRN5–ZZ7Y...
NOTES
Without options, a description of which features are enabled is displayed. When the license was
generated and any expiration dates are also shown. If the -raw option is specified, the license
key prints in a manner that is acceptable input for the setlicense command.
406 Show Commands
shownet
DESCRIPTION
The shownet command displays the configuration and status of the administration network
interfaces, including the configured gateway and Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.
SYNTAX
shownet [option]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTION
–d
Displays detailed information.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the status of the system administration network interfaces:
cli% shownet -d
IP Address: 192.168.5.191 Netmask 255.255.252.0
Assigned to nodes: 01
Connected through node 0
Status: Active
Admin interface on node 0
MAC Address: 00:02:AC:43:00:34
RX Packets: 534389 TX Packets: 121669
RX Bytes: 67828134 TX Bytes: 60638375
RX Errors: 0 TX Errors: 0
RX Dropped: 0 TX Dropped: 0
RX FIFO Errors: 0 TX FIFO Errors: 0
RX Frame Errors: 0 TX Collisions: 0
RX Multicast: 0 TX Carrier Errors: 0
RX Compressed: 0 TX Compressed: 0
Remote copy interface in slot 1 on node 0
MAC Address: 00:04:23:C2:1B:72
RX Packets: 0 TX Packets: 0
RX Bytes: 0 TX Bytes: 0
RX Errors: 0 TX Errors: 0
RX Dropped: 0 TX Dropped: 0
RX FIFO Errors: 0 TX FIFO Errors: 0
RX Frame Errors: 0 TX Collisions: 0
RX Multicast: 0 TX Carrier Errors: 0
RX Compressed: 0 TX Compressed: 0
Remote copy interface in slot 1 on node 0
MAC Address: 00:04:23:C2:1B:73
RX Packets: 0 TX Packets: 0
shownet 407
RX Bytes: 0 TX Bytes: 0
RX Errors: 0 TX Errors: 0
RX Dropped: 0 TX Dropped: 0
RX FIFO Errors: 0 TX FIFO Errors: 0
RX Frame Errors: 0 TX Collisions: 0
RX Multicast: 0 TX Carrier Errors: 0
RX Compressed: 0 TX Compressed: 0
Admin interface on node 1
MAC Address: 00:02:AC:43:00:33
RX Packets: 477147 TX Packets: 66399
RX Bytes: 59353196 TX Bytes: 33589695
RX Errors: 0 TX Errors: 0
RX Dropped: 0 TX Dropped: 0
RX FIFO Errors: 0 TX FIFO Errors: 0
RX Frame Errors: 0 TX Collisions: 0
RX Multicast: 0 TX Carrier Errors: 0
RX Compressed: 0 TX Compressed: 0
...
NOTES
Specifying -d includes information useful for debugging network issues.
408 Show Commands
shownode
DESCRIPTION
The shownode command displays an overview of the node-specific properties and its component
information. Various command options can be used to display the properties of PCI cards, CPUs,
physical memory, disk drives, and power supplies.
SYNTAX
shownode [option] [<node_ID>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
The following options are for node summary and inventory information:
-listcols
List the columns available to be shown with the -showcols option described below (see clihelp
-col shownode for help on each column).
By default (if none of the information selection options below are specified) the following columns
are shown:
Node Name State Master InCluster LED Control_Mem Data_Mem Available_Cache
To display columns pertaining to a specific node component use -listcols option in conjunction
with one of the following options: -pci,-cpu,-mem,-drive,-fan,-mcu.
-showcols <column>[,<column>...]
Explicitly select the columns to be shown using a comma-separated list of column names. For this
option, the full column names are shown in the header.
Run shownode -listcols to list Node component columns.
Run shownode -listcols <node_component> to list columns associated with a specific
<node_component>.
<node_component> can be one of the following options: -pci,-cpu,-mem,-drive,-fan,
-mcu.
If a specific node component option is not provided, then -showcols expects Node columns as
input.
If a column (Node or specific node component) does not match either the Node columns list or a
specific node component columns list, then the shownode -showcols <cols> request is denied.
If an invalid column is provided with -showcols, the request will be denied.
The -showcols option can also be used in conjunction with a list of node IDs.
Run clihelp -col shownode for a description of each column.
–i
Shows node inventory information in the table format.
–d
Shows node and component information in the table format.
The following options are for node component information. These options cannot be used together
with options -i and -d.
–verbose
shownode 409
Specifies detailed information in verbose format. It can be used with any of the following component
options:
-fan
Displays the node fan information.
–pci
Displays PCI card information.
–cpu
Displays CPU information.
–mem
Displays physical memory information.
-drive
Displays the disk drive information.
–ps
Displays power supply information.
-mcu
Displays MicroController Unit information.
-state
Displays the detailed state information for the node or power supply (proceed with the -ps option).
This is the same as -s.
–s
Displays the detailed state information for node or power supply (proceed with the -ps option).
This option is deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
-uptime
Shows the amount of time each node has been running since the last shutdown.
-svc
Displays inventory information with HP serial number, spare part number, and so on. This option
must be used with the -i option and it is supported only on HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000 Storage
systems.
SPECIFIERS
<node_ID>...
Displays the node information for the specified node ID(s). This specifier is not required.
Restrictions
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the operating environment status for all nodes in the system:
cli% shownode
Control Data Cache
Node --Name-- -State- Master InCluster ---LED--- Mem(MB) Mem(MB) Available(%)
0 enodec34 OK Yes Yes GreenBlnk 2048 2048 100
1 enodec33 OK No Yes GreenBlnk 2048 2048 100
410 Show Commands
In the example above:
•Node. The node ID.
•Name. The node name.
•State. The state of the node. Values are as follows:
--. Cannot determine the overall node state.◦
◦OK. The node and its components are operating normally.
◦Degraded. For T-Series and S-Series nodes, the node is degraded due to a missing,
failed, or degraded power supply. For E-series nodes, the node is degraded to due a
missing or degraded fan.
◦Failed. The node has not initialized, is offline, has mismatching kernal versions has
bad drive partitions, is rebooting, or has shutdown.
•Master. Specifies is the node is the master node.
•InCluster. Indicates if the node is in the cluster.
•LED. The node LED information. Values are as follows:
--. The node LED is unknown.◦
◦off. The node LED is off.
◦Green. The kernal is not running.
◦GreenBlink. The node is in normal state.
◦Amber. The node is degraded or failed and the kernel is not running.
◦AmberBlink. The node is degraded or failed.
•Control Mem(MB). The total memory in the node in MB.
•Data Mem(MB). The total data memory in the node in MB.
The following examples display detailed information (–doption) for the nodes including their
components in a table format. The shownode -d command can be used to display the tail
information of the nodes including their components in name and value pairs.
cli% shownode -d
-----------------------------------Physical Memory------------------------------------
Node Riser Slot SlotID -Name-- -Usage- --Type--- --Manufacturer--- -Serial- -Latency-
Size(MB)
0 n/a 0 J4200 DIMM0 Control FB-DIMM Micron Technology E20BCA01 CL5.0/5.0
2048
0 n/a 1 J4300 DIMM1 Control FB-DIMM Micron Technology E20BCA0C CL5.0/5.0
2048
0 2-slot 0 J0901 DIMM0.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF6E CL2.0/2.5
2048
0 4-slot 1 J0900 DIMM1.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF67 CL2.0/2.5
2048
0 4-slot 2 J1300 DIMM2.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF63 CL2.0/2.5
2048
1 n/a 0 J4200 DIMM0 Control FB-DIMM Micron Technology E20BC9AC CL5.0/5.0
2048
1 n/a 1 J4300 DIMM1 Control FB-DIMM Micron Technology E20BC9AE CL5.0/5.0
2048
1 2-slot 0 J0901 DIMM0.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF95 CL2.0/2.5
2048
shownode 411
1 4-slot 1 J0900 DIMM1.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF97 CL2.0/2.5
2048
1 4-slot 2 J1300 DIMM2.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF96 CL2.0/2.5
2048
----------------------------Internal Drives----------------------------
Node Drive -Manufacturer- ---Model--- -Serial- -Firmware- Size(MB) Type
0 0 Seagate ST9100821AS 5NJ09DF3 3.AAB 95396 SATA
1 0 Seagate ST9100821AS 5NJ08NA4 3.AAB 95396 SATA
These columns and values are described in detail in the following examples.
cli% shownode -mem
Node Riser Slot SlotID -Name-- -Usage- --Type--- --Manufacturer--- -Serial- -Latency-
Size(MB)
0 n/a 0 J4200 DIMM0 Control FB-DIMM Micron Technology E20BC997 CL5.0/5.0
2048
0 n/a 1 J4300 DIMM1 Control FB-DIMM Micron Technology E20BC996 CL5.0/5.0
2048
0 2-slot 0 J0901 DIMM0.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF65 CL2.0/2.5
2048
0 4-slot 1 J0900 DIMM1.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF98 CL2.0/2.5
2048
0 4-slot 2 J1300 DIMM2.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF64 CL2.0/2.5
2048
1 n/a 0 J4200 DIMM0 Control FB-DIMM Micron Technology E20BC995 CL5.0/5.0
2048
1 n/a 1 J4300 DIMM1 Control FB-DIMM Micron Technology E20BC992 CL5.0/5.0
2048
1 2-slot 0 J0901 DIMM0.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF6A CL2.0/2.5
2048
1 4-slot 1 J0900 DIMM1.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF6F CL2.0/2.5
2048
1 4-slot 2 J1300 DIMM2.0 Data DDR_SDRAM Micron Technology E010DF69 CL2.0/2.5
2048
In the example above:
•Node. The node ID.
•Riser. The location of the DIMM. The DIMM may be located in a 2-slot or 4-slot riser
card. If the DIMM is located on the motherboard the value is n/a.
•Slot. The slot number.
•SlotID. The slot ID in JXXX format.
•Name. The location of the DIMM slots printed on the board.
•Usage. The usage of the physical memory, either Control or Data.
•Type. The type of DIMM such as SDRAM, DDR, or DDR2.
•Manufacturer. The manufacturer of the memory.
•Serial. The serial number.
•Latency. The CAS latency.
•Size. The memory size in MB.
cli% shownode -drive
...
Node Drive -Manufacturer- ---Model--- -Serial- -Firmware- Size(MB) Type
412 Show Commands
0 0 Seagate ST9100821AS 5NJ09DF3 3.AAB 95396 SATA
1 0 Seagate ST9100821AS 5NJ08NA4 3.AAB 95396 SATA
In the example above:
•Node. The node ID.
•Drive. The disk drive ID.
•Manufacturer. The manufacturer of the disk drive.
•Model. The model number of the disk drive.
•Serial. The serial number of the disk drive.
•Firmware. The firmware version on the disk drive.
•Size. The drive size in MB.
•Type. The type of disk drive.
cli% shownode -pci
--------------------------PCI Cards--------------------------
Node Slot Type -Manufacturer- -Model- -Serial- -Rev- Firmware
0 0 FC QLOGIC 2302 D13503 1 3.3.16
0 1 FC QLOGIC 2302 D44171 1 3.3.16
1 0 FC QLOGIC 2302 C31037 1 3.3.16
In the example above:
•Node. The node ID.
•Slot. The slot ID.
•Type. The PCI card type, either Fibre Channel (FC) or Ethernet (Eth).
•Manufacturer. The PCI card manufacturer.
•Model. The model of the PCI card.
•Serial. The serial number of the PCI card.
•Rev. The revision number of the PCI card.
•Firmware. The firmware version on the PCI card.
cli% shownode -cpu
--------------------------------CPUs--------------------------------
Node CPU -Manufacturer- -----Serial----- CPUSpeed(MHz) BusSpeed(MHz)
0 0 GenuineIntel 000188AAF2AEA667 995 132.76
0 1 GenuineIntel 0000D8D47BD100A6 995 132.76
1 0 GenuineIntel 0000F5A65AAD5D6F 995 132.72
1 1 GenuineIntel 00028FE5F6E4068D 995 132.72
In the example above:
•Node. The node ID.
•CPU. The CPU ID.
•Manufacturer. The manufacturer name of the CPU.
•Serial. The serial number of the CPU.
shownode 413
•CPUSpeed. The speed of the CPU in MHz.
•BusSpeed. The bus speed of the CPU in MHz.
cli% shownode -ps
-------------------------Power Supplies--------------------------
Node PS -PSState-- FanState ACState DCState -BatState- ChrgLvl(%)
0 0 NotPresent -- -- -- NotPresent 0
0 1 OK OK OK OK OK 100
1 0 OK OK OK OK OK 100
1 1 NotPresent -- -- -- NotPresent 0
In the example above:
•Node. The node ID.
•PS. The power supply ID.
•PSState. The power supply state. Values are as follows:
--. Cannot determine the state.◦
◦OK. The power supply is operating normally.
◦Failed. The power supply is operating abnormally.
◦NotPresent. The power supply is missing.
◦Degraded. There is a fan failure, or the battery state is not OK.
•FanState. The power supply fan state. Values are as follows:
--. Cannot determine the state.◦
◦OK. The fan is operating normally.
◦Failed. The fan is operating abnormally.
•ACState. The state of the AC power. Values are as follows:
--. Cannot determine the state.◦
◦OK. Normal operation.
◦Failed. Abnormal operation.
•DCState. The state of DC power. Values are as follows:
--. Cannot determine the state.◦
◦OK. Normal operation.
◦Failed. Abnormal operation.
•BatState. The battery state. Values are as follows:
OK. Normal operation.◦
◦--. Cannot determine the state.
◦Failed. Abnormal operation.
414 Show Commands
◦NotPresent. The battery is missing.
◦MaxLifeLow. The maximum battery life is low.
•ChrgLvl. The battery charge level in percentage.
The following example displays the detailed state of the nodes:
cli% shownode -state
Node -State- -Detailed_State-
0 OK OK
1 OK OK
2 OK OK
3 OK OK
In the example above:
•Node. The node ID.
•State. The state of the node. Values are as follows:
OK. The node and its components are operating normally.◦
◦Degraded. The node is degraded when the power supply is missing, failed, or degraded
(fan failed, battery max life low, failed, expired, or not present).
◦Failed. The node is either not initialized, offline, kernel revision mismatched, disk
partition bad, rebooting, or shut down.
•Detailed_State. The detailed state of the node. Values are as follows:
tod_bat_fail. The time of day battery failed.◦
◦invalid_bat_config. The battery has an invalid configuration.
◦link_error. The node has a link error.
◦uncorrectable_mem_error. The node has an uncorrectable memory error.
◦multi_uncorrectable_mem_error. The node has multiple uncorrectable memory
error.
◦correctable_mem_error. The node has a correctable memory error.
◦internal_system_error. The node has an internal system error.
◦hardware_watchdog_error. The node has a hardware watchdog error.
◦pci_error. There is a PCI error in the node.
◦driver_software_error. The node has a driver software error.
◦cpu_overheating. The node CPU overheating.
◦cpu_vrm_overheating. The node CPU VRM overheating.
◦control_cache_dimm_overheating. The node Control Cache DIMM is overheating.
◦node_offline_due_to_failure. The node is offline due to failure.
◦node_shutdown_manually. The node was shutdown manually.
◦unknown. The node state is unknown.
shownode 415
The following example displays the detailed state of the power supplies:
cli% shownode -ps
Node PS -State- -Detailed_State-
0 0 OK OK
1 1 OK OK
2 2 OK OK
3 3 OK OK
In the example above:
•Node. The node ID.
•PS. The power supply ID.
•State. The power supply state. Values are as follows:
OK. The power supply is operating normally.◦
◦Failed. The power supply is operating abnormally.
◦NotPresent. The power supply is missing.
◦Degraded. The fan failure or battery state is not OK.
•Detailed_State. The power supply detailed state. Values are as follows:
invalid_bat_count. The power supply has an invalid battery count.◦
◦dc_failed. The power supply DC failed.
◦ac_failed. The power supply AC failed.
◦fan_failed. The power supply fan failed.
◦charger_overload. The power supply charger overloaded.
◦battery_not_present. The power supply battery is not present.
◦invalid_firmware. The power supply firmware is invalid.
◦oscillating_presence. The power supply presence is oscillating.
◦oscillating_dc. The power supply DC is oscillating.
◦oscillating_ac. The power supply AC is oscillating.
◦oscillating_fan. The power supply fan is oscillating.
◦oscillating_charger. The power supply charger is oscillating.
◦oscillating_bat. The power supply battery is oscillating.
◦NotPresent. The power supply is not present.
◦unknown. The power supply state is unknown.
NOTES
None.
416 Show Commands
shownodeenv
DESCRIPTION
The shownodeenv command displays the node operating environment status, including voltages
and temperatures.
SYNTAX
shownodeenv [options <arg>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–n <node_ID>...
Specifies the ID of the node whose environment status is displayed. Multiple node IDs can be
specified as a series of integers separated by a space (1 2 3). If no option is used, then the
environment status of all nodes is displayed.
SPECIFIERS
None.
Restrictions
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the operating environment status for all nodes in the system:
cli% shownodeenv
Node 0
---------
Measurement Reading Lo Limit Hi Limit Status
CPU0 1.32V: 1.31 V 1.28 V 1.36 V Within Tolerance
CPU1 1.32V: 1.31 V 1.28 V 1.36 V Within Tolerance
82563 1.20V: 1.22 V 1.13 V 1.26 V Within Tolerance
31154 1.30V: 1.29 V 1.22 V 1.37 V Within Tolerance
82563 1.90V: 1.92 V 1.79 V 2.00 V Within Tolerance
3.30V: 3.34 V 3.11 V 3.47 V Within Tolerance
PLX 3.30V: 3.32 V 3.12 V 3.47 V Within Tolerance
VCC 5.00V: 5.15 V 4.74 V 5.76 V Within Tolerance
V_PTT 1.20V: 1.20 V 1.13 V 1.26 V Within Tolerance
MCH 1.50V: 1.50 V 1.41 V 1.58 V Within Tolerance
ESB 1.50V: 1.51 V 1.41 V 1.58 V Within Tolerance
FBD 1.50V: 1.44 V 1.41 V 1.58 V Within Tolerance
FBD 1.80V: 1.80 V 1.69 V 1.89 V Within Tolerance
VTT_FBD 0.90V: 0.91 V 0.84 V 0.95 V Within Tolerance
ESB 1.20V: 1.21 V 1.13 V 1.26 V Within Tolerance
PLX 1.00V: 1.00 V 0.94 V 1.05 V Within Tolerance
Osprey DDR 1.25V: 1.25 V 1.17 V 1.32 V Within Tolerance
Osprey DDR 2.50V: 2.50 V 2.36 V 2.63 V Within Tolerance
Osprey Lnk 1.87V: 1.85 V 1.76 V 1.97 V Within Tolerance
FPGA 2.50V: 2.50 V 2.36 V 2.63 V Within Tolerance
12.00V: 12.06 V 11.37 V 12.62 V Within Tolerance
MCH Temp: 38 C 0 C 85 C Within Tolerance
Board Temp: 25 C 0 C 70 C Within Tolerance
LM94 Temp: 23 C 0 C 65 C Within Tolerance
LM87 Temp: 23 C 0 C 65 C Within Tolerance
shownodeenv 417
LM87 Ext Temp: 20 C -10 C 65 C Within Tolerance
CPU0 Temp: 24 C 0 C 85 C Within Tolerance
CPU1 Temp: 25 C 0 C 85 C Within Tolerance
CPU0 VRM Temp: n/a n/a n/a Within Tolerance
CPU1 VRM Temp: n/a n/a n/a Within Tolerance
CPU DIMM0 Temp: 37 C 0 C 105 C Within Tolerance
CPU DIMM1 Temp: 38 C 0 C 105 C Within Tolerance
Node 1
---------
Measurement Reading Lo Limit Hi Limit Status
...
NOTES
None.
418 Show Commands
showpatch
description
The showpatch command displays patches applied to a system.
SYNTAX
showpatch [option <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–hist
Specifies the history of all patches and updates applied to the system.
–d <ID>
Specifies the details on a specified patch ID.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The showpatch command is specific to each individual patch and typically displays these fields:
•Patch ID. Specifies the patch ID.
•Release Version. Specifies TPD or UI release affected by the patch.
•Synopsis. Specifies the purpose of patch.
•Date. Specifies the build date of patch.
•Bugs fixed. Specifies the bugs fixed.
•Description. Specifies a detailed description of the problem or fix.
•Affected Packages. Specifies the new packages being changed.
•Obsoletes. Specifies the patch IDs deleted by this patch.
•Requires. Specifies the patch IDs of any other patches required by this patch.
•Notes. Specifies any special instructions for the patch.
NOTES
This command displays all the patches currently affecting the system if options are not used.
showpatch 419
showpd
DESCRIPTION
The showpd command displays configuration information about a system’s Physical Disks (PDs).
SYNTAX
showpd [options] [<PD_ID>...]
showpd -listcols
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-listcols
List the columns available to be shown in the -showcols option described below (see clihelp
-col showpd for help on each column).
The [options] are generally of two kinds: those that select the type of information that is displayed,
and those that filter the list of PDs that are displayed.
By default (if none of the information selection options below are specified) the following columns
are shown: Id, CagePos, Type, RPM, State, Size_MB, Free_MB, Port_A0, Port_B0,
Port_A1, Port_B1.
Options that select the type of information shown include the following:
-showcols <column>[,<column>...]
Explicitly select the columns to be shown using a comma-separated list of column names. For this
option the full column names are shown in the header. For other options that select the type of
information, the column names may not be exactly the same and there may be spanning headers
on top of the column names.
Run showpd -listcol to list the available columns.
Run clihelp -col showpd for a description of each column.
–i
Specifies a request for disk (inquiry) data.
The following columns are shown: Id,CagePos,State,Node_WWN,Manuf,Model,Serial,
FW_Rev.
–e
Specifies a request for the disk environment and error information. Note that reading this information
places a significant load on each disk.
The following columns are shown: Id,CagePos,Type,State,Rd_CErr,Rd_UErr, Wr_CErr,
Wr_UErr.
–c
Show chunklet usage information. Any chunklet in a failed disk will be shown as "Fail".
The following columns are shown: Id,CagePos,Type,State,Total_Chunk,Nrm_Used_OK,
Nrm_Used_Fail,Nrm_Unused_Free,Nrm_Unused_Uninit,Nrm_Unused_Unavail,
Nrm_Unused_Fail,Spr_Used_OK,Spr_Used_Fail,Spr_Unused_Free,
Spr_Unused_Uninit,Spr_Unused_Fail.
–state
Shows detailed information regarding the state of each PD.
420 Show Commands
The following columns are shown: Id,CagePos,Type, State,Detailed_State.
-s
Show detailed information regarding the state of each PD.
This option is deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
-path
Shows current and saved path information for disks.
The following columns are shown: ID,CagePos,Type,State,Path_A0,Path_A1,Path_B0,
Path_B1,Order.
Path_A1 and Path_B1 are only shown for systems with drive chassis that are connected to
four nodes.
–space
Shows disk capacity usage information (MB).
The following columns are shown: Id,CagePos,Type,State,Size_MB,Volume_MB,
Spare_MB,Free_MB,Unavail_MB,Failed_MB.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same
information in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
The PD filtering options include:
–failed
Specifies that only failed physical disks are displayed.
–degraded
Specifies that only degraded PDs are displayed. If both –failedand–degraded are specified,
the command shows failed disks and degraded disks.
–p <pattern>
PDs matching the specified pattern are displayed. The following arguments can be specified as
patterns for this option:
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–3).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–3).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot(s).
–pt <item>
showpd 421
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–3).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when usingthe -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen
(0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments, –tc_gt , –tc_lt , –fc_gt , –fc_lt , –devid , and –devtype are used
to limit the disks that are used to create logical disks based on the characteristics of the disk drive.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
422 Show Commands
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example -p -fc_gt 60 -fc_lt
230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free chunklets and
that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
–nodes <node_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified nodes and physical disks connected to those nodes.
The node list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (0,1,2). A list can also
consist of a single integer (1). If the node list is not specified, all disks on all nodes are displayed.
–slots <slot_list>
Specifies that only disks on the slots from the slot list are displayed. The slot list is specified as a
series of integers separated by commas (0,1,2). A list can also consist of a single integer (1).
–ports <port_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified PCI slots and physical disks connected to those PCI
slots. The slot list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (0,1,2). A list can also
consist of a single integer (1). If the port list is not specified, all disks on all ports are displayed.
–w <world–wide_name>
Specifies the World Wide Name (WWN) of the physical disk. This option and argument must be
specified if the <PD_ID> specifier is not used and should be the last option in the command line.
SPECIFIERS
<PD_ID>
Specifies a physical disk ID. This specifier must be used if the –w option is not specified.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays general information for all system physical disks:
cli% showpd
---Size(MB)---- ----Ports----
ID CagePos Type RMP State Total Free A B
0 0:0:0 NL 7 normal 715008 695552 0:0:1* 1:0:1
1 0:3:0 FC 10 normal 69632 1024 0:0:1 1:0:1*
2 0:4:0 NL 7 normal 715008 695552 0:0:1 1:0:1*
3 0:7:0 SSD 10 normal 69632 2560 0:0:1* 1:0:1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 1569280 1394688
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. For unadmitted disk the ID appears as dashes
(––).
•CagePos. Position of PD, in the format <cage>:<side>.<mag>:<disk> where <cage>
is the cage number, <side> is 0 or 1 depending on whether the cage is on the left or right
(from the front view) of the disk chassis, <mag> is the magazine number (0 through 4) and
<disk> is the disk number (0 through 3) within the magazine. If the position ends with (?)
the current position of the drive is not known (for example, the drive may be missing), and
the position shown is the last known position.
•Type – Device type of the PD.
showpd 423
•FC – Fibre Channel
•NL – Nearline
•SSD – Solid State Drive
•RPM – The maximum RPM speed of the physical disk.
•State – State of the PD can be one of the following:
normal – PD is normal◦
◦degraded – The PD is not operating normally. Use showpd -s to find out the detail
information.
◦new – The PD is new, needs to be admitted before it can be used (see help admitpd)
◦failed – The PD has failed.
•Total. Total size of the disk in MB (1024^2 bytes).
•Free. Free size of the disk in MB (1024^2 bytes). This includes the size that is available to
use, uninitialized, and unavailable to use.
•Port_A. The port location for the A port of the physical disk. If the primary path, the port
location is followed by an asterisk (*). If disabled, the port location is followed by a dash (-).
•Port_B. The port location for the B port of the physical disk. If the primary path, the port
location is followed by an asterisk (*). If disabled, the port location is followed by a dash (-).
The following example displays only information for nearline drives:
cli% showpd –c -p -devtype NL
-------- Normal Chunklets --------- - Spare Chunklets --
- Used -- -------- Unused --------- - Used - - Unused
--
ID CagePos Type State Total OK Fail Free Uninit Unavail Fail OK Fail Free Uninit
Fail
0 0:0:0 NL normal 2793 76 0 2717 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0
1 0:2:0 NL normal 344 234 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 34
0 0
2 0:4:0 NL normal 2793 90 0 2717 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0
3 0:7:0 NL normal 272 228 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 34
0 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 total 6202 614 5448 68
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. For unadmitted disk the ID appears as dashes
(––).
•CagePos.Position of PD, in the format <cage>:<side>.<mag>:<disk> where <cage>
is the cage number, <side> is 0 or 1 depending on whether the cage is on the left or right
(from the front view) of the disk chassis, <mag> is the magazine number (0 through 4) and
<disk> is the disk number (0 through 3) within the magazine. If the position ends with a
question mark (?) the current position of the drive is not known (for example, the drive may
be missing), and the position shown is the last known position.
•Type – Device type of the PD.
•FC – Fibre Channel
424 Show Commands
•NL – Nearline
•SSD – Solid State Drive
•State. State of the PD can be one of the following:
normal – PD is normal.◦
◦degraded – The PD is not operating normally. Use showpd -s to find out the detail
information.
◦new – The PD is new, needs to be admitted before it can be used (see help admitpd).
◦failed – The PD has failed.
•Total. Total size of the disk in MB (1024^2 bytes).
•Normal Chunklets. This area provides information about chunklets that are not reserved
for use as spares.
•Spare Chunklets. This area provides information about chunklets that are reserved for use
as spares.
•OK. Number of chunklets with data that is accessible to the system.
•Fail. Number of failed chunklets.
•Free. Number of initialized but currently unused chunklets available for use by logical disks.
•Uninit. Number of chunklets being cleaned.
•Unavail. Number of chunklets that are unavailable for use.
The following example displays inquiry information for all disks:
cli% showpd -i
ID CagePos State ----Node_WWN---- --MFR-- ---Model--- -Serial- -FW_Rev--
0 0:0:0 normal 2210000A330013ED SEAGATE ST3750640NS 3QD0MM1B .AEV,1230
1 0:3:0 normal 2000000C501FD935 SEAGATE ST373207FC 3KT01JF1 XR36
2 0:4:0 normal 2210000A33000CBC SEAGATE ST3750640NS 3QD0T6AN .AEV,1230
3 0:7:0 normal 20000011C60B0AEB SEAGATE ST373207FC 3KT01QZF XR36
4 0:8:0 normal 2210000A33000CCA SEAGATE ST3750640NS 3QD0MTPK .AEV,1230
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. For unadmitted disk the ID appears as dashes
(––).
•CagePos.Position of PD, in the format <cage>:<side>.<mag>:<disk> where <cage>
is the cage number, <side> is 0 or 1 depending on whether the cage is on the left or right
(from the front view) of the disk chassis, <mag> is the magazine number (0 through 4) and
<disk> is the disk number (0 through 3) within the magazine. If the position ends with a
question mark (?) the current position of the drive is not known (for example, the drive may
be missing), and the position shown is the last known position.
•State. State of the PD can be one of the following:
normal - PD is normal.◦
◦degraded - The PD is not operating normally. Use showpd -s to find out the detail
information.
◦new - The PD is new, needs to be admitted before it can be used (see help admitpd).
◦failed - The PD has failed.
showpd 425
•Node_WWN. Node World Wide Name of the disk.
•MFR. Physical disk manufacturer.
•Model. Physical disk manufacturer’s device ID.
•Serial. Physical disk manufacturer’s serial number.
•FW_Rev. Physical disk manufacturer’s firmware revision tracking string.
The following example displays chunklet use information for all disks:
cli% showpd –c
-------- Normal Chunklets --------- - Spare Chunklets --
- Used -- -------- Unused --------- - Used - - Unused
--
ID CagePos Type State Total OK Fail Free Uninit Unavail Fail OK Fail Free Uninit
Fail
0 0:0:0 NL normal 2793 76 0 2717 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0
1 0:3:0 FC normal 272 234 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 34
0 0
2 0:4:0 NL normal 2793 76 0 2717 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0
3 0:7:0 FC normal 272 228 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 34
0 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 total 6130 614 5448 68
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. For unadmitted disk the ID appears as dashes
(––).
•CagePos.Position of PD, in the format <cage>:<side>.<mag>:<disk> where <cage>
is the cage number, <side> is 0 or 1 depending on whether the cage is on the left or right
(from the front view) of the disk chassis, <mag> is the magazine number (0 through 4) and
<disk> is the disk number (0 through 3) within the magazine. If the position ends with a
question mark (?) the current position of the drive is not known (for example, the drive may
be missing), and the position shown is the last known position.
•Type – Device type of the PD.
•FC – Fibre Channel
•NL – Nearline
•SSD – Solid State Drive
•State. State of the PD can be one of the following:
normal – PD is normal◦
◦degraded – The PD is not operating normally. Use showpd -s to find out the detail
information.
◦new – The PD is new, needs to be admitted before it can be used (see help admitpd).
◦failed – The PD has failed.
•Total. Total size of the disk in MB (1024^2 bytes).
•Normal Chunklets. This area provides information about chunklets that are not reserved
for use as spares.
426 Show Commands
•Spare Chunklets. This area provides information about chunklets that are reserved for use
as spares.
•OK. Number of chunklets with data that is accessible to the system.
•Fail. Number of failed chunklets.
•Free. Number of initialized but currently unused chunklets available for use by logical disks.
•Uninit. Number of chunklets being cleaned.
•Unavail. Number of chunklets that are unavailable for use.
The following example displays environment and error information for all disks:
cli% showpd –e
-Read Error- -Write Error-
ID CagePos Type State Corr UnCorr Corr UnCorr T(C)
0 0:0:0 FC normal 0 0 0 0 33
1 0:0:1 FC normal 0 0 0 0 34
2 0:0:2 FC normal 0 0 0 0 30
3 0:0:3 FC normal 0 0 0 0 25
4 0:1:0 FC normal 0 0 0 0 29
5 0:1:1 FC normal 0 0 0 0 30
6 0:1:2 FC normal 0 0 0 0 28
7 0:1:3 FC normal 0 0 0 0 24
8 1:2:0 FC normal 0 0 0 0 32
9 1:2:1 FC normal 0 0 0 0 32
10 1:2:2 FC normal 0 0 0 0 30
11 1:2:3 FC normal 0 0 0 0 25
12 1:3:0 FC normal 0 0 0 0 29
13 1:3:1 FC normal 0 0 0 0 29
14 1:3:2 FC normal 0 0 0 0 28
15 1:3:3 FC normal 0 0 0 0 24
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. For unadmitted disk the ID appears as dashes
(––).
•CagePos. Position of PD, in the format <cage>:<side>.<mag>:<disk> where <cage>
is the cage number, <side> is 0 or 1 depending on whether the cage is on the left or right
(from the front view) of the disk chassis, <mag> is the magazine number (0 through 4) and
<disk> is the disk number (0 through 3) within the magazine. If the position ends with (?)
the current position of the drive is not known (for example, the drive may be missing), and
the position shown is the last known position.
•Type – Device type of the PD.
•FC – Fibre Channel
•NL – Nearline
•SSD – Solid State Drive
•Read_Error_Corr. Number of correctable read errors.
•Read_Error_UnCorr. Number of uncorrectable read errors.
•Write_Error_Corr. Number of correctable write errors.
•Write_Error_UnCorr. Number of uncorrectable write errors.
•T(C). Temperature in degrees celsius.
showpd 427
The following example displays the states of each physical disk:
cli% showpd -state
ID CagePos Type -State- -Detailed_State-
0 0:0:0 FC normal normal
1 0:0:1 FC normal normal
2 0:0:2 FC normal normal
3 0:0:3 FC normal normal
4 0:1:0 FC normal normal
5 0:1:1 FC normal normal
6 0:1:2 FC normal normal
7 0:1:3 FC normal normal
8 1:2:0 FC normal normal
9 1:2:1 FC normal normal
10 1:2:2 FC normal normal
11 1:2:3 FC normal normal
12 1:3:0 FC normal normal
13 1:3:1 FC normal normal
14 1:3:2 FC normal normal
15 1:3:3 FC degraded not_available_for_allocations
The following example displays the capacity usage totals for all disks:
cli% showpd -space
------------------(MB)-------------------
ID CagePos Type -State- Size Volume Spare Free Unavail Failed
0 0:0:0 FC normal 17152 10496 1280 5376 0 0
1 0:0:1 FC normal 17152 6400 1280 9472 0 0
2 0:0:2 FC normal 17152 10496 1280 5376 0 0
3 0:0:3 FC normal 17152 6400 1024 9728 0 0
4 0:0:0 FC normal 17152 10752 1024 5376 0 0
5 0:0:1 FC normal 17152 6400 1024 9728 0 0
6 0:0:2 FC normal 17152 10496 1024 5632 0 0
7 0:0:3 FC normal 17152 6400 1024 9728 0 0
8 1:0:0 FC normal 17152 10496 1024 5632 0 0
9 1:1:1 FC normal 17152 6400 1024 9728 0 0
10 1:1:2 FC normal 17152 10496 1024 5632 0 0
11 1:1:3 FC normal 17152 6400 1024 9728 0 0
12 1:1:0 FC normal 17152 10496 1024 5632 0 0
13 1:1:1 FC normal 17152 6400 1024 9728 0 0
14 1:1:2 FC normal 17152 10496 1024 5632 0 0
15 1:1:3 FC normal 17152 6400 1024 9728 0 0
------------------------------------------------------------------
16 total 274432 135424 17152 121856 0 0
The following example displays disk information for the nearline disks on cage 0 and 3 only:
cli% showpd -p -cg 0,1 -devtype NL
---Size(MB)---- ----Ports----
ID CagePos Type RPM State Total Free A B
0 0:0:0 NL 7 normal 715008 684288 0:0:1* 1:0:1
2 0:4:0 NL 7 normal 715008 684288 0:0:1 1:0:1*
4 0:8:0 NL 7 normal 715008 684288 0:0:1* 1:0:1
6 0:12:0 NL 7 normal 715008 684288 0:0:1 1:0:1*
---------------------------------------------------------------
4 total 2860032 2737152
428 Show Commands
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. For unadmitted disk the ID appears as dashes
(––).
•CagePos. Position of PD, in the format <cage>:<side>.<mag>:<disk> where <cage>
is the cage number, <side> is 0 or 1 depending on whether the cage is on the left or right
(from the front view) of the disk chassis, <mag> is the magazine number (0 through 4) and
<disk> is the disk number (0 through 3) within the magazine. If the position ends with (?)
the current position of the drive is not known (for example, the drive may be missing), and
the position shown is the last known position.
•Type – Device type of the PD.
FC – Fibre Channel.◦
◦NL – Nearline.
◦SSD – Solid State Drive.
•RPM. The maximum RPM speed of the physical disk. The number does not represent a rotational
speed for the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the
performance difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL
drives, the number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed.
For SSD drives, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access time.
•State. State of the PD can be one of the following:
normal - PD is normal.◦
◦degraded - The PD is not operating normally. Use showpd -s to find out the detail
information.
◦new - The PD is new, needs to be admitted before it can be used (see help admitpd).
◦failed - The PD has failed.
•Total. Total size of the disk in MB (1024^2 bytes).
•Free. Free size of the disk in MB (1024^2 bytes). This includes the size that is available to
use, uninitialized, and unavailable to use.
•Port_A. The port location for the A port of the physical disk. If the primary path, the port
location is followed by an asterisk (*). If disabled, the port location is followed by a dash (-).
•Port_B. The port location for the B port of the physical disk. If the primary path, the port
location is followed by an asterisk (*). If disabled, the port location is followed by a dash (-).
The following example displays disk information for the nearline disks on cage 0 and sort the
output by the cage position:
cli% showpd -sortcol 1 -p -cg 0 -devtype NL
---Size(MB)---- ----Ports----
ID CagePos Type RPM State Total Free A B
0 0:0:0 NL 7 degraded 715008 684288 0:0:1* 1:0:1
2 0:4:0 NL 7 degraded 715008 684288 0:0:1 1:0:1*
4 0:8:0 NL 7 degraded 715008 684288 0:0:1* 1:0:1
6 0:12:0 NL 7 degraded 715008 684288 0:0:1 1:0:1*
---------------------------------------------------------------
4 total 2860032 2737152
showpd 429
The following example displays all disk in magazine 0 of cage 0 and 1:
cli% showpd -p -mg 0 -cg 0,1
--Size(MB)--- ----Ports----
ID CagePos Type RPM State Total Free A B
0 0:0:0 NL 7 degraded 715008 684288 0:0:1* 1:0:1
8 1:0:0 FC 10 normal 69632 2560 0:0:2* 1:0:2
-------------------------------------------------------------
2 total 784640 686848
NOTES
•In the showpd output, when the position of the disk is not valid (for example, in the case of
a missing disk), the most recent position might be displayed, followed by a question mark
(?).
•To see the device type for a PD (Fibre Channel, nearline, or solid state drive), use the showpd
command.
•Without the -i,-c,-e,-s,-path or -space options, basic information about the PD is
printed. Note that the primary path to the disk is shown by an asterisk(*) in either the APort
or BPort column, and a minus (-) sign following a path indicates the port is disabled.
•If the <PD_ID> specifier and the -w option is not specified, all disks are displayed.
430 Show Commands
showpdata
DESCRIPTION
The showpdata command displays information about the preserved data in the system.
SYNTAX
showpdata [<LD_name>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
[<LD_name>]
Requests that preserved data for a specific Logical Disk (LD) is displayed. This specifier is not
required on the command line. If not specified, then the amount of preserved data by LD is
displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command if no LD name is specified. If an LD name
is specified, then access to the domain of the LD is required.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays preserved data information for LD admin.usr.3:
cli% showpdata admin.usr.3
showpdata v0.usr.0
Preserved LD raid sets
Ldname Set PreservedCnt
admin.usr.3 0 1
No preserved chunklets
NOTES
None.
showpdata 431
showpdch
DESCRIPTION
The showpdch command displays the status of selected Physical Disk (PD) chunklets.
SYNTAX
showpdch [options]
showpdch [options] <pdid>|<pattern>... (deprecated usage)
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
The following filtering options specify conditions that a chunklet should meet in order for the chunklet
to be displayed. Multiple conditions can be specified and a chunklet will be displayed if any of
the specified conditions are met. By default (if no filtering options are specified) only those chunklets
that are mapped to an LD are displayed.
–a
Specifies that information about all chunklets is displayed.
–fail
Specifies that information about failed chunklets (media-failed chunklets, disk-failed chunklets, or
chunklets marked as failed by the operating system) is displayed.
–mov
Specifies that information about chunklets that have moved, are scheduled to move, or are moving,
is displayed.
-from <pdid,...>
Specifies chunklets that have moved or are to be moved from the matching PD IDs.
–cln
Specifies that information for clean chunklets is displayed.
–cng
Specifies that information for chunklets that are being cleaned by the system, is displayed.
–tgt
Specifies that information for chunklets marked as targets of relocation is displayed.
–src
Specifies that information about chunklets that are marked as sources of relocation, is displayed.
–spr
Specifies that information about chunklets that are marked as spares, is displayed.
–log
Specifies that information about chunklets that are logging is displayed.
–sync
Specifies that information about chunklets that are synchronizing with their RAID sets is displayed.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
432 Show Commands
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows with the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
–p <pattern>
Specifies a pattern for disks. Patterns are used to select disks that are used for creating LDs. If no
pattern is specified, the option defaults to all Fibre Channel (FC) disks. If specified multiple times,
each instance of the specified pattern adds additional candidate disks matching the pattern. The
-devtype pattern cannot be used to mix Near Line (NL), FC and SSD drives.
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–4).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using the -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–7). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive position(s) must
contain disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more PDs. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple disks are
separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen (0–3). Disks
must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments, –tc_gt , –tc_lt , –fc_gt , –fc_lt , –devid , and –devtype are used
to limit the disks that are used to create logical disks based on the characteristics of the disk drive.
showpdch 433
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that PDs with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that PDs with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that PDs with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that PDs with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that PDs identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
Specifies that PDs must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for nearline, or
SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the showpd
command.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example -p -fc_gt 60 -fc_lt
230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free chunklets and
that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
SPECIFIERS
<PD_ID>|<pattern>... (deprecated usage)
Specifies the PD IDs or the PD ID pattern for disks whose chunklets are to be displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
If no option is specified, the showpdch command defaults to displaying information about chunklets
used for logical disks (–ld).
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about chunklets on PD 1:
cli% showpdch 1
Pdid Chnk LdName LdCh State Usage Media Sp Cl From To
1 0 vvfromcpg2.usr.1 0 normal ld valid N N --- ---
1 1 vvfromcpg2.usr.1 4 normal ld valid N N --- ---
1 2 vvfromcpg2.usr.1 8 normal ld valid N N --- ---
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Total chunklets: 3
434 Show Commands
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Pdid. The physical disk on which the chunklets reside.
•Chnk. The chunklet number.
•LdName. The name of the logical disk that is using the spare chunklet.
•LdCh. The position of the chunklet on the logical disk.
•State. The state of the chunklet as identified by the kernel.
logging. I/O to the chunklet is written to the logging logical disk.◦
◦playback. Data is played back from the logging logical disks.
◦passthru. Chunklets do not process physical disk errors.
◦preserved. Any I/O to the chunklet is written to the preserved logical disks.
◦preserved playback. Data is played back from the preserved logical disks.
◦stale. The chunklet is not available for use because of a medium failure or a connectivity
failure.
◦normal. The chunklet is available for use.
◦normal,smag. A servicemag operation is performed on the disks.
◦none. Chunklets were not used by any logical disk.
•Usage. Shows whether the spare chunklet is in use by a logical disk.
available. The chunklet is available for use as a spare or as a logical disk.◦
◦ld. The chunklet is in use by a logical disk.
◦synch. The chunklet is both the source and the target of a logical disk relocation operation
(synchronizing the chunklet).
◦cmprel. The system is completing the logical disk relocation operation.
◦relsrc. Relocation source. The data has been moved to another chunklet.
◦reltgt. Relocation target. The data in the chunklet has been moved from another spare
chunklet.
◦abtrel. Abort relocation. The system is canceling the logical disk relocation operation.
•Media. The current status of the physical disk medium for the chunklet.
valid. The chunklet is available for use.◦
◦failed. The medium has encountered errors and is not available for use.
•Sp. The spare status of the chunklet; Yindicates the chunklet is reserved for spare, Nindicates
a previously free chunklet selected by the system as a spare.
•Cl. The clean status of the chunklet. Nindicates that the chunklet is in-use. Yindicates that the
chunklet is clean. Cg indicates that the chunklet is being cleaned.
•From. The initial location of the chunklet before relocation in the syntax
<PD_ID>:<chunklet_number>.
•To. The destination location of the chunklet during relocation in the syntax
<PD_ID>:<chunklet_number>.
showpdch 435
NOTES
None.
436 Show Commands
showpdvv
DESCRIPTION
The showpdvv command displays the virtual volumes hat are mapped to a particular physical
disk.
SYNTAX
showpdvv [options] [<PD_ID> [:<chunklet>]...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-sum
Shows number of chunklets used by virtual volumes for different space types for each physical disk.
–p <pattern>
PDs matching the specified pattern are displayed. The following arguments can be specified as
patterns for this option:
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–3).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–3).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–3).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
showpdvv 437
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen
(0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments, –tc_gt , –tc_lt , –fc_gt , –fc_lt , –devid , and –devtype are used
to limit the disks that are used to create logical disks based on the characteristics of the disk drive.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpdvv
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example -p -fc_gt 60 -fc_lt
230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free chunklets and
that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
-sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows with the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
<PD_ID>
438 Show Commands
Specifies the physical disk ID using an integer. This specifier is not required if -p option is used,
otherwise it must be used at least once on the command line.
[:<chunklet>]
Specifies the chunklet number in a physical disk to which virtual volumes are mapped. This specifier
is not required. This specifier is not required. This specifier cannot be used along with -p option.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays that the user space virtual volumes v0 and v1, respectively, are
mapped to PD 44:
cli% showpdvv 44
PDId CagePos Type RPM(K) VVId VVName VVSp
44 2:3:2 FC 10 109 v0 usr
44 2:3:2 FC 10 110 v1 usr
The following example displays the summary output for volumes mapped to physical disk 55:
cli% showpdvv -sum 55
----Chunklets----
PDId CagePos Type RPM(K) VVId VVName Adm Snp Usr Total
55 4:9:0 FC 15 2 v0 0 0 2 2
55 4:9:0 FC 15 3 v1 0 0 20 20
NOTES
None.
showpdvv 439
showport
DESCRIPTION
The showport command displays information about ports in the system.
SYNTAX
The syntax of the showport command can be one of the following:
•showport [options] [-failed] [-sortcol
<col>[,<dir>]][<node:slot:port> |<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-i
Show hardware and inventory formation.
-c
Displays all devices connected to the port. Such devices include cages (for initiator ports), hosts
(for target ports) and ports from other storage systems (for RCFC and peer ports).
-par
Displays a parameter listing such as the configured data rate of a port and the maximum data rate
that the card supports. Also shown is the type of attachment (Direct Connect or Fabric Attached)
and whether the unique_nwwn and VCN capabilities are enabled.
-rc
Displays information that is specific to the Remote Copy ports.
-rcfc
Displays information that is specific to the Fibre Channel Remote Copy ports.
-peer
Displays information that is specific to the Fibre Channel ports for Data Migration.
-rcip
Displays information specific to the Ethernet Remote Copy ports.
-iscsi
Displays information about iSCSI ports.
-iscsiname
Displays iSCSI names associated with iSCSI ports.
-fcoe
Displays information that is specific to Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports.
-sfp
Displays information about hot pluggable SFPs attached to ports.
-ddm
Displays information about the SFPs DDM. This option must be used with the -sfp option.
-d
Displays detailed information about the SFPs attached to ports. This option is used with the –sfp
option.
440 Show Commands
-failed
Displays only failed ports.
-state
Displays the detailed state information.
-s
Displays the detailed state information. This option has been deprecated and will be removed in
a future release.
-ids
Displays the identities hosted by each physical port.
–sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting <dir>
can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by the values in the later columns.
SPECIFIERS
<node:slot:port>...
Requests that information for a specified port is displayed. This specifier can be repeated to display
configuration information about multiple ports. If not specified, configuration information for all
ports in the system is displayed.
node
Specifies the node using a number from 0 through 7.
slot
Specifies the PCI bus slot in the specified node using a number from 0 through 5 for platforms
other than the V-Class. For V-Class systems, the PCI slot number ranges from 0 through 9.
port
Specifies the port using a number from 1 through 4.
<pattern>...
Specifies that the port matching the specified glob-style pattern is displayed. This specifier can be
repeated to display configuration information about multiple ports. If not specified, configuration
information for all ports in the system is displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about all ports in the system:
root@snodeb40:S170# showport
N:S:P Mode State ----Node_WWN---- -Port_WWN/HW_Addr- Type Protocol Label
Partner FailoverState
showport 441
0:0:1 target ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 20010002AC0000AA host FC -
1:0:1 none
0:0:2 initiator ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 20020002AC0000AA disk FC -
- -
0:0:3 target loss_sync 2FF70002AC0000AA 20030002AC0000AA free FC -
1:0:3 none
0:0:4 target ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 20040002AC0000AA host FC -
- -
0:3:1 target loss_sync 2FF70002AC0000AA 20310002AC0000AA free FC -
1:3:1 none
0:3:2 initiator ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 20320002AC0000AA disk FC -
- -
0:4:1 target ready - 00C0DD086530 iscsi iSCSI -
1:4:1 none
0:4:2 target loss_sync - 00C0DD086532 iscsi iSCSI -
1:4:2 none
0:5:1 initiator ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 20510002AC0000AA disk FC -
- -
0:5:2 target ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 20520002AC0000AA host FC -
1:5:2 none
0:6:1 peer offline - 0002AC53069C rcip IP RCIP0
- -
1:0:1 target ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 21010002AC0000AA host FC -
0:0:1 none
1:0:2 initiator ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 21020002AC0000AA disk FC -
- -
1:0:3 target loss_sync 2FF70002AC0000AA 21030002AC0000AA free FC -
0:0:3 none
1:0:4 initiator ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 21040002AC0000AA host FC -
- -
1:3:1 target loss_sync 2FF70002AC0000AA 21310002AC0000AA free FC -
0:3:1 none
1:3:2 initiator loss_sync 2FF70002AC0000AA 21320002AC0000AA free FC -
- -
1:4:1 target ready - 00C0DD0779C1 iscsi iSCSI -
0:4:1 none
1:4:2 target offline - 00C0DD0779C3 iscsi iSCSI -
0:4:2 none
1:5:1 initiator ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 21510002AC0000AA disk FC -
- -
1:5:2 target ready 2FF70002AC0000AA 21520002AC0000AA host FC -
0:5:2 none
1:6:1 peer offline - 0002AC520041 rcip IP RCIP1
- -
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•N:S:P. The physical position of the port, in the syntax node:slot:port.
•Mode. Indicates whether the port is an initiator,target, or peer. Initiators connect to
disks (default) and target ports connect to hosts or fabrics. A target port that has yet to be
initialized by the system appears as suspended. Ethernet ports use peer mode for Remote
Copy.
•State. State of the port. Possible values vary according to whether the port is an Ethernet or
Fibre Channel port.
◦config_wait. Configuration waiting.
◦alpa_wait. ALPA waiting.
◦login_wait. Login waiting.
◦ready. Link is ready.
442 Show Commands
◦loss_sync. Link loss sync.
◦error. Currently in an error state.
◦non_participate. Link not participating.
◦taking_coredump.Coredump in progress.
◦offline. Link is offline.
◦fw_dead. Firmware dead.
◦link_idle_for_reset. Link is idle for reset.
◦dhcp_in_progress. DHCP is in progress.
◦pending_reset. Link reset is pending.
◦unknown. Link state is unknown.
•Node_WWN. The WWN that belongs to the controller node identified in the N:S:P column.
•Port_WWN/HW_Addr. The WWN that belongs to the controller node port identified in the
N:S:P column.
•Type. Indicates the port connection type.
host. Port is connected to hosts. This port can also be used for Remote Copy over IP
(RCIP).
◦
◦disk. Port is connected to disks.
◦rcfc. FC port is used for Remote Copy.
◦peer. FC port is used for data migration.
◦rcip. IP port is used for Remote Copy.
◦iscsi. iSCSI port connected to hosts.
◦free. Port is not connected to hosts or disks.
◦fcoe. Port is used for Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE).
•Protocol. Indicates the protocol type.
◦FC Fibre Channel
◦FCoE Fibre Channel over Ethernet
◦IP Internet Protocol (Remote Copy)
◦iSCSI iSCSI
◦-No mode selected (for CNA ports)
•Label. Configurable, human-readable label identifying the HBA port
showport 443
•Partner Location of failover partner port in <Node>:<Slot>:<Port> format
•FailoverState The failover state of the two ports indicated in the N:S:P and Partner
columns. The value can be one of the following:
◦none No failover in operation
◦failover_pending In the process of failing over to partner.
◦failed_over Failed over to partner
◦active The partner port is failed over to this port
◦active_down The partner port is failed over to this port, but this port is down
◦failback_pending In the process of failing back from partner
The following example displays hardware and connection information about the ports settings:
cli% showport -i
N:S:P Brand Model Rev Firmware Serial
1:2:1 3PAR FC044X 08 1.02.N.5 00981760001d6187
1:2:2 3PAR FC044X 08 1.02.N.5 00981760001d6187
1:2:3 3PAR FC044X 08 1.02.N.5 00981760001d6187
1:2:4 3PAR FC044X 08 1.02.N.5 00981760001d6187
The following example displays all devices connected to ports and information about the ports
settings on node 0 slot 4:
cli% showport -par 0:4:*
N:S:P Connmode ConnType CfgRate MaxRate Class2 UniqNodeWwn VCN IntCoal
0:4:1 host point auto 4Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:4:2 host point auto 4Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:4:3 disk loop auto 4Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:4:4 disk loop auto 4Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4
The following example displays each system ports’ configuration:
cli% showport -par
N:S:P Connmode ConnType CfgRate MaxRate Class2 UniqNodeWwn VCN IntCoal
0:0:1 disk loop auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:0:2 disk loop auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:1:1 disk loop auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:1:2 disk loop auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:2:1 disk loop auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:2:2 disk loop auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:5:1 peer point auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:5:2 disk loop auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:5:3 disk loop auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
0:5:4 disk loop auto 2Gbps disabled disabled disabled enabled
...
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•N:S:P. The physical position of the port, in the syntax node:slot:port.
•Connmode.Indicates the connection mode which can be rcfc,peer,host or disk.
444 Show Commands
•ConnType. Indicates the type of connection configured for the port; loop for loop, point
for point-to-point, or lp for loop or point-to-point.
•CfgRate. The configurable bit rate of data transfer between the port and a host or a disk;
either auto,1Gbps,2Gbps, or 4Gbps.
•MaxRate. Indicates the maximum bit rate of transfer between the HBA and the host or disk.
•Class2. Identifies whether class 2 is enabled (ack0 or ack1) or disabled.
•VCN. VLUN State Change Notification support setting. Valid values are n/a, enabled or
disabled. When enabled and in public loop or fabric topology, a Registered State Change
Notification (RSCN) message is issued to the fabric controller whenever a VLUN is created
or removed.
•IntCoal. Indicates whether the interrupt coalesce setting is Enabled or Disabled.
The following example displays information about all Remote Copy ports:
cli% showport –rc
N:S:P State HwAddr Rate Type
5:3:2 ready 25320002AC000006 2Gbps rcip
4:1:1 ready 24110002AC000006 2Gbps rcip
0:5:1 ready 0002B39B2013 100Mbps rcip
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•N:S:P. The physical position of the port, in the syntax node:slot:port.
•State. State of the port.
config_wait. Configuration waiting.◦
◦alpa_wait. ALPA waiting.
◦login_wait. Login waiting.
◦ready. Link is ready.
◦loss_sync. Link loss sync.
◦error. Currently in an error state.
◦non_participate. Link not participating.
◦taking_coredump.Coredump in progress.
◦offline. Link is offline.
◦fw_dead. Firmware dead.
◦link_idle_for_reset. Link is idle for reset.
◦dhcp_in_progress. DHCP is in progress.
◦pending_reset. Link reset is pending.
◦unknown. Link state is unknown.
•HwAddr. A unique identifier of the port hardware used for Remote Copy connection. For an
RCIP port, it is the MAC address of the port.
•Rate. Data transfer rate (bitrate) for the Remote Copy interface.
showport 445
•Type. Indicates the port connection type.
•rcip. Port is used for Remote Copy over IP (RCIP).
The following example displays the detailed state of the port:
cli% showport –state
N:S:P --State-- -Detailed_State-
0:0:1 ready loss_sync
0:0:2 ready loss_sync
0:3:1 ready offline
0:3:1 ready offline
0:5:1 ready loss_sync
--------------------------------
10
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•N:S:P. The physical position of the port, in the syntax node:slot:port.
•State. State of the port. The states are as follows:
config_wait. The link configuration is waiting.◦
◦alpa_wait. The link ALPA is waiting.
◦login_wait. The link login is waiting.
◦ready. The link is online and ready for use.
•Detailed State. Detailed state of the port.
loss_sync.The link is not physically connected to anything.◦
◦error. The link has an error.
◦non_participate. The link is not participating.
◦taking_coredump. The link is a taking a core dump.
◦offline. The link is offline.
◦fw_dead. The links firmware is dead.
◦link_idle_for_reset. The link is idle and ready for reset.
◦dhcp_in_progress. The link DHCP is in progress.
◦pending_reset. The link reset is pending.
◦unknown. The link state is unknown.
The following example displays information about RCIP ports:
cli% showport -rcip
N:S:P State ---HwAddr--- IPAddr Netmask Gateway MTU Rate Duplex AutoNeg
0:1:1 offline 000423C21B72 - - - - n/a n/a n/a
0:1:1 offline 000423C21B73 - - - - n/a n/a n/a
1:2:1 offline 000423ADE95E - - - - n/a n/a n/a
1:2:1 offline 000423ADE95F - - - - n/a n/a n/a
446 Show Commands
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•N:S:P. The physical position of the port, in the syntax node:slot:port.
•State. State of the port.
ready. The port is online and ready for use.◦
◦loss_sync.The port is not physically connected to anything.
◦config_wait. Firmware has yet to be initialized.
◦login_wait. Fibre Channel adapter is attempting port and process logins with all loop
ports.
◦error. Fibre Channel adapter has experienced an unrecoverable error.
◦non_participate. Port is logically isolated from the Fibre Channel loop.
◦offline. The port is offline.
•HwAddr. A unique identifier of the port hardware used for Remote Copy connection. For an
RCIP port, it is the MAC address of the port.
•IPAddr. The IP address of the Remote Copy interface.
•Netmask. Netmask for the Ethernet port.
•Gateway. Gateway address for the Remote Copy interface.
•MTU. Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU) size for the specified Remote Copy interface (default is
1500). The largest supported value is 9000 and the smallest is 100.
•Rate. Data transfer rate for the Remote Copy interface.
•Duplex. Values can be either Full or Half.
•AutoNeg. Values can either be Yes or No.
The following example displays information about iSCSI ports:
cli% showport -iscsi
N:S:P State IPAddr Netmask Gateway TPGT MTU Rate iSNS_Prim
iSNS_Sec iSNS_Port
1:3:1 ready 192.168.9.163 255.255.255.0 192.168.9.1 131 1500 1Gbps 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 3205
1:3:2 loss_sync 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 132 1500 n/a 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 3205
The following example displays information about iSCSI names associated with iSCSI ports:
cli% showport -iscsiname
N:S:P IPAddr ---------------iSCSI_Name----------------
1:3:1 0.0.0.0 iqn.2000-05.com.3pardata:21310002ac00000a
1:3:2 0.0.0.0 iqn.2000-05.com.3pardata:21320002ac00000a
The following example displays all ports that are configured as peer:
cli% showport -peer
N:S:P Mode State ----Node_WWN---- ----Port_WWN---- Rate
0:5:1 initiator ready 2FF70202AC000007 20510202AC000007 2Gbps
showport 447
The following examples display both standard and detailed information about SFPs attached to
ports:
cli% showport -sfp
N:S:P -State- -Manufacturer- MaxSpeed(Gbps) TXDisable TXFault RXLoss DDM
0:0:1 OK FINISAR_CORP. 2.10 No No No Yes
0:0:2 OK FINISAR_CORP. 2.10 No No Yes Yes
0:3:2 OK SIGMA-LINKS 2.10 No No Yes Yes
1:0:1 OK FINISAR_CORP. 2.10 No No No Yes
1:0:2 OK FINISAR_CORP. 2.10 No No Yes Yes
cli%
cli% showport -sfp -d
------------Port 0:0:2------------
N:S:P : 0:0:2
State : Degraded
Manufacturer : PICOLIGHT
Part Number : PL-XPL-VE-S24-31
Serial Number : 425EF1E6
Revision : N/A
MaxSpeed(Gbps): 2.10
Qualified : No
TX Disable : --
TX Fault : --
RX Loss : --
RX Power Low : No
DDM Support : No
----------Port 1:3:1-----------
N:S:P : 1:3:1
State : OK
Manufacturer : FINISAR_CORP.
Part Number : FTLF8519P2BNL
Serial Number : U76031S
Revision : A
MaxSpeed(Gbps): 2.10
Qualified : Yes
TX Disable : No
TX Fault : No
RX Loss : No
RX Power Low : No
DDM Support : Yes
NOTES
See “RESTRICTIONS” for important information regarding port modes and port pair protection.
448 Show Commands
showportarp
DESCRIPTION
The showportarp command shows the ARP table for iSCSI ports in the system.
SYNTAX
showportarp [<N>:<S>:<P>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
[<N>:<S>:<P>]
Specifies the port for which information about devices on that port are displayed.
node
Specifies the node.
slot
Specifies the PCI bus slot in the specified node.
port
Specifies the Fibre Channel port number of the PCI card in the specified PCI bus slot.
If <N>:<S>:<P> is not specified, the ARP table for all iSCSI ports is displayed.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the ARP table for the iSCSI ports in the system.
cli% showportarp
N:S:P HwAddr IPAddr Time(mins)
1:3:1 00E07BF8BF87 192.168.9.1 0
1:3:1 001143CD039A 192.168.8.151 0
In the example output above:
•HwAddr. The MAC address of a remote host discovered through the MAC address resolution
process.
•IPAddr. The IP address of the remote host to which the port is attempting to connect.
•Time (mins). The amount of time (in minutes) that the entry has been in the table. When
the entry has been in the table for 20 minutes, it is removed.
NOTES
None.
showportarp 449
showportdev
DESCRIPTION
The showportdev command displays detailed information about devices on a specified port.
SYNTAX
showportdev loop|all|ns|sas|fcswitch|fcfabric <N:S:P>
showportdev sas [options] <N:S:P>
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
SUBCOMMANDS
loop
Specifies that information is returned for arbitrated loop devices that are attached to the specified
port. This subcommand is only for use with Fibre Channel arbitrated loop ports.
all
Specifies that information for all devices attached to the specified port is returned.
ns
Specifies that information for the switch name server database is returned. This subcommand is
only for use with fabric-attached topologies.
fcf
Specifies that information for all FCoE forwarders (FCFs) known to the specified port are returned.
This subcommand is only for use with Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) ports.
sas
Specifies that information for all devices in the SAS topology attached to the specified port is
returned. This subcommand is only for use with SAS ports.
fcswitch
Specifies that a list of all switches in the Fibre Channel fabric is returned. This subcommand is only
for use with fabric-attached Fibre Channel ports.
fcfabric
Specifies that a description of the Fibre Channel fabric is returned. This subcommand is only for
use with fabric-attached Fibre Channel ports.
findport
Searches the Fibre Channel fabric attached to the specified port for information on the supplied
WWN. Supplying the term this in place of a WWN indicates that the port WWN of the specified
HP 3PAR storage system host port should be used. This subcommand is only for use with
fabric-attached Fibre Channel ports.
OPTIONS
-pel
Includes the SAS Phy Error Log (PEL) data for each phy in the SAS topology. This option is only
valid when using the sas subcommand.
SPECIFIERS
<n:s:p>
450 Show Commands
Specifies the port for which information about devices on that port are displayed.
node
Specifies the node.
slot
Specifies the PCI bus slot in the specified node.
port
Specifies the Fibre Channel port number of the PCI card in the specified PCI bus slot.
RESTRICTIONS
The loop subcommand is functional only in a private loop topology.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about all devices attached to Fibre Channel port
1:0:2:
cli% showportdev all 1:0:2
PtId LpID Hadr Node_WWN Port_WWN ftrs svpm bbct flen
0xd3 0x0c 0x00 2FF70002AC000013 21020002AC000013 0x8800 0x0022 n/a 0x0800
0xef 0x00 0xef 2000000087002078 2200000087002078 0x8800 0x0012 n/a 0x0800
0xe8 0x01 0xe8 2000000087002515 2200000087002515 0x8800 0x0012 n/a 0x0800
0xe4 0x02 0xe4 20000000870024CB 22000000870024CB 0x8800 0x0012 n/a 0x0800
0xe2 0x03 0xe2 20000000870028AE 22000000870028AE 0x8800 0x0012 n/a 0x0800
0xe1 0x04 0xe1 2000000087002224 2200000087002224 0x8800 0x0012 n/a 0x0800
0xe0 0x05 0xe0 2000000087003019 2200000087003019 0x8800 0x0012 n/a 0x0800
0xdc 0x06 0xdc 5000087000190E9F 5000087000190EA1 0x8800 0x0012 n/a 0x0800
0xda 0x07 0xda 2000000087002397 2200000087002397 0x8800 0x0012 n/a 0x0800
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•PtId. The ID of the port.
•LpID. The ID of the loop.
•Hadr. The hard address.
•Node_WWN. The WWN of the node.
•Port_WWN. The WWN of the port.
•ftrs. Common features that are located in PLOGI_ACC common word 1, bits 31-16.
•svpm. The service parameters that are located in PRLI word 3, bits 15-0.
•bbct. The buffer to buffer credit that is located in PLOGI common word 0, bits 15-0.
•flen. The maximum received frame length that is located in PLOGI_ACC class-3 word 1, bits
15-0.
The following example displays the SAS topology for port 1:0:2:
cli% showportdev sas 1:0:2
The following example displays the SAS topology with PEL data for port 1:0:2:
cli% showportdev sas -pel 1:0:2
showportdev 451
NOTES
The loop subcommand is functional only in a private loop topology.
452 Show Commands
showportisns
DESCRIPTION
The showportisns command shows iSNS host information for iSCSI ports in the system.
SYNTAX
showportisns [<N>:<S>:<P>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
[<n:s:p>]
Specifies the port for which information about devices on that port are displayed.
node
Specifies the node.
slot
Specifies the PCI bus slot in the specified node.
port
Specifies the iSCSI port number of the PCI card in the specified PCI bus slot.
If not specified, iSNS host information for all iSCSI ports is displayed.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays hosts discovered by the iSCSI port from the iSNS server in the
system.
cli% showportisns
N:S:P Host_IPAddr -------------------Host_iSCSI_Name-------------------
Host_alias
1:3:1 192.168.2.181 iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:pe750-07 <MS SW iSCSI
Initiator>
1:3:1 192.168.17.33 iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:dt-ashok-xp.hq.3pardata.com <MS SW iSCSI
Initiator>
Where
•N:S:P. Represents the node:slot:port of the iSCSI port.
•Host_IPAddr. The IP address of a remote host.
•Host_iSCSI_Name. Represents the iSCSI name of the host.
•Host_alias. Represents the iSCSI alias of the host.
NOTES
None.
showportisns 453
showportlesb
DESCRIPTION
The showportlesb command displays Fibre Channel Link Error Status Block (LESB) counters (the
number of errors accumulated for Fibre Channel devices). The LESB is composed of six counters
that can measure Fibre Channel signal integrity or status.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the showportlesb command can include one of the following
arguments:
•showportlesb reset
•showportlesb compare [all|<N:S:P>]
•showportlesb single|both <N:S:P>
•showportlesb hist [options <arg>] <N:S:P>
•showportlesb diffhist [options <arg>] <N:S:P>
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
SUBCOMMANDS
reset
Specifies that internal counters are checked against current LESB counters and event alerts and are
raised as necessary. All ports for the internal counters are reset.
compare
Specifies that internal HP 3PAR counters are checked against current LESB counters.
single|both
The single subcommand specifies that counters for the indicated port are displayed. The both
subcommand specifies that counters for both ports, if the device is dual ported, are displayed.
hist
Displays the history of LESB raw counters on the specified port of loop devices.
diffhist
Displays differences between historical samples of LESB counters on the specified port of loop
devices.
OPTIONS
–startt <time>
Specifies that samples taken of LESB counters should commence after the indicated time (<time>).
Time can be specified in hours or as a specific date. When specifying the time in hours, the
following formats can be used:
•hh[:mm[:ss]], where hh is the hour, mm is the minute (optional), and ss is the second
(optional).
•hhmm, where hh is interpreted as a 24 hour clock.
When specifying the time as a date, the following formats can be used:
•mm/dd[/yy], where mm is the month, dd is the day, and yy is the year (optional).
•monthname dd[,yy], where dd is the day and yy is the year (optional).
454 Show Commands
•dd monthname [yy], where dd is the day and yy is the year (optional).
•yy–mm–dd, where yy is the year, mm is the month, and dd is the day.
–endt <time>
Specifies that samples taken of LESB counters cease after the indicated time (<time>). Time can
be specified in hours or as a specific date. When specifying in hours, the following formats can
be used:
•hh[:mm[:ss]], where hh is the hour, mm is the minute (optional), and ss is the second
(optional).
•hhmm, where hh is interpreted as a 24 hour clock.
When specifying as a date, the following formats can be used:
•mm/dd[/yy], where mm is the month, dd is the day, and yy is the year (optional).
•monthname dd[,yy], where dd is the day and yy is the year (optional).
•dd monthname [yy], where dd is the day and yy is the year (optional).
•yy–mm–dd, where yy is the year, mm is the month, and dd is the day.
SPECIFIERS
<N:S:P>
Specifies the port for which information about devices on that port are displayed. This specifier is
required for the single,both,hist, and diffhist subcommands, and optional for the
compare subcommand. If this specifier is not used with the compare subcommand, then all ports
are compared. The port is specified as follows:
node
Specifies the node.
slot
Specifies the PCI bus slot in the specified node.
port
Specifies the Fibre Channel port number of the PCI card in the specified PCI bus slot.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the reset of internal counters and ports:
cli% showportlesb reset
LESB reset completed
The following example displays the comparison of all ports:
cli% showportlesb compare
Port <1:0:1>
Loop <1:0:1> Time since last save: 0:00:28
ID ALPA LinkFail LossSync LossSig PrimSeq InvWord InvCRC
<1:0:1> 0xef 1 19 19 0 0 0
pd7 0x6d 1 5 0 0 270 0
pd6 0x72 1 4 0 0 524 0
pd5 0x73 1 4 0 0 335 0
showportlesb 455
pd4 0x76 1 4 0 0 334 0
pd3 0x79 1 4 0 0 401 0
pd2 0x80 1 4 0 0 344 0
pd1 0x81 1 4 0 0 270 0
pd0 0x88 1 4 0 0 401 0
Port <0:0:1>
Loop <0:0:1> Time since last save: 0:00:28
ID ALPA LinkFail LossSync LossSig PrimSeq InvWord InvCRC
<0:0:1> 0xef 1 19 19 0 0 0
pd7 0x6d 1 5 0 0 465 0
pd6 0x72 1 5 0 0 890 0
pd5 0x73 1 4 0 0 969 0
pd4 0x76 1 5 0 0 761 0
pd3 0x79 1 4 0 0 815 0
pd2 0x80 1 4 0 0 925 0
pd1 0x81 1 7 0 0 3283 0
pd0 0x88 1 258 0 0 269 0
LESB compare completed
The following example displays the counters for port 1:0:2:
cli% showportlesb single 1:0:2
ID ALPA LinkFail LossSync LossSig PrimSeq InvWord InvCRC
cage1 0x1 3 4 0 0 755 0
pd12 0xef 1245 39201 0 0 156804 0
pd13 0xe8 1 1608 0 0 6432 0
pd14 0xe4 1 1586 0 0 6344 0
pd15 0xe2 1 1588 0 0 6352 0
pd16 0xe1 2 5088 0 0 20352 0
pd17 0xe0 1 1596 0 0 6384 0
pd18 0xdc 1 1595 0 0 6380 0
pd19 0xda 1 1596 0 0 6384 0
pd20 0xd9 2 5047 0 0 20188 0
pd21 0xd6 1 1604 0 0 6416 0
pd22 0xd5 1 1609 0 0 6436 0
pd23 0xd4 1 1616 0 0 6464 0
<1:0:2> 0xd3 0 1 1 0 0 0
cage0 0x18 1 165 0 0 26 0
pd8 0x67 2 865794 0 0 3463176 0
pd9 0x66 1 63932 0 0 255728 0
pd10 0x65 1 61572 0 0 246288 0
pd11 0x63 1 61525 0 0 246100 0
pd4 0x6c 2 67006 0 0 268024 0
pd5 0x6b 1 63474 0 0 253896 0
pd6 0x6a 1 63471 0 0 253884 0
pd7 0x69 1 63598 0 0 254392 0
pd0 0x72 2 65863 0 0 263452 0
pd1 0x71 1 64024 0 0 256096 0
pd2 0x6e 1 63942 0 0 255768 0
pd3 0x6d 1 63897 0 0 255588 0
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. The device ID.
•ALPA. Arbitrated Loop Physical Address.
•LinkFail. The Fibre Channel loop either has a loss of signal (electrical or optical) or a loss
of synchronization that is greater than the timeout period.
•LossSync. Fibre Channel data is not valid though there is a signal (electrical or optical).
456 Show Commands
•LossSig. Loss of signal (electrical or optical) to the receiver port of a Fibre Channel node.
•PrimSeq. Primitive Sequence Protocol Error. There were errors during the transmission of a
Fibre Channel primitive sequence. This might indicate an error during the loop recovery or
initialization.
•InvWord. Invalid Transmission Word. Illegal Fibre Channel transmission word received.
•InvCRC. Invalid Cyclical Redundancy Check. Data corruption in the Fibre Channel frame.
NOTES
•If the both subcommand is specified, the resulting output text is greater than 80 columns
wide.
•Internal HP 3PAR counters are checked every 10 minutes.
•Each LESB counter is a 32-bit, unsigned integer.
•LESB counters on Fibre Channel devices cannot be reset.
showportlesb 457
showqos
DESCRIPTION
The showqos command lists the QoS rules configured in a system.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the showqos command can be one of the following examples:
•showqos [options][{vvset:{<name>|<pattern>}|sys:all_others}]...
AUTHORITY
•Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-{on|off}
List enabled or disabled QoS rules only.
-domain {<domainname|pattern>}...
Shows rules with target objects in domains with names that match one or more of the specified
domains or patterns. If -domain is not specified, all rules with target objects in the current domain
are shown. See the currentdomain parameter in the setclienv and showclienv commands.
-vv {<vv_name>|<pattern>}]{<vv_name>|<pattern>}]...
Applies only to QoS rules whose targets include virtual volumes with names matching any of the
names or patterns specified.
-sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting (<dir>)
can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
NOTE: Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows with the same
information in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
[vvset:{<name>|<pattern>|sys:all_others]
The QoS rules to list. If none is specified, it lists all configured QoS rules. <name> and <pattern>
refer to the target object name of the rule, as listed in showvvset commands.
The QoS rules to list. If none is specified, it lists all configured QoS rules.
EXAMPLES
To show all QoS rules defined in the system:
cli% showqos
I/O per second KBytes per sec
Id Type Name QoS Limit Limit
2 vvset vsa off 300 -
458 Show Commands
1 vvset vsb on 4000 204800
4 vvset vsc on - 102400
3 vvset vsd on 5000 102400
-----------------------------------------------
4 total
Show active QoS rules only:
cli% showqos -on
I/O per second KBytes per sec
Id Type Name QoS Limit Limit
1 vvset vsb on 4000 204800
4 vvset vsc on - 102400
3 vvset vsd on 5000 102400
-----------------------------------------------
3 total
Show QoS rules containing VV vv1:
cli% showqos -vv vv1
I/O per second KBytes per sec
Id Type Name QoS Limit Limit
1 vvset vsb on 4000 204800
3 vvset vsd on 5000 102400
-----------------------------------------------
2 total
NOTES
For all the <pattern> fields, the patterns are glob-style (shell-style) patterns (see help on
sub,globpat).
A Domain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to 1. The
listdom option is also set to 1 if the CLI was started with the -listdom option, or if the CLI was started
with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h and setclienv -h for
details of the environment variables.
showqos 459
showrcopy
DESCRIPTION
The showrcopy command displays details of the Remote Copy configuration. The showrcopy
command also displays the group’s domain names if the global -listdom option is used or if
the TPDLISTDOM environment variable is set.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the showrcopy command can be one of the following:
•showrcopy [options <arg>] [links]
•showrcopy [options <arg>] [groups [<name_or_pattern ...>]]
•showrcopy [options <arg>] [targets [<name_or_pattern> ...]]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-d
Displays more detailed configuration information.
-domain <domainname_or_pattern>[,<domainname_or_pattern>...]
Shows only Remote Copy links whose virtual volumes are in domains with names that match one
or more of the specified domain name or pattern. This option does not allow listing objects within
a domain of which the user is not a member.
SPECIFIERS
links
Specifies all Remote Copy links.
groups [<name_or_pattern>]
Specifies either all Remote Copy volume groups or a specific Remote Copy volume group by name
or by glob-style pattern.
targets [<name_or_pattern>]
Specifies either all target definitions or a specific target definition by name or by glob-style pattern.
RESTRICTIONS
This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for further information.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays output from the showrcopy command:
# showrcopy
Remote Copy System Information
Status: Started, Normal
Target Information
Name ID Type Status Options Policy
System2 9 IP ready mirror_config
460 Show Commands
Link Information
Target Node Address Status Options
System2 0 10.100.33.11 Up
System2 1 10.101.33.11 Up
receive 0 10.100.33.11 Up
receive 1 10.101.33.11 Up
Group Information
Name Target Status Role Mode Options
sync_group_1 System2 Started Primary Sync
LocalVV ID RemoteVV ID SyncStatus LastSyncTime
localvv.0 391 remotevv.0 351 Syncing (25%) Thu Dec 14 17:37:40 PST 2006
localvv.1 392 remotevv.1 352 Syncing (40%) Thu Dec 14 17:37:40 PST 2006
Name Target Status Role Mode Options
sync_group_2.r11 System2 Started Secondary Sync
LocalVV ID RemoteVV ID SyncStatus LastSyncTime
remotevv.0 401 localvv.0 361 Syncing NA
remotevv.1 402 localvv.1 362 Syncing NA
The following values can appear in the TargetInformationStatus field:
•new. The target’s link have yet to come up.
•ready. The target has connected links.
•unsupported. The target system’s TPD version is not compatible with this system’s version.
•failing. The target’s links have all failed, but its groups have not been stopped.
•failed. The target’s links have all failed and its groups have been stopped.
The following values can appear in the Link InformationStatus field:
•Not Started. Link is not started or is being started, such as when its node is down or Remote
Copy is stopped (through the stoprcopy command).
•Down. Link is down and will attempt to restart.
•Up. Link is up and running.
The following values can appear in the Group InformationSyncstatus field:
•New. Volume is configured, but has not yet been started.
•Syncing. Volume is currently synchronizing.
•NotSynced. The volume is not synchronized, likely the result of an initial sync failure or some
other failure.
•Stopped. The volume was synced the last time the group was started, but the group is currently
stopped. There might be writes that have not been sent to the secondary site.
•Stale. Volume was previously synchronized, but a previous synchronization attempt failed.
Thus, the secondary has a valid copy, just not a valid copy from the last synchronization
attempt.
The following example displays output from the showrcopy groups <pat> command, where
<pat> is specified as b* and 1*:
# showrcopy groups b* l*
Remote Copy System Information
Status: Started, Normal
showrcopy 461
Group Information
Name Target Status Role Mode Options
bart bf_mirror Started Primary Periodic Last-Sync Tue Jul 18 14:12:59
PDT 2006 , Period 30m
LocalVV ID RemoteVV ID SyncStatus LastSyncTime
bart-tp-ws 9 bart-ws 3924 Synced Tue Jul 18 14:13:09 PDT 2006
Name Target Status Role Mode Options
lisa bf_mirror Started Primary Periodic Last-Sync Tue Jul 18 14:09:44
PDT 2006 , Period 30m, over_per_alert
LocalVV ID RemoteVV ID SyncStatus LastSyncTime
lisa-ws 2 lisa-ws 3922 Synced Tue Jul 18 14:10:32 PDT 2006
In the example above:
•Name. The name of the group.
•Target. The target to which the group is mirrored.
•Status. The following values can appear in the group Status field:
New. Group that has not yet been started.◦
◦Starting. Currently attempting to start the group.
◦Started. Group is started (has Remote Copy running).
◦Stopped. Group was stopped.
•Role. The role of the group as either Primary or Secondary.
•Mode. The mode of the group as either Periodic or Synchronous.
•Options. The options set for the group.
•LocalVV and ID. The name and ID of this system.
•RemoteVV and ID. The name and ID of the target system.
•SyncStatus. The following values can appear in the SyncStatus field:
New. Volume is configured as a primary volume, but has not yet been started.◦
◦Syncing. Volume is currently synchronizing.
◦Synced. The primary and secondary volumes are in sync.
◦NotSynced. The volume is not synchronized, likely the result of an initial sync failure or
some other failure.
◦Stopped. The volumes were previously synchronized, but may be out of sync due to a
group being stopped.
◦Stale. Volume was previously synchronized, but a previous synchronization attempt
failed. Thus the secondary has a valid copy, just not a valid copy from the last
synchronization attempt.
•LastSyncTime. The time at which the last volume synchronization was completed. Applies
only to asynchronous periodic groups. Synchronous groups display N/A if they have been
started and are actively replicating.
462 Show Commands
NOTES
•If the showrcopy command is used with no specifiers, all configuration information is
displayed.
•The showrcopy command also displays the group’s domain names if the global -listdom
option is used or if the TPDLISTDOM environment variable is set.
•If showrcopy link|group|target is used without specifying a name, information for all
links, groups, or targets is displayed.
•To limit the performance impact of Remote Copy on the rest of the HP 3PAR storage system,
the number of volumes that are concurrently synchronizing is limited to 20 volumes.
This limit is not user-configurable and applies to the initial synchronization as well as subsequent
resynchronizations for synchronous as well as asynchronous periodic groups. For example,
if there are 30 volumes in asynchronous periodic mode that are being resynchronized, you
might notice that 10 volumes do not start synchronizing until the first 20 have completed. This
can be seen by monitoring the Sync% column of the showrcopy command output.
•A Domain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set the listdom
option to 1. The listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom
option or if the CLI was started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set.
showrcopy 463
showrctransport
DESCRIPTION
The showrctransport command shows status and information about end-to-end transport for
Remote Copy in the system.
SYNTAX
showcrtransport [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–rcip
Show information about Ethernet end-to-end transport.
–rcfc
Show information about Fibre Channel end-to-end-transport.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays status and information about the end-to-end transport for all Remote
Copy configured ports:
# showrctransport
N:S:P Peer_Address Address State Type
0:5:1 - 172.100.5.87 new rcip
1:5:1 - 172.101.6.87 new rcip
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•N:S:P. The physical position of the port, in the syntax node:slot:port.
•Peer_Address. IP address of the Remote Copy storage server port connected to this Remote
Copy port.
•Address. IP address of the Remote Copy storage server port.
•State. Remote copy end-to-end transport state. Can include one of the following results:
new. Configuration is not completed on this port.◦
◦incomplete. Configuration is not yet completed on the peer port.
464 Show Commands
◦ready. Configuration is completed on this port and the peer port; transport is ready for
use.
◦missing. A configured transport was disconnected.
•Type. Indicates the port connection type.
rcip. Port is used for Remote Copy over IP (RCIP).◦
◦rcfc. Port is used for Remote Copy over FC (RCFC).
The following example displays status and information about the end-to-end transport for RCIP
ports:
# showrctransport -rcip
N:S:P State HwAddr IPAddress PeerIPAddress Netmask Gateway MTU Rate Duplex
0:1:1 new 000423C21B72 192.168.25.226 - 255.255.255.0 - 1500 1Gbps Full
0:1:1 new 000423C21B73 192.168.25.226 - 255.255.255.0 - 1500 n/a Half
1:2:1 new 000423ADE95E 192.168.25.227 - 255.255.255.0 - 1500 1Gbps Full
1:2:1 new 000423ADE95F 192.168.25.227 - 255.255.255.0 - 1500 n/a Half
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•N:S:P. The physical position of the port, in the syntax node:slot:port.
•State. Remote copy end-to-end transport state. Can include one of the following results:
new. Configuration is not completed on this port.◦
◦incomplete. Configuration is not yet completed on the peer port.
◦ready. Configuration is completed on this port and the peer port; transport is ready for
use.
◦missing. A configured transport was disconnected.
•HwAddr. Hardware address of the Ethernet port indicated in the N:S:P column.
•IPAddress. IP address of the Ethernet port indicated in the N:S:P column.
•PeerIPAddress. IP address of the peer Ethernet port to which the port indicated in the
N:S:P column is connected.
•Netmask. Netmask for the IP address.
•Gateway. Address of the gateway.
•MTU. Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU) size for the specified Remote Copy interface (default is
1500). The largest supported value is 9000 and the smallest is 100.
•Rate. Actual bit rate of the port indicated in the N:S:P column.
•Duplex. Values can be either Full or Half.
The following example displays status and information about the end-to-end transport for RCFC
ports:
# showrctransport -rcfc
N:S:P Remote_Node_WWN Remote_Port_WWN State
5:3:2 2FF70002AC000029 21110002AC000029 ready
4:1:1 2FF70002AC000029 20020002AC000029 ready
showrctransport 465
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•N:S:P. The physical position of the port, in the format node:slot:port.
•Remote_Node_WWN. World Wide name of the node to which the port indicated in the N:S:P
column connects.
•Remote_Port_WWN. World Wide name of the target port to which the port indicated in the
N:S:P column connects.
•State. Indicates whether the end-to-end transport is ready to be used for Remote Copy. Can
be one of the following:
◦new. The target port is newly discovered and has not yet been used for Remote Copy.
◦incomplete. Port indicated in the N:S:P column is activated and ready, but the target
port is not yet enabled.
◦ready. Remote copy link is activated and ready for use.
◦missing. Ready link was disconnected.
NOTES
None.
466 Show Commands
showrole
DESCRIPTION
The showrole command displays information about rights assigned to roles in the system. Without
any argument, showrole displays the roles currently defined.
SYNTAX
showrole [<role_name | pattern ...>]
showrole -listrights
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-listrights
Lists the rights available in the system.
SPECIFIERS
<role_name | pattern>...
Specifies that the role name matching the specified glob-style pattern will have their rights displayed.
This specifier can be repeated. This specifier is not required.
RESTRICTIONS
If both -listrights and <role_name> patterns are provided, the -listrights option takes
precedence and only information related to rights will be displayed.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the role names in the system:
cli% showrole
---Role---
browse
edit
service
super
The following example displays the rights assigned to the browse role:
cli% showrole
---Role---
browse
edit
service
super
create
basic edit
3par ao
3par rm
showrole 467
NOTES
To avoid cluttering the output, the show commands rights are not included in the output of the
showrole because show commands are granted to all roles by default.
468 Show Commands
showrsv
DESCRIPTION
The showrsv command displays SCSI reservation and registration information for Virtual Volume
Logical Unit Numbers (VLUNs) bound for a specified port.
SYNTAX
showrsv [options <arg>] [<VV_name>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–l <scsi3|scsi2>
Specifies that either SCSI–3 persistent reservation or SCSI–2 reservation information is displayed.
If this option is not specified, information about both SCSI–2 and SCSI–3 reservation will be shown.
–host <hostname>
Displays reservation and registration information only for Virtual Volumes (VVs) that are visible to
a particular host.
SPECIFIERS
[<VV_name>]
Specifies the VV name, using up to 31 characters.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about reservation and registration information for
VLUNs bound with host name w2k_emx1_cisco.
cli% showrsv –host w2k_emx1_cisco
VVname Host Owner Port ReservationType
w2k_clusterd.10 w2k_emx1_cisco 10000000C92B9909 1:3:1 SCSI–3(6)
w2k_clusterd.11 w2k_emx1_cisco 10000000C92B9909 1:3:1 SCSI–3(6)
w2k_clusterd.12 w2k_emx1_cisco 10000000C92B9909 1:3:1 SCSI–3(6)
w2k_clusterd.13 w2k_emx1_cisco 10000000C92B9909 1:3:1 SCSI–3(6)
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•VVname. Name of volume exported on this port to the host in Host column.
•Host. Host name of the host connected to this port.
•Owner/Registrant. WWN of the host that has the reservation or registration.
•Port. Port name in N:S:P format.
•ReservationType. The type of reservation being established either SCSI-2 or SCSI-3.
SCSI-3 reservations can be as follows:
•1. (Write exclusive). All read requests allowed. Write requests allowed for the reservation
holder only.
•3. (Exclusive access). Read and write requests allowed for the reservation holder only.
showrsv 469
•5. (Write exclusive–registrants only). All read requests allowed. Write requests allowed for
registered initiators only.
•6. (Exclusive access–registrants only). Read and write requests allowed for registered initiators
only.
•7. (Write exclusive–all registrants). All read requests allowed. Write requests allowed for
registered initiators only.
•8. (Exclusive access–all registrants). Read and write requests allowed for registered initiators
only.
NOTES
None.
470 Show Commands
showsched
DESCRIPTION
The showsched command shows the state of tasks currently scheduled on the system.
SYNTAX
showsched [options][<schedname>|<pattern>]
AUTHORITY
Super, Service, Edit, Browse
Any extended role in the system.
OPTIONS
-all
Specifies that all scheduled tasks will be displayed.
-sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). rows with the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
<schedname>|<pattern>...
Specifies the schedules with the specified name (31 character maximum), matching the glob-style
pattern. This specifier can be repeated to display configuration information about multiple schedules.
This specifier is not required. If not specified, configuration information for all non-system scheduled
tasks in the system is displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information of all scheduled tasks.
cli% showsched -all
------ Schedule -------
SchedName File/Command Min Hour DOM Month DOW CreatedBy Status
Alert NextRunTime
move_back_chunklet1 moverelocpd -f 0,7,14 17 2 * * 0 3parsvc
active Y 2009-03-15 03:17:00 PDT
move_back_chunklet2 moverelocpd -f 1,8,15 17 2 * * 1 3parsvc
active Y 2009-03-16 02:17:00 PDT
move_back_chunklet3 moverelocpd -f 2,9 17 2 * * 2 3parsvc
active Y 2009-03-17 02:17:00 PDT
showsched 471
move_back_chunklet4 moverelocpd -f 3,10 17 2 * * 3 3parsvc
active Y 2009-03-18 02:17:00 PDT
move_back_chunklet5 moverelocpd -f 4,11 17 2 * * 4 3parsvc
active Y 2009-03-12 02:17:00 PDT
move_back_chunklet6 moverelocpd -f 5,12 17 2 * * 5 3parsvc
active Y 2009-03-13 02:17:00 PDT
move_back_chunklet7 moverelocpd -f 6,13 17 2 * * 6 3parsvc
active Y 2009-03-14 02:17:00 PDT
remove_expired_vvs removevv -f 27 * * * * 3parsvc
active Y 2009-03-11 17:27:00 PDT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 total
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•SchedName. Name of the scheduled task.
•File/Command. The file or command that has been scheduled.
•Schedule. WWN of the host that has the reservation or registration.
•Min. The minute of the hour that a scheduled task will execute.
•Hour. The hour of the day that a scheduled task will execute.
•DOM. The day of the month that a scheduled task will execute.
•Month. The month that a scheduled task will execute.
•DOW. The day of the week that a scheduled task will execute.
•CreatedBy. The name of the user that created the task.
•Status. Indicates whether the task is active or has been suspended.
•Alert. Indicates whether the task will generate an alert.
•NextRunTime. The time when the next scheduled task will run.
NOTES
If the -all option is not specified then scheduled system tasks created by the 3parsvc user will
not be displayed.
472 Show Commands
showsnmpmgr
DESCRIPTION
The showsnmpmgr command displays a list of registered SNMP managers for receiving traps.
WARNING! SNMP cannot be used in Common Criteria mode. It might compromise the security
of the storage system.
SYNTAX
showsnmpmgr
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a list of registered managers:
cli% showsnmpmgr
Manager IP Port
82.185.98.76 162
82.162.9.7 8004
5def:2008:abcd::161a 9162
In the example above:
Manager IP. The trap manager’s IP address.
Port. The trap manager’s port number.
EXIT STATUS
The following codes are returned indicating success or failure:
•0indicates that the command was successful.
•1indicates that the command failed.
NOTES
Managers are registered using the addsnmpmgr command. See Section (page 42) for additional
information.
showsnmpmgr 473
showsnmppw
DESCRIPTION
The showsnmppw command displays the SNMP community string passwords.
WARNING! SNMP cannot be used in Common Criteria mode. It might compromise the security
of the storage system.
SYNTAX
showsnmppw [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–rw|–r|–w
Specifies that the read-write (–rw), read-only (–r), or write-only (–w) password is displayed. If not
specified, the read/write community string password is displayed.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays all SNMP passwords:
cli% showsnmppw
[password]
EXIT STATUS
The following codes are returned indicating success or failure:
•0indicates that the command was successful.
•1indicates that the command failed.
NOTES
SNMP passwords are registered using the setsnmppw command. See “setsnmppw” (page 326)
for more information.
474 Show Commands
showsnmpuser
DESCRIPTION
The showsnmpuser command displays information about one or all SNMP users, including the
username, authentication and privacy protocols.
WARNING! SNMP cannot be used in Common Criteria mode. It might compromise the security
of the storage system.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the showsnmpuser command can be one of the following:
showsnmpuser [<user_name>]
showsnmpuser
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<user_name>
Specifies the SNMPv3 username, using up to 31 characters. This specifier is not required on the
command line. If no specifier is used, information about all SNMP users is displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a list of all SNMP users:
cli% showsnmpuser
Username AuthProtocol PrivProtocol
snmpadm HMAC-SHA-96 CFB128-AES-128
joe HMAC-SHA-96 CFB128-AES-128
NOTES
The showsnmpuser command displays SNMPv3 user information for all local users when the
<username> is not provided or the information for just the local user with the name <username>
when it is provided. The output for users with a Browse or Service role is limited to the user's own
accounts. If the <username> is provided, it must be the user's name.
SNMP users are created using the createsnmpuser command.
showsnmpuser 475
showspace
DESCRIPTION
The showspace command displays estimated free space for logical disk creation.
SYNTAX
showspace [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
The following options are used to select the logical disk creation parameters used for space
calculation:
–cpg <CPG_name>|<pattern>
Specifies that logical disk creation parameters are taken from CPGs that match the specified CPG
name or pattern, indicated with a glob-style pattern (see “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for more
information). Multiple CPG names or patterns can be specified using a comma separated list, for
example cpg1,cpg2,cpg3. Only the -hist option can be specified with the -cpg option.
–hist
Specifies that free space history over time for CPGs specified with the –cpg option is displayed.
This option can only be used if the –cpg option is specified.
–t <RAID_type>
Specifies the RAID type of the logical disk: r0 for RAID-0, r1 for RAID-1, r5 for RAID-5, or r6 for
RAID-6. If no RAID type is specified, the default is r1.
–ssz <size_number_chunklets>
Specifies the set size in terms of chunklets. The default depends on the RAID type specified: 2for
RAID-1, 4for RAID-5, and 8for RAID-6.
–rs <size>
Specifies the number of sets in a row using an integer from 1through 2147483647. If not specified,
no row limit is imposed.
–ss <size_KB>
Specifies the step size in kilobytes using 32 KB to 512 KB. The step size should be a power of 2
and a multiple of 32. If no value is entered, the step size defaults to 256 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1,
and 128 KB for RAID-5. For RAID-6, the default is a function of the set size.
–ha port|cage|mag
Specifies that the layout must support the failure of one port pair, one cage, or one drive magazine
(mag). This option has no meaning for RAID-0.
–ch first|last
Specifies the chunklet characteristics, either first (attempt to use the lowest numbered available
chunklets) or last (attempt to use the highest numbered available chunklets). If no argument is
specified, the default characteristic is first.
–p <pattern>
Specifies a pattern for candidate disks. Patterns are used to disks that are used for creating LDs.
If no pattern is specified, the option defaults to all Fibre Channel (FC) disks. If specified multiple
times, each instance of the specified pattern adds additional candidate disks that match the pattern.
476 Show Commands
The -devtype pattern cannot be used to mix Near Line (NL) and FC, and Solid State Drive (SSD)
drives:
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–4).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (item).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple disks
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen (0–3).
Disks must match the specified ID(s).
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
showspace 477
–devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel or NL,
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command. If it is not specified, the default device type is FC.
-rpm <number>
Specifies that disks must be of the indicated speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column
of the showpd command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without
spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between
the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both
a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated
as relative performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the
access time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example -p -fc_gt 60 -fc_lt
230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free chunklets and
that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
The –cpg and -hist options cannot be used with any other option.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the estimated free space for a RAID-1 LD:
cli% showspace –t r1
--Estimated(MB)---
RawFree UsableFree
13824 6912
NOTES
•The showspace command includes chunklets in the process of being initialized as shown by
the Normal,Unused,Uninit column of showpd -c. The space represented by these
chunklets will not actually be available until the initialization process is complete.
•The space calculated is an estimate and not an exact figure.
•For this command: MB = 1048576 bytes.
478 Show Commands
showspare
DESCRIPTION
The showspare command displays information about chunklets in the system that are reserved
for spares and previously free chunklets selected for spares by the system.
SYNTAX
showspare [-used]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-used
Show only used spare chunklets. By default all spare chunklets are shown.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about spare chunklets on chunklets 53 through 56 on
physical disk 4:
cli% showspare
PdId Chnk LdName LdCh State Usage Media Sp Cl From To
4 53 ronnie 0 normal ld valid N N 2:37 ---
4 54 james 28 normal ld valid N N 0:29 ---
4 55 dio 28 normal ld valid N N 0:32 ---
4 56 rocks 0 normal ld valid N N 0:38 ---
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•PdId. The physical disk on which the chunklets reside.
•Chnk. The chunklet number.
•LdName. The name of the logical disk that is using the spare chunklet.
•LdCh. The position of the chunklet on the logical disk.
•State. The state of the chunklet as identified by the kernel.
logging. I/O to the chunklet is written to the logging logical disk.◦
◦playback. Data is played back from the logging logical disks.
◦passthru. Chunklets do not process physical disk errors.
◦preserved. Any I/O to the chunklet is written to the preserved logical disks.
◦preserved playback. Data is played back from the preserved logical disks.
◦stale. The chunklet is not available for use because of a medium failure or a connectivity
failure.
showspare 479
◦normal. The chunklet is available for use.
◦normal,smag. A servicemag operation is performed on the disks.
◦none. Chunklets were not used by any logical disk.
•Usage. Shows whether the spare chunklet is in use by a logical disk.
available. The chunklet is available for use as a spare or as a logical disk.◦
◦ld. The chunklet is in use by a logical disk.
◦synch. The chunklet is both the source and the target of a logical disk relocation operation
(synchronizing the chunklet).
◦cmprel. The system is completing the logical disk relocation operation.
◦relsrc. Relocation source. The data has been moved to another chunklet.
◦reltgt. Relocation target. The data in the chunklet has been moved from another spare
chunklet.
◦abtrel. Abort relocation. The system is canceling the logical disk relocation operation.
•Media. The current status of the physical disk medium for the chunklet.
valid. The chunklet is available for use.◦
◦failed. The medium has encountered errors and is not available for use.
•Sp. The spare status of the chunklet; Yindicates the chunklet is reserved for spare, Nindicates
a previously free chunklet selected by the system as a spare.
•Cl. The clean status of the chunklet. Nindicates that the chunklet is in-use. Yindicates that the
chunklet is clean. Cg indicates that the chunklet is being cleaned.
•From. The initial location of the chunklet before relocation.
•To. The destination location of the chunklet during relocation.
NOTES
The showpdch command is a more general and versatile command that can be used instead of
showspare.
480 Show Commands
showsshkey
DESCRIPTION
The showsshkey command will displays all SSH public keys that have been set with setsshkey.
SYNTAX
showsshkey
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows the SSH public keys that have been set by the current user:
cli% showsshkey
ID Key
0 ssh-dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBALDVpIVrNEGJn0tFDCSE1tLXdGVqBkb8Dm/vziYKXShc6
EIeU3kdD7pK9yhTEKx8q9urwgtKwyYH1KMWYp042kuwIM12UzIvkV6DqbA8Z4aOH81WnBm7pEscD
zHdq6IZJ47MszLj1xXO2RYyWTFwsbpKYLXoUrrj8vDqCtcVFGqvAAAAFQDtTx3ZLckWAI9Pp/jgt
JRI+Z63wAAAIAtFIyscMhuyma3yMvnE8MyUyP1mJUzpKLHKwCNfvwL49bfXSoczitmY+ENHTgtWd
uRaX0uIMmeDeeO5qUUKDfxp5t3KURhl47QcU4lNmLCWvR1S5ep1ff0+D7PVjJtRwlZxLtfQMyGWz
YCMzSRnk41pD6R392A8XLSzvqrLXat3wAAAIEAl+crC528VaZSiSbeW/FybPx3EhvvV/Zyv6FTFI
OE5+bsWbeQZP33M3yuwTvVuLvphSzpxTKQy1TOAK/Q6XmsvE9ubUUdki5X1rIuFvOzU88KJ0X1c+
XPw5+NaI8VXat74YR7dSBE5sbC3EKhZ142fD7IH+nHfpHiHQIQSiIIFyw= user@example.com
NOTES
The public SSH keys that are displayed by this command are used to determine that the private
keys that are paired with them are valid, and are not useful in determining the contents of that
private key. As such, the contents of the public keys are not sensitive, and having access to them
will not aid someone attempting to access an account to which they should not have access.
showsshkey 481
showsys
DESCRIPTION
The showsys command displays the HP 3PAR storage system properties includes system name,
model, serial number, and system capacity information, etc.
SYNTAX
showsys [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–d
Specifies that more detailed information about the system is displayed.
–param
Specifies that the system parameters are displayed.
–fan
Displays the system fan information.
–space
Displays the system capacity information in MB (1048576 bytes).
–domainspace
Displays the system capacity information broken down by domain in MB (1048576 bytes).
–desc
Displays the system descriptor properties.
-mgmtoldports
Displays the value of the MgmtOldPorts parameters (see help for setsys command for more
information of this parameter). This option is deprecated and will be removed when the
MgmtOldPorts parameter is removed.
–devtype FC|NL|SSD
Displays the system capacity information where the disks must have a device type string matching
the specified device type; either Fibre Channel (FC), nearline (NL), solid state drive (SSD). This
option can only be issued with the -space option.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about an HP 3PAR storage system:
cli% showsys
---------------(MB)----------------
482 Show Commands
ID -Name- ---Model--- -Serial- Nodes Master TotalCap AllocCap FreeCap FailedCap
15 s015 InServ T400 1000015 2 0 1063424 208384 855040 0
In the previous example:
•ID. The system ID.
•Name. The system name.
•Model. The model type of the HP 3PAR storage system.
•Serial. The system serial number.
•Nodes. The number of nodes in the system.
•Master. The master node ID.
•TotalCap. The total system capacity in MB.
•AllocCap. The allocated system capacity in MB.
•FreeCap. The free system capacity in MB.
•Failed Cap. The failed system capacity in MB.
The following example displays the system descriptor properties of an HP 3PAR storage system:
cli% showsys -desc
------------System s36------------
System Name : Your Name
Location : Your Facility Address
Owner : Your Company Name
Contact : Joe Admin
Comment : Your Notes
The following example displays the system capacity in MB for an HP 3PAR storage system:
cli% showsys -space
---------System Capacity (MB)---------
Total Capacity : 1063424
Allocated : 208384
Volumes : 103937
Base Volumes : 4266
User : 4266
Copy : 0
Admin : 0
CPGs (TPVVs & CPVVs) : 98304
Copy : 65536
Used : 0
Unused : 65536
Admin : 32768
Used : 0
Unused : 32768
Unmapped : 1367
System : 104448
Internal : 104448
Spare : 0
Used : 0
Unused : 0
Free : 855040
Initialized : 855040
Uninitialized : 0
Failed : 0
showsys 483
The following example displays more detailed (–d option) information about the same system:
cli% showsys -d
------------General-------------
System Name : S424
System Model : InServ E200
Serial Number : 1100424
System ID : 424
Number of Nodes : 2
Master Node : 0
Nodes Online : 0,1
Nodes in Cluster : 0,1
-----System Capacity (MB)-----
Total Capacity : 6277120
Allocated Capacity : 687872
Free Capacity : 5589248
Failed Capacity : 0
---------System Fan---------
Primary Node ID : 0
Secondary Node ID : 1
State : OK
LED : Green
Speed : Normal
Primary Node ID : 1
Secondary Node ID : 0
State : OK
LED : Green
Speed : Normal
--------System Descriptors--------
Location :
Owner :
Contact :
Comment :
The following example shows system parameters (–param option) for a HP 3PAR storage system:
cli% showsys -param
System parameters from configured settings
---Parameter---- ---Value----
RawSpaceAlertFC : 0
RawSpaceAlertNL : 0
RemoteSyslog : 1
RemoteSyslogHost : 192.168.6.15
SparingAlgorithm : Minimal
CopySpaceReclaim : 0
EventLogSize : 3M
VVRetentionTimeMax : 336 Hours
NOTES
•See “setsys” (page 333) for information on setting the threshold parameters indicated by the
Value column in the output for showsys –param.
•In the output for showsys –param,(from configured settings) indicates that the
system parameters displayed have been successfully read from the Persistent Repository (PR).
If the PR is not available (most likely because of problems with the admin volume), the output
reads (from default settings) and the values displayed would indicate the system
484 Show Commands
defaults. When (from default settings) is displayed, system parameters cannot be
updated.
•The system capacity information may have some overlaps among Volumes, System, Failed
Capacities.
•If the VVRetentionTimeMax is 0, then the volume retention time in the system is disabled.
showsys 485
showsysmgr
DESCRIPTION
The showsysmgr displays startup state information about the system manager.
SYNTAX
showsysmgr
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the startup state information about the system manager. In this
example, the system manager reports that it is up and running.
cli% showsysmgr
System is up and running from Thu May 24 15:39:22 PDT 2007
If the system has experienced a power failure, issuing the showsysmgr command displays the
following message:
cli% showsysmgr
System is recovering from a previous powerfailure. Please use the CLI commands for
'showvv', 'showld', 'showpd' to see any unstarted vvs, lds, pds.
If the system has attempted powerfail recovery three times, and during the recovery attempts
encountered kernal panics because of hardware or software errors, the following message is
displayed. See “NOTES” (page 487) in the following section for additional information.
cli% showsysmgr
System is recovering from a previous power failure.
Please use the 'showvv', 'showld', 'showpd' CLI commands to
check for not started vvs, lds, pds.
Use force_idewipe to wipe pfail partititon and restart system with all
lds/vvs being checked. This can cause some data to be lost.
If the system has attempted powerfail recovery, and during the recovery encountered kernal panics
because of hardware or software errors, the error could be associated with a specific volume. The
486 Show Commands
following message is displayed. See “NOTES” (page 487) in the following section for additional
information.
cli% showsysmgr
System is recovering from a previous power failure.
Please use the 'showvv', 'showld', 'showpd' CLI commands to
check for not started vvs, lds, pds.
Use force_iderecovery to start pfail recovery.
VVs with the id(s) 1 will lose data.
NOTES
•If the system has experienced a power failure, issue the showvv,showld, or showpd
commands to determine if any physical disks, logical disks, or virtual volumes are unstarted.
If the system stays in the powerfail state for longer than 15 minutes, the setsysmgr command
can be issued with caution. See the “setsysmgr” (page 336) command for more information.
CAUTION: Issuing the setsysmgr force_idewipe command can result in data loss.
•If the system has experienced a power failure, any cached data is saved to the IDE partition
of each node. Upon restoration of power, the saved cached data is reapplied (powerfail
recovery). During powerfail recovery, if kernal panics are encountered because of hardware
or software errors, the powerfail recovery process fails. In such cases, the system attempts
recovery three times. After three attempts, the system waits for user intervention. Issue the
setsysmgr force_idewipe command to force the system to restart and check all logical
disks and virtual volumes upon restarting. See “setsysmgr” (page 336) for more information.
•During powerfail recovery, a kernal panic because of hardware or software errors might
indicate a damaged volume. In such cases, after the system restarts, it waits for user
intervention. Issue the setsysmgr force_iderecovery command to force the system to
start another powerfail recovery. Any saved data for virtual volumes with IDs displayed in the
showsysmgr command output can be lost. Those virtual volumes are checked when the system
restarts. See “setsysmgr” (page 336) for more information.
showsysmgr 487
showtarget
DESCRIPTION
The showtarget command displays information about unrecognized targets.
SYNTAX
showtarget [<Node_WWN>...]
showtarget -lun <Node_WWN>...
showtarget <-inq|-mode> [-page <num>] [-d] <LUN_WWN>...
showtarget -rescan
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-lun
Display the information for remote LUNs.
-inq
Display the SCSI inquiry page information.
-mode
Display the SCSI mode page information.
-page <page_num>
Specify the SCSI page number for the inquiry and mode information. For SCSI inquiry information,
the valid <page_num> is 0, 80, and 83. For SCSI mode information, the valid <page_num> is
3 and 4. This option needs to be used together with -inq or -mode. If this option is not specified,
the default <page_num> is 0.
-d
Display detailed information for the SCSI inquiry or mode page.
-rescan
Rescan the port to find the unknown target.
SPECIFIERS
<Node_WWN>
Indicates the World Wide Name (WWN) of the node.
<LUN_WWN>
Indicates the World Wide Name (WWN) of a LUN exported from an unknown target.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about unrecognized targets:
cli% showtarget
Port ----Lun_WWN----- ----Port_WWN---- ---State---
488 Show Commands
0:5:2 50002AC00014001F 20520002AC00001F peer_volume
1:5:2 50002AC00014001F 21520002AC00001F peer_volume
If unknown targets are found, information (Port,LUN_WWN,Port WWN, and State) about each
target found is displayed.
NOTES
Some hosts might appear as unknown targets.
showtarget 489
showtask
DESCRIPTION
The showtask command displays information about tasks. By default, this command displays all
non-system tasks on the system within the last 24 hours.
SYNTAX
showtask [options <arg>] [<task_name> | <pattern>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–all
Specifies that all scheduled tasks will be displayed. Unless the -all option is specified, system
tasks are not displayed.
–done
Display includes only tasks that are successfully completed.
–failed
Display includes only tasks that are unsuccessfully completed.
–active
Display includes only tasks that are currently in progress.
–t <hours>
Show only tasks that started within the past <hours>, where <hours> is an integer from 1
through 9999999.
–type <task_type | pattern>
Specifies that specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and that all tasks whose types
match the specified pattern are displayed. To see the different task types use the showtask column
help.
–d <task_ID>...
Show detailed task status for specified tasks. Tasks must be explicitly specified using their task IDs
<task_ID>. Multiple task IDs can be specified. This option cannot be used in conjunction with
other options.
-sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows with the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
None.
490 Show Commands
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays all tasks on a system. In this case, the last task is still in progress.
cli% showtask
Id Type Name Status Phase Step -------StartTime--------- --------FinishTime--------
1 tune_vv testr1 Done 0/0 0/0 Wed Oct 06 18:44:05 EDT 2004 Wed Oct 06 18:44:57 EDT
2004
2 tune_vv testr1 Done 0/0 0/0 Wed Oct 06 19:44:34 EDT 2004 Wed Oct 06 19:45:10 EDT
2004
3 tune_vv testr1 Active 2/3 5/8 Wed Oct 06 19:49:31 EDT 2004
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The task ID for the displayed task.
•Type. The task type. Task types are as follows:
vv_copy. Track physical copy operations (createvvcopy command).◦
◦move_regions. Track region move operations (movereg command).
◦promote_sv. Track virtual copy promotes (promotesv command). Requires an HP
3PAR Virtual Copy license.
◦remote_copy_sync. Track Remote Copy volume group synchronizations (syncrcopy
and startrcopygroup commands). Requires an HP 3PAR Remote Copy license.
◦remote_copy_reverse. Track the reversal of a Remote Copy group.
◦remote_copy_failover. Track the change-over of a secondary volume group to a
primary volume group.
◦remote_copy_recover. Track the starting of synchronization after a failover operation
from the original secondary cluster to the original primary.
◦remote_copy_restore. Track the restore process for groups that have already been
recovered.
◦compact_cpg. Track space consolidation in common provisioning groups. Requires a
HP 3PAR Dynamic Optimization license.
◦compact_lds. Track space consolidation in logical disks. Requires a HP 3PAR Dynamic
Optimization license.
◦snapspace_accounting. Track progress of snapshot space usage accounting.
◦check_vv. Track progress of the checkvv operation.
◦tune_sd. Track HP 3PAR System Tuner volume tuning operations (tunetpvv command).
Requires an HP 3PAR Dynamic Optimization license.
◦tune_vv. Track 3PAR System Tuner volume tuning operations (tunealdvv command).
Requires an HP 3PAR Dynamic Optimization license.
◦tune_vv_restart. Track restarted HP 3PAR System Tuner volume tuning operations
(tunealdvv –restart command). Requires an HP 3PAR Dynamic Optimization
license.
showtask 491
◦tune_vv_rollback. Track rolling back of 3PAR System Tuner volume tuning operation
that was previously interrupted (tunealdvv –rollback command). Requires an HP
3PAR Dynamic Optimization license.
◦scheduled_task. Track tasks that have been executed by the system scheduler.
◦system_task. Track tasks that are periodically run by the system.
◦background_task. Track commands that have been started via the starttask
command.
•Name. The name of the system object that is being operated on. When there are multiple
objects, those objects are not identified individually but as a group (for example, multiple
LDs or multiple CPGs).
•Status. The task state. Task states are as follows:
Done. The task has completed successfully.◦
◦Active. The task is still in process.
◦Cancelled. The task was canceled by you.
◦Failed. The task failed to complete because of a reason other than user cancellation.
•Phase. For Active tasks, indicates the number of completed phases and the total number
of phases in the current step, using the syntax <#completed_phase>/<#total_phases>.
Note that each step is composed of an arbitrary number of phases.
•Step. For Active tasks, indicates the number of completed steps and the total number of
steps in the current task, using the syntax <#completed_step>/<#total_steps>. Note
that each task is composed of an arbitrary number of steps.
•Start Time. Indicates the time that the task was started.
•Finish Time. For Done,Cancelled, and Failed tasks, indicates the time that the task
stopped because of completion, cancelation, or failure.
•Priority. Displays the priority value such as high, med or low for physical copy or promote
tasks and for all other tasks, n/a will be displayed.
•User. The name of the user that initiated the task. A user sys:3parsys indicates that the
task was generated internally. A user displayed as n/a indicates that a user was not specified
for the task.
The following example shows details about a specific task using the task ID (task ID is 3).
cli% showtask –d 3
Id Type Name Status Phase Step -------StartTime-------
------FinishTime----
3 snapspace_accounting ss_accounting done --- --- 2009-02-27 11:37:46 PST
2009-02-27 11:37:48 PST
Detailed status:
2009-02-27 11:37:46 PST Created task.
2009-02-27 11:37:46 PST Started snapshot usage data collection process for VVs
2009-02-27 11:37:46 PST Updated snapshot usage data for VV North
2009-02-27 11:37:47 PST Updated snapshot usage data for VV VV_Tech_1.0020.0000.ro
2009-02-27 11:37:48 PST Updated snapshot usage data for VV VV_Tech_1
2009-02-27 11:37:48 PST Finished snapshot usage data collection process.
492 Show Commands
NOTES
•See the HP 3PAR Command Line Interface Administrator’s Manual for additional information
and examples regarding task management and task management commands, as well as
information about Dynamic Optimization.
•By default, this command shows all tasks that started within the last 24 hours.
•The system stores information for the most recent 1000 tasks. Task ID numbers roll at 9999.
showtask 493
showtemplate
DESCRIPTION
The showtemplate command displays existing templates that can be used for Virtual Volume
(VV), Logical Disk (LD), or Common Provisioning Group (CPG) creation.
SYNTAX
showtemplate [options] [<template_name_or_pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–t VV|LD|CPG
Specifies that the template type displayed is a VV, LD, or CPG template.
–fit
Specifies that the properties of the template is displayed to fit within 80 character lines.
SPECIFIERS
<template_name_or_pattern>
Specifies the name of a template, using up to 31 characters or glob-style pattern for matching
multiple template names. If not specified, all templates are displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the properties of all templates in CLI line format:
cli% showtemplate
Name Type Other Options
Test1 VV -nro -desc "1st Shot"
CPGTemplate CPG -nro -ro -t r1 -ha cage -ssz 2 -ss 256 -sdgs 0
NOTES
If no options are specified, all existing templates are displayed.
494 Show Commands
showtoc
DESCRIPTION
The showtoc command displays the system table of contents summary that provides a summary
of the system’s resources.
SYNTAX
showtoc
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the system table of contents.:
cli% showtoc
gltab toc generation: 313
Toc header magic num: 42444854
Toc in use len: 70944
Toc not in use len: 0
Toc on disk len: 38912
Toc version: 69
Toc generation: 313
Toc pd_entries: 80
Toc ld_entries: 5
Toc vv_entries: 1
Toc cage_entries: 4
NOTES
None.
showtoc 495
showtocgen
DESCRIPTION
The showtocgen command displays the table of contents generation number.
SYNTAX
showtocgen
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the table of contents generation number:
cli% showtocgen
Table of Contents generation number: 4292
NOTES
The table of contents generation number increases each time there is a change in the system
configuration.
496 Show Commands
showuser
DESCRIPTION
The showuser command displays information about one or all users, including the username,
authority level, and system resources to which a given user has access.
The showuser command shows account information for local users (those created with the
createuser command) or shows the SSH key information for local and LDAP users (enabled by the
setauthparam command).
SYNTAX
The syntax for the showuser command can be the following:
•showuser [-oneline] [<user_name>]
•showuser -k
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-k
Show users who have set a public SSH key.
-oneline
Shows all information about a user on one line.
SPECIFIERS
<user_name>
Specifies your login name, using up to 31 characters. This specifier is not required on the command
line. If no specifier is used, information about all users is displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
Because the output is only for local users and is further limited when the user is at the Browse or
Service authority level, an LDAP user cannot see any other user account information. The
showuserconn command can be used to the see the role levels of the current user and whether
they are local or LDAP.
EXAMPLES
cli% showuser Joe
Username Domain Privilege Default
Joe all super N
The previous example indicates user Joe being a member of all domains. Valid output includes
all, or <domain_name>. The columns are identified as follows:
•Username. Your user name.
•Domain. The domain to which the user belongs.
•Privilege. The role level required to run the command.
•Default. Indicates whether the domain is the default domain of the user.
showuser 497
NOTES
•Users are created using the createuser command. See “createuser” (page 149) for more
information.
•For the first usage (without the -k option), the showuser command displays account information
for all local users when the <username> is not provided or the account information for just
the local user with the name <username> when it is provided. The output for users with
Browse or Service level roles is limited to the user's own accounts and if the <username> is
provided, it must be the user's name. The output shows the users' username, domain, role,
and whether the domain is the default for the user.
•Because the output is only for local users and is further limited when the user is at the Browse
or Service authority level, an LDAP user may not see any user account information. Alternatively,
both local and LDAP users can use the showuserconn command to see the role of the current
user. See the column help for showuserconn for the different definition of "local" used in
the output of showuserconn.
•For the second usage (-k), users who have set a public SSH key with the setsshkey command
are displayed, one per line. For users with Browse or Service role levels, the output is limited
to the current user.
•A Domain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to
1. The listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option, or
if the CLI was started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h
and setclienv -h for details of the environment variables.
498 Show Commands
showuseracl
DESCRIPTION
The showuseracl command displays a user’s access control list (ACL).
SYNTAX
showuseracl
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays ACL information about all system users:
cli% showuseracl
User Operation Object_Names_or_Patterns
suser updatevv avvro*
buser updatevv avvr*,vv0,cpvv0,tpvv0 –f
ruser updatevv vv0 cpvv0 tpvv0 avv*
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•User. Your user name.
•Operation. The command each user is allowed to execute.
•Object_Names_or_Patterns. The object on which the operations are performed.
NOTES
None.
showuseracl 499
showuserconn
DESCRIPTION
The showuserconn command displays information about users who are currently connected
(logged in) to the HP 3PAR storage system.
SYNTAX
showuserconn [options <arg>][<pid> ...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-current
Shows all information about the current connection only.
-d
Specifies more detailed information about the user connection.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting <dir>
can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same
information in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
<pid>
Specifies the HP 3PAR storage system process ID for the user connection.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about user connections:
cli% showuserconn
Id Name --IP_Addr--- Domain Level ----Connected_since---- Current
23180 Joe 192.168.17.7 all super 2007/05/31 15:02:53 PDT current
---------------------------------------------------------------------
1 total
500 Show Commands
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. Your HP 3PAR storage system identification number.
•Name. Indicates the user name under which you logged in.
•IP_Addr. The IP address where the user connection exists.
NOTE: The Domain column is displayed only if the CLI was started with the -listdom global
option or with the LISTDOM environment variable. Refer to the HP 3PAR Command Line Interface
Administrator’s Manual for instructions on using global options and setting environment variables.
•Domain. Indicates the domain in which the user has roles.
•Level. Indicates the user’s role level.
NOTES
ADomain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to 1. The
listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option or if the CLI was
started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Issue cli -h and setclienv -h for
details of the environment variables.
showuserconn 501
showversion
DESCRIPTION
The showversion command displays information about the storage server software. Use this
command to determine if your system is using the latest software version.
SYNTAX
showversion [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–a
Show all component versions.
–b
Show build levels.
–s
Show release version number only (useful for scripting).
If no options are specified, the overall version of the software is displayed.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays comprehensive information about the system software:
cli% showversion
Release version 2.3.1.60 (DEVEL)
Patches: None
Component Name Version
CLI Server 2.3.1
CLI Client 2.3.1
System Manager 2.3.1
Kernel 2.3.1
TPD Kernel Code 2.3.1
NOTES
•When displaying all versions, for certain components multiple versions might be installed. In
such cases, multiple lines are displayed.
•If no options are specified, the overall version of the software is displayed.
502 Show Commands
showvlun
DESCRIPTION
The showvlun command displays information about Virtual Volume Logical Unit Numbers (VLUNs)
in the system, such as all active and template VLUNs. The display is divided into two sections: the
upper provides information about active VLUNs and the lower provides information about VLUN
templates.
SYNTAX
showvlun [options <arg>]
showvlun -listcols
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–listcols
List the columns available to be shown in the -showcols option described below (see clihelp
-col showvlun for help on each column).
The [options] are generally of two kinds: those that select the type of information that is displayed,
and those that filter the list of VLUNs that are displayed.
By default (if none of the information selection options below are specified) the following columns
are shown: LUN VVName HostName Host_WWN Port Type
Options that select the type of information shown include the following:
-showcols <column>[,<column>...]
Explicitly select the columns to be shown using a comma-separated list of column names. For this
option the full column names are shown in the header.
Run 'showvlun -listcol' to list the available columns.
Run 'clihelp -col showvlun' for a description of each column.
–lvw
Show the World Wide Name (WWN) of the Virtual Volume (VV) associated with the VLUN.
-pathsum
Shows path summary information for active VLUNs.
Options that filter the VLUNs that are displayed include the following:
–a
Shows only active VLUNs.
–t
Shows only VLUN templates.
–host {<hostname|pattern>}...
Specifies that only VLUNs exported to hosts that match the hostname or glob-style patterns. Refer
to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further information.
–v {<VV_name>|<pattern>}...
Requests that only Logical Disks (LD) mapped to VVs that match any of the specified names or
patterns be displayed. Multiple volume names or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated
list (for example -vv <VV_name>,<VV_name>...).
showvlun 503
–l {<LUN|pattern>}...
Specifies that only exports to the specified LUN are displayed. This specifier can be repeated to
display information for multiple LUNs.
–nodes <nodelist>
Requests that only VLUNs for specific nodes are displayed. The node list is specified as a series
of integers separated by commas (for example 0,1,2). The list can also consist of a single integer
(for example 1).
–slots <slotlist>
Requests that only VLUNs for specific slots are displayed. The slot list is specified as a series of
integers separated by commas (for example 0,1,2). The list can also consist of a single integer
(for example 1).
–ports <portlist>
Requests that only VLUNs for specific ports are displayed. The port list is specified as a series of
integers separated by commas (for example 0,1,2). The list can also consist of a single integer
(for example 1).
-domain {<domain_name|pattern>}...
Shows only the VLUNs whose VVs are in domains with names that match one or more of the
<domainname_or_pattern> options. This option does now allow listing objects within a domain
of which the user is not a member. Multiple domain names or patterns can be repeated using a
comma-separated list.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting <dir>
can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays all active and template VLUNs using glob-style patterns:
cli% showvlun –v *.2,*.3
Active VLUNs
Lun VVname Host ----Host_WWN---- Port Type
2 tpv.2 pe750–07 210000E08B056C21 0:2:1 host
3 tpv.3 pe750–07 210000E08B056C21 0:2:1 host
2 tpv.2 pe750–07 210100E08B256C21 1:2:1 host
3 tpv.3 pe750–07 210100E08B256C21 1:2:1 host
2 test.2 sun 210000E08B023F71 0:2:2 host
3 test.3 sun 210000E08B023F71 0:2:2 host
504 Show Commands
2 test.2 sun 210000E08B023C71 1:5:1 host
3 test.3 sun 210000E08B023C71 1:5:1 host
-----------------------------------------------
8
VLUN Templates
Lun VVname Host ----Host_WWN---- Port Type
2 tpv.2 pe750–07 ---------------- --- host
3 tpv.3 pe750–07 ---------------- --- host
2 test.2 sun ---------------- --- host
3 test.3 sun ---------------- --- host
----------------------------------------------
4
The columns in the previous examples are identified as follows:
•Lun. The LUN to which the virtual volume is exported.
•VVname. The name of the exported virtual volume.
•Host. The name of the host to which the virtual volume is exported. In the Templates section,
the port-presents rule contains no value.
•Host_WWN. The WWN of the host to which the virtual volume is exported. In the Templates
section, dashes mean this column does not apply.
•Port. The port (node:slot:port) on which the host to which the virtual volume is exported
appears. In the Templates section, the host-sees rule contains dashes.
•Type. The type of export rule that is applied when the virtual volume is exported. Possible
entries are port for port-presents, host for host-sees, hostset for host-set VLUNs,
matched-set for matched-set.
NOTES
•ADomain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to
1. The listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option or if
the CLI was started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h and
setclienv -h for details of the environment variables.
•See “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for more information.
showvlun 505
showvv
DESCRIPTION
The showvv command displays information about all Virtual Volumes (VVs) or a specific VV in a
system.
SYNTAX
•showvv [options <arg>] [<VV_name|pattern|VV_set>...]
•showvv -listcols
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-listcols
List the columns available to be shown in the -showcols option described below (see clihelp
-col showvv for help on each column).
The [options] are generally of two kinds: those that select the type of information that is
displayed, and those that filter the list of VVs that are displayed.
By default (if none of the information selection options below are specified) the following columns
are shown:
Id,Name,Prov,Type,CopyOf,BsId,Rd,State,Adm_Rsvd_MB,Snp_Rsvd_MB,
Usr_Rsvd_MB,VSize_MB.
Options that select the type of information shown include the following:
-showcols <column>[,<column>...]
Explicitly select the columns to be shown using a comma-separated list of column names. For this
option the full column names are shown in the header.
Run showvv -listcol to list the available columns.
Run clihelp -col showvv for a description of each column.
–d
Displays detailed information about the VVs. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Rd,Mstr,Prnt,Roch,Rwch,PPrnt,PBlkRemain,VV_WWN,CreationTime.
–pol
Displays policy information about the VV. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Policies.
–s
Displays Logical Disk (LD) space use by the VVs. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Prov,Type,Adm_Rsvd_MB,Adm_Used_MB,Snp_Rsvd_MB,Snp_Used_MB,
Snp_Used_Perc,Warn_Snp_Perc,Limit_Snp_Perc,Usr_Rsvd_MB,Usr_Used_MB,
Usr_Used_Perc,Warn_Usr_Perc,Limit_Usr_Perc,Tot_Rsvd_MB,VSize_MB.
NOTE: For snapshot (vcopy) VVs, the Adm_Used_MB , Snp_Used_MB , Usr_Used_MB and the
corresponding _Perc columns have an (*) before the number for two reasons: to indicate that the
number is an estimate that must be updated using the updatesnapspace command, and to indicate
that the number is not included in the total for the column since the corresponding number for the
snapshot's base VV already includes that number.
506 Show Commands
–r
Displays raw space used by the VVs. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Prov,Type,Adm_RawRsvd_MB,Adm_Rsvd_MB,Snp_RawRsvd_MB,Snp_Rsvd_MB,
Usr_RawRsvd_MB,Usr_Rsvd_MB,Tot_RawRsvd_MB,Tot_Rsvd_MB,VSize_MB.
-zone
Displays mapping zone information for VVs. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Prov,Type,VSize_MB,Adm_Zn,Adm_Free_Zn,Snp_Zn,Snp_Free_Zn,Usr_Zn,
Usr_Free_Zn.
-g
Displays the volume’s SCSI geometry settings for VVs. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,SPT,HPC,SctSz.
–alert
Indicates whether alerts are posted on behalf of the VVs. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Prov,Type,VSize_MB,Snp_Used_Perc,Warn_Snp_Perc,Limit_Snp_Perc,
Usr_Used_Perc,Warn_Usr_Perc,Limit_Usr_Perc,Alert_Adm_Fail_Y,
Alert_Snp_Fail_Y,Alert_Snp_Wrn_YAlert_Snp_Lim_Y,Alert_Usr_Fail_Y,
Alert_Usr_Wrn_Y,Alert_Usr_Lim_Y.
–alerttime
Shows times when alerts were posted (when applicable). The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Alert_Adm_Fail,Alert_Snp_Fail,Alert_Snp_Wrn,Alert_Snp_Lim,
Alert_Usr_Fail,Alert_Usr_Wrn,Alert_Usr_Lim.
–cpprog
Shows the physical copy and promote progress. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Prov,Type,CopyOf,VSize_MB,Copied_MB,Copied_Perc.
–cpgalloc
Shows CPGs from which a VV is allocated, if any. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Prov,Type,UsrCPG,SnpCPG.
-state
Shows the detailed state information for the VVs. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Prov,Type,State,Detailed_State.
-hist
Shows the history information of the VVs. The following columns are shown:
ID,Name,Prov,Type,CreationTime,ExpirationEndTime,ExpirationTime,
SpaceCalcTime,Comment.
-rcopy
This option appends two columns, RcopyStatus and RcopyGroup, to any of the display options
above.
-notree
Do not display VV names in tree format. Unless either the -notree or the -sortcol option
described below are specified, the VVs are ordered and the names are indented in tree format to
indicate the virtual copy snapshot hierarchy.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
showvv 507
Sorts command output based on the column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
<dir> can be specified as follows:
•inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
•dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by the values in later columns.
ADomain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to 1. The
listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option, or if the CLI was
started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set.
The VV filtering option include:
-p <pattern>
Pattern for matching virtual volumes to show (see below for description of <pattern>) If the -p
option is specified multiple times, each instance of <pattern> adds additional candidate disks
that match that pattern.
A<pattern> is one or more of the following:
•-cpg {<CPG_name|pattern>}...
Displays only VVs with UsrCPG or SnpCPG names that matches one or more of the
<CPG_name> or <pattern> specifier. Multiple <CPG_name> or <pattern> specifiers can
be repeated using a comma-separated list (for example -cpg
<CPG_name>,<CPG_name>...).
•-prov {<prov|pattern>}...
Displays only VVs with prov (provisioning) values that match the <prov> or <pattern>
specifier. Multiple <prov> or <patterns> specifiers can be repeated using a
comma-separated list (for example -prov <prov>,<prov>...).
•–type <type|pattern>...
Displays only VVs of types that match the <type> or <pattern> specifier. Multiple <type>
or <patterns> specifiers can be repeated using a comma-separated list (for example -type
<type>,<type>...).
•–host {<host_name|pattern>}...
Displays only VVs that are exported as VLUNs to hosts with names that match one or more of
the specified <host_name> or <patterns>. See “SPECIFIERS” (page 509) for additional
information on patterns as used with this command. Multiple <host_name> or <pattern>
specifiers can be repeated using a comma-separated list (for example -host
<host_name>,<host_name>...).
•-baseid {<baseid|pattern>}...
Displays only VVs with bsId column that matches one or more of the <baseid> or <pattern>
specifiers. Multiple <baseid> or <pattern> specifiers can be repeated using a
comma-separated list (for example -baseid <baseid>,<baseid>...).
•-copyof {<vv_name|pattern>}...
Displays only VVs with CopyOf columns that match one or more of the <copyof> or
<pattern> specifiers. Multiple groups or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated
list (for example -rcopygroup <group_name>,<group_name>...).
508 Show Commands
•-rcopygroup {<group_name|pattern>}...
Displays only VVs that are in Remote Copy groups that match one or more of the specified
groups or patterns. Multiple groups or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated
list (for example -rcopygroup <group_name>,<group_name>...).
•-policy <policy|pattern>...
Show only VVs whose policy matches the one or more of the policies or patterns.
-domain {<domain_name|pattern>}...
Shows only VVs that are in domains with names matching one or more of the specified domains
or patterns. This option does now allow listing objects within a domain of which the user is not a
member. Multiple domain names or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated list (for
example -domain <domain_name>,<domain_name>...).
-expired
Show only VVs that have expired.
-exp <time>{d|D|h|H}
Specifies the relative time from the current time that volume will expire. <time> is a positive integer
value and in the range of 1 - 43,800 hours (1,825 days). Time can be optionally specified in days
or hours providing either dor Dfor day and hor Hfor hours following the entered time value.
-retained
Shows only VVs that have a retention time.
-failed
Shows only failed VVs.
The following VV filtering options are deprecated and will be removed in a future release. Instead,
use the appropriate -p <pattern> option described above.
-cpg <CPG_name|pattern>...
Show only VVs whose UsrCPG or SnpCPG matchs the one or more of the <CPG_name> or
<pattern> specifier. This option is deprecated without the preceding -p option. Use the -p
-cpg option described above instead.
-tpvv
Show only Thin Provisioned VVs (TPVVs). This option is deprecated. Use the -p -prov tp* option
described above instead.
-host <hostname|pattern>...
Show only VVs that are exported as VLUNs to hosts with names that match one or more of the
<hostname> or <pattern> specifier. This option is deprecated without the preceding -p option.
Use -p -host option described above instead.
-rcopygroup <groupname|pattern>...
Show only VVs that are in Remote Copy groups that match one or more of the <groupname> or
<pattern> specifier. This option is deprecated without the preceding -p option. Use -p
-rcopygroup option described above instead.
SPECIFIERS
NOTE: If one or more <VV_name|pattern> are specified, then the virtual volumes with names
that match any of the patterns are listed. Otherwise, all virtual volumes are listed. The virtual volumes
shown include snapshots. Patterns are glob-style (shell-style) patterns. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern”
(page 12) for further information.
<VV_name|pattern|VV_set>...
showvv 509
Specifies the VV name (up to 31 characters in length) matching the glob-style pattern or that are
members of the supplied VV set will have their information displayed. The VV_set name must start
with set:. This specifier can be repeated to display configuration information about multiple VVs.
This specifier is not required on the command line. If not specified, configuration information for
all VVs in the system is displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about all virtual volumes:
cli% showvv
----Rsvd(MB)----- -(MB)--
Id Name Prov Type CopyOf BsId Rd -Detailed_State- Adm Snp Usr VSize
0 admin full base --- 0 RW normal 0 0 10240 10240
19 aldvv full base --- 19 RW normal 0 0 10240 10240
20 bar-remote full peer --- 20 RW normal 0 0 20480 20480
11 mytpvv tpvv base --- 11 RW normal 512 0 2048 1024
6 rcopy.0 cpvv base --- 6 RW normal 512 2048 10240 10240
7 rcopy.1 cpvv base --- 7 RW normal 512 2048 10240 10240
21 s026-foo full peer --- 21 RW normal 0 0 10240 10240
18 testgrow full base --- 18 RW normal 0 0 5242880 5242880
12 tpvv full base --- 12 RW normal 0 0 1024 1024
13 vv.0 full base --- 13 RW normal 0 0 1024 1024
14 vv.1 full base --- 14 RW normal 0 0 1024 1024
15 vv.2 full base --- 15 RW normal 0 0 1024 1024
16 vv.3 full base --- 16 RW normal 0 0 1024 1024
17 vv.4 full base --- 17 RW normal 0 0 1024 1024
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 total 1536 4096 5322752 5321728
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. The ID of the virtual volume.
•Name. The name of the virtual volume.
•Prov. The provisioning for the VV. Can be one of the following:
full. Fully provisioned VV, either with no Snp (snapshot) space or with statically allocated
Snp space.
◦
◦tpvv. Thin Provisioned VV, with space for the base volume allocated from the Usr space
that is associated with the UsrCPG. Snapshots allocate space from the Snp space
associated with the SnpCPG (if any).
◦cpvv. Commonly Provisioned VV. The Usr space for this VV is fully provisioned and the
Snp space is associated with a SnpCPG.
◦tpsd. An old-style Thin Provisioned VV (created on a 2.2.4 release or earlier) where
both the base VV and snapshot data are allocated from the Snp space associated with
the UsrCPG.
◦snp. Since the VV is Type vcopy (snapshot) it is the provisioning that is associated with
the base VV.
◦Domain. The domain to which the virtual volume belongs. Valid values are –or
<domain_name>. If the domain does not exist, -is displayed. The Domain column can
be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to 1. The listdom
510 Show Commands
option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option or if the CLI was
started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable.
•Type. Indicates the copy type of virtual volume and can be one of the following:
base. Base volume (not a copy).◦
◦pcopy. Physical copy (full copy).
◦vcopy. Snapshot copy (virtual copy).
◦peer. Remote volume admit into the local HP 3PAR storage system.
•CopyOf. Displays the virtual volume from which the copy was made.
---. The virtual volume is a base volume.◦
◦name. The name of the virtual volume from which a copy was made.
•BsID. If the virtual volume is a base volume or a physical copy, the base volume ID number
is the same as the ID number in the Id column. If the virtual volume is a virtual copy, the
column shows the base volume from which the copy was made.
•Rd. Indicates whether the virtual volume is read/write (RW) or read-only (RO).
•Detailed State. Indicates the current status of the virtual volume.
lds_not_started. LDs Not Started.◦
◦needs_check. Needs to be checked for consistency.
◦not_started. VV Not Started.
◦needs_maint_check. A maintenance check is required.
◦internal_consistency_error. An internal consistency error has been encountered.
◦snapdata_invalid. Snapdata Invalid.
◦preserved. One or more sets of an LD is unavailable due to missing chunklets and the
remaining VV data is preserved in a preserved data ld.
◦stale. Parts of the VV contain old data because a copy-on-write operation failed.
◦copy_failed. A promote or copy to this volume failed.
◦degraded_avail. Degraded due to availability.
◦degraded_perf . Degraded due to performance.
◦promoting. Volume is currently the target of a promote.
◦copy_target. Volume is currently the target of a physical copy.
◦resync_target. Volume is currently the target of a resync copy.
◦tuning. Volume is tuning.
◦closing. Volume is closing.
◦removing. Volume is removing.
◦creating. Volume is creating.
showvv 511
◦copy_source. Copy Source.
◦unknown. Volume state unknown.
•Adm. The snapshot administrator space in megabytes.
•Snap. The snapshot space in megabytes.
•user. Your user space in megabytes.
•VSize. Virtual size of volume in MB (1024^2 bytes).
The following example displays detailed information about the system’s virtual volumes:
cli% showvv -d
Id Name Rd Mstr Prnt Roch Rwch PPrnt PBlkRemain -----VV_WWN-----
--------CreationTime------
0 admin RW 1/-/- --- --- --- --- - 50002AC0000001A8 Thu May 24 20:22:07
PDT 2007
7 vv1 RW 1/0/- --- --- --- --- - 50002AC0000701A8 Tue Aug 28 16:41:01
PDT 2007
8 vv2 RW 0/1/- --- --- --- --- - 50002AC0000801A8 Tue Aug 28 16:41:26
PDT 2007
9 vv3 RW 1/0/- --- --- --- --- - 50002AC0000901A8 Tue Aug 28 16:41:37
PDT 2007
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4
The columns in the output above are identified as follows:
•Id. The virtual volume’s ID.
•Name. The virtual volume’s name.
•Rd. The read/write permissions for the volume. Values can be RW (read and write) or RO (read
only).
•Mstr. The master node for the volume responsible for assigning mapping zones.
•Prnt. The ID of the volume’s parent in the snapshot tree.
•Roch. The ID of the read only child volume in the snapshot tree.
•Rwch.The ID of the read write child volume in the snapshot tree.
•PPrnt. The ID of the volume’s physical parent volume.
•PBlkRemain. The number of remaining blocks to be copied from the parent volume (for
physical copy destination).
•VV_WWN. The volume’s World Wide Name.
•CreationTime. The creation date and time of the volume.
The following example displays the distribution of space for each virtual volume:
cli% showvv -s
---Adm--- ---------Snp---------- -----------Usr-----------
--(MB)--- --(MB)--- -(% VSize)-- ---(MB)---- --(% VSize)--
-----(MB)-----
Id Name Prov Type Rsvd Used Rsvd Used Used Wrn Lim Rsvd Used Used Wrn
Lim Tot_Rsvd VSize
0 admin full base 0 0 0 0 0.0 -- -- 10240 10240 100.0 --
-- 10240 10240
512 Show Commands
13 BasketDome cpvv base 0 0 0 0 0.0 2 5 256 256 100.0 --
-- 256 256
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 total 0 0 0 0 0.0 2 5 10496 10496 100.0
10496 10496
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. The ID of the virtual volume.
•Name. The name of the virtual volume.
•Prov. The provisioning for the VV. Can be one of the following:
full. Fully provisioned VV, either with no Snp (snapshot) space or with statically allocated
Snp space.
◦
◦tpvv. Thin Provisioned VV, with space for the base volume allocated from the Usr space
that is associated with the UsrCPG. Snapshots allocate space from the Snp space
associated with the SnpCPG (if any).
◦cpvv. Commonly Provisioned VV. The Usr space for this VV is fully provisioned and the
Snp space is associated with a SnpCPG.
◦tpsd. An old-style Thin Provisioned VV (created on a 2.2.4 release or earlier) where
both the base VV and snapshot data are allocated from the Snp space associated with
the UsrCPG.
◦snp. Since the VV is Type vcopy (snapshot) it is the provisioning that is associated with
the base VV.
•Adm_Rsvd_MB. Adm (snapshot admin or SA) reserved space in megabytes.
•Adm_Used_MB. Adm used space in megabytes.
•Snp_Rsvd_MB. Snp (snapshot data or SD) reserved space in megabytes.
•Snp_Used_MB. Snp used space in megabytes.
•Snp_Used_Perc. Snp used space as a percentage of the virtual size (VSize_MB).
•Warn_Snp_Perc. Percentage of VV virtual size (VSize_MB) at which the Snp_Used_MB will
generate a warning alert.
•Limit_Snp_Perc. Percentage of VV virtual size (VSize_MB) at which the Snp_Used_MB
will be prevented from growing.
•Usr_Rsvd_MB. Usr (User) reserved space in megabytes.
•Usr_Used_MB. Usr used space in megabytes.
•Usr_Used_Perc. Usr used space as a percentage of the virtual size (VSize_MB).
•Warn_Usr_Perc. Percentage of VV virtual size (VSize_MB) at which the Usr_Used_MB
will generate a warning alert.
•Limit_Usr_Perc. Percentage of VV virtual size (VSize_MB) at which the Usr_Used_MB
will be prevented from growing.
•Tot_Rsvd_MB. Total reserved space (Adm_Rsvd_MB +Snp_Rsvd_MB +Usr_Rsvd_MB)
•Tot_RawRsvd_MB. Total raw reserved space (Adm_RawRsvd_MB +Snp_RawRsvd_MB +
Usr_RawRsvd_MB).
showvv 513
The following example displays policy information for virtual volume 0:
cli% showvv -p 0
Id Name Domain Policies
0 admin - stale_ss,system
----------------------------------------------
1
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Id. The virtual volume ID.
•Name. The virtual volume name.
•Domain. The domain to which the virtual volume belongs. Valid values are –or
<domain_name>. If the domain does not exist, -is displayed. The Domain column can be
included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to 1. The listdom option is
also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option or if the CLI was started with
the TPDLISTDOM environment variable.
•Policies. The current policy assigned to the displayed virtual volume.
The following example displays the snapshot space information:
cli% showvv -s -p -prov tp* -host hname
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. The ID of the virtual volume.
The following example displays the detailed state information:
cli% showvv -state
Id Name Prov Type State -Detailed_State-
0 admin full base normal normal
------------------------------------------
1 total
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. The ID of the virtual volume.
•Name. The virtual volume name.
•Prov. The provisioning for the VV. Can be one of the following:
full. Fully provisioned VV, either with no Snp (snapshot) space or with statically allocated
Snp space.
◦
◦tpvv. Thin Provisioned VV, with space for the base volume allocated from the Usr space
that is associated with the UsrCPG. Snapshots allocate space from the Snp space
associated with the SnpCPG (if any).
◦cpvv. Commonly Provisioned VV. The Usr space for this VV is fully provisioned and the
Snp space is associated with a SnpCPG.
◦tpsd. An old-style Thin Provisioned VV (created on a 2.2.4 release or earlier) where
both the base VV and snapshot data are allocated from the Snp space associated with
the UsrCPG.
◦-. Since the VV is Type vcopy (snapshot) it is the provisioning that is associated with the
base VV.
514 Show Commands
•Type. Indicates the copy type of virtual volume and can be one of the following:
base. Base volume (not a copy).◦
◦pcopy. Physical copy (full copy).
◦vcopy. Snapshot copy (virtual copy).
◦peer. Remote volume admit into the local HP 3PAR storage system.
•State. The state of the virtual volume.
normal. The virtual volume is operating normally.◦
◦failed. The virtual volume is operating abnormally.
◦degraded. The virtual volume is degraded.
•Detailed_State. The detailed state of the logical disk.
lds_not_started. The logical disks are not started.◦
◦not_started. The virtual volumes are not started.
◦needs_check. The logical disks needs to be checked for consistency.
◦needs_maint_check. A maintenance check is required.
◦internal_consistency_error. An internal consistency error has been encountered.
◦snapdata_invalid. The Snapdata is invalid.
◦preserved. One or more sets of a logical disk is unavailable due to missing chunklets
and the remaining virtual volume data is preserved in a preserved data logical disk.
◦stale. Parts of the virtual volume contain old data because a copy-on-write operation
failed.
◦copy_failed. A promote or copy to this volume failed.
◦degraded_avail. The availability of the virtual volume is degraded.
◦degraded_perf. The performance of the virtual volume is degraded.
◦promoting. The volume is currently the target of a promote.
◦copy_target. The volume is currently the target of a copy.
◦resync_target. Volume is currently the target of a resync copy.
◦tuning. The volume is currently tuning.
◦closing. The volume is currently closing.
◦removing. The volume is currently removing.
◦creating. The volume is currently creating.
◦copy_source. The volume is a copy source.
◦unknown. The volume state is unknown.
showvv 515
The following example displays raw space usage information for thin provisioned VVs exported
to host hname and all VVs in the tree with the base VV of ID 50.
cli% showvv -r -p -prov tp* -host halfdome -p -baseid 11
--------------------------(MB)---------------------------
----Adm----- ----Snp----- ----Usr----- ----Tot-----
Id Name Prov Type RawRsvd Rsvd RawRsvd Rsvd RawRsvd Rsvd RawRsvd Rsvd VSize_MB
11 HalfDome full base 0 0 0 0 512 256 512 256 256
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 total 0 0 0 0 512 256 512 256 256
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•ID. The ID of the virtual volume.
•Name. The virtual volume name.
•Prov. The provisioning for the VV. Can be one of the following:
full. Fully provisioned VV, either with no Snp (snapshot) space or with statically allocated
Snp space.
◦
◦tpvv. Thin Provisioned VV, with space for the base volume allocated from the Usr space
that is associated with the UsrCPG. Snapshots allocate space from the Snp space
associated with the SnpCPG (if any).
◦cpvv. Commonly Provisioned VV. The Usr space for this VV is fully provisioned and the
Snp space is associated with a SnpCPG.
◦tpsd. An old-style Thin Provisioned VV (created on a 2.2.4 release or earlier) where
both the base VV and snapshot data are allocated from the Snp space associated with
the UsrCPG.
◦-. Since the VV is Type vcopy (snapshot) it is the provisioning that is associated with the
base VV.
•Type. Indicates the copy type of virtual volume and can be one of the following:
base. Base volume (not a copy).◦
◦pcopy. Physical copy (full copy).
◦vcopy. Snapshot copy (virtual copy).
◦peer. Remote volume admit into the local HP 3PAR storage system.
•Adm_RawRsvd_MB. Raw (including RAID overhead) Adm reserved space in MB (1024^2
bytes).
•Adm_Rsvd_MB. Adm (snapshot admin or SA) reserved space in MB Adm
•Snp_RawRsvd_MB. Raw (including RAID overhead) Snp reserved space in MB (1024^2
bytes).
•Snp_Rsvd_MB. Snp (snapshot data or SD) reserved space in MB (1024^2 bytes).
•User_RawRsvd_MB. Raw (including RAID overhead) User reserved space in MB (1024^2
bytes).
•User_Rsvd_MB. Usr (User) reserved space in MB (1024^2 bytes).
•Tot_RawRsvd_MB. Total raw reserved space (Adm_RawRsvd_MB +Snp_RawRsvd_MB+
Usr_RawRsvd_MB).
•Tot_Rsvd_MB. Total reserved space (adm_Rsvd_MB +Snp_Rsvd_MB +Usr_Rsvd_MB).
516 Show Commands
The following example shows the policies associated with a volume:
cli% showvv -pol
Id Name --------------------------Policies--------------------------
0 admin stale_ss,system,no_zero_detect
19 aldvv stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
20 bar-remote stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_cache,no_zero_detect
11 mytpvv stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
6 rcopy.0 stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
7 rcopy.1 stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
21 s026-foo stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_cache,no_zero_detect
18 testgrow stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
12 tpvv stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
13 vv.0 stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
14 vv.1 stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
15 vv.2 stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
16 vv.3 stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
17 vv.4 stale_ss,no_system,no_one_host,no_zero_detect
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•stale_ss. Stale snapshots. If there is no space for a copy-on-write operation, the snapshot
is allowed to go stale but the host write can proceed without an error.
•no_stale_ss. No stale snapshots. If there is no space for a copy-on-write operation, the
host write will fail.
•one_host. This indicates a volume is constrained to export to one host or one host cluster.
•no_one_host. This indicates a volume exported to multiple hosts for use by a cluster-aware
application, or when "port presents" VLUNs are used.
•tp_bzero. This indicates that if a host write results in the allocation of a new data page that
is only partially filled by the host write, then a zero-fill is performed on the unwritten portion
of the data page.
•no_tp_zero. This indicates that the zero-fill operation is bypassed on the allocation of
partially written data pages.
•zero_detect. This indicates that the HP 3PAR storage system will scan for zeros in the
incoming write data.
•no_zero_detect. This indicates that the HP 3PAR storage system will not scan for zeros in
the incoming write data.
•no_cache. This indicates that the HP 3PAR storage system is disabled for write caching, read
caching, and read ahead for the volume. This is a read-only policy and cannot be set.
NOTES
•The per-snapshot space is approximate and must be calculated using the updatesnapspace
command.
•If the -showcols option is used, the full column names are shown in the header otherwise
the header contains abbreviated column names.
•For <cpgname_or_pattern>,<hostname_or_pattern>,<groupname_or_pattern>,
and <domainname_or_pattern>, the patterns are glob-style (shell-style) patterns. Refer to
“Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further information.
•A Domain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to
1. The listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option, or
if the CLI was started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h
and setclienv -h for details of the environment variables.
showvv 517
•The showvv command has new properties that provide statistics on the growth and reclamation
of usr,snp, and adm space within a volume. These properties can be displayed using the
-showcols option. The new properties, as shown by the -listcols option are
Grown_Adm_MB,Grown_Snp_MB,Grown_Snp_SD_MB,Reclaimed_Adm_MB,
Reclaimed_Snp_MB, or Reclaimed_Snp_SD_MB. These statistics are only available via
the CLI and only via the -showcols option.
•For this command: 1 MB = 1048576 bytes.
•If your system is accessible by an OpenStack cloud, you may see volumes with prefixes
indicating the volumes were created through the OpenStack cloud. Volumes created through
the OpenStack cloud use the OpenStack Volume (OSV) and OpenStack Snapshot (OSS)
prefixes.
518 Show Commands
showvvcpg
DESCRIPTION
The showvvcpg command displays the Virtual Volume (VV) space distribution among CPGs.
SYNTAX
showvvcpg [options] [<vvname|pattern|VV_set> ...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-domain <domain_name|pattern>[,<domain_name|pattern>...]
Only show VVs that are in domains with names matching one or more of the specified domain_name
or patterns. Only VVs within domains that the user is a member of can be listed. Multiple domain
names or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated list (for example -domain
<domain_name>,<domain_name>...).
-sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows with the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
<vvname|pattern>...
Only show virtual volumes with the specified names, names that match the glob-style patterns, or
that belong to matching VV sets. The VV set specifier must start with set: and be followed by a
VV set name or glob-style pattern.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows the VV space distribution among CPGs in the ESX domain for VVs
with names that end in sysrpt:
cli% showvvcpg -domain ESX *sysrpt
-----(MB)------ -New (MB)--
Name CPG Adm Snp Usr Adm Snp Usr
esx-sysrpt esx-fc-r1 256 1920 114560 0 0 0
esx-sysrpt esx-ssd-r1 256 1152 7296 0 0 0
-------------------------------------------------
1 - 512 3072 121856 0 0 0
showvvcpg 519
The following example shows VV space distribution for VVs belonging to VV sets with names that
begin with tv:
cli% showvvcpg set:tv*
----(MB)---- -New (MB)--
Name CPG Adm Snp Usr Adm Snp Usr
testvv cpg0 - - 1024 0 0 0
newtestvv cpg0 - - 1024 0 0 0
---------------------------------------
2 - 0 0 2048 0 0 0
The following example shows how Adaptive Optimization has distributed space for the Adm, Snp
and Usr space for a VV among 3 CPGs:
cli% showvvcpg Win2k8-MySqlData
-----(MB)------ -New (MB)--
Name CPG Adm Snp Usr Adm Snp Usr
Win2k8-MySqlData sysrpt-fc-r1 - - 41472 0 0 0
Win2k8-MySqlData sysrpt-nl-r6 352 8064 191872 0 0 0
Win2k8-MySqlData sysrpt-ssd-r1 160 - 384 0 0 0
----------------------------------------------------------
1 - 512 8064 233728 0 0 0
The columns in the previous examples are identified as follows:
•Name. The VV name.
•CPG. The CPG designator.
•Adm. The amount of snapshot administration space.
•Snp. The amount of snapshot data space.
•Usr. The amount of user space.
NOTES
ADomain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to 1. The
listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option, or if the CLI was
started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h and setclienv -h
for details of the environment variables.
The columns shown under the heading New (MB) are empty (-) unless some regions are currently
being moved from one CPG to another. For the duration of the move, the space being moved
appears under both the normal (MB) heading for the old CPG and under the New (MB) heading
for the new CPG. After the move is completed, the space is removed from the old CPG and appears
only under the normal (MB) heading for the new CPG.
520 Show Commands
showvvmap
DESCRIPTION
The showvvmap command displays information about how Virtual Volume (VV) regions are mapped
to logical disks.
SYNTAX
showvvmap <VV_name>
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
Specifies the VV name, using up to 31 characters in length.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about how VV VV1 is mapped:
cli% showvvmap VV1
Space Start(MB) Length(MB) LdId LdName LdOff(MB)
adm 0 0 256 25 VV1.adm.0 0
1 256 256 24 VV1.adm.1 0
snp 0 0 224 23 VV1.snp.0 0
1 224 192 22 VV1.snp.1 0
usr 0 0 256 27 VV1.usr.0 0
1 256 256 26 VV1.usr.1 0
2 512 256 27 VV1.usr.0 256
3 768 256 26 VV1.usr.1 256
4 1024 256 27 VV1.usr.0 512
5 1280 256 26 VV1.usr.1 512
6 1536 256 27 VV1.usr.0 768
7 1792 256 26 VV1.usr.1 768
The columns in the previous example are identified as follows:
•Space. The type of the space (user (usr), snapshot data (snp), or snapshot administration
(adm) for which the region is being used followed by the ID of the region. The number to the
right of the space type are the chunklets for each space.
•Start(MB). The offset from the beginning of the region, in MB.
•Length(MB). The length, or size, of the region in MB.
•LdId. The ID of the logical disk that contains the region.
•LdName. The name of the logical disk that contains the region.
•LdOff(MB). The offset from the beginning of the logical disk that contains the region, in MB.
showvvmap 521
NOTES
None.
522 Show Commands
showvvpd
DESCRIPTION
The showvvpd command displays Virtual Volume (VV) distribution across Physical Disks (PDs) .
SYNTAX
showvvpd [option <arg>] {<VV_name|pattern>}...
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left
to right, beginning with 0. You must specify a column number. In addition, you can specify the
direction of sorting <dir> as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by the values in later columns.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>|<pattern>
Specifies the VV with the specified name (31 character maximum) or matches the glob-style pattern
for which information is displayed. This specifier can be repeated to display configuration
information about multiple VVs. This specifier is not required. If not specified, configuration
information for all VVs in the system is displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays information about multiple VVs. In this case multi.0, multi.1, multi.2
and multi.3 were created using the -cnt 4 option. Using multi.*, the aggregate chunklets for
all the physical disks is displayed:
cli% showvvpd multi.*
Id Cage_Pos SA SD usr total
0 0:0:0 0 0 0 0
1 0:0:1 0 0 0 0
2 0:0:2 0 0 0 0
3 0:0:3 0 0 0 0
4 0:1:0 0 0 0 0
5 0:1:1 0 0 0 0
6 0:1:2 0 0 0 0
7 0:1:3 0 0 0 0
8 0:2:0 0 0 0 0
9 0:2:1 0 0 0 0
10 0:2:2 0 0 0 0
showvvpd 523
11 0:2:3 0 0 0 0
12 0:3:0 0 0 0 0
13 0:3:1 0 0 0 0
14 0:3:2 0 0 0 0
15 0:3:3 0 0 0 0
16 1:0:0 0 0 4 4
17 1:0:1 0 0 4 4
18 1:0:2 0 0 4 4
19 1:0:3 0 0 4 4
20 1:1:0 0 0 4 4
21 1:1:1 0 0 4 4
22 1:1:2 0 0 4 4
23 1:1:3 0 0 4 4
24 1:2:0 0 0 4 4
25 1:2:1 0 0 4 4
26 1:2:2 0 0 4 4
27 1:2:3 0 0 4 4
28 1:3:0 0 0 4 4
29 1:3:1 0 0 4 4
30 1:3:2 0 0 4 4
31 1:3:3 0 0 4 4
32 2:0:0 0 0 4 4
33 2:0:1 0 0 4 4
34 2:0:2 0 0 4 4
35 2:0:3 0 0 4 4
36 2:1:0 0 0 4 4
37 2:1:1 0 0 4 4
38 2:1:2 0 0 4 4
39 2:1:3 0 0 4 4
40 2:2:0 0 0 4 4
41 2:2:1 0 0 4 4
42 2:2:2 0 0 4 4
43 2:2:3 0 0 4 4
44 2:3:0 0 0 4 4
45 2:3:1 0 0 4 4
46 2:3:2 0 0 4 4
47 2:3:3 0 0 4 4
---------------------------
48 total 0 0 128 128
For the example above, if you only specified a single volume you would get the same result. That
is because the four VVs are interleaved across the same logical disks and share the same chunklets.
The following example displays the distribution of space for a single VV (multi.0):
cli% showvvpd multi.0
Id Cage_Pos SA SD usr total
0 0:0:0 0 0 0 0
1 0:0:1 0 0 0 0
2 0:0:2 0 0 0 0
3 0:0:3 0 0 0 0
4 0:1:0 0 0 0 0
5 0:1:1 0 0 0 0
6 0:1:2 0 0 0 0
7 0:1:3 0 0 0 0
8 0:2:0 0 0 0 0
9 0:2:1 0 0 0 0
10 0:2:2 0 0 0 0
11 0:2:3 0 0 0 0
12 0:3:0 0 0 0 0
13 0:3:1 0 0 0 0
14 0:3:2 0 0 0 0
15 0:3:3 0 0 0 0
16 1:0:0 0 0 4 4
524 Show Commands
17 1:0:1 0 0 4 4
18 1:0:2 0 0 4 4
19 1:0:3 0 0 4 4
20 1:1:0 0 0 4 4
21 1:1:1 0 0 4 4
22 1:1:2 0 0 4 4
23 1:1:3 0 0 4 4
24 1:2:0 0 0 4 4
25 1:2:1 0 0 4 4
26 1:2:2 0 0 4 4
27 1:2:3 0 0 4 4
28 1:3:0 0 0 4 4
29 1:3:1 0 0 4 4
30 1:3:2 0 0 4 4
31 1:3:3 0 0 4 4
32 2:0:0 0 0 4 4
33 2:0:1 0 0 4 4
34 2:0:2 0 0 4 4
35 2:0:3 0 0 4 4
36 2:1:0 0 0 4 4
37 2:1:1 0 0 4 4
38 2:1:2 0 0 4 4
39 2:1:3 0 0 4 4
40 2:2:0 0 0 4 4
41 2:2:1 0 0 4 4
42 2:2:2 0 0 4 4
43 2:2:3 0 0 4 4
44 2:3:0 0 0 4 4
45 2:3:1 0 0 4 4
46 2:3:2 0 0 4 4
47 2:3:3 0 0 4 4
---------------------------
48 total 0 0 128 128
The following example displays information for a specific column:
cli% showvvpd -sortcol 5,dec junk
Id Cage_Pos SA SD usr total
6 0:1:2 1 1 1 3
19 1:0:3 1 1 1 3
27 1:2:3 1 1 1 3
30 1:3:2 1 1 1 3
43 2:2:3 1 1 1 3
0 0:0:0 1 1 0 2
3 0:0:3 1 1 0 2
7 0:1:3 0 1 1 2
8 0:2:0 1 1 0 2
9 0:2:1 1 1 0 2
10 0:2:2 1 1 0 2
11 0:2:3 1 1 0 2
15 0:3:3 1 1 0 2
17 1:0:1 1 1 0 2
18 1:0:2 1 1 0 2
20 1:1:0 1 1 0 2
21 1:1:1 1 1 0 2
22 1:1:2 1 1 0 2
24 1:2:0 1 1 0 2
26 1:2:2 1 1 0 2
29 1:3:1 1 1 0 2
31 1:3:3 1 1 0 2
33 2:0:1 1 1 0 2
34 2:0:2 1 1 0 2
39 2:1:3 1 1 0 2
40 2:2:0 1 1 0 2
showvvpd 525
42 2:2:2 1 1 0 2
44 2:3:0 1 1 0 2
45 2:3:1 1 1 0 2
46 2:3:2 0 1 1 2
1 0:0:1 0 1 0 1
2 0:0:2 0 1 0 1
4 0:1:0 0 1 0 1
5 0:1:1 0 1 0 1
12 0:3:0 0 1 0 1
13 0:3:1 1 0 0 1
14 0:3:2 1 0 0 1
16 1:0:0 0 0 1 1
25 1:2:1 0 1 0 1
28 1:3:0 0 1 0 1
32 2:0:0 0 1 0 1
35 2:0:3 0 1 0 1
37 2:1:1 0 1 0 1
38 2:1:2 1 0 0 1
47 2:3:3 1 0 0 1
23 1:1:3 0 0 0 0
36 2:1:0 0 0 0 0
41 2:2:1 0 0 0 0
---------------------------
48 total 32 40 8 80
NOTES
•The command prints the number of chunklets in each physical disk that contain data for the
Snapshot Admin (SA), Snapshot Data (SD), User space as well as the total for all spaces for
all the VVs that match the <VV_name> or <pattern> list. This can be useful in determining
how evenly the VV is striped across the disks.
•Not all the data in the chunklets is necessarily allocated exclusively to the selected VV.In some
cases, only part of a chunklet could be data that is allocated for the VVs.
526 Show Commands
showvvset
DESCRIPTION
The showvvset command lists the Virtual Volume (VV) sets defined on the HP 3PAR storage system
and their members.
SYNTAX
showvvset [options] [<setname_or_pattern>...]
showvvset -vv [options] [<vvname_or_pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-d
Show a more detailed listing of each set.
-vv
Show VV sets that contain the supplied vvnames or patterns
SPECIFIERS
<setname_or_pattern>...
An optional list of setnames or patterns. If no <setname> or <pattern> is specified all sets are
displayed, otherwise only sets with names matching one or more of the setnames or patterns
are displayed. The patterns are glob-style patterns. Refer to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for
further information.
<vvname_or_pattern>...
Specifies that the sets containing virtual volumes with the specified names or matching the glob-style
patterns should be displayed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
To show all VV sets defined to the system:
cli% showvvset
Id Name Members
0 oravv oravv.0
oravv.1
oravv.2
oravv.3
oravv.4
oravv.5
oravv.6
oravv.7
oravv.8
oravv.9
20 sia-1 test
ttpvv.rw
test-sv
bar
showvvset 527
Show the sia-1 set only, with detail:
cli% showvvset -d sia-1
20 sia-1 test This set has a comment
ttpvv.rw
test-sv
bar
Show VV sets containing VVs matching test*:
cli% showvvset -vv test*
Id Name Members
20 sia-1 test
ttpvv.rw
test-sv
bar
NOTES
A Domain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to 1. The
listdom option is also set to 1if the CLI was started with the -listdom option, or if the CLI was
started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h and setclienv -h
for details of the environment variables.
528 Show Commands
showwsapi
DESCRIPTION
The showwsapi command displays the WSAPI server service configuration state as either Enabled
or Disabled. It displays the server currently running status as Active,Inactive or Error. It
also displays the current status of the HTTP and HTTPS ports and their port numbers.
SYNTAX
showwsapi
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
None
SPECIFIERS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example shows the current Web Services API server status:
cli% showwsapi
-Service- -State- -HTTP_State- HTTP_Port -HTTPS_State- HTTPS_Port -Version-
Enabled Active Enabled 8008 Disabled 8080 1.1
NOTES
The version column may display Unknown if the Web Services API server was restarted and is not
ready to accept queries.
showwsapi 529
24 Shutdown Commands
shutdownnode
DESCRIPTION
The shutdownnode command shuts down a system node.
SYNTAX
shutdownnode halt|reboot|wipeid <node_ID>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the node_shutdown right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
halt
Specifies that the nodes are halted after shutdown. If this subcommand is not specified, the reboot
or wipeid (StoreServ 7000 only) subcommand must be used.
reboot
Specifies that the nodes are restarted after shutdown. If this subcommand is not specified, the halt
or wipeid (StoreServ 7000 only) subcommand must be used.
wipeid
StoreServ 7000 only subcommand. this will wipe the EEPROM and leave the node in the halt state,
if this command is not specified then the reboot or halt subcommand must be used.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<node_ID>
Specifies the node, identified by its ID, to be shut down.
EXAMPLES
The following example shuts down system node 0and halts the restarting of the node:
cli% shutdownnode reboot 0
-----System Information-----
System Name : ma1tp001
System Model : InServ S800X
Serial Number : 1000787
-------------------Partial List Of Hosts--------------------
Id Name Persona -WWN/iSCSI_Name- Port IP_addr
0 sunx4150-01 Generic-legacy 2101001B32343495 0:5:1 n/a
1 sunx4150-02 Generic-legacy 2101001B32344695 0:5:1 n/a
2 sunx4150-03 Generic-legacy 2100001B32147595 0:5:1 n/a
530 Shutdown Commands
3 sunx4150-04 Generic-legacy 2101001B32341C95 0:5:1 n/a
4 sunx4150-05 Generic-legacy 2101001B32342495 0:5:1 n/a
5 sunx4150-06 Generic-legacy 2100001B321A6E82 0:5:1 n/a
6 sunx4150-07 Generic-legacy 2101001B3231EE79 0:5:1 n/a
7 sunx4150-08 Generic-legacy 2101001B323BC44C 0:5:1 n/a
8 sunx4150-09 Generic-legacy 2101001B323BFF4C 0:5:1 n/a
9 sunx4150-10 Generic-legacy 2101001B323B0A4C 0:5:1 n/a
There are active tasks on this storage system.
It is recommended that these tasks are either allowed to finish or manually
cancelled before continuing.
Continuing with this REBOOT operation may cause some of these tasks to fail.
Shutting down this node will impact applications running on the system displayed
above
Do you REALLY want to REBOOT this node? yes or no: yes
The node will REBOOT in 15 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
The node will REBOOT in 12 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
The node will REBOOT in 9 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
The node will REBOOT in 6 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
The node will REBOOT in 3 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
NOTES
•The system manager executes a set of validation checks before proceeding with the shutdown.
•If any of the following conditions exists, the shutdown operation will not proceed:
The system software upgrade is in progress.◦
◦The target node is not online.
◦If the system is processing tasks, a warning message is displayed which informs the user
that tasks are running and the shutdown operation may cause some tasks to fail. If the
user confirms the shutdown operation, the specified node will reboot even if tasks are
running. Note:
NOTE: If no tasks are running when the initial checks are performed but subsequently
a new task starts, the shutdown will fail.
◦If any other node is online but not yet integrated into the cluster.
◦If another shutdown node operation is already in progress.
◦If the shutdown node operation will result in the system shutdown due to loss of quorum.
◦One or more orphaned logical disks exist on the system that cannot be preserved.
shutdownnode 531
◦One or more admin logical disks cannot be reset, resulting in the kernel being unable to
access meta data from those LDs.
◦One or more data (user or snap) logical disks cannot be reset, causing their associated
VLUNs to become inaccessible to host applications.
532 Shutdown Commands
shutdownsys
DESCRIPTION
The shutdownsys command shuts down an entire system.
SYNTAX
shutdownsys halt|reboot
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the sys_shutdown right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
halt
Specifies that the system should be halted after shutdown. If this subcommand is not specified, the
reboot subcommand must be used.
reboot
Specifies that the system should be restarted after shutdown. If this subcommand is not specified,
the halt subcommand must be used.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•Do not issue any commands other than showsys while the system is shutting down.
EXAMPLES
The following example shuts down and then restarts the system:
cli% shutdownsys reboot
-----System Information-----
System Name : ma1tp001
System Model : InServ S800X
Serial Number : 1000787
-------------------Partial List Of Hosts--------------------
Id Name Persona -WWN/iSCSI_Name- Port IP_addr
0 sunx4150-01 Generic-legacy 2101001B32343495 6:5:1 n/a
1 sunx4150-02 Generic-legacy 2101001B32344695 6:5:1 n/a
2 sunx4150-03 Generic-legacy 2100001B32147595 6:5:1 n/a
3 sunx4150-04 Generic-legacy 2101001B32341C95 6:5:1 n/a
4 sunx4150-05 Generic-legacy 2101001B32342495 6:5:1 n/a
5 sunx4150-06 Generic-legacy 2100001B321A6E82 6:5:1 n/a
6 sunx4150-07 Generic-legacy 2101001B3231EE79 6:5:1 n/a
shutdownsys 533
7 sunx4150-08 Generic-legacy 2101001B323BC44C 6:5:1 n/a
8 sunx4150-09 Generic-legacy 2101001B323BFF4C 6:5:1 n/a
9 sunx4150-10 Generic-legacy 2101001B323B0A4C 6:5:1 n/a
Shutting down this storage system will impact applications running on the hosts
displayed above
Do you REALLY want to REBOOT this storage system? yes or no: yes
The system will REBOOT in 15 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
The system will REBOOT in 12 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
The system will REBOOT in 9 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
The system will REBOOT in 6 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
The system will REBOOT in 3 seconds
Press the enter key to stop...
The system will REBOOT NOW !!!
NOTES
•The execution of shutdownsys command can affect service. Hence, a confirmation is required
before proceeding with this command.
•After the shutdownsys command is issued, there is no indication from the CLI that the
shutdown is occurring. You can issue the showsys command (“showsys” (page 482)) to display
the current status of the system during the initial stage of the shutdown process and after the
system has fully restarted.
•If the node that was running on the system manager fails or if the system manager process
exits while executing the shutdownsys command, the shutdown will not complete. The only
safe action is to reissue the shutdownsys command.
534 Shutdown Commands
25 System Reporter (SR) commands
sraomoves
DESCRIPTION
The sraomoves command shows the space that Adaptive Optimization (AO) has moved between
tiers.
SYNTAX
sraomoves [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
SPECIFIERS
None
sraomoves 535
RESTRICTIONS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example shows space moved by AO beginning 2 hours (7200 seconds) ago:
cli% sraomoves -btsecs -7200
NOTES
For this command: 1 MB = 1048576 bytes.
The space reported is the space that AO has requested to be moved; the actual space moved
could be less (for example, if the move failed).
536 System Reporter (SR) commands
srcpgspace
DESCRIPTION
The srcpgspace command displays historical space data reports for common provisioning groups
(CPGs).
SYNTAX
srcpgspace [options] [<CPG_name>|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
SUBCOMMANDS
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
srcpgspace 537
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•DOM_NAME Domain name
•CPGID Common Provisioning Group ID
•CPG_NAME Common Provisioning Group name
•DISK_TYPE The disk type of the physical disks used by the CPG
•RAID_TYPE The RAID type of the CPG
-disk_type <type>[,<type>...]
Limit the data to disks of the types specified.
•FC – Fibre Channel
•NL – Nearline
•SSD – Solid State Drive
-raid_type <type>[,<type>...]
Limit the data to RAID of the specified types. Allowed types are 0,1,5and 6.
SPECIFIERS
[<CPG_name>...|<pattern>...]
CPGs matching either the specified CPG_name or glob-style pattern are included. This specifier
can be repeated to display information for multiple CPGs. If not specified, all CPGs are included.
RESTRICTIONS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly CPG space information for CPGs with names
that match the pattern "fc*" beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srcpgspace -hourly -btsecs -24h fc*
The following example displays CPG space information for the most recent daily sample aggregated
by the disk type and raid type for CPGs with names that match the pattern "fc*":
cli% srcpgspace -daily -attime -groupby disk_type,raid_type fc*
NOTES
For this command: 1 MB = 1048576 bytes.
538 System Reporter (SR) commands
srhistld
DESCRIPTION
The srhistld command displays historical histogram performance data reports for logical disks.
SYNTAX
srhistld [options] [<LD_name>|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
srhistld 539
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both – (Default) Display both I/O time and I/O size histograms
•time – Display only the I/O time histogram
•size – Display only the I/O size histogram
-timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, shows the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). The available columns range from 0 through 31.
0 <= fcol < lcol <= 31 must be satisfied.
The default value of <fcol> is 6.
The default value of <lcol> is 15.
-sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O size histogram, shows the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). The available columns range from 0 through 15.
0 <= fcol < lcol <= 31 must be satisfied.
The default value of <fcol> is 3.
The default value of <lcol> is 11.
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage. If this option is not specified, the histogram
shows the access counts.
-rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
-cpg <CPG_name|pattern>[,<CPG_name|pattern>...]
Limit the data to LDs in CPGs with names that match one or more of the specified names or glob-style
patterns.
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•DOM_NAME Domain name
•LDID Logical disk ID
•LD_NAME Logical disk name
•CPG_NAME Common Provisioning Group name
•NODE The node that owns the LD
SPECIFIERS
[<LD_name>...|<pattern>...]
LDs matching either the specified LD_name or glob-style pattern are included. This specifier can
be repeated to display information for multiple LDs. If not specified, all LDs are included.
540 System Reporter (SR) commands
RESTRICTIONS
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly histogram performance statistics for all logical
disks beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srhistld -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
srhistld 541
srhistpd
DESCRIPTION
The srhistpd command displays historical histogram data reports for physical disks.
SYNTAX
srhistpd [options] [<PDID|pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
542 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both — (Default) Display both I/O time and I/O size histograms
•time — Display only the I/O time histogram
•size — Display only the I/O size histogram
-timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, shows the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). The available columns range from 0 through 31.
0 <= fcol < lcol <= 31 must be satisfied.
The default value of <fcol> is 6.
The default value of <lcol> is 15.
-sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O size histogram, shows the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). The available columns range from 0 through 15.
0 <= fcol < lcol <= 31 must be satisfied.
The default value of <fcol> is 3.
The default value of <lcol> is 11.
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage. If this option is not specified, the histogram
shows the access counts.
-rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
Limit the data to LDs in CPGs with names that match one or more of the specified names or glob-style
patterns.
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•PDID Physical disk ID
•PORT_N The node number for the primary port for the PD
•PORT_S The PCI slot number for the primary port for the PD
•PORT_P The port number for the primary port for the the PD
•DISK_TYPE The disk type of the PD
•SPEED The speed of the PD
-disk_type <type>[,<type>...]
srhistpd 543
Limit the data to disks of the types specified.
•FC – Fibre Channel
•NL – Nearline
•SSD – Solid State Drive
SPECIFIERS
[<PDID>...|<pattern>...]
PDs with IDs that match either the specified PDID or glob-style pattern are included. This specifier
can be repeated to include multiple PDIDs or patterns. If not specified, all PDs are included.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly histogram performance statistics for all physical
disks beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srhistpd -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
For this command: KB = 1000 bytes
544 System Reporter (SR) commands
srhistport
DESCRIPTION
The srhistport command displays historical histogram performance data reports for ports.
SYNTAX
srhistport [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
srhistport 545
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both — (Default) Display both I/O time and I/O size histograms
•time — Display only the I/O time histogram
•size — Display only the I/O size histogram
-timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, shows the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). The available columns range from 0 through 31.
0 <= fcol < lcol <= 31 must be satisfied.
The default value of <fcol> is 6.
The default value of <lcol> is 15.
-sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O size histogram, shows the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). The available columns range from 0 through 15.
0 <= fcol < lcol <= 31 must be satisfied.
The default value of <fcol> is 3.
The default value of <lcol> is 11.
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage. If this option is not specified, the histogram
shows the access counts.
-rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
Limit the data to LDs in CPGs with names that match one or more of the specified names or glob-style
patterns.
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•PORT_N The node number for the port
•PORT_S The PCI slot number for the port
•PORT_P The port number of the port
•PORT_TYPE Port type
•GBITPS The speed of the port
SPECIFIERS
None
546 System Reporter (SR) commands
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly histogram performance statistics for all ports
beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srhistport -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
srhistport 547
srhistvlun
DESCRIPTION
The srhistvlun command displays historical histogram performance data reports for VLUNs.
SYNTAX
srhistvlun [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
548 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-metric both|time|size
Selects which metric to display. Metrics can be one of the following:
•both — (Default) Display both I/O time and I/O size histograms
•time — Display only the I/O time histogram
•size — Display only the I/O size histogram
-timecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O time histogram, shows the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). The available columns range from 0 through 31.
0 <= fcol < lcol <= 31 must be satisfied.
The default value of <fcol> is 6.
The default value of <lcol> is 15.
-sizecols <fcol> <lcol>
For the I/O size histogram, shows the columns from the first column (<fcol>) through the last
column (<lcol>). The available columns range from 0 through 15.
0 <= fcol < lcol <= 31 must be satisfied.
The default value of <fcol> is 3.
The default value of <lcol> is 11.
-pct
Shows the access count in each bucket as a percentage. If this option is not specified, the histogram
shows the access counts.
-rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
-host <host_name|host_set|pattern>[,<host_name|host_set|pattern>...]
Limit the data to hosts with names that match one or more of the specified names or glob-style
patterns. Host set name must start with “set:” and can also include patterns.
-vv <VV_name|VV_set|pattern>[,<VV_name|VV_set|pattern>...]
Limit the data to VVs with names that match one or more of the specified names or glob-style
patterns. VV set name must start with “set:” and can also include patterns.
-l <LUN|pattern>[,<LUN|pattern>...]
Limit the data to LUNs that match one or more of the specified LUNs or glob-style patterns.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•DOM_NAME Domain name
•VV_NAME Virtual volume name
•HOST_NAME Host name
•LUN The LUN number for the VLUN
srhistvlun 549
•HOST_WWN The host WWN for the VLUN
•PORT_N The node number for the VLUN port
•PORT_S The PCI slot number for the VLUN port
•PORT_P The port number for the VLUN port
SPECIFIERS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly histogram performance statistics for all VLUNs
beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srhistvlun -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
550 System Reporter (SR) commands
srldspace
DESCRIPTION
The srldspace command displays historical space data reports for logical disks (LDs).
SYNTAX
srldspace [options] [<LD_name>|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
SUBCOMMANDS
None
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
srldspace 551
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•DOM_NAME Domain name
•CPG_NAME Common Provisioning Group name
•LDID Logical disk ID
•LD_NAME Logical disk name
•DISK_TYPE The disk type of the physical disks used by the LD
•RAID_TYPE The RAID type of the LD
•SET_SIZE The RAID set size of the LD
•STEP_SIZE The RAID step size of the LD
•ROW_SIZE The RAID row size of the LD
•OWNER The owner node for the LD
-cpg <CPG_name|pattern>[,<CPG_name|pattern>...]
Limit the data to LDs in CPGs with names that match one or more of the specified names or glob-style
patterns.
-disk_type <type>[,<type>...]
Limit the data to disks of the types specified.
•FC – Fibre Channel
•NL – Nearline
•SSD – Solid State Drive
-raid_type <type>[,<type>...]
Limit the data to RAID of the specified types. Allowed types are 0,1,5and 6.
SPECIFIERS
[<LD_name>...|<pattern>...]
LDs matching either the specified LD_name or glob-style pattern are included. This specifier can
be repeated to display information for multiple LDs. If not specified, all LDs are included.
RESTRICTIONS
None
552 System Reporter (SR) commands
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly LD space information for all RAID 5 LDs with
names that match either "fc*" or "ssd*" patterns beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srldspace -raid_type 5 -hourly -btsecs -24h fc* ssd*
The following example displays LD space information for the most recent daily sample aggregated
by the LD name for LDs with names that match the pattern "tp*".
cli% srldspace -daily -attime -groupby ld_name tp*
NOTES
For this command: 1 MB = 1048576 bytes.
srldspace 553
srpdspace
DESCRIPTION
The srpdspace command displays historical space data reports for physical disks (PDs).
SYNTAX
srpdspace [options] [<PDID|pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
SUBCOMMANDS
None
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
554 System Reporter (SR) commands
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•PDID Physical disk ID
•CAGEID Cage ID
•CAGESIZE Cage size
•MAG Disk magazine number within the cage
•DISK Disk position within the magazine
•DISK_TYPE The disk type of the physical disk
•SPEED The disk speed
-disk_type <type>[,<type>...]
Limit the data to disks of the types specified.
•FC – Fibre Channel
•NL – Nearline
•SSD – Solid State Drive
SPECIFIERS
[<PDID>...|<pattern>...]
PDs with IDs that match either the specified PDID or glob-style pattern are included. This specifier
can be repeated to include multiple PDIDs or patterns. If not specified, all PDs are included.
RESTRICTIONS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly PD space information for all PDs beginning 24
hours ago:
cli% srpdspace -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
For this command: 1 MB = 1048576 bytes.
srpdspace 555
srrgiodensity
DESCRIPTION
The srrgiodensity command shows the distribution of IOP/s intensity for Logical Disk (LD)
regions for a common provisioning group (CPG) or Adaptive Optimization (AO) configuration.
For a single CPG, this can be used to see whether AO can be effectively used. For an AO
configuration the command shows how AO has moved regions between tiers.
SYNTAX
srrgiodensity [options] -cpg <cpg_name>
srrgiodensity [options] <aocfg_name>
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report.
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-cmult 2|4|8
556 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select the step between histogram columns of the report. By default each column's IO density is 4
times the previous column, but a step of 2 or 8 can also be specified.
-cpg
Treat the specifier as a CPG name instead of an AO configuration name.
SPECIFIERS
<aocfg_name>
The name of the AO configuration to generate the report for.
<cpg_name>
The name of the CPG to generate the report for (if the -cpg option is specified).
EXAMPLES
The following example shows region IO performance density report for a CPG beginning 2 hours
(7200 seconds) ago:
cli% srrgiodensity -btsecs -7200 -cpg cpg_name
srrgiodensity 557
srstatcmp
DESCRIPTION
The srstatcmp command displays historical performance data reports for cache memory.
SYNTAX
srstatcmp [options] [<node>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
558 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•NODE The controller node
By default, the output of the command lists cache read and write hit rates, access rates as well as
rates for locked blocks and delayed write acknowledgements. One of the following options can
be used to change what the command shows.
-full
List all the metrics for each row in a single line. The output for this option is very wide.
-page
List the page state information.
SPECIFIERS
[<node>...]
Only the specified node numbers are included, where each node is a number from 0 through 7.
This specifier can be repeated to display information for multiple nodes. If not specified, all nodes
are included.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly performance statistics for all node caches
beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srstatcmp -hourly -btsecs -24h
The following example displays daily node cache performance aggregated by node for nodes 0
and 1:
cli% srstatcmp -daily -attime -groupby node 0 1
NOTES
None
srstatcmp 559
srstatcpu
DESCRIPTION
The srstatcpu command displays historical performance data reports for CPUs.
SYNTAX
srstatcpu [options] [<node>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
560 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•NODE The controller node
•CPU The CPU within the controller node
SPECIFIERS
[<node>...]
Only the specified node numbers are included, where each node is a number from 0 through 7.
This specifier can be repeated to display information for multiple nodes. If not specified, all nodes
are included.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly performance statistics for all CPUs beginning
24 hours ago:
cli% srstatcpu -hourly -btsecs -24h
The following example displays daily node cpu performance aggregated by node for nodes 0
and 1:
cli% srstatcpu -daily -attime -groupby node 0 1
NOTES
None
srstatcpu 561
srstatld
DESCRIPTION
The srstatld command displays historical performance data reports for logical disks.
SYNTAX
srstatld [options] [<LD_name>|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
562 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•DOM_NAME Domain name
•LDID Logical disk ID
•LD_NAME Logical disk name
•CPG_NAME Common Provisioning Group name
•NODE The node that owns the LD
SPECIFIERS
[<LD_name>...|<pattern>...]
LDs matching either the specified LD_name or glob-style pattern are included. This specifier can
be repeated to display information for multiple LDs. If not specified, all LDs are included.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly performance statistics for all logical disks
beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srstatld -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
srstatld 563
srstalink
DESCRIPTION
The srstatlink command displays historical performance data reports for links (internode, PCI and
cache memory).
SYNTAX
The syntax for the srstalink command can be one of the following examples:
•srstatlink [options] [<node>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one row
per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option performance is shown
versus time, with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
564 System Reporter (SR) commands
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for each combination of <groupby> items. Each
<groupby>must be different and one of the following:
•NODE The source controller node for the link
•QUEUE The XCB queue
•NODE_TO The destination controller node for the link
SPECIFIERS
[<node>...]
Only the specified node numbers are included, where each node is a number from 0 through 7.
This specifier can be repeated to display information for multiple nodes. If not specified, all nodes
are included.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly performance statistics for all nodes and links
beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srstatlink -hourly -btsecs -24h
The following example displays daily node link performance aggregated by node for nodes 0 and
1:
cli% srstatlink -daily -attime -groupby node 0 1
NOTES
None
srstalink 565
srstatpd
DESCRIPTION
The srstatpd command displays historical performance data reports for physical disks.
SYNTAX
srstatpd [options] [<PDID|pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
566 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•PDID Physical disk ID
•PORT_N The node number for the primary port for the the PD
•PORT_S The PCI slot number for the primary port for the the PD
•PORT_P The port number for the primary port for the the PD
•DISK_TYPE The disk type of the PD
•SPEED The speed of the PD
-disk_type <type>[,<type>...]
Limit the data to disks of the types specified. Allowed types are:
•FC – Fibre Channel
•NL – Nearline
•SSD – Solid State Drive
SPECIFIERS
[<PDID>...|<pattern>...]
PDs with IDs that match either the specified PDID or glob-style pattern are included. This specifier
can be repeated to include multiple PDIDs or patterns. If not specified, all PDs are included.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly performance statistics for all physical disks
beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srstatpd -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
None.
srstatpd 567
srstatport
DESCRIPTION
The srstatport command displays historical performance data reports for ports.
SYNTAX
srstatport [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
568 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•PORT_N The node number for the port
•PORT_S The PCI slot number for the port
•PORT_P The port number for the port
•PORT_TYPE The type of the port
•GBITPS The speed of the port
SPECIFIERS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly performance statistics for all ports beginning 24
hours ago:
cli% srstatport -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
For this command: KB = 1000 bytes
srstatport 569
srstatqos
DESCRIPTION
The srstatqos command displays historical performance data reports for QoS rules.
SYNTAX
srstatqos [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one row
per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option performance is shown
versus time, with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
570 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-vvset <VVSet_name|pattern>[,<VVSet_name|pattern>...]
Limit the data to VVSets with names that match one or more of the specified names or glob-style
patterns.
-all_others
Display statistics for all other IO not regulated by a QoS rule.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for each combination of <groupby> items. Each
<groupby>must be different and one of the following:
•DOM_NAME Domain name
•TARGET_TYPE Type of QoS rule target, i.e. vvset
•TARGET_NAME Name of QoS rule target
•IOPS_LIMIT The I/O per second limit
•BW_LIMIT_KBPS The KB per second bandwidth limit
SPECIFIERS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly performance statistics for QoS rules beginning
24 hours ago:
cli% srstatqos -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
For this command KB = 1000 bytes.
srstatqos 571
srstatvlun
DESCRIPTION
The srstatvlun command displays historical performance data reports for VLUNs.
SYNTAX
srstatvlun [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
572 System Reporter (SR) commands
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-host <host_name|host_set|pattern>[,<host_name|host_set|pattern...]
Limit the data to hosts with names that match one or more of the specified names or glob-style
patterns. Host set name must start with "set:" and can also include patterns.
-vv <VV_name|VV_set|pattern>[,<VV_name|VV_Set|pattern>...]
Limit the data to VVs with names that match one or more of the specified names or glob-style
patterns. VV set name must start with "set:" and can also include patterns.
-l <LUN|pattern>[,<LUN|pattern>...]
Limit the data to LUNs that match one or more of the specified LUNs or glob-style patterns.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•DOM_NAME Domain name
•VV_NAME Virtual volume name
•HOST_NAME Host name
•LUN The LUN number for the VLUN
•HOST_WWN The host WWN for the VLUN
•PORT_N The node number for the VLUN port
•PORT_S The PCI slot number for the VLUN port
•PORT_P The port number for the VLUN port
SPECIFIERS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly performance statistics for all VLUNs beginning
24 hours ago:
cli% srstatvlun -hourly -btsecs -24h
NOTES
For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
srstatvlun 573
srvvspace
DESCRIPTION
The srvvspace command displays historical space data reports for virtual volumes (VVs).
SYNTAX
srvvspace [options] [<VV_name|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system
SUBCOMMANDS
None
OPTIONS
-attime
Performance is shown at a particular time interval, specified by the -etsecs option, with one
row per object group described by the -groupby option. Without this option, performance is
shown versus time with a row per time interval.
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. If -attime is specified, select the time for the report.
The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
574 System Reporter (SR) commands
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-hires
Select high resolution samples (5 minute intervals) for the report. This is the default setting.
-hourly
Select hourly samples for the report.
-daily
Select daily samples for the report.
-groupby <groupby>[,<groupby>...]
For -attime reports, generate a separate row for <groupby> items. Each <groupby> must be
different and one of the following:
•DOM_NAME Domain name
•VVID Virtual volume ID
•VV_NAME Virtual volume name
•BSID Virtual volume ID of the base virtual volume
•WWN Virtual volume world wide name (WWN)
•SNP_CPG_NAME Snap space Common Provisioning Group name
•USR_CPG_NAME User space Common Provisioning Group name
•PROV_TYPE Virtual volume provisioning type
•VV_TYPE Type of virtual volume
-usr_cpg <CPG_name|pattern[,<CPG_name|pattern>...]
Only include VVs whose user space is mapped to a CPG whose name matches one of the specified
CPG_name or glob-style patterns.
-snp_cpg <CPG_name|pattern>[,<CPG_name|pattern>...]
Only include VVs whose snap space is mapped to a CPG whose name matches one of the specified
CPG_name or glob-style patterns.
SPECIFIERS
[<VV_name>...|<pattern>...]
VVs with names that match either the specified VV_name or glob-style pattern are included. This
specifier can be repeated to include multiple VV names or patterns. If not specified, all VVs are
included.
RESTRICTIONS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example displays aggregate hourly VV space information for VVs with names
matching either "dbvv*" or "testvv*" patterns beginning 24 hours ago:
cli% srvvspace -hourly -btsecs -24h dbvv* testvv*
srvvspace 575
The following example displays VV space information for the most recent daily sample aggregated
by the VV name for VVs with names that match the pattern "tp*".
cli% srvvspace -daily -attime -groupby vv_name tp*
NOTES
For this command: 1 MB = 1048576 bytes.
576 System Reporter (SR) commands
26 Start Commands
startao
DESCRIPTION
The startao command starts execution of an Adaptive Optimization (AO) configuration using
data region level performance data collected for the specified number of hours.
SYNTAX
startao [option] <aocfg_name>
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
Any role granted the aocfg_start right
OPTIONS
-btsecs <secs>
Select the begin time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report begins at the earliest sample.
-etsecs <secs>
Select the end time in seconds for the report. The value can be specified as either:
•The absolute epoch time (for example 1351263600).
•The absolute time as a text string in one of the following formats:
Full time string including time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00 PDT"◦
◦Full time string excluding time zone: "2012-10-26 11:00:00"
◦Date string: "2012-10-26" or 2012-10-26
◦Time string: "11:00:00" or 11:00:00
•A negative number indicating the number of seconds before the current time. Instead of a
number representing seconds, <secs> can be specified with a suffix of m, h or d to represent
time in minutes (e.g. -30m), hours (e.g. -1.5h) or days (e.g. -7d).
If it is not specified then the report ends with the most recent sample.
-maxrunh <hours>
startao 577
Select the approximate maximum run time in hours (default is 6 hours). The number should be
between 1 and 24 hours. The command will attempt to limit the amount of data to be moved so
the command can complete by the specified number of hours. If the time runs beyond the specified
hours, the command will abort at an appropriate time.
-compact <mode>
Specify if and how CPGs should be compacted. Choices for <mode> are:
•auto Automatically select the compactcpg mode (default). This will free up the most space
but can potentially take longer because it may cause additional region moves to increase
consolidation. This is the default mode.
•trimonly Only run compactcpg with the -trimonly option. This will not perform any
region moves during compactcpg.
•no Do not run compactcpg. This option may be used if compactcpg is run or scheduled
separately.
-dryrun
Do not execute the region moves, only show which moves would be done.
SPECIFIERS
<aocfg_name>
The AO configuration name, using up to 31 characters.
RESTRICTIONS
EXAMPLES
Start execution of AO config prodaocfg using data for the past 3 hours:
cli% startao -btsecs -3h prodaocfg
Start execution of AO config prodaocfg using data from 12 hours ago until 3 hours ago, allowing
up to 6 hours to complete:
cli% startao -btsecs -12h -etsecs -3h -maxrunh 6 prodaocfg
NOTES
The startao command can be run manually, but it can also be scheduled to run automatically
at specific times using the createsched command.
578 Start Commands
startcim
DESCRIPTION
The startcim command starts the CIM server to service CIM requests. By default, the CIM server
is not started until this command is issued.
SYNTAX
startcim
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the cim_start right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example starts the CIM server:
cli% startcim
CIM server will start in about 90 seconds.
NOTES
•By default, the CIM server is not started until this command is issued.
•Use stopcim to stop the CIM server.
startcim 579
startld
DESCRIPTION
The startld command starts data services on a Logical Disk (LD) that has not yet been started.
SYNTAX
startld [option] <LD_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the ld_start right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–ovrd
Specifies that the LD is forced to start, even if some underlying data is missing.
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name>
Specifies the LD name, using up to 31 characters.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example starts data services on LD ld5:
cli% startld ld5
NOTES
None.
580 Start Commands
startnoderescue
DESCRIPTION
The startnoderescue command initiates a node rescue, which initializes the internal node disk
of the specified node to match the contents of the other node disks. The copy is done over the
network, so the node to be rescued must have an Ethernet connection. It will automatically select
a valid unused link local address. Progress is reported as a task.
SYNTAX
startnoderescue -node <node>
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
OPTIONS
-node <node>
Specifies the node to be rescued. This node must be physically present in the system and powered
on, but not part of the cluster.
SPECIFIERS
<node>
Specifies the node to be rescued. This node must be physically present in the system and powered
on, but not part of the cluster.
EXAMPLES
The following example show starting a node rescue of node 2.
cli% startnoderescue -node 2
Node rescue from node 0 to node 2 started.
cli% showtask
Id Type Name Status Phase Step -------StartTime------- -FinishTime-
-Priority- ---User----
96 node_rescue node_2_rescue active 1/1 0/1 2012-06-15 18:19:38 PDT -
n/a sys:3parsys
NOTES
On systems other than T and F-class, node rescue will automatically be started when a blank node
disk is inserted into a node. The startnoderescue command only needs to be manually issued
if the node rescue must be re-run on a disk that is not blank. For T and F-class systems,
startnoderescue must always be issued to perform a node rescue.
startnoderescue 581
startrcopy
DESCRIPTION
The startrcopy command enables Remote Copy.
SYNTAX
startrcopy
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopy_start right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example starts Remote Copy on a system:
# startrcopy
NOTES
•The startrcopy command must be executed before any other Remote Copy command.
•An older version of this command used primary,secondary, and both specifiers to
designate the system on which Remote Copy is started. This syntax was deprecated in HP
3PAR OS release 2.2.3.
582 Start Commands
startrcopygroup
DESCRIPTION
The startrcopygroup command enables Remote Copy for the specified Remote Copy volume
group.
SYNTAX
startrcopygroup [options] <group_name> [<vv:sv> ...]
startrcopygroup [options] <pattern>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the rcopygroup_start right.
OPTIONS
–nosync
Prevents the initial synchronization and sets the virtual volumes to a synchronized state.
–wait
Specifies that the command blocks until the initial synchronization is complete. The system generates
an event when the synchronization is complete.
-t <target_name>
Indicates that only the group on the specified target is started. If this option is not used, by default,
the startrcopygroup command will affect all of a group’s targets.
-pat
Specifies that specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and that all Remote Copy groups
matching the specified pattern will be started. This option must be used if the pattern specifier is
used.
SPECIFIERS
<group_name>
The name of the Remote Copy volume group. Can be obtained using the showrcopy command.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to start multiple groups.
RESTRICTIONS
This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example starts Remote Copy for Group1:
# startrcopygroup Group1
startrcopygroup 583
To start Group2, which contains 4 virtual volumes, and specify starting snapshots, with vv4 starting
from a full resync:
# startrcopygroup Group2 vv1:sv1 vv2:sv2 vv3:sv3 vv4:-
NOTES
•If a group’s target has the mirror_config policy set and the group is a primary group,
then this command will be mirrored to that target and the corresponding secondary group
will be started. If the policy is set and the group is a secondary, then this command will fail.
•If the mirror_config policy is not set, then the corresponding secondary group must already
be started or this command will fail.
•Synchronous groups are automatically synchronized when started. Asynchronous periodic
volume groups are synchronized only on the first time they are started. When volumes are
added to existing asynchronous periodic groups their first sync occurs the next time the entire
group synchronizes.
•You must enter this command on the backup system before entering it on the primary if the
mirror_config policy is not set.
•When a secondary group says that it is in the started state, it does not necessarily mean that
the group is receiving data from the primary system. The primary group might be stopped, or
its system might even be down. The fact that the group is started only indicates that the group
is ready to receive writes from the primary group. To determine if writes to the volumes of the
primary group are being mirrored to the secondary group, the status of the primary group
must be examined.
584 Start Commands
starttask
DESCRIPTION
The starttask command provides users with the ability to execute commands with long running
times. The commands run in the background.
SYNTAX
starttask <command>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service, Edit
•Any role granted thetask_start right.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<command>
Specifies the command to be run by the starttask command.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows the removevv command to be started with the forced option:
cli% starttask removevv -f vv1
NOTES
•If the command to be run requires confirmation it must be forced with the -f option otherwise
it will fail.
•The commands that can be run with the starttask command are: admithw,
creategroupsv,createsv,moverelocpd,removevv,updatevv,upgradecage,
upgradepd and startao.
starttask 585
startvv
DESCRIPTION
The startvv command starts data services on a Virtual Volume (VV) that has not yet been started.
SYNTAX
startvv [option] <VV_name>
AUTHORITY
•Super, Service
•Any role granted the vv_start right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–ovrd
Specifies that the logical disk is forced to start, even if some underlying data is missing.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
Specifies the VV name, using up to 31 characters.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example starts data services on virtual volume testvv:
cli% startvv testvv
NOTES
None.
586 Start Commands
startwsapi
DESCRIPTION
The startwsapi command starts the Web Services API server to service HTTP and HTTPS requests.
By default, the Web Services API server is not started until this command is issued.
SYNTAX
startwsapi
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
Any role granted the wsapi_start right
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example starts the Web Services API server:
cli% startwsapi
The Web Services API server will start shortly.
NOTES
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
By default, the Web Services API server is not started until this command is issued.
Use the stopwsapi command to stop the Web Services API server.
By default, the Web Services API server only listens for HTTPS requests.
Use the setwsapi command to enable HTTP requests.
startwsapi 587
27 Stat Commands
statch
DESCRIPTION
The statch command displays chunklet statistics in a timed loop.
SYNTAX
statch [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–rw
Specifies that reads and writes are displayed separately. If this option is not used, then the total
of reads plus writes is displayed.
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of 2 seconds. This option
and argument are not required in the command line.
–iter <number>
Specifies that chunklet statistics are displayed a specified number of times as indicated by the
number argument using an integer from 1through 2147483647.
–begin
Specifies that I/O averages are computed from the system start time. If not specified, the average
is computed since the first iteration of the command.
–idlep
Specifies the percent of idle columns in the output.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
<dir> can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
–filt <fspec>
588 Stat Commands
Specifies that statistics that fall below the threshold as specified by the <fspec> arguments, where
<fspec> is <type>,<op>,<meas>,<val>, are filtered out and not displayed. The <type>,
<op>,<meas>, and <val> arguments are separated with one comma.
•<type>
The type argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦curs
Specifies that only devices with current statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦avgs
Specifies that only devices with average statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦maxs
Specifies that only devices with maximum values above the threshold are displayed.
•<op>
The operation argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦r
Specifies that read-only statistics are displayed.
◦w
Specifies that write-only statistics are displayed.
◦t|rw
Specifies that statistics for read and write totals are displayed.
•<meas>
The meas argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦iops
Specifies that I/O operations per second are displayed. If this argument is used, the
minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦bw
Specifies that statistics for bandwidth in bytes per second are displayed. If this argument
is used, the minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦svct
Specifies that statistics for service time in milliseconds are displayed.
◦size
Specifies that statistics for I/O operations in bytes are displayed.
•<val> [k|K]|[m|M]|[g|G]
Specifies the minimum threshold using any integer. The integer can optionally be followed
with k or K to indicate a multiple of 1000, mor Mto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000, or
gor Gto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000,000.
An example of this option in use is –filt curs,r,iops,10k that indicates that statistics for
a device that has more than 10,000 current read-only I/O operations are displayed.
–ni
statch 589
Specifies that statistics for only non-idle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt curs,t,iops,0.
–ld <LD_name>|–ch <chunk_num>
–ld <LD_name>
Specifies that statistics are restricted to chunklets from a particular logical disk.
–ch <chunk_num>
Specifies that statistics are restricted to a particular chunklet number.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the collection of statistics:
cli% statch -iter 1
12:47:54 04/06/06 r/w I/O per second KBytes per sec Svt ms IOSz KB
Util %
Ldid Ldname LdCh Pdid PdCh Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Cur Avg Qlen Cur
Avg
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
total t 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
0 0
For the previous example, before the statch command was issued, the setstatch start
command was issued for chunklets 0 and 2 on logical disk vv0.usr.1 and for chunklets 0 and 1
on logical disk vv0.usr.2.
The columns in the example above are identified as follows:
•Ldid. The logical disk ID.
•Ldname. The logical disk name.
•LdCh. The number of LD chunklets.
•Pdid. The physical disk ID.
•r/w. The I/O type. Values can be read (r), write (w), or read and write (t).
•I/O per second Cur. The current number of I/O per second.
•I/O per second Avg. The average number of I/O per second.
•KBytes per Max. The maximum number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Cur. The current number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Avg. The average number of KB per second.
•Svt ms Max. The maximum service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Cur. The current service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Avg. The average service time in milliseconds.
•IOSz KB Cur. The current I/O size in KB.
•IOSz KB Avg. The average I/O size in KB.
590 Stat Commands
•Qlen. The queue length.
•Util % Cur. The percentage of current use.
•Util % Avg. The percentage of average use.
NOTES
•For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
•If no options are used, the command defaults to show reads, writes, and totals separately for
all chunklets in intervals of 2 seconds.
•The statch command can only be used after the setstatch command has been issued to
enable chunklet statistics. See “setstatch” (page 331) for information about the setstatch
command.
statch 591
statcmp
DESCRIPTION
The statcmp command displays Cache Memory Page (CMP) statistics by node or by Virtual
Volume (VV).
SYNTAX
statcmp [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–v
Specifies that CMP statistics by VV instead of by node are displayed. By default, all VVs are
displayed unless the –noption is specified.
–n <name|pattern>
Specifies that statistics are displayed for VVs matching the specified name or pattern. This option
is valid only when used with the –v option.
-domain {<domainname|pattern>}...
Shows VVs that are in domains with names that match one or more of the specified domains or
patterns. If -domain is not specified, the VVs that are in the current domain are shown. See the
currentdomain parameter in the setclienv and showclienv commands. This option is only
valid if the -v option is also specified.
–d <seconds>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of two seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that CMP statistics are displayed a specified number of times as indicated by the num
argument using an integer from 1 through 2147483647.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of CMP statistics for all nodes:
cli% statcmp –iter 1
16:13:49 03/18/11 ---- Current ----- ---------- Total -----------
Node Type Accesses Hits Hit% Accesses Hits Hit% LockBlock
0 Read 0 0 0 0 0 0 21
0 Write 0 0 0 0 0 0 22
1 Read 0 0 0 0 0 0 23
1 Write 0 0 0 0 0 0 24
Queue Statistics
Node Free Clean Write1 WriteN WrtSched Writing DcowPend DcowProc
592 Stat Commands
0 473405 11790 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 483013 2158 0 0 0 0 0 0
Temporary and Page Credits
Node Node0 Node1 Node2 Node3 Node4 Node5 Node6 Node7
0 0 33411 --- --- --- --- --- ---
1 33482 0 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Page Statistics
---CfcDirty--- ------CfcMax------- ----DelAck----
Node FC FC15 NL SSD FC FC15 NL SSD FC FC15 NL SSD
0 15 0 17 0 19200 0 9600 0 11 0 13 0
1 16 0 18 0 19200 0 9600 0 12 0 14 0
Press the enter key to stop...
The columns in the example above are identified as follows:
•Node. Node ID on the storage system.
•Type. Read or Write.
•Access. Number of Current and Total Read/Write I/Os.
•Hits. Number of Read/Write I/Os in which data was already in cache.
•Hit%. Hits divided accesses displayed in percentages.
•Free. Number of cache pages without valid data on them.
•Clean. Number of clean cache pages (valid data on page). A page is clean when data in
cache matches data on disk.
•Write1. Number of dirty pages that have been modified exactly 1 time. A page is dirty when
it has been modified in cache but not written to disk.
•WriteN. Number of dirty pages that have been modified more than 1 time.
•WrtSched. Number of pages scheduled to be written to disk.
•Writing. Number of pages being currently written by the flusher to disk.
•DcowPend. Number of pages waiting for delayed copy on write resolution.
•DcowProc. Number of pages currently being processed for delayed copy on write resolution.
•RecFlush. During node down, number of recovered pages currently being written by the
flusher to disk.
•LockBlk. Number of pages being modified by host I/O that are temporarily blocked because
page is being written to disk by the flusher.
•CfcDirty. Current number of dirty cluster memory pages in the system.
•CfcMax. Maximum allowed number of dirty cluster memory pages in the system.
•DelAck. Number of delayed acknowledgements to the host in order to throttle the host's IO
writes due to cache resource constraints.
NOTES
•Patterns are specified as regular expressions.
•Temporary and Page Credits refer to the number of credits being given by each node to other
nodes in the system. The credits plus pages (free, clean, scheduled and writing) should add
up to the total amount of memory in the node.
statcmp 593
statcpu
DESCRIPTION
The statcpu command displays CPU statistics for all nodes.
SYNTAX
statcpu [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of two seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that CPU statistics are displayed a specified number of times as indicated by the number
argument using an integer from 1through 2147483647.
–t
Show only the totals for all the CPUs on each node.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays two iterations of CPU statistics for all nodes:
cli% statcpu –iter 2
15:11:03
node,cpu user sys idle intr/s ctxt/s
0,0 0 0 100
0,1 0 0 100
0,total 0 0 100 162 412
1,0 0 1 99
1,1 0 1 99
1,total 0 1 99 158 269
Press the enter key to stop...
15:11:05
node,cpu user sys idle intr/s ctxt/s
0,0 0 0 100
0,1 19 7 74
0,total 10 4 87 183 444
1,0 0 0 100
1,1 0 0 100
1,total 0 0 100 158 235
Press the enter key to stop...
594 Stat Commands
NOTES
None.
statcpu 595
statfcoe
DESCRIPTION
The statfcoe command displays statistics for Fibre Channel over Ethernet connections.
SYNTAX
statfcoe [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-d <secs>
Specifies the looping delay in seconds <secs>. The default is 2.
-iter <number>
Specifies that the command execution should terminate after a user-defined <number> of iterations.
-nodes <nodelist>
Specifies the list of nodes for which the ports are included.
-slots <slotlist>
Specifies the list of PCI slots for which the ports are included.
-ports <portlist>
Specifies the list of ports which are included. Lists are specified in a comma-separated manner
such as: -ports 1,2 or -ports 1.
-counts
Shows the counts. The default is to show counts/sec.
-fullcounts
Shows the values for the full list of counters instead of the default packets and KBytes for the specified
protocols. The values are shown in three columns:
Current - Shows counts since the last sample.
CmdStart - Shows counts since the start of the command.
Begin - Shows counts since the port was reset.
-prev
Shows the differences between the current and previous samples.
-begin
Shows the values from when the system was last initiated.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
596 Stat Commands
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of FCoE counts:
cli% statfcoe -iter 1 -counts -begin
NOTES
None.
statfcoe 597
statiscsi
DESCRIPTION
The statiscsi command displays the iSCSI statistics.
SYNTAX
statiscsi [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-d <secs>
Looping delay in seconds <secs>. The default is 2.
-iter <number>
The command stops after a user-defined <number> of iterations.
-nodes <nodelist>
List of nodes for which the ports are included.
-slots <slotlist>
List of PCI slots for which the ports are included.
-ports <port_list>
List of ports for which the ports are included. Lists are specified in a comma-separated manner
such as: -slots 0,1,2 or -slots 0.
-counts
Shows the counts. The default is to show counts/sec.
-fullcounts
Show the values for the full list of counters instead of the default packets and KBytes for the specified
protocols. The values are shown in three columns:
•Current - Counts since the last sample.
•CmdStart - Counts since the start of the command.
•Begin - Counts since the port was reset.
This option cannot be used with the -prot option. If the -fullcounts option is not specified,
the metrics from the start of the command are displayed.
-prot <prot>[,<prot>,...]
Shows the statistics for the specified protocols. The available protocols are:
•Eth - Ethernet.
•IP - Internet Protocol (IP).
•TCP - Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).
•iSCSI - iSCSI.
•all - All protocols (default).
This option cannot be used with the -fullcounts option.
-prev
Shows the differences from the previous sample.
598 Stat Commands
-begin
Shows the values from when the system was last initiated.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays basic iSCSI statistics collection:
cli% statiscsi
16:37:59 04/06/06 ----Receive---- ---Transmit---- -----Total-----
port Protocol Pkts/s KBytes/s Pkts/s KBytes/s Pkts/s KBytes/s Errs/s
0:4:1 Eth 15633.2 1116.7 30115.9 45164.4 45749.1 46281.1 0.0
0:4:1 IP 15632.7 522.6 30116.4 44020.8 45749.1 44543.3 0.0
0:4:1 TCP 15632.7 22.3 30116.4 43057.0 45749.1 43079.4 0.0
0:4:1 iSCSI 547.7 0.0 1477.3 50452.8 2025.0 50452.8 0.0
0:4:2 Eth 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.0 0.0
0:4:2 IP 15632.1 522.6 30115.2 44019.0 45747.2 44541.5 0.0
0:4:2 TCP 15632.1 22.3 30115.2 43055.3 45747.2 43077.6 0.0
0:4:2 iSCSI 547.7 0.0 1478.7 50509.7 2026.4 50509.7 0.0
1:3:1 Eth 11307.2 807.0 21348.2 32048.1 32655.4 32855.1 0.0
1:3:1 IP 11309.2 377.4 21345.7 31233.2 32654.9 31610.5 0.0
1:3:1 TCP 11309.2 15.5 21344.7 30548.7 32653.9 30564.1 0.0
1:3:1 iSCSI 459.3 0.0 1247.9 42630.9 1707.2 42630.9 0.0
1:3:2 Eth 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.0 0.0
1:3:2 IP 11308.5 377.3 21344.5 31231.3 32653.0 31608.7 0.0
1:3:2 TCP 11308.5 15.5 21343.5 30546.9 32652.0 30562.3 0.0
1:3:2 iSCSI 459.3 0.0 1247.8 42628.4 1707.1 42628.4 0.0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Eth 26941.4 1923.7 51464.1 77212.5 78405.5 79136.2 0.0
Total IP 53882.5 1799.8 102921.7 150504.2 156804.2 152304.1 0.0
Total TCP 53882.5 75.6 102919.7 147207.9 156802.2 147283.5 0.0
Total iSCSI 2014.0 0.0 5451.7 186221.9 7465.7 186221.9 0.0
Press the enter key to stop...
The following example displays one iteration of iSCSI counts (with Ethernet and transmission control
protocols):
cli% statiscsi -iter 1 -counts -prot Eth,TCP -begin
13:24:38 03/29/06 --------------------From last port reset---------------------
------Receive------ ----Transmit---- -------Total-------
port Protocol Pkts KBytes Pkts KBytes Pkts KBytes Errs
1:3:1 Eth 766373.0 1066175.9 394473.0 55171.4 1160846.0 1121347.2 1.0
1:3:1 TCP 722917.0 1016532.4 394441.0 30238.3 1117358.0 1046770.7 0.0
1:3:2 Eth 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1:3:2 TCP 722917.0 1016532.4 394441.0 30238.3 1117358.0 1046770.7 0.0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Eth 766373.0 1066175.9 394473.0 55171.4 1160846.0 1121347.2 1.0
Total TCP 1445834.0 2033064.8 788882.0 60476.6 2234716.0 2093541.4 0.0*
NOTES
The statistics for the TCP, IP, and iSCSI protocols listed are the combined values for both ports of
the HBA. Each port reports the combined statistics for both ports for these protocols. The total
reported at the bottom for these protocols is therefore twice the actual values.
statiscsi 599
statiscsisession
DESCRIPTION
The statiscsisession command displays the iSCSI session statistics.
SYNTAX
statiscsisession [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-d <secs>
Looping delay in seconds <secs>. The default is 2.
-iter <number>
The command stops after a user-defined number of iterations.
-nodes <nodelist>
List of nodes for which the ports are included.
-slots <slotlist>
List of PCI slots for which the ports are included.
-ports <portlist>
List of port slots for which the ports are included. Lists are specified in a comma-separated manner
such as: -slots 0,1,2 or -slots 0.
-counts
Shows the counts. The default is to show counts/sec.
By default, the differences from initiating the command are shown. The following options change
that behavior:
-prev
Shows the differences from the previous sample.
-begin
Shows the values from when the system was last initiated.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the session statistics for the iSCSI:
cli% statiscsisession
15:31:35 04/04/06 --From start of
statiscsisession command---
----PDUs/s----
--KBytes/s--- ----Errs/s----
port ----------------------iSCI_Name---------------------- TPGT Cmd Resp Total Tx
600 Stat Commands
Rx Total Digest TimeOut
1:3:1 iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:dt-ashok-xp.hq.3pardata.com 131 1.0 1.0 2.0 4.0
0.0 4.0 0.0 0.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total - - 1.0 1.0 2.0 4.0
0.0 4.0 0.0 0.0
Press the enter key to stop...
NOTES
None.
statiscsisession 601
statld
DESCRIPTION
The statld command displays read/write (I/O) statistics about Logical Disks (LDs) in a timed
loop.
SYNTAX
statld [options <arg>] [<LD_name|pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-vv {<VV_name|pattern>}...
Show only LDs that are mapped to Virtual Volumes (VVs) with names matching any of names or
patterns specified. Multiple volumes or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated list (for
example -vv <VV_name>,<VV_name>...).
-domain {<domain_name|pattern>}...
Shows only LDs that are in domains with names matching any of the names or specified patterns.
Multiple domain names or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated list (for example
-domain <domain_name>,<domain_name>...).
–rw
Specifies that reads and writes are displayed separately. If this option is not used, then the total
of reads plus writes is displayed.
–d <sec>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of two seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that I/O statistics are displayed a specified number of times as indicated by the number
argument using an integer from 1through 2147483647.
–begin
Specifies that I/O averages are computed from the system start time. If not specified, the average
is computed since the first iteration of the command.
–idlep
Specifies the percent of idle columns in the output.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number <col>. Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. You must specify a column number. In addition, you can specify the
direction of sorting <dir> as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:), Rows with have the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by the values in the later columns.
–filt <fspec>
602 Stat Commands
Specifies that statistics that fall below the threshold as specified by the <fspec> arguments where
<fspec> is <type>,<op>,<meas>,<val>, are filtered out and not displayed. The type,
operation,meas,and value arguments are separated with one comma.
•<type>
The type argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦curs
Specifies that only devices with current statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦avgs
Specifies that only devices with average statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦maxs
Specifies that only devices with maximum values above the threshold are displayed.
•<op>
The operation argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦r
Specifies that read-only statistics are displayed.
◦w
Specifies that write-only statistics are displayed.
◦t|rw
Specifies that statistics for read and write totals are displayed.
•<meas>
The meas argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦iops
Specifies that I/O operations per second are displayed. If this argument is used, the
minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦bw
Specifies that statistics for bandwidth in bytes per second are displayed. If this argument
is used, the minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦svct
Specifies that statistics for service time in milliseconds are displayed.
◦size
Specifies that statistics for I/O operations in bytes are displayed.
•<val> [k|K]|[m|M]|[g|G]
Specifies the minimum threshold using any integer. The integer can optionally be followed
with k or K to indicate a multiple of 1000, mor Mto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000, or
gor Gto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000,000.
An example of this option in use is –filt curs,r,iops,10k. This indicates that statistics for
a device that has more than 10,000 current read-only I/O operations are displayed.
–ni
statld 603
Specifies that statistics for only non-idle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt curs,t,iops,0.
SPECIFIERS
<LD_name|pattern>...
Only statistics are displayed for the specified LD or pattern. Multiple LDs or patterns can be repeated
(for example <LD_name> <LD_name>...).
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of I/O statistics for all LDs:
cli% statld -iter 1
13:03:04 04/06/06 r/w I/O per second KBytes per sec Svt ms IOSz KB Util %
Ldname Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Cur Avg Qlen Cur Avg
log0.0 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
pdsld0.0 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
admin.usr.0 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
admin.usr.1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
Test.usr.0 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
Test.usr.1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
log1.0 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
pdsld1.0 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
admin.usr.2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
admin.usr.3 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
Test.usr.2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
Test.usr.3 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
total t 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
The columns in the example above are identified as follows:
•Ldname. The logical disk name.
•r/w. The I/O type. Values can be read (r), write (w), or read and write (t).
•I/O per second Cur. The current number of I/O per second.
•I/O per second Avg. The average number of I/O per second.
•KBytes per Max. The maximum number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Cur. The current number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Avg. The average number of KB per second.
•Svt ms Max. The maximum service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Cur. The current service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Avg. The average service time in milliseconds.
•IOSz KB Cur. The current I/O size in KB.
•IOSz KB Avg. The average I/O size in KB.
•Qlen. The queue length.
•Util % Cur. The percentage of current use.
•Util % Avg. The percentage of average use.
604 Stat Commands
NOTES
•For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
•If no option is specified, the command defaults to display statistics totals.
•If the <LD_name> or <pattern> specifier is used, then LDs with names matching any of
the patterns are listed, otherwise all LDs are listed. These patterns are glob-style patterns. Refer
to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further information.
statld 605
statlink
DESCRIPTION
The statlink command displays statistics for link utilization for all nodes in a timed loop.
SYNTAX
statlink [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–d <sec>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of two seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that internode link statistics are displayed a specified number of times as indicated by
the number argument using an integer from 1through 2147483647.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of statistics for the internode link:
cli% statlink –iter 1
11:37:28 03/11/08 XCB_sent_per_second KBytes_per_second XCBSz_KB
Node Q ToNode Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Max Cur Avg
0 CM 0 15134 14911 15134 61951 61038 61951 4.1 4.1
0 PCI0 0 22336 21852 22336 79831 77128 79831 3.6 3.5
0 PCI1 1 15312 12103 19805 62106 63198 77324 4.0 4.1
0 L0 1 10339 10307 10339 69673 69384 69673 6.7 6.7
1 CM 1 16372 16189 16372 67020 66269 67020 4.1 4.1
1 PCI0 1 18384 17899 18384 75285 73305 75285 4.1 4.1
1 PCI1 1 5329 5336 5344 984 985 987 0.2 0.2
1 L3 0 10326 10295 10326 69346 69150 69346 6.7 6.7
NOTES
None.
606 Stat Commands
statpd
DESCRIPTION
The statpd command displays the read/write (I/O) statistics for physical disks in a timed loop.
SYNTAX
statpd [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–w <WWN>
Specifies that statistics for a particular Physical Disk (PD) identified by World Wide Names (WWNs)
are displayed.
–nodes <node_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified nodes and PDs connected to those nodes. The
node_list argument is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list
can also consist of a single integer (1). If the node_list argument is not specified, all disks on all
nodes are displayed.
–slots <slot_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified PCI slots and PDs connected to those PCI slots. The
slot_list argument is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list
can also consist of a single integer (1). If the slot_list argument is not specified, all disks on
all slots are displayed.
–ports <port_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified ports and PDs connected to those ports. The
port_list argument is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list
can also consist of a single integer (1). If the port_list argument is not specified, all disks on
all ports are displayed.
–devinfo
Indicates the device disk type and speed.
–rw
Specifies that reads and writes are displayed separately. If this option is not used, then the total
of reads plus writes is displayed.
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of two seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–begin
Specifies that I/O averages are computed from the system start time. If not specified, the average
is computed since the first iteration of the command.
–idlep
Specifies the percent of idle columns in the output.
statpd 607
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:), Rows that have the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by the values in the later columns.
–filt <fspec>
Specifies that statistics that fall below the threshold as specified by the <fspec> arguments where
<fspec> is <type>,<op>,<meas>,<val>, are filtered out and not displayed. The type,
operation,meas,andvalue arguments are separated with one comma.
•<type>
The type argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦curs
Specifies that only devices with current statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦avgs
Specifies that only devices with average statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦maxs
Specifies that only devices with maximum values above the threshold are displayed.
•<op>
The operation argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦r
Specifies that read-only statistics are displayed.
◦w
Specifies that write-only statistics are displayed.
◦t|rw
Specifies that statistics for read and write totals are displayed.
•<meas>
The meas argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦iops
Specifies that I/O operations per second are displayed. If this argument is used, the
minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦bw
Specifies that statistics for bandwidth in bytes per second are displayed. If this argument
is used, the minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
608 Stat Commands
◦svct
Specifies that statistics for service time in milliseconds are displayed.
◦size
Specifies that statistics for I/O operations in bytes are displayed.
•<val> [k|K]|[m|M]|[g|G]
Specifies the minimum threshold using any integer. The integer can optionally be followed
with k or K to indicate a multiple of 1000, mor Mto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000, or
gor Gto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000,000.
An example of this option in use is –filt curs,r,iops,10k that indicates that statistics for a
device that has more than 10,000 current read-only I/O operations are displayed.
–ni
Specifies that statistics for only non-idle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt curs,t,iops,0.
–p <pattern>
Specifies that statistics for a pattern of PDs are displayed. Patterns are used to filter and select the
disks from which the statistics are collected. If specified multiple times, each instance of the specified
pattern adds additional candidate disks matching the pattern:
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple nodes
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen (0–7).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple slots
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen (0–5).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (<item>). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–4).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port(s).
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (<item>).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single
comma (1,2,3). A range of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–7). The specified
drive magazine(s) must contain disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (item). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A
statpd 609
range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (item). Multiple
disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a hyphen
(0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments, –tc_gt , –tc_lt , –fc_gt , –fc_lt , –devid , and –devtype are used
to limit the disks that are used to create logical disks based on the characteristics of the disk drive.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example, -p -fc_gt 60
-fc_lt 230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free
chunklets and that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of I/O statistics for all PDs:
cli% statpd -iter 1
16:03:44 04/06/06 r/w I/O per second KBytes per sec Svt ms IOSz KB Util %
Pdid Port Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Cur Avg Qlen Cur Avg
610 Stat Commands
0 1:0:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
1 0:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
2 1:0:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
4 1:0:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
5 0:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
6 1:0:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
7 0:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
8 1:0:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
9 0:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
10 1:0:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
11 0:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
12 1:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
13 0:2:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
14 1:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
15 0:2:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
16 1:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
17 0:2:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
18 1:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
19 0:2:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
20 1:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
21 0:2:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
22 1:0:2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
23 0:2:1 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
total t 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0
The columns in the example above are identified as follows:
•Pdid. The physical disk ID.
•Port. The disk’s port.
•r/w. The I/O type. Values can be read (r), write (w), or read and write (t).
•I/O per second Cur. The current number of I/O per second.
•I/O per second Avg. The average number of I/O per second.
•KBytes per Max. The maximum number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Cur. The current number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Avg. The average number of KB per second.
•Svt ms Max. The maximum service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Cur. The current service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Avg. The average service time in milliseconds.
•IOSz KB Cur. The current I/O size in KB.
•IOSz KB Avg. The average I/O size in KB.
•Qlen. The queue length.
•Util % Cur. The percentage of current use.
•Util % Avg. The percentage of average use.
NOTES
For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
statpd 611
statport
DESCRIPTION
The statport command displays read/write (I/O) statistics for ports.
SYNTAX
statport [options]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–both|–ctl|–data
Show data transfers only (–data), control transfers only (–ctl), or both data and control transfers
(–both). If no option is included on the command line, the command shows data transfers only.
–nodes <node_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified nodes and Physical Disks (PDs) connected to those
nodes. The node_list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (for example
1,2,3). The list can also consist of a single integer (for example 1). If the node list is not specified,
all disks on all nodes are displayed.
–slots <slot_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified PCI slots and PDs connected to those PCI slots. The
slot_list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (for example 1,2,3). The
list can also consist of a single integer (for example 1). If the slot list is not specified, all disks on
all slots are displayed.
–ports <port_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified ports and PDs connected to those ports. The
port_list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (for example 1,2,3). The
list can also consist of a single integer (for example 1). If the port list is not specified, all disks on
all ports are displayed.
–host|-disk|-rcfc|-peer
Displays only host ports (target ports), only disk ports (initiator ports), only Fibre Channel Remote
Copy configured ports, or only Fibre Channel ports for Data Migration. If no option is specified,
all ports are displayed.
–rcip
Includes only statistics for Ethernet configured Remote Copy ports.
–rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
–d <secs>
Sets the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through 2147483.
If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of two seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–begin
612 Stat Commands
Specifies that I/O averages are computed from the system start time. If not specified, the average
is computed since the first iteration of the command.
–idlep
Specifies the percent of idle columns in the output.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:). Rows that have the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by the values in the later columns.
–filt <fspec>
Specifies that statistics that fall below the threshold as specified by the <fspec> arguments where
<fspec> is <type>,<op>,<meas>,<val>, are filtered out and not displayed. The –filt
option applies to data transfers only. The <type>,<operation>,<meas>, and <value>
arguments are separated with one comma.
•<type>
The type argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦curs
Specifies that only devices with current statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦avgs
Specifies that only devices with average statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦maxs
Specifies that only devices with maximum values above the threshold are displayed.
•<op>
The op (operation) argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦r
Specifies that read-only statistics are displayed.
◦w
Specifies that write-only statistics are displayed.
◦t|rw
Specifies that statistics for read and write totals are displayed.
statport 613
•<meas>
The meas argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦iops
Specifies that I/O operations per second are displayed. If this argument is used, the
minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦bw
Specifies that statistics for bandwidth in bytes per second are displayed. If this argument
is used, the minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦svct
Specifies that statistics for service time in milliseconds are displayed.
◦size
Specifies that statistics for I/O operations in bytes are displayed.
•<val> [k|K]|[m|M]|[g|G]
Specifies the minimum threshold using any integer. The integer can optionally be followed
with k or K to indicate a multiple of 1000, mor Mto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000, or
gor Gto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000,000.
An example of this option in use is –filt curs,r,iops,10k. This indicates that statistics for
a device that has more than 10,000 current read-only I/O operations are displayed.
–ni
Specifies that statistics for only non-idle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt curs,t,iops,0.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of I/O statistics for all ports:
cli% statport -iter 1
10:38:56 09/14/09 r/w I/O per second KBytes per sec Svt ms IOSz KB
Port D/C Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Cur Avg Qlen
0:0:1 Data t 2 2 2 34 34 34 13.0 13.0 17.4 17.4 0
0:0:2 Data t 0 0 0 4 4 4 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 0
0:2:1 Data t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
0:2:2 Data t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
0:3:1 Data t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
0:3:2 Data t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
1:0:1 Data t 0 0 0 4 4 4 9.7 9.7 8.2 8.2 0
1:0:2 Data t 2 2 2 34 34 34 11.4 11.4 17.4 17.4 0
1:3:1 Data t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
1:3:2 Data t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 Data t 5 5 76 76 11.6 11.6 15.6 15.6 0
614 Stat Commands
The columns in the example above are identified as follows:
•Port. The port ID.
•D/C. The Data or Control transfers.
•r/w. The I/O type. Values can be read (r), write (w), or read and write (t).
•I/O per second Cur. The current number of I/O per second.
•I/O per second Avg. The average number of I/O per second.
•KBytes per Max. The maximum number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Cur. The current number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Avg. The average number of KB per second.
•Svt ms Max. The maximum service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Cur. The current service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Avg. The average service time in milliseconds.
•IOSz KB Cur. The current I/O size in KB.
•IOSz KB Avg. The average I/O size in KB.
•Qlen. The queue length.
•Errs. Number of errors on the port.
•Drops. Number of dropped packets.
NOTES
•For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
•The -filt option applies only to data transfers and not control transfers.
•When a physical port is hosting multiple persistent ports (virtual ports), for example, when
port failover is active, statport indicates the aggregate statistics for all virtual ports on the
physical port.
statport 615
statqos
DESCRIPTION
The statqos command displays the run-time stats of active QoS rules.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the showqos command can be one of the following examples:
•statqos [options][{vvset:<name>|<pattern>}|sys:all_others}]...
AUTHORITY
•Any role in the system
OPTIONS
-domain {<domainname|pattern>}...
Shows rules with target objects in domains with names that match one or more of the specified
domains or patterns. If -domain is not specified, all rules with target objects in the current domain
are shown. See the currentdomain parameter in the setclienv and showclienv commands.
-vv {<vv_name>|<pattern>[{<vv_name>|<pattern>}]...
Applies only to QoS rules whose targets include virtual volumes with names matching any of the
names or patterns specified.
-rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
-d <secs>
Specifies the interval in seconds that statistics are sampled from using an integer from 1 through
2147483. If no count is specified, the command defaults to 2 seconds.
-iter <number>
Specifies that the statistics are to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1 through 2147483647.
-begin
Specifies that I/O averages are computed from the system start time. If not specified, the average
is computed since the first iteration of the command.
-idlep
Specifies the percent of idle columns in the output.
-sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting (<dir>)
can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
NOTE: Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows with the same
information in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
-filt <fspec>
616 Stat Commands
Specifies that statistics that fall below the threshold as specified by the <fspec> arguments, where
<fspec> is <type>, <op>, <meas>, <val> are filtered out and not displayed. The <type>, <op>,
<meas>, <val> are separated by one comma.
<type>
The type argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
•curs – specifies that only devices with current statistics above the threshold are displayed.
•avgs – specifies that only devices with average statistics above the threshold are displayed.
•max – specifies that only devices with maximum values above the threshold are displayed.
<op>
The operation argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
•r– specifies that read-only statistics are displayed.
•w– specifies that write-only statistics are displayed.
•t|rw – specifies that read and write totals are displayed.
<meas>
The measure argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
•iops – specifies that I/O operations per second are displayed. If this argument is used, the
minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
•bw – specifies that statistics for bandwidth in bytes per second are displayed. If this argument
is used, the minimum threshold value must be specified using the<val> argument.
•svct – specifies that statistics for service time in milliseconds are displayed.
•size – specifies that statistics for I/O operations in bytes are displayed.
<val>[k|K]|[m|M]|[g|G]
Specifies the minimum threshold using any integer. The integer can optionally be followed with k
or K to indicate a multiple of 1000, m or M to indicate a multiple of 1,000,000, or g or G to
indicate a multiple of 1,000,000,000.
NOTE: An example of this option is -filt curs,r,iops,10k. This indicates that statistics
for a device that has more than 10,000 current read-only I/O operations are displayed.
-ni
Specifies that statistics for only non-idle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option -filt curs,t,iops,0.
SPECIFIERS
[{vvset:{<name>|<pattern>}|sys:all_others}]
The QoS rules to display run-time stats. If none is specified, it displays all active QoS rules. <name>
and <pattern> refer to the target object name of the rule, as listed in showvvset commands.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of statistics for QoS:
cli% statqos -iter 1
NOTES
For this command KB = 1000 bytes.
For all the <pattern> fields, the patterns are glob-style (shell-style) patterns (see help on sub,globpat).
statqos 617
A Domain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to 1. The
listdom option is also set to 1 if the CLI was started with the -listdom option, or if the CLI was started
with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h and setclienv -h for
details of the environment variables.
618 Stat Commands
statrcopy
DESCRIPTION
The statrcopy command displays statistics for Remote Copy volume groups..
SYNTAX
statrcopy [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of two seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that I/O statistics are displayed a specified number of times as indicated by the num
argument using an integer from 1through 2147483647.
–u k|m|g
Displays statistics as kilobytes (k), megabytes (m), or gigabytes (g). If no unit is specified, the default
is kilobytes.
–hb
Specifies that the heartbeat round-trip time of the links should be displayed in addition to the link
throughput.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows statistics for sending links link0 and link1:
# statrcopy
17:37:01 05/17/07 -Throughput(KBytes per sec)-
Target Node Address IPC Total(KBytes) Current Average
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
amp1 0 10.100.33.96 RCs041 404761.15 4.95 4.95
amp1 1 10.101.33.96 RCs142 404661.63 3.30 3.30
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
amp1 809422.78 8.25 8.25
amp2 0 10.100.33.11 RCs037 86845920.00 24612.95 24612.95
amp2 1 10.101.33.11 RCs138 85299712.32 23217.30 23217.30
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
amp2 172145632.32 47830.26 47830.26
receive 0 receive RCr039 983110.14 27.32 27.32
receive 1 receive RCr140 823292.09 23.37 23.37
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
statrcopy 619
Receive 1806402.23 50.69 50.69
Send 172955055.10 47838.51 47838.51
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 174761457.34 47889.20 47889.20
Press the enter key to stop...
The columns in this example provide the following information:
•Target. The system name of the actual link process that is running.
•Node. The node that the link is running on.
•Address. The IP address of the remote node.
•IPC. The mode of the Remote Copy link (r) Receive or (s) Send.
•Total KBytes. The amount of data that has been transmitted since the link was started, in
KB.
•Throughput(KBs). The throughput on the link after the last iteration.
•Current. The amount of current transmitted since the last statrcopy iteration, in KB.
•Average. The average speed of the data transmission, in KB/s.
NOTES
•This command repeats until directed to stop.
•Within the context of this command, KB is 1000 bytes, MB is 1000KB, and GB is 1000MB.
•The numbers displayed by this command might be somewhat less than those displayed with
statport, as statrcopy output does not include TCP/IP overhead.
620 Stat Commands
statrcvv
DESCRIPTION
The statrcvv command displays statistics for Remote Copy volumes in a timed loop.
SYNTAX
statrcvv [options <arg>] [<VV_name>|<pattern>]...
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval in seconds that statistics are sampled from using an integer from 1 through
2147483. If no count is specified, the command defaults to 2 seconds.
-iter <number>
Specifies that the statistics are to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1 through 2147483647.
-t <target_name>...|<pattern>...
Show only volumes whose group is copied to the specified target name or pattern. Multiple target
names or patterns may be specified using a comma-separated list.
-port <port_NSP>...|<pattern>...
Show only volumes that are copied over the specified port or pattern. Multiple ports or patterns
may be specified using a comma-separated list.
-g <group_name>...|<pattern>...
Show only volumes whose group matches the specified group name or pattern. Multiple group
names or patterns may be specified using a comma-separated list.
-sync
Show only volumes that are being copied in synchronous mode.
-periodic
Show only volumes that are being copied in asynchronous periodic mode.
-primary
Show only volumes that are in the primary role.
-secondary
Show only volumes that are in the secondary role.
-targetsum
Specifies that the sums for all volumes of a target are displayed.
-portsum
Specifies that the sums for all volumes on a port are displayed.
-groupsum
Specifies that the sums for all volumes of a group are displayed.
-vvsum
Specifies that the sums for all targets and links of a volume are displayed.
-domainsum
statrcvv 621
Specifies that the sums for all volumes of a domain are displayed.
-domain <domainname>...|<pattern>...
Show only the virtual volumes that are in domains with names that match the specified domain
name(s) or pattern(s).
-sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to right,
beginning with 0. You must specify a column number.
In addition, you can specify the direction of sorting (<dir>):
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified and separated by a colon (:). Rows with the same information
in them as earlier columns will be sorted by values in later columns.
-filt <fspec>
Specifies that statistics that fall below the threshold specified by the <fspec> argument are filtered
out and not displayed. To specify the <fspec> argument, use the syntax:
<type>,<op>,<meas>,<val>. The arguments are separated by one comma.
•type - The type argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
curs - Specifies that only devices with current statistics above the threshold are displayed.◦
◦avgs - Specifies that only devices with average statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦maxs - Specifies that only devices with maximum values above the threshold are displayed.
•op - The operation argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
r- Specifies that read-only statistics are displayed.◦
◦w- Specifies that write-only statistics are displayed.
◦t|rw - Specifies that statistics for read and write totals are displayed.
•meas - The measure argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
iops - Specifies that I/O operations per second are displayed. If this argument is used,
the minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦
◦bw - Specifies that statistics for bandwidth in bytes per second are displayed. If this
argument is used, the minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val>
argument.
◦svct - Specifies that statistics for service time in milliseconds are displayed.
◦size - Specifies that statistics for I/O operations in bytes are displayed.
•<val>[k|K]|[m|M]|[g|G] - Specifies the minimum threshold using any integer. The integer
can be optionally followed with kor Kto indicate a multiple of 1000, mor Mto indicate a
multiple of 1000000, or gor Gto indicate a multiple of 1000000000.
For example, –filt curs,r,iops,10k specifies that statistics for a device that has more than
10,000 current read-only I/O operations are displayed.
-ni
622 Stat Commands
Specifies that statistics for only non-idle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option -filt curs,t,iops,0.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name|pattern>...
Displays statistics only for the specified virtual volume or volume name pattern. Multiple volumes
or patterns can be repeated (for example, <VV_name> <VV_name>...). If not specified, all
virtual volumes that are configured for Remote Copy are listed.
RESTRICTIONS
This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows statistics for all synchronous Remote Copy volumes:
cli% statrcvv -sync
09:48:45 03/30/10 I/O per sec KBytes per sec Svt ms Rmt Svt ms
IOSz KB
VVname RCGroup Target Mode Port Type Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Cur Avg
Cur Avg
testvv.0 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0:2:1 FC 32 45 50 4181 5839 6534 11.5 11.6 1.3 1.3
131.1 131.1
testvv.0 multi.1 amp2 Sync 1:2:1 FC 49 35 49 6456 4555 6456 9.3 10.4 1.3 1.5
131.1 131.1
testvv.1 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0:2:1 FC 37 38 39 4796 4952 5093 10.0 10.3 1.2 1.1
131.1 131.1
testvv.1 multi.1 amp2 Sync 1:2:1 FC 39 38 39 5164 5044 5164 7.7 7.2 1.0 1.0
131.1 131.1
testvv.2 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0:2:1 FC 45 14 45 5841 1895 5841 9.7 9.9 1.1 1.1
131.1 131.1
testvv.2 multi.1 amp2 Sync 1:2:1 FC 33 70 89 4365 9202 11721 6.9 6.6 1.0 1.4
131.1 131.1
testvv.3 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0:2:1 FC 34 37 42 4427 4907 5449 9.9 10.2 1.1 1.1
131.1 131.1
testvv.3 multi.1 amp2 Sync 1:2:1 FC 44 38 44 5779 5014 5779 7.4 7.2 1.0 0.9
131.1 131.1
testvv.4 multi.1 amp2 Sync 0:2:1 FC 45 48 51 5902 6328 6674 10.9 11.4 1.3 1.3
131.1 131.1
testvv.4 multi.1 amp2 Sync 1:2:1 FC 32 30 32 4181 3913 4181 11.1 11.3 1.5 1.5
131.1 131.1
testvv.8 sync.2 amp3 Sync 0:3:1 IP 33 33 35 4304 4326 4531 16.7 17.4 7.5 7.8
131.1 131.1
testvv.8 sync.2 amp3 Sync 1:3:1 IP 25 23 25 3259 2950 3259 15.5 15.7 7.5 7.7
131.1 131.1
testvv.9 sync.2 amp3 Sync 0:3:1 IP 28 28 28 3689 3669 3691 14.0 14.5 7.6 7.6
131.1 131.1
testvv.9 sync.2 amp3 Sync 1:3:1 IP 29 28 29 3750 3669 3750 12.8 12.8 7.5 7.6
131.1 131.1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 504 506 66093 66262 10.6 10.7 2.6 2.7
131.1 131.1
Press the enter key to stop...
statrcvv 623
The columns in this example provide the following information:
•VVname. The name of the virtual volume being copied.
•RCGroup. Remote Copy group containing the volume.
•Target. Remote Copy target system to which the volume is copied.
•Mode. Remote Copy mode of the volume, either "Per" (asynchronous periodic) or "Sync"
(synchronous).
•Port. Remote Copy port for which statistics are displayed.
•Type. Interface type of the port.
•I/O per second Cur. The current number of I/O per second.
•I/O per second Avg. The average number of I/O per second.
•I/O per second Max. The maximum number of I/O per second.
•KBytes per second Cur. The current number of KB per second.
•KBytes per second Avg. The average number of KB per second.
•KBytes per second Max. The maximum number of KB per second.
•Svt ms Cur. The current Remote Copy service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Avg. The average Remote Copy service time in milliseconds.
•Rmt Svt ms Cur. The current service time in milliseconds to complete I/O on the Remote
Copy backup system.
•Rmt Svt ms Avg. The average service time in milliseconds to complete I/O on the Remote
Copy backup system.
•IOSz KB Cur. The current I/O size in KB.
•IOSz KB Avg. The average I/O size in KB.
NOTES
None.
624 Stat Commands
statvlun
DESCRIPTION
The statvlun command displays statistics for Virtual Volumes (VVs) and Logical Unit Number
(LUN) host attachments.
SYNTAX
statvlun [options <arg>]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-domain <domain_name|pattern>...
Shows only Virtual Volume Logical Unit Number (VLUNs) whose VVs are in domains with names
that match one or more of the specified domain names or patterns. Multiple domain names or
patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated list (for example -domain
<domain_name>,<domain_name>...).
–host <host_name|pattern>...
Shows only VLUNs exported to the specified hosts or patterns. Multiple hosts or patterns can be
repeated using a comma-separated list (for example -host <host_name>,<host_name>...).
–v <VV_name|pattern>...
Requests that only Logical Disks (LDs) mapped to VVs that match any of the specified names or
patterns be displayed. Multiple volume names or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated
list (for example -vv <VV_name>,<VV_name>...).
–l <LUN|pattern>...
Specifies that VLUNs with LUNs matching the specified LUN(s) or pattern(s) are displayed. Multiple
LUNs or patterns can be repeated using a comma-separated list (for example -l
<LUN>,<LUN>...).
–nodes <node_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified nodes and Physical Disks (PDs) connected to those
nodes. The node_list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The
list can also consist of a single integer (1). If the node_list is not specified, all disks on all nodes
are displayed.
–slots <slot_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified PCI slots and PDs connected to those PCI slots. The
slot_list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list can also
consist of a single integer (1). If the slot list is not specified, all disks on all slots are displayed.
–ports <port_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified port slots and PDs connected to those port slots.
The port_list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The list can
also consist of a single integer (1). If the port list is not specified, all disks on all ports are displayed.
–lw
Lists the host’s World Wide Name (WWN) or iSCSI names. This is especially useful when multiple
WWNs or iSCSI names belonging to the same host are visible on the same port.
–domainsum
statvlun 625
Specifies that sums for VLUNs are grouped by domain in the display. All VLUNs to unnamed hosts
are added and displayed as a single set of data with a "-" host name.
–vvsum
Specifies that sums for VLUNs of the same VV are displayed.
–hostsum
Specifies that sums for VLUNs are grouped by host in the display. All VLUNs to unnamed hosts
are added and displayed as a single set of data with a nameless host.
–rw
Specifies reads and writes to be displayed separately. If this option is not used, then the total of
reads plus writes is displayed.
–d <secs>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of two seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–begin
Specifies that I/O averages are computed from the system start time. If not specified, the average
is computed since the first iteration of the command.
–idlep
Includes a percent idle columns in the output.
–sortcol <col>[,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:). Rows with the same information in
them as earlier columns will be sorted by the values in the later columns.
–filt <fspec>
626 Stat Commands
Specifies that statistics that fall below the threshold as specified by the <fspec> arguments where
<fspec> is <type>,<op>,<meas>,<val>, are filtered out and not displayed. The <type>,
<op>,<meas>, and <val> arguments are separated with one comma.
•<type>
The type argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦curs
Specifies that only devices with current statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦avgs
Specifies that only devices with average statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦maxs
Specifies that only devices with maximum values above the threshold are displayed.
•<op>
The operation argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦r
Specifies that read-only statistics are displayed.
◦w
Specifies that write-only statistics are displayed.
◦t|rw
Specifies that statistics for read and write totals are displayed.
•<meas>
The meas argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦iops
Specifies that I/O operations per second are displayed. If this argument is used, the
minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦bw
Specifies that statistics for bandwidth in bytes per second are displayed. If this argument
is used, the minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦svct
Specifies that statistics for service time in milliseconds are displayed.
◦size
Specifies that statistics for I/O operations in bytes are displayed.
•<val> [k|K]|[m|M]|[g|G]
Specifies the minimum threshold using any integer. The integer can optionally be followed
with k or K to indicate a multiple of 1000, mor Mto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000, or
gor Gto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000,000.
An example of this option in use is –filt curs,r,iops,10k that indicates that statistics for a
device that has more than 10,000 current read-only I/O operations are displayed.
–ni
statvlun 627
Specifies that statistics for only nonidle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt curs,t,iops,0.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays one iteration of statistics for VVs and LUN host attachments:
cli% statvlun -iter 1
15:34:18 05/31/07 r/w I/O per second KBytes per sec Svt ms IOSz KB
Lun VVname Host Port Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Cur Avg Qlen
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
total t 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
The columns in the example above are identified as follows:
•LUN. The LUN.
•VVname. The name of the virtual volume.
•Host. The host from which the VLUN is exported.
•Port. The port to which the VLUN is exported.
•r/w. The I/O type. Values can be read (r), write (w), or read and write (t).
•I/O per second Cur. The current number of I/O per second.
•I/O per second Avg. The average number of I/O per second.
•KBytes per Max. The maximum number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Cur. The current number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Avg. The average number of KB per second.
•Svt ms Max. The maximum service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Cur. The current service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Avg. The average service time in milliseconds.
•IOSz KB Cur. The current I/O size in KB.
•IOSz KB Avg. The average I/O size in KB.
•Qlen. The queue length.
NOTES
•For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
•A Domain column may be included by using the setclienv command to set listdom to
1. The listdom option is also set to 1 if the CLI was started with the -listdom option or if
the CLI was started with the TPDLISTDOM environment variable set. Please run cli -h and
setclienv -h for details of the environment variables.
628 Stat Commands
statvv
DESCRIPTION
The statvv command displays statistics for Virtual Volumes (VVs) in a timed loop.
SYNTAX
statvv [options <arg>] [<VV_name_or_pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Any role in the system.
OPTIONS
-domain <domain_name|pattern>...
Shows only the VVs that are in domains with names that match the specified domain names or
patterns.
–rw
Specifies that the display includes separate read and write data. If not specified, the total is
displayed.
–d <seconds>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to an interval of two seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that the histogram is to stop after the indicated number of iterations using an integer from
1through 2147483647.
–sortcol <col> [,<dir>][:<col>[,<dir>]...]
Sorts command output based on the column number (<col>). Columns are numbered from left to
right, beginning with 0. At least one column must be specified. In addition, the direction of sorting
(<dir>) can be specified as follows:
inc
Sort in increasing order (default).
dec
Sort in decreasing order.
Multiple columns can be specified separated by a colon (:) Rows with the same information in
them as earlier columns will be sorted by the values in the later columns.
–filt <fspec>
statvv 629
Specifies that statistics that fall below the threshold as specified by the <fspec> arguments where
<fspec> is <type>,<op>,<meas>,<val>, are filtered out and not displayed. The <type>,
<op>,<meas>, and <val> arguments are separated with one comma.
•<type>
The type argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦curs
Specifies that only devices with current statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦avgs
Specifies that only devices with average statistics above the threshold are displayed.
◦maxs
Specifies that only devices with maximum values above the threshold are displayed.
•<op>
The operation argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦r
Specifies that read-only statistics are displayed.
◦w
Specifies that write-only statistics are displayed.
◦t|rw
Specifies that statistics for read and write totals are displayed.
•<meas>
The meas argument can be specified with one of the following arguments:
◦iops
Specifies that I/O operations per second are displayed. If this argument is used, the
minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦bw
Specifies that statistics for bandwidth in bytes per second are displayed. If this argument
is used, the minimum threshold value must be specified using the <val> argument.
◦svct
Specifies that statistics for service time in milliseconds are displayed.
◦size
Specifies that statistics for I/O operations in bytes are displayed.
•<val> [k|K]|[m|M]|[g|G]
Specifies the minimum threshold using any integer. The integer can optionally be followed
with k or K to indicate a multiple of 1000, mor Mto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000, or
gor Gto indicate a multiple of 1,000,000,000.
An example of this option in use is –filt curs,r,iops,10k. This indicates that statistics for
a device that has more than 10,000 current read-only I/O operations are displayed.
–ni
630 Stat Commands
Specifies that statistics for only nonidle devices are displayed. This option is shorthand for the
option –filt curs,t,iops,0.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name|pattern>...
Only statistics are displayed for the specified VV or pattern. Multiple volumes or patterns can be
repeated (for example <VV_name> <VV_name>...). If not specified, all VVs are listed.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays I/O statistics for all VVs:
cli% statvv -iter 1
15:31:21 05/31/07 r/w I/O per second KBytes per sec Svt ms IOSz KB
VVname Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Max Cur Avg Cur Avg Qlen
admin t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
test2 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
total t 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0
The columns in the example above are identified as follows:
•VVname. The virtual volume name.
•r/w. The I/O type. Values can be read (r), write (w), or read and write (t).
•I/O per second Cur. The current number of I/O per second.
•I/O per second Avg. The average number of I/O per second.
•KBytes per Max. The maximum number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Cur. The current number of KB per second.
•KBytes per Avg. The average number of KB per second.
•Svt ms Max. The maximum service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Cur. The current service time in milliseconds.
•Svt ms Avg. The average service time in milliseconds.
•IOSz KB Cur. The current I/O size in KB.
•IOSz KB Avg. The average I/O size in KB.
•Qlen. The queue length.
NOTES
•If a <VV_name> or <pattern> are specified, then VVs with names matching any of the
patterns are listed. Otherwise all VVs are listed. These patterns are glob-style patterns. Refer
to “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for further information.
•VVs may be accessed externally by hosts and internally by the prefetcher. VV data measured
by this command include accesses by the prefetcher.
•In addition to external accesses by hosts, VVs may be read internally by the system read-ahead
prefetcher. The histvv data includes read-ahead accesses from the prefetcher, which can
statvv 631
cause the read data to appear more than seen by the hosts. Use the histvlun -vvsum
command to see data for only accesses from the host.
•For this command: KB = 1000 bytes.
632 Stat Commands
28 Stop Commands
stopcim
DESCRIPTION
The stopcim command stops the CIM server from servicing CIM requests.
WARNING! The stopcim command must be issued to stop the CIM server when setting the
storage system to Common Criteria mode.
SYNTAX
stopcim [option]
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that the operation is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
-x
Specifies that the operation terminates the server immediately without graceful shutdown notice.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example stops the CIM server:
cli% stopcim
Are you sure you want to stop CIM server?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
CIM server stopped successfully.
The following example stops the CIM server immediately without graceful shutdown notice and
confirmation:
cli% stopcim -f -x
CIM server stopped successfully.
NOTES
By default, the CIM server is not started until the startcim command is issued.
stopcim 633
stoprcopy
DESCRIPTION
The stoprcopy command disables the Remote Copy functionality for any started Remote Copy
volume groups.
SYNTAX
stoprcopy [options]
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
Any role granted the rcopy_stop right.
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–f
Specifies that any started copy will not ask for confirmation for the -clear option.
–stopgroups
Specifies that any started Remote Copy volume groups are stopped.
–clear
Specifies that configuration entries affiliated with the stopped mode are deleted.
CAUTION: Issuing the stoprcopy -clear command completely removes the Remote Copy
setup and is NOT reversible.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example disables the Remote Copy functionality of all primary Remote Copy volume
groups:
# stoprcopy –stopgroups
NOTES
•If the -stopgroups option is not used, all groups must already be stopped.
•An older version of this command provided specifiers to disable the primary or backup systems.
These specifiers were deprecated in HP 3PAR OS release 2.2.3.
•Unless the -stopgroups option is used, the command will fail if there are any Remote Copy
groups that are started. If the -clear option has been used, the configuration is completely
erased. Consequently, Remote Copy operations cannot be restarted using only the
startrcopy command. The configuration must be rebuilt. Therefore, the -clear option
requires confirmation with the -f option, the TPDFORCE environment variable, or by
634 Stop Commands
interactively typing, y. Refer to the HP 3PAR Command Line Interface Administrator’s Manual
for information about using environment variables.
stoprcopy 635
stoprcopygroup
DESCRIPTION
The stoprcopygroup command stops the Remote Copy functionality for the specified Remote
Copy volume group.
SYNTAX
stoprcopygroup [option <arg>] <group_name>|<pattern>...
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
Any role granted the rcopygroup_stop right.
OPTIONS
–nosnap
In synchronous mode, this option turns off the creation of snapshots. This is useful if
removercopygroup is to be run to remove Remote Copy. In asynchronous periodic mode, this
option deletes any current synchronization snapshots.
-t <target_name>
Indicates that only the group on the specified target is stopped. If this option is not used, by default,
the stoprcopygroup command will affect all of a group’s targets.
-f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
-pat
Specifies that specified patterns are treated as glob-style patterns and all Remote Copy groups
matching the specified pattern will be stopped. The -pat option can specify a list of patterns. By
default, confirmation is required to proceed with the command unless the -f option is specified.
This option must be used if the <pattern> specifier is used.
SPECIFIERS
<group_name>
The name of the Remote Copy volume group to stop.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to stop multiple groups. If the
<pattern> specifier is not used, the <group_name> specifier must be used.
RESTRICTIONS
This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for more information.
EXAMPLES
The following example stops Remote Copy for Group1:
# stoprcopygroup Group1
636 Stop Commands
The following example stops Remote Copy Groups that start with the name testgroup:
# stoprcopygroup -pat testgroup*
NOTES
•If a group’s target has the mirror_config policy set and the group is a primary group,
then this command will be mirrored to that target and the corresponding secondary group
will be stopped. If the mirror_config policy is set and the group is a secondary, then this
command will fail.
•If the mirror_config policy is not set and this command is issued on a secondary group,
then the corresponding primary group will also be stopped as a result of this command.
•In sync mode, this command creates snapshots that are used for synchronizing the primary
and secondary groups if startrcopygroup is run later.
stoprcopygroup 637
stopwsapi
DESCRIPTION
The stopwsapi command stops the Web Services API server from servicing HTTP and HTTPS
requests.
SYNTAX
stopwsapi [options]
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
Any role granted the wsapi_stop right
OPTIONS
-f
Specifies that the operation is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
None
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to stop the Web Services API server:
cli% stopwsapi
Are you sure you want to stop the Web Services API server?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
Web Services API server stopped successfully.
The following example shows how to stop the Web Services API server immediately without a
confirmation notice:
cli% stopwsapi -f
Web Services API server stopped successfully.
NOTES
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
By default, the Web Services API server is not started until the startwsapi command is issued.
638 Stop Commands
29 Sync Command
639
syncrcopy
DESCRIPTION
The syncrcopy command manually synchronizes Remote Copy volume groups.
SYNTAX
syncrcopy [options <arg>] <group_name>|<pattern>...
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
Any role granted the rcopy_sync right.
OPTIONS
–w
Wait for synchronization to complete before returning to a command prompt.
–n
Do not save resynchronization snapshot. This option is only relevant for asynchronous periodic
mode volume groups.
NOTE: If you use the -n option, you must perform a full synchronization at the next sync
–ovrd
Force synchronization without prompting for confirmation, even if volumes are already synchronized.
This option is only relevant for synchronous mode volume groups and can be used to resynchronize
volumes that have become inconsistent.
-t <target_name>
Indicates that only the group on the specified target is synchronized. If this option is not used, by
default, the syncrcopy command will affect all of a group’s targets.
-pat
Specifies that the patterns specified are treated as glob-style patterns and all Remote Copy groups
matching the specified pattern will be synced. The -pat option can specify a list of patterns. This
option must be used if the <pattern> specifier is used.
SPECIFIERS
<group_name>
Specifies the name of the Remote Copy volume group to be synchronized. This name can be
obtained using the showrcopy command.
<pattern>
Specifies a glob-style pattern. This specifier can be repeated to sync multiple groups. If the
<pattern> specifier is not used, the <group_name> specifier must be used.
RESTRICTIONS
This command requires the HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software license. Contact your local service
provider for further information.
640 Sync Command
EXAMPLES
The following example specifies that Remote Copy volume group Group1 should be synchronized
with it’s corresponding secondary volume group:
# syncrcopy Group1
Synchronization request issued for group Group1
The following example specifies that all Remote Copy volume groups that start with the name
testgroup should be synchronized with their corresponding secondary volume group:
# syncrcopy -pat testgroup*
NOTES
•Mode (synchronous or asynchronous periodic) is set using the creatercopygroup command.
•For information about setting targets, see the creatercopytarget command.
syncrcopy 641
30 Tune Commands
tunealdvv
DESCRIPTION
This command is only used for non-provisioned virtual volumes. Please use the tunevv command
to create a virtual volume that has its user space provisioned from a CPG.
This command was deprecated in the 2.2.4 release and will be removed in a future release.
The tunealdvv command changes the layout of a virtual volume.
SYNTAX
The tunealdvv command uses one of the following syntax conventions:
•tunealdvv [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•tunealdvv restart [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•tunealdvv rollback [options <arg>] <VV_name>
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit1
Any role granted the vv_tune right
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
SUBCOMMANDS
restart
Restarts a tunealdvv command operation that was previously interrupted because of component
failure or user-initiated cancellation.
rollback
Rolls back a tunealdvv command operation that was previously interrupted. The canceltask
command needs to run before the rollback.
OPTIONS
The following options can be used on all commands:
–f
Forces the command. The command completes without prompting for confirmation.
–waittask
Specifies that the command will wait for any created tasks to complete.
The following options cannot be used with the restart or rollback subcommands:
–cpg <CPG_name>
Name of the Common Provisioning Group (CPG) to which the snapshot data space is moved. If
the -cpg option is specified, only the snapshot data space of a volume is tuned. When snapshot
data space is tuned, the only permitted option is the –cpg option. If this option is not specified,
only the USR space of a volume is tuned.
–templ <template_name>
1. Certain options require this additional role restriction as indicated.
642 Tune Commands
Use the options defined in template <template_name>. The template is created using the
createtemplate command. Options specified in the template are read-only or read-write. The
read-write options may be overridden with new options at the time of their creation, but read-only
options may not be overridden at creation time. Options not explicitly specified in the template
take their default values, and all of these options are either read-only or read-write (using the –nro
or –nrw options of the createtemplate command). Sizing options from the template are
ignored. This command does not change the size of the VV on which it acts.
–t <RAID_type>
Specifies the RAID type of the Logical Disk (LD): r0 for RAID-0, r1 for RAID-1, or r5 for RAID-5,
or r6 for RAID-6. If no RAID type is specified, the default is r1.
–ssz <size_number_chunklets>
Specifies the set size in the number of chunklets. The default depends on the RAID type specified:
2for RAID-1, 4for RAID-5, and 8for RAID-6.
–rs <size>
Specifies the number of sets in a row. The <size> is a positive integer. If not specified, no row
limit is imposed.
–ss <size_KB>
Specifies the step size from 32 KB to 512 KB. The step size should be a power of 2 and a multiple
of 32. If no value is entered, the step size defaults to 256 KB for RAID-0 and RAID-1, and 128 KB
for RAID-5. For RAID-6, the default is a function of the set size.
–ha port|cage|mag
Specifies that the layout must support the failure of one port pair, one cage, or one drive magazine
(mag). This option has no meaning for RAID-0.
–ch first|last
Specifies the chunklet location preference, either first (attempt to use the lowest numbered
available chunklets) or last (attempt to use the highest numbered available chunklets). If no
argument is specified, the default location is first.
–p <pattern>
Specifies a pattern for candidate disks. Patterns are used to select disks that are used for creating
logical disks. If no pattern is specified, the option defaults to all Fibre Channel (FC) disks. If specified
multiple times, each instance of the specified pattern adds additional candidate disks that match
the pattern. The -devtype pattern cannot be used to mix Near Line (NL), FC, and Solid State
Drive (SSD) drives:
NOTE: An item is specified as an integer, a comma-separated list of integers, or a range of
integers specified from low to high.
–nd <item>
Specifies one or more nodes. Nodes are identified by one or more integers (<item>). Multiple
nodes are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of nodes is separated with a hyphen
(0–7). The primary path of the disks must be on the specified node(s).
–st <item>
Specifies one or more PCI slots. Slots are identified by one or more integers (<item>). Multiple
slots are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of slots is separated with a hyphen
(0–7). The primary path of the disks must be on the specified PCI slot(s).
–pt <item>
Specifies one or more ports. Ports are identified by one or more integers (<item>). Multiple ports
are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of ports is separated with a hyphen (0–5).
The primary path of the disks must be on the specified port number(s).
tunealdvv 643
–cg <item>
Specifies one or more drive cages. Drive cages are identified by one or more integers (<item>).
Multiple drive cages are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of drive cages is
separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified drive cage(s) must contain disks.
–mg <item>
Specifies one or more drive magazines. The 1. or 0. displayed in the CagePos column of showpd
output indicating the side of the cage is omitted when using the -mg option. Drive magazines are
identified by one or more integers (<item>). Drive magazines are identified by one or more
integers (<item>). Multiple drive magazines are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range
of drive magazines is separated with a hyphen (0–7). The specified drive magazine(s) must contain
disks.
–pn <item>
Specifies one or more disk positions within a drive magazine. Disk positions are identified by one
or more integers (<item>). Multiple disk positions are separated with a single comma (1,2,3).
A range of disk positions is separated with a hyphen (0–3). The specified position(s) must contain
disks.
–dk <item>
Specifies one or more physical disks. Disks are identified by one or more integers (<item>).
Multiple disks are separated with a single comma (1,2,3). A range of disks is separated with a
hyphen (0–3). Disks must match the specified ID(s).
NOTE: The following arguments are used to limit the disks that are used to create logical disks
based on the characteristics of the disk drive.
–tc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–tc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with total chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–fc_gt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets greater than the number specified are selected.
–fc_lt <number>
Specifies that physical disks with free chunklets less than the number specified are selected.
–devid <model>
Specifies that physical disks identified by their models are selected. Models can be specified in a
comma-separated list. Models can be displayed by issuing the showpd -i command.
–devtype <type>
Specifies that physical disks must have the specified device type (FC for Fibre Channel, NL for
nearline, or SSD for solid state drive) to be used. Device types can be displayed by issuing the
showpd command. If it is not specified, the default device type is FC.
-rpm <number>
Disks must be of the specified speed. Device speeds are shown in the RPM column of the showpd
command. The number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the
other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative
performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth and the access
time.
644 Tune Commands
Disks that satisfy all of the specified characteristics are used. For example, -p -fc_gt 60
-fc_lt 230 -nd 2 specifies all the disks that have greater than 60 and less than 230 free
chunklets and that are connected to node 2 through their primary path.
–wait <secs>
If the tunealdvv command fails due to the lack of clean space, the -wait option specifies the
number of seconds to wait for the system to clean the dirty space before returning. If -wait 0 is
issued, the command returns immediately. If this option is not used, the command will keep waiting
for dirty chunklets to be cleaned if enough space will be available with the dirty chunklets cleaned.
–dr
Specifies that the command is a dry run and that no logical disks or virtual volumes are created.
–verbose on|off
Specifies that verbose output is either enabled (on) or disabled (off). If not specified, verbose is
disabled.
–cnt <number_of_VV>
Specifies the number of identical virtual volumes to tune using an integer from 1through 999. If
not specified, one virtual volume is tuned. If the -cnt option is specified, then -restart and
-rollback options and the restart and rollback subcommands are not permitted.
-restart
Restart a tunealdvv command call that was previously interrupted because of component failure,
or because of user-initiated cancellation. This option was deprecated in the 2.2.3 release and will
be changed or removed in a future release.
-rollback
Rollback a tunealdvv command call that was previously interrupted. The canceltask command
needs to run before the rollback. This option was deprecated in the 2.2.3 release and will be
changed or removed in a future release.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
Specifies an existing virtual volume name.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•This command requires a Dynamic Optimization license. Contact your local HP 3PAR
representative for information.
•This command requires sufficient available physical space, equivalent to the user size of the
volume being tuned.
•When changing the layout of a virtual volume, you can optionally apply arguments originally
defined for logical disk creation through the createtemplate command by issuing the
tunealdvv -templ <template_name> command. The -templ option is only valid for
logical disk template object types.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to use the tunealdvv command to convert a virtual volume
(testvol) to RAID-5:
cli% tunealdvv –t r5 testvol
Task 1 started.
tunealdvv 645
The following example shows how to use the tunealdvv command to change the availability
level of a virtual volume (testvol) to cage. Note that because the default availability parameter
setting (–ha) for tunealdvv is cage, it is not necessary to explicitly specify cage-level availability
when issuing this command.
cli% tunealdvv testvol
Task 2 started.
The following example shows how to use the tunealdvv command to add a disk filter specifying
that the logical disks supporting virtual volume testvol must use chunklets on physical disks 20
and 31 only.
cli% tunealdvv –p –dk 20,31 testvol
Task 3 started.
The following examples shows how to start, cancel, and then restart a tunealdvv operation on
VV testvol:
cli% tunealdvv –t r5 –ha mag testvol
Task 1 started.
cli% canceltask 1
Are you sure you want to cancel task 1?
select q=quit y=yes n=no: y
cli% tunealdvv –restart testvol
Task 2 started.
NOTES
•This command was deprecated in the 2.2.4 release and will be changed or removed in a
future release. Use the tunevv command in the future.
•Automatic chunklet selection for relocations will prefer selection of chunklets on physical disks
with the same device type as the source. Use the –p devtype option to override this default.
Use the showpd command to see the device types of physical disks in the system.
•When canceling a tunealdvv task, the canceltask command can return before a
cancellation is completed. Thus, resources reserved for the task cannot be immediately
available. This can prevent actions like restarting the canceled tunealdvv task. Use the
waittask command in your scripts to ensure orderly completion of the tunealdvv
cancellation before taking other actions. See “waittask” (page 665) for details about using the
waittask command.
•This command is only used for the non-provisioned VV. The tunevv command should be used
instead to create a VV that has its user space provisioned from a Common Provision Group.
646 Tune Commands
tunepd
DESCRIPTION
The tunepd command identifies physical disks with high service times and optionally executes
load balancing.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the tunepd command can be one of the following:
•tunepd [options <arg>] maxsvct <msecs>|highest
•tunepd [options <arg>] avgsvct <msecs>|highest
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
Any role granted the pd_tune right
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
NOTE: If the -nodes , -slots ,-ports , or -vv options are not specified, all physical
disks are included.
–nodes <node_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified nodes and physical disks connected to those nodes.
The node list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). The node list can
also consist of a single integer (1). If the node list is not specified, all disks on all nodes are
displayed.
–slots <slot_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified PCI slots and physical disks connected to those PCI
slots. The slot list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). A list can also
consist of a single integer (1). If the slot list is not specified, all disks on all slots are displayed.
–ports <port_list>
Specifies that the display is limited to specified port slots and physical disks connected to those
port slots. The port list is specified as a series of integers separated by commas (1,2,3). A list
can also consist of a single integer (1). If the port list is not specified, all disks on all ports are
displayed.
–vv <VV_name>
Specifies that the physical disks used by the indicated virtual volume name are included for statistic
sampling.
–d <seconds>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, that statistics are sampled using an integer from 1through
2147483. If no interval is specified, the option defaults to 30 seconds.
–iter <number>
Specifies that I/O statistics are sampled a specified number of times as indicated by the number
argument using an integer greater than 0. If 0is specified, I/O statistics are looped indefinitely.
If this option is not specified, the command defaults to 1iteration.
–freq <minutes>
tunepd 647
Specifies the interval, in minutes, that the command enters standby mode between iterations using
an integer greater than 0. If this option is not specified, the number of iterations is looped
indefinitely.
–vvlayout
Specifies that the layout of the virtual volume is displayed. If this option is not specified, the layout
of the virtual volume is not displayed.
–portstat
Specifies that statistics for all disk ports in the system are displayed. If this option is not specified,
statistics for ports are not displayed.
–pdstat
Specifies that statistics for all physical disks, rather than only those with high service times, are
displayed. If this option is not specified, statistics for all disks are not displayed.
–chstat
Specifies that chunklet statistics are displayed. If not specified, chunklet statistics are not displayed.
If this option is used with the –movech option, either on or force must be specified. See
“RESTRICTIONS” (page 648) for conditions on using the -chstat option.
–maxpd <number>
Specifies that only the indicated number of physical disks with high service times are displayed.
If this option is not specified, 10 PDs are displayed.
–movech auto|manual
Specifies that if any disks with unbalanced loads are detected that chunklets are moved from those
disks for load balancing.
auto
Specifies that the system chooses source and destination chunklets. If not specified, you are prompted
for selecting the source and destination chunklets.
manual
Specifies that the source and destination chunklets are manually entered.
SPECIFIERS
maxsvct <msec>|highest
Specifies that either the maximum service time threshold (<msec>) that is used to discover
overutilized physical disks, or the physical disks that have the highest maximum service times
(highest). If a threshold is specified, then any disk whose maximum service time exceeds the
specified threshold is considered a candidate for load balancing.
avgsvct <msec>|highest
Specifies that either the average service time threshold (<msec>) that is used to discover overutilized
physical disks, or the physical disks that have the highest average service time (highest). If a
threshold is specified, any disk whose average service time exceeds the specified threshold is
considered a candidate for load balancing.
RESTRICTIONS
•Access to all domains is required to run this command.
•This command requires a System Tuner license. Contact your local HP 3PAR representative
for information.
•The system does not allow multiple tunepd processes with the -chstat on or –chstat
force options to run concurrently.
648 Tune Commands
•If one or more chunklet statistics collection processes are running, the tunepd command exits
to prevent possible tunepd –chstat on processes running simultaneously.
•Use the –chstat force option only when you have verified that no other tunepd processes
are running.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, PDs with average service times exceeding 50 milliseconds are identified
and their chunklets automatically relocated to rebalance the PDs’ load.
cli% tunepd –vvlayout –chstat –movech auto avgsvct 50
Collecting I/O statistic for physical disks (PDs) ...
PdId Pos APort BPort Iops Kbps Svct(ms) IOSz(KB)
---- ------ -------- -------- -------- -------- ---------- ------------
29 1:3:3 0:4:1 1:5:1* 231.9 8668.8 87.0 37.4
The following physical disks were identified as candidates
for load balancing: 29
Layout of related virtual volumes (on candidate physical disks).
VvId VvName LdId LdName Avail RAID PdId
------ ------------- ------ ----------------- ------- ------- ----
0 admin 5 admin.usr.2 cage 1
0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14,17,19
23,25,27,29
1 vv0 8 vv0.usr.2 cage 1
0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14,17,19
23,25,27,29
2 vv1 11 vv1.usr.1 mag 5 2,6,19,29
Enable statistic collection for chunklets on PD 29
Collecting statistic for chunklets of candidate PDs...
Disable statistic collection for chunklets on PD 29
Statistic of chunklets of candidate PDs:
PdId PdCh LdId LdName LdCh Iops Kbps Svct(ms) IOSz(KB)
----- ------ ------ ---------------- ------ -------- -------- -----------
------------
29 20 8 vv0.usr.2 29 22.8 842.7 109.9 37.0
29 19 8 vv0.usr.2 17 22.0 842.7 113.7 38.2
29 18 8 vv0.usr.2 5 7.8 282.3 117.0 36.3
29 26 11 vv1.usr.1 23 42.0 1561.6 77.0 37.2
29 25 11 vv1.usr.1 19 37.8 1401.4 70.2 37.1
29 24 11 vv1.usr.1 15 39.5 1454.1 73.3 36.8
29 23 11 vv1.usr.1 11 35.3 1333.6 73.1 37.7
29 22 11 vv1.usr.1 7 26.5 1018.1 76.8 38.4
Statistic of Logical disks of candidate PDs:
PdId LdId LdName Iops Kbps Svct(ms) IOSz(KB)
------ ----- ---------------- -------- --------- ---------- ------------
29 8 vv0.usr.2 52.6 1967.8 112.5 37.4
29 11 vv1.usr.1 181.1 6768.8 74.0 37.4
Statistic of candidate physical disks:
PdId Pos APort BPort Iops Kbps Svct(ms) IOSz(KB)
----- ------- ------- -------- -------- -------- ---------- ------------
29 1:3:3 0:4:1 1:5:1* 233.7 8736.6 82.7 37.4
tunepd 649
Physical Disk 29: The following chunklets have been marked for moving: 26
Pass 1: Dryrun moving chunklets:
Move Status qset qrow qcon
qlocal qlost
29:26–10:16 source and destination are valid mag 0 2
true false
Pass 2:
Move Status qset qrow qcon
qlocal qlost
29:26–10:16 ch was moved mag 0 2
true false
Note that physical disk 29 is identified as matching the search criterion of average service times
greater than 50 milliseconds and its chunklets are relocated.
NOTES
•When the –movech auto or –movech manual option is specified the system only identifies
(auto mode) or recommends (manual mode) source chunklets for which there are destination
chunklets retaining the availability of the source chunklets’ logical disks.
•Separate instances of the tunepd command can be issued to identify load balancing
candidates and relocate chunklets, or execute both tasks with one instance of the tunepd
command.
•Previous options –n <node_list>,–s <slot_list>, and –p <port_list> have been
deprecated in 2.2.3 and replaced with –nodes <node_list>,–slots <slot_list>,
and –ports <port_list>.
•If the -nodes,-slots,-ports or -vv options are not specified, all physical disks are
included.
650 Tune Commands
tunesys
DESCRIPTION
The tunesys command is used to analyze and detect poor layout and disk utilization across an
entire HP 3PAR storage system array. This command runs a series of low level operations to affect
a re-balance of resources on the system.
SYNTAX
tunesys [options]
AUTHORITY
•Super, Edit
•Any role granted the sys_tune right
OPTIONS
-cpg <CPG name | patterns>
Limits the scope of a tunesys operation to the named CPG(s). The specified CPGs must all be in
the same domain as the user. The -diskpct and -chunkpct options cannot be used with this
option.
-nodepct <percentage>
Control the detection of any imbalance between LD capacity allocation between nodes. If any LD
in a group is <percentage> greater than the average of the group, then the VVs associated with
that LD will be tuned. The <percentage> parameter must be between 1 and 100. The default
value is 3.
-chunkpct <percentage>
Control the detection of any imbalance in PD chunklet allocation between PDs owned by individual
nodes. If a PD has utilization of <percentage> less than the average for that device type, then
that disk can potentially be tuned. Used in conjunction with the diskpct option. <percentage>
must be between 1 and 100. The default value is 10. This option cannot be used with the -cpg
option.
-diskpct <percentage>
Specify the percentage of disks identified by the -chunkpct option over which PD chunklet level
tuning will be started. <percentage> must be between 1 and 100. The default value is 10. This
option cannot be used with the -cpg option.
-maxtasks <number>
Specify the maximum number of individual tune tasks which the tunesys command can run at a
time. <number> must be between 1 and 8. The default value is 2.
-maxchunk <number>
Specifies the maximum number of chunklets which can be moved from any PD in a single operation.
<number> must be between 1 and 8. The default value is 2.
-tunenodech
Specify that only intra-node chunklet level rebalancing should be performed.
-dr
Specify that the command is a dry run and that the system will not be tuned. The result of the
analysis can be found in the task detail log (showtask -d taskid).
-waittask
tunesys 651
Wait for all tasks created by this command to complete before returning.
-f
Do not ask for confirmation.
SPECIFIERS
None.
RESTRICTIONS
None
•This command requires a Dynamic Optimization license. Contact your local HP representative
for information.
EXAMPLES
In the following example:
•VVs will be re-balanced between nodes if there is an imbalance in space usage between
nodes of more than 5% (nodepct value).
•PD chunklets will be re-balanced on each node if any disk has usage less than 20% than the
average chunklet usage (chunkpct value).
•A maximum of 4 tune tasks will be run at a time (maxtasks value)..
•A maximum of 5 chunklets will be moved at a time (maxchunk value).
cli% tunesys -f -nodepct 5 -chunkpct 20 -maxchunk 5 -maxtasks 4
Task 999 started
NOTES
•Virtual volumes associated with CPGs which are in Adaptive Optimization configurations will
not be tuned by tunesys.
•When the -cpg option is used, if the user space and snap space of a virtual volume are from
different CPGs, then only the space associated with the named CPG will be tuned. Also, no
tunes will be generated for any virtual volumes outside of CPGs; for example, tunes created
with the createaldvv command.
•When the -cpg option is used or when the user does not have All Domain privileges, intra-node
analysis & tuning will not take place. Intra-node tunes require access across all CPGs and all
domains in order to work correctly.
•When canceling a tunesys command task, the canceltask command can return before
a cancellation is completed. Therefore, resources reserved for the task might not be immediately
available. This can prevent actions like restarting the canceled tunesys command task for
a few minutes.
•tunesys runs between 1 and 3 phases depending on the options specified.
Phase 1 - Analyzes and rebalances space usage between nodes (inter-node tuning).◦
◦Phase 2 - Analyzes and rebalances space usage between disks associated with each
node (intra-node tuning).
◦Phase 3 - LD re-layout tunes. LDs where the current characteristics differ from the associated
CPG are re-laid out to mathc the CPG.
•When tunesys is running, showtask will show the current and maximum number of phases
for the task. The steps displayed are the number of subordinate tunes that need to be run to
652 Tune Commands
complete that phase. For example, a showtask step and phase display of 1/3 4/39 indicates
that tunesys is in phase 1 of 3 (inter-node), tune 4 of 39.
•Only one tunesys task can be active at a time. A dry run can be performed while tunesys
is active.
tunesys 653
tunetpvv
DESCRIPTION
This command was deprecated in the 2.2.3 release and will be changed or removed in a future
release. Please use the tunevv command in the future. If Virtual Volumes (VVs) were created with
deprecated commands then only deprecated commands can be used to modify VVs.
The tunetpvv command allows the RAID and Availability characteristics of an exiting Thin
Provisioned Virtual Volume (TPVV) to be dynamically modified.
SYNTAX
•tunetpvv usr_cpg <CPG> [options] <VV_name>
•tunetpvv snp_cpg <CPG> [options] <VV_name>
•tunetpvv [options] <VV_name>
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
Any role granted the vv_tune right
SUBCOMMANDS
The following subcommands are only used for tuning a multi-space TPVV:
usr_cpg <CPG>
Specifies the name of the Common Provisioning Group (CPG) to which the user space of the volume
is moved.
snp_cpg <CPG>
Specifies the name of the CPG to which the snapshot space of the volume is moved.
OPTIONS
–f
Forces the command. The command completes without prompting for confirmation.
-waittask
Indicates to wait for created tasks to complete.
–dr
Specifies that the command is a dry run and that no logical disks or Virtual Volumes (VVs) are
actually tuned.
–cnt <nb_of_VV>
Specifies the number of identical VVs to tune using an integer from 1through 999. The default will
tune one VV.
The following option is only used for tuning a legacy single-space TPVV:
–cpg <CPG_name>
Specifies the CPG to which the snapshot data space is moved. This option is not valid with either
subcommands.
This option is deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
specifiers
<VV_name>
654 Tune Commands
Specifies an existing VV name.
RESTRICTIONS
•This command requires an HP 3PAR Dynamic Optimization license. Contact your local HP
3PAR representative for information.
•This command requires sufficient available physical space with the same owner or backup
node as the space it is being copied from.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to use the tunetpvv command to change the RAID type of a
TPVV (testvol) from cpg1, which is originally cpg1, which is of RAID 1.
Task 1 started.
The following example shows how to use the tunetpvv command to increase the availability
level of a TPVV (testvol). Note that there is mag availability because testvol was originally
on cpg1, which is created with option (–ha mag). To increase cage availability, create a CPG
with cage availability and tune testvol to the associated CPG.
cli% createcpg cpg3
cli% tunetpvv –cpg cpg3 testvol
Are you sure you want to tune VV ‘testvol’?
select y=yes n=no: y
Task2 started.
The following example shows how to tune multiple VVs together. Testvol.0,testvol.1 and
testvol.2 are the three VVs to be tuned:
cli% tunetpvv –cnt 3 testvol
Are you sure you want to tune VV ‘testvol’?
select y=yes n=no: y
Task 3 started.
NOTES
When canceling a tunetpvv command task, the canceltask command may return before a
cancellation is complete. Thus, resources reserved for the task may not be immediately available.
This will prevents actions like attempting another tune on the same VV. Scripts should use the
waittask command in order to ensure orderly completion of the tunetpvv command cancellation
prior to taking other actions.
tunetpvv 655
tunevv
DESCRIPTION
The tunevv command is used to change the properties of a virtual volume that was created with
either the createvv or createtpvv command by associating it with a different Common
Provisioning Group.
SYNTAX
The tunevv command uses one of the following syntax conventions:
•tunevv usr_cpg <CPG> [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•tunevv snp_cpg <CPG> [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•tunevv restart [options <arg>] <VV_name>
•tunevv rollback [options <arg>] <VV_name>
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit2
Any role granted the vv_tune right
SUBCOMMANDS
usr_cpg <CPG>
Moves the logical disks being used for user space to the specified Common Provisioning Group.
snp_cpg <CPG>
Moves the LDs being used for snapshot space to the specified Common Provisioning Group.
restart
Restarts a tunevv command call that was previously interrupted because of component failure,
or because of user initiated cancellation. This cannot be used on Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volumes.
rollback
Returns to a previously issued tunevv operation call that was interrupted. The canceltask
command needs to run before the rollback. This cannot be used on Thinly Provisioned Virtual
Volumes.
OPTIONS
–f
Forces the command. The command completes without prompting for confirmation.
–waittask
Specifies that the command will wait for any created tasks to complete.
–dr
Specifies that the command is a dry run and that no logical disks or virtual volumes are actually
tuned.
The following option is used when the <usr_cpg> and <snp_cpg> subcommands are specified:
–cnt <count>
Specifies the number of identical virtual volumes to tune using an integer from 1through 999. If
not specified, one virtual volume is tuned. If the -cnt option is specified, then the subcommands,
restart and rollback are not permitted.
2. Certain options require this additional role restriction as indicated.
656 Tune Commands
The following options can be used when the <usr_cpg> subcommand is specified:
-tpvv
Indicates that the virtual volume should be converted to a Thinly-Provisioned Virtual Volume. Cannot
be used with the -full option.
-full
Indicates that the virtual volume should be converted to a fully-provisioned virtual volume. Cannot
be used with the -tpvv option.
-keepvv <VV-name>
Indicates that the original logical disks should be saved under a new virtual volume with the given
name. Must be used with the -tpvv or -full options.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>
Specifies the name of the existing virtual volume.
RESTRICTIONS
This command requires a Dynamic Optimization license. Contact your HP representative for
information.
EXAMPLES
In the following example, the LDs used for user space are moved to CPG cpg_sn1.0_p for VV
nf_st_tp_22.0:
cli% tunevv usr_cpg cpg_sn1.0_p nf_st_tp_22.0
Task 999 started
In the following example, the logical disks used for user space are moved to CPG cpg_sn1.0_p
for virtual volume nf_st_tp_22.0 and the virtual volume is converted to a tpvv:
cli% tunevv usr_cpg cpg_sn1.0_p -tpvv nf_st_tp_22.0
Task 1000 started
NOTES
There is a limit on the amount of data that can be tuned in a tunevv command. This is equivalent
to ten 16TB virtual volumes. If this limit is exceeded, the command will be rejected.
When canceling a tunevv command task, the canceltask command can return before a
cancellation is completed. Therefore, resources reserved for the task might not be immediately
available. This can prevent actions such as restarting the canceled tunevv command task. Scripts
should use the waittask command in order to ensure orderly completion of the tunevv command
cancellation before taking other actions. See Section (page 665) for details about using the
waittask command.
When the -tpvv or -full options for the usr_cpg subcommand are specified, the tune will
automatically rollback on a failure. These options do not support virtual volumes with remote copy.
These options will only convert virtual volumes using snapshots if the -keepvv option is used, but
the snapshots will reside in the virtual volume specified by the -keepvv option.
tunevv 657
31 Update Commands
updatesnapspace
DESCRIPTION
The updatesnapspace command starts a non-cancelable task to update the snapshot space
usage accounting. The snapshot space usage displayed by showvv -snapspace is not necessarily
the current usage and the TimeCalculated column will show when it was last calculated. This
command causes the system to start calculating current snapsnot space usage. If one or more VV
names or patterns are specified, only the specified VVs will be updated. If none are specified, all
VVs will be updated.
This command will return immediately, displaying the task ID associated with the update. To wait
for completion, use the waittask command.
SYNTAX
updatesnapspace [<VV_name>...|<pattern>...]
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit
Any role granted the snapspace_update right.
OPTIONS
None.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name>...
Specifies the VV name to update. This specifier can be repeated to display the task ID about multiple
VVs. This specifier is not required on the command line. If not specified, all VVs in the system are
updated.
<pattern>...
Specifies that the VVs matching the specified glob-style pattern is updated. This specifier can be
repeated. This specifier is not required. See “Glob-Style Pattern” (page 12) for more information.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the actual snapshot space used by all VVs:
cli% updatesnapspace
Task 2 has been started to calculate actual space usage.
Issuing a waittask command displays the information about the task in process or if it has been
processed:
cli% waittask 2
Task 2 done
658 Update Commands
The following example displays the task information using –d <task_id>:
cli% showtask –d 2
Id Type Name Status Phase Step ----------StartTime-----
---- ---------FinishTime---------
2 snapspace_accounting ss_accounting Done 0/0 0/0 Thu Sep 22 18:43:35 PDT
2005 Thu Sep 22 18:43:35 PDT 2005
Detailed status:
{Thu Sep 22 18:43:35 PDT 2005} Created task.
{Thu Sep 22 18:43:35 PDT 2005} Started snapshot usage data collection process for
VVs
{Thu Sep 22 18:43:35 PDT 2005} Updated snapshot usage data for VV emaildb
{Thu Sep 22 18:43:35 PDT 2005} Updated snapshot usage data for VV www
{Thu Sep 22 18:43:35 PDT 2005} Updated snapshot usage data for VV snapname
{Thu Sep 22 18:43:35 PDT 2005} Finished snapshot usage data collection process
NOTES
•If one or more VV names or patterns are specified, only the specified VVs are updated. If VV
names are not specified, all VVs are updated.
•To check snapshot space usage, use the showvv -s command.
•See “showtask” (page 490) for more information.
•See “waittask” (page 665) for more information.
updatesnapspace 659
updatevv
DESCRIPTION
The updatevv command updates a snapshot Virtual Volume (VV) with a new snapshot.
SYNTAX
updatevv [options] <VV_name | VV_set>...
AUTHORITY
Super, Edit, Browse
Any role granted the vv_update right
OPTIONS
–ro
Specifies that if the specified VV (<VV_name>) is a read/write snapshot the snapshot’s read-only
parent volume is also updated with a new snapshot if the parent volume is not a member of a
virtual volume set. If this option is not specified, the VV, as indicated with the <VV_name> specifier,
is replaced by a new snapshot. See Notes for additional information.
–anyid
This option has been deprecated.
–f
Specifies that the command is forced. If this option is not used, the command requires confirmation
before proceeding with its operation.
SPECIFIERS
<VV_name | VV_set>...
Specifies the name(s) of the snapshot virtual volume(s) or virtual volume set(s) to be updated. They
must be of same type (read-only or read/write). When a <VV_set> or multiple <VV_name>’s are
specified group-consistent snapshots are taken. The virtual volume set name must start with set:.
See creategroupsv for more information.
RESTRICTIONS
For each snapshot VV name specified, the updatevv command first verifies in your Access Control
List (ACL) that you have permission to run the updatevv command on the specified VVs. For
information on viewing and setting your ACL, see “showuseracl” (page 499) and “setuseracl”
(page 342).
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the snapshot update of snapshot VV avvro:
cli% updatevv –f avvro
Updating VV avvro
660 Update Commands
NOTES
•The updatevv command attempts to use the same VV IDs for new snapshots as the snapshots
that they replace so that the new VV have the same World Wide Names (WWNs) as the
originals (this might be important for hosts using the VV WWN to identify the VV). However,
between the removal of the original snapshot and the creation of the new snapshot it is possible
that another VV might have been created with the same ID causing the creation of the new
snapshot to fail. If the –anyid option is specified, the command then creates the snapshot
with any available ID.
Because new VVs, by default, are assigned the lowest ID available, VVs that are updated with the
updatevv command should be assigned large IDs (using the –i option to the createaldvv
command) to reduce the likelihood that their IDs are taken during the updatevv command
operation.
•After the updatevv command is executed, all VLUNs associated with the specified VV name
are removed. The command then updates the snapshots as follows:
◦If the –ro option is not specified, or if the specified VV name is a read-only snapshot,
the command removes the snapshot, and creates a new snapshot of the same name and
of the same parent.
◦If the –ro option is specified and the specified VV name is a read/write snapshot, the
VV is removed and its read-only parent is replaced by a new read-only snapshot of the
same name. Then a new read/write snapshot is created of the new read-only snapshot.
If the read-only parent has multiple read/write snapshots, the updatevv operation will
fail because the read-only parent volume cannot be removed.
The command then re-creates all the VLUNs associated with the specified VV name.
•Running concurrent updatevv sessions for VV sets or list of VVs which have common VVs
can have unpredictable results.
updatevv 661
32 Upgrade Commands
upgradecage
DESCRIPTION
The upgradecage command downloads new firmware into the specified cage.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the upgradecage command can be one of the following:
•upgradecage [options <arg>] <cagename>...
•upgradecage [options <arg>] -a
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
Any role granted the cage_upgrade right
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–a
Specifies that all drive cages are upgraded with new firmware (<cagename> should not be
specified).
–noA
Do not upgrade the A loop. This option is only valid for DC1 cages.
–noB
Do not upgrade the B loop. This option is only valid for DC1 cages.
-skiptest
Skips the 10 second per PD diagnostic test normally completed after each cage upgrade.
–model <model>
Only upgrade cages of specified model. Use showcage command to find out the correct model
for the cages. The model can be DC1, DC2, DC3, or DC4.
–file <fpname>
Use firmware in file <fpname>, where <fpname> is the full path name of the file on the node.
The default is to use the firmware that is marked current in the firmware database (see the
showfirmwaredb command).
–minlevel <revlevel>
Minimum firmware level that the cage firmware must be at for the upgrade to be allowed. This
option is deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
–maxlevel <revlevel>
Maximum firmware level that the cage firmware must be at for the upgrade to be allowed. This
option is deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
SPECIFIERS
<cagename>
Specifies the name displayed in the Name column using the showcage command.
662 Upgrade Commands
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays a cage with firmware level of 4.41 upgrading to 4.42:
cli% upgradecage –a
Upgrading cage cage0 cpuA from rev 1.46 to revision in file
/opt/tpd/fw/cage/dc2/lbod_fw.bin-2.05.
Upgrading cage cage1 cpuA from rev 1.46 to revision in file
/opt/tpd/fw/cage/dc2/lbod_fw.bin-2.05.
Upgrading cage cage2 cpuA from rev 1.46 to revision in file
/opt/tpd/fw/cage/dc2/lbod_fw.bin-2.05.
Upgrading cage cage3 cpuA from rev 03 to revision in file
/opt/tpd/fw/cage/dc3/dc3_fw.bin-04.
Skipping cage cage4 cpuA already up to date at rev 2.05
Skipping cage cage5 cpuA & cpuB already up to date at rev 04
NOTES
•Before executing the upgradecage command, issue the showcage command to obtain the
names of the drive cages in the system.
•When the upgradecage command is issued, the drive cage becomes temporarily unavailable.
The cage automatically restarts following the firmware update, and may briefly disrupt the
loops during the restart. It is recommended showcage be used approximately one minute
after the update completes to ensure both loops to the cage are available again.
upgradecage 663
upgradepd
DESCRIPTION
The upgradepd command upgrades the Physical Disk (PD) firmware.
SYNTAX
upgradepd [-f] [-skiptest] {-a | -w <WWN>... | <PD_ID>...}
AUTHORITY
Super, Service
Any role granted the pd_upgrade right
NOTE: You need access to all domains in order to run this command.
OPTIONS
–f
Upgrades the PD firmware without requiring confirmation.
–skiptest
Skips the 10 second diagnostic test normally completed after each PD upgrade.
–a
Specifies that all PDs with valid IDs and whose firmware is not current are upgraded. If this option
is not specified, then either the –w option or PD_ID specifier must be issued on the command line.
–w <WWN>...
Specifies that the firmware of either one or more PDs, identified by their WWNs, is upgraded. If
this option is not specified, then either the –aoption or PD_ID specifier must be issued on the
command line.
SPECIFIERS
<PD_ID>...
Specifies that the firmware of either one or more PDs identified by their IDs (PD_ID) is upgraded.
If this specifier is not used, then the –a option or –w option must be issued on the command line.
RESTRICTIONS
Access to all domains is required to run this command.
EXAMPLES
The following example displays the upgrade of all PDs:
cli% upgradepd –a
NOTES
•PDs can be upgraded while I/O is occurring.
•If a disk with RAID-0 chunklets is upgraded, I/O to those chunklets at the time of the upgrade
results in data loss. This is not applicable to other RAID types.
•Specify the –w option when upgrading unadmitted PDs.
664 Upgrade Commands
33 Wait Command
waittask
DESCRIPTION
The waittask command asks the CLI to wait for a task to complete before proceeding. The
command automatically notifies you when the specified task is finished.
SYNTAX
The syntax for the waittask command can be one of the following:
waittask –v <task_ID>
waittask [<task_ID>...]
AUTHORITY
Super, Service, Edit, Browse
Any role granted the task_wait right
OPTIONS
–v <task_ID>
Displays the detailed status of the task specified by <task_ID> as it executes. When the task
completes, this command exits.
–q
Quiet; do not report the end state of the tasks, only wait for them to exit.
SPECIFIERS
[<task_ID>...]
Indicates one or more tasks to wait for using their task IDs. When no task IDs are specified, the
command waits for all tasks to complete.
RESTRICTIONS
None.
EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to wait for a task using the task ID. When successful, the
command returns only after the task is complete.
cli% waittask 1
Task 1 done
NOTES
•See the HP 3PAR Command Line Interface Administrator’s Manual for additional information
and examples regarding task management and task management commands.
•This command returns an error if any of the tasks it is waiting for fail.
waittask 665
34 Support and Other Resources
Contacting HP
For worldwide technical support information, see the HP support website:
http://www.hp.com/support
Before contacting HP, collect the following information:
•Product model names and numbers
•Technical support registration number (if applicable)
•Product serial numbers
•Error messages
•Operating system type and revision level
•Detailed questions
Specify the type of support you are requesting:
Support requestHP 3PAR storage system
StoreServ 7000 StorageHP 3PAR StoreServ 7200, 7400, and 7450 Storage
systems
3PAR or 3PAR StorageHP 3PAR StoreServ 10000 Storage systems
HP 3PAR T-Class storage systems
HP 3PAR F-Class storage systems
HP 3PAR documentation
See:For information about:
The Single Point of Connectivity Knowledge for HP
Storage Products (SPOCK) website:
Supported hardware and software platforms
http://www.hp.com/storage/spock
The HP 3PAR StoreServ Storage site:Locating HP 3PAR documents
http://www.hp.com/go/3par
To access HP 3PAR documents, click the Support link for
your product.
HP 3PAR storage system software
HP 3PAR StoreServ Storage Concepts GuideStorage concepts and terminology
HP 3PAR Management Console User's GuideUsing the HP 3PAR Management Console (GUI) to configure
and administer HP 3PAR storage systems
HP 3PAR Command Line Interface Administrator’s
Manual
Using the HP 3PAR CLI to configure and administer storage
systems
HP 3PAR Command Line Interface ReferenceCLI commands
HP 3PAR System Reporter Software User's GuideAnalyzing system performance
HP 3PAR Host Explorer User’s GuideInstalling and maintaining the Host Explorer agent in order
to manage host configuration and connectivity information
HP 3PAR CIM API Programming ReferenceCreating applications compliant with the Common Information
Model (CIM) to manage HP 3PAR storage systems
666 Support and Other Resources
See:For information about:
HP 3PAR-to-3PAR Storage Peer Motion GuideMigrating data from one HP 3PAR storage system to another
HP 3PAR Secure Service Custodian Configuration Utility
Reference
Configuring the Secure Service Custodian server in order to
monitor and control HP 3PAR storage systems
HP 3PAR Remote Copy Software User’s GuideUsing the CLI to configure and manage HP 3PAR Remote
Copy
HP 3PAR Upgrade Pre-Planning GuideUpdating HP 3PAR operating systems
HP 3PAR F-Class, T-Class, and StoreServ 10000 Storage
Troubleshooting Guide
Identifying storage system components, troubleshooting
information, and detailed alert information
HP 3PAR Policy Server Installation and Setup GuideInstalling, configuring, and maintaining the HP 3PAR Policy
Server HP 3PAR Policy Server Administration Guide
HP 3PAR documentation 667
See:For information about:
Planning for HP 3PAR storage system setup
Hardware specifications, installation considerations, power requirements, networking options, and cabling information
for HP 3PAR storage systems
HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000 Storage Site Planning ManualHP 3PAR 7200, 7400, and 7450 storage systems
HP 3PAR StoreServ 7450 Storage Site Planning Manual
HP 3PAR StoreServ 10000 Storage Physical Planning
Manual
HP 3PAR 10000 storage systems
HP 3PAR StoreServ 10000 Storage Third-Party Rack
Physical Planning Manual
Installing and maintaining HP 3PAR 7200, 7400, and 7450 storage systems
HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000 Storage Installation GuideInstalling 7200, 7400, and 7450 storage systems and
initializing the Service Processor HP 3PAR StoreServ 7450 Storage Installation Guide
HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000 Storage SmartStart Software
User’s Guide
HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000 Storage Service GuideMaintaining, servicing, and upgrading 7200, 7400, and
7450 storage systems HP 3PAR StoreServ 7450 Storage Service Guide
HP 3PAR StoreServ 7000 Storage Troubleshooting GuideTroubleshooting 7200, 7400, and 7450 storage systems
HP 3PAR StoreServ 7450 Storage Troubleshooting Guide
HP 3PAR Service Processor Software User GuideMaintaining the Service Processor
HP 3PAR Service Processor Onsite Customer Care
(SPOCC) User's Guide
HP 3PAR host application solutions
HP 3PAR Recovery Manager Software for Oracle User's
Guide
Backing up Oracle databases and using backups for disaster
recovery
HP 3PAR Recovery Manager Software for Microsoft
Exchange 2007 and 2010 User's Guide
Backing up Exchange databases and using backups for
disaster recovery
HP 3PAR Recovery Manager Software for Microsoft SQL
Server User’s Guide
Backing up SQL databases and using backups for disaster
recovery
HP 3PAR Management Plug-in and Recovery Manager
Software for VMware vSphere User's Guide
Backing up VMware databases and using backups for
disaster recovery
HP 3PAR VSS Provider Software for Microsoft Windows
User's Guide
Installing and using the HP 3PAR VSS (Volume Shadow Copy
Service) Provider software for Microsoft Windows
HP 3PAR Storage Replication Adapter for VMware
vCenter Site Recovery Manager Implementation Guide
Best practices for setting up the Storage Replication Adapter
for VMware vCenter
HP 3PAR Storage Replication Adapter for VMware
vCenter Site Recovery Manager Troubleshooting Guide
Troubleshooting the Storage Replication Adapter for VMware
vCenter Site Recovery Manager
HP 3PAR VAAI Plug-in Software for VMware vSphere
User's Guide
Installing and using vSphere Storage APIs for Array
Integration (VAAI) plug-in software for VMware vSphere
668 Support and Other Resources
Typographic conventions
Table 8 Document conventions
ElementConvention
Bold text •Keys that you press
•Text you typed into a GUI element, such as a text box
•GUI elements that you click or select, such as menu items, buttons,
and so on
Monospace text •File and directory names
•System output
•Code
•Commands, their arguments, and argument values
<Monospace text in angle brackets> •Code variables
•Command variables
Bold monospace text •Commands you enter into a command line interface
•System output emphasized for scannability
WARNING! Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death, or in
irreversible damage to data or to the operating system.
CAUTION: Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.
NOTE: Provides additional information.
Required
Indicates that a procedure must be followed as directed in order to achieve a functional and
supported implementation based on testing at HP.
HP 3PAR branding information
•The server previously referred to as the "InServ" is now referred to as the "HP 3PAR StoreServ
Storage system."
•The operating system previously referred to as the "InForm OS" is now referred to as the "HP
3PAR OS."
•The user interface previously referred to as the "InForm Management Console (IMC)" is now
referred to as the "HP 3PAR Management Console."
•All products previously referred to as “3PAR” products are now referred to as "HP 3PAR"
products.
Typographic conventions 669
35 Documentation feedback
HP is committed to providing documentation that meets your needs. To help us improve the
documentation, send any errors, suggestions, or comments to Documentation Feedback
(docsfeedback@hp.com). Include the document title and part number, version number, or the URL
when submitting your feedback.
670 Documentation feedback
Index
Symbols
(brackets) optional elements, 11
(ellipsis), multiuse option specifier, 11
(parentheses), grouped elements, 11
A
access
user information about, 497
active VLUN, 503
add
virtual volume to group, 51
addsnmpmgr, 42, 640
admin volume, 484
admithw, 44
admitpd, 46
admitrcopylink, 48
admitrcopytarget, 50
admitrcopyvv, 51
alerts
removing from system, 228
service, registered SNMP software for, 473
system
removing preregistered SNMP software, 244
status of, 350
status of, setting, 271
using addsnmpmgr for, 42
API (CIM), 579
arg (argument) specific option variable, 11
argument (arg)., 11
authentication
parameters, 274
B
backing up virtual volumes, 137
battery
setting information about, 278
status of, 354
brackets optional elements, 11
C
cages, new firmware, downloading into, 662
canceltask, 55
CBIOS version, 23
characters, length limits, 12
checkhealth, 57
checkpassword, 61
checkpd, 63
checkport, 65
checksnmp, 70
checkvv, 71
chunklets
lists of
moving, 210
spares, removing from, 248
moving from physical disk to physical disk, 219
moving to spare, 223
spares, 479
allocating resources as, 135
moving to, 223
removing from lists of, 248
statistics collection mode, setting, 331
statistics, timed loop display, 588
CIM API, 633
CLI (command line interface)
syntax for, 11
clusters, shutting down, 533
cmd (command) operations
syntax for, 11
command (cmd)., 11
command line interface (CLI)., 11
commands
See individual commands by name, 48
stoprcopy, 461
Common Provisioning Group (CPG), length limit, 12
common provisioning groups
creating, 110
displaying, 368
modifying, 286
removing, 231
compactcpg, 75, 83, 170, 171
compactld, 77
configuration details, display, 460
controlencryption, 79
controliscsiport, 81
controlmag, 75, 83, 170, 171
controlpd, 85
controlport, 87, 179
conventions
text symbols, 669
copying virtual volumes, 158
CPU speed, 23
CPU statistics, 594
create
group, 127
link to remote storage server, 48
createald, 95
createaldvv, 99
createaocfg, 105
createavv, 107
createcpg, 110
createdomain, 115
creategroupsv, 117
creategroupvvcopy, 119
createhost, 121
createhostset, 123
createld, 125
creatercopygroup, 127
creatercopytarget, 129
createsched, 131
createsnmpuser, 134
createspare to, 135
671
createsv to, 137
createtemplate, 139
createtpvv, 145
createuser, 149
createvlun, 151
createvv, 154
createvvcopy, 158
createvvset, 162
creating domains, 115
creating new system hosts, 121
creating new users, 149
creating provisioned virtual volumes, 154
creating templates, 139
D
data services
starting on logical disk, 580
virtual volume, starting, 585
databases, current firmware levels, displaying, 384
date and time
for system nodes, 373
setting nodes, 291
definitions, removing, 46, 164
deleting VLUNs, 256
designate site as primary or secondary, 582
disks
logical
chunklets, displaying information about, 400
creating, 95
creating virtual volumes in, 154
data services, starting on, 580
I/O statistics, 602
information about, displaying, 394
system pool, removing from, 238
physical
allocatable, marking as, 311
chunklets, moving to another, 219
creating definitions of, 46
definitions, removing, 164
firmware, upgrading, 664
I/O statistics, 607
information about, displaying, 420
moving to spare, 213
spinning up or down, 85
virtual volumes, mapping information, 437
replacing, 83
dismisspd, 164
dismissrcopylink, 165
dismissrcopytarget, 167
dismissrcopyvv, 168
display
configuration details, 460
statistics for group, 619
displaying, 431
displaying administration network interface status and
configuration, 407
documentation
providing feedback on, 670
domains
creating, 115
drive cages
identifying, 206
information about, displaying, 361
drive magazines
taking on- or off- loop, 83
E
EEPROM log information, 378
enable Remote Copy, 582
enabling physical disks, 46, 164
event logs
system, displaying of, 381
F
Fibre Channel ports
arbitrated loops, 450
controlling, 87
firmware
levels of, 384
new, downloading into cages, 662
physical disks, upgrading, 664
specific cages, downloading into, 662
freespace, 75, 83, 170, 171
G
group
add virtual volume to, 51
create, 127
display statistics for, 619
remove, 240
remove virtual volume from, 168
growaldvv, 75, 83, 170, 171
growavv, 176
growth increment (CPG), 286
growth limit (CPG), 287
growth warning (CPG), 287
growtpvv, 178
growvv, 87, 179
H
histch, 180
histld, 183
histograms
access times, logical disks, 183
service times
displaying, 180
for ports, 191
physical disks, of, 186
VLUNs, 197
histpd, 186
histport, 191
histvlun, 197
histvv, 201
host name, length limit, 12
host sees VLUN template, 151
hosts
creating new system, 121
removing, 235
672 Index
system configuration, displaying, 386
VLUN template conflicts and, 122
I
I/O statistics
logical disks, 602
physical disks, 607
ports, 612
virtual volumes, 629
identify primary and secondary storage servers, 129
identifying drive cages, 206
IP address, specifying SNMP additions, 42
K
kernel build text, 23
kernel version number, 23
L
length limits, 12
link
create to remote storage server, 48
remove, 165
link utilization statistics, 606
LIP, 88
locatecage, 206
locatesys, 209
logical disk name, length limit, 12
logical disks
access times, histogram of, 183
check data on, 59
creating, 95
creating virtual volumes in, 154
data services, starting on, 580
displaying mapping information, 358
I/O statistics, 602
information about, displaying, 394
system pool, removing from, 238
logs, event
system, displaying of, 381
loop initialization, 88
LUN host attachments, virtual volumes, statistics for, 625
M
mapping, virtual volumes
on physical disks, 437
region information on, 521
matched set VLUN template, 151
movech, 210
movechtodomain, 223
movechtospare, 213
movepd, 215
movepdtospare, 217
moverelocpd, 219
moving chunklet lists, 210
moving domains, 223
moving physical disks to spare, 213
multiuse option specifier., 11
N
Nearline drives, 174
new users, creating, 149
nodenames, 23
nodes
CPU statistics for, 594
date and time, setting, 291
EEPROM log information, 378
system, shutting down, 530
O
operating environment status, 417
option specifier, 11
optional elements., 11
options
command line element, 11
P
parentheses grouped elements, 11
passwords
setting, 309
SNMP
removing access, 246
updating access, 326
persistent repository, 484
physical disks
allocatable, marking as, 311
displaying mapping information, 358
firmware, upgrading, 664
I/O statistics, 607
information about, displaying, 420
moving chunklets to another, 219
moving to spare, 213
spinning up or down, 85
virtual volumes, mapping information, 437
port presents VLUN template, 151
ports
Fibre Channel
arbitrated loops, 450
controlling, 87
histograms of service times for, 191
I/O statistics, 612
PR (persistent repository), 484
preserved data, 431
primary site
designate, 582
primary storage server
identify, 129
promotesv, 225
promotevvcopy, 227
R
raw space alert, 333
Registered State Change Notification (RSCN), 88
Remote Copy
enable, 582
ports, 87
stop, 636
remove
673
group, 240
link, 165
target designation, 242
virtual volume from group, 168
removealert, 228
removeaocfg, 230
removecpg, 231
removedomain, 233
removedomainset, 234
removehost, 235
removehostset, 237
removeld, 238
removercopygroup, 240
removercopytarget, 242
removesched, 243
removesnmpmgr, 244
removesnmppw, 246
removespare, 248
removesshkey, 250
removetask, 251
removetemplate, 253
removeuser, 254
removeuserconn, 255
removevlun, 256
removevv, 258
removing hosts, 235
removing users, 254
removing virtual volumes, 258
replacing drive magazines or disk drives, 83
RSCN, 88
S
SCSI-3 reservation types, 469
secondary site
designate, 582
secondary storage server
identify, 129
service times
chunklet timed loops, histograms of, 180
physical disks, histograms of, 186
servicecage, 261
servicehost, 263
servicemag, 265
setalert, 271
setaocfg, 272
setauthparam, 274
setbattery, 278
setcage, 280
setcim, 282
setclienv, 284
setcpg, 286
setdate, 291
setdomain, 293
setdomainset, 295
sethost, 296
sethostset, 299
setnet, 302
setnode, 306
setpassword, 309
setpd, 311
setqos, 312
setrcopygroup, 314
setrcopytarget, 319
setsched, 322
setsnmpmgr, 324
setsnmppw, 326
setsshkey, 329
setstatch, 331
setstatpdch, 332
setsys, 333
setsysmgr, 336
settemplate, 339
setting the administration network interface configuration,
302
setting the system node properties, 306
setting the system NTP server, 308
setuser, 341
setuseracl, 342
setvv, 344
setvvset, 348
setwsapi, 349
showalert, 350
showaocfg, 352
showauthparam, 353
showbattery, 354
showblock, 358
showcage, 361
showcim, 365
showclienv, 367
showcpg, 368
showdate, 373
showdomain, 374
showdomainset, 376
showeeprom, 376
showeventlog, 381
showfirmwaredb, 384
showhost, 386
showhostset, 389
showiscsisession, 392
showld, 394
showldch, 400
showldmap, 404
showlicense, 405
shownet, 407
shownode, 409
shownodeenv, 417
showpatch, 419
showpd, 420
showpdata, 431
showpdch, 432
showpdvv, 437
showport, 440
showportarp, 449
showportdev, 450
showportisns, 453
showportlesb, 454
showqos, 458
showrcopy, 460
674 Index
showrctransport, 464
showrsv, 469
showsched, 471
showsnmpmgr, 473
showsnmppw, 474
showspace, 476
showspare, 479
showsys, 481
showsysmgr, 486
showtarget, 488
showtask, 490
showtemplate, 494
showtoc, 495
showtocgen, 496
showuser, 497
showuseracl, 499
showuserconn, 500
showversion, 502
showvlun, 503
showvv, 506
showvvmap, 521
showvvpd, 523
showvvset, 527
showwsapi, 529
shutdownnode, 530
shutdownsys, 533
shutting down system nodes, 530
snapshot volumes (copies), creating, 137
SNMP access
removing passwords for, 246, 585
updating, 326
SNMP software
for alerts, 473
removing preregistered, 244
spares, allocating chunklet resources as, 135
spec (specifier) required command line element, used with,
11
specifier (spec)., 11
sraomoves, 535
srcpgspace, 537
srstalink, 564
srstatqos, 570
start-up state information, system manager, 486
startao, 577
startcim, 579
startld, 580
startnoderescue, 581
startrcopy, 582
startrcopygroup, 583
starttask, 585
startup date for system manager, setting, 336
startvv, 585
startwsapi, 587
statch, 588
statcmp, 592
statcpu, 594
statiscsi, 598
statiscsisession, 600
statistics
cache memory page, 592
chunklet collection mode, 331
chunklets, timed loop display, 588
CPU, for all nodes, 594
I/O
logical disk, 602
physical disks, 607
virtual volumes, 629
I/O port, 612
link utilization, 606
virtual volumes
I/O, 629
LUN host attachments, 625
statistics, display for group, 619
statld, 602
statlink, 606
statpd, 607
statport, 612
statqos, 616
statrcopy, 619
status of system alerts, 350
statvlun, 625
statvv, 629
stopcim, 633
stopping Remote Copy, 636
stoprcopy, 634
stoprcopy command, 461
stoprcopygroup, 636
stopwsapi, 638
storage server, information about, 502
subcmd (subcommand) operations, 11
subcommand (subcmd)., 11
symbols in text, 669
syncrcopy to, 42, 640
system alerts
removing, 228
setting, 271
status of, 350
system configuration, displaying for hosts, 386
system information, 23
system manager
start-up state information, 486
startup date, setting, 336
system nodes
date and time, 373
shutting down, 530
system resources, summary table of, 495
system table of contents, summary of, 495
T
table of contents generation number, 496
target designation, remove, 242
targets, unrecognized, 488
temperature status, 417
template name, length limit, 12
template VLUN, 503
templates
creating, 139
text symbols, 669
675
Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volume (TPVV), length limit, 12
time and date
for system nodes, 373
setting nodes, 291
traps
removing preregistered SNMP software, 244
using addsnmpmgr for, 42
tunealdvv, 642
tunepd, 647
tunetpvv, 651
tunevv, 656
U
updatesnapspace, 658
updatevv, 660
upgradecage, 662, 665
upgradepd, 664
upgrades, firmware levels, 384
upgrading physical disk firmware, 664
users
changing passwords, 309
information about, 497
new, creating, 149
removing, 254
V
validity checks
logical disk data, 59
of virtual volumes, 71
VCN, 88
verifying
controlport command success, 93
physical disk admittance, 47
physical disk status, 311
virtual copy names, length limit, 12
virtual volume names, length limit, 12
virtual volumes
backing up, 137
copy (snapshot) of, 137
copying to another virtual volume, 158
creating, 99
creating from logical disk, 154
creating VLUN of, 151
data services, starting on, 246, 585
displaying mapping information, 358
histograms of service time, 201
I/O statistics, 629
information about, displaying distribution of, 39
information about, displaying of, 506
LUN statistics, 629
physical disk mapping information, 437
region mapping information, 521
removing, 258
statistics
I/O, 629
LUN host attachments, 625
validity checks of, 71
VLUN change notification, 88
VLUN Change Notification (VCN), 444
VLUN templates
host sees, 151
matched set, 151
port presents, 151
VLUNs
active, 503
deleting, 256
information about, 503
of virtual volumes, creating, 151
service time, histograms of, 197
template, 503
template conflicts in, 122
voltage status, 417
W
waittask, 662, 665
676 Index

Navigation menu